SIONE 


OFFICi 


LIBRARY 


OF  THE 


University  of  California, 


Class 


Noncommissioned 
Officers'  Manual 


By  Captain  James  A.  Moss 

241/1  U.  S.  Infaiit7-y 


(Printed  August,  1909) 


Being  a  manual  consisting  of  a  compilation  in  con- 
venient, handy  form,  of  matters  of  a  practical,  worth- 
knowing  nature — things  of  value  and  assistance  to  the 
inexperienced  as  well  as  to  the  experienced  noncom- 
missioned officer. 

For  Sale  By 
THE  U.  S.  INFANTRY    ASSOCIATION,    Wash- 
ington, D.  C,  ^W  THE  POST  EXCHANGE, 
Fort  Wm.  McKinley,  Philippine  Islands. 


mBkL 


Press  of 

The  George  Banta  Publishing  Company 

Menasha,  Wisconsin 


Copyrighted  igog,  by  James  A.  Moss 


INTRODUCTION 


By 


Major-General  J.   P.   Bell 
Chief  of  Staff ,  U.  S.  Ar?ny 


'^brZ5' 


OF 


THE 


^N/VERS/TY 


WAR    DEPARTMENT 

OFFICE  OF  CHIEF  OF  STAFF 
WASHINGTON 


^>^ 


OF 


uforn^k^ 


A^  V^rc'^. 


204139 


^/^■^..^^^/C^  u?      l^t^--^ 


C"^^ 


^2:- 


I 


"f 


^i^^x- 


y- 


Jt^,^^  <0^^.,i2.^2L^^ 


C4^ 


J^tM>C^oX^-CrhX^ 


• 


EXPLANATORY 

This  manual  consists  of  two  parts — the  book  proper  and 
the  supplement  pamphlet.  The  former  contains  matter  not 
subject  to  change  by  War  Department  orders  or  Army  Regu- 
lations, while  the  latter  consists  of  matter  subject  to  such 
change. 

The  chapters  in  the  supplement  are  numbered  and  en- 
titled,  and  the  paragraphs  are  numbered,  so  as  to  correspond 
to  the  same  subjects  in  the  book  proper. 

A  new  up-to-date  supplement  is  published  once  a  year. 


INDEX 


Letters  refer  to  paragraphs  and  numbers  to  pages. 
"Sup."   means   Supplement. 


Abbreviations: 

In  indorsements  and  correspondence 

book   79 

Of   titles    156C 

On  muster  and  pay  rolls   

Sup.   Chap.  XI,  Par-.  23 

Address,  forms  of 49 

Addressing   communications   to    office 

not  to  individual    155A 

Addressing  N.   C.  Os.,  custom 378A 

"Adjutant    General,"   not   hyphenated.  156D 
Adjutants'  office.     See  "Sergeant-Major." 
Advance  Guard — 

General    principles    238 

Problems      244 

Allowances,    Sup.    Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   66 

Ambulances,  loading  on   cars    287 

Animals : 

Care   of    289 

Loading  on  cars    286 

Pack,    capacity    412 

Annotation    78B 

Appearance  and  deportment 46 

Appointment  of  N.  C.  Os.,  (Sup.  Chap. 
XXIII). 

Band  N.   C.  Os Par.   S2b 

Coast  Arty  N.  C.  Staff Par.  51 

Company   Par.   53 

First  Sergt Par.  55  b ;  61 

Hosoital   Corps    48 

Indian   Scouts    Par.   65 

Lance   corporals    Par.   48a 

Post  N.  C.   Staff   Par.   50 

Q.    M.    Sergt.,    Co Par.   61 

Regimental  N.  C.  Staff Par.  52 

Signal   Corps    Par.   49 

Stable  Sergt    Par.  61 

Arm-racks    20  footnote ;  42  A 

Arms — 

Care  of  rifle   and  bayonet    56 

General    suggestions   on    care   of .  .  .  .    58A 
Taking    apart    57B 

ARMY    REGULATIONS 
Pars,   affecting 

Band  N.   C.  Os 

Sup.   Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   52a 

Chiefs   of   Squads    

Sup.   Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   54 

Coast   Arty.    N.    C.    Staff    

Sup.   Chap.   XXIII,  Par.  51 

Company  N.    C.    Os . 

Sup.   Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   53 

Co.    Q.    M.    Sergt 

Sup.    Chap.    V.    Chap.    XIV 

First  sergeants.   Sup.   Chap.   I.   Par.    1  ; 

Sup.    Chap.   XXIII,    Pars.    55,   55b 

and  61. 


General    noncommissioned    staff    .  . 
.....Sup.    Chap.    XXIII,    Par.    47 

Hospital    Corps    

.. Sup.   Chap.  XXIII,  Par.  48 

Indian   Scouts    

Sup.   Chap.  XXIII,   Par.   65 

Lance  corporals.  Sup.   Chap.  XXIII, 
Pars.   48a   and   56 

Mess    Sergt 

Sup.    Chap.    XXIII,    Par.    60 

Noncommissioned    officers    

Sup.    Chap.    XXIII,    Par.    47 

Ordnance   Sergt 

Sup.   Chap.  X.   Par.   38 

Post  N.   C.   Staff   

Sup.    Chap.    XXIII,    Par.    50 

Post  Q.   M.   Sergt 

Sup.   Chap.   VIII,   Par.   24 

Regimental    N.    C.    Staff    

Sup.  Chap.  XXIII,  Par.  52 

Sergeant-Major     

Sup.   Chap.  VII,  Par.    16 

Signal     corps      

Sup.    Chap.    XXIII,    Par.    49 

Paragraphs    modified    

Sup.   Chap.   XXIII,   Par.  82 

Paragraph  most   violated,    157A; 

Sup.   Chap.   XI,   Par.   42 

Army  slang   384 

"Army  Toast  to  Bride"    383F 

Army  Transport   Service  Regulations, 

Sup.    Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   98 

Arrest Sup.   Chap.  XXIII,  Par.  70 

Articles  of  War — 

Reading   of   to   command    407 

Reading  of  to  recruits    45 

Synopsis    of    395 

Attention,   calling  and   inviting    154C 


Baggage    allowance    

Sup.    Chap.  XXIII,   Par.   66 

Bands    381 

Baptizing  under  colors   383G 

Basket  system    90 

Battalion   N.   C.   Staff    

Sup.   Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   52 

Bayonet,   care   of    57A 

BLANK   FORMS 
Adjutant's  office — 

Improvised     95 

War  Dept.,  Sup.   Chap.  VII.  Par.  19 
Company — 

Improvised    30 

War    Dept.    Sup.    Chap.    IV,    Par.  10 
Extra   and   Special    Duty    113 


INDEX. 


Ordnance  Sergt.,   Sup.   Chap.  X,  Par.   37 

Pass    lists    109 

Post    Commsv    Sergt 

Sup.    Chap.    VIII,    Par.    34 

Q.   M.  office — 

Improvised 128 

War   Dept.,    Sup.    Chap.    VIII,    Par.  29 
Blued   and  browned   parts  of  arms....    57C 

Briefing   76E;    158  A   (3) 

Brooms  and   brushes,   allowance    

Sup.    Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   67 

Buttons,   care  of    52 

"By   command"    154B 

"By   order"    154B 


"Calling   attention  to"    154C 

Calls,   words  to    383 

Camping    277;    283 

Card-record   system    75    (footnote) 

CARE   OF— 

Animals     289 

Arms     56 

Ornaments    52C 

Bayonet     57A 

Buttons     52C 

Chevrons  and  .stripes ; 52B 

Clothing     52 

Feet     304 

Harness 289 

Haversack 59 A 

Health     300 

Khaki     53A 

Mess  kit    59A 

Rifle     56 

Property  by 

Ordnance    Sergt    153 

Post    Commsv.    Sergt 138 

Post  O.  M.   Sergt 118 

Russet    leather    58B 

Shelter-tent      59A 

Shoes    53 

Wagons      289 

Cars,   capacity    412 

Case,    file    93D.. 

Cavalry   Drill   Regulations    

Sup.   Chap.   XXIII,   Par.  91 

Certificate,  form  of   - — 

Challenge   table    184 

Charges  on  muster  and  pay  rolls  against 

enlisted    men    

Sup.    Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   81 

Check   on   communications    62D 

"Cheers,   the  three"    393 

Chevrons  and   stripes,   care  of    52B 

Chief    Musician,    customs    affecting.  .  .381 

Chiefs  of  Squads 21 

Sup.   Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   54 

Christening  under  color 383G 

Cleanliness,    personal     48 

Clerks,    Adjutant's    office    65 

Clothing 

Account   34   (9) 

Care   of    52 

Record  of  sizes    35   (10) 


Coast  Arty.   N.   C.  Staff,  appropriate 
duties   of,    Sup.    Chap.    XXIII,   Par.   46 

Coast   Arty.    Drill   Regulations    

Sup.   Chap.  XXIII,   Par.  92 

Coast  Arty.  N,  C.  Staff   

Sup.    Chap.  XXIII,   Par.   51 

Colors — 

Definition    165   and  382 

Kept   at   Colonel's   quarters    382 

Saluting     ' 165 

"Commanding    officer    desires"    154D 

Communications,    addressed    to    office, 

not   to   individual    155A 

Communications,    signing   of: 

By  adjutant   70   (4  and  5) 

In    general     154A 

Company.      See"First    Sergeant." 
Company  comdr.,  to  be  assisted  by  N. 

C.    Os 18C 

Company   fund   book 

Part  of  company  records 34  (5) 

Expenditures   from    

Sup.   Chap.   IV,  Par.  4 

Company   N.    C.    Os. 

Addressed    by   privates    18B 

Army    Regulation    Pars,    affecting.  . 

Sup.   Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   53 

Assisting  Co.   Comdr 18C 

Details,    attention    to    17A 

Discipline  in  barracks    18A 

Duties   of — 

Chiefs    of   Squads    21 

First    Sergeant    22B 

Mess    Sergeant    18F 

N.   C.   O.   in   charge  of  Qrs.    ...    19A 
N.    C.   O.   in  charge  of  Squad- 
Rooms     20A 

O.    M.    Sergt 38A 

Vanous  N.   C.  Os _ 18E 

N.   C.  Os.  in  uniform  suppressing 

disorder     18D 

Preventing   commission   of   offenses.    17B 

COMPANY  Q.  M.  SERGT. 

Appointment    and    reduction    

Sup.   Chap.   XXIII,  Par.   67 

Arm-racks    and    chests    42A 

Army  Regulations 

Sup.   Chap.  V.   Par.   14 

General    duties    38A 

Grindstone      41 C 

Hand-cart     41D 

How   can  he  make  himself  most 

useful 42B 

Labor-Saving   devices,    etc 40B 

Rubber  stamps    41A 

Stencil     41B 

Things  he  should  take  special  care — 

To  do   38B 

Not  to  do    40A 

Tools,  kit   of    41 E 

War  Dept.  orders,  Sup.  Chap.  V,  Par.  15 

Complaints  to  the  captain    SOB 

Confinement    ..Sup.   Chap.  XXIII,  Par.  70 

Contours    355 

Contract,  form  of 412 

Conventional    Signs    364 

Cooking,    individual     267 


INDEX. 


Corrections,   initialed    160    (9) 

Correspondence.      See   "Paper-Work." 
Correspondence,    how    kept,    etc..    Sup. 

Chap.  VII.  Par.   17;  Chap.  XI,  Par.  41 
Correspondence,   burdened  with  repi- 

titions,    etc 155C 

Correspondence  book    ....34    (7);   75;   76B 

Countersign     182 

Courtesy. .  .See   "Military   Courtesy." 
Courts-martial 

Appearing  as  a  witness    51A 

Removing   glove    389 

Wearing   gloves    and   side-arms    ....383C 

Courts-Martial    Manual     

Sup.    Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   85 

Cross-reference     78A 

CUSTOMS   OF  THE  SERVICE 

Addressing    N.    C.    Os 378A 

Affecting — 

First   Sergeants    28 

Adjutant's   office    64 

Post    Noncommissioned    Stafif...    377 

Post  Q.    M.   Sergt 137   and  377 

Attention,   calling   and   inviting    ....154C 

Army    Slang     384 

"Army   Toast   to   Bride"    383F 

Bands  _ 381 

Baptizing   under   colors    383G 

"By  order"    1 54B 

"Calling  Attention  to"    154C 

Calls,    words    to     383 

Cheers,  the   three    393 

Chief    ISIusicians    •. 381 

Christening    under    colors    383G 

Colors,   kept   at   Colonel's   quarters 

etc. 382 

Commanding   officer   "desires," 

154D;    382C 

Courts-Martial — 

Removing    glove    389 

W^earing   gloves   and   side-arms    ..383C 

Dances 383B 

"Desires,  the   commanding  officer" 

154D;   382C 

"Dough    Bov"     391 

Flag,   folding   of    380 

Flag,   hoisting   and   lowering 393 

Funerals 

Horse  and  boots  of  Deceased    ...379 

Sounding    taps     387 

Three    volleys     386 

Glove   removal   of,   when   sworn    ...389 

Horses,   riding  in  post   383D 

"How"     391 

Insignia — 

How   worn    389 

Significance     393 

International   salute    389 

"Inviting   attention  to"    154C 

Knock,   official 383A 

Medals,  how  worn    389 

Messages,   delivery    of    382D 

Military    weddings    383 E 

Muster    379 

National   salute    389 

N.   C.  Os.,  how  addressed   378A 


Official   knock    383 A 

Origin  of  certain   customs    386 

Parades — ■ 

Origin     393 

Sounding  ofT   393 

Presidential    salute    39 

Rank,  significance  of  insignia  ....393 
Reviews  and  parades,  origin  of  ....393 
Salute 

International     389 

Origin  of    388 

Presidential     390 

To  the  Union    391 

Saluting    ladies    379 

Slang     384 

Sounding  off  at  parade    393 

Taps 

At    funerals     387 

Words    to    384 

"The  three   cheers"    391 

Three  volleys  at  funerals    386 

Titles    Zn 

Toast   to   bride    383F 

Trumpet  calls,  words  to   383 

Umbrellas     379 

Vollevs    at    funerals    386 

"Wag'on    soldier"     391 

Weddings 383E 

White    gloves,    wearing    as    witness 

before  G.  C.  M 383C 

"Wishes,  the  commanding  officer" 

154D;    382C 

Witness  before   G.   C.    M. — 

Removing  glove  when  sworn   .  .  .  .389 
Wearing   side-arms    and   gloves    ..383C 
Words  to  calls 383 

D 

Dances     383B 

Delinquency  Book   35  (1) 

Delivery    book     62C 

Deportment   and   appearance    46 

Deposition,   form  of    414 

Descriptive  Lists    34   (9);   159A 

"Desires,    the    commanding    officer," ..  154D 
Desks,    arrangement   of  in   Sergt. -Major's 

office     74 

Details,   looking   after  by  company   N. 

C.    Os 17A 

Discipline,    general   principles    14 

Discipline  in  barracks   1 8A 

Document  file   34  (8)  ;  76A 

"Dough  Boy"    391 

Dress  of  N.   C.   Os 1 1 C 

Drinking    llA 

Drill    Regulations    ...(Sup.    Chap.    XXIII) 

Cavalrv    Par.    9 1 

Coast   Artv Par.   92 

Field   Arty Par.   93 

Hospital    Corps    Par.    94 

Infantrv   Par.  95 

"Duplicate,  in,"  etc 159B 

Duplicating  device 93A 

DUTIES    OF 

Chiefs  of  Squads   21 

Coast   Artv.    N.    C.    Staff    

Sup.    Chap.    XXIII,    Par.    46 


INDEX. 


Co.  Q.   M.  Sergt 38A 

First  Sergeant   22 

Mess  Sergeant,  16  F  and  Sup.  Chap. 

XXIII.    Par.    60. 
N.  C.  O.— 

In  Charge  of  Qrs 19A 

In   Charge  of  Squad-Rooms    20A 

Ordnance   Sergt. 152 

Post    Commissary-sergeant     134 

Post   Q.    M.    Sergt    116 

Sergeant-Major     62A 

Various   Co.   N.   C.   Os 18E 

Duty  roster   34   (3) 


E 

Electric    bells    93C 

Endorsements.     See  "Indorsements." 
Envelopes 

Addressed  to  office,  note  to  indi- 
vidual      155  A 

With  printed  addresses    90 

Equipment,   marking  of 

Sup.   Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   52a 

Errors  usually  made  in — 

Paper- work  in  general    157B 

Muster  and  pay  rolls 

Sup.   Chap.  XI,  Par.  44 

Estimates.      See    "Reports." 

Exchange    Regulations    

Sup.    Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   99 

Extra  Duty,  N.  C.  Os 

Sup.  Chap.  XXIII,  Pars.  54a  and  71 


Feet,   care  of    304 

Field  Arty.   Drill   Regulations    

Sup.   Chap.   XXIII,   Par.  93 

Field  intrenchments  294 

FIELD   SERVICE 

Camping    277 

Care   of  animals,   wagons  and  har- 
ness      289 

Cooking,   individual    267 

Improvised    things    ." 261 

Individual    cooking    267 

Kitchens     280 

Kitchen    pits     281 

Loading   wagons    283 

Loading  on  cars — 

Ambulances     287 

Animals    286 

Property     288 

Wagons     287 

Marches     275 

Parking  trains    289 

Police   of  camp    283 

Rifle  trenches    294 

Sinks    ..279 

Water     '.282 

Wood     282 

Field   Service   Regulations    

Sup.    Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   96 

File  case  for  reference  books   93D 

Files,  Falcon  and  others   94 


First  aid  to  sick  and  injured   305 

FIRST  SERGEANT 

Army   Regulations   :  . 

Sup.   Chap.   IV,   Par.   1 

Blank   forms 

Improvised    30 

War   Dept..   Sup.   Chap.   IV,   Par.    10 

Books   and   Records    33 

Books   of  reference  and  instruction, 

Sup.    Chap.    IV,   Par.    12 

Clothing — 

Account .   34   (9) 

Record  of  sizes   35   (10) 

Company  fund.   Sup.   Chap.   IV,   Par.   4 

Company   fund  book    34    (5) 

"Customs  of  the  Service"   28 

Daily    routine    24A 

Delinquency   Book    35    (1) 

Descriptive    List,    Military   Record 

and  Clothing  Account   34   (9) 

Document    file    34    (8) 

Duties,    general    22B 

Duty   roster 34    (3) 

Estimates  and  requisitions   

....Sup.    Chap.    IV,    Pars.   2    and    13 

Favoritism     25 A 

"First   Sereants'    Call"    23A 

Forms.     See  "Blank  forms." 

General — 

Duties      22B 

Status     22A 

How  to  make  himself  most  useful  to 

his    captain    27A 

Impartiality    25 A 

Marriage   of   enlisted   men    36A 

Memorandum   Book    35    (2) 

Morning    report    33A 

Muster  and   Pay  Roll  Data  Book  35    (2) 

Orders,  forms  of 83 

Order  file   34   (4) 

Partiality 25A 

Prices   of   articles   charged   against 
men    ..Sup.    Chap.    XXIII,    Par.    81 

Property  Book    35    (4) 

Ration   Book    35    (3) 

Record  of  sizes  of  clothing    ....    35    (10) 
Reference  books   Sup.    Chap.   IV,   Par.    12 

Routine,    daily     24A 

Reports,   returns,   estimates   and   re- 
quisitions,  Sup.   Chap.    IV,   Par.    13. 

Requisitions  for  Supplies    

Sup.   Chap.   IV,  Par.  2  and  3 

Shoemakers   and   Tailors    36 B 

Sick  report    34   (2) 

Statement    of    charges     

Sup.    Chap.    IV,    Par.    1 

Supplies,    requisition    for    

Sup.    Chap.    IV,    Par.    2 

Tailors    and    shoemakers    36B 

Target   records    34    (6) 

Things  he  should  take  special  care — 

To    do     24B 

Not  to  do    26 

Venereal     Diseases     36C 

War    Dept.    orders    affecting    First 
Sergeants    Sup.   Chap.   IV,  Par.   5 


INDEX. 


Flag 

Folding   of    3gQ 

Hoisting  and   lowering    ..." 7qi 

Saluting     ......; i64 

Flank  guards    '  ' '  "  '^^^ 

Forage,   ration   of    ...  419 

Forethought     Ti/- 

Form  of—  ^^^ 


Contract 
Depositions 
Power   of 

Will     

Forms.     See 


••• .• 412 

and  certificates   414 

attorney    422 

■ ''Blank 'foVms.'"' '^^^ 


Chap.   XXllY/paV. 

chkp!'i\ 


49 


68 


Forms  of  speech 
Fuel,   allowance 

Sup. 

Fund,    company, 

Funds,   ioss  of   . .' ' 

Funerals 

W.''°''*^   'Vu^P-   C^^P-  XXIII,  Par.   72 
Hoi  se    and    boots   of  deceased  379 

Sounding    taps     ••30^ 

Three    volleys    3^g 


Par.   4 
...123A 


^nlf.?.^/"'  sentinels  except   those  at 
p^post  of  guard   ,,, 

Privates,    duties    ". ,  Sf 

Respect   for  sentinels    ..'.'. 17, R 

Sentinels  in   charge  of  prisoners '  V  191 
Sergeant  of  the  guard    ...  9ni 

191 


Supernumeraries 

I^^  Star  Spanglcu  joanner   ...  ion 

Guard  Manual    " 

Chap.   XXIIl",'par". '86 
H 


Sup. 


Hand-cart 
Harness,  care 


of 


41D 

289 


Hasty  intrenchments'  .'  .' 904 

Haver-sack    rar.-  ^f  ~  _. 


er-sack,   care  of 


Health,   care  of 

Horses, 

Hospital    Corps    Drill    Regulations, 

"How- 


59A 

300 


riding  in  post ^o,n 

^"-ps    Drill    Regulatic 

Sup.  Chap.  XXIII,  Par.  94 
391 


XXIII,   PaV. '79 

156C 


Os. 

'Courts- 


6C 


.389 


Garrison     Court-martial, 
"n     •••••,•••  Sup.    Chap.' 
General" 

Abbreviation  of  word 
Lsed  instead   of  "Sir"   in  beginning 
letters   to   heads   of  bureaus    ...      1S6B 

and  '"Tf^^''"^^^'"«;  ''Major-Generals'' 
and      Brigadier-Generals"  1;; 

tjeneral  considerations.   N     C        

Ueneral    courts-martial.      See' 

Martial." 
Gloves — 
■Removal   when   sworn 

nesT^.  '^^^"  appearing 'as  a  wit- 
Grindstone 383  C 

Growling  and'  whining'  '. '. f i 9 

Guard   Duty  ^"-^ 

Challenge    table    TSt, 

Color    sentinels     '.V. ion 

Compliments   from   sentinels    .' is; 

Commander  of  the  guard    .  .         "  '  '  19; 

Corporal    of  the    guard    ....    206 

Countersign     f"° 

Duty   of  sentinels i-~.r> 

Explanation   of  general   o;-d;;s.'.'.'  '  'ue 
General  orders  for  sentinels    ......'  175  \ 

Instruction   of   recruit    ....  ^qp 

Its   importance    ,7^^ 

Musicians  of  the  guard '.'.'; ig-^''^ 

^''^^^    -  "isO:    1S7 


Night 


?n3h"^  Scouts    Sup.   Chap.   XXIII.   Par 

Individual  cooking    ,;- 

Indorsements  ~ 

How   entered   in   correspondence 
book    


65 


95 


Spelling  of   word    .  .  . 

''In  duplicate,  triplicate,  etc  " 

Industry  and  perseverance  

Infantry  Drill  Regulations   ..";.'; 

Chap.   XXi'li,  "p'ar 

INFORMATION  AND  SECURITY 
i-'atrolling 

Facts   to  be   obtained  by   patrols 
regarding   certain  objects    .  22? 

General    principles    "  ' 9}'z 

Messages     ^i^ 


77 

158A 
159B 

IIF 


Message 

Method   of  leading  patrols  ' .'  ."  .'  .'  .'  'ne 
-Methods    of  reconnoiterino-  r^^e,- 


reconnoitering  posi- 
tions   of  the   enemy    ...  -yyn 

Problems    5X7 

Reconnaissance   of  posit  i'on  s'and '" 

localities    9,- 

Reports    Xy 

Service   of  Securitv         ~^ 

Advance    guards    2I8 

Flank  guards    042 

General    principles    ...  9^7 

Outposts    ;^^ 

Problems,    advance    guard" 'and "o"ut- 
Re^  Gua;ds '.'.'.-.v.'.'.'. "'' f,l 


Orderly  for  the  commanding  officer  IqYa  "T„c        .        V^ .^42 

Orders  for  sentinels  on  post^  .  7,^  Jns7rn.';*°'   General,"   not  hyphenated    156D 

Orders   for  sentinels  at   host   of Instruction,   practical    .'^.  .  .        "^      j^f^ 

„  gua'd     "^'^   °'  , _  Insane  soldiers  to  Government  m;.  ".,•;• ,  ^"^ 


Orders  for 

Orders    for 

prisoners 

Orders  for 


-  - 183 

color  sentinels igg 

sentinels   in    charge   of  ' 

••••••, 191 

sentinels  on  outpost  dutv 

■255A 


breast 


Insignia — 
AVorn  on  left 
Significance    

Inspection   at   taps    .  . 
Sup.    Chap. 


overnment  Hospital 
^up.  Chap.  XXIII.   Par.  73 


.389 
393 


XXIII,    Par.    55a 


INDEX. 


Interlineations    ^«q 

International   salute    .  .^ •'f/, 

"Inviting  attention  to      


154C 


Janitor,   Adjt's.   office 


K 


69 


53 


Khaki,  care  of   • . ,  ^ 

Kit  of  tools   (Ordnance)    ^^^ 

Kitchens,  field    ^°Y 

Kitchen  pits   ^°\  . 

Knock,    official    38>5A 


Labor-saving  devices,  etc. 

Company   office    . ^° 

Company  Q.   M.   Sergt 40B 

Post  Commissary-Sergeant i^/ 

Post   O.   M.   Sergt.    1^4 


Sergt.   Major 


89 


Lance  corporal,   appointment  of   48a 

Land  grant  woods    ... •  •  Vt"  *  ^' '  '  '  ot 

Sup.   Chap.   VIII,   Par.   23 

Letters,  addressed  to  office,  not  to 

individuals    lb5A 

Loading  on  cars — 

Ambulances     ^°^ 

Animals    ^§5 

Property     ^°« 

Wagons    287 

Loading  wagons    ^^-^ 

Loss  of  funds   -iVr 

Loyalty   ^^^ 

M 

Mailing  book V  V  * '  V^u  ' ' '  vvttt? 

Manuals    (Sup.   Chap,  -{^-^^^i^ 

Courts-Martial    Par.    85 

Guard  duty   Par.  86 

Medical  Dept Par.  87 

Pay  Dept Par.   88 

Q.  M.  Dept Par.  89 

Sub.    Dept Par-    90 

Map    Distance    .•  -. •  •  •  •  •  ••'•'' 

-       -  ■   ■  •  See  "Military  Sketch- 


See    "Military   Map 


Map  Making. 

ing." 
Map-Reading, 
Reading." 

Marches    ^'  ^ 

Marking  equipment    .  .  •^••■-  ••■•'■  co^ 

Sup.   Chap.   XXIII,  Par.   52a 

Marriage  of  soldiers    -jqq 

Medals,  how  worn    -'o^ 

Megaphone \c    (o\ 

Memorandum   Book    Wc\     \  on  A 

Memorandum  receipts    119  A  ;    1^^^ 

Memorandum  slips    90 

Meridian    • •  •  •  •  •  '^Q^-p. 

Messages,  delivery  of bu  i J ;  •'^^^ 

Mess  kit,  care  of  -^9 A 

Mess  Sergeant,  duties,   16F;    ........  • 

Sup.   Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   60 

"Military   channels,    through"    158A 


Military   Courtesy 

Civilian  salute    \'^'c      \n'7 

"Colors"    i  J 

How  to  salute :j^^ 

Its  importance [y 

Military    salute    .... •  •  • ^^^ 

Mistakes  usually  made  in  saluting.  .16» 

Nature  of  salutes  and  origin 1 1 -r 

N    C.  Os.  personification  of •    lii> 

Respect  to  be  paid  National  air  and 

Salutingin  a  group  of  soldiers 172 

Saluting  indoors    V  '  '/  J"  "  ' 

Saluting  when  in   command  ot   de- 

tachments     \'/^ 

Salutes,  nature  and  origin   |o^ 

Saluting  the  flag j^^ 

Salute,  how  rendered   i  Ac '177 

.       "Standards"    ..••••• ^ ^ 5  ;    177 

The  Star  Spangled  Banner   ...164,  190 

Uncovering  to  the   colors    jos 

When  and  how  to  salute \^' 

Whom  to   salute    ^^/Z 

Military  deportment   and   appearance.    46 

Military    map-reading    -J^y 

Contours    il^ 

Conventional   signs    ^^Jl 

Map   Distance  ^^' 

Orientation    .  . 
Scales  of  Maps 

Slopes     

True  Meridian   :Z"^ 

Visibility    "^^^ 

Military  Sketching. 

General    methods     ^°^ 

Outpost  sketching ^'J\ 

Position  sketching    "yJl 

Road    sketching    , .- -/'^ 

Minor  tactics..    See  "Information  and 

Security."  „ 

Mistakes.      See  "Errors.  ,, 

Model  forms.     See  "Forms  of. 
Model  remarks  on  muster  and  pay     oils 

Sup.   Chap.   XI,   Pai.   43 

Morning   report    •  •  •  •  • 

Musician  of  the  Guard  ^^^ 

Guard   duty    ;  •  ',■  '  : 1- '  i '^+'0 

Instructions  as  orderly  m  adjutant  s  ^^ 

office      •. ->7Q 

Muster,  customs  regarding   >"  ^ 

''"':'';  ;'°"':S^.^h?p^XXm.-  Pan-74 
Muster  and  pay  rolls 

Abbreviations   Sup.   Chap.   Ai,    Fat.   4J 
Model   remarks 

Preparation,    general    remarks,     .  . 
160 A;   Sup.   Chap.  XI,  Pai. 

ITsual  errors  ..Sup.  Chap.  Ai,  rar. 


.361 
,349 
.359 
.363 


33A 


43 
44 


Typewriter,   use   of.    •  •  •  •  •  •  •  •  •  •  •    v 

Sup.    Chap.  XI,   Par.   43    (foot  note) 
Muster  and  Pay  Roll  Data  Book...    35  (2) 


N 


National   air,   respect  to   be   paid 

National    salute    • 

N.  C.  Os..  how  addressed   


to.. 164 

389 

378A 


INDEX. 


In  charge  of  Qrs..,  duties  19A 

Noncommissioned  Officer  in  Charge  of 

Recruits     

Arms,  taking  apart    57 B 

Arms,  general  suggestions  on  care 

of     58A 

Articles   of   War    45 

Bayonet,   care  of    57A 

Buttons,    care   of    52 

Care  of  Clothing,  arms,  etc 52 

Clothing,    ornaments    and    buttons. 

care    of    52 

Complaints   to  the   captain    SOB 

Forms   of  speech    49 

General    considerations    43 

Guard    Duty    59B 

Haversack,   care  of    59A 

Message,    how    delivered    SOD 

Mess   kit,   care   of    S9A 

Military  deportment  and  appearance  46 

Obedience   45  A  ;  46 A 

Ornaments,   care   of    52 

Russet   leather,   care   of    58B 

Payment,   how    conducted    SOC 

Personal    cleanliness     48 

Polishing  of  blued   and  browned 

parts      S7C 

Rifle,  care  of    56 

Shelter  tent,  care  of   59A 

Shoes,  care  of   54 

Witness    before    courtmartial    51 A 

Noncommissioned   Officer 

In   charge   of   Squad-Rooms    20A 

o 

Obedience   12B,  15   (10),  45  A,  46A 

Office,  bow  to  enter    SOA 

"Official  copy"    159D 

Official    knock    383 A 

Order  in  barracks    18A 

Orderlies  in  general    194 

Orderly  for  commanding  officer   193A 

Ordnance   Sergeant 

Army   Regulations    

Sup.   Chap.   X.   Par.   38 

Blank  forms   ...Sup.   Chap.  X,  Par.  37 

Books  of  reference    

Sup.   Chap.  X,   Par.   36 

Care    of   property    153 

Duties     152 

Pointers  and  suggestions    153 

Reports,    returns    and    requisitions... 

._ Sup.    Chap.   X.   Par.    40 

Things  he  should  take  special  care — 

To  do 152 

Not  to  do 152 

War  Dept.  orders    

Sup.   Chap.  X,  Par.  39 

Order  file,  company   34   (4) 

Orders 

Adjutant's   office    80 

Company     33 

General    principles    79 

Indices  of   94 

Sentinels    175   A;    254A 

See.   "War   Dept.   Orders,  etc." 
Orientation     361 


Origin   of  certain  customs    386 

Ornaments,   care  of   52c 

Outposts — 

General    principles    248 

Orders  for  Sentinels   ,  ."254 A 


Pack  animals,  capacity   412 

Pallbearers.. Sup.   Chap.   XXIII,  Par.   75 
PAPER-WORK 
Abbreviations — 

In   correspondence    79 

On  muster  and  pay  rolls    

^.  , Sup.   Chap.  XI,  Par.  43 

Titles    156C 

Analyzmg  papers   69A 

Addressing  communications  to  office, 

not  to  individual    155A 

"Adjutant  General,"  not  hyphenated 

, 156D 

Adjutants     Office,    transaction    of .  .  . 

Sup.   Chap.   VII,   Par.    17 

Annotation     78B 

Army   Regulation   paragraph    most 

violated    157A 

.\rmy  Regulations  to  be  kept  posted  69 
"Attention  to   calling  and   inviting"  154C 

Basket  system    90 

Briefing  communications    76E;   158  A  (3) 

"By   command"    154B 

"Bv  order"    154B 

"Calling  attention  to"   154C 

Check  on  communications    62D 

"Commanding  officer  desires"    154D 

"Commissary   General,"   not   hyphen- 
ated   .  .  .  . 156D 

Communications,   addressed  to  office, 

not   to  individual    1 SSA 

Corrections,  initialed 160  (9) 

Correspondence  book    75;    76B 

Correspondence,  burdened  with  repe- 
titions,   etc 155C 

Cross  reference 78A 

Descriptive  lists,  preparation  of   ....159 A 

Desks,  arrangement  of 74 

"Desires,  the  commanding  officer". .154D 

Document   file    76  A 

"Duplicate,  in"    1S9B 

Duplicating  device    93A 

Envelopes,   addressed   to   office   not 

to  individuals    155A 

Errors  usually  made-  in — 

Paper-work  in  general    1S7B 

Muster   and   pav   rolls    

Sup.   Chap.  XI,  Par.   44 

Estimates,  preparation  of 157C 

Falcon  and  other  files   94 

"General" 

Abbreviation    of    word 156C 

Used    in    addressing   "Major-Gen- 
erals,"  etc ..156C 

Used  instead  of  "Sir"  in  beginning 
letters  to  heads  of  bureaus   .  .  .  .156B 
Indorsements — 

Entering 77 

Indorsement,   spelling  of    158A 

Indices   of   orders    94 


INDEX. 


"In  duplicate,  triplicate,"  etc 159B 

"Inspector    General,"   not   hyphen- 
ated    156D 

Interlineations    160   (9) 

"Inviting  attention  to"   1 54C 

Letters,  addressed  to  office,  not  to 

individual     155  A 

Mailing  book   72   (15) 

Memorandum  slips    90 

"Military  channels,   through,"    154;    158A 
Mistakes  usually  made.     See  "Errors." 
Muster  and   pay   rolls.      See   "Muster 

and  pay  rolls." 
Names,  only  official  designations  to 

be   used    76D 

"Official    copy"    159D 

Papers,  check  on   62D 

Pay  rolls.     See  "Muster  and  pay  rolls." 

Pigeon-hole   box    94 

"Quartermaster  General,"  not  hyphen- 
ated     156D 

Record  of  officers  and  men    73 

Reports,  returns,  estimates  and  re- 
quisitions, preparation  of    157C 

Repetition   of  titles,   etc 155C 

Requisitions,   preparation   of    I57C 

Stamps,   postage    155B 

Statement  of  charges    

Sup.   Chap.   IV,   Par.    1 

Spelling  of  "Adjutant   General,"   etc. 

156D 

Signing  of  papers — 

By  adjutants 70  (4  and  5) 

In    general    1 54A 

Signature,   copying   1 59C 

"THE    Adjutant    General    of    the 

Army,"    156D 

"The    commanding   officer    desires, 

wishes"    154D 

"Through   military    channels"    154;    158A 

"Tickler"    90 

Titles,  abbreviations  of   156C 

Typewriter,  use  of  in  preparing  mus- 
ter and  pay  rolls.  Sup.  Chap.  XI, 
Par.   43    (foot   note). 

"Triplicate,    in"    159B 

"True    copies"    159D 

Parades 

Meaning  of  word    88   (footnote) 

Origin     393 

"Sounding    off"     393 

Parking   trains    289 

Parole    182 

Pass  Lists 109 

Pay  Dept.  Manual 

Sup.    Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   89 

Pay  rolls.     See  "Muster  and  Pay  Rolls." 

Pay   table    416 

Payment,   how  conducted    50C 

Pensions     417 

Personal   reports    

Sup.   Chap.   XXIII,   Par.    50b;   51b 

Perseverance   and   industry    IIF 

Personal  cleanliness   48 

Pigeon-hole  box    94 

Polishing  blued  and  browned  parts  of 

arms    57C 


Position   sketching    374 

Post   Commissary-Sergeant 

Blank   forms.    Sup.    Chap.    IX.    Par.    34 

Books  of  reference,  etc 

Sup.   Chap.   IX,   Par.   33 

Duties     134 

How  to  make  himself  most  useful..      137 

Labor-saving  devices,   etc 137 

Loss   of  funds    .143 A.. 

Miscellaneous   "pointers"    140 

Necessary  knowledge    137 

Property,  care  of   138 

Reports,    returns,    estimates    and    re- 
quisitions       Sup.    Chap.    IX,   Par.   34 

Rubber   stamps    143B 

Savings,  record  of   137 

Things  he  should  take  special  care — 

To  do 134 

Not  to  do   135 

War    Dept.    orders    

Sup.   (Thap.   IX,   Pa-.  32 

Post  Exchange  Regulations   

Sup.   Chap.   XXIII,    Par.    99 

Post  N.  C.  Staff 

Appointment    

Sup.  Chap.  XXIII,  Parf.  50 

Customs  affecting 377 

Reduction,   Sup.    Chap.    XXIII,   Par.    50a 
Post    Ordnance    Sergeant.       See    "Ord- 
nance   Sergeant." 
POST  Q.   M.   SERGT. 

Army  Regulations    

." Sup.   Chap.    VIII,   Par.   24 

Blank   forms    128 

Blank  forms    

Sup.   Chap.   VIII,    Par.   29      • 

Books    of    reference    

Sup.   Chap.  VIII,  Par.  25 

Care,  preservation  and  responsibility 

of   property    118 

Circulars    Q.    M.    G.    O 

Sup.   Chap.   VIII,   Par.   22 

Customs   of  the   Service    377 

Duties     116 

How  can  he  make  himself  most  use- 
ful  118 

Labor-saving  devices,   etc 124 

Land    grant    roads    

Sup.    Chap.   VIII,   Par.   23 

Loss  of  funds   123A 

Memorandum    receipts    1 19 A  ;    120 A 

Miscellaneous   "pomters"    122 

Property,   care   of    118 

Record   books    

Sup.   Chap.  VIII,  Par.   26 

Reports,    returns,   estimates   and   re- 
quisitions   Sup.    Chap.    VIII.    Pars. 
30  and  31. 

Rubber   stamps    124 

Supplies....    Sup.   Chap.   VIII.    Par.   31 
Things  he  should  take  special  care — 

To    do    116 

Not  to  do   117 

War   Dept.    orders    

Sup.   Chap.   VIII.    Par.   21 

Power  of  attorney   412 

Practical   instruction    1 2D 


INDEX. 


Precedence  Sup.   ..Chap.  XXIII,  Par.  76 

Presidential    salute    39 

Preventing  commission  of  offenses    ....17B 
Prices  of  articles  usually  charged  against 
soldiers,   Sup.   Chap.  XXIII,   Par.  81 

Printing  press    92 

Privates 

Addressing  N.   C.   Os 18B 

Treatment  of,  by  M.   C.   Os.      12  A;   25A 
Problem.s 

Advance    guard    244 

Outpost     259 

Patrols    227 

Promptness    HE 

PROPERTY 
Care  of  by 

Ordnance    Sergt 153 

Post    Commsy.    Sergt 138 

Post  Q.   M.   Sergt 118 

Loading   on   cars    288 

Property    Book    35    (4) 

Punctuality    1 1 D 


Quarters,  fuel  and  stoves    

Sup.   Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   68 

Q.   M.   Manual   

Sup.   Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   89 

Quartermaster  Sergeant.     See  "Company 
Q.    M.    Sergt."    and    "Post    Q.    M. 
Sergt." 

Q.  M.  Sergt.,  Co.,  appointment  and  re- 
duction    Sup.   Chap.  XXIII,   Par.  61 

R 

Railroad  cars,  capacity   412 

Rank- 
Precedence   of    

Sup.    Chap.   XXIII,   Par.    76 

Significance    cf    insignia    393 

Rations,   weight  of    411 

Ration   Book    35    (3) 

Rear  guard 242 

Record   of  sizes  of  clothing   35    (10) 

Records..    See   "Books   and   Records. 

Record  of  men   and  officers    Ti 

Recruit.     See  "Noncommissioned  Offi- 
cers  in  charge  of  Recruits." 
Reduction  of  N.  C.  Os. 

(Sup.  Chap.  XXIII) 

Band  N.   C.   Os Par.   52b 

Battalion   N.   C.   Staff    

Sup.    Chap.  XXIII,   Par.   52 

Coast  Arty.  N.   C.   Staff Par.   51 

Company    Par.    58 

First  Sergt Par.  55b 

Hospital    Corps    48c 

Indian  Scouts    Par.   65 

Post  N.  C.  Staff 50a 

Q.  M.  Sergt.   Co Par.  61 

Signal    Corps    49 

Stable   Sergt ;Par.    61 

When  effective   Par.  63 

Regt.  Court-Martial   

Sup.    Chap.  XXIII,  Par.   79 


Regt.  N.  C.  Staff   

Sup.    Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   52 

Regulations  governing  Organized   Mili- 
litia.    Pars,   amended,   Sup.   Chap. 
XXIII,   Par.   83. 

Reports,   personal    

Sup.   Chap.  XXIII,  50b 

Reports,    returns,    estimates    and    requi- 
sitions 
Company    ....Sup.    Chap.    IV,   Par.    13 

Ordnance    Sergt 

Sup.   Chap.   X,  Par.   40 

Post  Commsy.  Sergt 

Sup.  Chap.   IX,  Par.  35 

Post  Q.   M.   Sergt 

..Sup.   Chap.  VIII,  Pars.  30  and  31 

Preparation    of    157C 

Sergeant-Major    

Sup.  Chap.  VII,  Par.  20 

Reproval  of  N.   C.   Os 

Sup.   Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   59 

Requisitions.      See   "Supplies." 

Reviews  and  parades,  origin  of   393 

Rif^e: 

Care   of    56 

Description    321 

Rifle  trenches    294 

Road    sketching    375 

Rosters    Sup.    Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   11 

Rubber   Stamps 

Adjutant's  office    78C ;   89 

Commissary    143B 

Company 29  ;  41A,  71   (6)  ;  160A 

Not    authorized    for    authenticating 
post  and  regimental  orders   89   (foot- 
note) 

Post   of  Manila    71    (6) 

Q.   M.  office    124 

Used   in   all    offices    78C 

Used   in   preparation   of  :nuster   and 

pay    rolls    160 A 

Russet  leather,  care  of   58B 


Salute 

International     389 

Origin    of    388 

Presidential     390 

To  the   Union    391 

Salutes.      See  "Military  Courtesy. 
Saluting  in  command  of  detachments.. 

Sup.   Chap.  XXIII,   Par.   78 

Saluting  the  colors 165 

Saluting  ladies    379 

Savings,  commissary,  record  of  137 

Scales   of   maps    349 

Seal    89    (foot  note) 

Security    and    Information.       See    "In- 
formation and   Security." 
Sentinel   on   outpost,    instructions    ....254A 

SERGEANT-MAJOR 

Abbreviations     79 

Annotation    78B 

Army    Regulations    

Sup.   Chap.   VII,  Par.   16 

Basket   system    90 


INDEX. 


Blank  forms,  W.   D.,    

Sup.   Chap.   VII,  Par.    19 

Blank  forms — 

Improvised    95 

War  Dept.,  Sup.  Chap.  VII,  Par.   19 

Books  of  reference,  etc 

Sup.   Chap.   VII,  Par.    18 

Card-record  system    ....    75    (footnote) 

Clerks    65 

Communications,   check   on    62D 

Correspondence,  how  kept    

Sup.   Chap.   VII,   Par.    17 

Correspondence     69 

Correspondence  book    75  ;    76B 

Check   on   communications    62D 

Cross  reference    78 A 

"Customs   of  the  Service"    64 

Delivery  book    62C 

Desks,  arrangement  of,  in  ofifice.  ...    74 

Document    file     76A 

Dress  and  bearing    61B 

Duplicating   device    93A 

Duties    62A 

Electric  bells   93C 

Envelopes  with   printed   addresses..    90 
Forms.      See  "Blank  forms." 

Files,  Falcon  and  others 94 

File,  case 93D 

Indorsements    T^ 

Indices   of   orders    94 

Janitor    69 

Knowledge,   necessary    61C 

Labor-saving    devices     89 

Mailing  book    72 

Memorandum   slips    90 

Megaphone 66 

Musician   of   the    Guard    66 

Necessary  knowledge    61C 

Official  business  of  office,  transaction 

of    Sup.   Chap.   VII,   Par.   17      .. 

Orders    79 

Paper   work    69 

"Parade,"   meaning   of    ..88    (footnote) 

Pigeon-hole   box    94 

Printing  press    92 

Relations  with  adjutant   61 A 

Reports,  returns,  estimates  and  re- 
quisitions  ..Sup.   Chap.  VII.   Par.  20 

Routine  of  office    65 

Record  of  men  and  officers    TZ 

Telephone  clerk    67 

"Tickler"      90 

Typewriter     93B 

War  Dept.   Orders    

Sup.    Chap.    VII,    Par.    15 

Shelter  tent,  care  of   59A 

Shoes,   care  of    53 

Shoemakers  and  Tailors 36B .  . 

Sick   Report    34    (2) 

Signature,    copying    159C 

Signing  papers   70   (4  and  5)  ;   154  A 

Sinks     279 

Sketching,      See   "Military    Sketching." 

Slang    384 

Sleeping  car  accommodations    

Sup.    Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   69 

Slopes    359 


Small  Arms  Firing  Regulations    

Sup.    Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   97 

Sounding  off  at  parade   393 

Speech,  forms  of 49 

Spelling  of  "Adjutant  General,  etc.    ..156D 

Spelling   of    "Indorsement"    158A 

Stable-Sergt.,    appointment   and   reduc- 
tion     Sup.   Chap.  XXIII,   Par.  61 

Stamps.      See    "Rubber    Stamps." 

"Standards"    165 

Statement  of  charges 

Sup.   Chap.   IV,   Par.    1 

Stationery  allowance,  post   N.   C.   S.   O. 

Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   50c 

Stencil     41B 

Stoves,   allowance    

Sup.    Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   68 

Stripes,    care   of    52B 

Sub.  Dept.   Manual 

Sup.    Chap.  XXIII,   Par.   90 

Summary    Court    

Sup.    Chap.  XXIII,   Par.   79 

Supplies,   requisitions  for — 

Company   ..Sup.   Chap.  IV,  Pars.  2,  IZ 
Q.  M Sup.  Chap.  VIII,  Par.  31 


Taps 

At   funerals    Z%1 

Words  to    384 

Tailors  and  shoemakers   36B 

Target  practice,   its   importance    321 

Target  records   34   (6) 

Telephone   Clerk    67 

Tents,    weights,    dimensions    and    capa- 
cities     410 

"THE  Adjutant  General  of  the  Army" 

156D 

"The   commanding    officer   desires"    ..154D 
"The    Star    Spangled    Banner"    ...164;    190 

"The    three    cheers"     393 

Three  volleys  at  funerals    386 

"Through    Military   channels"    ..154;    158A 

"Tickler"     90 

Titles 

Abbreviation    of    156C 

Customs,     regarding     377 

Privates  addressing  N.   C.  Os 18B 

Use   of  title  instead  of  "Sir"  in  letters 

156  A  and   B 

Toast  to  bride    383F 

Tools,   kit   of    (Ordnance).. 41E 

Transport    Regulations    

Sup.   Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   98 

Treatment   of   privates    12A.  .  .  . 

25  A 

Trenches,    rifle     294 

Trial  by  Regt.,  Garrison  and  Summary 
Courts-Martial,   Sup.    Chap.   XXIII, 
Par.    79. 

"Triplicate  in,"  etc   159B 

"True    copy"     159D 

True    Merrdian     363 

Trumpet  calls,  words  to   383 

Typewrite.   Adjutants — 

Adjutants'   office 93B 


INDEX. 


In  preparing  muster  and  pay  rolls 
..Sup.   Chap.    XI,    Par.   43    (foot   note) 

Purchase   from    Co.    Fund    

Sup.   Chap.   IV,   Par.   4 

u 

Umbrellas 379 

Uniform  order   

Sup.    Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   80 

V 

Venereal     Diseases     36C 

Volleys  at  funerals   386 

w 

Wagons: 

Care    of    289 

Capacity     411 

Loading   of    283 

Loading   on   cars    287 

"Wagon    soldiers"     391 

War   Dept.   orders  affecting 

Co.   Q.   M.   Sergt 

Sup.   Chap.   V,  Par.   5 

First    Sergeants     

Sup.   Chap.   IV,   Par.   5 


Ordnance   Sergt 

Sup.   Chap.  X,  Par.  39 

Post    O.    M.    Seigt 

Sup.   Chap.   VIII,  Par.  21 

Post   Commsy.    Sergt 

Sup.   Chap.   VIII,   Par.   32 

Sergeant-Major    

Sup.    Chap.    VII,    Par.    15 

Warrants   ...Sup.   Chap.  XXIII,  Par.  62 
Water 

Drinking    282 

Water,    allowance   of    412 

Weddings    383E 

Weights 

Articles   usually   taken   into   field... 408 

Rations    411 

Tents     410 

Whining   and   Growling    lOA 

Whistles    ...Sup.   Chap.   XXIII,   Par.   64 

White  gloves,  G.  C.  M 383C 

Will,  form  of   413 

"Wishes,    the   commanding   officer"    ..154D 
Witnesses   before  courts-martial 

Gloves  and  side-arms  to  be  worn   ..383C 

How  to  appear 5 1 A 

Removing  glove  when  sworn 389 

Wood     282 

Words  to  calls 383 


OF    THE 

UNIVERSITY 

OF 


NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS'   MANUAL 


CHAPTER  I. 
GENERAL  CONSIDERATIONS 

(See  corresponding  chapter  in  Supplement  for  additional  matter  and  cJianges,  if  any.) 

The  Position  of  Noncommissioned  Officer.  In  garrison  and  in 
the  field,  in  camp  and  on  the  march,  in  peace  and  in  war,  the  Noncom- 
missioned Officer  occupies  a  most  important  position  and  phiys  a  most 
essential  part  in  the  success  or  failure  of  a  command.  Experience  has 
shown  that  the  efficiency,  discipline  and  reputation  of  a  command 
depend  to  a  great  extent  on  its  Noncommissioned  Officers.  In  fact,  it 
is  often  said,  "The  Noncommissioned  Officers  are  the  backbone  of  an 
army." 

Soldiers  are  appointed  Noncommissioned  Officers  because,  in  the 
opinion  of  their  officers,  they  possess  a  high  sense  of  dut}'-,  force  of 
character,  efficiency,  intelligence,  sobriety  and  other  soldierly,  manly 
qualities. 

Indeed,  the  position  of  Noncommissioned  Officer  is  one  of  honor 
and  responsibility — it  is  a  position  that  vests  in  its  occupant  certain 
authority  not  exercised  by  other  enlisted  men — it  is  a  position  that 
signals  out  its  occupant  from  amongst  the  rest  of  his  comrades,  and 
the  officer  who  recommends  a  soldier  for  appointment  as  Noncommis- 
sioned Officer  and  the  superior  who  makes  the  appointment,  both 
repose  faith  and  confidence  in  the  man's  worth,  loyalty  and  efficiency. 
Should  not  such  a  man,  therefore,  do  all  in  his  power^should  he  not 
endeavor  with  all  his  might,  with  all  his  soul,  to  show  his  comrades, 
his  officers  and  the  rest  of  the  world,  that  the  confidence  thus  reposed 
in  him  is  not  misplaced?  And  this  he  should  do  by  being  dignified, 
fair,  just,  and  honest  in  his  associations  with  his  comrades,  setting  at 
all  times  an  example  in  dress,  neatness,  military  bearing,  manliness 
and  obedience. 

When  a  private  is  made  a  corporal  his  status  is  changed  from 
that  of  a  follower  to  that  of  a  leader  of  men,  and  he  should  do  all  he 


10  CHAPTER  I. 

can   to  become  an  efficient   leader.     The  man  who  is  thus   chosen   to 
command  other  men  occupies,  indeed,  an  enviable  position. 

The  Noncommissioned  Officer  who  is  soldierly,  reserved,  fair 
and  efficient,  has  the  satisfaction  of  knowing  that  he  enjoys  the  con- 
fidence, and  respect  of  those  that  he  commands.  On  the  other  hand, 
if  a  Noncommissioned  Officer  lacks  the  qualities  named,  his  comrades 
have  neither  respect  for  nor  confidence  in  him.  These  are  things  that 
noncommissioned  officers  ought  to  think  about. 

In  time  of  war  a  Noncommissioned  Officer  is  very  often  placed 
in  a  position  where  he  is  responsible  for  the  health,  comfort  and  lives 
of  his  men,  and  the  ambition  of  every  Noncommissioned  Officer 
should,  therefore,  be  to  so  qualify  himself  that  he  will  be  able  to 
"make  good"  wnth  his  men  and  with  his  officers — that  he  will  be  able 
to  instruct  his  men  in  all  their  duties  and  look  after  them  properly 
in  garrison,  in  camp,  on  the  march  and  in  battle. 

Remember,  the  position  that  a  Noncommissioned  Officer  oc- 
cupies in  the  eyes  of  his  comrades — the  extent  to  which  he  commands 
their  respect  and  inspires  their  confidence,  depends  entirely  on  the 
Noncommissioned  Officer  himself,  who,  in  fact,  makes  his  position 
whatever  it  may  be.  The  Noncommissioned  Officer,  for  instance,  who 
always  does  his  duty  and  who  requires  others  to  do  the  same,  will 
always  command  respect,  admiration  and  obedience,  while  the  one 
who  fails  to  appreciate  the  responsibility  of  his  position — the  one  who 
gambles  with  privates  and  does  other  things  not  in  keeping  with 
the  dignity  of  his  office,  not  only  fails  to  command  respect,  but  he 
also  fails  to  inspire  confidence. 

The  sense  of  satisfaction  experienced  by  the  Noncommissioned 
Officer  who  appreciates  the  responsibility  of  his  position,  who  does 
his  duty  faithfully  and  loyally,  and  who,  as  a  result,  knows  and  feels 
that  he  has  the  respect  and  admiration  of  his  fellow  soldiers  and  the 
confidence  and  good  will  of  his  officers — such  a  sense  of  satisfaction 
is  something  that  riches  can  not  buy  and  it  means  everything  to  the 
man  of  true  soldierly  instincts. 

A        Growling   and   Whining.      Don't   be   a   groivler — there   is    nothing 
so  tiresome  and  boring  as  a  chronic  "kicker". 

One  sometimes  hears  a  soldier  growling  about  the  amount  of 
work  he  has  to  do.  Remember  your  time  is  not  your  own — it  belongs 
to  the  government,  who  pays  you  for  it. 


GENERAL  CONSIDERATIONS.  11 

Whatever  you  do,  do  not  speak  ill  of  your  regiment  or  of  any 
of  your  officers  in  tlic  presence  of  outsiders,  civilians  or  military,  and 
don't  criticise  officers  or  orders  in   the  presence  of  privates. 

Akin  to  growling  is  whining.  If  admonished  by  your  captain, 
don't  go  around  telling  everybody  about  it — the  chances  are  they  are 
not  at  all  interested  in  the  matter,  and  furthermore,  such  action  is 
childish.  If  you  have  done  anything  to  be  admonished  for,  take  your 
medicine  like  a  man,  and  say  nothing  about  it. 

A  Drinking.  Excessive  drinking  in  the  Army,  like  excessive  drink- 
ing in  civil  life,  almost  invariably  leads  to  trouble,  and  often  ruin. 

If  you  feel  like  taking  a  drink,  do  so,  but  do  not  so  far  forget 
yourself  as  to  drink  to  excess.  Reckless  drinking  is  neither  manly, 
military  nor  gentlemanly,  and  is  always  a  drain  on  the  purse  and  body. 
A  good  rule,  even  for  moderate  drinkers,  is  never  to  touch  a  drop  of 
liquor  when  on,  or  about  to  enter  upon,  any  duty. 

B  Military  Courtesy.  The  Noncommissioned  Officer  should  be  the 
very  personification  of  military  courtesy — he  is  expected  to  set  the 
example  for  the  private  and,  therefore,  he  can  not  be  too  careful  and 
punctilious  about  salutes  and  all  other  matters  pertaining  to  military 
courtesy. 

See  "Military  Courtesy,"  page  161. 

C  Your  Dress.  Always  be  sure  to  turn  out  in  the  regulation  uni- 
form, with  your  clothing  properly  brushed,  cleaned  and  pressed  and 
every  article  of  j^our  equipment  shipshape. 

Above  all,  avoid  slouchiness. 

D  Punctuality.  Punctuality  is  one  of  the  cardinal  requisites  of  a 
good  soldier.  Cultivate  the  habit  of  being  punctual — make  it  an  in- 
variable rule  always  to  be  at  the  appointed  place  three  or  four  minutes 
before  the  time  ordered.     Get  info  tJic  habit  of  being  punctual. 

E  Promptness.  Always  act  prompth',  never  putting  off  until  to- 
morrow what  can  be  done  today.  Procrastination  has  thwarted  the 
advancement  of  many  a  bright,  able  man.  Get  into  the  habit  of  being 
prompt. 

F  Industry  and  perseverance.  In  the  profession  of  arms,  as  in  all 
other  walks  of  life,  men  ultimately  take  standing  according  to  effi- 
ciency and  merit.     Efficiency  requires,  time,  labor  and  perseverance. 

G       Forethought.      Forethought,   a  most  valuable  asset,   is   really  an 


12  CHAPTER  I. 

acquired  trait.  Get  into  the  habit  of  cultivating  it — it  is  astonishing- 
how  this  really  can  be  iinproved  with  practice. 

A  Treatment  of  Privates.  Noncommissioned  Officers  sometimes 
run  to  one  of  two  extremes  in  the  treatment  of  privates — they  either, 
by  undue  familiarity  or  otherwise,  cultivate  popularity  with  them,  or 
they  do  not  treat  them  with  sufficient  consideration — the  former 
course  will  forfeit  their  esteem;  the  latter  insure  their  dislike,  neither 
of  which  is  conducive  to  commanding  their  respect. 

By  maintaining  a  quiet,  dignified  reserve,  Noncommissioned 
Officers  can  refrain  from  being  familiar  with  privates  without  creat- 
ing the  impression  that  they  consider  themselves  superior  to  or 
better  than,  other  enlisted  men. 

Under  no  circumstances  should  you  ever  swear  at  a  private — 
not  only  is  this  taking  a  mean,  unfair  advantage  of  your  position,  but 
it  is  also  undignified,  ungentlemanly  and  unmilitary.  The  treatment 
of  privates  should  be  uniform  and  just.  Discipline  should  be  enforced 
in  a  quiet,  dignified  way,  without  loud,  boisterous  talking,  swearing 
or  roughness.  Dignity  and  firmness  are  not  only  much  more  effective, 
but  they  also  command  more  obedience  and  inspire  greater  respect. 
The  Noncommissioned  Officer  who  is  capricious,  insulting  and  abus- 
ive demeans  himself  and  disgraces  his  position. 

Remember,  the  average  private  does  not  mind  how  strict  you 
may  be  just  so  you  are  fair  and  impartial. 

B  Obedience  renders  no  man  servile  nor  does  it  in  any  way  destroy 
his  independence  of  thought.  On  the  contrary,  obedience,  which  is 
nothing  more  or  less  than  respect  for  constituted  authority,  increases 
the  worth  and  usefulness  of  a  man  and  makes  a  better  citizen  of  him. 
See  "Obedience,"  page  15  (lo),  and  also  45A  and  46A. 

C  Loyalty.  There  is  only  one  soldierly  trait  that  is  more  import- 
ant than  loyalty,  and  that  is  obedience.  It  goes  without  saying  that 
the  Noncommissioned  Officer  should  be  absolutely  loyal  to  his  officers. 
The  officer  is  entitled  to  the  loyalty  of  his  Noncommissioned  Officers, 
and  the  Noncommissioned  Officer  of  true  soldierly  instincts  never 
hesitates  about  according  his  superior  full,  enthusiastic  support. 

D  Practical  Instruction.  The  only  reason  for  the  existence  of  our 
Army,  is  the  possibility  of  war,  and  it  should  always  be  borne  in  mind 
that  every  thing  we  do — all  our  preparations,  all  our  instruction  and  all 
our  training — has  for  its  final  purpose  nothing  but  war,  and  it  should 
also  be  borne  in  mind  that  everything  in  war  is  practical. 


GENERAL  CONSIDERATIONS  1 


-> 


Be  practical;  by  effort,  thought,  common  sense  and  experience 
learn  to  tell  the  difference  between  the  essential  and  the  nonessential, 
and  learn  how  to  DO  things.  Learn  to  THINK  for  yourself.  The 
best  way  to  learn  a  thing  is  to  do  it  yourself.  Instead  of  confining 
one's  self  to  memorizing  lots  of  rules — instead  of  loading  one's 
mind  up  with  "Normal  formations",  etc.,  think  up  problems  and  then 
solve  them — imagine  yourself  in  a  certain  situation  and  then  work 
yourself  out  of  it,  by  applying  general  principles  and  common  sense — 
and  best  of  all,  go  out  and  actually  DO  the  thing. 

While  every  noncommissioned  officer  should,  of  course,  have 
a  thorough  knowledge  of  such  parts  of  the  Army  Regulations,  the 
Manual  of  Guard  Duty  and  the  Drill  Regulations  as  affect  noncom- 
missioned officers  and  privates,  too  much  time  should  not  be  xievoted 
to  these  subjects,  at  the  sacrifice  of  other  matters  of  a  more  practical 
nature,  such  as  the  applied  principles  of  information  and  security 
(Chapter  XIV),  field  service  (Chapter  XV),  the  construction  of  rifle 
trenches  (Chapter  XVI,)  military  map  reading  (Chapter  XIX),  and 
military  sketching  (Chapter  XX),  etc. 


14  CHAPTER   II. 


CHAPTER  H. 
DISCIPLINE 

(See  corresponding  cJiapter  in   Supplement  for  additional  matter  and  changes,   if  any.) 

Discipline  may  be  defined  as  "The  preservation  of  order,  tlie 
prevention  of  all  kinds  of  offenses  and  the  faithful  performance  of 
every  kind  of  duty  without  delay  or  interruption." — Kautz's  Customs 
of  the  Service. 

Drill,  routine,  strict  attention  to  details,  proper  rewards  and 
the  invariable  admonition  or  punishment  of  all  derelictions  of  duty, 
are   the   best   methods   of   attaining  good   discipline. 

In  maintaining  discipline,  it  must  be  remembered  the  object  of 
punishment  should  be  two-fold:  (a)  To  prevent  the  commission  of 
ofifenses,  and  (b)  to  reform  the  offender.  They  should,  therefore,  in 
degree  and  character  depend  upon  the  nature  of  the  offense.  Punish- 
ment should  not  be  debasing  or  illegal,  and  the  penalty  should  be 
proportionate  to  the  nature  of  the  offense.  If  too  great  it  tends  to 
arouse  sympathy,  and  foster  friends  for  the  offender,  thus  encouraging 
a  repetition  of  the  oft'ense.  A  distinction,  therefore,  should  be  made 
between  the  deliberate  disregard  of  orders  and  regulations,  and 
offenses  which  are  the  result  of  ignorance  or  thoughtlessness.  In 
the  latter  case  the  punishment  should  be  for  the  purpose  of  instruction 
and  should  not  go  to  the  extent  of  inflicting  unnecessary  humiliation 
and  discouragement  upon  the  oft'ender.  In  the  administration  of 
discipline  the  following  principles  should  be  observed: 

1  Every  one,  officers  and  soldiers,  should  be  required  and  made 
to  perform  their  full  duty.  If  the  post  commander,  for  instance,  re- 
quires the  company  commanders  to  do  their  full  duty,  they  will  re- 
quire their  noncommissioned  officers  to  do  their  full  duty,  and  the 
noncommissioned  officers  will  in  turn  require,  the  men  to  do  the 
same. 

2  Subordinates  should  be  held  strictly  responsible  for  the 
proper  government  and  administration  of  their  respective  commands, 
and  all  changes  or  corrections  should  be  made  through  them. 


DISCIPLINE.  15 

3  Subordinates  should  have  exclusive  control  of  their  respec- 
tive commands  and  all  orders,  instructions  and  directions  affecting 
their  commands  should  be  given  through  them. 

4  If,  in  case  of  emergency,  it  be  not  practicable  to  make  cer- 
tain changes  or  corrections,  or  to  give  certain  orders,  instructions  or 
directions,  through  the  subordinates,  they  should  be  notified  at  once 
of  what  has  been   done. 

5  After  a  subordinate  has  been  placed  in  charge  of  a  certain 
duty,  all  instructions  pertaining  thereto  should  be  given  through  him, 
and  all  meddling  and  interfering  should  be  avoided.  Interference  by 
superiors  relieves  the  subordinate  of  responsibility,  and  causes  him 
to  lose  interest,  become  indififerent,  and  do  no  more  than  he  is  obliged 
to  do. 

6  The  certainty  of  rew^ard  for,  and  appreciation  of,  meritorious 
conduct,  should  equal  the  certainty  of  punishment  for  dereliction  of 
duty. 

7  It  is  the  duty  of  an  officer  or  noncommissioned  officer  who 
gives  an  order  to  see  that  it  is  obeyed;  carrying  out  orders  received 
by  him  does  not  end  with  their  perfunctory  transmission  to  sub- 
ordinates— this  is  only  a  small  part  of  his  duty.  He  must  personally 
see   that   the    orders    so    transmitted   are   made    effective. 

8  The  treatment  of  soldiers  should  be  uniform  and  just,  and 
under  no  circumstances  should  a  man  be  humiliated  unnecessarily  or 
abused.  Reproof  and  punishment  must  be  administered  with  dis- 
cretion and  judgment,  and  without  passion;  for  an  officer  or  non- 
commissioned officer  who  loses  his  temper  and  flies  into  a  tantrum 
has  failed  to  obtain  his  first  triumph  in  discipline.  He  who  can  not 
control  himself  can  not  control  others. 

9  Punishment  should  invariably  follow  dereliction  of  duty 
for  the  frequency  of  offenses  depends,  as  a  general  rule,  on  the  degree 
of  certainty  with  which  their  commission  is  attended  with  punish- 
ment. When  men  know  that  their  derelictions  and  neglects  will  be 
observed  and  reproved,  they  will  be  much  more  careful  than  they 
would  be   otherwise — that's   human   nature. 

10  Obedience — the  cardinal  principle  of  all  discipline — may  be 
defined  as  submission  to  the  laivful  orders  of  superiors.  Men  can  not 
be  punished  for  refusing  to  obey  illegal  orders.  -  The  question  then 
arises,  who  is  to  judge  of  the  legality  of  the  order?     It  is  evident  that 


16  CHAPTER  11.     • 

if  all  officers  and  soldiers  are  to  judge  when  an  order  is  lawful  and 
when  not,  the  captious  and  mutinous  would  never  be  at  a  loss  for  a 
plea  to  justify  their  insubordination.  It  is  therefore  on  established 
principle,  that  unless  an  order  is  so  manifestly  against  law  that  the 
question  does  not  admit  of  dispute,  the  order  must  first  be  obeyed  by 
the  inferior,  and  he  must  only  subsequently  seek  such  redress  against 
his  superior  as  the  law  allows.  If  the  inferior  disputes  the  legality 
before  obedience,  error  of  judgment  is  never  admitted  in  mitigation  of 
the  ofifense. 


THE  COMPANY  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS   17 


CHAPTER  III. 
THE  COMPANY  NONCOMMISSIONED   OFFICERS 

(See  corresponding  chapter  in  Supplement  for  additional  matter  and  changes,  if  any.) 

A  Experience  has  shown  that  it  is  the  company  in  which  the  Non- 
commissioned Officers  attend  to  details ;  the  company  in  which  ap- 
parent trifles,  such  as  excessive  swinging  of  the  arm  in  marching, 
improper  sloping  of  the  rifle  at  right  shoulder,  the  failure  to  cut 
away  the  hand  with  snap  in  the  manual  of  arms,  and  talking  and 
gazing  about  in  ranks — experience  has  shown  that  it  is  the  com- 
pany in  which  these  apparent  trifles  are  continually  corrected  that 
will  always  prove  most  satisfactory  to  its  commander  and  be  most 
efficient  in  the  field.  Attention  to  these  details  soon  becomes  a 
habit,  which  in  turn  is  applied  to  more  important  matters.  Remem- 
ber, too,  that  the  company  which  takes  pride  in  the  snap  and  accuracy 
with  which  it  does  things  on  the  parade  ground  is  also  most  likely 
to  be  the  company  that  will  conform  strictly  to  the  requirements  of 
discipline  in  garrison  and  in  the  field.  However,  noncommissioned 
officers  should  be  careful  to  correct  errors  in  a  just  and  dignified 
manner,  and  under  no  circumstances  to  allow  the  proper  correction 
of  errors  to  degenerate  into  nagging. 

B  Noncommissioned  Officers  can  do  much  to  prevent  the  commis- 
sion of  offenses  by  members  of  their  commands,  both  when  on  and 
when  off  duty,  and  such  prevention  is  as  much  their  duty  as  reporting 
offenses  after  they  are  committed;  in  fact,  it  is  much  better  to  pre- 
vent the  offense  than  to  bring  the  offender  to  trial. 

It  is  a  well  know^i  fact  that  the  Noncommissioned  Officers 
can  reduce  materially  the  number  of  courts-martial  in  a  company, 
by  studying  their  men  and  taking  an  interest  in  their  welfare;  by 
exercising  restraint  and  common  sense  while  at  the  same  time  preserving 
discipline.  Some  men  can  be  handled  only  with  stern  and  severe  measures, 
while  others  are  ruined  if  so  handled.  Sometimes  a  quiet  talk  from  a 
Noncommissioned  Officers  whom  the  man  respects  will  be  more  effec- 
tive and  beneficial  than  a  court-martial. 

C       Noncommissioned    Officers    must    make    the    men    understand    that 


18  CHAPTER  HI. 

they  mean  what  ihey  say;  that  they  will  stand  no  nonsense,  but  that 
on  the  other  hand  they  can  be  relied  upon  for  fair  and  square  treat- 
ment. 

A  No  company  can  be  a  good  company  if  discipline  in  quarters  is 
loose..  The  men  should  be  able  to  feel  that  in  quarters  they  have 
a  home  where  they  can  read,  sleep  and  converse  peacefully,  and  into 
which  rowdyism  cannot  penetrate.  The  Noncommissioned  Officers 
should,  therefore,"  take  special  care  to  stop  at  once  all  forms  of  boisterous 
conduct. 

B  Noncommissioned  Officers  must  insist  upon  privates'  addressing 
them  by  their  titles  of  "Sergeant"  and  "Corporal",  and  not  as  "Smith", 
"Jones",  etc. 

C  So  far  as  the  company  is  concerned,  the  Noncommissioned 
Officers  are  expected  to  assist  the  company  commander  in  carrying 
out  his  own  orders  and  those  of  his  superiors — they  should  see  that 
all  company  orders  are  obeyed  and  that  the  known  wishes  of  the 
captain  are  carried  out. 

D  Noncommissioned  Officers  clothed  in  the  proper  uniform  of  their 
grade  are  on  duty  at  all  times  and  places  for  the  suppression  of  disor- 
derly conduct  on  the  part  of  members  of  the  company  in  public  places. 
Men  creating  disorder  should  be  sent  to  their  quarters  in  arrest  and  the 
facts  reported  to  the  company  commander  without  delay. 

THE    USUAL    DUTIES    OF    THE    VARIOUS    COMPANY 
NONCOMMISSIONED    OFFICERS 

E        The    usual    duties    of    the    First    Sergeant    and    of    the    Quarter 
master    Seageant    are    much    more    uniform    throughout    the    service 
than    those    of    the    other    company    noncommissioned    officers.      See 
"The   First  Sergeant,"   Chapter   IV,   and  "The   Company   Quartermas- 
ter-Sergeant," Chapter  V. 

The  duties  of  the  Mess  Sergeant,  the  Chiefs  of  Squads,  the 
Noncommissioned  Officer  In  Charge  of  Quarters  and  the  Noncommis- 
sioned Officers  In  Charge  of  the  Squad-rooms,  differ  in  different  com- 
mands. However,  in  every  well  regulated  organization  they  are  in 
the  main  about  as  follows: 

F  The  Mess  Sergeant  draws  the  rations  of  the  company  and  looks 
after  the  property  of  the  mess,  keeping  a  list  of  same  in  a  book  furn- 
ished for  the  purpose.     He  checks  up  all  the  dishes  and  utensils  twice 


THE  COMPANY  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS   19 

a  month  and   reports  at  once  all   shortages  to  the  company  commander. 
He  also  reports  all  the  breakages. 

He  keeps  order  and  exercises  supervision  over  the  men  in  the 
dining  room,  over  which  he  has  general  supervision  at  all  times;  he 
sees  that  they  are  properly  seated  and  served;  that  every  man  gets 
plenty  of  every  article  to  eat  and  that  meals  are  served  promptly  at 
the  designated  hours.  He  sees  that  everyone  gets  plenty  to  eat,  but 
that  nothing  is  wasted  or  left  on  the  plates. 

Men  who  have  complaints  to  make  should  make  them  to  the  Mess 
Sergeant  at  meal  hours,  and  he  should  at  once  investigate  same, 
making  to  the  company  commander  such  report  thereof  as  may  be 
necessary. 

(Some  men  have  a  way  of  covering  bread  with  gravy  or  something  else  and 
then  leaving  it  untouched.  When  the  Mess  Sergeant  catches  a  man  wasting  food  in 
this  manner,  the  plate  should  be  saved  as  left  by  the  man  for  the  next  meal,  and  he 
has  to  eat  that  before  he  can  get  any  more  bread). 

He  sees  that  the  white  clothing  used  by  the  cooks  is  regularly 
and  properly  laundered,  mended  and  replaced,  and  that  the  cooks, 
waiters  and  others  connected  with  the  preparation  and  serving  of 
food,  at  all  times  appear  neat,  clean  and  tidy. 

The  Mess  Sergeant  should  keep  a  "Ration  Book"  in  which  are 
entered  each  issue  day  the  articles  drawn  and  the  articles  saved,  the 
entries  being  "O.  K'd."  by  the  commissary  sergeant. 

Care  and  common  sense  should  be  exercised  in  drawing  rations. 
Companies  have  been  known  to  draw  all  of  their  potatoes  at  once 
when  they  were  badly  sprouted,  and  thereby  losing  over  half  of  them 
before  they  could  be  used  up.  Again,  companies  have  been  known  to 
draw  all  their  butter,  already  strong  with  age,  so  that  by  the  latter 
part  of  the  period  it  would  not  be  fit  to  eat.  Of  course,  in  such 
cases  the  components  in  question  should  never  have  been  drawn — the 
money  value  should  have  been  saved.  All  articles  issued  by  the 
commissar}^  should  be  issuable — that  is  to  say  in  good,  wholesome 
condition. 

A  The  Noncommissioned  Officer  in  Charge  of  Quarters.  To  report 
to  the  company  commander  each  morning,  immediately  after  guard 
mounting,  for  orders. ^ 


1  At  some  posts  it  is  customary  foi    him  to  report  wearing  side-arms. 


20  CHAPTER  III. 

Proper  police  of  (jiiartcrs,  other  than  that  portion  assigned  to 
quartermaster-sergeant. 

Proper  police  of  grounds  around  company.  (Sometimes  done 
by  the   First   Sergeant.) 

To  see  that  no  loud  noise,  disturbance  or  disorder  occurs  in 
quarters,  and  that  no  unauthorized  persons  enter  the  barracks. 

To  inspect  the  quarters,  reporting  absentees,  at  eleven  o'clock 
p.  M.,  and  such  other  hours  during  the  night  as  may  be  designated  by 
the   company   commander. 

To  see  that  men  in  arrest  or  confined  to  barracks  do  not  leave 
the   same  without  proper   authority. 

To  keep  the  armracks  locked  at  all  times,  retaining  the  keys. 2 

He  will  accompany  the  company  commander  on  his  daily  in- 
spection of  the  barracks. 

To  see  that  no  liquor  of  any  description  is  brought  into  the 
quarters. 

He  will  have  charge  of  the  company  mail,  collecting,  mailing 
and  distributing  the  same  (3).     (Often  done  by  the  Company  Clerk). 

He  will  not  leave  the  barracks  during  his  tour  of  duty,  except 
to  go  to  the  postoffice,  as  provided  above. 

The  room  orderlies  are  subject  to  his  orders. 

A  Noncommissioned  Officers  in  Charge  of  Squad-Rooms.  The 
senior  Noncommissioned  Officer  in  each  squad-room  is  in  charge. 

He  is  responsible  that  corporals  in  charge  of  squads  perform 
the  duties  assigned  them  and  in  the  temporary  absence  of  corporals 
may   designate   privates   to   perform  their   duties. 

He  will  see  that  all  post  and  company  orders  in  regard  to  uni- 
formity of  bunks,  bedding,  clothing,  etc.,  are  strictly  carried  out. 

He  will  see  that  the  lights  in  his  squad-room  are  extinguished 
at  the  proper  time. 

He  will  see  that  no  liquor  of  any  description  is  brought  into  his 
squad-room. 


2  Some  company  commanders  require  the  "new  N.  C.  O.  in  charge  of  quarters 
to  verify  and  give  written  receipt  to  the  old  N.  C.  O.  for  (so  many)   rifles  and  the  keys. 

No  War  Dept.  orders  requiring  arm-racks  to  be  kept  locked  have  ever  been 
issued.  However,  ordinary  precaution  against  the  improper  use  of  arms  and  also 
due  care  for  the  preservation  of  Government  property,  require  that  it  be  done,  and 
the  custom  is  universal  througtout  the  Army.      See  Cir.  83,   '08. 

(3)  In  every  company  there  should  be  kept  in  some  convenient  place  a  mail 
1)ox  with  a  lock. 


THE  COMPANY  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS  21 

He  will  see  that  the  room  is  properly  ventilated  and  in  cold  or 
windy  weather  that  the  windows  are  lowered  from  the  top  and  not 
raised  from  the  bottom. 

He  will  be  in  charge  of  the  police  of  his  squad-room  when  gen- 
eral police  is  ordered. 

He  will  be  present  when  a  man's  clothing  is  checked  and  will 
report  any  shortage  to  the  company  commander.  (About  once  every 
two  weeks  the  clothing  of  a  few  men  selected  at  random  should  be 
checked.) 

He  will  keep  posted  in  the  squad-room  the  number  of  rifles  in 
each   rack. 

Chiefs  of  Squads.  To  inspect  their  squads  on  the  company 
parade  before  all  inspections  under  arms. 

To  see  that  each  man  polices  about  his  bunk,  folding  his  bed- 
ding in  the  prescribed  manner,  immediately  after  breakfast.  They  will 
designate  soldiers  to  look  after  the  bunks,  fioor  space,  etc.,  of  mem- 
bers of  the  squads  who  may  be  absent. 

To  make  an  accurate  check  once  a  month,  immediately  after 
muster,  of  all  clothing  in  possession  of  soldiers  and  all  equipment- 
issued  them.  They  will  report  the  result  of  the  check  to  the  Non- 
commissioned Officer  in  charge  of  squad-room. 

They  will  be  in  charge  of  their  respective  squads  when  genera) 
police  is  ordered. 

A  thorough  police  of  barracks  will  precede  the  Saturday  inspec 
tion.     The  chiefs  of  squads  will  see  that  bunks  and  bedding  are  over- 
hauled,  floors,   tables,  and  benches   scoured,   arms   and  accouterments 
cleaned,  and  all  leather  articles  polished.     (A.  R.  282). 

Chiefs  of  squads  will  be  held  responsible  for  the  cleanliness  of 
their  men.  They  will  see  that  those  who  are  to  go  on  duty  put  their 
arms,  accouterments,  and  clothing  in  the  best  order,  and  that  such  as 
have  passes  leave  the  post  in  proper  dress.     (A.  R.  283). 


22  CHAPTER  IV. 

CHAPTER  IV. 
THE  FIRST  SERGEANT 

(See  corresponding  chapter  in   Supplement  for  additional  matter  and  changes,   if  any.) 

A  It  has  been  said  that  the  Captain  is  the  proprietor  of  the  company 
and  the  First  Sergeant  is  the  foreman.  His  position  is,  indeed,  one  of 
importance  and  responsibility.  Through  speech,  manner  and  action 
he  must  leave  no  doubt  in  the  minds  of  each  and  every  member  of 
the  company,  noncommissioned  officers  and  privates,  that  next  to 
the  commissioned  officers  he  is  the  head  of  the  company  and  that 
during  the  absence  of  all  officers  he  is  the  Company  Commander's 
personal  representative  in  the  company  and  must  be  obeyed  and 
respected  accordingly. 

The  First  Sergeant  who  permits  any  "back-talk"  is  not  fit  for  the 
position — he  will  soon  be  looked  upon  by  the  men  of  the  company  as 
a  "joke." 

He  should  use  the  influence  and  prestige  of  his  position  to  further 
the  contentment,  harmony,  esprit  de  corps  of  the  company. 

He  can  do  a  great  deal  in  settling  minor  differences  between 
members  of  the  compan3\  » 

He  should  make  the  men  feel  that  thej^  have  in  him  a  good 
friend  and  a  loyal  comrade — one  who  always  has  time  to  listen  to 
their  troubles  and  straighten  out  their  difficulties. 

He  should  let  his  men  know  that  all  priveleges  consistent  with 
discipline  and  the  necessities  of  the  service  will  be  granted  them  and 
that  when  a  privilege  is  with-held  it  is  because  there  is  some  good 
reason  for  it  and  not  because  of  the  whim  or  fancy  of  someone  in 
authority  over  them. 

Remember  that  the  convenience  of  enlisted  men  can  often  be 
consulted  in  minor  matters  without  in  any  way  jeopardizing  discipline, 
and  that  when  possible  it  should  be  done — it  will  go  a  long  way 
toward  making  the  men  contented  and  satisfied. 

General  Duties,  (i) 

B        Under    supervision    of   the    captain   he    has    immediate   charge    of 
all   routine    matters   pertaining   to   the    company.      He   looks    after   all 
(1)  The  collated  experiences  of  ten  old  and  experienced  First  Sergeants. 


THE  FIRST  SERGEANT  23 

company  property,  books,  papers  and  records,  in  the  care  and  keep- 
ing of  which  lie  is  assisted  by  the  other  Noncommissioned  Officers 
and  tlie  compan}'  clerk. 

See  Chapter  XI,  " Paper-]]' ork." 
A  Every  day  at  "First  Sergeants'  Call"  he  will  repair  to  the 
adjutant's  office^  and  get  tlie  company  morning  report,  together  with 
a  list  of  the  Noncommissioned  Officers  and  the  number  of  privates 
required  for  guard  the  next  day.  He  will  also  receive  from  the  ser- 
geant-major such  orders,  communications,  etc.,  as  may  be  given  him 
for  the  company  officers.  He  will  show  the  company  officers,  with- 
out delay,  all  orders  and  instructions  affecting  them  or  the  company 
and  deliver  to  them  such  communications  as  may  be  addressed  to 
them. 

After  "First  Sergeants'  Call"  he  will  prepare  a  list  of  the 
names  of  the  Noncommissioned  Officers  and  privates  detailed  for 
guard  the  following  day.  This  will  be  posted  on  the  company 
bulletin  board,*  and  published  at  retreat. 

He  will  publish  to  the  company  at  retreat  all  post  general  orders 
received  that  day,  or  that  have  not  yet  been  read  to  the  men. 

Every  morning,  immediately  after  breakfast,  he  will  turn  out 
as  many  men  as  may  be  necessary  to  police  the  barracks  and  the 
grounds  around  the  quarters.  (This  is  sometimes  done  by  the  Non- 
commissioned officer  ifl  charge  of  quarters.) 

Every  Friday  he  will  ascertain  from  the  company  commander 
the  uniform  for  Saturday  morning  inspection  the  next  day  and  will 
notify  the  company  officers  and  the  company  accordingly. 

He  will  notify  the  mess-sergeant  of  the  soldiers  who  are  absent 
on  duty  and  for  whom  meals  must  be  saved. 

He  will  inform  the  Company  Quartermaster-Sergeant  of  all 
orders,  circulars  and  instructions  that  may  be  received  concerning 
Ordnance,  Quartermaster  or  any  other  property  pertaining  to  a 
compan3^ 

He  will  sec  tliat  all  drawers,  lockers  and  boxes  are  opened  at 
the  weekly,  monthly  and  other  formal  inspections  of  quarters  and  that 
the  Morning  Report,  the  Correspondence  Book  and  all  other  record 
books  are  laid  out  and  opened  for  examination  on  such  occasions. 


1  At  some  posts  it  is  customary  for  first  sergeants  to  wear  side-arms  at  "First 
Sergeants'   Call." 

*Every  company  should  have  a  large  bulletin  board,  hung  in  some  convenient 
place,  on  which  will  be  posted  all  orders,  notices,  etc.,  affecting  the  company. 


24  CHAPTER  IV. 

(He  may  do  this  by  giving  standing  instructions  to  the  company  -lerk  and 
the    noncommissioned    officers    in    charge    of    squad-rooms). 

It  is  customary  for  him  to  accompany  the  Company  Commander 
on  his  daily  inspection  of  the  barracks. 

He  will  see  that  camphor  balls  (or  coal  oil  and  lye)  are 
kept  in  the  urinals  and  that  all  metal  door  knobs,  faucets  and  other 
metal  parts  around  the  quarters  are  kept  properly  polished.  He  will 
also  see  that  all  window  panes  are  kept  clean.  (Sometimes  done, 
by  the  N.  C  O.  in  charge  of  quarters). 

A  The  Daily  Routine  Duties  of  a  First  Sergeant  are:  Taking  reveille 
roll  call;  entering  the  names  of  sick  on  the  Sick  Report,  and  sending 
the  report  and  the  sick  to  the  Hospital  by  a  noncommissioned  ofificer 
(generally  the  Noncommissioned  Ofificer  in  Charge  of  Quarters)  ;  mak- 
ing out  the  morning  report^  and  the  passes,  getting  the  Company 
Commander  to  sign  them  and  then  taking  them  to  post  headquarters; 
forming  and  inspecting  the  guard  detail  and  then  marching  it  to 
guard  mount;  repairing  to  post  headquarters  at  First  Sergeants*  Call 
to  receive  the  Morning  Report,  the  guard  and  fatigue  details  for  the 
next  day  and  such  orders  and  communications  as  there  may  be  for 
the  Company  Commander;  making  out  the  details  for  the  next  day 
and  making  the  proper  entries  in  the  Duty  Roster;  publishing  to  the 
company  at  retreat  the  guard  and  fatigue  details  for  the  following  day 
and  posting  same  on  the  company  bulletin  board;  forming  the  company 
and  calling  the  roll  for  all  drills,  ceremonies  and  other  formations; 
exercising  supervision"  over  the  official  correspondence  of  the  com- 
pany, and  preparing  for  the  signature  of  the  Company  Commander  all 
the  reports  and  returns  that  are  to  be  rendered  the  next  day,  and  the 
discharges  and  final  statements  of  men  to  be  discharged  the  following 
day. 

Things  the  First  Sergeant  Should  Take  Special  Care  To  Do. (2) 

B        To  ascertain  the  Captain's  wishes,  then  not  only  carry  them  out 
himself,  but  also  see  that  others  do  the  same. 
To  be  always  properly  and  neatly  dressed. 


1  The  First  Sergeant  should  never  submit  the  morning  report  to  the  Captain 
for  his  signature,  unless  he  has  satisfied  himself  by  checking  it  up  that  it  is  correct. 
It  is  astonishing  how  many  morning  reports  are  submitted  to  the  Adjutant's  Office 
with  mistakes. 

(2)  This  is  the  collated  experiences  of  ten  old  and  experienced  First  Sergeants. 


THE  FIRST  SERGEANT  25 

To  be  firm  but  not  overbearing. 
A        Have  no  favorites  and  do  justice  to  all,  being  strictly  honest  and 
distributing  equally  all  duties  among  the  members  of  the  company. 

Remember,  if  there  is  any  one  thing  that  soldiers  can  not  stand, 
it  is  partiality,  and  that  there  is  no  one  thing  that  will  destroy  the 
contentment,  harmony  and  esprit  de  corps  of  a  company  more  than 
continued  partiality  on  the  part  of  the  First  Sergeant..  Impartiality  is 
one  of  the  important  requisites  of  a  good  First  Sergeant. 

Alen  who  try  to  avoid  small  routine  duties,  such  as  policing 
around  quarters,  etc.,  should  be  given  at  once  a  task  of  a  harder  na- 
ture. If  the  First  Sergeant  overlooks  small  matters  like  this  on  the 
part  of  some  men,  it  will  not  be  long  before  other  men  will  get  into 
the  habit  of  avoiding  these  duties,  until  eventually  there  will  be  but 
a  few  men  doing  what  every  man  should  do,  with  the  consequent 
discontent  in  the  company.  Especially  is  this  true  in  the  field,  where 
this  matter  should  receive  the  special  attention  of  First  Sergeants. 

Have  a  place  for  everything  and  keep  everything  in  its  place. 

Obey  strictly  and  execute  promptly  all  the  orders  of  the  Com- 
pany Commander,  and  personally  see  that  they  are  complied  with  in 
the  company.  He  should  see  that  his  own  orders  are  strictly  and 
promptly  obeyed. 

Set  an  example  to  the  rest  of  the  company  in  morality,  sobriety, 
manliness  and  soldierly  bearing. 

Quell  promptly  with  a  firm  hand  any  disorder  that  may  arise 
in  the  company. 

Offences  committed  by  members  of  the  company  must  be 
promptly  reported  to  the  Company  Commander,  and  any  extra 
fatigue  awarded  by  the  Company  Commander  is  to  be  carried  into 
effect  as  soon  as  practicable. 

Make  it  a  rule  to  be  on  the  company  parade  at  least  three  or 
four  minutes  before  the  assembly  for  formations;  see  that'  the  men 
fall  in  promptly  at  the  assembly,  that  they  answer  to  their  names 
properly,  that  they  do  not  gaze  about  in  ranks  and  that  they  main- 
tain a  military  bearing  while  at  attention. 

If  a  man  is  too  drunk  to  remain  in  quarters  if  put  in  arrest,  he 
should  be  confined  in  the  guardhouse. 

He  should  learn,  as  far  as  practicable,  the  desires  of  the  members 
of  the  company  and  keep  the  Company  Commander  informed  of  them. 

If    anything    comes    up    that    requires    immediate    action,    act    at 


26  CHAPTER  IV. 

once  and  then  promptly  report  the  facts  to  the  Company  Commander. 

The  duty  roster  should  be  carefully  kept  so  that  there  shall  be 
no  grounds  for  complaint  on  the  part  of  the  men  detailed  and  no  sus- 
picion of  partiality. 

He  should  see  that  such  papers  as  need  comparison,  especially 
final  statements,  are  carefully  compared  before  being  presented  to  the 
Company  Commander  for  signature. 

Have  the  morning  report  signed  and  in  the  Adjutant's  Office 
every  morning  at  or  before  the  specified  time. 

After  clothing  has  been  drawn  take  special  care  to  see  that 
the  proper  amounts  are  entered  on  the  Descriptive  List  and  Account  of 
Pay  and  Clothing  of  each  man 

To  see  that  all  property  lost  through  neglect  is  charged  on  the 
Muster  and  the  Pay  Rolls  against  the  person  responsible. 

When  a  man  is  transferred,  note  on  his  Descriptive  List  all  con- 
victions by  Courts-Martial,  together  with  dates  and  amounts  of  for- 
feitures, and  in  the  case  of  men  going  on  detached  service  or  absent 
sick  in  hospital,  see  that  the  Descriptive  Lists  are  made  out  at  once 
and  promptly  forwarded  to  destination. 

Read  carefully  all  orders,  circulars  and  letters  of  instruction 
that  are  received. 

Things  the  First  Sergeant  Should  Take  Special  Care  NOP  To  Do.i 

Not  to  give  the  men  cause  to  feel  any  unfairness  in  details  or 
in  the  allotment  of  duty.  An  old  First  Sergeant  says  his  motto  has 
always  been  :  "Treat  every  man  justly,  whether  young  or  old,  and  yon  ivill 
gain  the  confidence  of  all." 

Not  to  do  anything  or  not  to  use  any  language  that  would  lead 
to  undue  familiarity  on  the  part  of  privates  or  noncommissioned  offi- 
cers, and  nor  should  he  allow  any  other  of  the  noncommissioned  offi- 
cers to  encourage  familiarity  between  themselves  and  the  privates. 

Do  not  trifle  with,  gibe  or  antagonize  the  men  of  the  company, 
and  never  try  to  act  as  "a  good  fellow"  with  those  under  you. 

Do  not  enter  into  any  quarrels,  disputes  or  arguments  of  any 
kind  with  members  of  the  company. 

While  he  should  not,  under  any  circumstances,  allow  other  non- 
commissioned officers  or  privates  to  tell  him  what  he  should  do,  he 
should,  on  the  other  hand,  always  be  open  to  suggestions. 


1  This  is  the  collated  experiences  of  ten  old  and  experienced  First. Sergeants. 


THE  FIRST  SERGEANT  27 

He  should  not  allow  noncommissioned  officers  and  privates  to 
tattle  to  him  about  members  of  the  company — if  they  have  anything 
to  say  about  anyone  they  should  tell  it  in  the  manner  of  a  verbal 
report. 

He  should  not  interfere  with  noncommissioned  officers  to  whom 
he  has  given  certain  work;  he  should  give  complete  instructions  be- 
fore the  work  is  commenced,  but  after  that  the  noncommissioned 
officer  in  charge  should  be  let  alone  and  only  required  to  PRODUCE 
THE  RESULTS— to  "deliver  the  goods."  U  interfered  with  by  the 
First  Sergeant,  a  noncommissioned  officer  will  become  discouraged 
and  his  usefulness  marred. 

He  should  not  have  any  business  dealings  with  members  of  the 
company,  especially  about  lending  money  on  interest,  and  he  should 
never  get  under  money  obligations  to  any  member  of  the  company. 

He  should  not  gamble  with  any  member  of  the  company.  (The 
First  Sergeant  who  does  should  be  promptly  reduced.)  Nor  should 
he  allow  any  other  noncommissioned  officer  to  do  so. 

Under  no  circumstances  should  he  allow  the  orderly  room  to  be- 
come a  loafing  place — no  one  should  ever  be  allowed  in  the  orderly 
room  except  on  business. 

Not  to  permit  any  disrespect  toward  noncommissioned  officers 
on  the  part  of  privates. 

Never  criticise  officers  or  noncommissioned  officers  in  the  hear- 
ing of  privates  or  other  noncommissioned  officers. 

A  First  Sergeant  should  not  lose  his  temper  and  take  as  a  per- 
sonal insult  any  disobedience  of  his  orders. 

H  ordered  by  higher  authority  to  have  any  duty  of  a  disagreeable 
nature  done,  do  not  act  and  order  its  being  done  as  if  it  were  dis- 
agreeable to  you  personally — do  not  say  that  you  are  having  it  done 
by  order  of  so  and  so.  Such  action  on  the  part  of  a  First  Sergeant 
is  childish  and  unmilitary. 

How  Can  a  FIRST  SERGEANT  Make  Himself  Most  Useful  To  His 
Captain  and  What  Are  The  Usual  Ways  of  Doing  So? 

A  By  faithfully  carrying  out  the  instructions  given  under  the  head- 
ings, "General  Duties,"  "Things  the  First  Sergeant  should  Take  Spe- 
cial Care  to  Do,"  and  "Things  the  First  Sergeant  Should  Take  Special 
Care  NOT  to  Do,"  and  by  taking  as  much  personal  pride  in  the  com- 
pany as   if  he   owned   it   himself;   by  doing   his   duty  conscientiously. 


28  CHAPTER  IV. 

without  fear  or  favor,  making  it  his  special  business  to  instill  disci- 
pline into  the  organization  and  to  correct  incessantly  all  faults  in  dress, 
demeanor  and  drill;  by  endeavoring  not  only  to  make  the  men  satis- 
fied with  the  company,  but  also  to  make  them  take  pride  in  it  and 
its  reputation.  Such  a  company  will  work  together,  like  one  man — 
the  Quartermaster  Sergeant  and  the  Artificer  will  make  it  their  boast 
that  they  are  never  short  and  that  the  company  is  the  best  equipped 
in  the  command ;  the  Mess  Sergeant  and  the  Cooks  will  tell  how 
theirs  is  the  best  fed  company  in  the  post;  the  Chiefs  of  Squads  will 
talk  enthusiastically  about  their  men;  the  Company  Clerk  will  boast 
that  his  is  the  most  methodical  and  systematic  office  in  the  regiment, 
and  that  no  papers  are  ever  sent  back  for  correction;  and  every  non- 
commissioned officer  and  private  will  brag  on  the  company, 

"Customs  of  the  Service"  Affecting  FIRST  SERGEANTS. 

It  is  a  very  general  cus.tom  for  members  of  the  company  to  get 
permission  from  the  First  Sergeant  to  speak  to  the  Company  Com- 
mander.    Some  Company  Commanders  give  orders  to  that  effect. 

It  is  customary- for  the  First  Sergeant  to  give  to  the  Company 
Commander  such  information  about  the  company  and  the  members 
thereof  as  he  deems  necessary  to  the  interest  of  the  organization. 

In  some  companies  the  First  Sergeant  has  standing  permission 
to  be  absent  from  check. 

It  is  customary  to  allow  the  First  Sergeant  considerable  lati- 
tude about  giving  verbal  orders  regarding  the  minor  routine  of  the 
company. 

Company  Commanders  are  very  liberal  about  granting  First 
Sergeants  passes  and  other  privileges. 

In  the  Cavalry  First  Sergeants  are  generally  allowed  to  use  their 
horses  between  reveille  and  retreat  without  having  to  get  permission 
from  the  Troop  Commander. 

LABOR    SAVING   DEVICES,    CONVENIENCES    AND    METHODS 
THAT  ARE  OF  USE  IN  THE  COMPANY  OFFICE. 

One  of  the  greatest  labor-saving  devices  in  a  company  office  is 
SYSTEM — system  in  everything. 


(As  a  rule  men  are  not  permitted  to  see  the  Company  Commander  at  his  quar- 
ters unless  there  is  some  good  reason  for  it.  They  usually  see  him  in  the  company 
office  or  as  he  is  leaving.) 


THE  FIRST  SERGEANT 


29 


Of  course  there  should  be  a  typewriter  in  every  company  office. 
The  purchase  of  a  machine  from  the  company  fund  is  authorized 
by  Cir.  56,  '06. 

The  following  devices  and  conveniences  not  only  save  time  and 
labor,  but  they  also  do  a  great  deal  tow^ard  introducing  method  and 
system  into  the  transaction  of  business  in  the  company  office: 

A  Company  Commander's  "Tickler,"  to  be  used  in  connection 
with  the  rendition  of  reports,  returns,  estimates  and  requisitions.  See 
page  92. 


Rubber  Stamps  Usually  Used  In  A  Company. 


(a) 


Indorsement 

Company   "I,"   24th   Infantry, 

Fort    Missoula,    Mont., 

190 


(b) 


(.For  other  stamps,  see  78  C  and  160   B). 


30  CHAPTER  IV. 


Blank  Forms. 


CA   useful    form    that    can   be   printed    on    the    regimental    press.      After 
being  read  to  company,  to  be  posted  on  bulletin  board.) 

TROOP  D,  3rd  CAVALRY. 


/pop. 


Detail  for  Tomorrow. 


FOR  MAIN  GUARD. 


(11    lines,  one  with  the  heading  "Sergt.,"  2  with  the  heading  "CorpL," 
1    "Trumptr.,"    1,   "Supernumerary,"   and   6,   "Privates.") 


FOR  STABLE  POLICE. 


(2  or  3   more  lines). 

FOR  FATIGUE. 


(3  or  4  more  lines). 

FOR  KITCHEN  POLICE. 


(1    more   line). 

ROOM  ORDERLIES. 


(1    more    line). 

IN  CHARGE  OF  QUARTERRS. 


REMARKS. 

(4    lines). 


1st  Setgeant. 


THE  FIRST  SERGEANT 


31 


Report  of 
NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICER 

In  Charge  of  Quarters. 

Troop    "A,"   20th    Cavalry. 


1909 


Received 

Issued  by  Q.  M.  Sergt.... 
Turned  in  to  Q.   M.  Sergt. 

On    Guard 

In   racks 

Turned   over 


Rifles 


Revolvers 


Received  :     spades  ;    shovels. 

Turned   over:    spades;    shovels. 


Serial   Number   of  Arms: 

Issued 


Rifles. 


Revolvers , 


Turned  In 


,Q.    M.    Sergt. 


Absent  From  Check. 


Remarks 


Explanatory 

Total    number    out    in    troop,    when 

N.    C.    O.    in    charge    of    Quarters 

goes   on   duty. 
To   recruits   and  others,   after   N.    C. 

O.   has   gone  on  duty. 
Men    discharged,    sent    to    hospital, 

etc.,   after   N.    C.   O.  has   gone   on 

dutv. 


Total    number    out    in   troop    turned 
over   to   successor. 


No. 
Rifle  No.  ... 
Revolver   No. 


(Bunk  card.      Size  214   x  3^   ins.) 


In  Charge  of  Quarters. 


1st   Sergeant. 
(Size  about  3J4  by  12  ins.) 
(For   pass  lists   and    other   blank   forms   see   pages    109,    111,    112,    113,    114.) 


32 


CHAPTER  IV. 


(To  be  used  by  individuals  in  enumerating  the  articles  of  clothing  they  wish  to  draw.) 

CLOTHING  REQUIRED. 
By Co.  "A,"  24th  Infantry 


No. 

Articles 

Size 

No. 

Articles 

Size 

Belts,   waist 

Neckties 

Blankets,   S.    B. 

Number,  hat 

Blankets,   O.   D. 

Ornaments 

Blouses 

Overcoats 

Boots,  rubber 

Overshoes 

Braid,  cord  edge 

Pajamas,  suits 

Breeches,  khaki 

Ponchos — Large 

Breeches,   O.   D. 

Old  pattern 

Caps — Dress 

Shirts — chambray 

Fur 

D.    B.    F. 

Khaki 

O.  D.  F. 

O.   D. 

, 

Muslin 

White 

Shoes — ^Barrack 

Cap   bands 

Black,   dress 

Chevrons — Dress 

Gymnasium 

Khaki 

Russet,  garrison 

O.    D. 

Marching 

White 

Black,  old  pat. 

Gun  Com'd'rs 

Russet,  old  pat. 

Observers 

Stockings — Cotton,  old  pat. 

Master  Gunners 

Cotton,  new  pat. 

Gunners,   each    Service 

Woolen,  heavy 

Coats — Canvas 

Woolen,  light 

Dress 

Stripes,   trousers 

Service,  Khaki 

Suspenders 

Service,  O.  D. 

Sweaters 

White 

Trousers — Dress 

Cords,  breast 

Canvas 

Cords,  hats 

White 

Collars 

Undershirts — - 

Drawers — Canton    flannel 

Cotton 

Cotton,  knit 

Nainsook 

Jean 

Winter,  heavy 

Nainsook 

Winter,  light 

Winter — heavy 

Buttons — 

Winter — light 

Bronze,  large 

Gauntlets — Fur 

Bronze,  small 

Leather 

Gilt,  large 

Gloves — Leather 

Gilt,  small 

Horsehide 

Overcoat 

Cotton 

Cloth  covert — O.  D. 

Wool 

D.   B. 

Hats — service 

Kersey— O.   D. 

Laces,   leggin,   prs. 

S.    B. 

Laces,  shoes,   prs. 

Lasting 

Leggins — Old  pattern 

Serge — -Khaki 

New   pattern 

O.    D. 

Letters — Hat 

Tags  and  tape 

U.   S. 

.Co.   "A,"   24th  Infantry. 


Date 

Countersigned : 


,,    190. 


,Co.  "A,"  24th  Infty. 
Chief  of   Squad. 


(Size   Syz    inches  x  8l4    inches.) 


THE  FIRST  SERGEANT  33 

ORDERS. 

The  following  are  the  usual  forms  of  the  company  orders  gen- 
erally issued: 

Company   "I,"   24th   Infantry, 
Fort   Missoula,   Mont.,   January    1,    1908. 
Orders 
No.  1. 

Artificer. 

Artificer  John  A.  Smith  is  hereby  relieved  from  duty  as  artificer,  and  Private 
Henry  Jones   appointed   in  his   stead. 

Robert   E.   Jackson, 
Captain  24th  Infantry,  Commanding  Co. 

Company   Clerk. 

Private   John   A.    Smith   is   hereby   detailed    on   special   duty    as    company    clerk. 

Company  Cook. 

(a)  Private  John  A.  Smith  is  hereby  relieved  as  company  cook,  and  Private 
Henry  Jones  appointed  in  his  stead. 

(b)  The  verbal  orders  of  the  company  commander  of  November  5,  1907, 
appointing  Private  John  A.  Smith  company  cook,  are  hereby  confirmed  and  made 
of  record. 

Company  Tailor 

Private  John  A.   Smith  is  hereby  detailed  on  special  duty  as  company  tailor. 

First  Sergeant 

First  Sergeant  John  A.  Smith  is  hereby  relieved  as  First  Sergeant,  and  Ser- 
geant Henry  Jones  is  appointed  in  his  stead. 

Lance  Corporal 

Private  John  A.  Smith  is  hereby  appointed  lance  corporal. 
He  will  be  obeyed  and  respected  accordingly. 

Musician 

(a)  Private  John  A.    Smith  is  hereby  appointed  musician. 

(b)  Musician  John  A.  Smith  is  hereby  relieved  as  musician  and  returned  to 
duty  as  private. 

Quartermaster  Sergeant 

Sergeant  John  A.  Smith  is  hereby  relieved  as  Quartermaster  Sergeant,  and 
Sergeant  Henry  Jones  detailed  in  his  stead. 

BOOKS  AND  RECORDS 

The  following  books  and  records  are  required  by  Army  Regu- 
lations to  be  kept  in  every  company: — 

A  I  Morning  Report  which  shows  the  exact  status  of  every  mem- 
ber of  the  company.  Changes  that  have  occurred  since  the  preceding 
reports  are  noted  in  figures  and  by  name. 


34  CHAPTER  IV. 

2  Sick  Report,  on  which  are  entered  the  names  of  all  enlisted 
men  requiring  medical  attention  and  such  officers  as  are  excused  from 
duty  because  of  illness. 

J  Duty  Roster.  A  form  on  which  is  kept  a  record  of  all  de- 
tails for  service  in  garrison  and  in  the  field,  except  the  authorized 
special  and  extra  duty  details.  For  instructions  regarding  rosters, 
see  ''Rosters  and  Detachments,"  Manual  of  Guard  Duty. 

4  Order  File,  consisting  of  a  file  of  all  orders  received  and 
issued. 

5  Company  Fund  Book,  in  which  are  entered  all  receipts  to, 
and  expenditures  from  the  company  fund,  together  with  the  proceed- 
ings of  the  Company  Council  of  Administration.  (The  Moss-Dalton 
Company  Fund  Book  is  recommended.  General  Agent:  The  U.  S.  In- 
fantry Association,  Washington,  D.  C. 

6  The  Company  Target  Records  consist  partly  of  a  series  of 
sheets  bound  on  the  loose-leaf  plan,  one  for  each  soldier,  on  which 
are  entered  his  record  practice  and  qualifications  for  each  season  of 
his  three  years'  enlistment.  Another  part  of  the  Company  Target 
Record  is  given  to  a  record  of  the  collective  fire  and  the  figure  of 
merit  of  the  company. 

7  Correspondence  Book,  with  index,  in  which  is  entered  with 
ink  or  indelible  pencil  a  brief  of  each  item  of  correspondence  in  re- 
spect to  which  a  record  is  necessary  and  a  notation  of  the  action 
taken  thereon.     (See  page  75). 

8  Document  File,  containing  the  original  documents  or  com- 
munications when  these  are  retained,  and  carbon,  letter  press  or 
other  legible  copies  of  all  letters,  indorsements  or  telegrams  sent 
with  regard  to  same.  The  file  also  contains  similar  copies  of  all  let- 
ters, indorsements  or  telegrams  originating  in  the  company  office. 
(See  page  'K)  A). 

9  Descriptive  List,  Military  Record  and  Clothing  Account,  on 
which  is  kept  a  full  description  of  every  man,  including  the  date  of 
enlistment,  personal  description,  a  record  of  deposits,  trials  by  court- 
martial,  etc.,  also  clothing  allowances  due  soldier  and  amounts  due 
U.  S.  for  clothing  drawn.  The  clothing  account  of  every  soldier  is 
balanced  June  30  and  December  31  of  each  year,  and  when  his  service 
with  an  organization  is  terminated. 

Every  year  the  War  Department  publishes  a  general  order  giving 
the  clothing  allowance  for  the  next  fiscal  year. 


THE  FIRST  SERGEANT  35 

10  A  Record  of  Sizes  of  Clothing  for  every  man  in  the  company 
as  ascertained  by  measurements.     See  Supplement,  Chap.  IV,  Par.  11. 

The  keeping  of  the  following  books,  although  not  required  by 
Regulations,  will  greatly  facilitate  and  systematize  company  admin- 
istration:— 

1  Delinquency  Book,  hi  which  are  noted  disciplinary  punish- 
ments awarded  by  the  company  commander.  (Cards  may  be  used 
instead.  The  Moss-Dalton  Delinquency  Book,  which  is  based  on 
the  loose-leaf  system,  is  recommended.  General  Agent:  The  U.  S. 
Infantry  Association,  Washington,  D.  C.) 

2  Memorandum  Book,  in  which  are  entered  court-martial  sen- 
tences, sicknesses,  stoppages  for  losses  of  ordnance  stores,  camp  or 
garrison  equipage,  and  all  other  data  necessary  to  make  out  the 
muster  and  pay  rolls.  (Or  a  card  or  slip  may  be  kept  for  each  man, 
all  the  necessary  data  for  the  muster  and  the  pay  rolls  being  noted 
thereon.  (The  Moss-Dalton  Muster  and  Pay  Roll  Data  Book,  based 
on  the  loose-leaf  system,  is  by  far  the  simplest,  most  handy  and 
business-like  way  of  keeping  this  data). 

S  Ration  Book,  in  which,  every  time  rations  are  drawn,  the 
quartermaster-sergeant  enters  the  total  number  of  rations  of  each 
ai  tide  drawn  and  the  number  of  rations  of  each  article  saved. 

4  Property  Book,  in  which  are  entered  all  ordnance  and  quar- 
termaster stores  in  the  possession  of  the  members  of  the  company. 
Get  from  the  quartermaster's  department,  or  some  other  source,  a 
blank  book  of  suitable  size  and  dimensions.  Beginning  with  number 
one,  number  the  pages  consecutively,  entering  on  each  page  alpha- 
betically a  list  of  the  stock  kit  of  a  soldier,  i.  e.: 

1  bunk;  1  bag,  barrack;  1  belt,  cartridge  (woven);  1  belt,  car- 
tridge, fair  leather;  1  box,  cartridge  (McKeever);  1  cup,  tin;  10 
cartridges,  multi-ball;  2  covers,  mattress;  1  cover,  front  sight  and 
muzzle;  1  can,  meat;  2  cases,  pillow;  1  canteen;  1  fork;  1  gun-sling; 
1  haversack;  1  holder,  card;  1  knife;  1  mattress;  1  oiler,  small  arm; 
1  pillow;  5  pins,  tent;  1  rifle;  1  strap,  haversack;  4  sheets,  bed;  1 
shelter  tent,  half;  1  spoon;  1  scabbard,  bayonet,  steel;  1  strap,  canteen. 

Rule  also  a  column  for  the  signature  of  the  soldier  in  whose 
possession  the  articles  are.  Soldiers  are  given  company  numbers 
corresponding  to  those  of  the  pages.  When  a  soldier's  kit  is  turned 
in,   a  red   line   is   drawn   through   his   signature — when   the   kit   is    re- 


36  CHAPTER  IV. 

issued  the  signature  of  the  new  man  appears  below,  thus  preserving 
a  complete  history  of  each  kit. 

The  numbers  of  the  rifles  in  the  company  are  entered  consecu- 
tively in  the  back  of  the  book,  opposite  each  being  the  company 
number  of  the  soldier  to  whom  it  is  issued.  (The  Moss-Dalton 
Property  Book,  based  on  the  loose-leaf  system,  is  recommended). 

THINGS  OF  INTEREST  TO  FIRST  SERGEANTS. 

A  Marriage  of  Enlisted  Men.  There  is  no  law  to  prevent  the 
marriage  of  enlisted  men,  but  when  they  marry  without  the  consent 
of  the  company  commander  they  may  forfeit  extra  privileges  which 
are  sometimes  granted  to  married  soldiers.  For  instance,  it  may  ex- 
clude the  wife  from  residence  within  the  garrison.  (Remarks  of 
A.  G.  and  C.  G.  A.  on  various  cases  from  1884  to  1902.) 

A  soldier  who  marries  without  the  permission  of  his  Regimental 
Commander  may  also  be  denied  re-enlistment. 

Married  soldiers  who  are  good  and  worthy  men  are  usually 
permitted  to  sleep  out  of  quarters,  on  or  off  the  reservation,  but  at- 
tending all  calls  and  formations;  draw  rations  separately  and  occupy 
available  vacant  quarters. 

B  Soldier  Shoemakers  and  Tailors.  It  is  not  seen  why  a  soldier 
who  happens  to  be  a  shoemaker  or  tailor  can  not  justly  and  without 
cause  of  complaint  (on  part  of  civilians),  after  having  performed  his 
military  duties,  do  outside  work  and  take  pay  for  it.  His  rights  to 
live  are  just  as  sacred  to  him,  and  his  wife  and  children  are  just  as 
dear  to  him,  and  their  support  just  as  important  to  him  as  they 
would  have  been  had  he  not  enlisted.  Besides  a  soldier's  rate  of  pay 
is  small.     (Ruling  of  War  Dept.  Sept.,  '92.) 

C  Venereal  Diseases.  Young  soldiers  disabled,  or  about  to  be- 
come disabled,  by  reason  of  venereal  disease  should  be  encouraged  by 
officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  to  report  sick  and  effect  an 
early  cure — they  should  be  taught  mildly  the  pernicious  effects  of 
such  diseases,  etc.     (Surgeon  General  and  A.  G.  O.) 

Enlisted  men  who  contract  venereal  diseases  and  report  them- 
selves to  the  post  surgeon  for  treatment  will  be  allowed  a  reasonable 
time  for  recovery,  provided  their  previous  good  service  and  character 
so  warrant;  but  men  who  are  found  to  be  incurable  and  men  who 
fail  to  report  for  treatment  will  be  discharged  on  S.  C.  D.  (Decision 
Sec'y  of  War,  Oct.,  '95). 


THE  FIRST  SERGEANT  37 

Discharge  for  venereal  diseases  should  not  be  without  honor 
and  there  should  be  no  objection  to  the  re-enlistment  of  a  man  dis- 
charged for  such  disease  if  he  has  entirely  recovered.  If  it  is  consid- 
ered in  the  interest  of  the  service  to  discharge  him  rather  than  retain 
him  until  recovery  he  should  be  given  the  usual  discharge  on  S.  C.  D., 
but  there  is  no  authority  for  indorsing  the  nature  of  the  disease  upon 
the  soldier's  discharge. 

For  Army  Regulation  paragraphs  and  War  Department  orders 
and  circulars  affecting  First  Sergeants,  and  for  returns,  estimates  and 
requisitions  to  be  submitted,  see  Chap.  IV,  Supplement. 


38  CHAPTER  V. 

CHAPTER  V. 
THE  COMPANY  QUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT 

(See  corresponding  chapter  in  Supplement  for  additional  matter  and  changes,  if  any.) 

The  Company  Quartermaster-Sergeant  may  be  called  the  general 
utility  man  of  the  company. 

A  General  Duties.i  His  general  duties  consist  in  looking  after  all 
Government  property  pertaining  to  the  company.  He  sees  that  it  is 
properly  stored,  cared  for  and  accounted  for.  Rifles  and  bayonets  not 
in  use  should  be  stored  in  a  dry  place  and  kept  well  oiled.  For 
method  of  cleaning  and  preserving  russet  leather,  see  page  58  B.  He 
also  has  charge  of  the  fuel  and  illuminating  supplies,  and  generally 
looks  after  the  repairs  of  the  quarters  and  sees  that  the  fire  buckets 
are  kept  filled  and  ready  for  use  and  that  the  water  is  frequently 
changed. 

All  property  should  be  kept  under  lock  and  key  and  the 
Quartermaster-Sergeant  should  be  sole  custodian  of  the  keys.  He 
should  never  leave  his  storeroom  without  first  seeing  that  it  is  locked, 
and  that  no  light  is  left  burning  in  the  room. 

He  receives  and  looks  after  the  equipment  of  men  who  are 
absent  on  account  of  sickness,  confinement  or  for  any  other  reason, 
and  sees  that  equipments  turned  in  by  discharged  men  are  clean  and 
in  serviceable  condition.  Whenever  a  man  is  absent,  sick  or  other- 
wise, his  property  should  be  tied  in  a  blanket  or  shelter-half,  put  away 
by  itself  and  tagged  with  the  man's  name. 

The  Company  Quartermaster-Sergeant  should  keep  himself 
posted  as  to  the  prices,  allowances,  etc.,  of  all  Government  property 
pertaining  to  a  company,  and  he  should  ask  the  First  Sergeant  and 
the  Company  Clerk  to  notify  him  whenever  orders  are  received 
making  changes  in  prices,  allowances,  etc. 

Things  the  Company  Quartermaster-Sergeant  should  take  Special 

Care  To  DoJ 

B        See  that  all  property  issued  to  the  members  of  the  company  is 


1  The  collated   experiences   of  nine   Company   Quartermaster-Sergeants. 


COMPANY  QUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT.        39 

receipted   for  when   the   issue   is   made,   and   that   property   gotten   by 
officers  is  entered  on  their  memorandum  receipts. 

Not  only  that  every  soldier  joining  is  furnished  with  the  required 
equipment,  but  also  that  every  article  is  in  good  serviceable  condition, 
and  marked  with  the  letter  of  the  organization,  the  number  of  the 
regiment  and  the  number  of  the  soldier.  The  number  of  all  arms 
issued,  transferred,  etc.,  should  be  carefully  noted. 

To  take  special  care  that  all  property  lost,  damaged  or  destroyed 
by  members  of  the  company  is  charged  up  against  them. 

His  Ordnance  and  Quartermaster  papers  should  be  so  kept  that 
he  can  tell  at  once  exactly  how  much  property  he  is  responsible  for 
and  where  it  is. 

An  inventory  should  be  taken  once  every  six  months,  and  prop- 
erty in  general  use,  such  as  spades,  axes,  shovels,  ash  barrels,  etc.. 
should  be  frequently  checked  up,  so  that  in  case  of  shortage  it  will 
not  be  so  difficult  to  fix  the  responsibility. 

Small  arms  and  their  appendages  should  be  well  oiled-  before 
being  stored. 

Sheets,  pillow  cases,  canvas,  etc.,  should  be  dried  thoroughly 
before  storing. 

Whenever  any  arms  are  turned  in  they  should  be  carefully 
inspected  and  any  needed  repairs  attended  to  without  delay. 

To  inform  the  Company  Commander  of  any  article  required  at 
the  time,  or  that  will  be  required  in  the  near  future,  for  the  proper 
equipment  of  the  company,  or  for  the  proper  care  of  such  equipment. 

Property  condemned  or  charged  on  Statement  of  Charges  should 
be  promptly  replaced. 

To  turn  in  all  unserviceable  Quartermaster  property  and  get 
credit  slips  for  same. 

He  should  keep  on  hand  a  supply  of  ammunition  for  target 
practice,  so  as  to  avoid  delay  when  it  is  needed,  and  he  must  be  careful 
to  keep  an  accurate  account  of  all  ammunition  expended. 

The  property  of  the  different  departments  should  be  kept  separ 
ately. 

On  dry  days  open  all  windows  and  doors  of  the  storeroom  and 
let  the  air  circulate  through  the  place. 


40  CHAPTER  V. 

See  that  all  property  is  properly  marked — that  which  is  issued 
to  individuals,  as  required  by  the  Army  Regulations;  that  which  is  in 
general  use  around  the  company,  with  the  letter  and  regiment  of  the 
organization.  Sheets,  pillow  slips,  etc.,  should  be  indelibly  marked 
with  a  rubber  stamp.  When  in  the  field  never  leave  a  camping  ground 
without  first  going  over  same — you  will  often  find  articles  of  Ordnance 
forgotten  by  some  of  the  men. 

In  preparing  Ordnance  stores  for  shipment  to  an  arsenal,  be  sure 
that  the  contents  of  the  package  tally  absolutely  with  the  invoice — do 
not  put  in  any  spare  parts  that  are  not  on  the  invoice. 

During  the  target  season  see  that  as  many  empty  shells  as  possible 
are  returned  and  have  them  thoroughly  cleaned  without  unnecessary 
dela}',  as  this  afifects  the  ammunition  allowance  of  the  company. 

Things  the  Company  Quartermaster-Sergeant  should  take  Special 

Care  NOT  to  Do.i 

A        Never  receipt  for  property  that  is  not  serviceable. 

Do  not  sign  for  property  without  first  having  received  it. 

Consult  the  Company  Commander  on  all  matters  of  importance, 
but  do  not  bother  him  with  useless  questions. 

Do  not  get  on  bad  terms  with  the  Post  Quartermaster-Sergeant 
or  the  Post  Ordnance  Sergeant  or  any  one  else  with  whom  you  may 
have  to  do  business. 

In  receipting  for  property  never  take  anything  for  granted — 
always  see  for  yourself — carry  out  the  popular  saying,  "/  am  from 
MISSOURI ;  you  must  show  me". 

(Whenever  packages  of  supplies  are  opened  for  the  first  time,  the  officer 
responsible  or  some  other  commissioned  officer  will  be  present  and  verify  the  contents 
by  actual  weight,  count  or  measurement.     A.   R.   673.) 

Never  issue  a  new  article  to  one  man  and  an  old  one  to  another; 
that  is  to  say,  shov/  no  favoritism,  but  treat  everyone  alike. 

Labor-Saving    Devices,    Conveniences   and    Methods   that   Are    of 
Value  to  a  Company  Quartermaster-Sergeant. 

B        The    storeroom    should    be    a    model    of    neatness,    system    and 
method.     There    should   be   as   many   shelves   as   possible,    which    can 


1  The   collated  experiences   of  nine   Company   Quartermaster-Sergeants. 


COMPANY  QUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT.        41 

be  made  of  packing  boxes  in  which  Ordnance  and  other  supplies  are 
received.  Oils,  paints  and  other  similar  articles  should  be  kept  on  the 
lower  shelves.  Everything  should  be  so  arranged  as  to  be  in  sight.  If 
this  be  not  practicable,  all  articles  not  so  exposed  to  view  that  they 
can  be  readily  counted,  should  be  listed  and  the  list  placed  where  it  can 
be  seen.  Especially  should  this  be  done  with  the  stores  in  chests 
and  boxes. 

Get  from  the  Quartermaster's  Department  a  blank  book  of  con- 
venient size  and  rule  it  with  proper  headings  as  a  charge  book.  In 
this  book  is  kept  a  complete  record  of  all  articles  issued  to  soldiers 
to  replace  those  lost  or  damaged.  In  order  to  avoid  discussion  in  the 
future,  soldiers  should  be  required  to  sign  in  the  book  for  articles 
so  issued. 

A       Rubber  Stamps. 

Co."A" 
24th    INFANTRY 
NO. 

The  figures  o  to  9  should  go  with  this  stamp. 

Used  for  the  marking  of  linen  and  clothing,  so  that  the  marking  throughout  the 
company   shall   be   uniform.  * 

B  A  stencil  outfit  to  mark  Ordnance  equipments  is  furnished  b}^  the 
Ordnance  Department,  and  a  marking  set  for  marking  boxes,  etc.,  can 
be  obtained  from  the  Quartermaster's  Department. 

C  Grindstone.  A  small  grindstone  about  six  inches  in  diameter,  to 
sharpen  kitchen   knives,   etc.,   is  a   convenience. 

D  Hand-Cart.  If  the  company  has  not  a  hand-cart,  effort  should  be 
made  to  get  one  from  the  Quartermaster's  Department.  A  hand-cart 
is  one  of  the  greatest  conveniences  that  a  company  can  have.  Not  only 
is  it  always  at  hand  for  the  transportation  of  rations,  clothing  and 
other  supplies  drawn  by  the  company,  but  it  can  also  be  used  continually 
around  the  company  for  various  purposes. 

E  A  Kit  of  Tools  is  issued  to  each  company  by  the  Ordnance  De- 
partment for  use  in  repairing  the  rifle  and  bayonet,  and  in  regulating 
the  socket  spring  of  the  woven  cartridge  belt,  model  1903. 


42  CHAPTER  V. 

A  Arm  Racks  and  Arm  Chests  are  issued  by  the  Ordnance  Depart- 
ment for  the  safe  keeping  of  small  arms.  Officers  who  are  responsible 
for  small  arms,  and  who  neglect  to  obtain  these  chests,  are  regarded 
as  not  having  taken  every  precaution  to  prevent  loss.  (Cir.  83,  '08). 
Upon  change  of  station  arm  racks  are  invoiced  to  the  post  ordnance 
officer,  for  the  use  of  incoming  organizations.      (G.  O.   134,  '08). 

How    Can    a    Company    Quartermaster-Sergeant    Make    Himself 
Most  Useful  to  His  Company  Commander? 

B  By  being  careful  and  methodical  in  looking  after  the  propert}'' 
interests  of  the  company;  by  familiarizing  himself  with  all  orders  and 
regulations  that  affect  him;  by  having  the  property  in  such  condition 
that  it  can  be  easily  checked  at  a  moment's  notice  and  in  case  of  a 
sudden  move  the  Company  Commander  would  not  have  to  bother 
himself  about  getting  his  property  together  and  preparing  it  for 
shipment. 


CHAPTER  VI. 

NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICER  IN  CHARGE  OF 

RECRUITS 

(See  corrcsf-'onding  cliaptcr  in  Supplement  for  additional  matter  and  changes,  ,if  any.} 

The  recruit  is,  of  course,  ignorant  of  all  military  matters,  but  he 
is  usually  willing  to  learn  and  will  submit  without  complaint  to  more 
hours  of  instruction  than  ever  afterwards  in  his  military  career.  Much 
of  his  unsoldierly  conduct  and  awkwardness — from  which  he  frequently 
reaps  humiliation  through  harsh  and  ill-considered  correction — is  the 
direct  result  of  his  ignorance  for  which  he  is  in  no  way  responsible, 
and  this  ignorance  should  be  removed  by  patient  and  systematic  instruction. 

Explain  to  the  recruit  that  there  is  a  great  deal  in  the  service 
besides  brass  buttons  and  dress  parades.  There  is  plenty  of  hard  work 
to  do,  some  of  it  disagreeable  work,  but  it  is  all  necessary,  and  should 
be  done  cheerfully.  After  his  first  difficulties  are  over,  he  will  find 
much  of  interest  and  benefit  in   the  service. 

Tell  him  that  he  is  not  expected  to  know  everything  or  do  every- 
thing correctly  at  first;  but  he  is  expected  to  be  attentive  and  careful, 
and  above  all  to  do  whatever  he  is  told  to  do  by  his  officers  and  non- 
commissioned officers. 

Impress  upon  him  tlie  importance  of  starting  of¥  right  in  his 
career  as  a  soldier. 

Let  him  know  that  while  his  officers  and  noncommissioned 
officers  are  forbidden  to  be  harsh  or  abusive,  they  are  required  to  be 
firm  and  to  see  that  the  recruit  docs  his  work  promptly  and  properly. 

Advise  him  of  the  fact  that  if  at  an^^  time  he  thinks  he  is  not 
being  rightly  treated,  he  may  get  permission  from  the  First  Sergeant 
to  speak  to  his  company  commander  and  lay  the  facts  before  him,  and 
that  his  company  commander  will  see  that  he  receives  justice. 
Instruct  him  when  and  where  to  find  the  company  commander  and 
how  to  present  himself.  Th'us:  He  will  stand  at  attention,  three  or 
four  paces  in  front  of  the  company  commander,  salute  and  say,  for 
instance,  "Sir,  Private  Smith  has  permission  to  speak  to  the  Captain'', 


44  CHAPTER  VI. 

and  then  briefly  state  his  case.  Caution  him  about  never  referring  to 
an  officer  as  "you"  and  to  end  all  statements  by  "sir".  (See  Forms  of 
Speech,  page  49.)  When  dismissed  by  the  company  commander,  the 
recruit  will  salute,  execute  about  face  and  leave.  Should  the  First 
Sergeant  refuse  the  recruit  permission  to  speak  to  the  company  com- 
mander, the  recruit,  if  his  complaint  be  sufficiently  serious,  may  go  to 
the  company  commander  direct,  reporting  the  fact  that  the  First 
Sergeant  refused  to  give  him  permission  to  see  the  company  com 
mander. 

While  firm  and  thorough,  the  Noncommissioned  Officer  in  Charge 
of  Recruits  should  be  patient  and  considerate  with  the  recruit — by  his 
bearing,  speech  and  appearance,  he  should  set  an  example  for  the 
young  soldier.  He  should  remember  that  the  life  of  the  recruit  is  the 
most  trying  part  of  a  soldier's  career — that  the  work  and  requirements 
being  new  and  strange,  they  seem  to  the  recruit  in  many  ways  useless 
and  at  times  even  degrading.  Some  recruits,  for  instance,  misunder- 
stand the  nature  of  the  salute  and  failing  to  see  any  necessity  therefor, 
are  averse  to  saluting  officers.  The  reason  and  significance  of  the 
salute,  therefore,  as  well  as  all  other  things  he  does  not  understand, 
should  be  carefully  explained  to  him,  and  as  often  as  may  be  necessary. 
He  should  be  told  there  is  a  reason  for  everything  that  he  is  required 
to  do,  and  that  study  and  hard  work  on  the  part  of  experienced 
officers  has  shown  that  not  only  are  salutes,  setting  up  exercises, 
squad  drills,  etc.,  necessary  to  make  a  soldier  out  of  a  man,  but  that 
they  are  the  best  and  quickest  means  of  attaining  that  end. 

The  setting  up  exercises,  for  example,  in  addition  to  giving  a 
man  a  military  bearing,  render  his  limbs  more  supple,  thereby  giving 
him  better  control  of  them,  also  develop  and  strengthen  the  muscles 
and  other  parts  of  the  body,  so  that  the  soldier  may  be  better  able  to 
endure  any  physical  exertion  and  hardship  that  he  may  be  required  to 
undergo  in  garrison,  in  camp,  on  the  march  or  in  battle. 

The  squad  drill  gives  an  elastic  step,  enabling  the  recruit  to  walk 
and  carry  himself  like  a  soldier;  it  accustoms  him  to  respond  at  once 
to  commands,  so  that  he  may  be  quickly  and  easily  handled  on  the 
field  of  battle. 

All  instruction  given  the  recruit  has  but  one  final  object  in  view: 

To  prepare  and  fit   him  for  the  crucial   test — What  to  Do  on  the 
Field  of  Battle  and  How  to  Do  it. 

As   a   rule,   an    infantry   recruit   is    given    instruction    about   three 


THE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICER  IN  45 

CHARGE  OF  RECRUITS. 

hours  a  day  for  thirty  (hiys  or  so,  before  being  taken  up  for  guard, 
police  and  other  duty;  cavab^y  and  artillery  recruits  generally  require 
longer  periods  of  instruction.  The  several  daily  periods  of  instruction 
should  not  exceed  45  minutes  each — if  they  do,  the  recruit's  mind  will 
become  tired  and  his  attention  will  lag. 

The  following  general  scheme  of  instruction  is  merely  given  as 
a  guide. 

FIRST  TEN  DAYS 

Individual  Instruction  Without  Arms.  Setting-up  exercises, 
salutes  with  the  hand,  marchings,  etc. 

Barrack  Regulations.  The  regulations  of  the  company  con- 
cerning the  conduct  of  the  men  in  barracks  will  be  explained. 

Post  Orders.  All  post  orders  regarding  the  conduct  of  en- 
listed men  will  be  read  and  explained. 

Articles  of  War.  All  provisions  affecting  enlisted  men  to  be 
carefully  explained,  and  the  consequences  of  their  violation  made 
clear.  Special  attention  to  be  invited  to  Articles  47  and  48,  regarding 
desertion,  emphasizing  the  disgraceful,  ignominous  nature  of  the 
offense,  the  conviction  of  which  involves  the  forfeiture  of  the  rights 
'  of  citizenship  and  the  incapacity  to  hold  ofifice  under  the  United 
States.  (Sec.  1996  and  1999,  Rvd.  Sts.)  Conviction  of  desertion  also 
forfeits  all  right  to  pension  which  the  soldier  might  otherwise  have. 
(See  page  395). 

Army  Regulations.  Such  paragraphs  as  immediately  affect  en- 
listed men,  especially  the  general  requirements  of  governing  each 
soldier's  responsibility  for  the  safe  keeping  and  care  of  all  articles 
of  clothing  and  equipment  issued  him.     / 

A       What  is  Obedience?     It  is  compliance  with  everything  that  is  re 
quired  by  authority — it  is  the  mainspring,  the  very  soul  and  essence 
of  all  military  duty.     It  is  said  a  famous  general  once  remarked  everj^ 
soldier  should  know  three  things — "First,  obedience;  second,  obedience; 
third,  obedience". 

Cheerful,  earnest  and  loyal  obedience  must  be  paid  by  all  sub- 
ordinates to  the  orders  of  their  superiors. 

A  soldier  should  obey  first  and  if  aggrieved  complain  afterward. 

All    duty    should   be   performed   cheerfully   and    willingly.      Soldiers 


46  CHAPTER  VI. 

are  sometimes  required  to  perform  duties  that  are  not  pleasant — for 
instance,  doing  guard  duty  on  a  cold,  rainy  night,  when  tired  and 
sleepy;  digging  ditches  or  cleaning  up  dirt  and  filth  that  have  ac- 
cumulated around  the  barracks,  kitchens,  quarters,  etc.,  scrubbing  floors, 
polishing  stoves,  cleaning  knives,  forks,  pots,  etc.  However,  by  doing 
everything  required  of  him  in  a  cheerful  manner,  a  soldier  will  soon 
earn  the  respect  of  his  comrades  and  the  commendation  of  his  officers. 
■A  Is  it  important  that  privates  should  always  obey  noncommissioned  officers? 
Yes,  it  is  most  important  that  they  should  respect  and  obey 
their  noncommissioned  officers  and  recognize  their  authority  under  all 
circumstances.  Even  if  the  noncommissioned  officer  be  at  fault,  this 
gives  the  private  no  aggressive  rights.  If,  for  instance,  a  noncom 
missioned  officer  should  strike  a  private,  justly  or  unjustly,  this 
would  not  give  the  private  the  right  to  strike  back.  The  private 
should  at  once  make  complaint  to  the  captain,  who  will  see  that  justice 
is  done  him.  If  the  principle  of  soldiers  taking  such  grievances  into 
their  own  hands  were  recognized,  the  Army  would  soon  become  a  mob. 

(Note.  The  recruit  should  be  taught  the  different  ranks  of  officers  and  non- 
commissioned  officers,  the  authority  they  possess  and  the  respect   due  them.) 

If  in  ignorance  of  any  matter  relating  to  his  rights,  privileges  or  any 
thing  else,  what  should  a  recruit  do?  He  should  apply  to  a  noncommis- 
sioned officer  of  his  company,  preferably  the  one  in  charge  of  recruits. 
If  not  satisfied  with  the  information  thus  received  he  should  then  go 
to  the  first  sergeant. 

Military  Deportment  and  Appearance 

The  recruit  is  no  longer  a  civilian  but  a  soldier.  He  is,  however,, 
still  a  citizen  of  the  United  States  and  by  becoming  a  soldier  also  he 
is  in  no  way  relieved  of  the  responsibilities  of  a  citizen;  he  has  merely 
assumed  in  addition  thereto  the  responsibilities  of  a  soldier.  For 
instance,  if  he  should  visit  an  adjoining  town  and  become  drunk  and 
disorderly  while  in  uniform,  not  only  could  he  be  arrested  and  tried 
l)y  the  civil  authorities,  but  he  could  also  be  tried  by  the  summary 
court  at  his  post  for  conduct  to  the  prejudice  of  good  order  and  mili- 
tary discipline.  Indeed,  his  uniform  is  in  no  way  whatsoever  a  license 
for  him. to  do  anything  contrary  to  law  and  be  protected  by  the  gov 
ernment. 

Being  a  soldier,  he  must  conduct  himself  as  such  at  all  time?, 
that  he   may  be   looked   upon   not   only   by   his   superior   officers   as   a 


THE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICER  IN  47 

CHARGE  OF  RECRUITS. 

soldier,  but  also  by  the  public  as  a  man  in  every  way  worthy  of  the 
uniform  of  the  American  soldier. 

Whether  on  or  off  duty,  he  should  always  look  neat  and  clean, 
ever  remembering  that  in  bearing  and  in  conversation  he  should  be 
every  inch  a  soldier — shoes  must  be  clean  and  polished  at  all  times; 
no  chewing,  spitting,  gazing  about,  or  raising  of  hands  in  ranks — he 
should  know  his  drill,  his  orders  and  his  duties — he  should  always 
be  ready  and  willing  to  learn  all  he  can  about  his  profession — he 
should  never  debase  himself  with  drink. 

It  should  be  remembered  that  the  soldiers  of  a  command  can 
make  the  uniform  carry  distinction  and  respect,  or  they  can  make  it 
a  thing  to  be  derided. 

The  soldier  should  take  pride  in  his  uniform. 

A  soldier  should  be  soldierly  in  dress,  soldierly  in  carriage, 
soldierly  in  courtesies. 

A  civilian  owes  it  to  himself  to  be  neat  in  dress.  A  soldier  owes 
it  to  more  than  himself — he  owes  it  to  his  comrades,  to  his  company — 
he  owes  it  to  his  country,  for  just  so  far  as  a  soldier  is  slack  so  far 
does  his  company  suffer;his  shabbiness  reflects  first  upon  himself, 
then  upon  his  company  and  finally  upon  the  entire  Army. 

It  is  a  fact  known  to  students  of  human  nature  that  just  in 
proportion  as  a  man  is  neatly  and  trimly  dressed  is  he  apt  to  conduct 
himself  with  like  decency.  The  worst  vagabonds  in  our  communities 
are  the  tramps,  with  their  dirty  bodies  and  dirty  clothes;  the  most 
brutal  deeds  in  all  history  were  those  of  the  ragged,  motley  mobs  of 
Paris  in  the  days-  of  the  French  Revolution;  the  first  act  of  the 
mutineer  has  ever  been  to  debase  and  deride  his  uniform. 

It  is  also  a  well  known  fact  that  laxity  in  dress  and  negligence 
in  military  courtesy  run  hand  in  hand  with  laxity  and  negligence  in 
almost  everything  else,  and  that  is  why  we  can  always  look  for 
certain  infallible  symptoms  in  the  individual  dress,  carriage  and 
courtesies  of  soldiers. 

Should   a   soldier  give   care   and   attention    to    his   dress/ 

Yes,  sir;  not  only  should  a  soldier  be  always  neatly  dressed, 
but  he  should  also  be  properly  dressed — that  is,  he  should  be  dressed 
as  required  by  Regulations.  A  soldier  should  always  be  neat  and 
trim,  precise  in  dress  and  carriage  and  punctilious  in  salute.  Under 
no  circumstances  should  the  blouse  or  overcoat  be  w^orn  unbuttoned, 


ks  CHAPTER  vr. 


^c 


or  the  cap  l)ack  or  on  llic  sick-  of  ihc  head.  His  hair  should  be  kept 
properly  trininicd,  his  face  clean  shaved  or  heard  trimmed  and  his 
shoes  polished,  his  trousers  pressed,  the  1)elt  accurately  fitted  to  the 
waist  so  that  it  does  not  sag,  his  leggins  cleaned,  his  brass  letters, 
numbers  and  crossed  rifles  polished,  and  his  white  gloves  immaculate. 

Should  a  mail  ever  be  allozved  to  leave  tJie  post  on  pass  if  not 
properly  dressed f 

No,  sir;  never.  The  Army  Regulations  require  that  chiefs  of 
squads  shall  see  that  such  members  of  their  squads  as  have  passes 
leave  the  post  in  proper  dress. 

Should  a  soldier  ever  stand  or  icalk  zvitJi  his  Jiaiids  in  his  pockets? 

No,  sir;  never.  There  is  nothing  more  unmilitary  than  to  see  a 
soldier  standing  or  walking  with  his  hands  in  his  pockets. 

The  real  soldier  always  stands  erect.     He  never  slouches. 

Is  it  permissible,  while  in  uniform,  to  wear  picture  buttons,  chains, 
watch  charms,  etc.,  exposed   to   view? 

No,  sir;  it  is  not. 

May  the  campaign  hat  or  any  otJier  parts  of  the  uniform  be  worn 
with  civilian  dress? 

No,  sir;  this  is  prohibited  by  the  uniform  order,  which  especially 
states  that  when  the  civilian  dress  is  worn  it  will  not  be  accompanied  by 
any  mark  or  part  of  the  uniform. 

May  a  mixed  uniform  be  worn — for  example,  a  khaki  coat  and  olive 
drab  trousers? 

No,  sir;  under  no  circumstances. 

Personal  Cleanliness. 

Is  personal  cleanliness  a  matter  of  importance? 

Yes,  and  the  Army  Regulations  require  soldiers  to  bathe  frequently. 

in  this  company  soldiers  are  required  to  bathe  at  least a  week. 

They  are  also  required  to  brush  their  teeth  and  comb  their  hair  daily.  The 
Army  Regulations  require  that  the  hair  be  kept  short  and  the  beard  neatly 
trimmed,  and  that  all  soiled  clothing  be  kept  in  the  barrack  bag.  It  is 
also  required  that  in  garrison,  and  whenever  practicable  in  the  field, 
soldiers  wash  their  hands  thoroughly  after  going  to  the  latrines  and  before 
each  meal,  in  order  to  prevent  the  transmission  of  typhoid  fever  and  other 
diseases  by  germs  taken  into  the  mouth  with  food  .from  unclean  hands. 

What  may  be  done  to  a  soldier  who  persists  in  being  filthy? 

He  may  be  scrubbed  by  order  of  the  Captain. 


TIJE  NONCOiM MISSIONED  OFFICER  IN  49 

CHARGE  OF  RECRUITS. 

Who  is  iiiiiiicdidlcly  rcsl^niisihlc  for  the  cleanliness  of  the  soldiers? 
According  to  the   Army   Regulations,   each   chief   of   squad   is   held 
responsible  for  the  cleanliness  of  his  men. 

FORMS   OF   SPEECH 

(The  recruit  will  actually  go  through  the  act  of  addressing  an  officer,  entering 
an  office,  delivering  a  message,  etc.) 

In  Speaking  to  an  officer,  is  it  proper  to  say,  "You,  etc.,"  and  "I,  etc.?" 
No,  sir;  in  speaking  to  an  officer  the  third  person  should  be  used, 
as,   "Does   the   Captain   want  his   horse  this   morning?";    "Private    Smith 
would  like  to  speak  to  the  Captain  about  his  furlough,"  etc. 

(Note.  After  the  conversation  has  commenced,  it  is  not  customary  for  the 
speaker  to  use  the  third  person  instead  of  the  pronouns  "I"  and  "me."  However, 
an  officer  is  ahvays  addressed  in  the  third  person  and  never  as  "you.") 

How  should  an  enlisted  man  refer  to  another  enlisted  man  when 
speaking  to  on  ofUcerf 

He  should  use  the  proper  title,  as  "Sergeant-Major  Smith",  "Ser- 
geant Jones",  "Corporal  Richards",  "Private  Wilson", 

How  should  noncommissioned  officers  always  be  addressed? 

They  should  always  be  addressed  as  "Sergeant  Smith",  "Corporal 
Jones",  etc.,  and  not  as  "Smith",   "Jones",   etc. 

When  asked  his  name,  what  sJiould  a  soldier  answer? 

He  should  answer,  for  instance,  "Private  Jones,  Sir". 

What  should  a  soldier  do  when  given  an  order  or  instructions  by 
an  oificer? 

He  should  salute,  and  say,  "Yes,  sir". 

How  should  short,  direct  answers  be  made? 

"No,  sir",  "Yes,  sir",  "I  don't  know,  sir",  "I  will  try,  sir",  etc.,  are 
forms  that  should  be  used  in  answer  to  direct  questions. 

After  one  has  finished  a  thing  that  he  has  been  ordered  to  do,  what 
should  he  do^ 

He  should  always  report  to  the  officer  who  gave  him  the  order.  For 
instance  "The  Captain's  message  to  Lieutenant  Smith  has  been  delivered". 

When  ordered  to  report  to  an  officer  for  any  purpose,  should  a 
soldier  ever  go  away  without  first  ascertaining  if  the  officer  is  through 
with  him? 

No,  sir;  he  should  not,  as  it  often  happens  that  the  officer  is  not 
through  with  the  soldier  when  the  latter  thinl^s  he  is.  He  may,  for 
instance,  report:    "Sir,  is  the  Captain  through  with  me?" 


50  CHAPTER  V]. 

When  an  officer  calls  to  a  soldier  who  is  some  distance  away,  what 
should  the  soldier  do? 

He  should  immediately  salute,  and  say,  "Yes,  sir,"  and  if  necessary, 
approach  the  officer  with  a  quickened  step. 

MISCELLANEOUS 

A       Hczv  should  a  soldier  enter  an  office  in  which  there  is  an  officer? 

He  should  give  t\vo  or  three  knocks  at  the  door  (whether  it  be 
open  or  closed)  ;  when  told  to  come  in,  enter,  taking  off  the  hat  (if 
unarmed),  close  the  door  and  remain  just  inside  the  door  until  asked 
what  is  wanted;  then  go  within  a  short  distance  of  the  officer,  stand  at 
attention,  salute  and  make  known  your  request  in  as  few  words  as 
possible.  On  completion,  salute,  face  toward  the  door,  and  go  out,  being 
careful  to  close  the  door  if  it  was  closed  when  you  entered,  li  it  was 
not  closed,  leave  it  open. 
B        Shculd  complaints  be  made  directly  to  flic  Captain? 

Complaints  must  never  be  made  directly  to  the  Captain  unless  the 
soldier  has  the  Captain's  permission  to  do  so,  or  the  First  Sergeant 
refuses  to  have  the  matter  reported.  H  dissatisfied  with  his  food,  clothing, 
duties,  or  treatment,  the  facts  should  be  reported  'to  the  First  Sergeant, 
with  the  request,  if  necessary,  to  see  the  Captain. 

It  is  also  customary  for  soldiers  who  wish  to  speak  to  the  Captain 
about  anything  to  see  the  First  Sergeant  first,  and  when  speaking  to  the 
Captain  to  inform  him  that  he  has  the  First  Sergeant's  permission  to  do  so. 
Thus:  "Private  Smith  has  the  First  Sergeant's  permission  to  speak  to 
the  Captain,  etc''. 
C       How  is  a  soldier  paid? 

As  soon  as  the  company  is  formed  in  column  of  files,  take  off  your 
right-hand  glove,  and  fold  it  around  your  belt  in  front  of  the  right  hip. 
When  your  name  is  called,  answer  "Here",  step  forward  and  halt  directly 
in  front  of  the  paymaster,  who  will  be  directly  behind  the  table;  salute 
him.  When  he  spreads  out  your  pay  on  the  table  in  front  of  you,  count 
it  quickly,  take  it  up  with  your  ungloved  hand,  execute  a  left  or  right 
face  and  leave  the  room  and  building,  unless  you  wish  to  deposit,  in  which 
case,  you  will  remain  in  the  hall  outside  the  pay-room,  until  the  company 
has  been  paid,  when  you  enter  the  pay-room.  Men  wishing  to  deposit 
money  with  the  paymaster,  will  always  notify  the  first  sergeant  before 
the  company  is  marched  to  the  pay  table. 
D      How  is  a  message  delivered? 


THE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICER  IN  51 

CHARGE  OF  RECRUITS. 

When  an  enlisted  man  receives  a  message,  verbal  or  written,  from 
an  officer  for  delivery,  he  will  in  case  he  does  not  understand  his  instruc- 
tions, ask  the  officer  to  repeat  them,  saying,  for  instance,  "Sir,  Private 
Smith,  does  not  understand;  will  the  Captain  please  repeat?"  When  he 
has  received  his  instructions,  and  understands  them,  he  will  salute,  and 
say :  "Yes,  sir",  execute  an  about  face,  and  proceed  immediately  to  the 
officer  for  whom  the  message  is  intended.  He  will  halt  three  or  four 
paces  directly  in  front  of  the  officer  and  if  the  officer  be  junior  to  the 
officer  sending  the  message,  he  will  say,  "Sir,  Captain  Smith  presents  his 
compliments,"  etc.,  and  then  deliver  the  message,  or,  "The  commanding 
officer  presents  his  compliments  to  Lieutenant  Smith  and  would  like 
to  see  him  at  headquarters".  He  will  salute  immediately  before  he  begins 
to  address  the  officer  and  will  hold  his  hand  at  the  position  of  salute 
while  he  says,  "Sir,  Captain  Smith  presents  his  compliments",  or  "The 
commanding  officer  presents  his  compliments  to  Lieutenant  Smith".  If 
the  officer  sending  the  message  be  much  junior  to  the  one  receiving  it, 
the  soldier  will  riot  present  his  compliments,  but  wall  say,  for  instance, 
"Sir,  Lieut.  Smith  directed  me  to  hand  this  letter  to  the  Captain"'  or 
"Sir,  Lieut.  Smjth  directed  me  to  say  to  the  Captain",  etc.  As  soon  as 
the  message  has  been  delivered,  the  soldier  will  salute,  execute  an 
about  face,  and  proceed  at  once  to  the  officer  who  sent  the  message, 
and  will  similarly  report  to  him,  "Sir,  the  Lieutenant's  message  to  Capt. 
Smith  has  been  delivered",  and  leave. 

Before  leaving  always  ascertain  whether  there  is  an  answer. 
A       How  does  a   soldier  appear  as   a   witness   befqre   a  general  court- 
martial  F 

The  uniform  is  that  prescribed,  with  side  arms  and  gloves.  Proceed 
to  the  court-room  and  remain  outside.  When  you  are  notified  that  you 
are  wanted  enter  the  room.  Then  take  off  your  cap  and  right  hand 
glove,  and  raise  "your  right  hand  above  your  head,  palm  to  the  front,  to 
be  sworn.  After  the  judge-advocate  reads  the  oath,  say,  "I  do"  or  "So 
help  me  God".  Then  sit  down  in  the  chair  indicated  by  the  judge-advo- 
cate. Do  not  cross  your  legs,  but  sit  upright.  When  asked,  "Do  you 
know  the  accused?  If  so,  state  who  he  is,"  answer,  "I  do;  Corporal 
John  Jones,  Co.  'B'  ist  Infantry."  Be  sure  you  thoroughly  understand 
every  question  before  you  start  to  reply,  answ-ering  them  all  promptly, 
in  a  loud,  distinct,  deliberate  voice,  and  confining  your  answers  strictly 
to  the  questions  asked  and  telling  all  you  know. 


52  CHAPTER  VL 

When  the  judge-advocate  says  "That  is  all,"  arise,  salute  him, 
execute  an  about  face,  and  leave  the  room. 

At  some  posts  it  is  customaij'  for  soldiers  to  appear  in  the  same  manner  when 
summoned  as  a  witness  before  a  summary  court,  while  at  other  posts  side  arms  and 
gloves  are  not  worn. 

SECOND  TEN  DAYS 

Individual  Instruction  with  Arms.  Bayonet  exercises,  manual  of 
arms,  loadings,  firings  and  marchings. 

Nomenclature  of  the  Rifle. 

The  names  of  all  the  various  parts  of  the  rifle  and  their  function? 
to  be  explained — also  the  manner  of  dismounting  and  assembling  the  sam.e 
(See  Chapter  XVIII). 

A  Care  of  Clothing,  Arms  and  Other  Equipment.  These  articles 
are  given  the  recruit  by  the  government  for  certain  purposes,  and  he 
has,  therefore,  no  right  to  be  in  any  way  careless  or  neglectful  of  them. 

Clothing,  Ornaments  and  Buttons. 

Every  article  of  clothing  in  the  hands  of  an  enlisted  man  should 
receive  as  much  care  as  he  gives  to  his  person. 

Spots  should  always  be  removed  as  soon  as  possible.  Preparations 
for  this  purpose  can  always  be  obtained  from  any  drug  store  at  small  cost.l 

Turpentine  will  take  out  paint.  Grease  spots  can  be  removed  by 
placing  a  piece  of  brown  paper,  newspaper,  or  other  absorbent  paper 
over  the  stain,  and  the  pressing  with  a  hot  iron. 

B  Chevrons  and  stripes  can  be  cleaned  by  moistening  a  clean  woolen 
rag  with  gasoline  and  rubbing  the  parts  and  then  pressing  with  a  hot  iron. 

Blue  clothing  should  be  thoroughly  brushed  and  pressed  once  a 
week — two  pressing  irons  and  boards  in  a  company,  troop  or  battery 
will  provide  for  this. 

C  All  gilt  ornaments  and  buttons  should  be  polished  once  a  week — one 
button  stick  and  brush  per  squad  should  be  provided  for  this  purpose. 
"Polishine"  is  recommended  as  a  suitable  polish — although  there  are  many 
others  just  as  good,  but  none  better.  Olive  drab  clothing  should  also  be 
pressed  weekly.  This  will  stimulate  a  desire  in  the  men  to  take  better  care 
of  their  clothing,  as  a  wrinkled  or  soiled  article  is  thrown  around  care- 
lessly— while  a  pressed  article  is  faid  away  to  prevent  its  wrinkling,  thus 
lasting  longer, 

1  All  cleaning  material  should  be  purchased  by  the  soldier  from  the  company, 
for  cash  or  credit,  at  cost  price.  This  would  give  many  who  have  no  credit  at  the 
exchange  a  chance  to  procure  such  articles  as  are  essential  to  the  proper  care  and 
preservation  of  their  clothing  and  equipment. 


THE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICER  IN 
CHARGE  OF  RECRUITS. 


53 


A  Soiled  khaki  clothing  and  leggings  should  be  washed  by  the  men — 
they  can  generally  do  it  better  than  the  laundry.  Khaki  and  leggings 
require  little  or  no  pressing,  if  not  wrung  out  before  being  placed  out 
to  dry.  Khaki  so  washed  wears  about  twice  as  long  as  when  washed  by 
a  steam  laundry. 

The  service  hat  and  blue  and  olive  drab  caps  require  nothing  but 
brushing.  The  cover  for  the  khaki  cap  should  be  washed  as  often  as 
necessary — not  oftener,  perhaps,  than  every  two  weeks  and  always  in 
cold  water  and  dried  on  the  cap  itself. 

No  article  should  be  worn  without  first  being  brushed. 

Shirts,  underwear,  socks  etc.,  should  be  laid  away  neatly.  Articles 
of  clothing  soiled  from  wear  or  from  long  standing  in  the  locker  should 
soiled  from  wear  or  from  long  standing  in  the  locker  should  be  sent  to 
the  laundry  immediately. 

A  special  suit  of  clothing  should  be  set  aside  for  inspections,  parades, 
and  other  ceremonies  and  the  uniform  w^orn  at  these  formations  should 
not  be  worn  in  barracks — each  man  invariably  has  sufficient  old  garments 
for  barrack  use.  A  change  of  clothing  after  formation  will  be  found 
to  be  a  great  help  in  preserving  clothing.  The  special  suit  mentioned 
should  be  kept  well  brushed,  pressed  and  neatly  folded. 

The  following  list  of  clothing,  the  cost  of  which  aggregates  $87.97,  is 
considered  a  liberal  allowance  and  provides  a  very  complete  equipment  for 
the  first  year  of  enlisted  service ;  to  this  allowance  $25  should  be  added 
for  the  second  year  and  $20  for  the  third.  A  soldier  should,  therefore, 
at  the  end  of  his  first  enlistment  find  himself  with  approximately  $40  to 
his  credit  from  his  clothing  allowance.  (These  figures  are  based  on  the 
present,  July,  1909,  clothing  allowances). 


List 


1  Blanket,   heavy  weight; 
3   Breeches,   khaki; 

2  Breeches,    olive    drab; 
1   Cap,  dress; 

1    Cap,  khaki ; 

1  Cap,  olive  drab; 

1  Coat,  dress; 

3  Coats,  khaki; 

2  Coats,    olive   drab. 
6  Collars,   linen; 

1   Cord,   breast; 


2  Letters,  U.   S.   gilt,   collar; 

2  Ornaments,   cap,   bronze; 

1  Ornament,    cap,    gilt; 

2  Ornaments,    collar,    gilt; 

4  Ornaments,   collar,    bronze; 

1  Overcoat; 

2  Shirts,   olive   drab. 
2  Shirts,    muslin; 

2  pr.   Shoes,  russet; 

1  pr.    Shoes,    calf   skin ; 

1  Slicker; 


OF    THE 

UNIVERSITY 

OF 


54 


CHAPTER  VI. 


2  Cords,   hat; 

3  Drawers,  canton  flannel; 
12   pr.    Gloves,   white,   cotton; 

2   pr.    Gloves,    white,    wool; 

1  Hat,  service; 

2  pr.   Leggins,  puttee; 


12  pr.    Stockings,   cotton,   dark  brown; 

2  pr.   Stockings,   wool,   heavy ; 
1   pr.   Suspenders; 

1   Trousers,   dress; 

3  Undershirts,    cot'ton; 

3  Undershirts,    wool,    light. 


THE   CARE   AND   PRESERVATION   OF    SHOES 

Shoes  should  at  all  times  be  kept  polished,  by  being  so  kept  they  are 
made  more  pliable  and  wear  longer. 

Shoes  must  withstand  harder  service  than  any  other  article  worn, 
and  more  shoes  are  ruined  through  neglect  than  by  wear  in  actual 
service. 

Proper  care  should  be  taken  in  selecting  shoes  to  secure  a  proper 
fit,  and  by  giving  shoes  occasional  attention  much  discomfort  and 
complaint  will  be  avoided. 

Selection.  A  shoe  should  always  have  ample  length,  as  the  foot 
will  always  work  forward  fully  a  half  size  in  the  shoe  when  walking, 
and  sufficient  allowance  for  this  should  be  made.  More  feet  are 
crippled  and  distorted  by  shoes  that  are  too  short  than  for  any  other 
reason.  A  shoe  should  fit  snug  yet  be  comfortable  over  ball  and 
instep,  and  when  first  worn  should  not  lace  close  together  over  instep. 
Leather  always  stretches  and  loosens  at  instep  and  can  be  taken  up  by 
lacing.  The  foot  should  always  be  held  firmly  but  not  too  tightly 
in  proper  position.  If  shoes  are  too  loose,  they  allow  the  foot  to  slip 
around,  causing  the  foot  to  chafe;  corns.,  bunions,  and  enlarged  joints 
are  the  result. 

Repairs.  At  the  first  sign  of  a  break  shoes  should  be  repaired,  if 
possible.  Always  keep  the  heels  in  good  condition.  If  the  heel  is 
allowed  to  run  down  at  side,  it  is  bad  for  the  shoe  and  worse  for  the 
foot;  it  also  weakens  the  ankle  and  subjects  the  shoe  to  an  uneven 
strain,  which  makes  it  more  liable  to  give  out.  Shoes  if  kept  in 
repair  will  give   double  the   service  and  comfort. 

Shoe  Dressing.  The  leather  must  not  be  permitted  to  become 
hard  and  stiff.  If  it  is  impossible  to  procure  a  good  shoe  dressing, 
neat's-foot  oil  or  tallow  are  the  best  substitutes;  either  will  soften 
the  leather  and  preserve  its  pliabilit}^  Leather  requires  oil  to  preserve 
its  pliability,  and  if  not  supplied  will  become  brUtle,  crack,  and 
break    easily    under    strain.      Inferior    dressings    are    always    harmful, 


THE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICER  IN  55 

CHARGE  OF  RECRUITS. 

and  no  dressing  should  be  used  which  contains  acid'  or  varnish. 
Acid  burns  leather  as  it  would  the  skin,  and  polish  containing  varnish 
forms  a  false  skin  which  soon  peels  off,  spoiling  the  appearance  of 
the  shoe  and  causing  the  leather  to  crack.  Paste  polish  containing 
turpentine  should  also  be  avoided. 

Perspiration.  Shoes  becoming  damp  from  perspiration  should 
be  dried  naturally  by  evaporation.  It  is  dangerous  to  dry  leather  by 
artificial  heat.  Perspiration  contains  acid  which  is  harmful  to  leather, 
and  shoes  should  be  dried  out  as  frequently  as  possible. 

Wet  Shoes.  Wet  or  ,damp  shoes  should  be  dried  with  great 
care.  When  leather  is  subjected  to  heat,  a  chemical  change  takes 
place,  although  no  change  in  appearance  may  be  noted  at  the  time. 
Leather  when  burnt  becomes  dry  and  parched  and  will  soon  crack 
through  like  pasteboard  when  strained.  This  applies  to  leather  both 
in  soles  and  uppers.  When  dried,  the  leather  should  always  be  treated 
with  dressing  to  restore  its  pliability.  Many  shoes  are  burned  while 
on  the  feet  without  knowledge  of  the  wearer  by  being  placed  while 
wet  on  the  rail  of  a  stove  or  near  a  steam  pipe.  Care  should  be  taken 
while  shoes  are  being  worn  never  to  place  the  foot  where  there  is 
danger  of  their  being  burned. 

Keep  Shoes  Clean.  An  occasional  application  of  soap  and  water 
will  remove  the  accumulations  of  old  dressing  and  allow  fresh  dressing 
to  accomplish  its  purpose. 

Directions  For  Polishing.  Russet  calf  leather  should  be  treated 
with  great  care.  Neither  acid,  lemon  juice,  nor  banana  peel  should 
be  used  for  cleaning  purposes.  Only  the  best  liquid  dressing  should 
be  used  and  shoes  should  not  be  rubbed  while  wet. 

Black  calf  shoes  should  be  cleaned  frequently  and  no  accumula- 
tion of  old  blacking  allowed  to  remain.  An  occasional  application  of 
neat's-foot  oil  is  beneficial  to  this  leather,  and  the  best  calf  blacking 
only  should  be  used  to  obtain  polish. 

Liquid  Dressing.  Care  should  be  taken  in  using  liquid  dressing. 
Apply  only  a  light  even  coat  and  allozv  this  to  dry  into  the  leather  before 
rubbing  with  a  cloth.  When  sufficiently  dry  to  rub,  a  fine  powdery 
substance  remains  on  the  surface.  This,  when  rubbed  with  a  soft  cloth, 
produces  a  high  polish  that  lasts  a  long  time  and  which  is  quickly  renewed 
by  an  occasional  rubbing.  Too  much  dressing  is  useless  and  injurious. 
{Quartermaster  General's  Office,  June  i6,  i88g). 


56  CHAPTER  VL 

The  rifle. 

As  the  bore  of  the  rifle  is  manufactured  with  great  care  in  order 
that  a  high  degree  of  accuracy  may  be  obtained,  it  should  be  carefully 
cared  for.  What  remains  from  smokeless  powder  tends  to  eat  and  wear 
away  the  bore  and  should,  therefore,  be  removed  as  soon  after  firing 
as  practicable. 

The  proper  way  of  cleaning  a  rifle  is  from  the  breech.  For  this 
purpose  the  barrack  cleaning-rod  should  be  used. 

To  clean  a  rifle  use  rags,  preferably  canton  flannel,  cut  them  into 
squares  of  such  size  that  they  may  be  easily  run  through  the  barrel. 
Remove  the  bolt  from  the  rifle,  place  the  muzzle  on  the  floor  and  do 
not  remove  it  therefrom  while  the  cleaning- rod  is  in  the  bore.  Wrap 
a  rag  that  has  been  thoroughly  soaked  in  a  saturated  solution  of  soda  and 
water  around  the  point  of  the  cleaning-rod,  insert  it  into  the  bore  and 
work  back  and  forth  in  the  bore.  Follow  with  dry  rags  until  the  bore  is 
thoroughly  dry,  then  remove  the  muzzle  from  the  floor  and  with  a 
small  stick  and  a  new  rag,  soaked  in  the  same  solution  proceed  to  clean 
the  muzzle  end  of  the  bore.  This  should  find  the  bore  free  from  dirt, 
rust  etc.  Clean  again  with  rags  dipped  in  oil,  preferably  "3  in  i",  dry 
thoroughly  and  apply  a  thin  coating  of  the  same  oil.  Repeat  the  process 
of  cleaning  with  oil  daily  and  the  bore  will  at  all  times  be  thoroughly 
clean.    Five  minutes  work  a  day  will  accomplish  this. 

To  clean  the  bolt,  dismount  it,  clean  all  parts  thoroughly  with  an 
oily  rag,  dry,  and  before  assembling  lightly  oil  the  firing  pin,  the  barrel 
of  the  sleeve,  the  striker,  the  well  of  the  bolt  and  all  cams. 

The  stock  and  hand  guard  should  receive  a  light  coat  of  raw  lin- 
seed oil  once  a  month,  or  after  any  wetting  from  rain,  dew  etc. — this 
should  be  thoroughly  rubbed  in  with  the  hand. 

The  chamber,  magazine  and  other  parts  require  very  little  care — 
wiping,  drying,  brushing  and  coating  with  a  thin  coat  of  oil,  as  in  the 
bore,  is  sufficient  to  keep  these  parts  clean. 

Unless  the  rifle  is  to  be  stored  away,  or  not  used  for  any  length  of 
time,  the  use  of  cosmic  oil  should  be  discouraged — it  is  thick  and  sticky 
which  makes  it  hard  to  remove  without  the  use  of  gasoline  or  chloro- 
form. 

Pomade  is  valueless  in  the  tare  of  the  rifle;  pomade  is  of  use  only 
in  the  burnishing  and  polishing  of  brasses  and  coppers,  and  even  then 
it  is  not  as  good  as  "Polishine", 

Never,   under  any  circumstances,    should   a    recruit   l)e   permitted    to 


THE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICER  IN  57 

CHARGE  OF  RECRUITS. 

use    ernory    paper    on    any    part    of    his    rifle — the   use    of    the    burnisher 
likewise  should  be  prohibited. 

In  the  place  of  emory  paper  or  the  burnisher  an  ordinary  rubl)er 
eraser  will  be  found  very  serviceable. 

The  Bayonet. 
A       The  bayonet  need  not  be  taken  apart  in  order  to  clean  it.     With  a 
small    stick — small    enough    to    be    used    inside    the   cut    for   the   scabbard 
catch,  hook  and  clearance  cut — an  oily  rag  and  a  rubber  eraser,  the  bayonet 
can   be  thoroughly  cleaned. 

The  rawhide  cover  of  the  bayonet  scabbard  should  be  washed  once 
a  month  with  castile  soap  and  water,  then  rub  a  small  quantity  of  leather 
dressing  all  over  and  into  the  leather  with  a  brush,  sponge  or  rag;  then 
wipe  with  a  damp  rag  or  sponge.  This  will  remove  all  dirt  and  stains. 
Allow  to  dry  and  next  apply  a  light  coat  of  some  cream  paste.  Wait  a 
moment  for  this  to  dry,  then  polish  with  a  clean  brush  or  rag. 

The  metallic  parts  require  nothing  but  an  occasional  wiping  off 
with  an  oily  rag —  these  parts  should  then  be  dried. 

Are  enlisted  men  allowed  to  take  their  arms  apart? 
B       No,  not  unless  they  have  the  permission  of  a  commissioned  officer, 
and  even  then  only  under  proper  supervision  and  in  the  manner  prescribed 
in   the  descriptive   pamphlet   issued   by  the   Ordnance   Department. 

(Except  when  repairs  are  needed,  the  following  named  parts  should  never  be 
dismounted  by  the  soldier,  and  whenever  they  are  taken  apart  they  should  be  re- 
moved only  by  the  artificer,  or  some  one  else  familiar  with  the  handling  of  tools  and 
delicate  mechanisms:  Bolt  stop,  cut  off,  safety  lock,  sleeve  lock,  front  sight,  front 
sight  movable   stud,   lower   band,   upper  band   and  stacking   swivel   screws. 

Unless  the  screw  driver  is  handled  carefully  and  with  some  skill  the  screws 
are  sure  to  be  injured  either  at  the  head  or  thread.) 

Is  the  polishing  of  blued  and  browned  parts  permitted f 
C  No,  and  rebluing,  rebrowning,  putting  any  portion  of  an  arm  in 
fire,  removing  a  receiver  from  a  barrel,  mutilating  any  part  by  firing  or 
otherwise,  and  attempting  to  beautifj'-  or  change  the  finish,  are  prohibited. 
However,  the  prohibition  of  attempts  to  beautify  or  change  the  finish  of 
arms,  is  not  construed  as  forbidding  the  application  of  raw  linseed  oil 
to  the  wood  parts  of  arms.  This  oil  is  considered  necessary  for  the 
preservation  of  the  w^ood,  and  it  may  be  used  for  such  polishing  as 
can  be  given  when  rubbing  in  one  or  more  coats  when  necessary.  The 
use  of  raw  linseed  oil  only  is  allowed  for  redressing  and  the   appli- 


58  CHAPTER  VL 

cation  for  such  purpose  of  any  kind  of  wax  or  varnish,  including  heelball, 
is  strictly  prohibited, 

Is  the  use  of  tompions  1  in  small  arms  permitted? 

No,  it  is  prohibited  by  regulations. 

Should  pieces  he  unloaded  before  being  taken  to  quarters  or  tents? 

Yes,  unless  it  is  otherwise  ordered.  They  should  also  be  unloaded 
as  soon  as  the  men  using  them  are  relieved  from  duty. 

Should  a  loaded  or  unloaded  rifle  or  revolver  ever  be  pointed  at 
anyone  in  play? 

No,  sir;  under  no  circumstances  whatsoever.  A  soldier  should 
never  point  a  rifle  or  a  revolver  at  a  person  unless  he  intends  to 
shoot  him. 

NOTES. 

A         It  is  easier  to  prevent  than  to  remove  rust. 

Oil  to  be  used  only  to  remove  rust  or  after  firing  or  when  going  out  in  damp 
weather.  When  occasion  for  its  use  has  passed,  it  should  be  carefully  wiped  off,  so 
as  not  to  collect  dust  and  sand. 

To  remove  rust,  apply  oil  with  rag  and  let  it  stand  for  awhile  so  as  to  soften 
rust — weapon  then  wiped  clean  with  dry  rag.  Emery  paper  should  never  be  used 
to   remove   rust. 

To  prevent  dust  and  rust  in  bore,  a  good  strong  gun  string  should  be  fre- 
quently  used. 

All  articles  of  brass  to  be  kept  brightly  polished. 

Never  put  away  arms  and  equipment  before  cleaning. 

Emery  paper,  burnisher  and  sand  are  used  only  on  sabers,  bayonets,  mess  kits 
and  other  bright  metal.  Under  no  circumstances  should  they  ever  be  used  on  blued 
or  browned  metal. 

Cosmic  oil  and  emery  paper  may  generally  be  gotten  from  the  company  quar- 
termaster-sergeant. Polishine,  burnisher,  chamois  skin,  machine  oil  ("3-in-l")  and 
button  stick  must  be  bought  by  the  soldier.  (Usually  obtainable  from  the  Post 
Exchange.) 

B       Russet  Leather  Equipment. 

To  preserve  the  life  of  russet  leather  equipments  they  should 
be  cleaned  whenever  dirt,  grit  or  dust  has  collected  on  them  or  when  they 
have  become  saturated  with  the  sweat  of  a  horse.  In  cleaning  them  the 
parts  should  first  be  separated  and  each  part  sponged,  using  a  lather  of 
castile  soap  and  warm  water.  When  nearly  dry  a  lather  of  Crown  soap 
and  warm  water  should  be  used.  If  the  equipment  is  cared  for  frequently 
this  method  is  sufficient;  but  if  the  leather  has  become  hard  and  dry  a 


1  Wooden   stoppers   or   plugs   that   are   put    into   the   muzzles   of    rifles   and   other 
arms  to  keep   out   dirt  and  water. 


THE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICER  IN  59 

CHARGE  OF  RECRUITS. 

little  neatsfoot  oil  should  be  applied  after  washing  with  castile  soap. 
When  the  oil  is  dry  the  equipments  should  be  sponged  lightly  with  Crown 
soap  and  water,  which  will  remove  the  surplus  remaining  on  the  surface. 
If  a  polish  is  desired  a  thin  coat  of  russet  leather  polish  issued  by  the 
Ordnance  Department  should  be  applied  and  rubbed  briskly  with  a 
dry  cloth. 

Particular  care  should  be  taken  not  to  use  too  much  Crown  soap  or 
water,   as  the  result  will  be  detrimental   to  the  life  of   the   leather.     In 
no  case  should  leather  be  dipped  in  water  or  be  placed  in  the  sun  to  dry. 
(Cir.  59,  '07). 

Special  care  should  be  taken  to  use  as  little  water  as  possible  and 
in    applying   the    lather   of    soap    and    warm    water    to    have    the    sponge 
moistened  only. 
A       Camp  Equipment. 

The  shelter  tent  half  should  never  be  scrubbed  with  soap  and  brush — 
the  lye  in  the  soap  eats  the  fibre,  thus  causing  the  tent  to  leak.  Rinsing 
in  cold  water  will  accomplish  all  that  is  necessary  and  never  render  the 
tent  unserviceable. 

All  articles  of  equipment,  viz :  the  shelter  tent  half,  haversack, 
canteen,  field  belt  and  suspenders  should  be  neatly  marked,  with  the 
letter  of  the  company,  number  of  the  regiment  and  company  number  of 
man  in  whose  possession  the  articles  are  placed  and  when  turned  in  and 
re-issued  this  number  should  become  the  number  of  the  man  to  whom 
they  are  issued.  The  soldier  is  thus  inspired  to  neatness  by  the  fact 
that  his  eye  falls  upon  a  neatly  marked  set  of  equipments  and  he  will 
give  accordingly  more  care  to  his  equipment. 

The  pins  and  pole  should  be  washed  in  hot  water — never  scraped— 
immediately  upon  return  from  a  march  where  they  have  been  used. 

The  mess  pan,  tin  cup,  knife,  fork  and  spoon  should  be  sterilized 
in  hot  water  after  each  meal  in  camp  and  weekly  in  garrison.  Ashes, 
sapolio  etc.,  should  never  be  used,  as  this  cuts  the  tin  coating;  as  a  con- 
sequence of  which  rust  will  in  a  short  time  appear. 

THIRD  TEN  DAYS 

Guard  Duty. 
B       Instruction  in  the  duties  of  sentinels  by  recitation  in  the  Manual  of 
Guard   Duty  and  practical   illustrations  of  posting  sentinels,   saluting  on 
post,  challenging,  eac.     (See  Chapter  XIII,  "Guard  Duty"). 


60  CHAPTER  VI. 

Repetition  of  such  parts  of  previous  instruction  as  may  be  necessary. 

(This  Chapter,  Chapter  XII,  "Military  Courtesy,"  Chapter  XIII, 
"Guard  Duty,"  Chapter  XVII,  "Care  of  the  Health  and  First  Aid  to  the 
Sick  and  Injured,"  and  Chapter  XVIII,  "The  Use,  Description  and  Man- 
agement of  the  Rifle,"  are  published  in  their  entirety  as  parts  of  "PRI- 
VATES' MANUAL."  Price,  50  cts.  a  copy.  A  liberal  discount  on  quan- 
tity. General  Agent  for  U.  S. :  The  U.  S.  Infantry  Association,  Washing- 
ton, D.  C. ;  for  the  Philippines,  The  Post  Exchange,  Fort  Wm.  McKinley). 


THE  SERGEANT-MAJOR.  61 


CHAPTER  VII. 
THE  SERGEANT-MAJOR 

(See  corresponding  chapter  in  Supplement  for  additional  mattet  and  changes,  if  any.) 

A  Relations  With  the  Adjutant.  The  Sergeant-Major's  relations 
with  the  Adjutant  are  close  and  confidential,  and  he  should  give  the 
Adjutant  his  entire,  unqualified  support.  His  loyalty  should  be  abso- 
lute, and  under  no  circumstances  should  he  ever,  by  act  or  word, 
directly  or  indirectly,  criticise  the  action  of  the  Adjutant,  nor  should 
he  ever,  under  any  condition,  talk  outside  about  the  official  business  of 
the  office — this  is  not  only  unbusiness-like  and  unmilitary,  but  it  is 
also  a  betrayal  of  official  confidence  which  almost  invariably  leads 
to  trouble. 

As  the  Adjutant  is  the  Commanding  Officer's  mouthpiece  in 
communicating  with  the  officers  and  enlisted  men  of  the  command,  so 
is  the  Sergeant-Major  the  Adjutant's  mouthpiece  in  transmitting 
orders  and  instructions  through  the  First  Sergeants.  Any  directions 
that  he  may  give  to  the  First  Sergeants  are  obeyed  just  as  if  they  came 
from  the  Adjutant  himself. 

Find  out  how  the  Adjutant  wants  the  work  done  and  then  follow 
his  ideas  without  question. 

As  the  Adjutant  should  try  to  anticipate  the  wishes  of  the 
Commanding  Officer  and  then  act  accordingly,  so  should  the  Sergeant- 
Major  try  to  anticipate  the  wishes  of  the  Adjutant. 
B  Dress  and  Bearing.  In  neatness  and  correctness  of  dress  and 
in  soldierly  bearing,  he  should  be  faultless,  setting  an  example  to 
the  rest  of  the  enlisted  men  of  the  command.  He  should  try  to  be  the 
most  military  soldier  in  the  command.  He  should  cultivate  soldierly 
qualities,  and  be  just,  pleasant  and  courteous  to  everyone.  He  should  be 
especially  careful  not  to  show  favoritism  in  his  dealings  with  the  First 
Sergeants. 

C  Necessary  Knowledge.  An  efficient  Sergeant-Major  must  know 
the  Army  Regulations,  the  Drill  Regulations,  the  Manual  of  Guard 
Duty  and  so  much  of  the  Courts-Martial  Manual  and  the  other  manuals 
as   pertains   to   his   duties.     He   should    read   carefully   all   ^^'ar    Depart- 


62 


(  IIAPTER  VII. 


nieiit,  Division,  Department  and  other  orders  and  circulars  that  may  be 
received.  He  should  try  to  be  the  best  informed  soldier  in  the  command, 
A  General  Duties.  Under  the  direction  of  the  Adjutant  he  pre- 
pares all  orders,  makes  all  reports  and .  returns,  keeps  all  records 
and  rosters  affecting  enlisted  men  and  has  charge  of  all  correspond- 
ence pertaining  to  the  office.  He  is  assisted  in  this  work  by  as  many 
clerks  as  may  be  necessary. 

In  the  clerks'  office  he  is  the  representative  of  the  Adjutant 
and  his  orders  must  be  obeyed  without  question. 

For  the  duties  of  Coast  Artillery  Sergeants-Major,  see  Sup.  Chap. 
XXni,  Par.  56. 

B  Usual  Duties.  In  practice  the  usual  duties  of  a  Sergeant-Major  in 
a  well-regulated  office  are  about  as  follows: 

He  keeps  the  Army  Regulations  posted  and  every  Monday 
morning  .places  on  the  Adjutant's  desk  for  signature  all  books  re- 
quiring the  signature  of  the  Adjutant  or  the  commanding  officer. 

Should  either  of  these  officers  go  on  leave  or  be  ordered  to  a 
new  station,  he  should  see  that  all  books  are  presented  to  them  for 
signature  before  they  leave. 

All    orders    and    communications    of    a    routine    nature    for    or 
ganization    commanders    are    delivered    to   the    First    Seargeants    at 
First  Sergeants'  Call.     However,  communications,  etc.,  of  an  important 
nature  or  requiring  action  without  delay,  are   delivered  direct  to  the 
officer  by  the  orderly  and  duly  signed  for. 

Orders,  circulars,  etc.,  of  a  routine  nature  that  are  to  be  shown 
to  officers  are  sent  around  before  noon.     Officers  indicate  by  writing 
their  initials  on  back  of  paper  that  they  have  seen  same. 
C        A    receipt    is    obtained    for    all    communications     delivered    to 
officers,  for  which  purpose  a  delivery  book  ruled  as  follows  is  "used: 


SUBJECT 

WHEN     RECEIVED 

INITIALS    OF 

HOUR 

DATE 

RECEIVER 

Capt.  A.  Smith,  Com- 

Detail   for    Officer    of 

missary  24th  Inf. 

the   Day,   Dec.   9,   '03. 

12.00     M. 

Dec.  8,  '03 

A.     S. 

Lieut.   I.  C.  Jones 

Com.    No.    1219,    Par. 
9,    S.    0.,    C.    S.    Post 
G.     0.     312,     W.     D. 

1906. 

1.15   p.   M. 

Dec.  8,  '03 

I.    C.   J. 

D       A  check  is  kept  on  all  communications  that  are  to  be   returned 
to  or  through   the  office,   or  that  are   to  be   answered.     This  may  be 


THE  SERGEANT-MAJOR. 


63 


done    by    means    of    the    Adjutnat's    "Tickler"     (see    page    92),    or    a 
memorandum  book,  ruled  as  follows: 


NUMBER 

OF 

COMMUNICATION 

TO     WHOM 

DELIVERED 

OR 

MAILED 

TO     BE    RE- 
TURNED   OR 
ANSWERED    BY 

RETURNED 

OR 
ANSWERED 

100 

Capt.  Jones 

Jan.  5. 

Jan.   10. 

Jan.    8 

The  Sergeant-Major  regulates  daily  all  clocks  in  the  office, 
obtaining  the  correct  time,  when  practicable,  from  the  Western 
Union  or  the  Postal  Telegraph  office. 

In  case  of  officers  casually  at  post,  the  dates  of  arrival  and 
departure  are  entered  on  the  Morning  Report. 

The  daily  maximum  and  minimum  temperature,  obtained  from 
the  Morning  Report  of  the  Hospital  Corps  Detachment,  is  noted  on 
the    Morning    Report. 

In  case  of  change  in  the  uniform  in  which  the  old  guard  is  to 
march  off,  the  Sergeant-Major  causes  the  old  and  new  officers  of  the 
day  to  be  notified. 

A  record  is  kept  of  all  blank  forms,  pamphlets,  etc.,  sent  from 
the  office. 

Whenever  a  letter  is  written,  an  order  published,  a  communica- 
tion received  or  verbal  instructions  given,  requiring  future  action  on 
the  part  of  the  office,  or  someone  else  to  or  through  the  office,  a 
check  is  made  against  such  action. 

All  books,  pamphlets,  etc.,  should  be  plainly  marked,  "Adjutant's 
Office,"  or  "Office  of  Commanding  Officer,"  as  the  case  may  be,  and 
no  books,  pamphlets,  maps  or  records  of  any  description  should  be 
taken  from  the  office  without  the  permission  of  the  Adjutant,  and  in 
every  case  the  article  should  be  charged  against  the  proper  person. 

He  has  immediate  charge  of  all  property  at  post  headquarters 
that  is  held  on  memorandum  receipt  by  the  Adjutant,  and  he  takes  an 
inventory  of  same  once  every  quarter. 

If  soldiers  of  other  commands,  especially  those  of  other  arms  of 
the  service  or  of  the  staff  corps,  are  casually  at  a  post,  the  Sergeant- 
Major  should  make  it  his  special  business  to  see  that  they  are  properly 


64  CHAPTER  VII. 

cared   for.     Very   often    there   is   a    tendency   to   "run   it"    on   casuals, 
especially  if  they  belong  to  another  branch  of  the  service. 

(Casuals  reporting  at  a  post  are  assigned  to  organizations  for  rations  and 
quarters  by  the  Sergeant-Major.  It  is  a  good  idea  to  have  a  casual  company  for  one 
month  and  then  change  to  another  company.) 

"CUSTOMS   OF   THE   SERVICE"   AFFECTING   THE 

ADJUTANT'S   OFFICE 

Enlisted  men  and  civilian  attaches  desiring  to  speak  to  the 
commanding  officer,  first  see  the  Adjutant. 

It  is  also  the  prevailing  custom  for  officers,  except  members  of 
the  staff,  who  wish  to  see  the  commanding  officer  at  his  office,  first 
to  address  themselves  to  the  adjutant,  older  officers  by  usually  ask- 
ing, "Is  the  commanding  officer  occupied?",  and  younger  officers, 
"May  I  see  the  commanding  officer?" 

In  some  commands  it  is  customary  for  enlisted  men  who  wish 
to  speak  to  the  Adjutant  to  see  first  the  Sergeant-Major,  who  informs 
the  Adjutant. 

The  Adjutant  wears  his  saber  when  placing  officers  in  arrest. 

Before  detailing  men  on  special  or  extra  duty,  it  is  customary 
to  ascertain  from  their  company  commander  whether  there  are  any 
military  reasons  why  the  details  should  not  be  made,  and  in  other 
cases,  unless  by  roster,  orders  should  not  specify  individuals  by 
name,  e.  g.,  "The  Commanding  Officer,  Co.  'A',  24th  Infantry,  will 
send  a  detachment  consisting  of  one  noncommissioned  officer  and  six 
privates,  etc." 

Officers  not  under  arms  usually  remove  their  caps  upon  entering 
the  Adjutant's  Office.  This  is  proper  not  only  because  one  gentle- 
man should  always  remove  his  cap  upon  entering  the  office  of  another, 
but  the  Adjutant's  Office  is,  in  effect,  the  commanding  officer's  office. 

Regarding  officers  returning  from  drills,  courts-martial,  etc.,  with 
side  arms,  the  prevailing  custom  seems  to  be  for  them  to  remove 
their  caps  upon  entering  the  office  of  the  Adjutant. 

It  is  not  usual  for  the  officer  of  the  day  to  remove  his  cap 
while  in  the  Adjutant's  Office  on  business  not  connected  with  his 
duties  as  officer  of  the  day,  although  some  officers  make  it  a  rule  to 
do  so.  If  in  the  commanding  officer's  office  and  the  official  relations 
are  relaxed,  the  prevailing  custom  is  to  remove  the  cap. 


THE  SERGEANT-MAJOR.  65 

The  expression  often  used  in  orders  to  "report  to  the  com- 
manding officer"  means  to  "report  to  the  Adjutant,"  regardless  of 
the  relative  rank  of  the  officer  reporting  and  the  Adjutant. 

When  an  officer  of  the  command  is  appointed  Brigadier- 
General,  a  sergeant  (in  some  regiments  a  corporal)  is  ordered  with- 
out delay  to  report  to  him  for  duty  as  orderly  as  long  as  he  is  in 
the  post. 

When  a  general  officer  comes  to  a  post,  a  sergeant  is  at  once 
ordered  to  report  to  him  for  duty  as  orderly. 

(In   some   regiments   a   sergeant   reports   as   orderly   to   a   Major 
General  and  a-  corporal  to  a   Brigadier-General). 

Whenever  an  inspector  visits  a  post,  a  private  reports  to  him 
as  orderly. 

BUSINESS  ROUTINE  OF  THE  OFFICE 

Everything  about  the  Adjutant's  Office  should  be  indicative 
of  system,  order  and  neatness,  and  the  business  of  the  office  should 
be  transacted  in  a  prompt,  systematic  and  business-like  manner. 
The  duties  of  the  sergeant-major,  the  clerks,  the  telephone  orderly, 
the  janitor,  and  all  others  connected  with  the  office  should  be  clearly 
defined  and  everyone  made  to  live  up  to  the  requirements  thereof. 

While  the  Sergeant-Major  should  not  try  to  do  everything 
himself,  he  should  not  trust  too  much  to  his  clerks.  He  should 
systematize  the  work  of  the  office  and  so  distribute  it  among  his 
subordinates,  that  all  will  have  an  equal  share,  overseeing  and  verify- 
ing everything  himself  as  far  as  possible. 

Hold  each  man  strictly  responsible  for  the  work  assigned  him. 

Regulations  similar  to  the  following  should  be  printed  or 
typewritten,   posted   in   the   office   and   strictly   enforced: 

CLERKS 

1  All  clerks  and  other  persons  on  duty  in  the  Adjutant's 
Office  are  prohibited  from  furnishing  any  information  whatever  on 
subjects  pertaining  to  the  business   thereof. 

2  The  office  hours  for  the  clerks  will  be  from  7:30  a.  m.  to 
12  M.,  and  from  1:30  to  5:00  p.  m. 

All  clerks  will  report  promptly  at  7:30  a.  m.  and  1:30  p.  m. 
In  case  of  emergency  the  work  will  be  pushed  through  without 
regard  to  hours. 


66 


CHAPTER  VII. 


3  Only  the  necessary  office  work  for  that  day  will  be  done  on 
Sundays  and  holidays,  and  in  the  absence  of  work  requiring  immediate 
attention,  the  clerks  will  be  excused  on   holiday  afternoons. 

4  No  clerk  will  leave  the  office  without  first  obtaining  per- 
mission from  the  senior  noncommissioned  officer  present,  reporting 
his  destination  and  probable  duration  of  absence. 

5  All  bells  will  be  answered  promptly.  In  case  of  the  absence 
of  the  clerk  rung  for,  the  next  junior  in  rank  shall  answer  the  call. 
The   bell  calls   are   as   follows: 

6  Loud  talking,  whistling,  singing  and  other  unnecessary  noises 
are  forbidden. 

While  the  Sergeant-Major  should  be  firm  with  his  clerks  and  other  subordinates, 
he  should  always  treat  them  with  proper  consideration.  Do  not  make  drudges  of 
them.  By  being  considerate,  fair  and  courteous,  yet  firm,  you  will  get  more  work 
and  better  service  out  of  them. 

MUSICIAN  OF  THE  GUARDi 

I  Immediately  after  marching  on  guard  the  musician  of  the 
new  guard  will  proceed  to  the  Adjutant's  Office,  reporting  to  the 
Adjutant:  "Sir,  Musician, ,  Company, ,  re- 
ports as  musician  of  the  new  guard."     After  having  received  his  in- 


At  some  posts,  all  calls  are  sounded  through  a  megaphone,  resting  on  a  ver- 
tical, revolving  axis. 

1  The  Musician  of  the  Guard,  especially  at  small  posts,  is  often  employed  as 
orderly  in  the  Adjutant's  Office.' 


THE  SERGEANT-MAJOR.  67 

structions  from  the  Adjutant,  he  will  relieve  the  musician  of  the  old 
guard,  receiving  from  him  any  special  instructions  that  he  may  have. 

2  After  having  been  relieved  by  the  musician  of  the  new 
guard,  the  musician  of  the  old  guard  will  report  to  the  Adjutant,  "Sir. 
Musician, ,  Company, ,  reports  having  been  re- 
lieved as  musician  of  the  old  guard". 

J  The  musician  of  the  guard  will  sound  the  first  call  for  all 
formations,  schools  of  instruction,  etc.,  except  for  reveille,  as  follows: 

First  On  the  parade  ground,  about  fifty  yards  in  front  of  the 
Adjutant's  Office. 

Second  At  such  place  or  places  as  those  concerned  can  hear 
the  call. 

The  Assembly  will  be  sounded  about  fifty  yards  in  front  of  the 
Adjutant's  Office. 

4  The  musician  of  the  guard  will  remain  at  the  Adjutant's 
Office  from  the  time  he  marches  on  until  taps,  and  from  breakfast 
until  the  time  he  marches  off. 

5  The  sounding  of  all  calls  will  be  regulated  by  the  clock  in 
the  Adjutant's  Office. 

6  The  bells  will  be  answered  promptly  and  in  case  the  musi- 
cian of  the  guard  be  absent,  his  bell  will  be  answered  by  the  janitor. 
In  the  absence  of  the  janitor,  his  call  will  be  answered  by  the  musi- 
cian of  the  guard. 

The  musician's  call  is  one  long  ring;  the  janitor's  one  long  and 
one  short. 

7  All  communications  will  be  delivered  promptly,  and  the  ini- 
tials of  the  receiver  obtained  in  the  delivery  book,  with  the  hour  and 
date  of  receipt. 

8  Except  in  urgent  cases,  communications  will  not  be  delivered 
to  officers  in  the  afternoon  or  at  any  time  while  they  are  at  meals. 

9  The  musician  of  the  guard  will  at  all  times  wear  the  uniform 
of  the  guard. 

10  The  instructions  of  the  commanding  officer's  orderly  re- 
garding the  receipt  and  delivery  of  messages  will  also  be  observed 
by  the  musician  of  the  guard. 

See  "Musicians  of  the  Guard,"  page  195. 

TELEPHONE  CLERK 

/     The   telephone   clerk  will   sleep   in    the   telephone   office. 
2     He  will  be  in  the  office  from  immediately  after  breakfast  until 
noon,  and  from  1 :00  p.  m.  until  supper. 


68  CHAPTER  VII. 

3  The  musician  of  the  guard  will  remain  in  the  telephone  office 
and  answer  all  calls,  from  supper  until  taps.  (Between  taps  and  rev- 
eille, the  main  telephone  should  be  connected  with  the  telephone  in 
the  guard  house,  so  that  the  post  may  be  gotten  at  once  any  time 
during  the  night). 

4  Just  before  going  to  dinner,  the  telephone  clerk  will  report  to 
the  sergeant-major  who  will  designate  one  of  the  clerks  to  remain  in 
the  telephone  office  until  1:00. 

5  In  case  of  going  on  pass,  the  telephone  clerk  will  give  the 
sergeant-major  due  notice,  to  the  end  that  one  or  more  of  the  clerks 
may  be  designated  to  look  after  the  telephone. 

6  All  the  metal  parts  of  the  telephone  instruments  will  be  pol- 
ished and  kept  bright. 

7  All  official  messages  received  will  be  repeated  back  to  the 
sender,  and  all  messages  sent  will  be  repeated  back  to  the  telephone 
clerk. 

8  The  names  of  all  persons  receiving  official  messages  at  the 
other  end  of  the  line  will  be  noted  on  the  messages. 

9  In  case  of  any  trouble  with  the  line  or  the  instruments,  the 
Signal  Officer  will  be  notified  at  once. 

10  In  case  anyone  wishes  to  speak  to  some  member  of  the  gar 
rison,  the  telephone  clerk  will  fill  out  a  notification  slip  and  turn  the 
same  over  to  the  sergeant-major  for  delivery. 

(FORM) 
TELEPHONE    OFFICE 
Fort   Harrison,   Mont. 

Time     

Mr 

Telephone   No 

wishes  to  speak  to 


//  Telephone  calls  will  be  answered  promptly  and  all  business, 
official   and   unofficial,   will    be   transacted    with    courtesy. 

12  Enlisted  men  are  prohibited  from  smoking  in  the  telephone 
office. 


THE  SERGEANT-MAJOR.  69 

13  The  telephone  clerk  will  leave  the  office  and  close  the  door 
when  the  telephone  is  being  used  by  an  officer,  or  a  member  of  an 
officer's  family. 

14  His  bell  call  is  two  short   rings. 

JANITOR 

I     He  will  look  after  the  furnace  and  have  general  charge  of  the 
policing  of  the  Administration  Building,  keeping  the  offices  of  the  com 
manding    officer,    the    adjutant,    the    quartermaster    and    the    sergeant- 
major  in  a  clean  and  orderly  condition. 

..^  The  desks  in  particular  will  be  kept  in  a  neat  and  orderly 
condition,  and  care  will  be  taken  not  to  misplace  any  papers  that  it 
may  be  necessary  to  move. 

J     The   offices   will  be   in   proper  condition   by  7:30  a.   \r. 

4  The  lavatory  and  water  closet  will  be  thoroughly  cleaned 
daily;  special  attention  being  given  to  the  urinals.  Brass  door  knobs, 
metal  parts  of  urinals,  etc.,  will  be  kept  polished,  and  the  window 
panes  will  be  kept  clean. 

5  Great  care  against  accident  will  be  exercised  in  operating  the 
furnace. 

6  The  temperature  will  be  noted  frequently,  and  the  offices  and 
other  rooms  will  be  properly  ventilated,  lowering  the  windows  from 
the  top. 

7  The  janitor  will  go  to  his  meals  30  minutes  before  mess  call. 

8  His  bell  call  is  one  long  and  one  short  ring. 

PAPER  WORK  AND   CORRESPONDENCE 

(See  "Paper-Work,"   page    154). 

A  /  Keep  your  Army  Regulations  posted  up  to  date^  and  get  into 
the  habit  of  referring  to  them  whenever  there  comes  up  a  new  matter, 
or  one  concerning  which  the  slightest  doubt  exists,  always  analyzing 
the  paragraphs  involved  and  taking  special  care  to  see  that  all  their 
requirements  are  fulfilled.  For  instance,  in  case  of  an  application 
for  appointment  as  ordnance  sergeant  see: 

(a)     Whether   the   applicant   has   served   at   least   eight   years   in 
the  army;  including  four  years  as  a  noncommissioned  officer. 


1  It  is  suggested  that  you  subscribe  to  "ARMY  ALTERATIONS,"  a  quarterly 
publication  published  by  the  Franklin  Hudson  Publishing  Co.,  Kansas  City,  Mo., 
which  will  keep  posted  up  to  date  your  Army  Regulations,  Manual  of  Guard  Duty, 
Drill  Regulations  and  fourteen  other  War  Department  publications. 


70  CHAPTER  VII. 

(b)  If  he  is  less  than  45  years  of  age. 

(c)  That   the   appHcation   is   in   the   applicant's   handwriting. 

(d)  That  the  application  states  the  length  and  nature  of  mili- 
tary service,  and  for  what  time  and  in  what  organization  service 
has   been    rendered   as   a   noncommissioned    officer. 

(e)  That  the  company  commander  has  indorsed  on  the  ap- 
plication the  character  of  the  applicant  and  his  opinion  as  to  his 
intelligence   and   fitness   for   the  position. 

2  When  a  communication  has  been  returned  through  the  Adju- 
tant's Office  to  an  officer  for  certain  data,  analyze  carefully  all  indorse- 
ments and  see  that  all  the  information  called  for  is  furnished  before 
the  paper  is  returned  to  higher  authority. 

3  Whenever  reference  is  made  to  certain  paragraphs  in  the 
Army  Regulations  or  to  certain  orders,  invariably  look  up  the  para- 
graphs or  orders  referred  to. 

4  In  the  case  of  correspondence  with  officers  under  the  com- 
mand of  the  commanding  officer,  papers  are  always  signed  by  the 
Adjutant,  and  if  some  such  expression  as  "The  Commanding  Officer 
desires,"  etc.,  or  "I  am  directed  by  the  Commanding  Officer,"  etc., 
does  not  appear  in  the  body  of  the  communication,  then  the  letter 
should  end,  for  example,  "By  order  of  Major  Jones:  John  A.  Smith 
1st  Lieut.,  1st  Infantry,  Adjutant. 

Communications  to  superiors  or  to  other  post  commanders  are 
signed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

5  In  practice,  whether  communications  forwarded,  referred  or 
transmitted  to  civilians,  especially  the  civil  authorities,  are  signed  by 
the  commanding  officer  or  the  Adjutant,  depends  upon  circumstances. 
In  case  of  ordinary  inquiries,  etc.,  from  civilians,  the  Adjutant  usually 
signs  the  answer,  omitting  "By  order,"  etc.  Communications  ad- 
dressed to  the  civil  authorities  are  generally  signed  by  the  command- 
ing officer — answers  to  clerks  or  other  subordinates  being  signed  by 
the  Adjutant,  omitting  "By  order,"  etc. 

Some  commanding  officers,  however,  follow  the  rule  of  signing 
all  communications  addressed  to  parties  not  under  their  command  or 
direction. 

A  recruiting  officer  so  far  as  his  rendezvous  and  party  are  con- 
cerned exercises  command  correlative  with  that  of  a  post  com- 
mander—  consequently,  communications  forwarded,  referred  or  trans- 
mitted to  recruiting  officers  not  under  the  direction  of  the  commanding 
officer,  should  be  signed  by  the  commanding  officer. 


THE  SERGEANT-MAJOR.  71 

6  While  Adjutant  of  the  Post  of  Manila,  with  a  permanent 
garrison  of  about  two  thousand  soldiers,  the  author  used  rubber 
stamps  extensively  and  followed  with  great  success  the  excellent, 
business-like  provisions  of  G.  O.  39,  Headquarters  Division  of  the 
Philippines,  1902:  "In  referring  papers  the  usual  form  of  indorse- 
ment will  be  omitted,  except  when  special  instructions  are  necessary. 
For  example,  a  communication  indorsed  by  stamp  or  in  writing,  *To 
the  Quartermaster,'  'To  the  Surgeon,'  To  the  Commanding  Officer, 
Co.' — ','  etc.,'  preceded  by  the  usual  caption,  showing  source  from 
which  it  emanates  or  comes,  and  date,  is  sufficient  indication,  direc- 
tion and  authority  without  signature,  for  action  by  the  officer  to 
whom  it  is  referred,  the  presumption  being  that  it  would  not  be  sent 
to  him  unless  the  subject  matter  was  within  his  knowledge  and  he 
is  able  to  promote  the  inquiry,  furnish  the  information  or  explain  the 
facts  indicated  by  the  character  and  context  of  the  communication. 
When  reference  is  merely  for  the  purpose  of  giving  information,  'the 
paper  to  be  returned,'  the  notation  will  be  framed  accordingly  and 
the  paper  may  be  'Returned,  contents  noted,'  without  signature,  the 
office  stamp  or  caption  being  presumptive  evidence  that  the  communi- 
cation has  been  seen  by  the  proper  officer." 

By  following  this  system  in  all  routine  indorsements  of  trans- 
mission, return,  etc.,  the  clerical  work  of  an  office  can  be  greatly  re- 
duced and  simplified.  Instead  of  saying,  for  example.  Respectfully 
forwarded  to  the  commanding  officer,  24th  Infantry,  for  transmission 
to  the  Commanding  Officer,  Co.  'A,'  24th  Infantry.  By  order  of  Col- 
onel McKibbin:  Jas.  A.  Moss,  Adjutant,  24th  Infantry.  Adjutant," 
(31  words),  say  "To  the  Commanding  Officer,  24th  Infantry,  for  trans- 
mission" (8  words),  using  two  rubber  stamps — "To  the  Commanding 
Officer,  24th  Infantry"  and  "for  transmission."  Have  rubber  stamps 
reading   "for    remark,"    "for    necessary    action,"    to    note    and    return." 

However,  whenever  special  instructions  are  to  be  given,  the  in- 
dorsement should  be  signed  "By  order,"  etc. 

7  Never  submit  any  paper  to  the  Adjutant  for  his  signature  or 
that  of  the  Commanding  Officer: 

First  Unless  you  have  carefully  scrutinized  the  same  and  have 
famaliarized  yourself  with  every  paragraph  in  the  Regulations  and 
every  order  that  may  be  referred  to  in  the  communication. 

Second  Unless  you  know  that  all  orders  and  Regulations  on  the 
subject    have    been    complied    with.      The    safest    plan    is    to    look   up 


72 


CHAPTER  VII. 


invariably  the  Regulations  on  the  subject,  and  see  that  all  conditions 
required  have  been  fulfilled,  especially  regarding  allowances,  etc.,  in 
case   of   estimates   and   requisitions. 

8  Never  assume  that  reports,  returns  and  other  papers  that  may 
be  submitted  to  your  office,  are  correct — always  check  them  up. 

Especially  should  the  company  morning  reports  be  carefully 
checked  up,  so  that  errors  can  not  get  into  the  consolidated  report. 

9  In  case  of  requisitions,  estimates,  clothing  schedules,  etc.,  see 
that  all  dates  have  been  filled  in  and  that  the  Commanding  Officer's 
rank  has  been  entered  below  where  he  is  to  sign. 

10  Never   correct    mistakes    over   an    officer's    signature. 

11  Attend  personally  to  the  distribution  of  all  orders  and  to  the 
mailing  of  all  orders  and  communications.  (In  large  posts  this  is 
not  practicable). 

Keep  lists  of  the  individuals  and  the  organizations  that  should 
receive  copies  of  various  orders  and  so  systematize  the  process  of  dis- 
tribution as  to  eliminate  the  possibility  of  errors. 

12  Have  a  good,  common-sense  system  for  filing  papers;  keep- 
ing books,  blanks,  etc.,  so  that  you  can  always  place  your  hand,  at 
once  on  any  paper,  book  or  blank  desired.  It  is  astonishing  how  much 
time  is  lost  in  hunting  for  papers. 

13  It  often  happens  that  minor  errors  in  reports,  returns  and 
other  communications  from  organization  commanders  can  be  corrected 
by  the  First  Sergeants  at  First  Sergeants'  Call.  Not  only  does  this 
save  paper-work  for  both  the  Adjutant's  Office  and  the  company 
office,  but  it  also  expedites  the  transaction  of  business. 

14  The  Sergeant-Major  should  never  delegate  to  anyone  else  the 
running  of  the  duty  roster — he  should  always  attend  to  that  himself. 

75  A  Mailing  Book,  in  which  cverythmg  mailed  from  the  office  is 
recorded.    A  blank  book  of  suitable  size,  ruled  like  this,  will  answer: 


Date 

Communication 

To  Whom 

Feby.  3 

Muster  rolls,  Post  N 
Hospital  Corps  Det., 
N.   C.   S.  and  Band 
C  and  D. 

.  C.  S. 
Regtl. 
and  Cos. 

A, 

B, 

A.  G.,  U.  S.  A. 

Feby.  4 

Doc.  40 

A.  G.,  Dept. 

Feby.  5 

G.  0.  10,  Regtl. 

A.    G.    Dept.,    and   all    companies    and 
officers    away    from   headquarters. 

THE  SERGEANT-MAJOR.  7Z 

All  mailing  matter  should  be  mailed  the  same  day  as  signed  b}^ 
the  Adjutant  or  the  Commanding  Officer. 

The  mailing  book  should  be  kept  in  connection  with,  and  as  a 
check  on,  the  Document  File.  In  large  posts  where  communications 
are  numerous,  the  only  entry  made  in  the  column  ''Communication,'* 
of  the  mailing  book,  is,  "Doc.  40,  41,  etc.,"  the  nature  of  the  conmiuni- 
cation  being  ol)taincd  by  reference. 

i6  Record  of  Officers  and  Enlisted  Men. 

In  large  pc>sts  a  system  of  having  a  card,  with  ])r()per  remarks, 
for  every  officer,  has  been  found  to  be  an  excellent  means  of  keeping  a 
handy  record  of  the  commissioned  personnel  of  the  command.  These 
cards  are  kept  in  a  box,  alphabetically  arranged,  and  are  grouped  as 
follows:  (a)  Present;  (b)  Casuals;  (c)  On  leave;  (d)  On  D.  S.  They 
are  "posted"  from  day  to  day. 

The  same  plan  may  be  used  for  keeping  a  record  of  the  enlisted 
personnel  in  a  large  post,  except  that  the  cards  would  not  be  grouped. 
Whenever  a  soldier  leaves  the  command  by  death,  discharge,  deser- 
tion or  transfer,  his  card  is  transferred  to  another  box — the  "dead 
business"  box. 

A  system  of  this  kind  in  a  large  post  is  especially  convenient  in 
answering  the  numerous  inquiries  that  are  continually  received  about 
soldiers. 

(Sample  of  Card) 
(3x5  inches) 

NAME  ^^  Groot,  Cornelius. 

[Surname  first] 

R^G'T 13th  Infantry qq ^^G^^ 

REMARKS: 
Discharged  (purchase)  March  4,  1909, 
per  Par.  20,  S.  O.  45,  W.  D.  1909. 


7/     And  last,  but  not  least,  always  keep  your  work  up  to  date,  never 
putting  off  until  tomorrow  what  you  can  do  today. 


74 


CHAPTER  VII. 


The  following  compact,  handy,  business-like  arrangement  of  desks,  trays,   etc., 

with  some  slight  modifications,  and  the  methodical  way  of  transacting  business,   were 

devised  by  Regimental   Sergeant-Major  George  H.  Middagh,    5th  U.   S.    Cavalry,   and 
is  used  by  him  in  his  work. 

The  ofiice  is  handled  in  every  detail  by  three  men,  and  each  attends  all  the 
drills  that  his  position  demands,  all  of  which  shows  what  can  be  accomplished  by 
system  and  the  use  of  labor-saving  devices. 


X- 

XX- 

XXX- 

XXXX- 

XXXX-a- 

A- 

B- 

C- 

CC- 

D- 

DD- 

E- 

EE- 

G- 

H- 

I- 

J- 

K,  K',  K",  K"'- 

L- 

M- 
N- 
O- 
P- 

Q- 


-Regimental   Sergeant-Major's  desk. 

-Squadron   Sergeant-Major's    desk. 

-Clerk:    (delivery.   Summary  Court   and   copying). 

-1st  Sergeant's  table  (for  morning  reports). 

-Bulletin  Board. 

-Drawer   (hold-over). 

-Drawer   (pens,  ink,   rubber  stamps,   etc.) 

-Order  file  rack  (Regt'l.,  W.  D.,  Dept.  etc.) 

-Same  for  post. 

-Typewriter  table    (Regimental    Headquarters). 

-Typewriter  table  (Post  Headquarters). 

-Typewriter    (Regimental    Headquarters). 

-Typewriter  (Post  Hearquarters). 

-Telephone  receiver  and  transmitter. 

-Telephone. 

-Calendar. 

-Adjutant's  "Tickler." 

-Wire  baskets. 

-Revolving  chairs. 

-Delivery  tray. 

-4  tray  cabinet  (muster  rolls,  officers'  records,  .etc.) 

-4  tray  cabinet  (Regimental  returns). 

-4  tray  cabinet  (Doc,  A.  R.  and  Manuals). 

-Index  of  all  current  orders  and  circulars. 


THE  SERGEANT-MAJOR.  75 

In  the  morning,  on  arrival  at  office,  8  a.  ni.,  X  arranges  cards  in 
J,  then  changes  dates  in  stamps. 

XX  arranges  cards  in  J',  removes  papers  from  morning  reports 
to  K,  then  consolidates  the  reports,  places  troop  reports  on  XXXX, 
makes  out  detail,  posts  on  XXXX-a.  Then  he  takes  up  unfinished 
work,  i.  e.,  arranging  data  for  the  monthly  returns,  reports,  etc. 
(This  position  demands  a  good  steady  man,  with  interest  in  his  work. 
In  this  case  it  is  filled  by  a  squadron  sergeant-major.) 

X  goes  over  papers  in  K,  placing  them  in  their  different  positions 
for  action — for  stamping  date  of  receipt  and  briefing,  on  D;  for  entry, 
with  correspondence  book;  and  when  finished  returns  them  to  K,  when 
he  goes  over  the  hold-over,  A,  containing  work  he  finished  after  de- 
parture of  the  Commanding  Officer  and  the  Adjutant,  on  previous  day, 
and  places  it  in  K. 

When  the  morning  report  is  consolidated  XX  places  it  on  X. 

X  checks  the  report,-  noting  changes  of  officers,  etc.  on  cards 
kept  for  the  purpose,  places  the  papers  in  K  with  the  consolidated 
morning  report,  which  he  then  takes  to  the  Adjutant's  desk,  receives 
his  orders  and  empties  the  "out  basket"  and  returns  to  X. 

15  minutes  before  First  Sergeants'  Call,  X  removes  the  delivery 
tray,  M.  to  XXX,  who  makes  out  the  delivery  slip  (book  is  not  used) 
and  places  it  for  signature  of  the  ist  Sergants. 

At  4.00  o'clock  p.  m.,  XXX  opens  all  doors  and  windows,  and 
thoroughly  sweeps  and  dusts  the  office.  The  other  offices  are  cleaned 
by  trumpeters. 

There  should  be  an  additional  noncommissioned  officer  detailed 
as  regimental  clerk,  and  to  remain  permanently  with  headquarters  as 
a  kind  of  "understudy"  to  X  and  XX,  so  as  to  take  the  place  of 
either  in  case  of  absence. 

XXX  should  be  the  teacher  of  enlisted  men's  school,  so  as  to 
be  paid  for  his  labor. 

THE  CORRESPONDENCE  BOOK 

The  Correspondence  Book  is  the  book  used  by  all  administra- 
tive units  and  officers  below  department  headquarters*  for  the  purpose 
of  making  a  record  of  every  item  of  correspondence  that  should  be 
recorded. 


*The  card-record  system  is  authorized  for  Department  and  Division  Headquar- 
ters and  is  explained  in  a  pamphlet  issued  by  the  War  Department,  January  7,   1904. 

Upon  application,  the  card  system  is,  under  certain  conditions,  authorized  for 
a  post  headquarters. — G.  O.  92,  '09. 


76  CHAPTER  VII. 

A  In  connection  with  the  Correspondence  Book  is  kept  a  Docu- 
ment File  which  contains:  /  The  original  documents  or  communica- 
tions that  may  be  retained,  and  carbon,  letter-press  or  other  copies 
of  all  letters,  indorsements  or  telegrams  that  may  be  or  may  have 
been  sent  in  regard  to  the  same.  2  Copies  of  all  letters,  indorsements 
or  telegrams  originating  in  the  office. 

B  General  Remarks.  First  of  all,  the  printed  instructions  on  the 
inside  front  cover  of  the  Correspondence  Book  should  be  carefully 
read  and  digested  and  an  understanding  of  the  system  involved 
should  be  acquired. 

It  should  be  borne  in  mind  the  object  of  this  book  is  to  enable 
the  future  seeker  for  information  to  obtain  it  with  ease,  exactness 
and  completeness. 

C        Entries  in  the  Correspondence  Book.     Each  entry  consists  of: 

/     The  seriel  book  number. 

2     The  date  of  receipt. 

S     The  name  of  the  writer. 

4  A  very  brief  synopsis  of  the  subject. 

5  Notation  of  number  of  inclosures,  if  any.  (If  any  inclosures 
are  added,  withdrawn  or  filed  in  the  office,  the  fact  should  be  stated. 
In  case  of  very  important  inclosures,  copies  should  be  made  and 
filed.) 

6  The  action  taken  on  the  paper. 
D        In  recording  the  names  of  commanding  officers  or  staff  officers    • 
only  the  official   designation,   and   not   the   personal   name,   should   be   en- 
tered.    Thus,   "The  Adjutant  General,   Dept.  of   California,"  not  "Major 
John  R.  Jones,  Adjutant  General,  Dept.  of  California." 

The  synopsis  includes  the  date  and  place,  but  the  location  of 
Division,  Department  Headquarters,  etc.,  whose  locations  are  fixed, 
need  not  be  entered.  "HQ  Dept  Calif,"  for  instance,  would  be  suf- 
ficient. The  location  of  a  regimental  headquarters,  however,  would  be 
entered,  as  it  is  not  a  fixed  place. 

E  Good  briefing  is  very  rare.  As  a  rule,  the  tendency  is  to  in- 
clude too  much  in  the  synopsis.  It  is  impossible  to  lay  down  any 
exact  rules  as  to  what  should  or  should  not  be  included  in  the  synop- 
sis— judgment  must  be  used  in  deciding,  but  much  can  be  done  by 
thought  and  care. 

The  action  always  shows  the  disposition  made  of  the  paper  and 
includes  the  date  of  reference,  transmission,  forwarding  or  return. 


THE  SERGEANT-MAJOR.  77 

No  communication  should  he  entered  a  second  time,  unless,  for 
special  reasons,  it  should  become  necessary  or  desirable  to  transfer  a 
remote  entry  to  one  of  current  date,  or  unless  additional  space  should 
be  required  to  continue  the  record.  If  a  communication  that  has  al- 
ready been  entered  be  returned,  "Received  Back  (such  date),"  and 
other  necessary  data  should  be  added  to  the  previous  entry.  How- 
ever, should  it  become  necessary  to  enter  the  same  communication  a 
second  time,  the  second  entry  should  be  headed,  "Continued  from 
page " 

Indorsements  must  not  be  entered  in  the  Correspondence  Book, 
but  merely  a  notation  ("Doc")  of  fact  of  entry  in  the  Document  File 
should  be  made,  copies  of  the  indorsements  being  entered  in  this  file. 

To  enter  in  full  in  the  Document  File  all  indorsements  on  a  paper 
reaching  the  office,  would  be  a  useless  cumbering  of  records  and  a 
waste  of  labor.  Only  indorsements  of  an  important  nature  should  be 
entered  in  full.  Common  sense  and  good  judgment  must  be  used. 
For  instance,  mere  routine  indorsements  of  reference  that  have  no 
material  bearing  on  the  case,  should  not  be  entered,  and,  as  a  rule, 
even  indorsements  bearing  on  the  case,  can  be  greatly  condensed. 
Example: 

4th   Indorsement 

War   Department, 

Washington,    1   January,    1906 

Respectfully  returned  to  the   Commanding   General,   Dept   of   Dakota,   approved. 

By  order  of  the   Secretary   of  War: 

H.  P.  McCain, 

Adjutant  General. 

5th  Indorsement 

HEADQUARTERS  DEPARTMENT  OF  DAKOTA, 

St.   Paul,   Minn., 

3  Jany.,   1906. 
Respectfully  transmitted  to  the   Commanding   Officer,   Fort   Missoula,    Montana. 
By   command   of   Brigadier-General   Bubb : 

ALBERT   TODD, 

Major  and  Adjutant  General. 

6th  Indorsement 
POST  OF  FORT  MISSOULA,  MONTANA, 
6  Jany.,   1906. 
Respectfully   transmitted   to  the    Commanding   Officer,    Co.    "A,"    24th    Infantry. 
By  order  of  Major   Smith: 

JOHN  A.   MOORE, 

1st  Lieutenant,  24th   Infantry, 
Adjutant. 


78 


CHAPTER  VII. 


Simply  the  following  entries  would  be  necessary  in  the  Post 
Correspondence  Book: 

Reed  back  4  Jany  '06.  Transmitted  C  O  Co  "A,"  24  Inf  5  Jany 
'06.     "Doc." 

The  following  entries  in  the  Document  File  would  be  sufficient: 
W  D  1  Jany  '06,  Appd;  HQ  D  Dak  3  Jany  '06,  Transmtd. 

However,  copies  of  indorsements  of  a  material  nature  should 
be  filed  in  full  in  the  Document  File  whether  or  not  they  originate  in 
the  office  and  proper  notation  of  fact  of  filing  made  in  the  Corre- 
spondence Book. 

A  Cross  Reference.  By  cross  reference  is  meant  the  notation  of 
records  so  that  all  other  records  connected  therewith  will  be  indicat- 
ed sufficiently  for  reference,  each  as  to  all  others. 

B  Annotation  is  the  noting  of  numbers,  dates,  memoranda,  etc., 
of  other  records  and  other  data  as  to  inclosures,  action,  etc.,  necessary 
to  a  complete  chain  of  reference. 

Inclosures  to  certain  indorsements  are  marked,  'Tnc.  1,  1st 
Indt.,"  "Inc.  1,  2nd  Indt.,"  etc.  Every  inclosure  received  with  a  paper 
is  stamped  with  the  same  office  mark  and  number  as  the  paper  itself. 

If  any  inclosures  are  added,  withdrawn  or  filed,  the  proper 
notation  should  be  made  below  the  indorsement  of  the  office  making 
the  addition,  abstraction,  or  filing. 

The  office  numbers  of  letters,  or  of  important  indorsements  re- 
ceived from  the  AGO,  Auditor's  Office,  Dept.  HQ,  etc.,  should  be 
noted. 

C  Every  office  should  be  provided  with  a  rubber  stamp  for  stamp- 
ing papers  with  date  of  receipt  and  office  number.  The  stamp  of  an 
office  inferior  to  that  of  a  department  headquarters  should  be  simple 
in  design.    The  following,  for  instance,  is  suggested  for  a  company: 


No. 

Co.  "A"  24th  Infty. 

Rec'd 

Received  Back 

(Actual   Size.) 


("Received  Back,"  is  a  separate  stamp  which  is  used,  of  course, 
only  when  the  paper  has  been  received  back.) 

These  office  marks  should  follow  the  indorsement  made  in  the 
company  office  and  not  be  placed  at  the  top  of  the  first  fold  or  some 


THE  SERGEANT-MAJOR.  79 

other   conspicuous    place,    such    places    being    reserved    for    the    AGO 
Div.  HQ,  Dept.  HQ,  etc. 

Whenever  a  paper  is  received  back,  "Received  back  (such 
date),"  is  noted  at  the  bottom  of  the  indorsements  which  sent  it  out. 
In  case  of  any  inclosures,  the  "Received  Back"  notation  should  show 
definitely  what  original  inclosures  are  received  back  with  the  paper 
and  also  what  new  inclosures,  if  any.  Thus,  "Received  Back,  5  Jany., 
'06.  Original  Inclosures  1  and  3 — 2  inclosures  1st  Indt.  and  1  Inc., 
2d  Indt." 

Abbreviations.  In  order  to  save  labor  and  space,  abbreviations, 
with  periods  generally  omitted,  should  be  used  as  much  as  possible, 
but  proper  judgment  must  be  exercised  and  care  taken  not  to  sacrifice 
clearness  to  abbreviation.  AGO  USA— AGO  D  Dak— Ch  Stf  P  Div— 
Ch  QM  Dept  Dak — HQ  24  Inf — are  correct,  because  clear.  D  Cal 
may  be  mistaken  for  D  Col  and  vice  versa — hence  D  Calif  and  D  Colo 
should  be  used. 

In  this  as  in  all  other  matters  pertaining  to  records,  it  should 
be  borne  in  mind  that  the  entries  should  be  perfectly  clear  to  those 
delving  into  them  in  the  future. 

ORDERS 

Orders  are  numbered  serially  beginning  with  the  year  or  the 
establishment  of  a  new  command.  It  is  customary  to  note  on  the  first 
number  of  a  new  series  the  last  number  of  the  preceding  series.  Thus 
"G.  O.  No.  192  is  the  last  of  the  1904  series,"  would  be  noted  on  the  first 
of  the  1905  series. 

Whenever  a  corrected  order  is  issued,  the  following  should  be 
written  at  the  top  of  every  copy,  "Corrected  Copy;  please  destroy  copies 
previously  sent." 

If  for  any  reason  a  serial  number  should  be  skipped — i.  e.  the 
order  be  not  issued — it  is  customary  to  publish  a  skeleton  order  so  as 
to  make  the  file  complete.  For  example,  if  G.  O.  No.  52,  Headquar- 
ters Department  of  California,  should  not  be  issued,  the  following 
would  be  published: 

HEADQUARTERS  DEPARTMENT  OF  CALIFORNIA, 

San   Francisco,  California,   12  May,   1906. 
General  Orders, 

No.   52. 

Not  Issued. 


80  CHAPTER  Vll. 

For  the  general  principles  regarding  orders  see  the  Field  Service 

Regulations.    The  following  are  the  usual  forms  of  garrison  orders: 

Assuming  Command 

Fort  Missoula,  Mont.,  1  January,  1906. 
General  Orders, 

No.    1. 

The  undersigned  hereby  assumes   command   of  Fort   Missoula,   Montana. 

JOHN  R.   SMITH, 

Major,   1st  Infantry. 

(In  case  a  stafif  is  to  be  announced,  the  order  would  continue,  "and  announces 
the  following  staff: 

Adjutant , 

Quartermaster " 

etc.) 

Fourth  of  July 

Fort    Missoula,    Mont.,    3   July,    1905. 
General  Orders, 

No.   16. 

1.  To-morrow,  July  4th,  being  a  national  holiday,  all  duty  except  the  guard 
and  necessary  fatigue  will   be   suspended. 

2.  At  reveille  the  band  will  play  national  airs  and  the  garrison  flag  will  be 
hoisted  to  the  top  of  the  flagstaff,  during  which  the  national  salute  of  21  guns  will 
be  fired. 

3.  At  9  o'clock  A.  M.  the  command  will  be  paraded  in  the  form  of  a  square 
and  the  Declaration  of  Independence  read,  after  which  the  band  will  play  "The 
Star  Spangled  Banner." 

4.  At   noon   the   salute   to   the   Union   will   be    fired,    consisting   of   one   gun   for 

every  state,  during  which  the  band  will  play   "America,"   "Hail   Columbia"   and   other 

national  airs. 

By  order  of  Major  Smith: 

JAMES  A.  ROSS, 

1st   Lieutenant,    1st   Infantry, 

Adjutant. 

(For  Declaration  of  Independence,  see  page  409.) 

Funeral.  The  funeral  of  the  late  John  Smith,  Private  Co.  "A,"  1st  Infantry, 
will  take  place  to-morrow. 

1st  .Call,   9.50   A.   M. 
Assembly,  ten  minutes  later. 

Uniform 

The  commanding  officer  Co.  "A,"  1st  Infantry,  will  furnish  the  necessary  pall- 
bearers and  escort  and  is  charged  with  all  other  details  relating  to  the  funeral. 

All   officers*   and   enlisted  men  not   on  duty   will   attend. 

The  companies  will  be  marched  to  the  hospital  by  the  first  sergeants  and  the 
sergeant-major  will  then  assume  command   of  the  battalion. 

The  flag  will  be  displayed  at  half-staff  from  9.50  A.  m.  until  the  remains  are 
taken  fro  mthe  post. 

*Sometimes  the   order  reads,   "All  ofificcrs  are   invited  to  attend." 


THE  SERGEANT-MAJOR.  81 

Inspection.  The  troops  of  this  command  will  be  paraded  for  inspection  to- 
morrow, the  2nd  instant. 

P'ormation:      Battalion,  on  the  general  parade. 
1st  Call,  8.20  A.   M. 
Assembly,  8.  30  a.  m. 

Uniformf 

The  inspection  will  be  preceded  by  a  review.  Immediately  following  the  in- 
spection, the  barracks  will  be  inspected  by  the  commanding  ofificer. 

Memorial  Day.  To-morrow  being  Memorial  Day,  all  duty  except  the  guard 
and  necessary  fatigue  will  be  suspended. 

The  command  will  be  formed  at  9  o'clock  a.  m.  and  marched  to  the  cemetery, 
where  the  following  exercises  will  take  place : 

1  Dirge,  by  the  band. 

2  Prayer 

3  "My  Country,  'Tis  of  Thee,"  by  the  band. 

4  "Nearer,  My  God,  to  Thee,"  by  the  band,  during  which  the  graves  will  be 
decorated  with  flowers. 

5  "The  Star  Spangled  Banner,"  by  the  band. 

6  Benediction. 

7  Taps. 

Uniform 

Muster  and  Inspection.  The  troops  of  this  command  will  be  inspected  and 
mustered  to-morrow,  the  30th  instant. 

Formation:*    Battalion. 
1st  Call,  8.20  A.  M. 
Assembly,  8.30   a.   m. 

Uniformt 

All  enlisted  men  will  attend  except  the  guard,  the  sick,  the  overseer  of  pris- 
oners, the  clerks  in  the  adjutant's  office,  the  baker  and  one  cook  and  one  room 
orderly  in  every  company. 

tin  case  of  Cavalry,   add  : 

Arms (Rifle,  saber,  revolvers). 

Saddles (Full  pack  or  stripped). 

*Or,  by  companies  on  their  respective  parades.  The  Post  Noncommissioned 
Staff  will  be  mustered  in  front  of  the  adjutant's  office  and  the  Hospital  Corps 
Detachment  in  front  of  the  hospital. 

Payment.  The  troops  of  this  command  will  be  paid  by  Captain  Smith,  pay- 
master at  1  o'clock  p.  M.  to-day,  in  the  following  order: 

1  Hospital   Corps  Detachment. 

2  Post  Noncommissioned   Staff. 

3  N.  C.  S.  and  Band,  24th  Infantry. 

4  Company  "B,"  24th  Infantry. 

5  Company  "A,"  24th  Infantry. 

6  Company  "C,"  24th   Infantry. 

7  Company  "D,"  24th  Infantry. 

Uniform 

tin  case  of  Cavalry,  see  Inspection  order. 


82  CHAPTER  VII. 

Practice  March.  1  The  troops  of  this  command,  except  the  band,  the  Post 
Noncommissioned  Staff  and  one  noncommissioned  ofificer  and  six  privates  from  each 
company  to  be  left  as  guard)  will  proceed  with  ten  days'  rations  at  7  o'clock  a.  m. 
16  August,  1905,  on  the  practice  march  prescribed  by  Par.  1,  G.  O.  2,  1905,  Hdqrs. 
Department  of  Dakota. 

2     The  following  tentage  and  field  equipage  will  be  allowed : 


3  The  surgeon,   the   assistant  hospital   steward   and    privates   of  the 

Hospital  Corps  will  accompany  the  command. 

4  The  following  officers  will  constitute  the  staff  on  the  march : 

,  Adjutant  and  Recruiting  Officer, 

,   Quartermaster  and   Commissary. 

,  Signal   Officer,   Ordnance   Officer  and 

Engineer  Officer. 

Surgeon. 

5  Captain   ,  Lieutenant   ,  the 

butcher,  the  chief  baker  and  the  exchange  steward  will  remain  at  the  post. 

6  For  purposes   of  messenger  service,   courier  duty,  etc.,   the  following  named 
men,  at  their  own  request,  will  be  mounted  on  bicycles  and  armed  with  revolvers : 


etc. 

Their  blanket  rolls  will  be  carried  on  the  wagons. 

7  All  men  to  be  discharged  while  the  troops  are  on  the  march  and  who  do 
not  intend  to  re-enlist  will  be  left  behind.  Their  names  will  be  submitted  to  this 
office  without  delay. 

8  The  descriptive  lists  of  all  men  remaining  at  the  post,  including  those  in 
the  hospital,  will  be  submitted  to  the  adjutant  not  later  than  noon,  August  14. 

9  Men  remaining  behind  will  be  attached  to  the  band  for  rations.  To  provide 
for  the  better  subsistence  of  the  men  left  behind,  it  is  suggested  that  company  com- 
manders turn  over  to  the  adjutant  75  cents  for  each  man. 

10  The  adjutant,  quartermaster,  commissary,  exchange  officer,  post  treasurer 
and  officer  in  charge  of  the  post  garden  will  submit  to  this  office  without  delay  the 
names  of  the  men  in  their  respective  departments  who  should  remain  at  post. 

11  The  barracks  and  premises  will  be  left  .in  a  clean  and  orderly  condition, 
and  the  non-commissioned  officers  left  behind  will  be  charged  with  the  care  and 
preservation   of  all   property. 

Relief  and  Appointment  of  Quartermaster.  Lieutenant  John  A.  Smith,  1st 
Infantry,  is  relieved  as  quartermaster  and  will  transfer  all  records,  funds  and  prop- 
erty pertaining  to  that  office  to  Captain  Samuel  Jones,  1st  Infantry,  who  is  hereby 
appointed  quartermaster. 


THE  SERGEANT-MAJOR.  83 

Relinquishing  Command.  The  undersigned  hereby  relinquishes  command  of 
the  post  of  Fort  Missoula,  Montana. 

Washington's  Birthday.  Tomorrow,  the  22d  instant,  being  the  Anniversary 
of  the  Birth  of  George  Washington,  all  duty  except  the  necessary  guard  and  fatigue 
will  be  suspended  at  this  post. 

The  troops  of  the  command  will  be  paraded  at  10  o'clock  a.  m.,  when  the 
Declaration  of  Independence  will  be  read. 

First   Call,  9.50  a.   m. 
Assembly,  ten  minutes  later. 
Uniform :     Habitual. 

CIRCULARS 

Fire.  There  will  be  fire  drill  at  3  o'clock  p.  m.  to-day.  The  band  quarters 
will  be  the  objective. 

SPECIAL  ORDERS. 

Extra  Duty,  (a)  Detail.  Private  William  Jones,  Co.  "A,"  1st  Infantry,  is 
detailed  on  extra  duty  as  teamster  in  the  Quartermaster's  Department  and  will  report 
at   once   to   the   quartermaster   for   duty. 

(b)  Relief.  Private  William  Jones,  Co.  "A,"  1st  Infantry,  is  relieved  from 
extra  duty  as  teamster  in  the  Quartermaster's  Department  and  will  report  to  his 
company   commander  for  duty. 

(c)  Detail  and  Relief.  Private  William  Jones,  Co.  "A,"  1st  Infantry,  is 
detailed  on  extra  duty  as  teamster  in  the  Quartermaster's  Department,  vice  Private 
Samuel   King,   Co.    "B,"    1st   Infantry,   who  is  relieved. 

Private  Jones  will  report  without  delay  to  the  quartermaster  and  Private  King 
to  his  company  commander. 

id)  Retroactive.  1  Artificer  Samuel  Jones,  Co.  "A,"  1st  Infantry,  having 
been  employed  continuously  as  mechanic  in  the  Quartermaster's  Department  since 
1  January,  1905,  is  hereby  detailed  on  extra  duty  as  mechanic  in  that  department,  to 
date  from  that  day. 

2  The  verbal  orders  of  the  commanding  ofificer  of  1  January,  1905,  detailing 
Private  Samuel  Jones,  Co.  "A,"  1st  Infantry,  on  extra  duty  as  butcher  in  the 
Subsistence  Department,  vice  Smith,  relieved,  are  hereby  confirmed  and  made  of 
record  as  of  that  date. 

Leave  of  Absence,  (a)  Leave  of  absence  for  three  days,  effective  3  Octo- 
ber, 1905,  is  hereby  granted  1st  Lieutenant  Paul  Jones,  1st  Infantry. 

(b)  Leave  of  absence  for  ten  days,  efTective  about  3  October,  1905,  with 
permission  to  apply  to  the  proper  authority  for  an  extension  of  ten  days,  is  hereby 
granted  1st  Lieutenant  Paul  Jones,   1st  Infantry. 

Post  Council  of  Administration,  (a)  In  compliance  with  Par.  313,  A.  R., 
the  Post  Council  of  Administration,  consisting  of  Captain  H.  C.  Moon,  24th  Infantry, 
Captain  R.  O.  Beene,  24th  Infantry,  and  Captain  N.  K.  Ross,  24th  Infantry,  will 
meet  at   10  o'clock  a.   m.   to-morrow,   31   December. 


84  CHAPTER  VII. 

(b)  The  Post  Council  of  Administration,  consisting  of,  etc.,  will  meet  at 
10  o'clock  A.  M.  to-morrow,  15  December,  to  recommend  a  scale  of  prices  at  which 
tailoring  shall  be  done  at  this  post. 

Remittance  of  Summary  Court  Sentence,  (a)  The  unexpired  portion  of  the 
confinement  part  of  the  Summary  Court  sentence  in  the  case  of  Private  Samuel 
Jones,  Co.  "A,"  1st  Infantry,  approved  March  4,  1903,  is  hereby  remitted  and  he  will 
report   to  his   company  commander  for  duty. 

(b)  The  sentence  in  the  case  of  Artificer  Henry  W.  Page,  Co.  "C,"  24th  In- 
fantry, approved  16  October,  1902,  being  in  excess  of  the  maximum  punishment  al- 
lowed by  law,  one  dollar  and  fifty  cents  (.$1..S0)  of  the  fine  imposed  is  hereby  remit- 
ted and  will  be  refunded  to  the  soldier  on  next  pay  roll  of  his  company. 

Travel,  (a)  In  compliance  with  authority  contained  in  an  endorsement  dated 
Headquarters  Department  of  Dakota,  10  January,  1905,  Corporal  Charles  Pickle, 
Company  "M,"  24th  Infantry,  will  proceed  to  join  his  company  at  Fort  Missoula, 
Montana. 

The  Quartermaster's  Department  will  furnish  the  necessary  transportation  and 
the  Subsistence  Department  the  necessary  subsistence. 

The  travel   enjoined  is  necessary  in  the  military  service. 

(b)  Pursuant  to  telegraphic  instructions  from  The  Adjutant  General,  U.  S. 
Army,  under  date  of  6  September,  1902,  Recruit  Hans  Hansen,  Company  "I,"  22nd 
Infantry,  now  at  his  post,  will  proceed  to  Fort  Crook,  Nebraska,  reporting  upon 
arrival  to  the  Commanding  Ofhcer  at  that  post. 

The  Quartermaster's  Department  will  furnish  the  necessary  transportation 
and  the  Subsistence  Department  will  furnish  in  advance  commutation  of  rations  for 
one  day  at  $1.50  per  day,  it  being  impracticable  to  furnish  cooked  or  travel  rations 
after  the  first  day. 

The  travel  enjoined  is  necessary  in  the  military  service. 

(c)  Pursuant  to  instructions  from  Headquarters  Department  of  Dakota, 
dated  January  10,  1905,  Captain  John  A.  Smith,  1st  Infantry,  will  proceed  to  join 
his  company  at  Fort  Missoula,  Montana. 

The  travel  enjoined   is  necessary   in  the   military  service. 

Fire  Orders 

1      The  fire  brigade  at  this  post   will  be   composed   as   follows: 

Fire  Marshal 

AssiSTANi   Fire  Marshals 

1 

2 

First    Detachment 
Charged  with  extinguishing  fire. 
Four   (4)    N.   C.    O.'s  and   thirty   privates   Co.    "— ." 

Ladder    Detail 
One   (1)   N.   C.  O.  and  fourteen   (14)   privates  Co.   "— ." 


THE  SERGEANT-MAJOR.  85 

Axe  and  Bucket  Detail 
One  (1)   N.  C.  O.  and  twelve  (12)  privates  Co.  "— ." 
4   Axe   men. 
6   Bucket  men. 
2    Lantern   men. 

Hose  Carriage  No.   1  Detail 
One  (1)  N.  C.  O.  and  fourteen  (14)  privates  Co.  "— ." 
2   Tongue  men,   who   act   as   nozzle   men. 
8  Drag  rope  men. 
2  Hydrant  men. 
2   Couplers. 

Hose  Carriage  No.  2  Detail 
One   (1)   N.   C.   O.   and  fourteen   (14)   privates   Co.   "— ." 
2  Tongue  men,   who  act  as  nozzle  men. 
8  Drag  rope  men. 
2.  Hydrant  men. 
2   Couplers. 

Secoxd   Detachment 

(Under  the  immediate  command  of  Lieut ) 

Charged  with  preventing  spread  of  fire  to  neighboring  buildings. 
Six  (6)   N.  C.  O.'s  and  thirty  (30)  privates  Co.   "— ." 

Third   Detachment 

(Under  the  immediate  command  of  Lieut ) 

Charged  with  the  rescue  of  property  from  burning  or  endangered  buildings. 
Six  (6)  N.  C.  O.'s  and  fifty  (50)  privates  Co.  "— ." 

First   Aid   Detachment 
(To   report   to  the   Fire-  Marshal) 

Two   (2)   members  of  the  Hospital   Corps,  with  litter  and  first   aid  pouches. 

II.  The  fire  marshal  is  charged  with  the  management  of  all  fires  which  may 
occur  at  his  post,  and  will  be  respected  and  obeyed  accordingly.  He  will  make  a 
careful  inspection  of  his  post  at  least  once  a  month,  with  the  object  of  making  sure 
that   the  following  precautionary  measures  have  been  carried   out. 

All  chimneys  thoroughly  cleaned  before  setting  up  stoves  and  starting  fires  in. 
them  for  the  winter.  All  flues  and  pipes  examined,  to  see  that  woodwork  is  not 
exposed,  that  the  stove-pipe  apertures  have  proper  thimbles ;  that  proper  protection 
is  pi"ovided  where  pipes  pass  through  or  into  lathed  and  plastered  walls ;  that  walls 
are  protected  with  tin  or  zinc  where  stove-pipes  pass  near  them  and  that  stove- 
pipe joints  are  not  drawn  apart  or  loosened. 

No  fire  or  lights   (other  than  the  stable  lanterns)   allowed  in  any  stables. 

No  fires   in  unoccupied  buildings. 

That  the  fire  apparatus  is  kept  in  good  order. 

In  case  of  the  absence  of  the  fire  marshal,  the  senior  assistant  present  will 
act  as  fire  marshal  and  in  the  name  of  the  commanding  officer  will  call  upon  officers 
present  to  act  as  his  assistants. 


86  CHAPTER  VII. 

Ill  the  event  of  the  absence  of  the  fire  marshal  and  both  assistants,  the  senioi 
officer  present  will  act  as  fire  marshal  and  in  the  name  of  the  commanding  officer 
will  call  upon  officers  present  to  act  as  his  assistants. 

III.  In  case  of  fire  the  alarm  will  be  given  immediately  by  the  person  dis- 
covering it ;  if  a  sentinel,  by  discharging  his  piece  and  calling  "Fire,"  and  adding  the 
number  of  his  post;  if  not  a  sentinel,  by  calling  "Fire!  Fire!"  The  musician  of  the 
guard  will  at  once  sound  fire  call,  which  will  be  taken  up  by  the  musician  of  the 
garrison. 

The  retreat  gun  will  be  discharged  by  the  commander  of  the  guard. 

The  adjutant  will  report  to  the  commanding  officer,  the  quartermaster  will 
repair  to  the  Q.  M.  Storehouse ;  Post  N.  C.  Staff  officers  to  their  respective  store- 
houses;  sergeant-major  and  clerks  in  adjutant's  office  to  post  headquarters.  The  offi- 
cer of  the  day  will  proceed  to  the  guard  house  and  give  such  instructions  as  may  be 
necessary.  The  post  plumber,  supplied  with  wrench  and  plumber  tongs,  and  all 
field  musicians  will  at  once  report  to  the  fire  marshal. 

IV.  The  fire  marshal  will  be  held  responsible  for  the  discipline,  drill  and 
equipment  of  the  entire  fire  brigade ;  he  will  inspect  the  fire  apparatus  once  every  two 
weeks,  and  will  have  a  "Fire  Drill"  on  or  about  the  fifteenth  of  every  month. 

V.  When  fire  call  is  sounded  all  prisoners  who  may  be  at  work  under  sen- 
tinels will  at  once  be  returned  to  the  guard  house,  and,  if  fire  is  not  in  immediate 
vicinity,  locked  in  their  cells.  If  the  fire  is  at  the  guard  house,  or  in  immediate 
vicinity,  so  that  the  guard  house  is  in  danger,  all  prisoners  will  be  at  once  taken  to 
the  company  barracks  farthest  from  the  fire  and  left  there  under  guard.  The  guard, 
except  one  N.  C.  officer  and  three  privates,  will  proceed  at  once  to  the  scene  of  the 
fire  and  report  to  the  fire  marshal,  who  will  instruct  them  as  to  their  duty. 

All  organizations  or  portions  of  same  not  mentioned  above  will  form  at  their 
respective  parade  grounds  and  stand  at  ease. 

All  organizations  at  such  a  time  are  subject  to  the  orders  of  the  fire  marshal. 
The  Quartermaster's  Department  will  furnish  the  necessary  equipment. 

All  instructions  necessary  for  the  execution  of  this  order  not  herein  specially 
mentioned  will  be  given  by  the  fire  marshal. 

VI.  The  fire  apparatus  will  be  kept  at  the  hose  house  and  when  the  alarm  is 
given,  the  various  details  will  proceed  to  that  place  immediately,  obtain  their  appro- 
priate apparatus,  and  report  to  the  fire  marshal  at  the  fire. 

Service  and  Roll  Calls 

Reveille 

1st   Call  5.15   A.    M. 

March  5.25  a.    m. 

Assembly  5.30  a.   m. 

Mess  Call  5.45  a.  m. 

(Police  of  barracks   and  premises   immediately   after  breakfast.) 

Sick   Call  6.30   a.    m. 


THE  SERGEANT-MAJOR.  87 

Drill 

(Daily  except  Saturdays 
and  Sundays) 

1st  Call  6.35  A.   M. 

Assembly  6.45  a.   m. 

Recall  7.15  a.   m. 

Setting-up,  calisthenic,  athletic  and  gymnastic  exercises  under  the  immediate 
charge  of  the  noncommissioned  officers  and  under  the  superintendence  of  2nd  Lieu- 
tenant   24th    Infantry. 

Fatigue  Call  ^  7.30  a.   m. 

Guard-Mounting 

Drill 

1st   Call  8.20  a.    m. 

Assembly  8.30  a.    m. 

(Daily  except  Saturdays 

and  Sundays) 

1st   Call  9.20  a.    m. 

Assembly  9.30  a.   m. 

Recall  .     10.15  A.    M. 

(From  Par.   114  to  Par.   150,  Infantry  Drill  Regulations,   1901.) 

Drill 

(Mondays,  Wednesdays 

and  Fridays) 
1st  Call  10.35  A.    M. 

Assembly  10.45  a.    m. 

Recall  11.30  a.    m. 

(From  Par.    179  to  Par.  248,  Infantry  Drill  Regulations,   1901.) 

Recall  from  Fatigue  11.30  a.  m. 

Drill 

(Tuesdays  and  Thursdays) 

1st  Call  10.35  A.    M. 

Assembly  10.45  a.   m. 

Recall  11.45  a.    m. 

(From  Par.  249  to  Par.  367,   Infantry  Drill  Regulations,   1901.) 

All  company  officers,  except  the  Officer  of  the  Day,  will  attend  the  9.30  and 
the  10.45  A.  M.  drills  and  the  parades. 

One  officer  will  attend  retreat  with  every  company. 

1st    Sergeant's    Call  12.00  M. 

Mess  Call  12.15   p.  m. 

Fatigue   Call.  1.00   p.  m. 

Recall  from  Fatigue  S.OO  p.  m. 

Mess  Call  5.30  p.  m. 


88  CHAPTER  VII. 

Parade,  daily  except  Saturdays  and  Sundays,  1st  Call,  40  min- 
utes before  sunset.     Assembly,  30  minutes  before  sunset.* 

Retreat,  Satitrdays  and  Sundays. 

1st    Call,    15    minutes    before    sunset.      Assembly,    10    minutes 
later.     Retreat  at  signal  from  the  Adjutant. 

Tattoo  9.30  p.    m. 

Call    to    Quarters  10.45   p.    m. 

Taps  11.00   p.    M. 

Saturday   Inspection 

1st   Call  8.20  A.    M. 

Assembly  8.30   a.    m. 

Beginning    Saturday,     ,and    every    alternate 

Saturday  thereafter,  Inspection  will  he  in  the  heavy  march- 
ing   order. 

Guard  Mounting  on  Saturdays,  1st  Call  immediately  after  In- 
spection  and   Assembly   10  minutes  later. 

Fatigue  Call  on  Saturdays,  immediately  after  First  Call  for 
Guard   Mounting. 

All  Extra  and  Special  Duty  Men  will  attend  two  drills  each 
week  and  all  inspections  and  ceremonies,  unless  excused 
by  the  commanding  officer. 

During   the   drill   hours   the   company   musicians    will    practice 

under   the   direction    of   the   Adjutant. 

Officers'  School — Mondays,  Wednesdays  and  Fridays,  1.30  to 
2.30   p.   M. 

Machine  Gun  Drill — Mondays,  Wednesdays  and  Fridays,  2.40 
to  3.30   p.    M. 

Signal  Drill — Mondays,  Wednesdays  and  Fridays,  2.40  to  3.30 
p.    M. 

Noncommissioned  Officers'  School  (under  one  of  the  company 
officers) — Mondays,  Wednesdays  and  Fridays,  2.40  to  3.30 
p.    M   . 

Church   Call — Sundays,    10.30   a.    m. 

*  "Paragraph  440,  Army  Regulations,  1904,  construed  in  connection  with  para- 
graph 202,  Anny  Regulations,  means  that  a  parade  is  required  to  be  held  daily, 
except  Sundays,  unless,  in  the  opinion  of  the  commanding  officer,  the  weather  is  so 
inclement,  or  other  conditions  are  such  as  to  make  it  impracticable ;  and  that  a  parade 
will  he  held  on  Sunday,  only  when,  in  the  opinion  of  the  commanding  officer,  there 
is  a  special  necessity  for  doing  so. 

"The  word  'parade,'  as  used  in  paragraph  440,  Army  Regulations,  means  the 
ceremony  of  parade  as  prescribed  in  the  authorized  drill  regulations."  (War  Dept. 
Decision,   May  26,   1906.) 

It  may  be  added,  the  custom  of  the  service  is  not  to  hold  parades  on  Saturdays. 


THE  SERGEANT-MAJOR.  89 

LABOR  SAVING  DEVICES  AND  CONVENIENCES 

Not  only  can  much  time  and  labor  be  saved,  but  also  the  work 
of  the  office  can  be  greatly  simplified  and  systematized  by  the  use 
of  conveniences  in  the  way  of  rubber  stamps,  mimeographs,  wire  bas- 
kets, file  cases,  pigeon-hole  boxes,  etc. 

Rubber  Stamps.  Self-inking  stamps  (that  is,  those  mounted  on 
metal  frames)  are  considered  the  most  satisfactory,  the  impressions 
always  being  clear,  clean-cut,  uniform  and  well  aligned.  A  clerk 
should  be  especially  charged  with  keeping  the  frames  oiled,  the  let- 
ters clean  and  the  pads  inked. 

Rubber  Stamps  Usually  Used  in  an  Adjutant's  Office.  (Required 
for  on  Form  60,  Q.  M.  D., — Estimate  for  Regular  Supplies.) 

1.  HEADQUARTERS  24TH  INFANTRY, 

Fort  Harrison,  Mont. 
Received 

2.  Respectfully  forwarded  to  the  Adjutant 
General,  Department  of  Dakota. 

3.  Respectfully   returned   to  the   Adjutant 
General,  Department  of  Dakota. 

4.  Respectfully  returned  to  the   Chief 
Quartermaster,  Department  of  Dakota. 

17   SEPT.,   1906  14.      Fort  Harrison,  Mont. 

(Dating   Stamp)  Received. 

Respectfully    forwarded    to    the     Chief 
Quartermaster,   Department  of  Dakota. 
Rec'd  back,   Hdqrs.   24th   Inf. 

Indorsement. 

Fort    Harrison,    Mont. 
Colonel  24th  Infantry, 

Commanding. 
Captain   and   Adjutant,    24th    Infantry, 

Adjutant. 
APPROVED. 
HEADQUARTERS    24TH    INFANTRY,    21.     DISAPPROVED. 

Fort   Harrison,    Mont.  22.     WAR    DEPARTMENT 


5. 

To  the  Quartermaster. 

15 

6. 

To  the  Commissary. 

7. 

To  the  Surgeon. 

16 

8. 

To  the  Commanding  Officer,  Co.  " — 
24th   Infantry. 

,"  17 

9. 

For   remark. 

18 

10. 

For  transmission. 

11. 

For  necessary  action. 

•   19 

12. 

To  note  and  return. 

13. 

Indorsement. 

20 

Official  Business. 
Penalty  for  private  use,   $300. 


Note:  Rubber  stamps  and  seals  are  sometimes  used  by  some  for  authenticating 
orders  at  post  and  regimental  headquarters,  but  there  is  no- authority  for  this  and  it 
should  not  be  done.      (Indorsement,  A.  G.   O.,  Nov.  2,   1907.) 


90  CHAPTER  VII. 

The  Four  Basket  System  consists  of  four  ordinary  wire  or 
wicker  office  baskets  kept  on  the  Adjutant's  desk  and  marked:  "In," 
"Commanding  Officer,"  "Hold,"  and  "Out." 

All  mail,  pass  lists  and  other  incoming  matter  are  placed  in 
the  "In"  basket. 

All  papers  requiring  office  marks,  the  typewriting  of  indorse- 
ments, or  other  action  in  the  sergeant-major's  office,  as  well  as  all 
communications  ready  for  mailing,  delivery,  etc.,  are  placed  in  the 
"Out"  basket,  which  is  emptied  by  the  sergeant-major  from  time  to 
time  during  office  hours. 

The  sergeant-major  places  in  the  "In"  basket  all  papers  requir- 
ing the  signature  of  the  commanding  officer  or  the  Adjutant. 

Papers  for  the  signature  or  other  action  of  the  commanding  of- 
ficer are  placed  in  the  "Commanding  Officer"  basket  by  the  Adjutant. 

Communications  which  can  not  be  acted  on  at  once,  first  have 
entered  upon  them  the  proper  office  marks  and  are  then  placed  in  the 
"Hold"  Basket.     The  contents  of  this  basket  must  be  examined  daily. 

Under  no  circumstances  should  papers  be  allowed  to  lie  around 
loose  on  the  Adjutant's  desk — each  and  every  paper  should  be  placed 
in  its  proper  basket  and  made  fast  with  a  paper  weight. 

Memorandum  Slips.  Whenever  the  Sergeant-Major  thinks  of 
something  requiring  action  but  which  can  not  be  done  at  the  time,  he 
should  at  once  note  the  same  on  a  piece  of  paper  which  should  be 
placed  in  the  "hold-over"  drawer  or  basket. 

It  is  a  very  good  thing  for  the  Sergeant-Major  to  get  into  the 
habit  of  devoting  two  or  three  minutes  each  morning  immediately 
after  reaching  his  desk  to  think  of,  or  recalling,  things  that  should  be 
done  that  day  or  at  some  future  time  and  then  making  out  the  proper 
memorandum  slips. 

Envelopes  With  Printed  Addresses. 

If  there  is  a  printing  press  available,  have  envelopes  printed  with 
the  address  of  The  Adjutant  General,  U.  S.  A.,  the  Adjutant  General 
Dept.,  and  others  with  whom  the  office  has  very  much  correspon- 
dence. The  envelopes  should  be  kept  in  a  rack  with  properly  labeled 
compartments.  If  there  is  no  printing  press  available,  rubber  stamps 
may  be  used  for  the  purpose. 

An  Adjutant'r;^"Tickler."  A  card-system  "Tickler,"  designed 
by    the   author    to    be    used :    Prhnarily,    in    connection    with    the    prompt 


THE  SERGEANT-MAJOR. 


91 


rendition  of  all  reports,  returns,  estimates  and  requisitions  required 
of  post  commanders  by  Army  Regulations  and  War  Department 
Orders; 

Secondarily,  as  a  suspended  file,  to  recall  at  the  proper  time  things 
to  be  done  or  matters  to  be  considered  at  any  time  in  the  future. 

For  example: 

(a)  Periodical  and  other  reports  and  returns  to  be 
rendered  to  or  by  the  office. 

(b)  Communications  that  should  be   returned  to   or  f         By 
by  the  office.  \  a 

(c)  Information   that   should   be   furnished   to   or  by  /    certain 
the  office.  \       time. 

(d)  Orders,    letters    and   verbal   directions    requiring 
action  by  the  office  or  by  subordinates. 

If,  for  instance,  communications  number  100,  that  should  be 
returned  to  the  office  not  later  than  the  20th  of  the  month  (Novem- 
ber), is  mailed  Captain  John  A.  Smith,  on  the  10th,  then  fill  out  and 
file  in  front  of  the  '"20"  guide  card,  a  card  like  this: 


Number  of 
Communi- 
cation 


100 


To  Whom  sent 


Capt.   John  A.    Smith 


When 


Nov.    10 


To  be  returned   by 


Nov.    20 


Remarks 


On  the  morning  of  the  20,  when  the  "19"  guide  card  is  re- 
moved from  in  front  and  placed  in  rear,  the  check  card  will  show  up. 

If  the  communication  has  not  yet  been  returned,  just  keep 
on  advancing  the  filing  date  of  the  check  card  until  the  paper  does 
return. 

An  alphabetical  list  of  the  names  of  the  persons  to  whom 
communications  are  sent  should  be  kept  (preferably  by  means  of 
cards),  with  the  filing  dates  of  the  check  cards  opposite  each  name. 
For  instance,  after  Captain  Smith's  name  would  be  noted,  "November 
20."  In  this  manner,  should  the  communication  be  returned  before 
Nov.  20,  by  reference  to  the  alphabetical  list  the  filing  date  can  be 
ascertained  at  once  and  the  check  card  found  and  removed  from  the 
file  without  having  to  look  over  the  check  cards  of  several  dates. 

A  supply  of  check  cards  with  proper  heading^  should  be  printed, 
mimeographed  or  hectographed. 


92 


CHAPTER  VII. 


(ADJUTANT'S  TICKLER.) 

(Obtainable  from  the  Quartermaster's  Dept.     See  Cir.   1,  Q.  M.  G.  O.,  '08,  page  75). 


r  JUIY    VAl]GUST\^TFMBF^^^QCTQBER^NQVFMR^^ 
JANUARY\fEBRUARYN(  march  >(  ARRIL    \     MAY\JUN 


FCPMRFf 


January  1 


Nature 


Requisition  for  Stationery  for 
I'ost  Hdqrs. 


K^linidte     of     CloUiiiif;     uiiil 
K(iniii:i}i:c  from  Quartermastur. 


FORM. 


41,  Q.  M    D 


53,  Q.  M.  [). 


AUTHORITY. 


A    K.  WMi. 


A.  R.    1287 
&     12S8, 
nineniifiJ  by 
G.  0.8-2,  A. 
G.  ().,  190-2. 


REMARKS. 


To.Quarteriiin.<ter 


3  ooviits  to  Ctiiff  y.  M.  l)f|jl. 


SUNDAY^ONDAY^UESDAY^DMESDAY^riURSDAy^FRlDAY.^TURDAY^ 


1.  Officer  of  tho  Day  (let:iii.  I      Par.  30, 

2.  Officer  of  tlif  Guard  detail.       i       .M.G.  D 

3.  Telegrajjhic  report  of  tillil^tIllellts  iluring  past    week,    by 
Recruiting  Ollieer  (v.svnll}j  Ihe  A<lj}ilnnt),  to  A.  G.,  U.  S.  A. 
Telegram  A.  G.  0.,  March  20,   11)03.     (Furm:   Adjutant 
(Iniernl,  W-.i&hington,  I).  C.     Knlhtmcnts  pnsl  week:  ''A" 

" }  m'/iij;';t/ii)iii  jujii'imij,  muj.  '  ' 

To  be  .'^ulimitted  only  wiien  any  enlistments  have  been  made 


Printing  Press.  A  printing  press  purchased  from  the  regi- 
mental tuncl  or  otherwise,  is  a  great  convenience  for  printing  pass 
lists,  blank  forms  for  periodical  reports  required  by  post  or  regi- 
mental headquarters,  programs  of  concerts,  etc 


THK  SERGEANT-MAJOR. 


93 


A  Duplicating  Device.  In  case  it  be  not  possible  to  get  a  printing 
press,  a  good  first  class  duplicating  device  can  be  made  to  answer  the 
same  purpose  in  most  cases.  The  mimeograph  does  not  always  give 
satisfaction,  and  the  Neostyle  is  very  expensive.  An  excellent  device 
for  duplicating  in  a  small  way  and  economically,  is  the  Daus  Tip  Top 
Duplicator,  made  in  four  sizes  and  sold  by  The  Felix  F.  Daus  Dupli- 
cator Co.,  Ill  John  St.,  New  York.  Size  No.  1,  with  a  printing  sur- 
face of  8^  by  13  ins.,  costs  $7.50. 

B  Typewriter.     It  goes  without  saying  that  now-a-days  no  office 

is  complete  without  at  least  one  typewriter,  which  can  usually  be  ob- 
tained from  the  Quartermaster's  Department  on  memorandum  receipt. 
C  Electric    Bells.      (Usually   obtainable   from   the    Signal    Corps.) 

The  offices  of  the  commanding  officer  and  the  Adjutant  should  be 
equipped  with  electric  bells,  so  that  the  sergeant-major,  the  clerks, 
orderlies  and  others  can  be  gotten  without  having  to  hollo  for  them. 
A  code  of  rings  should  be  devised  whereby  each  man  shall  have  an 
individual  call. 

D  File-Case  for  Reference  Books.  A  flat  file-case,  made  after  the 
one  represented  in  the  following  cut,  is  fastened  to  the  wall,  back  of 
the  Sergeant-Major's  desk. 


<^^'f^^, 


— > 


(Border  is  made 
of  1  inch  mater- 
ial and  partitions 
\  inch  material ; 
receptacles  2\  in- 
ches deep;  the 
rods  "A"  and  "B" 
extend  out  i  inch 
from  face  of  case  ; 
the  grooves  are  2 
inches  deep  and 
li  inches  wide.) 


94 


CHAPTER  VII. 


Indices  of  Current  Orders  and  Circulars.  A  convenient  and 
satisfactory  way  of  keeping  indices  of  all  current  orders  and  circulars 
is  by  means  of  cards,  as  shown  in  this  cut: 


Falcon  and  Other  Files  with  Alphabetical  Indices.  Papers  fre- 
quently referred  to  are  made  readily  accessible  by  being  filed  in 
Falcon  or  other  files  with  alphabetical  indices,  and  kept  in  convenient 
places. 


Pigeon-hole  Box.    A  box  with  a  number  of  pigeon-holes  labeled, 
for  instance,  as  follows,  is  a  great  convenience: 

1  Memorandum  Receipts  7     Personal  Orders 

2  Receipted  Bills  8 

3  Money  Matters  9 

4  Answered  Letters  10 

5  Unanswered  Letters  11 

6  Li  Abeyance 


Catalogues,  Price  Lists,  etc. 
Newspaper  Clippings 
Memoranda 
Miscellaneous 


THE  SERGEANT-MAJOR. 


95 


Useful  Forms.     The   following-  forms   can   be  used  to  great   ad- 
vantage in  an  Adjutant's  Office: 


Foii  Harrison,  Mont. 

— 190 

Detail: 

For  OfBc«r  of  th*  Day  to-morrow: 


34th  lofantry. 

By  ordtrof 

tsU  LituL  24  Ih  Infantry,  AJfuianl. 


^}6' 


Opened 


Half   Folded 


Folded 


96 


CHAPTER  VII. 


(1) 


Fort   Harrison,    Mont., 
1908. 


The  Cojnmanding  Officer, 
Co.     '         ,"  24th  I7ifant7'y. 
The  following  absentees  were  reported  on  the  guard  report  this  date. 
Retreat 


Eleven  p.  m.  inspection. 


Reveille 


By  order  of  the  Commanding  Officer 


(2) 


Captain  and  Adjutant,  24th  Infty., 

Adjutant. 


^ 
^ 


MEMORANDUM. 

For  the  Information  of  Company  Commanders.. 


NAME. 


RANK. 


-£^' 


-%- 


•OK) 


DELINQUENCY. 


D4TE. 


%- 


H%: 


Fort  Harrison,  Montana.                         To  the  Commanding  Officer,  Co. ... ,  24th  Infantry, 
190     ,  By  order  o(  • 


1st  Lieut  d.  Batt.  Adjt.  24th  Infy., 
Adjutaht. 


(Used   to   report   absentees   from   reveille,   retreat,    11    p.   m.    inspection — also   for 
other  purposes.) 


THE  SERGEANT-MAJOR. 


97 


Fort   Harrison,    Mont., 
1906. 

Officer  of  the  Day. 
Sir: 

The  commanding  officer  directs  you  please  send  Prisoner 

to  the"  hospital  at  9  a.   m.  to-morrow  for  examination. 

Very  respectfully, 

Captain   and  Adjutant  24th   Infantry. 
Adjutant. 

Note:  Some  officers  do  not  consider  it  good  form  to  use  the  word  "please" 
in  giving  directions,  especially  if  by  order  of  a  superior.  However,  the  author,  when 
adjutant  and  when  aide-de-camp,  always  used  the  term.  It  detracts  in  no  way  from 
the  force  of  the  orders  given  and  it  leaves  an  agreeable  impression  of  politeness  in 
the  mind  of  the  officer  addressed,  especially  if  he  be  senior  to  the  officer  giving  the 
order  by  his  chief's  authority. 


FOHT  HARRISON.  MONT. 
_ I906. 

The  Surgeon. 

Port  Hairisoa 
Sir: 

The  commaDdiDg  officer   direcis   me   to   inforiD  you 

ihat   >oiL..' J. *n 

alleged  deserter  from  

^^ „. will   be  sent   to  the  hospital  at  9 

a  m..  (o-roorrow.  for  examinatioo  under  paragraph  124, 
A    R 

Very  respectfully. 


Capiaifi  and  Adjutant  24th  Infantry, 
Adjutant 


^t5^- 


98  CHAPTER  VII. 

Fort  Harrison,   Mont., 

1906. 

The    Officer    of    the    Day: — 

The  Commanding  Officer  directs  that  you  please  have 

Pvt 

Co.      "       ,"      24th      Infantry,      sent      to      Summary      Court      Room      at 
M.    to-day. 

1st    Lieut.,    24th    Infantry, 
Adjutant. 

K  Fort   Harrison,    Mont., 

• 1906. 

Commanding  Officer, 

Co.   "     ,"  24th  Infantry:— 

Private 

of    your    company    was    this    day    tried    by    the     Summary     Court,     and 
sentenced    to    forfeit    $ of   his    pay,    and    to    be    confined    at    hard 

labor  under  the  charge  of  the  Post  Guard  for days. 

He  is  hereby  confined  by  order  of  the  Commanding  Officer. 


24th    Infantry, 

Summary  Court. 

(Form  used  when  the  Summary  Court  has  authority  to  confine  soldiers.) 


Fort   Missoula,   Mont., 
1908. 


The  Commanding  Officer, 

Co.   "     ,"  24th  Infantry, 

The  Summary  Court  having  awarded  confinement  in  the  case  of  Private 

of  your  Company,  you  are  directed  to  confine  him. 

By    order    of    Colonel    Smith : 

Captain  and  Adjutant  24th  Infantry. 

Adjutant. 

(Form  used  when  the  Summary   Court  has  not   authority  to   confine   soldiers.) 


THE  SERGEANT-MAJOR.  99 


Fort  Harrison,  Mont., 

1906. 

Officer  of  the  Day: — 

Private     

Co.  "  ,"  24th  Infantry,  has  been  tried  and  not  having  been  awarded 
any  confinement,  the  Commanding  Officer  directs  that  he  be  released 
from  the  guard  house  and   reported  to  his  company  for  duty. 

th  Infantry, 

Summary   Court. 

(Form   used   when   the    Summary    Court   has    authority   to   release   soldiers    from 
confinement.) 


Fort   Missoula,   Mont., 

1908. 

Officer  of  the  Day: — 

The  Summary  Court  having  awarded  no  confinement,  you  will   release 

Private     

Co.  "     ,"  24th  Infantry,  and  have  him  reported  to  the  1st  Sergeant  of  his 

company  for  duty.  By  order  of  the  Commanding  Officer: 

Captain  and  Adjutant  24th  Infantry. 

Adjutant. 

(Form   used   when   Summary    Court   has    not   authority   to    release    soldiers   from 
confinement.) 


100 


CHAPTER  VII. 


1st  Sergeant.  Co. "       ",  24th  Infty.:- 

The  following-named  men  of  your  company  will  be  sent   to  the   Sum- 
mary Court  at    9   o'clock  A.  M.  to-morrow. 


For  Trial. 

Rank. 

Witnesses. 

Rank. 

1^                               nl/.' 

Le-:^^ 

..                  246"                 > 

*  .^     J 

Y- ^ ,£/*♦  .               ' 

•    ^    • 

» 

Fort  Harrison,  Mont.. 


190....:        Sergaant-Major,  24th  Infty., 


Fort  Harrison,  Mont. 


1908 


FIRST  SERGEANT, 

CcmiPany  "       r"  24th  Inantry: 


IfS 


affached  to  your  company  for  rations  and  quarters. 


Last  rationed  to  include rped 


Sergeant  Major  24th  Infantry. 


4> 


THE  SERGEANT-MAJOR. 


101 


DETAILS  FOR  TO-MORROW, 


1906 


CO. 


FOR  GUARD. 


SERGEANTS. 


h 


/r 


CORPORALS. 


MUSICIANS  PVTS. 


Z^" 


FATIGUE. 


SGTS.     CORPS.  PVTS, 


/• 


*K — "9 — * 


Signature  of  Isi  6ergeani 


Remarks : 


Sergeant-Major,   24th    Infantry. 


102 


CHAPTER  VII. 


CO 


Check  Card 


FOR 


\i' 

/.     N.  C.S.fiB*nd. 

'4o 

* 

2.    Co.  "A": 

i.    '•■  "B-.: 

*.    "  "C:  , 

s.    ■■  "tr^ _. 

i.     ■■  "E" 



A     ••  "f '. 

s.     ■•  ■■<?• 

».   •■  "H":. 

— 

10.  "  "1" 

//.    ••  -K" 

(X    "  "L" 

li.    •■  "IT'.. 

14. 

IS V 

-3J^' 


THE  SERGEANT-MAJOR. 


103 


nr 


<0 


MEMORANDUM. 

TO  BE  ATTAOHEO  TO  THE  REQUISITION. 

(Requisition  for  Ordnance  Stores 

Co.  ♦•    •*,  24th  Infantry, 
Dated ! 190....), 

Office  of  the  Comdg.  Officer, 
Fort  Harrison, '.Mont. , 

..;.:... iso   , 

TO  THE  ORDNANCE  OFFICER. 

Fort  Harrison,  Mont*^ 

190..... 

Respectfully  returned  to  the. 
Adjutant,  with  action  noted  in 
the  proper  column. 

24th  Inft'y., 

Ordnance  Officer 


^3>^" 


104 


CHAPTER  VII. 


A 


00 


OFFICERS     WILL     PLEASE     SIGN     THEIR 

INITIALS  OPPOSITE  THEIR  NAMES, 

THUS  INDICATING  THEY  HAVE 

READ  THE  PAPER  HEREWITH 


V 


< 


3>^" 


Major  Harris 
^*       Jones 
''       Smith 

Captain  Adams 

''        Barker 
etc. 

First  Lieut.  Anderson 

Baxter 
etc. 

Second  Lieut.  Allen 
'■'  ''      Booze 

etc. 


To  contain  in  rank  groups  and  alphabetically  arranged  the  names  of  all  the  officers  in  the  Post. 
This  slip  is  attached  to  circulars,  etc,  to  be  shown  to  the  officers  of  the  command.) 


THE  SERGEANT-MAJOR. 


105 


Port  Harrison,  Montana, 

„....-.... , 190  . 

-«-..-*-— ~->-mc Co.  ."   ",  24th  Inrty.. 

owes  the  amounts  indicated  and  has  made  satisfactory 
arrangements  for  the  payment  thereof:— 


Post  Exchange,  $rr.:s..T*tt..-^ ^^* * 

^  Eichiioj!c  Officer. 

•olc 
Post  Laundry.       $ ,, 


Po«t  Laaadr)n]ao 


Company  Tailor.  $.._ 


Company  Barber,  % 


Corapaoy  Tailor 


Compao)  Darbcr 

To  the  best  of  my  knowledge  and  belief 

_„._ „ owes  no  other  launaryman,  tailor  or 

barber. 

Ist  Sergl.  Co  "       ".  2-llh  Infty. 

NOTE;     This  clearance  slip  must  be  atlachet)  10  the  Certificate  of    Discharge   bty 
fore  it  is  siihinitted  to  tlie  Commanding  OHioer  for  signature 


^rfL" 


106 


CHAPTER  VII. 


Fort  Harrison,  Mont., 


The  Chief  Paymaster, 

Dept.  of  Dakota, 

St.  Paul,  Minn. 

Sir: 

In  compliance  with  A.  R.  12JJ, 
igo8,  I  have  the  honor  to  inform  you  that 
I  have  this  day  transferred  my  pay-account 

for  the  month  of. ,  I  go 

to •■•- 


Respectfully, 


igo 


24th  Infty. 


A 


00 


V 


<- 


3K" 


-> 


(For  the  convenience  of  the  officers  of  the  command,  printed  envelopes,   addressed  to 
X\\e  Chief  Paymaster  of  the  department,  shonl<l"be  furnished  with  tliese  blanks,) 


THE  SERGEANT-MAJOR 


\. 


107 


■n 

c 


00 


Fort  Harrison,  Motif. 


igoS 


IJic  Coiiiinanding  O ffjccr  dircils  tJtal 


Captain  and  Aajutant,  24th  In f try.. 
Adjutant. 


4  ins. 

(Another    convenient    blank    is    the    same    as    the    above,    substituting    "Memo- 
randum for"  for  "The  Commanding  Officer  directs  that'  ). 


108  CHAPTER  VIL 

COMMANDING  OFFICERS. 
N.  C.  S.  and  Band 

1st  Battalion    

2nd   Battalion    

3rd   Battalion    

Company 

A   

B 

C    

etc. 
Det.  H.  C 

(To  paste  on  memoranda  to  be  shown  to  organization   commanders.) 


FIRST  SERGEANTS. 
Received  for  communication   to   their   Company   Ci-m  \\ 

il 

manders.  1 

I 

A   ' 

B    

C    .. 

etc. 
Det.  H.  C 

(To  paste  on   memoranda.) 

Note:     Another    useful    form    is    same    as    the    preceding,    except    "Received    for 
communication,   etc.,"   is  left  off. 


THE  SERGEANT-MAJOR. 


109 


'Pass  List,  Co.  "     ,'*  24th  U,  5.  Infantry. 


Fott  Harnson,  Hon 

/., 

i90 

• 

NO. 

NAME. 

RANK. 

Authorized  Absence.  | 

Departed. 

Returned. 

Remarks. 

From 

To 

aiy.'                        V 

t       tf*     , 

£        J'       . 

I       **-'     . 

.        •*'    » 

X      ^'     y 

«                      i^'A' 

1. 

* 

^ 

<      .^-      1 

*  :u  • 

'      -♦       * 

•       ^      ' 

*    -f       • 

•                 CJt* 

2. 

* 

^ 

3. 

V 

•w_                 -^ 

^ 

♦■ 

\ 

5. 

■\                         ' 

^ 

-* 

6. 

( 

7. 

^ 

V. 

ft. 

/■ 

e- 

V. 

10.. 

\ 

V 

V 

11 

1 

\ 

^_ 

12. 

;/ 

IS. 

' 

14. 

^ 

16. 

' 

Approved 


Granted: 

Sy  order  of „ 


..24th  Infantry, 
Comd'g  Co. 


24th  Infantry. 

Adjutant. , 


Notts 


1.  The  names  to  bcarranged  alphabeliuilly,  nfin-coinmiasion*<i  officers  first. 

2.  Men  on  posi  xrs  net  excu(^  from  inlervsning  duties,  unlets,  so  sLat«d  in  th«  column  of^rcmarks. 

3.  This  mark  (X)  after  a  ttame,  indicates  permissioa  to  wear  civilian  clothes. 


110 


CHAPTER  VII. 


Pass  List 

Clerks  in  the  Adjutant's  Office, 

Fort  Harrison.  Mont., 


.190 


NO 

NAME. 

RAfK. 

Authorized  Absence. 

Departed. 

1                                     n_ _. 

From       1       To 

<                           ?'^" 

^54" 

'J!^" 

M" 

f-4^'U 

^^ 

2'ij" 

t 

*                        C/^4^ 

7^ 

7^ 

v** 

/^ 

/■** 

£/-M     • 

i. 

3 

4 

By  Order  of  Colonel ,. 


■■^•.■•■■■••■••*«*i 


Captain  24th  Infantry, 
Adjutant, 
NOTE:        This  pa$i^oeSjiot.excuSu~9ii/ one  fromjjiteivening  dulitS  unless  SqTtiUeJ  in  iliu  coluimi  of  remarkt. 


Pass  List 

Commanding  Officer's  Orderly, 

Fort  Harrison,  Mont., 


190 


NAME. 


RANK. 


Authorized  Absence. 


From       I       To 


Departed. 


Returned. 


Remarks. 


— 5* 


>^^- 


'J  a.  ni. 


Noon. 


:^">k  %"  >  '^x'^" 


useA  from  all   intervening 
duties. 


By  Order  of  Colonel 


Captain  24th  Infantry. 
.\djutant. 


THE  SERGEANT-AIAJOR. 


Ill 


Vass  List,  Hospital  Corps,  U  S  Army. 

Fori  Harrison.  Montind ...,„ „ 


1904. 


Ho 


Name.! 


Bank. 


AuihoriitJ    Absence- 


Departed. 


Returned. 


Remarks. 


-Z'A- 


-^ 


«.-^- 


.-^- 


ft^' 


5t : 


ApprQved: 


Granled:^ 

By  order  of  Colonel...^ „ «.. 


Capita nd  Asst.  Surg,  U._S._A. 


Captain  24th  Infantry,  Adjutant.) 


NOTE. 
Men  on  Pa»3  are"7iot"9xcii8ed  Irom  intervening  duties  unlcsa  so  sttteJ  in  lh8£olunin  of  remark. 


Co.  '' 


EXTRA  and  SPECIAL 
PASS  LIST 

24th  Infantry. 


t  f 


I'ort  1-f 

arrison. 

Montana, 

T0O7 

No. 

Name 

Rank 

Authorized 
From 

Absence 
■    To 

Departed 

Returned 

Remarks 

Granted : 

By  order  of 

No  objection : 

Captain,  24th  Infantry, 

(Quartermaster. 
Approved. 

Capt.  24th  Infy.,  Comdg,  Co.  "     ." 

NOTE 


Men  on  Pass  are  not  excused  from  intervening  duties  unless  so  stated  in  the  column  of  remarks 

(Same  Pimensions  as  company  pass  list.) 


112 


CHAPTER  VII. 


Fort  Harrison,  Mont. 
APPROVED 

By  Older  of  the  Commanding  Officer: 


Captain  and  Adjutant,  24th  Infty., 
Adjutant. 


To  Visil 


8 


n 

o 
3 
3 

3 
cu 

5' 
»q 

n 

o 

3 

■a 

3 


.^ 


Si 


t-5 


">. 


8 


o 

1-3 


S 

O 


n 

o 


p 


c 
> 

I— I 

o 


K3 

4:^ 


P 


2; 


o 

> 

c/i 


THK  SERGEANT-MAJOR. 


113 


Extra  and  Special  Duty  List. 


Company  "     ,"  24th  U.  S.  I  nfaniry. 
Extra  Duty. 


Special  Duty. 


No. 

- 

Name. 

Rank. 

How  Employed. 

Authority. 

,                          «!•• 

«   i&r"  » 

I               -*  '^'               > 

t              **?/•■* 

1 

»-<■* 

«— ^— ^ 

^                    C/4                      » 

•              <^ 

2 

^O 

V 

S 

4 

5 

• 

1 

s 

• 

s 

-  4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

fort  Harrison,  Mont., 


190. 


Respectfully  submitted  to  the  Adjutant. 


24th  Infantry, 
Comd'g  Company. 


(Post  Commanders  usually  require  a  list  of  extra   and  special   duty  men 
to  be  submitted  to  them  weekly— generally  every  Sunday  morning.) 


114 


CHAPTER  VII. 


I 


Report  of  Non-(^mmis8ioiied  Officers*  School, 
Coj,  **      t?  24th  Infantry, 


Periodf  From ............. 


,.v...../to:. 


r-^'-'il'llJ  .    ■v*- 


....  IttO 


DATE. 

190:  . 

=  •5  §■ 

.  Manual  of 
(Guard  .Duty.j 
'(Paragraphs.) 

If 

ill 
-1 

Nam«g  of  men  wkotc  work  it 
Etpecixlly  Meritorioal, 

From 

To 

From 

To 

From 

To 

From 

■ 

To 

From 

To 

J— 

J-                        tii*                   *» 

[•— /• . 

^^ 

k- 

.i>*^ 

-~ 

'"", 

*.              /•          ■ 

»  /'  • 

.  ""r*   . 

. 

.    _, 

'^ 

'.. 

^ 

- 

1 

""■ 

V-.- 

^    y 

' 

■ 

•       ■ 

^ 

V^^' 

^ 

; 

^-^ 

•v. 

'- 

r 

*— ^AVERAGE  ATTENDANCE^URING  PERIOD  • 
_Noi);Cpm:ni99ioned  OfficeiiiV  -Privates. 


R'os^cUuTl^  Siibniiwed  0jh*  Adjuu'nC> 


For)  HA.rrut)n.  Monii{inr. 


•u^  .  kl^Ukj.**  >«  lOi 


asVOeiiva 


^  24tHJ«f4fllfy^ 
CotiifnanSfSj  Company; 


a 

rr 
o 
o 


^        50 

C         n> 

1 

.      -      3 

:    a    a 

"                                                                                vM 

K:^ 

1 

o 

i   n    s" 

1^ 

li 

«« 

p 

^.      •■ 

i' 

V) 

(*  ^ 

1 

i   § 

1 

1 

p.  -t 

1 

K5! 

s 

;  g 

a 

■S-      > 

ft  cu< 

r 

Z^  'n 

<o 

2      » 

p 

o 

o 

r*          . 

o> 

Tl 

^ 

2  a  < 

f» 

(/) 

c 

o- 

^<»' 

03 

^ 

c 

«_l. 

" 

n 

C 

t9 

S" 

o. 

V 

Ht> 

S' 

" 

CIO 

0 

a. 

n 
X 

C 

a. 

t/3 

1-1 

ii 

S.S.3 

3         -1 

! 

r 

1     ? 

3        *■* 

r- 

^o 
^ 

■Ji 

a 

1 

w 

H 

hj 

50 

Si 

0 

o 

5S 

^1 

^ 

c-2 

2  » 

3  w 

2 

3  O 

2; 

CT) 

^g 

n 

to 

2.» 

P  3 

K 

as 

^ 

•5^^ 

■*   O 

to 

3° 

^  o 

- 

3   ^ 

3-! 

0  r 

ir 

r. 

=  ?r 

g? 

0  o 

p 

c  2- 

X 

1 

3- 

1 

P9 

g 

1 

o 
o 

1 

s 

Si 

:^f 

a 

5 

g3 

c^ 

32 

•T 

3   0 

Cfl 

cra- 
ft -• 
2  S 

^  _ 

c 
er 
S 

ti 

ii 

3  ^ 

w>  -. 

s 

M 

a.  2 

£-^ 

n 

V   3 

E-^  ET 

0- 

5-| 
3>    0 

O    VI 

o  ^ 

S" 

:r  rt 

^  o 

A 

o 

•^  •< 

>• 

a. 

^  ff 

K 

1 

P 

3- 
93 

a: 

o 

a 

w 

p 

^ 

r 

Books  of  Reference,  Maps,  etc.,  to  be  kept  in  the  Adjutant's 
Office;  Blank  Forms  to  be  kept  on  hand;  Reports,  Returns,  Requisi- 
tions, etc.,  to  be  made  by,  to  or  through  the  Adjutant.  See  Supple- 
ment, Chap.  VTI. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 
THE  POST  QUARTERMASTER  SERGEANT 

General  Duties.^  The  Post  Quartermaster-Sergeant  assists  the 
Quartermaster  in  the  performance  of  his  duties,  and  in  this  connection 
he  is  Hable  to  be  required  to  perform,  under  the  supervision  of  the 
Quartermaster,  any  or  all  of  these  duties: 

To  have  charge  of  the  money,  papers,  correspondence,  prepara- 
tion of  estimates,  reports,  returns,  requisitions,  bills  of  lading,  trans- 
portation requests,  etc.; 

To  receive  and  check  all  property,  entering  and  accomplishing 
the  bills  of  lading  for  same,  and  to  be  in  charge  of  the  memorandum 
receipts,  issuing  all  property  and  checking  up  and  examining  any 
that  may  be  turned  in; 

To  have  general  charge  of  the  care  and  preservation  of  the  means 
of  transportation  and  of  all  Quartermaster  property  in  the  store- 
house, and  the  care  of  all  animals; 

To    issue    clothing    and    other    Quartermaster    supplies; 

To  have  general  supervision  over  the  routine  work  of  the  office, 
distributing  the  work  among  the  office  force,  seeing  that  his  assistants 
perform  their  duties  properly,  etc.  In  this  respect  the  Post  Quarter- 
master-Sergeant bears  the  same  relation  to  the  Quartermaster  as 
the  Sergeant-Major  does  to  the  Adjutant.     (See  page  61  A). 

Things  That  The  POST  QUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT 
Should  Take  Special  Care  To  Do.i 

Pay  close  attention  to  all  Q.  M.  G.  orders,  circulars  and  decisions 
and  to  all  War  Department  orders  and  circulars  afifecting  the  Quarter- 
master's Department. 

Look  after  details  as  much  as  possible,  correct  all  errors  and 
irregularities  that  you  observe,   and  prevent  unauthorized  issues. 

Examine  critically  and  check  every  paper  before  it  goes  to  the 
Quartermaster  for  signature — see  that  all  the  notes  on  the  form  and 


(l)The  collated   experiences   of   eight  Post   Quartermaster-Sergeants. 


The  post  quarteraiaster-sergeant.     117 

that    all    orders,   circulars    and    regulations    on    the    subject    have   been 
complied  with. 

Be  courteous,  obliging  and  tactful  with  everybody —  it  will 
cost  you  nothing  and  will  gain  you  the  confidence,  esteem  and  goodwill 
of  all  with  whom  vou  come  in  contact. 

As  far  as  possible  learn  the  names  of  the  various  tools  supplied 
by  the  Quartermaster's  Department  and  familiarize  yourself  with 
their  use. 

Things  The  POST  QUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT  Should 
Take  Special  Care  NOT  To  Do.i 

Never  get  behind  in  your  paper-work,  but  always  keep  your 
work  up  to  date — get  all  your  estimates,  returns,  reports  and  requisi- 
tions in  on  or  before  the  time  they  are  due. 

Never  issue  property  without  proper  authority — that  is,  without 
the  authority  of  the  Quartermaster. 

Do  not  lose  sight  of  the  fact  that  the  Quartermaster's  Depart- 
ment exists  for  the  convenience  of  the  troops  and  not  the  troops  for 
the  convenience  of  the  Quartermaster's  Department,  and  also  remem- 
ber that  the  property  does  not  belong  to  you,  but  that  it  belongs  to  the 
Government  and  that  it  is  intended  for  the  use  of  the  troops. 

Do  not  depend  on  others  to  do  work  that  you  are  justly  ex- 
pected to  do. 

Do  not  entrust  too  much  to  the  extra  and  special  duty  men — 
while  being  considerate  with  them  be  firm  also,  and  exercise  a  close 
supervision  over  their  work — see  yourself  that  they  do  their  work 
promptly,  properly  and  efficiently. 

Whatever  you  do,  do  not  "play  favorites",  and  never  issue 
property  as  a  matter  of  favor — supplies  are  furnished  for  the  good 
of  the  service  and  not  to  satisfy  personal  whims  or  to  enable  Post 
Quartermaster-Sergeants  to  gain  friends. 

In  exchanging  unserviceable  for  serviceable  property,  do  not 
discriminate  between  different  organizations — treat  them  all  alike  and 
thus  save  yourself  trouble   and  unpopularity. 

Do  not  talk  outside  about  the  business  of  your  Department. 


(l)The  collated  experiences  of  eight  Post   Quartermaster-Sergeants. 


118  CHAPTER  VIII. 

"Customs  of  the  Service"  Affecting  The  POST  QUARTERMAS- 
TER-SERGEANT.    (See  par.  A,  page  zil)- 

How  Can  The  POST  QUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT  Make 
Himself  Most  Useful  to  the  Quartermaster? 

By  making  the  interests  of  the  Quartermaster  his  interests; 
and  by  safeguarding  them  as  he  would  his  own;  by  knowing  what 
to  do  and  by  doing  it  without  being  told;  by  being  loyal  to  the 
Quartermaster;  by  carrying  out  what  has  been  said  under  the  headings, 
"Things  The  POST  QUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT  Should  Take 
Special  Care  To  Do",  and  "Things  The  POST  QUARTERMASTER- 
SERGEANT  Should  Take  Special  Care  NOT  To  Do". 

"Pointers"  Regarding  the  Care,  Preservation  and  Responsibility 

t 

of  Property. 

Too  much  attention  can  not  be  given  to  the  proper  care,  pre- 
servation and  accountability  of  property,  and  the  Post  Quartermaster- 
Sergeant  should  be  on  his  constant  guard  to  see  that  it  is  given 
proper  care  and  protection. 

Always  look  after  the  keys  of  the  storerooms  personally  and 
never  entrust  them  to  anyone  except  one  of  the  regularly  detailed 
storekeepers,  and  even  then  never  turn  a  key  over  to  more  than  one 
man — in  case  anything  goes  wrong  it  is  much  easier  to  fix  the  respon- 
sibility on  one  man  than  on  two.  The  key  to  the  clothing  room  should 
always  be  in  the  personal  possession  of  the  Post  Quartermaster- 
Sergeant,  with  a  duplicate  in  the  Quartermaster's  safe.  In  fact,  it 
is  a  good  plan  to  keep  in  the  Quartermaster's  safe  duplicates  of  keys 
to  all  storehouses. 

The  greatest  possible  care  should  be  exercised  in  the  selection 
of  storekeepers,  so  that  none  but  thoroughly  honest  and  reliable  men 
are  detailed;  and  these  men  should  be  carefully  instructed  in  their 
duties. 

In  each  storeroom  there  should  be  kept  a  memorandum  book,  in 
which  is  entered  every  issue  for  temporary  use,  together  with  the 
name  of  the  noncommissioned  officer  or  other  person  to  whom 
issued,  and  the  date;  and  then,  when  the  articles  are  returned,  nota- 
tion of  the  fact  and  the  date  should  be  made. 

It  is  a  good  plan  to  charge  the  storekeeper  with  the  duty  of  see- 


THE  POST  QUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT.      119 

ing  that  such  tools  as  axes,  pickaxes,  scythes,  etc.,  are  kept  sharpened 
and  in  good,   serviceable  condition. 

A  separate  room  or  place  where  property  awaiting  condemnation 
can  be  stored  is  almost  a  necessity,  and  in  this  room  should  be  kept 
a  memorandum  book  in  which  is  entered  every  article  at  the  time  it 
is  put  in  the  room.  This  book  can  then  be  used  to  make  up  Inventory 
and  Inspection  Reports  and  lists  for  surveying  officers — it  will  also  be 
found  useful  when  checking  up  your   return. 

A  Under  no  circumstances  ever  allow  property  to  leave  the  store- 
house without  getting  a  memorandum  receipt  or  some  other  kind  of 
receipt  for  it.  Remember,  it  is  generally  easier  to  get  a  receipt  for 
property  before  it  is  delivered  than  afterwards. 

Of  course,  under  orders  from  the  Commanding  Officer  or  the 
Quartermaster,  property  would  be  issued  without  getting  a  receipt  for 
it,  but  the  Post  Quartermaster-Sergeant  should  make  it  his  first  duty 
to  obtain  the  receipt  as  soon  as  possible.  In  a  case  like  this,  however, 
a  receipt  of  some  kind  should  be  obtained  from  the  enlisted  man  or 
other  person  to  whom  the  property  is  given.  If  this  be  not  practicable, 
the  Post  Quartermaster-Sergeant  should  make  a  list  of  the  property, 
noting  the  name  of  the  officer  responsible,  the  purpose  for  which  it  is 
to  be  used,  the  authority  under  which  issued  (if  written,  attach  it  to 
list),  the  name  to  whom  the  property  was  personally  turned  over, 
and  the  date. 

A  memorandum  receipt  should  be  complete  in  all  particulars — 
it  should  always  show  condition  of  property,  and  in  the  case  of  type- 
writing machines,  the  kind  and  serial  number,  also  when  and  from 
whom  received — this  data  is  necessary  in  connection  with  the  rendition 
of  the  semi-annual   reports  on   typewriters. 

A  memorandum  receipt  for  the  company  tool  chest  should 
enumerate  all  the  articles,  although  they  do  not  appear  separately  on 
the  return. 

Although  it  is  customary  to  carry  articles  of  the  same  general 
nature  on  the  return  as  "assorted",  this  designation  should  never  ap- 
pear on  a  memorandum  receipt,  but  each  item  should  be  briefly 
described.  Thus,  for  example,  "1  Wrench,  Stilson,  24  inch,  1  Wrench, 
Stilson,  8  inch",  etc.  In  addition  to  this  precaution,  all  tools  should  be 
branded  "U.  S."  as  soon  as  they  are  received. 


120  CHAPTER  VIII. 

A  memorandum  receipt  should  be  taken  for  the  keys  to  every 
set   of  quarters   and   other  public   buildings. 

Receipts  for  public  animals  should  show  such  notations  as  will 
facilitate  reference  to  the  descriptive  cards. 

When  an  article  is  issued  of  which  more  than  one  pattern  is 
handled,  the  kind  issued  should  be  carefully  stated,  and  if  issued  with 
keys,  as  in  the  case  of  padlocks,  etc.,  the  number  of  keys  should  be 
stated. 

Keep  your  storehouses  clean  and  in  order — keep  everything 
systematically  arranged,  having  a  place  for  each  thing  and  keeping 
each  thing  in  its  place. 

If  practicable,  unserviceable  property  should  be  kept  in  a  separate 
room — in  any  event,  it  should  be  kept  separate  from  serviceable 
property. 

Count  and  verify  property  personally   as   often   as  possible. 

Examine  carefully  all  property  received,  and  see  whether  it 
agrees  with  the  invoice  in  quantity,  quality  and  condition,  and  see 
that  it  is  immediately  taken  up  on  the  return  and  that  receipts  are 
signed  and  forwarded  without  delay. 

The  best  way  to  be  thoroughly  familiar  with  the  amount  and  the 
condition  of  the  property  on  hand,  is  to  see  it  frequently.  Frequent 
inspections  of  the  storerooms  should,  therefore,  be  made,  and  in- 
ventories should  be  made  as  often  as  practicable. 

In  order  to  have  your  property  well  in  hand  and  know  just 
exactly  where  it  is  and  how  the  Quartermaster  stands,  an  abstract 
should  be  kept  of  all  memorandum  receipts,  or  the  plan  suggested  in 
the  following  paragraph  should  be  followed,  and  the  requirement  of 
Par.  276,  A.  R.  ('08),  that  quarterly  settlement  shall  be  made  for  all 
supplies  in  use  on  memorandum  receipts,  should  be  strictly  enforced. 
A  An  excellent  method  of  keeping  track  of  property  out  on  mem- 
orandum receipt  as  well  as  that  which  is  on  hand  (except  clothing, 
which  should  be  kept  by  itself),  is  by  means  of  a  loose  leaf  file,  a 
sample  sheet  of  which  is  given  on  page  131.  These  files  as  a  part  of 
the  Moss-Dalton  records,  are  handled  by  the  U.  S.  Infantry  Associa- 
tion, Washington,  D.  C. 

In  case  of  transfer,  the  use  of  this  loose  leaf  file,  in  the  form  of 
a  small,  handy  book  8^  x  4  inches,  facilitates  the  work  very  much,  by 
enabling  the  numbers  of  the  various  articles  to  be  checked  off  as  the 
storerooms  in  which  they  are  kept,  are  reached. 


THE  POST  OUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT.      121 

The  comparison  of  the  various  entries  on  the  different  sheets 
with  the  corresponding  memorandum  receipts,  is  also  very  simple. 

It  is  a  good  plan  for  the  Post  Quartermaster-Sergeant  to  try 
and  keep  himself  posted  as  to  the  state  of  the  property  at  the  post,  and 
he  should  take  special  car'e  to  see  that  the  post  is  always  well  supplied, 
or  at  least  that  estimates  are  made  for  a  proper  supply,  so  that  he 
can  not  be  blamed  in  case  articles  desired  are  not  on  hand  for  issue. 

Always  be  present  when  original  packages  are  opened. 

The  accumulation  of  surplus  property  should  be  avoided.     Aside 
from  the  violation   of  orders   that   this  involves,   it  also   tends  to   en 
courage  carelessness  in  the  care  and  accountability  of  property. 

Do  not  be. wasteful  with  expendable  property  just  because  it 
is  expendable. 

Do  not  store  canvas  while  damp,  nor  weigh  coal  while  wet. 

When  tentage  is  turned  in,  have  it  spread  out  in  the  sun  and 
dried,  replacing  worn  out  ropes  and  otherwise  putting  the  tentage 
in  proper  condition  for  re-issue.  '   . 

Supplies  longest  on  hand  should  be  issued  first — keep  all  new 
property  in  the  background  until  the  old  is  exhausted. 

See  that  all  movable  public  property  is,  if  practicable,  conspi- 
cuously branded  "Q.  M.  D.,"  before  put  into  use,  and  also  that  tables, 
benches,  screens,  etc.,  made  at  the  post  are  branded  likewise  and 
immediately  taken  up  on  the  return  and  accounted  for  as  manufactured 
at  post. 

Whenever  property  is  delivered  by  team  or  otherwise,  have  the 
driver  or  other  person  who  delivers,  get  a  receipt  from  the  person  to 
whom  the  propert}'-  is  delivered. 

Do  not  exchange  propert}-  just  because  it  is  worn — only  un- 
serviceable articles  should  be  exchanged. 

Store  ink  where  it  will  not  freeze,  and  oil  in  a  dry  place,  where 
the  cans  will  not  rust — the  rust  will  eat  through  the  cans  and  cause 
them  to  leak. 

Examine  every  box  in  the  storeroom  that  is  supposed  to  be 
empty  and  watch  it  until  it  is  removed — dishonest  subordinates  have 
been  known  to  steal  clothing  and  other  property  by  hiding  it  in 
empty  boxes  and  then  getting  it  therefrom  when  the  boxes  were 
removed  from  the  storehouse. 


122  CHAPTER  VIII. 

Examine  carefully  all  sides  of  original  packages  and  if  there  is 
any  indication  that  the  package  has  been  tampered  with,  notify  the 
Quartermaster  at  once. 

Store  all  hardware  in  a  dry  place,  and  do  not  expose  refrigerators 
to  the  sun — it  will  soon  draw  the  joints  apart. 

Veterinary  and  drawing  instruments  will  not  rust  if  coated  with 
cocoa-nut  butter. 

Veterinary  and  drawing  instruments  and  other  valuable  instru- 
ments and  tools  should  be  kept  under  lock  and  key. 

Never  store  any  property  unless  it  is  dry  and  clean.  When 
stoves  and  pipe  joints  are  turned  in,  have  them  thoroughly  cleaned, 
blackened,  and  if  necessary,  repaired,  at  once,  and  then  stored  in  a 
dry  place. 

Require  that  cooking  utensils,  axes,  hatchets,  picks,  shovels,  etc., 
be  well  cleaned  before  being  turned  in.  Give  them  a  coating  of  oil 
before  storing. 

Do  not  accept  bed  sacks,  sheets,  pillow  cases,  barrack  bags  and 
shelter-tent  halves,  unless  they  are  clean  and  in  condition  for  re- 
issue— there  is  no  allowance  for  laundry  and  it  is  very  difificult  to  re- 
issue these  articles,  if  dirty. 

When  you  receiye  oil,  examine  every  box — an  empty  box  looks 
just  like  a  full  one. 

Clothing  should  be  stored  in  a  dry  place,  with  lots  of  moth  balls. 

Harness  that  has  been  used  should  be  thoroughly  cleaned  before 
stored,  when  it  should  be  hung  on  pegs. 

If  practicable,  all  small  articles  should  be  stored  in  a  separate 
storeroom,  which  should  be  given  special  care  and  attention. 

Do  not  allow  mechanics  access  to  tools,  except  in  your  presence. 
Tools  are  the  most  diflficult  of  all  property  to  keep  track  of. 

When  a  box  or  package  is  opened  and  a  part  removed,  tag  it  so 
as  to  show  the  remaining  contents. 

Miscellaneous  "Pointers"  and  Suggestions. 

Requests  for  minor  repairs  to  quarters,  etc.,  should  be  entered 
in  a  book  kept  for  the  purpose,  and  same  attended  to  in  its  turn. 

Numerous  questions  and  frequent  interruptions  will  be  avoided 
by  posting  in  a  conspicuous  place  in  the  issue  room,  a  large  price  list 
of  the  clothing  and  such  articles  of  equipage  as  are  usually  purchased. 


THE  POST  QUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT.      123 

In  drawing  checks,  and  in  the  absence  of  a  check  protector,  a 
good  way  to  guard  against  alterations  of  amounts,  is,  to  write  the 
amount  in  red  figures,  in  the  place  for  the  Quartermaster's  signature. 
The  Quartermaster  signs  his  name  right  over  the  red  figures. 

When  anything  which  is  exhausted,  or  which  lias  never  been  on 
hand,  is  asked  for,  it  is  a  good  plan  to  make  a  note  of  it  in  a  book 
kept  for  the  purpose.  Such  a  book  is  very  useful  for  reference  in 
making  up  estimates. 

If  your  clothing  room  be  small,  pack  all  surplus  clothing  in 
boxes  with  plenty  of  camphor  balls;  mark  the  contents  of  the  boxes, 
by  sizes,  on  slips  of  paper  and  paste  the  slips  over  the  edge  of  the 
cover  and  the  box,  so  that  the  opening  of  the  box  would  break  the 
paper;  give  each  box  a  number,  and  enter  the  numbers  in  a  book 
kept  for  the  purpose,  showing  the  contents  of  each  box,  with  sizes. 

If  you  have  room,  make  separate  stalls  for  each  organization  at 
the  post,  putting  in  each  stall  the  allowance  of  field  equipage  for 
that  organization,  with  a  memorandum  receipt  already  made  out, 
tacked  over  the  stall,  so  that  any  organization  commander  can  get 
his  equipment  at  a  moment's  notice.  With  this  arrangement  the 
entire  command,  as  far  as  the  Quartermaster's  Department  is  con- 
cerned, could  take  the  field  in  fifteen  minutes. 

If  you  hear  of  an  officer  at  the  post,  who  is  ordered  away,  and 
who  is  holding  property  on  memorandum  receipt,  advise  the  Quarter- 
master so  that  settlement  may  be  made  before  he  leaves — it  sometimes 
entails  considerable  correspondence  and  trouble  to  make  settlement 
after  the  officer  leaves.  Should  such  an  officer,  or  an  officer  going 
on  leave,  owe  the  Quartermaster's  Department  for  supplies,  a  bill 
should  be  sent  him  a  few  days  before  he  leaves. 

Paper-Work.     See  Chapter  XI,  'Taper ?work." 

A  Loss  of  Funds.  The  usual  and  accepted  course  to  be  pursued 
by  a  Quartermaster,  commissary  or  other  disbursing  officer,  in  the 
event  of  loss  by  fire,  theft  or  otherwise,  of  public  funds  for  which  he 
is  accountable,  is  to  promptly  make  request  of  the  proper  authority 
for  the  appointment  of  a  surveying  officer  to  investigate  and  report 
upon  the  circumstances  of  such  loss  and  to  make  any  suggested 
recommendation.  One  copy  of  the  report,  duly  approved  by  the 
commanding  officer,  is  then  forwarded  to  the  Adjutant-General,  U.  S. 
Army,  with  all  other  available  data,  with  the  request  that  the  matter 


124  CHAPTER  VIII. 

be  submitted  to  the  Secretary  of  War  with  the  view  that  the  neces- 
sary steps  be  taken  to  secure  Congressional  relief. 

Where  funds  have  been  destroyed  by  fire  and  the  ashes  can  be 
collected,  it  should  be  done  and  the  same  forwarded  to  the  U.  S. 
Treasury  for  the  possible  identification  and  redemption  of  some  por- 
tion. If  identification  should  be  found  possible,  a  check  for  the 
amount  so  redeemed  would  be  sent  the  accountable  officer. 

LABOR-SAVING    DEVICES,    CONVENIENCES    AND    TIME- 
SAVING  METHODS 

At  the  instance  of  the  Quartermaster,  the  Commanding  Officer 
should  designate  one  or  two  days  out  of  each  week  for  the  issue  of 
clothing  and  other  supplies,  and  certain  hours  of  certain  days  should 
be  designated  for  the  exchange  of  clothing  and  all  articles  of  equipage. 


Rubber  Stamps  Usually  Used  in  the  Quartermaster's  Office; 

(Required  for  on   Form  60.   Q.    M.    D. — Estimate  for   Regular   Supplies.) 

OFFICE  POST  QUARTERMASTER, 

Fort  Harrison,  Mont., 

190 

Iransportation    furnished    on    this    order 

for 


from 

to  

Via 


(Indorsement    on    travel    orders.) 

(Routing  nearly  always   shown   on  order;    required    when   transportation   issued 
to  officers). 


THE  POST  QUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT.      125 

2 

(a)  WAR  DEPARTMENT 

Post  oj  Fort  Harrison,  Mont. 

OFFICIAL  BUSINESS. 

(b)  Penalty  for  private  use  to 
avoid  payment  of  postag-e  $300 

(For   penalty    envelopes,   etc.) 

3 

'a)     REGULAR  SUPPLIES. 

(b)     INCIDENTAL  EXPENSES. 

(c)  Army  Transportation. 

(d)     BARRACKS  AND  QUARTERS. 

(e)  Shooting  Galleries  &  Ranges. 

(f)  Clothing  &  Equipage. 

(g)  Hospitals. 

(h)    Military  Post  Exchanges. 

(i)       WATER  &  SEWERS,  MILITARY  POSTS. 

(j)    Hospital  Stewards  Quarters 

(k)     Roads,  Walks,  Wharves  &  Drainage 
(On  money  papers  to   show  appropriations.) 

4 

Tariff 

(Rate    stamp,    for    bills    of    lading.) 


126 


CHAPTER  VIII. 


No  stop  over  privileges  permitted  to 
holder  of  this  request. 

(On    transportation    requests.) 


FORT  DES  MOINES,  IOWA. 

7 

Item  No. 

8 

Appropriation  Fiscal  Year  19 


For  use  on 

Vouchers 

A  and  B 


F'iscal  year  ending  June  30,  igo6. 

(On   face  and  brief   of  cash   papers.) 


I 


9 


PUBLIC  PROPERTY 

Q.  M.  Dcpt.,  U.  S.  A. 


(On  all  Q.  M.  property,  before  issue.) 


THE  POST  OUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT.      127 


10 

OFFICE  OF  QUARTERMASTER, 
RECEIVEO 


ISSUED 

(Showing  dates  of  receipt  and  issue  of  property.) 


11 

(B=L.  to  Agent  Loist 

Carrier igo 

Shipping  office  notified 
igo 

(Used   on   property   received  book.) 


12 


Public  Property  (or  U.  S.  Property.) 

(Used  on  alPB-L    except    shipment    of    personal    effects.) 


13 

In  addition  to  the  above,  the  stamps  shown  in  Pars.  1,  2,  3,  4, 

5,  9  {a&h)  11,  14,  15,  16,  18  and  23,  beginning  page  143,  changing  "Com- 
missary" to  "Quartermaster"  wherever  necessary. 


128 


CHAPTER  VTTT. 


BLANK  FORMS  THAT  MAY  BE  USED  TO 

ADVANTAGE. 
No 

FORT  LEAVENWORTH,  KANSAS, 

1909. 

Post   Quartermaster: 


Please  deliver  to  quarters   No. 


cord     Hard   Coal,   Furnuce 


cord     Hard  Coal,  Egg 
cord     Hard  Coal,  Nut 


cord     Soft  Coal 


cord     Hard  Wood,  sawed  and  split 
cord     Hard  Wood,  sawed  only 


cord     Kindling 


.gallons     Mineral  Oil 


Note.— THREE  DAYS  must  be  allowed  for  filling  FUEL  orders. 

2687  lbs.  soft  coal,  or  1700  lbs.  hard  coal  equal  ONE  cord  HARD  WOOD. 

(For  table  of  allowances,  see  other  side.) 


THE  POST  OUARTERMASTKR-SKRr.KAXT.      120 

A 


REQUEST 

Fort  Leavenworth,   Kas., 


190 


To   the    Quartermaster: 


OFFICE  of  the  QUARTERMASTER 

190 


Referred  to; 


Quartermaster. 


Fort  Leavenworth,  Kas., 


190 


Returned  to  the  Quartermaster: 


-3«4  ins. 


Fort  Leavenworth,  Kans  , 

190.... 

Received  from  Post  Q.  M  the 
following  articles,  same  to  be 
added  to  memorandum  receipt, 
on  file: 


V      <- 


-Zy^  ins. 


(These  forms  are  intended  for  use  m  a  very  large  post). 
Note:    These  are  two  different  forms. 


130 


CHAPTER  VIII. 


FORT  LAWTON,    WASHINGTON 


19 


Quartermaster: 

Please  issue  to  me  and  charge  on 
my  memorandum  receipt  the  follow- 
ing articles  for  use  of 


Credit  Slip. 

Quartermaster's  Office, 

Fort  Lawton,  Wash. 


Sir: 

You  have  this  day  been  credited  on 
3'our  memorandum  receipt  as  follows: 


£fi 

a 


Captain  and  Qnarter?iiaster  Uiird 
Infa)it)-y,    Quarft'n/iaster. 


34  ins. 


3^  ins. 


THE  POST  QUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT.      131 


1 

6 

26 

SI 

76 

On  Hand. 

2 

6 

27 

52 

n 

3 

6 

28 

53 

78 

4 

6 

29 

54 

79 

5 

30 

55 

80 

6 

4 

31 

56 

81 

7 

6 

32 

57 

34 

82 

8 

33 

58 

34 

83 

9 

12 

34 

59 

34 

84 

10 

35 

60 

30 

85 

11 

2 

36 

61 

86 

12 

4 

37 

62 

87 

13 

4 

38 

63 

88 

14 

5 

39 

64 

16 

89 

IS 

7 

40 

65 

90 

16 

4 

41 

66 

91 

17 

4 

42 

67 

92 

18 

3 

43 

68 

93 

19 

5 

44 

69 

94 

20 

45 

70 

95 

21 

46 

71 

96 

22 

47 

72 

97 

23 

48 

73 

98 

24 

49 

74 

99 

25 

SO 

75 

100 

On  Mem- 
orandum 

St. 

A 


Article :    Chairs,  barrack. 


<- 


5  ins. 


(A  loose  leaf  file  to  be  kept  in  connection  with 
the  memorandum  receipts  which  are  numbered  1, 
2,  3,  etc.,  according  to  the  numbers  of  the  build- 
ings in  which  the  articles  are.  A  separate  sheet 
to  be  kept  for  each  article  out  on  Memo,  receipt.)  V 


(Attach  to  trunk) 

Q.  M.  DEP'T. 

FORT  LAWTON,  WASH. 


No. 


.98 


(Given  to  owner) 


Q.  M.  DEP'T, 


FORT  LAWTON,  WASH. 


CO 

S 


No.. 


.98 


2^  ins. 


->   V 


(Where  posts  are  distant 
from  a  city,  and  baggage  of 
ofificers  and  men  has  to  be 
delivered  at  a  large  station, 
a  baggage  check  like  this, 
used  by  agreement  with  the 
baggage  agent,  is  a  great 
convenience  in  checking  bag- 
gage from  post  to  baggage 
room.) 


MEMORANDUM  RECEIPT  FOR  SUPPLIES  IN  USE. 


"""•  •            1 

I  acknowledge  to  have  received  from  the  Quartermaster,   at 1 

the  following  articles  for  use  of 

I  am  responsible  for  said  supplies  and  will  produce  the  same  when  called  upon  to 

do  so  by  proper  authority. 

Axes.                                  Hods,  coal. 

Pots,  iron  with  cover. 

Axes,   fire.                         Hoes,  garden. 

Tots,  mustard. 

Bags,  Barrack.                 Holders,  card. 

Racks,  pen. 

Barrels,  ash.                     i Hose,   assorted,    feet. 

Ranges,  cooking. 

Bars,  Mosquito.                Inkstands. 

Rakes,  steel. 

Baskets,  assorted.             Inkwells. 

Refrigerators. 

(Bedsteads,    iron,    com- 

Kettles,  tea. 

Saltcellers. 

mon. 

Blowers,  grate. 

Knives,  bread. 

Saucers. 

Boats,  gravy. 

Knives,  butcher. 

Saws,  meat. 

Boilers,  assorted. 

Knives,  table. 

Scales   and    weights. 

Bowls. 

Ladders,  fire. 

Screens,   door. 

Bowls,  chopping. 

Ladles,  soup. 

Screens,  fire. 

Bowls,  sugar. 

Lamps,  desk. 

Screens,  porch. 

Boxes,  pepper. 

Lanterns. 

Screens,  window. 

Brushes,  dust. 

Litters,  hand. 

Scuttles,  coal. 

Buckets,  fire. 

Lockers,  box. 

Sets,  carving. 

Buckets,     G.     I.,     as- 

Lockers, wall. 

Shades,  window. 

sorted. 

Carts,  hand. 

Mats,  cuspidor. 



Sheets,  bed. 

Cases,  pillow. 

Mats,   door,   cocoa. 

Shovels,  fire. 

Cases,  telescope. 

Mats,    door,    wire. 

Shovels,  L.  H. 

Chairs,  barrack. 

Mattresses. 

Shovels,  scoop. 

Chairs,  office. 
Cleaners,  flue. 

Mills   cofTee 

Shovels,    S.  H. 
Sieves,  flour. 

Nozzles,  hose. 

Cleavers. 

Openers,  can. 

Skillets. 

Clocks,  office. 

Padlocks. 

Skimmers. 

Cords      and      Tassels, 

Pans,  bake. 

• 

Spades. 

trumpet. 

( 

Covers,  mattress. 

Pans,  dish. 

Spittoons. 

Cots,  G.  M. 

Pans,  dust. 

Spoons,  basting. 

Cruets,  vinegar. 



Pans,  frying. 

Spoons,  mustard. 

Cups,  sponge. 

Pans,  sauce. 

Spoons,  table. 

Cups,  tea. 

Paulins. 

Spoons,  tea. 

Cutters,  meat. 

Pickaxes. 

Steel,  carving. 

Desks,  field. 

Pillows. 

Squares,  assorted. 

Desks,  office,  assorted. 

Pins,   tent,   large. 
Pins,   tent,   small. 

Stands,  fire. 
Steamers,  with  covers. 

Dippers,  assorted. 

Dishes,  pickle. 

Pins,    shelter   tent. 

Stools,  mess. 

Dishes,  vegetable. 

Pipe,    stove,    joints. 

Stoves,  tent. 

Elbows,  stovepipe. 

Pitchers,  syrup. 

Stoves,  heating. 

Extinguishers,  fire. 

Pitchers,  water. 

Stoves,  laundi'y. 

Flies,   wall  tent. 

Plates,  dinner. 

Tables,  assorted. 

Forks,  meat. 

Plates,  meat. 

Tables,  mess. 

Forks,  table. 

Plates,  soup. 

Tables,  office. 

Graters,  assorted. 

Pokers,  fire.                  ' 

Tents,  common. 

Griddles. 
Guards,  spark. 

* 

Poles,  ridge  wall  tent. 

Tents,  conical  wall. 
Tents,  hospital. 

Poles,  ridge,   common 

tent. 

1 

Hatchets,  assorted. 



Poles,    ridge,    hospital 
tent. 

Tents,  shelter  halves. 

1 

Heaters,  iron. 



Poles,    shelter  tent. 

Tents,  wall. 

Poles,      conical      wall 

Tongs,  fire. 

tent. 

Poles,     upright     wall 
tent. 

Tripods,    conical    wall 
tent. 

Poles,     upright     com- 

Trumpets. 

mon  tent.                     [ 

Poles,    upright    hospi- 

tal  tent. 

Tumblers 

Pot   coffee.                         

irticles  are). 

THE  POST  QUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT.      133 


,  19. 


Quartermaster  Department,  Dr. 


To 


Clothing  . 
Equipage 


gals. •Mineral  Oil 


Total  amount 


It  is  requested  that  you  call  at  this  office  on  or  before  the 
last  day  of  the  month,  pay  your  bill  and  sign  the  sales  vouchers 


Received  Payment, 


(Actual   size,   about   6x4   ins.) 

(Statement  sent  to  officers  about  27th  of  each  month — also  sent  when  an   officer 
is  about  to  depart  from  the  post  on  leave  or  otherAj;ise). 


A  War  Dept.  Orders,  Books  of  Reference,  Maps,  etc.,  and  Blank 
Forms  to  be  kept  on  hand,  and  Reports,  Returns,  Estimates  and  Re- 
quisitions to  be  made  by  the  Quartermaster.  See  Supplement,  Chap. 
tcr  VIII. 


134  CHAPTER   IX. 


CHAPTER  IX. 

THE  POST  COMMISSARY-SERGEANT 

General  Duties.!  Under  the  supervision  of  the  Commissary 
Officer  he  has  charge  of  all  paper-work  pertaining  to  the  office,  and  he 
is  also  charged  with  the  immediate  supervision  of  the  receipt,  sale 
and  issue  of  all  subsistence  stores,  and  the  care  and  preservation  of 
all  stores  and  property.  He  also  supervises  the  policing  of  the 
office,  sales  and  issue  rooms  and  the  storerooms. 

Things   The    Post    Commissary-Sergeant    Should   Take    Special    Care 
To  Do.i 

Special  attention  must  be  paid  to  the  care  and  preservation  of 
perishable  stores. 

Make  a  special  study  of  the  probable  needs  of  the  command,  so 
as  to  assist  the  Commissary  Officer  in  submitting  estimates  and  re- 
quisitions for  such  articles  and  in  such  quantities  that  the  command 
will  be  properly  supplied  without  overstocking  the  commissary. 
Nothing  is  more  unsatisfactory  than  trying  to  dispose  of  old  stores. 
By  being  honest,  truthful,  accommodating,  courteous  and  attentive  to 
business,  endeavor  to  gain  the  confidence  and  esteem  of  everyone, 
especially  the  Commissary  Officer,  the  company  mess-sergeants  and 
others  with  whom  you  are  thrown  in  constant  contact. 

By  care  and  attention  be  absolutely  correct  in  your  figures 
when  rendering  returns,  estimates  and  requisitions,  and  especially 
should  you  be  absolutely  correct  in  your  figures  when  rendering 
officers'  bills.  Mistakes  in  the  former  oftentimes  cause  considerable 
correspondence  with  the  War  Department,  while  errors  in  the  latter 
may  arouse  suspicion  as  to  your  honesty. 

Keep  your  storehouse  clean,  neat,  orderly  and  well  ventilated, 
keeping  each  kind  of  stores  together. 

Onions  and  potatoes  should  be  carefully  watched,  and  sorted  as 
often   as  may  be  necessary. 

Your   office   should   be   a   model  of  system   and   neatness.     Have 


(l)Tlie  collated  experiences  of  nine  Post  Commissary-Sergeants. 


THE  POST  COMMISSARY-SERGEANT.  135 

proper  and  separate  places  for  each  kind  of  papers,  such  as  letters, 
invoices,  receipts,  etc. 

Brief  all  papers  as  soon  as  received. 

After  receiving  stores  enumerated  on  an  invoice,  enter  them 
without  delay  on  your  Abstract,  and  after  making  an  issue  of  stores, 
enter  them  at  once  in  your  Abstract  of  Issues.  In  other  words, 
keep  your  Abstracts  up  to  date,  so  that  at  the  end  of  the  month  they 
will  need  only  to  be  added  up. 

All  stores  received  should  be  carefully  checked  from  the  invoice 
as  to  contents  of  each  box  or  case.  See  that  each  box  or  case  is  intact 
— if  it  is  not,  it  should  be  immediately  opened  and  the  contents  verifed. 
Discrepancies  should  be  reported  at  once  to  the  Commissary  Officer. 

Arrange  stores  upon  their  receipt  so  that  those  longest  on 
hand  will  be  the  first  issued  or  sold. 

Before  closing  each  day  make  a  tour  of  the  building  to  see 
that  all  doors  and  windows  are  properly  secured. 

Keep  all  your  work  up  to  date,  and  always  render  all  reports, 
returns,   estimates   and  requisitions   on  time. 

Always  have  your  business  well  in  hand,  so  that  you  can  tell  at 
any  time  just  exactly  what  you  have  on  hand,  what  is  needed,  etc. 
This  can  be  accomplished  by  keeping  a  daily  record  of  all  issues, 
sales,  savings,  shipments,  stores  received,  stores  shipped,  fresh  beef 
received  by  hind  and  fore-quarters,  fresh  vegetables.  Keep  a  check 
of  all  money  transactions  to  conform  with  Form  No.  3,  Inspector 
General's  Dept.,  so  that  when  an  inspector  comes,  you  will  merely 
have  to  close  it  up  in  order  to  have  a  ready  check  for  him. 

Things   The    Post    Commissary-Sergeant    Should   Take    Special    Care 
NOT  To  Do.i 

Never  let  your  work  accumulate — clear  your  desk  daily — keep 
your  work  up  to  date.  Indeed,  keep  ahead  of  your  work,  if  possible. 
Between  the  10th  of  the  month  (the  date  of  mailing  your  returns) 
and  the  25th  (the  date  of  taking  inventory),  you  will  often  find 
leisure  time  which  you  can  profitably  devote  to  filling  in  bill-heads 
and  addressing  envelopes  to  persons  making  purchases  on  pass-books 
during  the  month — you  may  rule  out  books  that  are  used  for  recording 
savings  of  companies,  bakery  accounts,  etc.  As  soon  as  the  monthly 
returns  have  been  mailed,  the  preparation  of  all  returns  and  vouchers 


(l)The  collated  experiences  of  nine  Post  Commissary-Sergeants. 


136  CHAPTER  IX. 

for  next  month  should  be  started.  All  these  papers  can  be  so  far 
completed  that  at  the  end  of  the  month  only  quantities  and  amounts 
will  have  to  be  entered.  All  of  these  things  count  for  a  great  deal  on 
the  end  of  the  month,  when  you  will  have  more  work  than  usual. 

Do  not  have  your  stores  scattered  about  the  storehouse,  but 
keep  each  kind  together — this  will  facilitate  the  taking  of  inventory 
and  will  also  serve  to  avoid  making  mistakes  in  counting. 

Do  not  open  any  more  boxes  than  is  absolutely  necessary 
shortly  before  taking  inventory  as  this  will  make  the  taking  of  the 
inventory  more  difficult. 

Do  not  trust  any  of  your  subordinates  any  more  than  you  can 
help  and  depend  upon  no  one  but  yourself  to  do  your  work — see  to 
it  yourself  that  it  is  done  and  that  it  is  done  well  for  you  alone  are 
responsible  for  the  manner  in  which  your  work  is  performed. 

Do  not  bring  any  intoxicants  in  the  commissary  and  do  not 
permit  any  of  your  subordinates  to  do  so. 

Do  not  depend  on  your  memory  for  everything — the  best  mem- 
ories sometiriies  fail.  Use  scratch  pads  and  other  forms  of  memoranda 
freely.     (It  is  suggested  that  you  use  a  "Tickler."     See  page  92). 

When  a  sale  is  made,  make  a  record  of  it  at  once,  either  on  your 
blotter  or  on  a  cash  sales  slip.  In  fact,  never  allow  any  article 
to  leave  the  place  until  you   have  made   a   record  of  it. 

Should  instructions  be  received  that  for  any  reason  can  not  be 
carried  out  at  the  time,  make  a  note  of  same  somewhere  where  you 
can  not  fail  to  notice  it  at  the  proper  time. 

Do  not  delegate  to  others  duties  that  you  should  yourself  per- 
form in  person. 

Never  allow  a  subordinate  to  perform  his  work  in  a  careless 
manner. 

Never  be  late  beginning  a  day's  work — it  is  better  to  be  a  little 
ahead  of  time. 

Never  allow  stores  that  are  deteriorating  to  remain  near  good 
ones — deteriorating  stores  should  be  at  once  separated  from  the  rest 
of  the  stores,  and,  if  possible,  even  placed  in  a  separate  building. 
Never  permit  onions  or  decayed  vegetables  of  any  kind  to  be  stored 
near  flour,  coffee  or  any  other  article  that  is  liable  to  jabsorb  the 
smell. 

Whatever  you  do,  don't  show  any  favoritism  in  issuing  stores — 
treat  everyone  alike. 


THE  POST  COMMISSARY-SERGEANT.  137 

Don't  forget  that  the  primary  business  of  the  Subsistence 
Department  is  to  supply  the  troops — and  remember  that  the  Sub- 
sistence Department  exists  for  the  convenience  of  the  troops  and 
that  the  troops  do  not  exist  for  the  convenience  of  the  Subsistence 
Department. 

Never  assume  any  authority  which  properly  belongs  to  the 
Commissary  Officer. 

Never  make  a  sale  without  a  pass-book,  to  persons  who  have 
them.     This  will  save  j^ou  misunderstanding  and  trouble. 

Never  get  into  argument  with  company  mess-sergeants,  or  with 
the  families  of  officers — in  a  firm  but  courteous  manner  always  report 
such  cases  to  the  Commissary  Officer  for  him  to  argue  and  settle. 

Do  not  take  up  the  time  of  the  Commissar}'-  Officer  by  consulting 
him  about  trivial  matters. 

How  Can  A  Post  Commissary-Sergeant  Make  Himself  Most  Useful 
to  the  Commissary  Officer  And  What  Are  the  Usual  Ways  of 
Doing  So? 

By  devotion  to  duty;  by  knowing  what  is  to  be  done  and  by 
doing  it  without  being  told;  by  feeling  that  any  reflection  on  the 
Subsistence  Department  or  on  the  Commissary  Officer  is  a  reflection 
on  the  Sergeant  himself;  by  faithfully  carrying  out  the  things  enjoined 
under  "Things  That  The  Post  Commissary-Sergeant  Should  Take 
Special  Care  To  Do"  and  "Things  That  The  Post  Commissary 
Sergeant  Should  Take  Special  Care  NOT  To  Do". 
"Customs  of  the  Service"  Affecting  The  Post  Commissary-Sergeant. 

Discrepancies  or  differences  in  sales  and  issues  are  usually 
referred  directly  to  the  Post  Commissary-Sergeant  by  the  party  con- 
cerned.    (See  page  2>17  A). 

LABOR-SAVING   DEVICES,    CONVENIENCES,   TIME-SAVING 

METHODS. 

Necessary  Knowledge.  Time  and  trouble  will  be  saved  by  being 
thoroughly  familiar  with  the  Subsistence  Manual,  the  Issue  and  Conver- 
sion Table  and  such  paragraphs  of  the  Army  Regulations  and  such 
War  Department  orders  and  circulars  as  affect  the  Subsistence 
Department. 

Record  of  Savings.  As  a  protection  against  the  loss  or  mis- 
placement of  issue  slips,  some  Post  Commissary-Sergeants  record  in 


138 


CHAPTER  IX. 


a  blank  ruled  book  the  savings  made  by  the  companies,  giving  one  page 
to  each  company.  This  plan  also  serves  to  facilitate  the  completion  of 
Form  No.  17  (Savings  Purchased)  at  the  end  of  the  month,  as  it 
shows  the  total  savings  of  each  company  during  the  month. 


SAVINGS  OF  CO.  *'A,"  24TH  INFANTRY. 


•4-1 

C 

o 

.2 

V 

Ah 

o 
u 

M 

U3 
V 

o 

s 

V 

C 
u 

Ah 

en 
<u 

a, 

< 

tn 
<u 

u 
Ph 

o 
U 

V-c 

en 

be 

c 

> 

-M 

Ah 

Aug. 

99 
99 

Total 
Sep. 

J? 

Total 

1-10 
11-20 
21-31 

1-10 
11-20 
21-30 



Practical  "Pointers"  Regarding  the  Care  of  Property  And  Stores. 

The  storehouse  should  be  kept  well  ventilated  and  swept  daily, 
as  its  cleanliness  is  a  matter  of  great  importance. 

The  entire  storehouse  should  be  inspected  daily,  and  all  stores 
should  be  moved  and  restacked  once  every  quarter,  generally  when 
the  quarterly  supply  of  new  stores  arrives. 

Whenever  field  ranges  and  other  cooking  utensils  are  turned  in 
they  should  be  carefully  examined  and  each  article  should  be  repaired, 
if  necessary,  and  then  cleaned  and  slightly  greased,  and  stored  in  a 
dry  place.  The  individual  articles  comprising  the  range  should  be 
checked  and  eacli  range  stored  as  a  complete  range,  so  as  to  be  ready 
for  instant  issue. 

Knives,  auger  bits,  saws,  hammers,  hatchets  and  other  articles 
of  hardware  should  be  inspected  occasionally  and  rubbed  with  an 
oiled  rag  to  prevent  rusting. 

Keep  a  number  of  good  cats  in  the  store-room — they  are  much 

better  than  poison  and  traps  for  making  away  with   mice.  Arrange 

the    stores,    especially    those    in    sacks,    so    that    the    cats  can    pass 
everywhere. 

Not  only  should  the  stores  be  so  arranged  that  there  shall  be 
ventilation  and  light  between  them,  but  there  should  also  be  enough 
room  to  sweep. 


THE  POST  COMMISSARY-SERGEANT.  139 

Salmon,  lobsters,  olives,  olive  oil,  cheese,  etc.,  should  be  kept 
away  from  stoves  and  other  heating  apparatus.  However,  while 
these  articles  should  he  kept  in  a  cool  place,  tliey  should  not  be  allowed 
to  freeze. 

As  far  as  practicable  stores  should  be  arranged  in  tlie  same 
order  in  which  they  appear  on  the  return.  This  facilitates  the  taking 
of  the  monthly  inventory,  which  should  be  taken  on  the  same  date 
every  month  and  everyone  authorized  to  deal  witli  the  commissary 
should  be  notified  two  or  three  days  ahead  of  the  time  tliat  the  com- 
missary will  be  closed  on  that  date. 

New  potatoes  and  dried  fruit  in  summer  months  often  cause  a 
great  deal  of  trouble.  When  new  potatoes  are  delivered,  not  more 
than  10  days'  supply  should  be  asked  for  and  then  there  should  be  no 
"piling  up" — if  so,  the  potatoes  are  likely  to  get  overheated' and  rot 
quickly.  A  good  deal  of  dried  fruit  is  lost  in  late  summer  months  by 
becoming  "wormy."  The  fruit  should  be  carefully  examined  when 
received  and  two  or  three  times  weekly  when  in  the  store-room.  At 
the  first  sign  of  a  worm,  the  fruit  should  be  put  at  once  in  a  cold 
refrigerator,  which  will  kill  the  worms  and  keep  the  fruit  ir;  good 
condition.  Breakfast  bacon  and  hams  should  be  removed  from  crates 
as  soon  as  received  and  hung  up  on  rafters. 

Never  ask  for  more  sales  articles  of  a  perishable  nature  than  are 
actually  required — it  is  better  to  run  short  for  a  few  days  than  to 
have  a  lot  of  spoiled  stores  on  hand. 

Keep  dunnage  at  least  12  inches  high  under  all  stores.  By 
this  method  floors  can  be  kept  clean  and  dr}^  while  any  leakage 
becomes  noticeable  at  once  and  can  be  located  without  loss  of  time. 
Never  pile  stores  against  a  wall. 

As  stores  longest  on  hand  are  first  for  issue  or  sale  it  is  well 
to  mark  each  lot  with  the  date  of  receipt.  This  is  readily  done  with 
a  date  stamp,  for  cases  or  boxes.  Choose  some  particular  spot  on 
each,  so  that  it  can  be  easily  found — for  example,  the  space  between 
the  cusps  of  the  cresent  stenciled  on  them.  For  sacks,  use  a  marking 
brush. 

In  storing  flour,  or  other  stores  which  come  in  sacks,  pile  the 
sacks  one  aboA^e  the  other  as  high  as  necessary  or  convenient,  making 
each  pile  by  itself.     Leave  a   space  between  piles   about  four  inches. 


140  CHAPTER  IX. 

This  will  prevent  cutting  by  mice,  as  they  can  have  no  foothold  and 
no  place  to  build  nests.  The  sacks  must  be  laid  perfectly  flat  and 
piled  carefully  or  they  will  topple  over,  but  the  absence  of  loss  and 
trouble  more  than  repays  one  for  the  extra  labor. 

In  storing  vegetables  for  winter  a  root-cellar  is  the  best  place, 
but  if  not  available  a  dry  basement  will  answer  very  well.  The 
vegetables  should  be  sacked — 120  to  150  pounds  each — and  placed  on 
dunnage.  Three  tiers  is  a  good  arrangment.  Mark  weights  on  ends 
of  sacks — it  will  save  trouble  and  handling  when  making  inventory. 
In  cold  weather  watch  the  thermometer  (there  should  be  one  in 
every  place  used  for  storage)  and  if  there  is  danger  of  freezing,  fill 
all  water  buckets  available  and  set  around  among  the  tiers.  The 
water  will  freeze,  perhaps,  but  it  will  protect  the  vegetables  against 
all  but  the  most  severe  cold.  Bottled  and  canned  goods  can  be 
treated  the  same  way. 

If  serving  in  the  tropics  the  Post  Commissary-Sergeant  should  be 
especially  careful  to  see  that  all  stores  are  protected  from  dampness 
and  that  there  is  a  good  current  of  air  in  the  store-rooms.  Vinegar 
barrels  should  be  frequently  examined  and  the  hoops  kept  tight  to 
avoid  leakage. 

If  there  are  no  hydrants,  or  sufficient  fire  apparatus  at  the  post, 
he  should  be  careful  to  see  that  fire  buckets  and  barrels  filled  with 
water  are  kept  in  the  store-rooms,  or  in  their  immediate  vicinity,  for 
use  in  case  of  fire. 

Miscellaneous  "Pointers"  And  Suggestions. 

When  rations  are  issued  always  give  the  mess-sergeants  or 
other  persons  in  charge,  a  carbon  duplicate  of  your  issue  slip.  This 
usually  saves  a  lot  of  questions  and  affords  the  organization  com- 
mander a  handy  means  of  knowing  the  quantities  of  the  various 
articles  received  and  saved.  The  following  is  a  convenient  impro- 
vised form  for  an  issue  slip: 


THE  POST  COMMISSARY  SERGEANT. 


141 


ISSUE  SLIP 

OF 

Co.    "     ,"    til    Infantry 

From to 1909. 

Number   of   Rations 


Articles 

Fresh    Beef 

Bacon 

Corned    Beef 

Roast    Beef 

Corned   Beef   Hash.. 

Dried  Fish 

Canned    Fish 

Flour 

Hard    Bread 

Corn    Meal 

Baking   Powder 

Hops 

Beans 

Rice 

Baked'  Beans 

Potatoes,  Fresh 

Onions,  Fresh 

Tomatoes , 

Apples,  Evaporated. . 
Peaches,   Evaporated 

Prunes 

Jam 

Coffee 

Tea 

Sugar 

V^inegar 

Pickles 

Salt 

Pepper 

Soap 

Candles 

Toilet  Paper 

Salt,  coarse 

Matches 


Rations 


Bulk 


Drawn  I   Saved 


Price 


Amount 


(These  two 
columns   are   for 
the    convenience 
and   use  of  the 
com.pany    mess 
sergeant,   if 
he   desires  to 
use    them). 


Total  saved 


Received  the   rations   as  indicated   in   column    "drawn." 


Mess   Sergeant,   Co, 


Inf'y. 


(Note:  These  issue  slips,  whose  actual  size  is  9  x  5  inches,  should  be  put  up 
in  pad  form  so  as  to  facilitate  the  making  of  carbon  copies  for  the  company  mess  ser- 
geants). 


142 


CHAPTER  IX. 


The  Army  Regulations  (Par.  1257,  '08)  prescribes  that  sales  of 
subsistence  shall  be  made  to  officers  on  their  certificate  that  the 
stores  are  for  their  personal  or  family  use,  etc.  The  regular  blank 
containing  this  certificate  is  Form  No.  54,  Sub.  Dept.  However, 
instead  of  officers'  signing  this  form  every  time  a  purchase  of  sub- 
sistence stores  is  made,  it  is  customary  to  issue  them  pass-books  on 
which  they  order  during  the  month,  and  then  at  the  end  of  the  month 
have  them  sign  a  certificate  in  this  or  similar  form: 


Fort  Leavenworth^  Kansas, 


190. 


We,  The  Undersigned  do  hereby  certify  that  during  the  month  of   

190.  .,  we  have  purchased  from  the  Subsistence  Department,  Fort  Leaven- 
worth, Kansas,  Subsistence  Stores  for  the  exclusive  use  of  ourselves  and  families  and 
the  organizations  we  command,  to  the  amounts  set  opposite  our  respective  names. 


Name  and   Rank;  or  Organization 

Amount 

Signature 

$ 

Cts. 

(Actual   size,    7^^    x    12   inches.) 


Some  Post  Commissary-Sergeants,  in  the  case  of  returns  and 
other  papers  that  are  made  out  in  duplicate,  never  copy  from  the 
original,  but  make  out  two  separate  and  distinct  papers  and  then 
compare  the  result  on  the  bottom  lines,  and  if  they  are  the  same,  a 
mistake  is  hardly  possible.  This  plan  may  take  a  little  more  time, 
but  it  really  saves  time  in  the  long  run,  as  it  afifords  an  excelleni  means 
of  detecting  and  correcting  errors,  and  obviates  future  correspondence 
with  the  War  Department. 

The  cash   sales   slip.   Form   54,   can   be   used   for   more   than   one 
person  by  having  each  purchaser  sign  immediately  under  his  purchases 
All  the  slips  used  during  the  day  can  be  fastened  together,  the  top 
one  dated  and  the  totals  of  sales  to  each  class  of  purchasers  (officers, 
enlisted  men,  civil  enployees),  entered  in  the  upper  right  hand  corner. 


THE  POST  COMMISSARY-SERGEANT. 


143 


These  totals  are  then  entered  in  a  ruled  record  like  this: 


Cash  Sales  for 1909. 


Date 

Officers 

Enlisted 
Men 

Civilian 
Employees 

10   Per 
Cent 

Total 

$ 

Cts. 

$ 

Cts. 

$ 

Cts. 

$ 

Cts. 

$ 

Cts. 

, 

(This  columu 
may  be  used 
for  the 
initials   of 
the  Commis- 
sary Officer 
to  show  that 
the  cash  has 
been  turned 
into   him 
from  day  to 
day.) 

Total 

Remember  that  the  presence  in  the  commissary  of  a  Regimental 
Commissary-Sergeant  no  more  relieves  you  of  3^our  responsibilities 
than  your  presence  there  relieves  the  Commissary  Officer  of  his 
responsibilities.  Neither  the  Army  Regulations,  the  Subsistence  Man- 
ual or  War  Department  orders,  gives  a  Regimental  Commissary - 
Sergeant  any  status  in  a  post  commissary,  and  he  is,  therefore,  to  be 
viewed  in  the  light  of  a  special  duty  man,  pure  and  simple. 

Paper  -Work.     See  Chapter  XI,  'Taper-work. 
A  Loss  of  Funds.     For  action  to  be  taken  in  case  of  the  loss  of 

public  funds,  see  'Toss  of  Funds,"  page  123. 

B  Books  of  reference,  Maps,  etc.,  and  blank  forms  to  be  kept  on 

hand,  and  Reports,  Returns,  Estimates  and  Requisitions  to  be  made 
by  the  Commissary.    Sup.,  Chap.  IX. 

B  Rubber  Stamps  Usually  Used  in  the  Office  of  the  Commissary. 
(Required  for  on  Form  50,  the  same  stamps  desired  being  described  on 
back  of  requisition,  under  "Remarks.") 

€ffice  of  the  QommUzavq, 

^opt  flee  tmioinee,  $oma. 

(Letter  Head) 


144 


CHAPTER  IX. 


Indorsement, 
OFFICE  OF  THE  COMMISSARY, 

Fort  Wright,  fVash.j 
,  190 

Mespectfully 

(For   indorsements.) 


(a) 


No. 


OFFICE  OF  THE  COMMISSARY, 

Fort  Wright y  Wash,, 

Received 


(b) 


Mo. 
Ojffice  of  Commissary, 

JUN  2  4  1906 

Ft.  (Das  Moines,    Iowa.     , 


(On  all  commnnications  received.) 


THE  POST  COMMISSARY-SERGEANT.  145 


(a) 


(b) 


THE  COMMISSARY. 


FORT  HARRISON,  MONT. 


(To  fill  in  blanks,  etc.) 

5 

(a) 

FEB  1  - 1903 

(Dater.) 
7 

(a)        Fort  Harrison,  Mont 


Commutation  of  rations  paid 
in  cash  on  this  order  from 

to        inclus  ive 

Amount :  $ 


Commissary. 


146  CHAPTER  IX. 

(b)     Fact  noted  on  order  retained  by  soldier. 

(^^  Commutatioji  of  rations  paid 

to men    on    this   order 

days  from 

I  go    to I  go 

both    days  inclusive,    at 

per     day     each.        Total  amount    paid 
$ Paid     by Paid 

,  I  go 


^^^  Travel  rations  issued  to 

men  o?i  this  order  for days 

from, I  go     to 

I  go     both  days  inclusive. 

Funds  for  the  purchase  of  liquid  coffee 
paid  to  same  number  of  men  for  like  num- 
ber of  days  at  21    cents   each  per  day. 

Total  amount  paid  $ Paid 

by  cash.     Paid igo     , 


(^>  No  Subsistence  furnished. 

(Indorsements  on  travel   orders.) 


.       THE  POST  COMMISSARY-SERGEANT. 


147 


8 


(a) 


(b)    RECEIVED  PAYMENT: 


Comiius.mry  Sergt.,  U.  S.  A. 

(Some  officers  make  it  a  practice  to  sign  all  formal  money  receipts  themselves, 
ailowiug  the  Commissary  Sergeant  to  give,  when  necessary,  what  might  be  termed  a 
temporary    or   memorandum    receipt.) 


(C) 


PAID 


(For  use  on  bills,  pass  boolis,  blotters,  etc.) 


V 


(^)    Colonel  2ist  Cavalry^ 
Coinmanding. 

(b)    Captain  &  Commissary,  11th  Cavalry, 

Commissary. 


W    Commissary  Sergeant 
24th  Infantry. 


(For  signature.) 


148 
10 


CHAPTER  IX. 


SAVINGS  OF 


For  the  month  of. igo 


-o 
c 

Articles 

$ 

c 

, 

PORK dh 

BACON e(, 

FLOUR @ 

BEANS        .     .      .  @> 

PEAS @ 

RICE @ 

COFFEE @ ' 

SUGAR      ...           .  m 

VINEGAR                @, 

SOAP @ 

SALT                          (CI) 

PEPPER       .            @       

0, 

0\ 

0, 

TOTAL  VALUE 

Commissary  Sergeant  24th  Infantry. 
For  u«e  in   Company  pass  books  at  end  of  each  month. 


THE  POST  COMMISSARY-SERGEANT.  149 

11 

^^^  Commissary  General^  U.  S.  Army^ 

Washington^  D.  C. 


^^^  Chief  Commissary  ^ 

Department  of  Missouri^ 
Omaha^  Nebr. 

(Addi'esses.) 


12 

(a) 


Currency 


(^^   Subsistence  of  the  Army  1903 

(Money  Papers.) 


13 

filed   herewith 

(Aiithority.) 


150  CHAPTER  IX. 

14 

A  TR.VE  COPY: 

(For  true  copies  of  orders  and  other  papers.) 


15 


Duplicate 


(On  iuvoices.  receipts  and  otlier  paper; 

16 

(a)    Carried  forward 
(^)   Brot.  forward 

(Pass  books,  etc.) 

17 

CHIEF  COMMISSARY 

DEPT.  OF  DAKOTA. 

ST.  PAUL        -        MINN. 

18  '  . 

STORES 

(Invoices  and  receipts  of  stores.) 

19 

Property 

(Property  Papers.) 


20 


21 


THE  POST  COMMISSARY-SERGEANT. 

Sub  Voucher  JVo , 

to 

Voucher  JVo ^  Abstract  of 

(Disbursements^   pertaining    to 

Account    Current    of  ist   Lieut. 

, ^^gt- 

of. ...' ^  Commissary ^  for  the 

month  of. ^  igo 

(Indorsement  on  sub-vouchers.) 

The  rate  of  pay  to  Civilian  Employees  does 
not  exceed  ^60.00  per  month,  the  circum= 
stances  of  their  service  make  issue  of  rations 
necessary,  and  the  terms  of  their  engage= 
m.ent  provide  for  such  issue. 

(Remark  on  abstract  of  Issues  to  Civilian  Employees.) 


151 


22 


23 


JUNE  21 1906 

(For  marking  on  boxes  or  packages  date  of  receipt  of  stores.) 


In  addition  to  the  above,  a  stamp  of  the 
name  of  the  commissary  and  a  set  of  month 
stamps,  on  a  band  similar  to  a  dater. 


152  CHAPTER  X. 


CHAPTER  X. 
THE  ORDNANCE  SERGEANT  ^ 

General  Duties.l  Under  the  supervision  of  the  Post  Ordnance 
Officer,  the  Ordnance  Sergeant  has  charge  of  the  care  and  preservation 
of  all  ordnance  stores  and  equipment  for  the  general  use  of  the  post 
(except  the  modern  armament  and  equipment  of  Coast  Artillery  posts) 
and  of  such  surplus  ordnance  and  ordnance  stores  as  are  not  in  the 
hands  of  troops. 

He  is  also  charged  with  the  preparation  of  the  Ordnance  returns 
and  requisitions,  and  such  other  paper-work  as  may  be  connected 
with  the  office  of  Post  Ordnance  Officer. 

When  necessary  he  also  repairs  arms  in  the  hands  of  troops. 

Things  The   ORDNANCE    SERGEANT    Should  Take   Special   Care 
To  Do.i 

He  should  be  prompt  and  attentive  in  the  performance  of  his 
duties,  and  should  always  keep  his  work  up  to  date. 

He  should  see  that  the  proper  amount  of  amunition,  spare  parts 
and  target  material  is  at  all  times  on  hand. 

He  must  carefull}^  verify  all  stores  received  and  shipped 

See  that  receipts  are  received  for  all  articles  issued,  both  regular 
issues   and   on  memorandum  receipt. 

Things  The    ORDNANCE   SERGEANT   Should   Take   Special    Care 
NOT  To  Do.i 

Not  to  issue  Ordnance  property  without  proper  authority. 

Not  to  permit  smoking  in  the,  vicinity  of  the  magazine  by  work- 
ing parties,  or  any  other  person,  when  the  magazine  door  is  open. 

Not  to  attempt  to  remove  ammunition  or  explosives  from  the 
magazine  when  there  is  a  fire  in  the  vicinity  of  the  magazine,  but  to 
close  all  doors,  windows  and  ventilators,  covering  them  with  damp 
cloths. 

Not  to  allow  explosives  to  be   dragged  from  a  car  and  thrown 


a  The    expression   Post    Ordnance    Sergeant"    is    not    used    in    the    Army    Regula- 
tions— only  "Ordnance  Sergeant"   is  used. 

1  The  collated  experiences  of  four  Ordnance  Sergeants. 


THE  ORDNANCE  SERGEANT.        153 

into  wagons,  but  in  all  cases  they  are  to  be  handled  with  the  greatest 
care. 

There  are  a  number  of  other  things  he  should  not  do — they 
arc  mostly  covered  by  regulations,  such  as  not  attempting  to  put  a 
primer  in  a  cartridge  case  when  it  is  loaded  wnth  powder. 

"Customs  of  the  Service"  Affecting  ORDNANCE  SERGEANTS. 

See  Par.  A,  page  t^'/'j. 

"Pointers"  Regarding  The  Care  and  Preservation  of  Property. 

The  Ordnance  Sergeant  should  give  special  attention  to  the 
care  and  preservation  of  such  ordnance  and  ordnance  stores  as  are 
in  his  immediate  charge.  (For  the  proper  way  of  preserving  same, 
see  page  56). 

An  inventory  of  property  on  hand  should  be  taken  at  least  once 
every  six  months. 

All  powders  and  ammunition  should  be  kept  separate  from  other 
stores — in  the  magazine,  if  one  is  provided,  which  should  be  opened 
and  ventilated  at  least  once  a  week. 

In  issuing  ammunition,  or  its  components,  that  longest  on  hand 
should  be  issued  first. 

Miscellaneous  "Pointers"  and  Suggestions. 

When  transferring  property  to  someone  away  from  the  post, 
make  an  extra  copy  of  the  invoice  and  keep  it  on  tile  until  the  return 
of  the  receipts,  properly  signed. 

See  that  requisitions  are  made  on  time  and  that  the  quantities 
requested  are  sufficient  to  supply  the  command  properly. 

Stencils  cut  out  of  paper — one  with  the  name  of  each  Arsenal 
you  deal  with — are  a  great  convenience.  Nearly  all,  if  not  all,  the 
arsenals  have  machines  for  cutting  such  stencils,  and  it  is  more  than 
likely  that  any  one  of  them  would  gladly  furnish  stencils  upon  appli- 
cation. 

Returns,  War  Dept.  Orders,  etc.     See  Supplement,  Chap.  IX. 


154  CHAPTER  XL 


CHAPTER  XL 
PAPER-WORK 

(See   "Paper-Work  and   Correspondence,"   page  69). 
(See  corresponding  chapter  in  Supplement  for  additional  matter  and  changes,  if  any.) 

In  1896  the  major-general  commanding  the  army  remarked, 
"There  is  but  one  safe  rule  for  military  correspondence  and  the 
transmission  of  orders,  and  that  is  through  military  channels." 

A  most  important  rule  for  company  clerks,  sergeants-major  and 
others  who  are  charged  with  the  execution  of  paper-work,  is,  Be 
systematic  and  ahvays  do  your  work  as  it  comes  up — never  postpone  it. 

A  Correspondence  between  the  line  and  the  various  staff  bureaus 

should  pass  through  the  Adjutant  General's  Department. 
Communications  are  signed  as  follows: 

(a)     Between  officers   exercising  correlative  commands, 
e.  g.,  post  commanders — by  the  officers  themselves. 

(b)  Between  an  inferior  and  a  superior — by  the  inferior, 
the  communication  being  addressed  to  the  Adjutant  General 
or  the  adjutant  of  the  superior. 

(c)  Between  a  superior  and  an  inferior  in  the  same  com- 
mand— by  a  staff  officer  of  the  former. 

B  Directions,  instructions,  orders,  etc.,  signed  by  the  staff  officer 

of  a  general  officer  are  signed,  for  example,  "By  command  of  Brigadier- 
General  Smith;"  those  signed  by  the  staff  officer  of  an  officer  below  the 
rank  of  brigadier-general,  are,  "By  order,"  etc. 

C  The  expressions  "Calling  attention  to,"  "Your  attention  is  called 

to,"  etc.,  "The  commanding  officer  directs  that  your  attention  be 
called,"  etc.,  are  admonitive  in  character.  The  expressions  "Inviting 
attention  to,"  "Your  attention  is  invited  to,"  etc.,  "The  commanding 
officer  directs  your  attention  be  invited,"  etc.,  are  not  of  an  admonitive 
nature. 

D  The  expressions,  "The  commanding  officer  desires,"  etc.,  "The 

commanding  officer  wishes,"  etc.,  are  tantamount  to  "The  command- 
ing officer  directs,"  etc. 


PAPER-WORK.  155 

A  Official    communications    and    envelopes    should    be    addressed 

to  the  office  and  not  to  the  individual,  thus:  "The  Adjutant  General, 
Headquarters,  Department  of  Dakota,"  "The  Adjutant,  Fort  Missoula, 
Montana,"  "The  Commanding  Officer,  Company  A,'  24th  Infantry," 
etc.,  and  not  to  "Major  John   Smith,  Adjutant  General,"  etc. 

So  likewise  should  checks  and  postal  money  orders  pertaining  to 
official  matters  be  made  payable  to  the  office  and  not  to  the  individual, 
thus:  "Pay  to  the  order  of  the  Chief  Paymaster,  Dept.  of  Dakota," 
or  to  "The  Paymaster,   Kansas  City,   etc." 

The  envelope  containing  G.  C.  M.  proceedings  to  be  forwarded 
to  the  convening  authority,  should  be  plainly  marked  "G.  C.  M.  Pro- 
ceedings." 

All  communications  intended  for  the  action  of  the  War  Depart- 
ment should  be  addressed  to  "The  Adjutant  General,  War  Depart- 
ment,  Washington,    D.    C." 

A  letter  to  any  officer  in   the  army  addressed,  "Care  The  Adju- 
tant General,  U.  S.  A.,  Washington,  D.  C,"  will  be  duly  forwarded. 
B  Stamps  for  foreign  official  mail  and  official  registered  mail  can 

be   obtained   from  the   quartermaster. 

C  There  is  a  tendency  in  the  army  to  burden  letters  and  official 

documents  with  the  rank  and  regiment  of  the  officers  referred  to  in 
the  text.  It  is  rarely  necessary  in  ordinary  official  correspondence  to 
give  more  than  the  officer's  rank  and  name.  Thus,  "Captain  Smith 
has  frequently  invited  attention  to  the  needs,"  etc.  There  is  no  use 
writing,  "Captain  John  A.  Smith,  15th  Cavalry,  has  frequently,"  etc. 
If,  however,  it  be  not  perfectly  evident  who  the  officer  is,  his  full 
name,  rank  and  regiment  should  be  mentioned  once;  after  that  his 
title  and  last  name  alone  need  be  given.  In  writing  to  a  post  com- 
mander concerning  one  of  his  officers,  it  is  hardly  necessary  to  desig- 
nate the  latter  (certainly  never  more  than  once)  by  full  name  and 
regiment.  In  other  words,  ordinary  official  correspondence  should 
not  be  burdened  with  the  repetition  of  titles  usual  and  necessarj^  in  a 
formal  order  or  in  court-martial  proceedings. 

Thus  it  seems  almost  ridiculous  to  write  in  the  body  of  a  letter: 

Major   Frank  A.    Edwards, 

4th  Cavalry, 

Militar}'  Attache, 

Rome,  Italy. 

The  address  on  the  envelope  might  bear  all  of  this;  the  letter  itself 
might  better  commence: 

Major  Frank  A.    Edwards 


156  CHAPTER  XL 

and  after  that,  Major  Edwards  is  quite  sufficient  to  designate  this 
officer. 

A  It  is  not  uncommon  for  officers  of  experience  to  begin  an  offi- 

cial letter  addressed  to  another  officer,  with  the  title  of  the  latter  in- 
stead of  with  "Sir,"  Thus,  an  official  communication  to  Lieutenant 
John  R.  Smith,  would  begin,  Lieutenant;"  one  to  Captain  Jas.  A. 
Corbin,  ''Captain,"  and  so  on. 

B  Formerly  it  was  quite  common  for  officers  to  begin  official  let- 

ters to  the  Adjutant  General  of  the  Army,  the  Quartermaster  General 
or  the  head  of  any  other  War  Department  bureau,  as  "General,"  in- 
stead of  "Sir,"  and  some  few  of  the  older  officers  still  do  so. 

C  Some  officers,  and  also  certain  editors  and  writers  in  civil  life, 

always  write  out  in  full  military  titles,  using  the  forms  "General," 
"Colonel,"  etc.,  instead  of  "Gen.'l,"  "Col.,"  etc.,  on  the  ground  that  the 
full  spelling  possesses  a  certain  suggestion  of  courtesy  and  good  form 
that  is  lacking  in  the  abbreviation. 

According  to  the  practice  of  The  Adjutant  General's  Office  it  is 
considered  better  form  to  spell  out  titles  in  full  in  all  formal  com- 
munications, although  sometimes,  on  account  of  their  length,  the 
words  "Brigadier-General,"  "Major-General,"  "Lieutenant-Colonel," 
and  "Lieutenant,"  are  abbreviated  "Brig.-Gen'l.,"  "Maj.-Gen'l.," 
"Lieut. -Col.,"  and  "Lt.,"  or  "Lieut.,"  but  it  is  preferable  to  spell  them 
out  in  full.  Except  colloquially,  or  sometimes  in  the  body  of  a  com- 
munication where  the  formal  use  of  the  full  title  would  seem  un- 
necessary, the  office  never  uses  the  term  "General"  alone,  but  it  is 
always  "Lieutenant-General,"  "Major-General"  or  "Brigadier-Gen- 
eral."    The  abbreviation  "Gen."  is  never  used — it  is  always  "Gen'l." 

D  It  is  also  the  practice  of  The  Adjutant  General's  Office  to  omit 
the  hyphens  in  the  designations  "Adjutant  General,"  "Quartermaster 
General,"  "Commissary  General,"  "Inspector  General"  and  "Judge 
Advocate  General"  (not  Adjutant-General,  etc.)  However,  in  the 
Army  Regulations  these  terms  are  sometimes  found  hyphenated  and 
are  so  spelt  in  standard  dictionaries. 

In  the  expression  "The  Adjutant  General,  U.  S.  A.,"  the  "The" 
is  spelt  with  a  capital  "T." 

E  Make  it  an  invariable  rule  to  keep  carbon  or  other  copies  of  all 

letters,  telegrams,  and  other  official  communications  sent. 


PAPER-WORK.  157 

In  forwarding  letters  from  enlisted  men,  officers  should  verify 
the  statements  made  therein. 

Keep  your  Army  Regulations  posted  up  to  date  and  before  for- 
warding any  paper  read  carefully  the  paragraphs  on  the  subject  and 
then  see  that  all  requirements  are  fulfilled. 

Letters  and  endorsements  requiring  answers  should  be  carefully 
analyzed  and  the  constituent  parts  requiring  answers  should  be  an- 
swered categorically. 

A  A  faithful  compliance  with  the  two  foregoing  paragraphs  takes 

time,  patience  and  labor,  but  in  the  long  run  saves  much  extra  paper- 
work and  trouble.  It  is  really  astonishing  how  many  communications 
are  returned  to  officers  for  compliance  with  certain  indorsements  or 
with  certain  paragraphs  in  the  Army  Regulations.  In  this  connection, 
it  may  be  remarked  the  paragraph  in  the  Regulations  that  is  violated 
the  most  is  the  one  requiring  officers  who  forward  communications  to  indorse 
thereon  their  approval  or  disapproval,  with,  remarks.  See  Supplement, 
Chap.  XVI,  Par.  112.  . 

B  The  following  are  some  of  the  errors  most  frequently  committed 

in  paper-work: 

/  Persons  who  are  the  first  ones  to  receive  communications 
fail- to  brief  them  as  required  by  Army  Regulations. 

2  Fourth-fold  indorsement  slips  are  added  in  the  wrong  place. 

3  Papers  that  should  be  compared  are  carelessly  compared  or 
not  compared  at  all  before  being  submitted. 

4  Court-martial  charges  are  laid  under  the  wrong  Article  of  War. 

5  Reports,  returns,  estimates,  requisitions  and  other  blanks 
that  are  prepared  for  an  officer's  signature,  do  not  contain  his  rank, 
regiment  and  office  held  after  the  place  for  signature. 

Return  promptly  all  papers  that  should  be  returned.  If  directed 
to  complete  a  paper,  return  a  communication  or  do  anything  else 
without  delay  or  by  a  certain  time,  if  it  be  impossible  to  do  so, 
then  the  office  concerned  should  be  so  notified  without  delay,  with  a 
full  explanation. 

Thin,  transparent  paper  should  not  be  used  in  writing  letters  on 
which  indorsements  are  to  be  placed,  but  should  such  letters  be  re- 
ceived, then  before  indorsing  paste  stiff  paper  on  fold. 

C  Returns,  Reports,  Estimates  and  Requisitions,     i     Before  filling 

out  a  blank  form  read  carefully  all  notes  thereon,  and  all  Army  Regu- 
lation paragraphs  and  orders  on  the  subject. 


158  CHAPTER  XL 

2  All  columns  on  forms  must  be  filled  in.  When,  owing  to 
the  absence  of  the  necessary  information  or  for  any  other  reason, 
columns  or  headings  can  not  be  filled  in,  "Unknown"  or  a  dash 
should  be  entered. 

J  When  periodical  reports  are  required  they  should  be  ren- 
dered whether  or  not  there  be  anything  to  report. 

4  One  or  more  diagonal  lines  should  be  drawn  through  the 
blank  space  after  the  last  entry  on  estimates,  requisitions  and  pass 
lists. 

5  Signatures  to  returns,  estimates  and  other  papers  should  agree 
with  the  name  as  given  in  the  heading.  For  instance,  if  "John  R. 
Moore"  appears  in  the  heading,  the  paper  should  be  so  signed  and 
not  "J.  R.  Moore". 

A  Miscellaneous.,     i     "INDORSEMENT"    and    "INCLOSURE" 

(not    "Endorsement"    and    "Enclosure")    are    the    forms    used    in    the 
Army   Regulations. 

2  The  term  "Through  Military  Channels"  Is  really  not  a 
definite,  exact  statement  and  should  be  used  very  rarely  on  papers 
going  up. 

"The  Military  Channel"  to  The  Adjutant  General,  U.  S  Army, 
for  example,  may  be  direct  or  through  Department  Headquarters. 

There  are  cases,  of  course,  where  the  use  of  the  term  would 
be  proper,  but  they  are  rare. 

If  a  paper  is  forwarded  through  military  channels,  saying  so  is 
useless. 

5  A  letter  is  always  briefed  in  the  first  office  in  which  it  is 
received. 

The  brief  is  always  on  the  first  fold,  which,  beginning  at  the 
top,  is  apportioned  about  as  follows: 

(a)  About  V/i  inch  space  for  office  stamp  of  A.  G.  O. 
Div.,  Dep't.,  etc. 

(h)     Office,  place  and  date   of  letter; 

(c)  About   1   inch   space; 

(d)  Name  of  writer  and  rank  (in  case  of  commanding 
officers  and  staff  officers,  only  the  ofiicial  designation  should 
appear); 

(e)  About    1    inch    space; 

(f)  Briefest  synopsis  of  contents  (only  a  general  idea 
of  the  subject) ; 


PAPER- WORK.  159 

(g)     Remaining  space,  upper  part  for  enumeration  of  in- 
closures — lower,    for    office    marks.      The    inclosures    should 
be  noted  serially,  by  number  and  indorsement. 

When  the  brief  is  typewritten,  ruling  is  unnecessary,  but  when 
a  pen  is  used,  a  and  f  should  be  followed  by  a  red  line  clear  across, 
and  c  and  e  spaces  should  have  a  short,  red  line  across  the  middle. 

A  4     In   making  out   Descriptive    Lists,   the   following   should   be 

borne  in  mind: 

(a)  In  case  a  noncommissioned  officer  is  to  be  dis- 
charged during  his  absence  on  detached  service,  the  company 
commander  should  note  on  the  Descriptive  List  whether  it 
is  desired  his  warrant  be  continued  in  force  upon  re -enlist- 
ment. 

(b)  When  a  man  is  transferred  to  another  organization, 
evidence  of  previous  convictions  by  court-martial  within  the 
last  year   and   during  the  present   enlistment,   if  any,   should 

•     accompany   the    Descriptive    List. 

Also,  if  he  has  been  absent  without  leave,  the  number  of 
days  absent  should  be  noted,  as  not  only  does  he  forfeit  his 
pay  and  his  clothing  allowance  during  such  absence,  but  the 
time  must  be  made  up,  and  nor  does  the  time  absent  count 
in  computation  of  time  for  retirement. 

(c)  When  men  on  extra  or  special  duty  are  transferred 
to  another  organization  at  the  same  post,  the  fact,  with  num- 
ber, date,  etc.,  of  order,  should  be  stated. 

(d)  Special  care  should  be  taken  to  note  with  detail  and 
accuracy  all  former  service,  especially  foreign  service.  This 
information  should  also  be  noted  with  equal  care  and  detail 
on  a  soldier's  discharge  certificate,  for  it  affects  directly  a 
soldier's    retirement    after    thirty    years'    service. 

B  5     Papers  made  out  in  duplicate,  triplicate,  etc.,  are  marked  in 

the  lower  left-hand  corner,  'Tn  Duplicate,"  "In  Triplicate,"  etc. 

6  In  case  an  original  paper  has  been  lost  and  it  becomes  neces- 
sary to  make  another,  the  new  one  is  marked  "Duplicate." 

C  7     Whenever  a  signature  is  copied,  "(Sgd.)"  is  written  before 

the  same. 

D  8     When  practicable,  true  copies  of  papers  should  be  made  by 

another  officer  than  the  one  interested.     A  "true"  copy  may  be  made 


160  CHAPTER  XL 

by  any  one,  but  an  "official"  copy  can  be  made  only  by  the  officer 
having  authority  to  issue  the  order,  or  by  an  officer  through  whom 
the  issuing  authority  may  issue  orders,  e.  g.,  chiefs  of  staff,  adjutants 
general,  aids  and  adjutants. 

9  Interlineations  and  corrections  should  be  initialed  by  the  one 
wlio  makes  them. 

10  Papers  submitted  for  signature  should  always  contain  the 
rank,  regiment  and  official  designation  below  the  place  where  the 
officer  is  to  sign. 

11  A  clerk  or  anyone  else  who  typewrites  anything,  should  al- 
ways  read  the  paper   carefully  before   submitting  it. 

12  Always  compare  carefully  before  submitting  them,  all  papers 
requiring  comparison. 

THE  MUSTER  AND  THE  PAY  ROLLS 

A  Read  carefully  and  intelligently  and   then  comply   with  oil  the 

notes  on  the  rolls. 

Enter  on  the  Muster  Rolls,  everything  affecting  in  any  way  the 
status  or  record  of  every  member  of  the  company  during  the  period 
covered. 

(Note:  However,  only  in  case  of  sickness  at  date  of  muster,  is  the  fact  noted 
on  the  muster  rolls). 

Enter  on  the  Pay  Rolls,  only  such  facts  as  affect  the  soldiers'  pay. 

These  rubber  stamps  can  be  used  with  advantage  in  the  prepara- 
tion of  the  Muster  and  the  Pay  Rolls: 
J.     Stop  $      per  S.  C.  6.     Fort  Leavenworth,  Kan. 

2.      Pay  due   sharpshooter.  (Station  of  Company.) 

5.     Pay  due  as  marksman.  7.     30  MAY  07 

(Dates   for   date   of  last  payment,   etc.) 

4.  Co.  B,  24th  Infty.  8      Capt.,  24th  Infantry. 

5.  Captain  Smith.  Commanding  Co.  B. 

(Name  of  Paymaster.) 
See  "Rubber  Stamps,"  in  index. 

For  instructions  regarding  the  preparation  of  the  Mustkk  and  the  P w  Rolls. 
see   Supplement,   Chap.  XI. 


MILITARY  COURTESY. 


161 


CHAPTER  XII. 


MILITARY  COURTESY 


Its  Importance.  The  recruit  does  not  see  the 
necessity  for  saluting,  standing  at  attention,  and 
other  forms  of  courtesy,  because  he  does  not  under- 
stand their  significance, — their  object.  It  is  a  well- 
known  fact  that  military  courtesy  is  a  very  import- 
ant part  of  the  education  of  the  soldier,  and  there  are 
good  reasons  for  it. 

General  Orders  No.  183,  Division  of  thp  Philip- 
pines, 1901,  says:  "In  all  armies 
the  manner  in  which  military  cour- 
tesies are  observed  and  rendered 
by  officers  and  soldiers,  is  the  in- 
dex to  the  manner  in  which  other 
duties  are  performed." 

The  Army  Regulations  tells 
us,  "Courtesy  among  military  men 
is  indispensable  to  discipline;  re- 
spect to  superiors  will  not  be  con- 
fined to  obedience  on  duty,  but  will 
be  extended  on  all  occasions." 


THE  NATURE  OF  SALUTES  AND  THEIR 

ORIGIN. 

(a)     The  Civilian  Salute. 

When  a  gentleman  raises  his  hat  to  a  lady  he 
is  but  continuing  a  custom  that  had  its  beginning  in 
the  days  of  knighthood,  Avhen  every  knight  wore  his 
helmet  as  a  protection  against  foes.  However,  when 
coming  among  friends,  especially  ladies,  the  knight 
would  remove  his  helmet  as  a  mark  of  confidence 
and  trust  in  his  friends.  In  those  days  failure  to 
remove  the   helmet  in   the  presence   of  ladies   signi 


162 


CHAPTER  XII. 


fied   distrust  and   want   of  confidence — today   it   signifies   impoliteness 
and  a  want  of  good  breeding. 

(b)     The  Military  Salute. 

From  time  immemorial  subordinates  have  always  uncovered  be- 
fore superiors,  and  equals  have  always  acknowledged  each  other's 
presence  by  some  courtesy — this  seems  to  be  one  of  the  natural, 
nobler  instincts  of  man.  It  was  not  so  many  years  ago  when  a  sen- 
tinel saluted  not  only  with  his  gun  but  by  taking  off  his  hat  also. 
However,  when  complicated  headgear  like  the  bearskin  and  the  hel- 
met came  into  use,  they  could  not  be  readily  removed  and  the  act  of  re- 
moving the  hat  was  finally  conventionalized  into  the  present  salute — 
into  the  movement  of  the  hand  to  the  visor  as  if  the 
hat  were  going  to  be  removed. 

Every  once  in  a  while  a  man  is  found  who  has 
the  mistaken  idea  that  he  smothers  the  American 
spirit  of  freedom,  that  he  sacrifices  his  independence, 
by  saluting  his  officers.  Of  course,  no  one  but  an 
anarchist  or  a  man  with  a  small,  shrivelled-up  mind 
can  have  such  ideas. 

Manly  deference  to  superiors,  which  in  the 
Army  is  merely  recognition  of  constituted  authority, 
does  not  imply  admission  of  inferiority  any  more 
than  respect  for  law  implies  cowardice. 

The  recruit  should  at  once  rid  himself  of  the 
idea  that  saluting  and  other  forms  of  military  cour 
tesy  are  un-American.  The  salute  is  the  soldier's 
claim  from  the  very  highest  in  the  land  to  instant 
recognition  as  a  soldier.  The  raw  recruit  by  his 
simple  act  of  saluting,  commands  like  honor  from  the 
ranking  general  of  the  Army — aye,  from  even  the 
President  of  the  United  States. 

While  the  personal  element  naturally  enters 
into  the  salute  to  a  certain  extent,  when  a  soldier 
salutes  an  officer  he  is  really  saluting  the  office  rather  than  the  officer 
personally — the  salute  is  rendered  as  a  mark  of  respect  to  the  rank, 
the  position  that  the  officer  holds,  to  the  authority  with  which  he  is 
vested.  A  man  with  the  true  soldierly  instinct  never  misses  an  oppor- 
tunity to  salute  his  officers. 


MILITARY  COURTESY. 


163 


As  a  matter  of  fact,  military  courtesy  is  just  simply  an  application 
of  common,  every-day  courtesy  and  common  sense.  In  common, 
every-da}'  courtesy  no  man  with  the  instincts  of  a  gentleman  ever 
thinks  about  taking  advantage  of  this  thing  and  that  thing  in  order 
to  avoid  paying  to  his  fellow-man  the  ordinary,  conventional  cour- 
tesies of  life,  and  if  there  is  ever  any  doubt  about  the  matter,  he 
takes  no  chances  but  extends  the  courtesy.  And  this  is  just  exactly 
what  the  man  who  has  the  instincts  of  a  real  soldier  does  in  the  case 
of  military  courtesy.     The   thought  of  "Should   I   salute  or   should   I 

not  salute"  never  enters  the  mind  of  a  soldier  just 
because  he  happens  to  be  in  a  wagon,  in  a  post 
office,  etc. 

In  all  armies  of  the  world,  all  officers  and  sol 
diers  are  required  to  salute  each  other  whenever 
they  meet  or  pass,  the  subordinate  saluting  first. 
The  salute  on  the  part  of  the  subordinate  is  not 
intended  in  any  way  as  an  act  of  degradation  or  a 
mark  of  inferiority,  but  is  simply  a  military  courtesy 
that  is  as  binding  on  the  officer  as  it  is  on  the  pri- 
vate, and  just  as  the  enlisted  man  is  required  to  salute 
the  officer  first,  so  is  the  officer  required  to  salute 
his  superiors  first.  It  is  a  bond  uniting  all  in  a 
common  profession,  marking  the  fact  that  above 
them  there  is  an  authority  that  both  recognize  and 
obey — the  Country!  Indeed,  by  custom  and  regu- 
lations, it  is  as  obligatory  for  the  ranking  general 
of  the  x\rmy  to-  return  the  salute  of  the  recruit,  as 
it  is  for  the  latter  to  give  it. 

Let  it  be  remembered  that  the  military  salute 
is  a  form  of  greeting  that  belongs  exclusively  to  the 
military  arm  of  the  Government — to  the  soldier,  the  sailor,  the  marine 
— it  is  the  mark  and  prerogative  of  the  military  man  and  he  should  be 
proud  of  having  the  privilege  of  using  that  form  of  salutation — a 
form  of  salutation  that  marks  him  as  a  member  of  the  Profession  of 
Arms — the  profession  of  Napoleon,  Wellington,  Grant,  Lee,  Sherman, 
Jackson  and  scores  of  others  of  the  greatest  and  most  famous  men 
the  world  has  ever  known.  The  military  salute  is  ours,  it  is  ours 
only.  Moreover,  it  belongs  only  to  the  soldier  who  is  in  good  stand- 
ing, the  prisoner  under  guard,  for  instance,  not  being  allowed  to 
salute.      Ours   is  a   grand   fraternit}^  of  men-at-arms,   banded  together 


Needed :    A   Week 
of  extra  fatigue. 


164 


CHAPTER  XII. 


for  national  defense,  for  the  maintenance  of  law  and  order — we  are 
bound  together  by  the  love  and  respect  we  bear  the  flag — we  are 
pledged  to  loyalty,  to  one  God,  one  country — our  lives  are  dedicated 
to  the  defense  of  our  country's  flag — the  officer  and  the  private  be- 
long to  a  brotherhood  whose  regalia  is  the  uniform  of  the  American 
soldier,  and  they  are  known  to  one  another  and  to  all  men,  by  an 
honored  sign  and  symbol  of  knighthood  that  has  come  down  to  us 
from  the  ages— THE  MILITARY  SALUTE! 

WHOM  TO  SALUTE 

Do  Regulars  salute  officers  of  the  Navy  and  Marine  Corps? 

Yes,  at  all  times  and  in  all  situations  they  salute 
them  the  same  as  they  salute  all  officers  in  their  own 
regiment  and  all  other  regiments  of  the  Regular  Army. 
(A.  R.  396). 

Are  officers  of  the  Organized  Militia  sainted? 

If  in  uniform  they  are  saluted  the  same  as  Reg- 
ular officers.     (A.  R.  396). 

However,  they  are  saluted  by  sentinels  only  when  in  the 
service  of  the  United  States.  At  maneuvers  and  camps  of  in- 
struction it  is  thought  they  are,  for  saluting  purposes,  in  the 
service  of  the  United   States. 

Are  retired  Army  officers  saluted? 

Yes,  they  are  saluted  like  all  other  officers. 

Are  military  and  naval  foreign  officers  saluted? 

The  Manual  of  Guard  Duty  requires  sentinels  to 
salute  them  but  there  are  no  instructions  about  other 
enlisted  men  saluting  them.  However,  as  an  act  of 
courtesy  they  should  be  saluted  the  same  as  our  own 
officers. 

RESPECT  TO  BE  PAID  TO  THE  NATIONAL  AIR 
AND  SALUTING  THE  FLAG 

(The  recruit  will  actually  go  through  the  act  of  rendering 
the  salutes). 

What  should  he  done  when  the  Star  Spangled  Banner  is  played  by 
the  band  on  a  formal  occasion  (except  retreat)? 

Every  man  should  stand  at  attention,  such  position  being  retained 
until  the  last  note  of  the  music.     No  salute  is  rendered. 

Should  the  same  respect  he  observed  toward  the  national  air  of 
any  other  country,  when  it  is  played  as  a  compliment  to  official  repre- 
sentatives of  such  country? 


MILITARY  COURTESY. 


16 


:jD 


Yes,  but  only  when  it  is  played  as  a  complimejit  to  the  official  rep- 
representatives  of  the  country. 

When  the  flag  is  lowered  at  retreat  and  the  band  plays  "The  Star 
Spangled  Banner,"  or  the  field  music  sounds  "To  the  Color/'  what  should 
be  done? 

All  soldiers  out  of  ranks  face  toward  the  flag,  stand  at  attention 
and  render  the  prescribed  salute  at  the  last  note  of  the  music. 

NOTES 

1  In  practice  "all  soldiers  out  of  ranks"  means  all  soldiers  in  the  vicinity  of 
where  the  ceremony  is  taking  place — it  does  not  mean,  for  instance,  soldiers  in  another 
part  of  the  post,  who  can  hear  the  music  but  can  not  see  the  flag. 

2  By  "the  prescribed  salute"  is  meant,  if  unarmed,  the  "right  hand  salute;" 
if  armed  with  the  rifle,  the  "rifle  salute;"  if  armed  with  a  drawn  saber,  the  "present 
salute;"  if  wearing  a  sheathed  saber  or  other  side  arms,  the  "right  hand  salute." 

5  Some  officers  when  in  civilian  clothes  follow  the  sensible  and  patriotic 
custom  of  standing  and  uncovering  whenever  the  band  plays  "The  Star  Spangled 
Banner." 

SALUTES  TO  COLORS  AND  STANDARDS 

What  should  be  done  when  passing  the  national 
or  regimental  color  or  standard  uncased? 

The  prescribed  salute  should  be  rendered.  \\'ith 
no  arms  in  hand,  the  salute  is  made  by  uncovering  and 
holding  the  headdress,  top  outward,  in  the  right  hand, 
opposite  the  left  shoulder,  right  forearm  against  the 
breast.  If  armed  with  the  rifle  or  drawn  saber,  the 
hat  is  not  removed,  but  the  prescribed  rifle  or  saber 
salute  is  rendered. 

Cased  colors  and  standards,  that  is  to  say,  those 
that  are  in  their  waterproof  cases,  are  not  saluted.  Nor 
are  the  flags  on  flag  staffs  and  other  permanent  poles 
saluted. 

(Note:  By  "Colors"  and  "Standards"  is  meant  thri 
national  flags  and  the  regimental  flags  that  are  carried  by 
regiments  and  also  by  engineer  battalions.  They  may  be  of 
either  silk  or  btmting.  In  the  Army  Regulations  the  word 
"color"  is  used  in  referring  to  regiments  of  Infantry,  batta- 
lions of  Engineers  and  Philippine  Scouts,  and  the  Coast  Artil- 
lery, while  "Standard"  is  used  in  reference  to  regiments  of 
Cavalry  and  Field  Artillerj'. 

By  "Flag"  is  meant  the  national  emblem  that  waves 
from  flag-staffs  and  other  stationary  poles.  They  are  always  of 
bunting.     They  are  not  saluted). 


^% 


166 


CHAPTER  XJI. 


ij''    ''"'  *     it.-- 


-a 

c 

CO 

o 
£ 

>H 

>> 

o 

CO 

u 

3 

<u 

-C 

_r; 

o 

-^^ 

15 

CO 

u 

o 

.22 

CO 

15 

CO 

o 

o 

o 

u 

D 

(U 

rd 

> 

-*-> 

o 

CO 

o 

(U 

c 

Cfl 

3 

CO 

CO 

CO 

a 

CO 

0) 

2 

-C 

a 

c 

-r; 

^ 

is 

o 

CO 

CO 

a; 

0) 

> 

_c 

o 

'i— » 

o 

c 

2 

3 

3 

CO 

O 

CO 

CO 

^ 

o 

CO 

CO 

_o 

CO 

p        1 

•^•^ 

o  ■ 

~co 

-fi 

-4-1 

CO 

CO 

O  -C  _j-- 

^D 

o  . 

•4^ 

o 

'*— • 

CO 

o  ■ 

*   1  ij 

too    i)  - 

"co 
o 

_c 

-J^ 

•♦^ 

(U  - 

—4 

f/i  -c: 

o 

CO 

•*-* 

a 

< 

CO 

CO 

-o  • 

c-^ 

a;  »^ 

_o 

o 

MILITARY  COURTESY. 


167 


WHEN  AND  HOW  TO  SALUTE 
What  is  "saluting  distance" f 

It  is  the  limit  within  which  individuals  and  insignia  of  rank  can 
be  readily  recognized ;  it  is  assumed  to  be  about  thirty  paces.  No  salutes, 
except  as  otherwise  prescribed,  are  made  at  a  greater  distance  than  thirty 
paces. 

Are  salutes  ever  rendered  when  marching  in  double  time  or  at  the 
trot  or  gallop? 

No,  sir;  a  soldier  must  first  come  to  quick  time  or  walk  before 
saluting. 

Should  a  soldier  salute  an  officer  zvho  is  passing  in  double  time  or 
at  a  trot  or  gallop  f 

Yes,  sir ;  he  should. 

How  does  an  enlisted  man  salute  an  officer? 

If  the  enlisted  man  is  without  arms,  he  salutes 
with  the  hand  farthest  from  the  officer.  If  mounted, 
he  salutes  with  the  right  hand.  However,  when  imme- 
diately facing  an  officer  it  is  customary  to  salute  with 
the  right  hand. 

If  the  officer  and  soldier  are  approaching  each 
other  on  the  same  walk,  for  instance,  the  hand  is 
brought  up  to  the  headdress  when  six  paces  from  the 
officer.  If  they  are  on  opposite  sides  of  the  street,  the 
hand  is  brought  up  when  about  ten  paces  in  advance 
of  the  officer.  If  the  officer  and  soldier  are  not  going 
in  opposite  directions  and  the  officer  does  not  approach 
within  six  paces,  the  salute  is  rendered  when  the  officer 
reaches  the  nearest  point  to  the  soldier.  If  a  soldier 
passes  an  officer  from  the  rear,  the  hand  is  raised  as 
he  reaches  the  officer;  if  an  officer  passes  a  soldier 
from  the  rear,  the  soldier  salutes  just  as  the  officer  is 
about  to  pass  him. 

The  salute  with  the  hand  is  rendered  as  follows :  Raise  the  hand 
smartly  until  the  tip  of  the  fore-finger  touches  the  lower  part  of  the 
headdress  (if  uncovered,  the  forehead)  above  the  eye,  thumb  and  fingers 
extended  and  joined,  palm  to  the  right  (or  left),  forearm  inclined  at 
about  45   degrees,   hand   and   wTist   straight;    looking    tozvard   the   person 


168 


CHAPTER  XII. 


sainted.  This  position  is  maintained  until  the  salute  has  been  acknowl- 
edged or  the  officer  has  passed,  when  the  hand  is  brought  down  with 
snap. 

IVJwt  are  the  mistakes  usually  made  by  soldiers  in  saluting F 
I     They  do   not  begin   the   salute   soon    enough ;    often    they  do   not 
raise  the  hand  to  the  headdress  until  they  are  only  a  pace  or  two   from 


Notice  hozv  tJie  head  is  turned  toward  the  officer  saluted. 


the  oflficer — the  salute  sJwiild  alivays  begin  zvlicn  at  least  six  paces  -from 
the  officer. 

2  They  do  not  turn  the  head  and  eyes  toward  the  officer  who  is 
saluted — the  head  and  eyes  should  always  be  turned  toward  the  officer 
saluted  and  kept  turned  as  long  as  the  hand  is  raised. 

S  The  hand  is  not  kept  to  the  headdress  until  the  salute  is  acknowl- 
edged by  the  officer — the  hand  should  ahvays  be  kept  raised  until  the 
salute  has  been  acknowledged,  or  it  is  evident  the  officer  has  not  seen  the 
saluter. 


MILITARY  COURTESY. 


169 


4  When  standing  the  heels  are  not  brought  to- 
gether liefore  saluting — tlie  heels  should  always  he 
hrought  together. 

5  The  salute  is  often  rendered  in  an  indifferent, 
lax  manner — the  salute  should  always  he  rendered  witli 
life.  siKif^  and  vim;  the  soldier  should  alzvays  render  a 
salute  as  if  he  MEANT  IT. 

Is  it  uumilitary  to  salute  zvith  iJie  other  hand  in 
the  pocket,  or  a  cigar,  cigarette  or  pipe  in  the  mouth  f 

Yes ;  it  is  most  unmilitary  and  a  soldier  who  so 
salutes  is  sure  to  be  reprimanded  or  punished. 

Should  officers  be  saluted  zvhen  in  civilian  clothing F 
Yes;  they  are  saluted  whether  in  uniform  or  not. 
Do  enlisted  men  in  civilian  clothing  salute? 
Yes;  and  they  salute  whether  the  officer  is  in  uni- 
form or  not. 

//  an  officer  is  accompanied  by  a  lady  that  the  sol- 
dier knows,  should  the  soldier  remove  . 
his  cap  or  render  the  military  salute? 
He  should  render  the  military 
salute.  A  soldier  never  tips  his  hat 
to  an  officer,  it  matters  not  by  whom 
the  soldier  or  officer  may  be  accompanied. 

How  does  the  enlisted  man,  armed  witJi  the  saber 
or  rifle,  out  of  ranks,  salute? 

He  salutes  with  the  saber,  if  drawn ;  otherwise 
with  the  hand.  If  on  foot,  and  armed  with  the  rifle, 
he  renders  the  prescribed  rifle  salute.  What  has  been 
said  about  distances,  raising  the  hand,  looking  toward 
the  person  saluted,  etc.,  in  the  case  of  the  hand  salute, 
also  applies  when  the  salute  is  rendered  with  saber  or 
rifle. 

When  does  a  soldier  salute  zvith  the  "present 
arms?" 

Only  when  on  post  as  a  sentinel.  At  all  other 
times  when  armed  with  the  rifle,  he  gives  the  pre- 
scribed rifle  salute. 

Do  prisoners  under  charge  of  sentinels  salute 
officers? 


This  soldier  is  hear- 
ing something  that's 
"making  a  noise"  like 
a  Summary  Court. 


170 


CHAPTER  XII. 


No,  sir;  they  do  not.     They  merely  stand  at  attention.     It  is  custom- 
ary for  paroled  prisoners  and  others  who  are  not  under  the  immediate 
charge  of  sentinels,  to  fold  their,  arms  when  passing  or  addressing  officers. 
What  should  a  mounted  soldier  do  before  addressing  an  officer  who 
is  not  mounted^ 

He  should  always  dismount. 

//  accompanying  an  officer,  where  should  a  soldier  walk? 
About  two  paces  to  the  officer's  left  and   rear.     If   riding  this  dis- 
tance is  about  doubled. 

Hozv  do  noncommissioned  officers  or  privates  in  command  of  de- 
taclunents,  salute  officers? 

If  marching,  and  if  the  detachment  is  not  at  attention,  it  is  called 
to  attention  as  the  officer  approaches,  and  the  command  "i.  EYES"  is 
given  in  time  to  add  "2.  RIGHT  (or  LEFT)"  when  about  six  paces  from 
the  officer,  at  which  time  the  noncommissioned  officer  or  private  in  com- 
mand of  the  detachment  salutes — if  unarmed,  with  the  hand ;  if  armed 
with  the  rifle  or  saber,  the  prescribed  rifle  or  saber  salute  is  rendered. 
The  command  "FRONT"  is  given  when  the  officer  has  passed. 

.  If    the    detachment    is    in    column    at    a    halt,    the 

^^Kt  salute    is    rendered    as    described,    except    that    "EYES 

P>i  *  RIGHT  (or  LEFT)"  is  omitted.     Only  the  commander 

salutes. 

If  the  detachment  is  halted  in  line,  and  armed, 
arms  are  presented. 

Unarmed   troops    salute   as    prescribed    for   armed 
bodies,  except  that  when  halted  the  present  is  omitted. 
What  should   he   done  when  an    officer  passes  in 
rear  of  troops? 

They  are  brought  to  attention  and  so  kept  until 
the  officer  has  passed,  but  no  salute  is  rendered. 

Do  troops  under  arms  salute  other  armed  bodies? 
Yes;  the  same  as  they  salute  officers.     The  junior 
commander,  if  known,  salutes  first. 

//  an  enlisted  man  is  seated,  what  should  he  do 
upon  the  approach  of  an  officer? 

He  should  rise,  face  toward  the  officer,  and  sa- 
lute. If  standing,  he  faces  the  officer  for  the  same  pur- 
pose. H  the  officer  remains  in  the  same  place  or  upon 
the  same  ground,  such  compliment  need  not  be  re- 
peated. 


MILITARY  COURTESY. 


171 


//  indoors,  what  should  an  enlisted  man  do  upon  the  approach  of 
an  officer? 

If  unarmed,  he  uncovers  and  stands  at  attention  ;  he  does  not  salute 
unless  he  addresses  or  is  addressed  by  the  officer. 

A  soldier  with  side  arms,    (pistol,   saber   or  bayonet)    is   considered   armed. 

If   armed    with   the    rifle,   and    either   covered    or   uncovered,    he    sa- 
lutes from  the  position  of  the  order  or  the  trail.    If  un- 
covered, he  should,  if  practicable,  cover  before  saluting.l 

It  is  customary  to  salute  from  the  order,  unless  there  is 
mud  or  fdth  on  the  floor. 

Do  soldiers  actually  at  luorh  cease  work  to  salute 
an   officer? 

No;  not  unless  addressed  by  him. 

What  should  a  soldier  always  do  before  address- 
ing an  officer? 

He  should  always  salute  with  the  weapon  he  is 
armed  with;  or,  if  unarmed,  whether  covered  or  un- 
covered, with  the  hand.  He  also  makes  the  same 
salute  after  receiving  a  reply,  or  when  leaving  the 
ofificer. 

What    should    lie    do    zvhen    addressed    by    an 
officer? 

He  should  salute.  He  also  salutes  at  the  end  of 
the  conversation. 

When  an  officer  enters  a  room  where  there  are 
soldiers,  zvhat  should  be  done? 

The  word  "ATTENTION"  is  given  by  someone 
who  perceives  him,  when  all  rise  and  remain   standing 

1  The  Army  Regulations  says:  "Indoors,  an  unarmed  enlisted  man  uncovers  and 
stands  at  attention  upon  the  approach  of  an  ofificer ;  he  does  not  salute  unless  he 
addresses  or  is  addressed  by  the  ofificer."  According  to  custom,  the  term  "indoors"  is 
interpreted  as  meaning  military  ofifices,  barracks,  quarters  and  similar  places — it  does 
not  mean  such  places  as  stores,  storehouses,  riding  halls,  stables,  post  exchange  build- 
ings, hotels,  places  of  amusement,  depots  and  exhibition  halls,  etc.  In  such  places 
an  unarmed  soldier  remains  either  covered  or  uncovered,  according  to  the  custom  of 
the  place,  and  whether  or  not  he  salutes  depends  upon  circumstances,  the  occasion  for 
saluting  being  determined  by  common  sense  and  military  spirit. 

For  instance,  an  enlisted  man  riding  in  a  street  car,  or  in  the  act  of  purchasing 
goods  in  a  store,  or  eating  in  a  hotel,  would  not  salute  unless  addressed  by  the  ofhcer. 
However,  in  the  case  of  a  soldier  occupying  a  seat  in  a  crowded  street  car,  if  he 
recognized  a  person  standing  to  be  an  ofificer,  it  would  be  but  an  act  of  military  courtesy 
for  him  to  rise,  salute  and  offer  the  officer  his  seat. 


W^ 


^ 


172 


CHAPTER  XII. 


in  the  position  of  a  soldier  until  the  officer  leaves  the  room.     If  unarmed, 
they  uncover  and  no  man  salutes  unless  spoken  to ;  if  armed,  they  salute. 

However,  soldiers  at  meals  do  not  rise — they  merely  cease  eating 
and  remain  at  attention.  But  if  any  man  were  addressed  by  the  officer, 
he  would  rise  and  salute. 

When  an  officer  approaches  a  number  of  enlisted  men  out  of  doors 
and  not  in  ranks,  what  should  he  done? 

The  word  "ATTENTION"  should  be  given  by  someone  who  per- 
ceives him,  when  all  stand  at  attention  and  all  salute. i  It  is  customary  for 
all  to  salute  at  or  about  the  same  instant,  taking  the  time  from  the  soldier 
nearest  the  officer,  and  who  salutes  when  the  officer  is  six  paces  from  him. 

//  several  soldiers  are  walking  together,  what  should 
he  done  upon  the  approach  of  an  officer f 

The  word  "ATTENTION"  should  be  given  by 
someone  who  perceives  him,  and  all  should  salute  as 
described  in  the  preceding  answer,  without  hailing. 
Should  a  soldier  riding  in  a  wagon  salute f 
Yes;  but  if  seated  he  would  salute  without  rising. 
There  is  no  more  reason  why  a  soldier  riding  in  a 
wagon  or  carriage  should  not  salute  than  there  is  why 
a  soldier  on  horse  back  should  not  salute. 

Should  a  soldier  who  is  driving  a  wagon  or  car- 
riage salute? 

Yes,  if  both  hands  are  not  necessarily  occupied. 
There  is  no  more  reason  why  a  soldier  driving  a  wagon 
or  a  carriage  should  not  salute  than  there  is  why  he 
should  not  speak  to  passing  friends  or  raise  his  cap  to 
lady  acquaintances.  In  either  case  it  is  merely  a  ques- 
tion of  courtesy. 

(This  Chapter,  Chapter  XII,  "Military  Courtes3^" 
Chapter  XIII,  "Guard  Duty,"  Chapter  XVII,  "Care  of 
the  Health  and  First  Aid  to  the  Sick  and  Injured,"  and 
Chapter  XVIII,  "The  Use,  Description  and  Management  of  the  Rifle," 
are  published  in  their  entirety  as  parts  of  "PRIVATES'  MANUAL." 
Price,  50  cts.  a  copy.  A  liberal  discount  on  quantity.  General  Agent  for 
U.  S. :  The  U.  S.  Infantry  Association,  Washington,  D.  C. ;  for  the  Philip- 
pines, The  Post  Exchange,  Fort  Wm.  McKinley). 


Who     said,     "Extra 
squad   drill,   eh?" 


1  In  some  regiments  it  is  customary  for  only  one  (a  noncommissioned  officer, 
if  there  be  one  present)  to  salute  for  the  group,  but  this  is  contrary  to  Regulations 
and  should  not  be  done. 


GUARD  DUTY.  173 


CHAPTER  XIII. 
GUARD  DUTY 

(See  corresponding  cliapier  in   Supplement  for  additional  matter  and  changes,  if  any.) 

A  Guard  duty  is  one  of  the  soldier's  most  important  duties,  and  in 
all  armies  of  the  world  the  manner  in  which  it  is  performed  is  an  index 
to  the  discipline  of  the  command  and  the  manner  in  which  other  duties 
are  performed. 

Upon  the  guard's  vigilance  and  readiness  for  action  depend  not  only 
the  enforcement  of  military  law  and  orders,  but  also  the  safety  and  pro- 
tection of  the  post  and  the  quelling  of  sudden  disorder,  perhaps  even 
mutiny. 

The  importance  of  guard  duty  is  increased  durhig  times  of  war,  when 
the  very  safety  of  the  army  depends  upon  the  vigilance  of  the  sentinels, 
who  are  required  to  watch  that  others  may  sleep  and  thus  refresh  them- 
selves from  the  labors  of  the  day.  The  sentinels  are  the  guardians  of 
the  repose,  quiet  and  safety  of  the  camp. 

Respect  for  Sentinels. 
•B  Respect  for  the  person  and  office  of  a  sentinel  is  as  strictly  enjoined 
by  military  law  as  that  required  to  be  paid  to  an  officer.  As  it  is  expressed 
in  the  Manual  of  Guard  Duty,  "All  persons  of  whatever  rank  in  the  service 
are  required  to  observe  respect  toward  sentinels".  Invested  as  the  private 
soldier  frequently  is,  while  on  his  post,  with  a  grave  responsibility,  it 
is  proper  that  he  should  be  fully  protected  in  the  discharge  of  his  duty. 
To  permit  anj'-one,  of  whatever  rank,  to  molest  or  interfere  with  him 
while  thus  employed,  without  becoming  liable  to  severe  penalty,  would 
clearly  establish  a  precedent  highly  prejudicial  to  the  interests  of  the 
service.     (Davis'  Military  Law). 

Duty  of  sentinels. 
C  A  sentinel,  in  respect  to  the  duties  with  which  he  is  charged,  repre- 
sents the  superior  military  authority  of  the  command  to  which  he  belongs, 
and  whose  orders  he  is  required  to  enforce  on  or  in  the  vicinity  of  his 
post.  As  such  he  is  entitled  to  the  respect  and  obedience  of  all  persons 
who  come  within  the  scope  of  operation  of  the  orders  which  he  is  required 
to  carry  into  effect.    Over  military  persons  the  authority  of  the  sentinel  is 


174  CHAPTER  XIII. 

absolute,  and  disobedience  of  his  orders  on  the  jjart  of  such  persons  consti 
tutes   a   most   serious   military   offence   and   is   prejudicial   in    the   highest 
degree  to  the  interests  of  discipline.  (Davis'  Military  Law). 

Privates  of  the  Guard. 

Is  a  member  of  the  guard  allowed  to  remove  his  accoutrements  or 
clothing,  or  to  leave  the  immediate  vicinity  of  the  gaurd  house  without 
permission? 

He  is  not. 

From  whom  should  he  get  the  necessary  permission? 

From  the  commander  of  the  guard. 

During  his  tour  of  guard  duty  to  whose  orders  is  a  soldier  subject? . 

To  the  orders  of  the  commanding  officer,  the  officer  of  the  day,  the 
officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  of  the  guard  only. 

//  a  sentinel  should  receive  an  order  from  an  officer  who  is  not 
authorized  to  give  him  orders,  what  should  he  do? 

He  should  at  once  call  for  the  corporal  of  the  guard  and  report  the 
fact  to  him.  H  directed  by  the  corporal  to  obey  the  order,  the  sentinel 
will  do  so ;  otherwise  he  will  not. 

Does  a  member  of  the  guard  salute  when  not  engaged  in  the  perform- 
ance of  a  specific  duty? 

Yes,  if  the  proper  execution  of  a  duty  does  not  prevent  it,  he  will 
salute  all  officers  that  pass. 

Whenever  the  guard  or  relief  is  dismissed,  what  does  each  man  do 
with  his  rifle? 

He  will  place  his  rifle  in  the  armracks  and  not  remove  it  therefrom 
unless  he  requires  it  in  the  performance  of  some  duty. 

After  a  private  has  been  assigned  to  a  relief  and  a  post  what  must 
he  take  care  to  do? 

To  remember  the  number  of  his  relief  and  the  number  of  his  post 
and  under  no  circumstances  to  change  from  one  relief  or  post  to  another 
relief  or  post. 

When  the  guard  is  formed,  what  does  a  member  of  the  guard  do? 

He  will  fall  in  promptly,  in  his  proper  place,  with  his  rifle. 

When  the  roll  is  called,  what  does  lie  do? 

As  his  name  or  his  number  and  relief  are  called,  he  answers 
"Here",   and   comes   to   order   arms. 

What  does  a  member  of  the  guard  do  when  his  relief  is  formed? 

At  the  command  "1.  (Such)  relief,  2.  Fall  in",  he  falls  in  at  once, 

/ 


GUARD  DUTY.  175 

in  his  proper  place  according  to  his  number,  2,  4,  6,  and  so  on  in  the 
front  rank,  and  1,  3,  5,  and  so  on  in  the  rear  rank,  or  in  the  order  of 
their  respective  posts  from  right  to  left,  according  as  the  relief  is  in 
double  or  single  rank.  At  the  command,  "Call  off",  commencing  on 
the  right  the  men  call  off  alternately  rear  and  front  rank,  "one",  "two", 
"three",  etc;  if  in  single  rank  they  call  off  from  right  to  left. 

May  a  soldier  hire  another  to  do  his  duty  for  himf 

No,   sir;   under  no  circumstances. 

Should  a  soldier  be  found  drunk  while  on  guard  duty,  what  punish- 
ment will  he  suffer? 

This  is  considered  a  very  serious  offence  and  the  offender  will 
suffer  such  punishment  as  a  courtmartial  may  direct. 

ORDERS  FOR  SENTINELS  ON   POST 

A  Orders  for  sentinels  on  post  are  divided  into  two  classes, general 
orders  and  special  orders.  • 

Special  orders  define  the  duties  to  be  performed  by  a  sentinel  on  a 
particular  post,  and  are  prescribed  by  the  commanding  officer.  The 
number  and  limits  of  his  post  invariable  constitute  part  of  the  special 
orders  of  every  sentinel  on  post. 

General  orders  are  those  that  apply  to  all  posts  in  the  Army  and 
they  are  prescribed  by  the  War  Department. 

Sentinels  are  required  to  memorize  the  following : 

My  general  duties  are: 

To  take  charge  of  this  post  and  all  Government  property  in  view; 

To  walk  my  post  in  a  military  manner,  keeping  constantly  on  the 
alert,  observing  everything  that  takes  place  within  sight  or  hearing; 

To  report  every  breach  of  orders  or  regulations  that  I  am  in- 
structed to  enforce; 

To  repeat  all  calls  from  posts  more  distant  from  the  guardhouse 
than  my  own; 

To  quit  my  post  only  when  properly  relieved; 

To  receive,  transmit,  and  obey  all  orders  from  and  allow  myselt 
to  be  relieved  by  the  commanding  officer,  officer  of  the  day,  an  officer 
or  noncommissioned  officer  of  the  guard  only; 

To  hold  conversation  with  no  one  except  in  the  proper  discharge 
of  my  duty; 

In  case  of  fire  or  disorder  to  give  the  alarm; 

To  allow  no  one  to  commit  nuisance  in  the  vicinity  of  my  post; 


176  CHAPTER  XIII. 

In  any  case  net  covered  by  instrjctions,  to  call  the  corporal  of 
the  guard; 

To  salute  all  officers  and  cclcrs  or  standards  not  cased; 

At   night    to    exercise    the    greatest    vigilance.      Between    retreat 

(cr o'clock,    naming-    the    hour    designated    by    the    commanding 

officer)  and  broad  daylight,   (cr  o'clock,  naming  the  hour  desicr- 

nated  by  the  commanding  officer),  challenge  all  persons  seen  on  or 
near  my  post,  and  allow  no  person  to  pass  without  proper  authority. 

In  addition  to  the  foregoing,  sentinels  posted  at  the  guardhouse 
or  guard  tent  will  be  required  to  memorize  the  following : 

For  the  orders  of  a  sentinel  on  outpost  duty,  see  254  A. 

Between  reveille  and  retreat,  to  turn  out  the  guard  for  all 
persons  entitled  to  the  compliment,  for  all  colors  or  standards  not 
cased,  and  for  all  armed  parties  approaching  my  post,  except  troops 
at  drill  and  reliefs  or  detachments  of  the  guard. 

At  night,  after  challenging  any  person  cr  party,  to  advance  no 
one  but  call  the  corporal  of  the  guard,  repeating  the  answer  to  the 
challenge. 

What  is  meant  by  taking  charge  of  a  post  and  all  Government 
property  in  view? 

A  sentinel  on  post  represents  the  Government,  and  he  is  placed  there 
to  look  after  its  interest.  A  sentinel's  post  is  not  merely  the  line  on 
which  he  walks,  but  extends  to  the  next  posts  on  either  end.  Not  only 
is  the  sentinel  required  to  look  after  all  property  on  his  post,  but  he  is  also 
required  to  see  that  all  Government  property  in  the  immediate  neighbor- 
hood suffers  no  injury  of  any  kind. 

Explain  the  vicaning  of,  and  the  reasons  for,  the  second  general 
order. 

"To  walk  my  post  in  a  military  manner",  means  to  maintain  the 
bearing  and  appearance  of  a  soldier,  keeping  the  uniform  orderly  and 
clean  and  avoiding  careless  or  slouchy  movements.  The  reason  for  this 
is  that  a  sentinel  on  post  usually  occupies  a  position  where  he  is  generally 
seen  by  the  officers  and  soldiers  of  his  own  organization  as  well  as  by 
those  of  others  and  by  civilians,  and  under  such  conditions,  a  sentine' 
walking  his  post  in  a  careless  and  slouchy  manner  would  be  an  unmilitary 
performance  that  would  naturally  create  a  most  unfavorable  impression, 
even,  in  some  cases,  to  the  extent  of  bringing  scorn  and  discredit  upon 
the   entire  command. 

"On  the  alert"  means  on  the  lookout  or  watch  against  attack  or 
danger;  ready  to  act,  and  "Keeping  constantly  on  the  alert,  observing 


GUARD  DUTY.  177 

everything  that  takes  place  within  sight  or  hearing"  means  that  the 
sentinel  shall  keep  his  mind  all  the  time  upon  his  duty  and  not  fall  into 
any  day-dreams.  In  this  manner  he  may  often  observe  things  that  would 
otherwise  pass  unnoticed,  and  though  they  may  seem  to  him  to  have  no 
bearing  upon  his  duty,  yet  from  the  answers  of  an  alert  sentinel  an  officer 
may  sometimes  obtain   valuable  information. 

What  is  meant  by  "Breach  of  orders  or  regulations"? 

A  "Breach  of  orders  or  regulations"  means  the  breaking  or  violating 
of  orders  or  regulations. 

What   is   meant   by   "Quitting   post"    and   by   "Properly    relieved"? 

"Quitting  post"  means  to  leave,  to  go  away  from  a  post. 

"Properly  relieved"  means  to  be  relieved  by  someone  who  has  the 
authority  to  relieve  a  sentinel,  that  is  to  say,  the  commanding  officer,  the 
officer  of  the  day,  an  officer  or  noncommissioned  officer  of  the  guard,  only. 

What  is  the  punishment  for  a  sentinel  leaving  his  post  before  being 
properly  relieved? 

This  is  considered  a  very  serious  offence  and  may  be  punished  by 
death  or  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

What  does  "Transmit  orders"  mean? 

It  means  to  turn  over  orders  to  the  next  sentinel. 

Explain  zvhat  is  meant   by   "Disorder"? 

A  disorder  is  a  disturbance,  or  breach  of  public  order  of  any  kind, 
such  as  loud  and  boisterous  conduct  on  the  part  of  a  drunken  man,  or  two 
or  more  men  fighting  or  otherwise  misbehaving  themselves,  etc. 

What  is  meant  by  "Nuisance"  and  by  "Vicinity"? 

"Nuisance"  means  anything  that  is  disagreeable  or  offensive  or 
that  annoys   or   worries,   such   as  urinating,   etc. 

"Vicinity"  means  near  or  close  to. 

What  are  "Colors"  and  "Standards"  and  when  are  they  "Cased"? 

Colors  are  the  national  flag  and  the  regimental  flag  carried  by 
the  Infantry  and  other  foot  troops. 

Standards  are  the  national  flag  and  the  regimental  flag  carried 
by  the  Cavalry  and  Field  Artillery;  they  are  smaller  than  those  carried 
by  the   Infantry. 

Colors  and  Standards  are  "Cased"  when  they  are  rolled  and 
covered  with  a  water-proof  case. 

Explain  the  meaning  of  "To   exercise   the   greatest   vigilance". 

It  means  to  use  the  greatest  watchfulness,  to  be  on  the  keenest- 
lookout. 

Upon  reaching  the  end  of  his  post  is  a  sentinel  required  to  halt  and 


178  CHAPTER  XIII. 

change  the  position  of  his  rifle,  or  to  execute  to  the  rear  march,  pre- 
cisely as  prescribed  in  tlie  drill  regulations? 

No,  sir;  he  faces  about  while  marching  in  the  way  most  con- 
venient to  him,  and  either  to  the  right-about  or  left-about. 

Must  he  always  go  to  the  end  of  his  post  before  turning? 

No,  sir ;  he  may  turn  at  any  part  of  his  post,  as  may  be  best  suited 
to  the  proper  performance  of  his  duties. 

Hew  may  a  sentinel  carry  his  rifle? 

On  either  shoulder,  and  in  wet  or  severe  weather,  when  not  in  a 
sentry  box,  he  may  carry  it  at  a  secure. 

How  do  sentinels  stand  in  sentry  boxes? 

At  ease. 

When  are  sentry  boxes  used? 

Only  in  wet  weather,  or  at  other  times  when  specially  authorizcl 
by  the  commanding  officer. 

May  sentinels  ever  stand  at  ease  en  their  posts? 

Yes,  sir;  in  very  hot  weather,  provided  they  can  in  this  positioi 
effectively  discharge  their  duties.  However,  they  will  never  take  advantage 
of  this  privelege  without  the  express  authority  of  the  commander  of  the 
guard  or  the  officer  of  the  day. 

II  hen  calling  for  any  purpose,  challenging,  or  Jiolding  cininninicatiou 
zvith  airy  person.  In  zv  docs  a  sentinel  hold  his  weapon? 

A  dismounted  ser.tinel,  armed  with  the  rifle  or  saber,  takes  the  posi- 
tion of  port  arms  or  saber.  At  night  a  dismounted  sentinel  armed  with 
pistol,  takes  the  position  of  raise  pistol  in  challenging  or  holding  communi- 
cation. 

A  mounted  sentir.el  in  the  daytime  does  not  ordinarily  draw  his 
weapon  in  calling  or  in  holding  communication,  but,  if  drawn,  he  hold.-^ 
it  at  advance  rifle,  raise  pistol,  or  port  saber,  according  as  he  is  armed 
with  the  rifle,  pistol  or  saber. 

At  night,  in  challenging  and  in  holding  communication,  he  has  his 
weapon  at  advance  rifle,  raise  pistol,  or  port  saber,  according  as  he  is 
armed. 

May  a  uicuntcd  scniincl  disnu  nut  while  <  n  duty  i/.v  (/  sentinel? 

No,  sir;  not  without  authority. 

Should  a  sentinel  ever  quit  his  piece? 

Only  on  an  explicit  order  from  the  commanding  officer,  officer  ot 
the  day,  an  officer  or  nt)ncommissioncd  officer  of  the  guard.  Under  no 
circumstances  should  he  ever  yeald  it  to  anyone  else. 


GUARD  DUTY.  179 

(Note:  Unless  necessity  therefor  exists,  no  person  should  require 
a  sentinel  to  quit  his  piece,  even  to  inspect  it). 

What  sJiould  a  sentinel  do  zcitJi  suspicions  persons  seen  prowling 
about  Jiis  post,  with  parties  to  a  disorder  occurring  on  or  near  his  post 
and  with  unauthorised  persons  who  attempt  to  enter  camp  at  night? 

He  will  arrest  them  and  turn  them  over  .to  the  corporal  of  the  guard. 

What  should  a  sentinel  do  in  case  he  should  notice  anytliing  unusual 
or  suspicious? 

He  should  at  once  call  for  the  corporal  of  the  guard  and  report  the 
facts  to  him. 

If,  by  reason  of  sickness  or  other  cause,  it  becomes  necessary  for  a 
sentinel  to  call  for  relief,  how  would  he  do  so? 

"Corporal  of  the  guard.   No. ;  Relief,"  giving  the  number  of 

his  post. 

How  does  a  sentinel  call  for  the  corporal  of  the  guard  for  any  other 
purpose  than   relief? 

"Corporal  of  the  guard,  No. ",  adding  the  number  of  his  post 

In  no  case  will  the  sentinel  call,  "Never  mind  the  corporal";  nor 
will   the   corporal   heed   such   a  call,  if  given. 

//  a  sentinel  is  to  be  relieved,  what  does  Jie  do  on  tJie  approach  of 
the  relief? 

When  the  relief  is  thirty  paces  from  him,  he  halts  and  faces  toward 
the  relief  with  arms  at  right  shoulder.  He  comes  to  port  arms  with  the 
new  sentinel.  He  then  gives  in  a  low  voice,  in  detail,  his  instructions  to 
the  new  sentinel.  At  the  command  "Post",  both  sentinels  resume  the 
right  shoulder,  face  toward  the  new  corporal  and  step  back  so  as  to  allow 
the  relief  to  pass  in  front  of  them.  The  new  corporal  then  commands. 
1.  Forward,  2,  March;  the  old  sentinel  takes  his  place  in  rear  of  the 
relief  as  it  passes  him,  his  piece  in  the  same  position  as  those  of  the 
relief.  The  new  sentinel  stands  fast  at  right  shoulder  until  the  relief 
has  passed  six  paces  beyond  him,  when  he  begins  to  w^alk  his  post. 

ORDERS  FOR  SENTINELS  EXCEPT  THOSE  AT  THE  POST 

OF  THE  GUARD 

What  should  a  sentinel,  except  the  one  at  the  post  of  the  guard,  do 
in  case  of  fire? 

He  should  call,  "Fire,  No. ",  adding  the  number  of  his  post;  if 

possible,  he  should  extinguish  the  fire  by  his  own  efforts.  If  the  danger  be 
great,  he  will  discharge  his  piece  before  calling. 


180  CHAPTER  XIII. 

What  should  be  done  in  the  case  of  a  fire  in  a  stable? 

First  the  proper  alarm  given ;  then  the  door  toward  the  wind  closed, 
immediately  after  which  the  sentinel  should  begin  to  take  the  horses  oui", 
commencing  with  those  nearest  the  fire.  If  the  fire  is  not  burning  fast, 
the  horses  are  turned  into  one  of  the  corrals,  not  near  the  fire,  or  they 
are  tied  to  the  picket  line ;  for,  if  merely  turned  loose  they  are  liable  to  run 
back  into  the  fire.  If  a  horse  refuses  to  lead  out  or  away  from  the  fire, 
his  head  should  be  covered  with  a  sack,  coat  or  something  else  and  he 
should  then  be  led  out.  If  the  fire  is  making  such  headway  that  there  is 
not  time  to  take  the  horses  out,  the  sentinel  should  then  merely  loosen 
them  all  and  trust  to  their  getting  out. 

What  should  a  sentinel,  except  the  one  at  the  post  of  the  guard,  do 
in  case_  of  disorder? 

Call,  "The  guard,  No. ",  adding  the  number  of  his  post.     If 

the   disorder   be   great,   he   will   fire   his   piece   before   calling. 

NIGHT  ORDERS 

Between  retreat  (or  the  hour  designated  by  the  commanding  officer) 
and  broad  daylight  (or  the  hour  designated  by  tJie  commanding  officer), 
what  slwuld  a  sentinel  do,  if  he  should  see  any  person  or  party  on  or 
near  his  post? 

He  should  advance  rapidly  along  his  post  toward  such  person  or 
party  and  when  within  about  thirty  paces,  challenge  sharply,  "Halt, 
who  is  there?"  The  sentinel  will  take  care  to  place  himself  in 
the  best  position  to  receive  or,  if  necessary,  arrest  the  person  or 
party. 

How  is  a  mounted  party  challenged? 

"Halt,  Dismount.     Who  is  there"? 

To  whom  may  a  sentinel  make  known  the  countersign? 

Only  the  sentinel  who  relieves  him,  or  to  a  person  from  whom  he 
properly  receives  orders — that  is  to  say  the  commanding  officer,  the 
officer  of  the  day,  or  an  officer  or  noncommissioned  officer  of  the  guard. 

What  is  the  penalty  for  making  known  the  countersign  to  a  person 
who  is  not  entitled  to  receive  it? 

Death,  or  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

Are  privates  of  the  guard  allowed  to  use  the  countersign  when  not 
posted  as  sentinels? 

No,  sir;  this  is  strictly  forbidden.     They  are  authorized  to  use  the 


GUARD  DUTY.  181 

countersign  only  in  the  performance  of  their  duties  while  posted  as 
sentinels. 

How  near  should  a  sentinel  permit  a  person  to  approach  before 
recognising  such   person   or  receiving   the   countersign? 

He  should  not  permit  any  one  to  approach  so  close  as  to  prevent  the 
proper  use  of  his  own  weapon  before  recognizing  the  person  or  receiving 
the  countersign. 

The  usual  distance  is  about  ten  feet.  It  should  never  be  less,  and  in 
the  case  of  mounted  parties  it  should  be  more. 

When  two  or  more  persons  approach  in  one  party,  how  are  they 
challenged  and  advanced?    Illustrate  with  "Friends". 

Sentinel:     "Halt,  Who  is  there"? 

Answer  by  one  of  party:     "Friends". 

Sentinel:  "Advance  one  to  be  recognized". 

Sentinel    (after   recognizing  party) :    "Advance    friends". 

H  one  or  more  of  the  party  are  entitled  to  the  salute,  the  sentinel 
will  then  salute. 

What  must  a  sentinel  always  do  before  passing  a  person? 

He  must  satisfy  himself  beyond  a  reasonable  doubt  that  the  person  is 
what  he  represents  himself  to  be  and  that  he  has  a  right  to  pass. 

//  the  sentinel  be  not  satisfied,  what  should  he  do? 

He  should  cause  the  person  to  stand,  and  the  sentinel  should  call 
the  corporal  of  the  guard. 

//  the  coiuinanding  officer,  the  officer  of  the  day,  or  some  other  person 
who  is  supposed  to  have  the  countersign,  can  not  give  it  or  gives  an 
incorrect  one,  zvJiat  should  the  sentinel  do? 

He  should  hold  the  person  and  call   the  corporal  of  the  guard. 

//  tzvo  or  more  parties  approach  a  sentinel's  post  from  different 
directions  at  the  same  time,  zvhat  does  the  sentinel  do? 

They  are  challenged  in  turn  and  then  advanced  according  to  rank, 
the  senior  first.  For  example,  if  the  answer  to  the  first  challenge  were 
"Friend",  to  the  second  "Officer  of  the  Day"  and  the  third  "Commanding 
Officer",  the  sentinel  would  advance  them  in  this  order :  Commanding 
Officer,  Officer  of  the  Day  and  friend. 

A  "Friend  with  the  countersign"  would  be  advanced  before  "Friend". 

//  after  having  advanced  one  party,  any  of  the  others  should  attempt 
to  move  azvay,  zvhat  should  the  sentinel  do? 

Halt  them,  and  call  the  corporal  of  the  guard. 


182  CHAPTER.  XIII. 


'I? 


Would  the  sentinel  advance  the  Officer  of  the  Day  while  the  Com- 
manding Officer  ivas  in  conununication  with  him,  the  sentinel? 

No,  sir;  not  unless  told  to  do  so  by  the  Commanding  Officer.  If 
not  told  to  do  so,  he  would  wait  until,  the  Commanding  Officer  left. 

//  a  sentinel  be  in  communication  zvitli  a  party  already  advanced  and 
another  party  should  approach,  wliat  should  the  sentinel  do? 

,  He  will  at  once  challenge  the  approaching  part}'-  and  if  the  party  chal- 
lenged be  senior  to  the  party  already  on  his  post,  the  sentinel  will  advance 
such  party  at  once.  Otherwise,  the  sentinel  will  not  advance  the  party 
unless  told  to  do  so  by  the  senior,  or  until  the  senior  leaves. 

Should  a  sentinel  who  has  advanced  a  junior  and  a  senior,  speak  to 
the  junior  while  the  senior  is  still  on   his  post? 

He  should  first  get  the  permission  of  the  senior  before  addressing 
the  junior.  ' 

What  order  of  rank  should  be  observed  in  advancing  different 
persons? 

1.  Commanding   Officer; 

2.  Off.cer   of    the    Day ; 

3.  Officer  of   the   Guard ; 

4.  Officers ; 

5.  Patrols; 

6.  Reliefs ; 

7.  Noncommissioned  officers  of  the  guard  in  order  of  rank; 

8.  Friends. 

JVhat  persons  are  advanced  zvitli  the  countersign? 

All  persons  who  announce  themselves  as  having  the  countersign, 
such  as  "Officer  with  the  countersign",  "Friend  with  the  countersign", etc., 
and  all  persons  whose  answer  to  the  challenge  indicate  that  they  are 
entitled  to  the  use  of  the  countersign.  For  example,  the  Commanding 
Officer,  the  Offifficer  of  the  Day,  the  Officer  of  the  Guard,  Patrols,  Reliefs, 
and    Noncommissioned    Officers    of    the   Guard. 

JVhat  is  a   countersign? 

It  is  a  word  given  daily  from  the  principal  headquarters  of  a  com- 
mand to  aid  guards  and  sentinels  in  identifying  persons  who  may  be 
authorized  to  pass  at  night. 

The  countersign  is  usually  the  name  of  a  battle. 

JVhat  is  a  parole?    . 

It  is  a  word  used  as  a  check  on  the  countersign  in  order  to  obtain 
more    accurate    identification.      It    is    imi)artc(l    only    to    those    who    arc 


GUARD  DUTY.  183 

entitled  to  inspect  guards  and  to  commanders  of  guards. 

The  parole  is  usually  the  name  of  a  general  or  some  other 
distinguished  person. 

//  no  countersign  be  used,  hozv  does  a  sentinel  advance  the  Com- 
manding Officer,  tJie  Officer  of  the  Day  and  others  who  are  entitled  to 
the  use  of  the  countersign? 

They  are  advanced  in  accordance  with  the  rules  just  given, 
except  that  instead  of  sajnng,  "Advance  (so  and  so)  with  the  counter- 
sign," the  sentinel  will  say,  "Advance  (so  and  so)  to  be  recognized". 
Upon  recognition  the  sentinel  will  say,  "Advance  (so  and  so)". 

About  what  tzvo  things  shculd  a  sentinel  always  be  most  careful? 

Never  to  allow  himself  to  be  surprised,  nor  to  permit  two  or  more 
parties  to  advance  upon  him  at  the  same  time. 

What  is  meant  by  "Calling  the  hours"? 

Between  the  time  when  challenging  begins  and  reveille,  when 
not  in  the  presence  of  the  enemy,  sentinels  may  be  require-d  to  call 
the  hours.  They  call  successively  in  the  numerical  order  of  their 
posts,  beginning  at  the  guardhouse,  each  one  giving  the  number  of 
his  post,  repeating  the  hour  and  then  adding  "All's  well".  Thus. 
"No.  2,  Half  past  ten  o'clock.  All's  well".  The  call  should  be  made  in 
a  clear  and  distinct  manner,  without  unduly  prolonging  the  words. 

In  case  any  sentinel  fails  to  call  off,  what  should  the  one  next 
preceding  him  do? 

He  should  repeat  the  call,  and  if  it  is  not  taken  up  within  a  reasonable 
time,  he  should  call  the  corporal  of  the  guard  and  report  the  facts. 

What  punishment  ■z^.'ill  be  given  a  sentinel  zclio  is  found  sleeping 
upon   his  post? 

This  is  a  most  serious  offence  and  is  punishable  with  death  or  such 
other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

What  punishment  ivill  be  given  a  member  of  the  guard  u'ho  quits 
his  guard? 

Such  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

ORDERS  FOR  SENTINELS  AT  THE  POST  OF  THE  GUARD. 

Between  what  hours  does  tlie  sentinel  at  the  post  of  the  guard  turn 
out  the  guard  at  the  approach  of  persons  entitled  to  the  compliment? 

Between  reveille  and  retreat.  The  guard  is  never  turned  out  as 
a  compliment  after   retreat. 

Jf'hat  is  meant  by  "Between   reveille  and  retreat"? 


184 


CHAPTER  XIIL 


< 


<u     . 

N-Ci 

80"" 


O  M-i 


O 

C    U 
O    O 

o 


0: 


■<u  rt  O 
o 

o.H  <u 

C 
C        " 

"ti  S 

o  c  •, 

—  o  "I'  >- 
T3«n  be 


(U 


<U   u^  C 
>   O 

3^ 


.2  =« 
00 


)  o 


(L)-' 


80 

o  c 

•-  rt  <u  "» 

^  >  +^ 


M 
O   <U 

g^   GO 


<u  o 


CJ 


4^   u   0--    >iO 


^"t£ 


en 


I- 


s  £  ^ 

«  en 

bo  « ' 

C.5 

<u  o  _, 

(«  C  !- 

<U  rt  o 

1-,   iy  U5 

'  .«  a 

to  rt 


o,  o 


o 
g 


^  o. 


U5 

O 


o  r 
o  w 


(U  o 


>  s  > 


bfl 

•  «  o 
o 
C  <u 


.;£0 
'5 

or 


+-»    CO 


w 

o 
w 


Q 

o 


w 

I— I 

12; 
w 


-^ — sll! 


c 


o 

W 

b^  "S  ^ 


s  o 

O 

U  = 
-«^  ^ 


O 


;^ 
o 

Q 
UN 

Qu 


s  ^  o 
o  o 


V  5 


Pi 


"2      r;,-i 


O 
ou 


c 

03 


.2) 


^3 


H 

M 


^      £ 


o 


u 


^a. 


■^  *^  O) 


O 
CO 


as 

w 


<+4     3 

O  M. 


c  2  S 


H-i    OJ 

Oj3 


O 

o 


I  o 


•"  o  ^ 

W    OJ 

^  Co 


;  (u 


(U 


o  S 


c  o 

I)  tn 


s  > 

I.  5 
(u  &,  o 

4-» 

o  aj 
CO 


Oj 


CO 
o  aj 
t/) 
o 
o, 
o, 

3 


!£ 


>. 


1) 


<=  S  m  ?;  o  c« 


O  rt  o 


bu  O   O   [/)   7) 


be  ^. 

+j  box)  ? 
c4 


<U   3  p, 

tS^TS  o.t; 

-C  3 

"o  w  rt.Ji 

^  3   u 

5fec  o  a;'T3 

^  O  I-  -^  2 


o 
o 


p  r>  > 
«^| 

CJ    OJ    _ 

r-i     r-     O 
O    CL 


;  3  o 

.     TO 

o 


o 


c  5  a 


rt  ?:  3 


rt 


OJ  bo 
bo  i--Sr 

C    "!    1^ 


u  bo  ■ 
o  c  * 


3  o  " 


3 
bO 


1-. 


.— ■  -i-j   o 
O    0!    r; 


n! 


>»  3   O 


O 


s       (u 


5;^2        a; 

CQ   3  -w^ 

O         3   C  *^ 

(J   <U   o   ^ 

■^nO  be  O 


ac 


3   g  3   (U 

O    I?   O^ 

CJ    1/3    («   +-> 


3  u 
O 

<n  V 

>  V 

en   qj  j> 


3   nJ 

O^ 


u 

z 

w 
ij 

< 

u 


en 

I— I 

O 


w 
w 


a; 

t:  M 


V 


a    53 

--^    3 
•-'   ~     3 


O 


K     Q 


in 


O 
> 


GUARD  DUTY.  185 


It  is  the  interval  between  the  firing  of  the  morning  and  evening 
gun ;  or  if  no  gun  is  fired,  it  is  the  interval  between  the  sounding  of  the 
first  note  of  the  reveille,  or  the  first  march  if  marches  be  played,  and  the 
last  note   of    retreat. 

What  persons  ore  entitled  to  have  the  guard  turned  out  for  themf 

The  President;  sovereign  or  chief  magistrate  of  a  foreign  countrv, 
and  members  of  a  royal  family;  Vice  President;  President  of  the  Senate: 
American  and  foreign  ambassadors ;  members  of  the  Cabinet ;  Chief 
Justice;  Speaker  of  the  House  of  Representatives;  Committees  of  Con  ■ 
gress  officially  visiting  a  military  post;  governors  within  their  respective 
States  or  Territories ;  governors  general ;  Assistant  Secretary  of  War 
officially  visiting  a  military  post;  all  general  officers  of  the  Army, 
general  officers  of  a  foreign  service  visiting  a  post;  naval,  marine, 
volunteer,  and  militia  officers  in  the  service  of  the  United  States  and 
holding  the  relative  rank  of  general  officer;  American  and  foreign  envoys 
charges  d'affaires;  consuls-general  accredited  to  the  United  States; 
comamnding  officer  of  the  post  or  camp;  officer  of  the  day;  ministers 
resident  accredited  to  the  United  States. 

Illustrate  by  a  fezv  examples  the  manner  of  turning  out  the  guard. 

I    ofBcer  of  the  day; 
I    commanding  officer; 
Turn  out  the  guard,        general  officer; 

Secretary  of  War; 
Governor  of  State. 

Should  iJie  person  named  by  the  sentinel  not  desire  the  guard  formed, 
zvJuit  happens f 

The  person  salutes,  whereupon  the  sentinel  calls,  "Never  mind 
the  Guard". 

Suppose  the  guar.d  is  already  turned  out  and  formed,  what  should 
No.  I  do  upon  the  approach  of  a  person  entitled  to  liave  the  guard  turned 
out? 

If  the  party  approaching  were  senior  to  the  one  for  whom  tl;e 
guard  had  been  turned  out,  No.  1  w-ould  call,  "Turn  out  the  guard." 
If  the  person  approaching  were  his  junior.  No.  1  would  not  turn  oui 
the  guard. 

Suppose  the  person  approaching  ivere  the  senior,  but  should  not 
desire  the  guard  turned  out  for  him,  zvhat  zvould  No.  i  do? 


186  CHAPTER  XIII. 

He  would  call  "Never  mind  the  guard,"  just  the  same  as  if  the 
guard  had  not  already  been  turned  out. 

//  tzvo  or  more  persons  entitled  to  have  the  guard  turned  out  should 
approach    at    the   same    time,   what   zvould   No.    i    do? 

He  would  call  for  the  senior  only.  If  the  senior  did  not  desire 
the  guard  formed,  No.  1  would  then  call,  Never  mind  the  guard". 

Would  No.  I  then  turn  out  the  guard  for  the  next  in  rank? 

No,  sir ;  he  would  not ;  for  the  guard  is  never  turned  out  for  an 
officer  while  a  senior  entitled  to  the  compliment  is  at  or  near  the  post 
of    the   guard. 

Will  the  guard  he  turned  out  more  than  once  for  the  same  officer? 

Yes,  sir ;  as  often  as  he  passes,  but  should  the  officer  remain  in 
the  vicinity  of  the  guardhouse,  after  the  guard  has  been  turned  out, 
recognition  of  his  presence  will  be  taken  by  merely  bringing  the  guard 
to   attention. 

Is  the  guard  turned  out  on  the  approach  of  an  armed  party? 

Yes,  sir;  and  whether  the  party  is  commanded  by  an  officer, 
noncommissioned  officer  or  private,  No.  1  calls,  "Turn  out  the  guard, 
armed  party".  If  the  party  is  commanded  by  an  officer,  the  guard 
presents  arms. 

Is  the  guard  turned  out  for  armed  troops  at  drill  and  reliefs  or 
detachments  of  the  guard? 

No,  sir ;  it  is  not  . 

When  does   No.   1   never  repeat,  "Never  mind  the  guard". 

Upon  the  approach  of  an  armed  party. 

Will  the  guard  he  turned  out  on  the  approach  of  the  nezv  guard? 

Yes,  sir;  No.  1  calls,  "Turn  out  the  guard,  armed  party". 

Will  the  guard  be  turned  out  when  the  national  or  regimental 
colors  or  standards  are  carried  past  by  a  color  guard  or  an  armed  party? 

Yes,  sir;  if  they  are  not  cased.  No.  1  will  call,  "Turn  out  the 
guard,  national  (or  regimental)  color",  and  the  guard  will  turn  oul 
and  present  arms. 

In  case  the  national  and  regimental  colors  are  carried  past  together, 
what  will  No.   i  call? 

He  will  call,  "Turn  out  the  guard,  national  colors". 

Would  the  guard  be  turned  out  if  the  colors  zvere  cased? 

No,  sir ;  it  would  not. 

Is  the  guard  turned  out  if  the  party  carrying  the  colors  is  at  drill? 

Yes,  sir;  but  if  the  drill  is  conducted  in  the  vicinity  of  the  post  of 


GUARD  DUTY.  187 

the  guard,  the  guard  will  be  turned  out  when  the  colors  first  pass  and 
not  thereafter. 

Is  the  guard  turned  out  ivhen  the  remains  of  an  ofUcer  or  a  soldier 
are  carried  past? 

Yes, sir;  No.  1  calls,  "Turn  out  the  guard,  deceased  officer  (or 
soldier").     The   guard   turns   out  and  presents   arms. 

NIGHT   ORDERS 

(For  sentinels  at  post  of  guard) 

After  receiving  an  answer  to  his  challenge,  what  should  No.  i  caVf 

He  calls,  "Corporal  of  the  guard,  (so  and  so)",  repeating  the 
answer  to  his  challenge. 

Does  he  in  such  cases  repeat  the  number  of  his  post? 

No,  sir ;  he  does  not. 

How  long  does  he  remain  in  the  position  assumed  in  challenging? 

He  remains  at  port  arms  until  the  corporal  has  recognized  the  persoi 
or  party  challenged. 

What  does  No.  i  then  do? 

He  resumes  walking  his  post. 

//  the  person  or  party  advanced  be  entitled  to  a  salute,  what  doe\' 
No.  I  do? 

He  salutes,  and  as  soon  as  the  salute  is  acknowledged,  resumes 
walking  his  post. 

Explain  zvhat  No.  i  do-es  in  regard  to  calling  the  hours  of  the  night. 

At  the  direction  of  a  noncommissioned  officer  of  the  guard  he 
calls,  "No.  1  (such)  o'clock".  After  the  call  has  passed  around  the 
chain  of  sentinels  he  will  call,  "All's  well". 

In  the  event  of  such  a  disposition  of  posts  that  the  call  of  the 
sentinels  whose  post  is  last  in  numerical  order  cannot  be  heard  by- 
No.  I,  what  is  done? 

The  call  "All's  well"  may  be  returned  along  the  line  to  the 
sentinel  whose  voice  can   be  heard  at  the  post  of  the  guard. 

COMPLIMENTS  FROM   SENTINELS. 

How  do  dismounted  sentinels  salute? 

A   dismounted    sentinel    armed    with    the    rifle    or   saber,    salutes    bj 
presenting  arms;  if  otherwise  armed,  he  salutes  with  the  right  hand. 
How   do    mounted   sentinels   salute? 


188  CHAPTER  XIII. 

If  armed  with  the  saber,  and  the  saber  be  drawn,  they  salute  by 
presenting  saber;  otherwise  they  salute  with  the  right  hand. 

Explain   in   detail   how  a   dismounted   sentinel  salutes. 

As  the  person  or  party  entitled  to  salute  arrives  within  about  thirty 
paces,  the  sentinel  halts  and  faces  outward,  his  piece  at  right  shoulder  or 
his  saber  at  a  carry. 

If  the  officer  approaches  along  the  post,  the  salute  will  be  given  when 
the  officer  arrives  at  the  distance  of  about  six  paces. 

If  the  officer  passes  in  front  of  the  sentinel,  but  not  along  the  post, 
he  is  saluted  just  before  he  passes  the  sentinel's  front. 

If  he  crosses  the  post,  he  is  saluted  just  before  he  crosses. 

How  long  does  the  sentinel  remain  at  the  present? 

Until  his  salute  is  returned,  or  until  the  person  saluted  has  passed. 

When  does  the  sentinel  resume  walking  his  post? 

When  the  person  saluted  has  passed  about  six  paces  beyond  him. 

Does  a  sentinel  salute  an  officer  who  crosses  his  post,  hut  who  does 
not  pass  within  thirty  paces  of  the  sentinel? 

Yes,  sir;  he  does.     (Decision  A.  G.  O.,  July  21,  1906). 

//  an  offi>cer  passes  in  rear  of  a  sentinel's  post,  is  he  saluted? 

No,  sir ;  he  is  not,  but  the  sentinel  stands  facing  outward,  at  the 
right  shoulder,  until  the  officer  has  passed  about  six  paces. 

What  does  a  sentinel  in  a  sentry  box,  armed  with  the  rifle,  do  on  the 
approach  of  a  person  or  party  entitled  to  salute? 

He  stands  at  attention  at  an  order  and  salutes  by  presenting  arms 
in  accordance  with  the  foregoing  rules. 

What  does  a  sentinel  do  if  armed  with  the  saber? 

He  stands  at  the  carry  and  salutes  as  before  stated. 

How  does  a  mounted  sentinel  on  a  regular  post  salute? 

He  faces  outward  and  salutes  in  accordance  with  the  foregoing  rules. 

How  does  a  mounted  sentinel  doing  patrol  duty  salute? 

He  salutes  as  before  stated,  but  does  not  halt  unless  spoken  to. 

Who   are   entitled   to   salutes  from  sentinels? 

The  President;  sovereign  or  chief  magistrate  of  a  foreign  country 
and  members  of  a  royal  family;  Vice  President;  President  of  the  Senate: 
American  and  foreign  ambassadors;  members  of  the  Cabinet;  Chiet 
Justice ;  Speaker  of  the  House  of  Representatives ;  committees  of  Con- 
gress officially  visiting  a  military  post ;  governors  within  their  respective 
States  or  Territories ;  governors  general ;  Assistant  Secretary  of  War 
officially    visiting    a    military    post;    American    and     foreign    envoys    or 


GUARD  DUTY.  189 

ministers;  ministers  resident  accredited  to  the  United  States;  Charges 
d'afifaires ;  consuls  general  accredited  to  the  United  States;  commanding 
officer  of  the  post  or  camp;  officer  of  the  day,  and  officers  of  the  Regular 
Army, 

Do  sentinels  salute  the  national  or  regimental  colors  or  standards:'' 

Yes,  sir ;  if  they  are  not  cased. 

Does  this  apply  when  the  party  carrying  the  colors  is  at  drillf 

Yes,  sir;  but  if  the  drill  is  conducted  in  the  vicinity  of  the  guard 
house,  the  sentinel  will  salute  the  colors  when  they  first  pass,  and  not 
thereafter. 

Do  sentinels  salute  armed  parties^ 

Yes,  sir ;  provided  they  are  commanded  by  officers. 

Do  sentinels  salute  the  remains  of  deceased  officers  or  soldiers  that 
are  carried  past  their  posts F 

Yes,  sir ;  they  do. 

Do  sentinels  salute  officers  of  tJie  Navy  and  Marine  Corps? 

Yes,  sir.  | 

Do  sentinels  salute  the  military  and  naval  officers  of  foreign  powersi? 

Yes,  sir;  they  do  just  the  same  as  if  they  were  their  own  officers. 

Do  sentinels  salute  officers  of  Volunteers  and  Militia? 

Yes,  sir;  but  only  when  in  the  service  of  the  United  States. 
(Note:  For  purposes  of  saluting,  officers  of  the  Organized  Militia  whei; 
participating  in  maneuvers,  with  Regular  troops  are  considered  in  the 
service  of  the  United  States). 

What  should  a  sentinel  alzvays  do  ivhcn  an  officer  zvho  has  been 
holding   communication   with   him   leaves? 

He  should  always  salute  the  officer. 

During  the  hours  when  challenging  is  prescribed,  when  is  an  officer 
saluted? 

As  soon  as  he  has  been  duly  recognized  and  advanced. 

Does  a  mounted  sentinel  armed  with  the  rifle  or  pistol,  or  a  dis- 
mounted sentinel  armed  with  the  pistol,  salute  after  challenging? 

No,  sir ;  he  does  not.  He  stands  at  the  advance  or  raised  pistol 
until   the   officer   passes. 

What  does  a  sentinel  do  in  case  of  the  approach  of  an  armed  party 
of  the  guard? 

He  halts  when  it  is  about  thirty  paces  from  him,  facing  towards 
the  party,  with  his  piece  at  the  right  shoulder.  If  not  himself  relieved, 
he  will,  as  the  party  passes,  place  himself  so  that  it  will  pass  in  front 
of  him. 


190  CHAPTER  XIII. 

ll'hcii  docs  he  resume  ukilkiin/  his  pcstF 

When  the  party  has  passed  six  paces  beyond  him. 

JJ'liat    is    the   saluting   distance l^ 

It  is  the  limit  in  which  individuals  and  insignia  of  rank  can  be 
readily   recognized ;   it   is   assumed   to  be   about  thirty  paces. 

Is  an  officer  entitled  to  the  salute  if  not  in  iinifor'ni? 

Yes,  sir;  an  officer  is  entitled  to  salute,  day  or  night,  whether  in 
uniform   or   not. 

//  an  officer,  or  group  of  officers  remain  on  or  near  a  sentinel's 
post,  what  should  the  sentinel  do? 

He  salutes  but  once;  after  that  he  walks  his  post. 
Should   a  sentinel,   in   communication   with    an    officer,   ever   interrupt 
the  communication  in  order  to  salute  a  junior:^ 

No,  sir;  he  should  not,  unless  directed  by  the  senior  to  do  so. 

When  the  "Star  Spangled  Banner"  is  played  on  a  FORMAL  occasion 
OTHER  THAN  ret^'^at,  what  should  sentinels  on  posts  close  to  where  the 
ceremony  takes  place,  do? 

They  should  face  outward,  at  right  shoulder,  and  stand  at  attention 
throughout  the  playing  of  the  national  air,  provided  their  duties  do  nor 
prevent   their   so   doing.      (Decision   A.  G.  O.,  Aug.  4,1908). 

When  the  "Star  Spangled  Banner"  is  played  at  retreat,  what  should 
sentinels  on  posts  close  to  where  tJie  ceremony  takes  place,  do? 

They  should  face -outward,  at  the  right  shoulder  and  stand  at  atten- 
tion until  the  last  note,  and  then  salute  with  the  present,  provided  their 
duties  do  not  prevent  their  doing.     (Decision  A.  G.  O.,  Aug.  4,  1908). 

They  wjuld  do  the  same  thing  if  "To  the  Color"  were  sounded  at 
retreat  by  the  field  music. 

ORDERS  FOR  COLOR  SENTINELS 

(Sentinels   posted    on    the   color   line) 

How  does  a  color  sentinel  call  for  the  corporal  of  the  guard? 

"Corporal  of  the  Guard,  Color  Line." 

Is  a  color  sentinel  on  post  subject  to,  and  will  he  observe  all  the 
general  orders  prescribed  for  sentinels  on  other  posts? 

Yes,  sir;  he  is  subject  to  them  and  will  observe  them.  (See 
"Orders  For  Sentinels  On  Post,"  page  175  A). 

What  are  the  special  orders  for  a  color  sentinel? 

He  will  not  permit  the  colors  to  be  moved,  except  in  the  presence 
of    an    armed    escort.      Unless    otherwise    ordered    by    the    commanding 


GUARD  DUTY.  19^ 

officer  he  will  allow  no  one  to  touch  the  colors  but  the  color  bearer,  oi 
an  officer  or  noncommissioned  officer  of  the  guard. 

He  will  not  permit  any  soldier  to  take  arms  from  the  stacks ;  or  to 
touch  them,  except  by  order  of  an  officer,  or  a  noncommissioned  officer 
of  the  guard. 

If  any  person  passing  the  color  or  crossing  the  color  line  fails  to 
salute  the  color,  the  sentinel  will  come  to  port  arms  and  call  to  him, 
"salute  the  color"  ;  if  the  caution  be  not  heeded,  the  sentinel  will  call 
the  corporal  of  the  guard  and   report  the  facts. 

SUPERNUMERARIES 

What  are  the  instructions  regarding  supernumeraries f 

They   are   not   allowed   to   leave   camp   or   garrison ;    they   will   hold 

themselves  constantly  in   readiness   for  detail  .as  members  of  the  guard. 

They  will  not,  however,  be  excused  from  ordinary  camp  or  garrison  duties. 

but  will  not  be  detailed  for  anything  that  may  interfere  wath  their  duti^<? 

as  supernumeraries.. 

SPECIAL  ORDERS  FOR  SENTINELS  IN   CHARGE  OF 

PRISONERS. 

What  sentinel  has  general  charge  of  prisoners? 

No.  I,  and  he  will  allow  none  to  escape  or  to  cross  his  post  leaving 
the  guard  house,  except  under  proper  guard  and  passed  by  a  noncommis- 
sioned officer  of  the  guard. 

What  are  No.  I's  orders  regarding  persons  communicating  with 
prisoners  in  the  guard  house? 

He  will  allow  no  one  to  communicate  with  them  in  any  way  without 
permission  from  proper  authority. 

What  should  he  do  in  case  of  any  suspicious  noise  made  by  prisoners} 

He  should  at  once  report  the  fact  to  the  corporal  of  the  guard. 

Must  he  he  prepared  to  tell,  whenever  asked,  how  many  prisoners 
are  in  the  guard  house,  and  hozv  many  are  at  work,  or  elsewhere? 

Yes,  sir. 

What  does  N^o.  i  do  zvlien  prisoners  pass  his  post  returning  from 
work? 

He  wnll  halt  them  and  call  the  corporal  of  the  guard,  notifying 
him  of  the  number  of  prisoners  so  returning.  Thus:  "Corporal  of 
the  guard,  (so  many)  prisoners". 

Should  he  ever  allozv  a)iy  prisoners   to  pass   into   the  guard  house 


192  CHAPTER  XIIL 

until  the  corporal  of  the  yiiard  has  aiiszvcrrd  his  call  and  ordered  him  to 
do  sof 

No,  sir ;  he  should  not 

Should  a  sentinel  in  charge  of  prisoners  at  work,  allow  them  to  con- 
verse with  each  other,  or  with  any  one  else? 

No,  sir ;  he  should  not,  unless  they  have  permission  from  proper 
authority. 

Should  the  sentinel  himself  speak  to  the  prisoners  in  his  charge? 

No,  sir;  he  should  not,  except  in  the  execution  of  his  duty. 

What  is  a  sentinel  charged  with  regarding  the  deportment  of  pris- 
oners? 

He  will  see  that  they  do  not  struggle,  but  that  they  walk  in  a  mili- 
tary manner,  and  are  orderly  in  their  deportment.  He  will  also  see  that 
they  keep  constantly  at  work. 

How  should  a  sentinel  always  stand  with  respect  to  his  prisoners? 

He  must  always  keep  them  in  front  of  him,  and  never  allow  them  to 
walk  at  his  side  or  in  his  rear. 

Should  lie  at  any  time  lose  sight  of  them? 

No,  sir ;  never. 

What  does  a  sentinel  in  charge  of  prisoners  do,  when  an  officer  ap- 
proaches, or  when  the  sentinel  approaches  an  officer? 

When  within  six  paces  of  the  officer,  he  will  salute  with  the  rifle, 
taking  care  to  keep  his  prisoners  constantly  in  front  of  him. 

(Note:  At  some  posts  sentinels  in  charge  of  prisoners  are  exempted 
from  saluting  officers,  unless  addressing  or  addressed  by  an  officer). 

Is  a  sentinel  in  charge  of  prisoners  at  ivork,  responsible  that  they  do 
not  escape? 

Yes,  sir;  he  is,  and  if  he  allows  them  to  escape  he  will  be  punished 
as  a  court  martial  may  direct. 

//  a  prisoner  attempts  to  escape,  what  should  the  seentinel  do? 

He  should  call,  "Halt". 

What  should  be  done  if  the  prisoner  should  fail  to  halt? 

The  sentinel  will  repeat,  "Halt". 

Suppose  the  prisoner  should  still  fail  to  halt,  what  should  the  sen- 
tinel do? 

H  there  is  no  other  possible  means  of  preventing  his  escape,  tht 
sentry  will  fire  upon  him. 

Should  the  sentinel  ffre  to  hit? 

Yes,  sir;  if  the  prisoner  does  not  pay  any  attention  to  the  command 


GUARD  DUTY.  193 

to  halt,  the  sentinel  must  fire  to  maim,  or  even  kill,  and  a  failure  to  fire 
with  this  intent  is  a  serious  military  offence,  to  be  punished  as  a  court 
martial  may  direct. 

What  should  a  sentinel  in  charge  of  prisoners  do  on  approaching 
the  post  of  the  guard F 

He  will  halt  them  and  call,  "No.  1   (so  many)  prisoners". 

Should  he  allow  prisoners  to  cross  N'o.  i  post  until  so  directed  by 
the  corporal  of  the  guard f 

No,  sir ;  he  sh.ould  not. 

Are  sentinels  that  are  placed  over  prisoners  at  work  responsible 
that  the  prisoners  in  their  charge  shall  perform  the  work  properly  and 
satisfactorily? 

Yes,  sir ;  they  are  held  strictly  responsible. 

A  ORDERLY  FOR  THE  COMMANDING  OFFICER. 

How  does  an  orderly  report  to  the  Conunanding  Officer? 

When  directed  by  the  commander  of  the  guard  to  fall  out  and  re- 
port, he  gives  his  name,  company  and  regiment  to  the  sergeant  of  the 
guard,  and,  leaving  his  rifle  in  the  arm  rack  in  his  company  quarters, 
he  proceeds  at  once  to  the  commanding  officer,  and  reports,  for 
instance,  "Sir,  Private  Smith,  Company  'A',  Reports  As   Orderly". 

If  more  than  one  regiment  (or  if  parts  of  more  than  one  regi- 
ment) are  serving  at  the  post,  the  orderly  would  report,  for  instance, 
"Sir,  Private  Smith,  Troop  'A',  1st  Cavalry,  Reports  As  Orderly". 

If  the  orderly  selected  be  a  cavalryman,  he  will  report  equipped 
with  sabre  belt  and  sabre,  unless  otherwise  directed  by  the  commanding 
officer,  first  leaving  his  rifle  in  the  arm  rack  of  his  troop  quarters.  In 
the  field,  or  on  the  march,  the  equipment  of  the  orderly  will  be  as  di- 
rected  by   the   commanding   officer. 

(Note.  When  the  new  orderly  reports,  the  commanding  officer 
usually  tells  him,  "Relieve  the  old  orderly,"  whereupon  the  new  orderly 
replies,  "Yes,  sir,"  and  then  salutes,  faces  about  and  leaves  the  office. 
He  receives  the  instructions  from  the  old  orderly. 

(Some  commanding  officers  require  the  old  orderly  to  report  after 
turning  over  his  orders  to  the  new  orderly.  Thus,  "Sir,  Private  Smith 
reports  having  been  relieved  by  the  new  orderly,"  and  the  command- 
ing officer  generally  says,  "You're  relieved,"  whereupon  the  old  or- 
derly salutes,  executes  about  face  and  leaves  the  office). 

To  whose  orders  is  the  orderly  subject? 


194  CHAPTER  XIII. 

Only  to  the  orders  of  the  commanding  officer;  no  one  else  has  any 
authority  to  give  him  orders. 

What  should  he  ahvays  be  careful  about  when  ordered  to  carry  a 
message  f 

He  must  be  careful  to  deliver  it  exactly  as  it  was  given  him. 

Where  does  he  sleep? 

In  his  company  quarters,  or  in  such  other  place  as  the  commanding 
officer  may  direct. 

When  does  his  tour  of  duty  end? 

When  he  is  relieved  by  the  new  orderly. 

Is  he  a  member  of  the  guard? 

Yes,  sir ;  and  his  name,  company  and  regiment  are  entered  on  the 
guard  report  and  lists  of  the  guard. 

NOTES. 

In  practice  the  following  common  sense  instructions  are  generally  given  the 
commanding   officers'   orderly : 

If  he  does  not  understand  a  message  given  him  for  delivery,  or  instructions  that 
he  may  receive,  he  will  ask  the  officer  to  repeat  them,  saying,  for  instance,  "Sir, 
Private  Smith  does  not  understand ;  will  the  commanding  officer  (or  the  captain) 
please  repeat?" 

(See  page  50  D). 

He  acknowledges  the  receipt  of  orders,  messages  and  instructions  by  saluting, 
and  saying,  "Yes,  sir." 

After  having  delivered  a  message  or  returned  from  an  errand,  he  will  always 
report  accordingly  to  the  commanding  officer.  For  example,  "Sir,  the  commanding 
officer's  message  lias  been  delivered  to  Captain  Smith." 

At  every  mess  call,  if  in  attendance  on  the  commanding  officer,  he  w^ill  report 
to  him,  "Sir,  mess  call  has  sounded."     He  will  be  allowed  one  hour  for  each  meal. 

To  be  relieved,  at  9  o'clock  P.  M.,  for  instance,  he  will  report  to  the  command- 
ing officer,   "Sir,   it  is  g   o'clock." 

When   called  he   will  enter   the  commanding  officer's   ofhce  without  knocking. 

He  calls  the  attention  of  his  successor  to  all  special  instructions. 

ORDERLIES  IN  GENERAL. 

How  does  a  soldier  report  as  orderly  to  a  general  officer,  an  in- 
spector or  anyone  else? 

Wearing  side  arms  and  white  gloves,  he  proceeds  at  the  time  ap- 
pointed to  the  place  named  and  saluting  with  the  right  hand,  reports  to  the 

person  designated,  "Sir,  Private Company  , Infantry, 

reports  as  orderly." 

To  whose  orders  is  lie  subject  while  on  duty  as  orderly? 


GUARD  DUTY.  195 

To  the  orders  of  only  the  commanding  officer  and  the  officer  for 
whom  detailed. 

(Note:  The  special  instructions  generally  given  the  commanding 
officers'  orderly  also  apply  to  all  other  orderlies.     See  193  A). 

MUSICIANS  OF  THE  GUARD. 

To  whose  orders  are  the  musicians  of  the  guard  subjects 

They  are  subject  to  the  orders  of  only  the  commanding  officer,  the 
officer  of  the  day,  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  of  the  guard. 

Where  do  they  remain  during  their  tour  of  duty? 

Unless  otherwise  directed  by  the  commanding  officer,  they  remain  at 
the  guard  house  and  fall  in  with  the  guard  when  it  is  formed. 

They  form  on  a  line  with  the  front  rank  of  the  guard,  their  left 
three  paces  from  the  right  guide. 

Where  do  the  musicians  of  tJie  guard  sleep? 

They  sleep  at  the  guard  house,  unless  otherwise  directed  by  com- 
manding officer. 

What  are  their  duties  about  sounding  calls? 

They  sound  all  calls  prescribed  by  the  commanding  officer,  and  such 
other  calls  as  may  be  ordered  by  proper  authority,  at  such  times  and 
places  as  may  be  directed. 

Should  the  guard  be  turned  out  for  national  or  regimental  colors  or 
standards,  what  do  the  musicians  do? 

When  the  guard  presents  arms,  the  field  music  sounds,  "To  the 
Color,"  ov,  "To  the  Standard." 

When  the  guard  is  turned  out  as  a  compliment  to  a  person  entitled 
to  the  march,  flourishes  or  ruffles,  what  does  the  field  music  do? 

When  the  guard  presents  arms,  the  field  music  sounds  off  as  follows : 

For  the  President — the  President's  March ; 

For  a  General — the  General's  March ; 

For  a  Lieutenant  General — three  flourishes : 

For  a  Major  General — two  flourishes; 

For  a  Brigadier  General — one  flourish. 

To  the  sovereign  or  chief  magistrate  of  a  foreign  state  or  member 
of  a  royal  family — the  same  honors  as  are  paid  to  the  President. 

To  the  Vice  President,  the  members  of  the  Cabinet,  the  Chief  Jus- 
tice, the  President  of  the  Senate,  the  Speaker  of  the  House  of  Repre- 
sentatives, American  or  foreign  ambassadors,  and  governors  within  their 
respective  States  or  Territories — the  same  honors  as  to  the  General. 


196  CHAPTER  XIII. 

To  the  Assistant  Secretary  of  War  and  to  American  or  foreign 
envoys  or  ministers — the  same  honors  as  to  the  Lieutenant  General. 

To  officers  of  the  Navy — the  honors  due  to  their  assimilated  or  re- 
lative rank;  to  officers  of  marines  and  volunteers  and  militia,  when  in  the 
service  of  the  United  States,  the  honors  due  to  like  grades  in  the  regular 
service;  to  officers  of  a  foreign  service,  the  honors  due  to  their  rank. 

(Note.  The  musicians  of  the  guard  are  sometimes  used  as  orderlies  for  the 
Adjutant's  Ofifice,  from  which  place  they  sound  all  calls.  When  this  practice  obtains 
the  musician  of  the  new  guard  is  sometimes  required  to  proceed  to  the  Adjutant's 
Office  after  the  new  guard  has  reached  the  guard  house,  and  to  report  to  the  Adjutant.) 

COMMANDER  OF  THE  GUARD 

(The  numbers  of  the  paragraphs  correspond  to  those  in  the  Manual 
of  Guard  Duty,  edition  igo8). 

63.  The  senior  officer  or  noncommissioned  officer  of  the  guard 
is  commander  of  the  guard. 

64.  The  commander  of  the  guard  is  responsible  for  the  instruc- 
tion and  discipine  of  the  guard.  He  will  see  that  all  its  members  ar? 
correctly  instructed  in  their  orders  and  duties,  and  that  they  under- 
stand and  properly  perform  them.  He  will  visit  each  relief  at  leasi 
once  while  it  is  on  post,  and  at  least  one  of  these  visits  will  be  made 
between  12  o'clock  midnight  and  daylight. 

65.  He  receives  and  obeys  the  orders  of  the  commanding  officei 
and  the  officer  of  the  day,  and  reports  to  the  latter  without  delay  all 
orders  relating  to  the  guard  not  given  or  transmitted  by  him;  he 
transmits  to  his  successor  all  material  instructions  and  information 
relating  to  his  duties. 

66.  He  is  responsible  under  the  officer  of  the  day  for  the  general 
safety  of  the  post  or  camp  as  soon  as  the  old  guard  marches  away 
from  the  guardhouse.  In  case  of  any  emergency  occurring  while 
both  guards  are  at  the  guardhouse,  the  senior  commander  of  the  two 
guards  will  be  responsible  that  proper  action  is  taken. 

67.  Officers  of  the  guard  will  remain  constantly  with  their  guards, 
except  while  visiting  sentinels  or  necessarily  engaged  elsewhere  in 
the  performance  of  their  duty.  The  commanding  officer  will  allow 
a  reasonable   time   for  meals. 

68.  A  commander  of  a  guard  leaving  his  post  for  any  purpose 
will  mention  his  destination  and  the  probable  duration  of  his  absence 
to  the  next  in  command. 


GUARD  DUTY.  .       197 

69.  Except  in  emergencies,  the  commander  of  a  guard  may  divide 
the  night  with  the  next  in  command,  but  retains  his  responsibih'ty.  The 
one  on  watch  must  be  constantly  on  the  alert. 

70.  When  any  alarm  is  raised  in  a  camp  or  garrison,  the  guard 
will  be  formed  immediatel^^  If  the  case  be  serious,  the  proper  call 
will  be  sounded,  and  the  commander  of  the  guard  will  cause  the 
commanding  officer  and  the  officer  of  the  day  to  be  at  once  notified. 

71.  If  a  sentinel  calls:  "The  Guard,"  the  commander  of  the  guard 
will  at  once  send  a  patrol  to  such  sentinel's  post.  If  the  danger  be 
great,  in  which  case  the  sentinel  will  discharge  his  piece,  the  patrol 
will  be  as  strong  as  possible. 

72.  When  practicable,  there  should  ahvays  be  an  officer  or  non- 
commissioned officer  and  at  least  two  privates  of  the  guard  at  the 
guardhouse,  in  addition  to  the  sentinels  there  on  post. 

73.  The  commander  of  the  guard  will  see  that  the  guard  is 
formed  promptly,  and  under  arms,  when  turned  out  for  any  purpose 
whatever.  ^ 

74.  Between  reveille  and  retreat,  when  the  guard  has  been 
turned  out  for  an}^  person  entitled  thereto  the  commander  of  the 
guard,  if  an  officer,  will  receive  the  report  of  the  sergeant  of  the 
guard,  returning  the  salute  of  the  latter  with  the  right  hand.  He 
will  then  draw  his  sw^ord,  and  place  himself  tw^o  paces  in  front  of 
the  center.  When  the  person  for  whom  the  guard  has  been  turned 
out  approaches,  the  commander  of  the  guard  faces  his  guard,  com- 
mands: 1.  Present,  2.  ARMS;  faces  to  the  front  and  salutes.  When 
his  salute  is  acknowledged,  he  resumes  the  carry,  faces  about,  com- 
mands: 1.  Order,  2.  ARMS;  and  faces  to  the  front. 

If  it  be  an  officer  entitled  to  inspect  the  guard,  after  saluting  and 
before  bringing  his  guard  to  the  order,  the  officer  of  the  guard  reports: 
"Sir,  the  guard  and  prisoners  are  present;"  or,  "Sir,  the  guard  is 
present  and  the  prisoners  are  secure;"  or,  "Sir,  (so  and  so)  is  absent;" 
except  that  at  guard  mounting  the  commanders  of  guards  present 
their  guards  and  salute  without  making  any  report. 

Between  retreat  and  reveille,  the  commander  of  the  guard  salutes 
and  reports,  but  does  not  bring  the  guard  to  a  present. 

75.  To  those  entitled  to  have  the  guard  turned  out  but  not 
entitled  to  inspect  it,  no  report  will  be  made;  nor  wnll  a  report  be 
made  to  any  officer,  unless  he  halts  in  front  of  the  guard. 

76.  When  a  guard  commanded  b}^  a  noncommissioned  officer  is 


198  CHAPTER  XIII. 

« 

turned  out  as  a  compliment  or  for  inspection,  the  noncommissioned 
officer,  standing  at  a  right  shoulder  on  the  right  of  the  right  guide, 
commands:  1.  Present,  2.  ARMS.  He  then  himself  executes  the 
rifle  salute. 

If  a  report  be  also  required,  he  will,  after  saluting  and  before 
bringing  his  guard  to  the  order,  report  as  prescribed  for  the  officer 
of  the  guard.     (See  par.  74.) 

77.  If  a  guard  be  commanded  by  a  commissioned  officer,  no  com- 
pliments will  be  paid  to  persons  except  those  entitled  to  have  the 
guard  turned  out. 

78.  An  officer  or  noncommissioned  officer  marching  a  guard  or 
a  detachment  of  a  guard  salutes  armed  bodies  and  persons  entitled 
to  compliments  from  guards  as  follows:  Eyes  are  turned  in  the 
direction  of  the  person  or  body  of  troops  saluted  by  the  commands: 
1.  Eyes,  2.  RIGHT  (LEFT).  The  officer  or  noncommissioned  officer 
commanding  salutes  and  v/hen  the  person  or  body  saluted  is  passed, 
commands,  FRONT. 

A  noncommissioned  officer  marching  a  guard  or  a  detachment 
of  a  guard  will  salute  all  officers,  but  will  not  command  eyes  right 
or  left  when  saluting  officers  not  entitled  to  compliment  from  the 
guard. 

79.  A  guard  being  in  line,  and  not  under  inspection,  when 
commanded  by  a  noncommissioned  officer,  is  brought  to  "attention" 
when  an  officer  not  entitled  to  have  the  guard  turned  out  passes,  and 
the  noncommissioned  officer  salutes  with   the   rifle   salute. 

80.  If  the  person  entitled  to  compliment  pass  in  rear  of  the 
guard,  it  does  not  salute,  but  stands  at  attention  at  an  "order",  facing 
to  the  front. 

81.  After  au}'^  person  entitled  to  the  compliment  has  been  saluted 
by  the  guard  or  guards,  official  recognition  of  his  presence  thereafter, 
while  he  remains  in  the  same  vicinity,  will  be  taken  by  bringing  the 
guard  or  guards  to  attention. 

82.  The  commander  of  the  guard  will  inspect  his  guard  at 
reveille  and  retreat  to  assure  himself  that  the  men  arc  in  proper  con- 
dition to  perform  their  duties  and  that  their  arms  and  equipments 
are  in  proper  order.  For  inspection  by  other  officers,  he  prepares  the 
guard  as  directed  in  each  case  by  the  inspecting  officer. 

83.  y\ny   person    having   authority    to   inspect    a   guard,    and    who 


GUARD  DUTY.  199 

wishes  to  do   so,  will,   after  its  commander   has   reported,   direct  him 
to  prepare  it  for  inspection,  stating-  in  what  manner. 

84.  The  guard  will  not  be  paraded  during  ceremonies  unless  so 
ordered  by  the  commanding  officer. 

85.  At  all  formations  of  the  guard  or  reliefs,  he  will  see  that 
the  chambers  of  rifles  are  opened  as  soon  as  the  men  have  fallen  in. 

86.  After  receiving  the  report  of  its  corporal,  he  will  inspect 
each  relief  before  it  goes  on  post  to  assure  himself  that  every  sentinel 
is  properly  armed  and  equipped  and  is  in  proper  condition  to  perform 
his  duties.  The  same  rule  applies  to  all  patrols  and  sentinels  over 
prisoners.  The  relief  first  posted  after  guard  mounting  need  not  be 
thus  inspected. 

87.  He  will  see  that  sentinels  are  habitually  relieved  every  two 
hours,  unless  the  weather  or  other  cause  make  it  necessary  or  proper 
that  it  be  done  at  shorter  or  longer  intervals,  as  directed  by  the 
commanding  officer. 

88.  He  will  question  his  noncommissioned  officers  and  sentinels 
relative  to  the  instructions  they  may  have  received  from  the  old  guard; 
he  will  see  that  patrols  and  visits  of  inspection  are  made  as  directed 
by  the  officer  of  the  day. 

89.  He  will  see  that  the  orders  for  each  sentinel,  either  written 
or  printed,  are  posted  in  the  guardhouse,  and,  if.  practicable,  in  the 
sentry  box  or  other  sheltered  place  to  which  the  sentinel  has  constant 
access. 

90.  He  will  see  that  the  proper  calls  are  sounded  at  the  hours 
appointed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

91.  Should  a  member  of  the  guard  be  taken  sick,  or  be  arrested, 
or  desert,  or  leave  his  guard,  the  commander  of  the  guard  will  at  once 
notify  the  adjutant. 

92.  He  will,  when  the  countersign  is  used,  communicate  it  to 
the  noncommissioned  officers  of  the  guard  and  see  that  it  is  duly  com- 
municated to  sentinels  before  the  hour  for  challenging;  the  counter- 
sign will  not  be  given  to  sentinels  posted  at  the  guardhouse. 

93.  He  will  have  the  details  for  hoisting  the  flag  at  reveille,  and 
lowering  it  at  retreat,  made  in  time  for  the  proper  performance  of 
these  duties.  He  will  see  that  the  flags  are  kept  in  the  best  condition 
possible,  and  that  they  are  never  handled  except  in  the  proper  per- 
formance of  duty. 


200  CHAPTER  XIII. 

94.  The  commander  of  the  guard  may  permit  members  of  the 
guard  while  at  the  guardhouse  to  remove  their  head  dress,  overcoats, 
and  gloves ;  if  they  leave  the  guardhouse  for  any  purpose  whatever,  he 
will  require  that  they  shall  be  properly  equipped  and  armed  according 
to  the  character  of  the  service  in  which  engaged,  or  as  directed  by 
the    commanding   oflficer. 

95.  He  will  enter  in  the  guard  report  a  report  of  his  tour  of 
duty,  and,  on  the  completion  of  his  tour,  will  present  it  to  the  officer 
of  the  day.  He  will  transmit  with  his  report  all  passes  turned  in  at 
the  post  of  the  guard. 

96.  Whenever  a  prisoner  is  sent  to  the  guardhouse  or  guard 
tent  for  confinement,  the  commander  of  the  guard  will  cause  him  to 
be  searched,  and  will,  without  unnecessary  delay,  report  the  case  t(.> 
the  officer  of  the  day. 

97.  If  anyone  is  to  be  passed  out  of  camp  at  night,  he  is  sent  to 
the  commander  of  the  guard  who  will  have  him  passed  beyond  the 
sentinels. 

98.  The  commander  of  the  guard  will  detain  at  the  guardhouse 
all  suspicious  characters,  or  parties  attempting  to  pass  a  sentinel's 
post  without  authority,  reporting  his  action  to  the  officer  of  the  day, 
to  whom  persons  so  arrested  will  be  sent,  if  necessary. 

99.  He  will  inspect  the  guardrooms  and  cells,  and  the  irons  of 
such  prisoners  as  may  be  ironed,  at  least  once  during  his  tour,  and 
at  such  other  times  as  he  may  deem  necessary. 

100.  The  commander  of  the  guard  will  cause  the  corporals  of 
the  old  and  new  reliefs  to  verify  together,  immediately  before  each 
relief  goes  on  post,  the  number  of  prisoners  who  should  then  properly 
bc  at  the  guardhouse. 

101.  He  will  see  that  the  sentences  of  prisoners  under  his  charge 
are  executed  strictly  as  confirmed  by  the  reviewing  authority 

102.  He  will  cause  sentinels  over  working  parties  of  prisoners  to 
be  taken  from  those  assigned  to  posts  guarded  at  night  only.  If 
there  be  none  such,  he  will  cause  this  duty  to  be  divided  as  equally  as 
possible    among   the    privates    of   his   guard. 

103.  He  will  inspect  all  meals  sent  to  the  guardhouse  for  the 
prisoners  and  see  that  the  quantity  and  quality  are  in  accordance 
with  regulations. 


GUARD  DUTY.  201 

104.  At  guard  mounting  he  will  report  to  the  old  officer  of  the 
day  all  cases  of  prisoners  whose  terms  of  sentence  expire  on  that  day. 
as  also  all  cases  of  prisoners  concerning  whom  no  statement  of 
charges  has  been  received. 

105.  The  commander  of  the  guard  is  responsible  for  the  security 
of  prisoners  under  the  charge  of  his  guard;  he  becomes  responsible 
for  them  after  their  number  has  been  verified  and  they  have  been 
turned  over  to  the  custody  of  his  guard,  whether  at  the  guardhouse 
or  out  at  work. 

106.  To  receive  the  prisoners  at  the  guardhouse  after  their 
number  has  been  verified  by  the  officers  of  the  day,  the  commander  of 
the  new  guard  directs  his  sergeant  to  form  the  guard  with  an  interval, 
and  commands: 

1.  Prisoners,  2.  Right,  3.  FACE,  4.  Forward,  5.  MARCH. 

The  prisoners  having  arrived  opposite  the  interval  in  the  new 
guard,  he  commands: 

1.  Prisoners,  2.  HALT,  3.  Left,  4.  FACE,  5.  Right  (or)  Left 
backward,  6.  DRESS,   7.   FRONT. 

The  prisoners   dress  on  the  line   of  the  new  guard. 

107.  After  the  new  guard  arrives  at  its  post,  and  has  saluted  the 
old  guard,  each  guard  is  presented  by  its  commander  to  its  officer  of 
the  day.  If  there  be  but  one  officer  of  the  day  present,  or  if  one  officer 
acts  in  the  capacity  of  old  and  new  officer  of  the  day,  each  guard  is 
presented   to  him   by  its   commander. 

108.  If  other  persons  entitled  to  a  salute  approach,  each  com- 
mander of  the  guard  will  bring  his  own  guard  to  attention  if  not 
already  at  attention.  The  senior  commander  of  the  two  guards  will 
then  command:  1.  Old  and  new  guards,  2.  Present,  3.  ARMS. 

The  junior  will  salute  at  the  command  present  arms  given  by  the 
senior.  After  the  salute  has  been  acknowledged,  the  senior  brings 
both  guards  to  the  order. 

109.  After  the  salutes  have  been  acknowledged  by  the  officers  of 
the  day,  each  guard  is  brought  to  an  order  by  its  commander;  the 
commander  of  the  new  guard  then  directs  the  orderly  or  orderlies  to 
fall  out  and  report,  and  causes  bayonets  to  be  fixed  if  so  ordered  by 
the  commanding  officer;  bayonets  will  not  then  be  unfixed  during  the 
tour  except  in  route  marches  while  the  guard  is  actually  marching  or 
when  specially  directed  by  the  commanding  officer. 


202  CHAPTER  XIII. 

The  commander  of  the  new  guard  then  falls  out  members  of  the 
guard  for  detached  posts,  placing  them  under  charge  of  the  proper 
noncommissioned  officers,  divides  .the  guard  into  three  reliefs,  first, 
second,  and  third,  from  right  to  left,  and  directs  a  list  of  the  guard  to 
be  made  by  the  reliefs.  When  the  guard  consists  of  troops  of  different 
arms  combined,  the  men  are  assigned  to  reliefs  so  as  to  insure  a  fair 
division  of  duty,  under  rules  prescribed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

110.  The  sentinels  and  detachments  of  the  old  guard  are  at  once 
relieved  by  members  of  the  new  guard;  the  two  guards  standing  at 
ease  or  at  rest  while  these  changes  are  being  made.  The  commander 
of  the  old  transmits  to  the  commander  of  the  new  guard  all  his  orders, 
instructions,  and  information  concerning  the  guard  and  its  duties. 
The  commander  of  the  new  guard  then  takes  possession  of  the  guard- 
house and  verifies  the  articles  in  charge  of  the  guard. 

111.  When  all  the  detachments  and  sentinels  of  the  old  guard 
have  formed  on  its  left,  its  commander  causes  bayonets  to  be  unfixed, 
if  not  already  unfixed,  and  marches  off  his  guard,  as  prescribed  in 
drill  regulations  (  cavalry  paragraphs  1073-1084.  Infantry,  paragraph 
516.)  When  the  old  guard  has  marched  past  the  post  of  the  guard,  the 
new  guard  stacks  arms  and  is  dismissed;  or,  if  armracks  are  provided, 
the  new  guard  is  dismissed,  and  the  arms  are  placed  in  the  racks;  or  the 
men  may  be  required  to  keep  their  arms  constantly  with  them. 

112.  Detachments  of  the  guard  having  separate  posts  are  relieved 
in  the  same  manner  as  prescribed  for  the  guard,  and  then  marched  to 
the  post  of  the  guard. 

113.  If  considerable  time  is  required  to  bring  in  that  portion 
of  the  old  guard  still  on  post,  the  commanding  officer  may  direct  that 
as  soon  as  the  orders  and  property  are  turned  over  to  the  new  guard, 
the  portion  of  the  old  guard  at  the  guardhouse  may  be  marched  off 
and  dismissed  as  prescribed.  In  such  a  case,  the  remaining  detach- 
ment or  detachments  of  the  old  guard  will  be  inspected  by  the  new 
officer  of  the  guard  when  they  reach  the  guardhouse.  He  will  direct 
the  senior  noncommissioned  officer  of  the  old  guard  present  to  march 
the  said  detachments  off  and  dismiss  them  in  the  prescribed  manner. 

114.  A   supernumerary   officer   of   the   guard    receives   and    obeys 
the  orders  of  the  commander  of  the  guard,  assisting  him  in  the  per 
formance  of  his  duties. 


GUARD  DUTY.  205 

SERGEANT  OF  THE  GUARD 

(The  iniiiibcrs  of  flic  paraf/raphs  correspond  to  those  in  the  Manual 
of  Guard  Duty,   edition   iQog). 

115.  The  senior  noncommissioned  officer  of  the  guard  always 
acts  as  sergeant  of  the  guard,  and,  if  there  be  no  officer  of  the  guard, 
will  perform  the  duties  prescribed  for  the  commander  of  the  guard. 

116.  The  sergeant  of  the  guard  has  general  supervision  over  the 
other  noncommissioned  officers  and  the  musicians  and  privates  of 
the  guard,  and  must  be  thoroughly  familiar  with  all  their  orders 
and  duties.  • 

117.  He  is  directly  responsible  for  the  property  under  charge 
of  the  guard,  and  will  sec  that  it  is  properly  cared  for.  He  will  make 
lists  of  articles  taken  out  by  working  parties,  and  see  that  all  such 
articles  are  duly  returned.  If  any  are  not,  he  will  immediately  report 
the  fact  to  the  commander  of  the  guard. 

118.  Immediately  after  guard  mounting  he  will  prepare  dupli- 
cate lists  of  the  names  of  all  noncommissioned  officers,  musicians,  and 
privates  of  the  guard,  showing  the  relief  and  post  or  duties  of  each. 
One  list  will  be  handed  as  soon  as  possible  to  the  commander  of  the 
guard;  the  other  wnll  be  retained  by  the  sergeant. 

119.  He  will  see  that  reliefs  are  turned  out  at  the  proper  time, 
and  that  the  corporals  thoroughly  understand,  and  are  prompt  and 
efficient  in   the   discharge  of  their   duties. 

120.  During  the  temporary  absence  from  the  guardhouse  of 
the  sergeant  of  the  guard,  tlie  next  in  rank  of  the  noncommissioned 
officers  present   will   perform   his   duties. 

121.  Should  the  corporal  whose  relief  is  on  post  be  called  away 
from  the  guardhouse,  the  sergeant  of  the  guard  will  designate  a  non 
commissioned  officer  to  take  the  corporal's  place  until  his  return. 

122.  After  breakfast,  and  after  stable  duty  in  the  mounted  service, 
he  will  cause  the  guardhouse  or  guard  tent  and  the  space  around  it 
to  be  policed  by  the  prisoners,  if  there  be  any,  or  b}-  members  of  the 
guard  if  there  be  no  prisoners. 

123.  He  will  see  that  the  guardroom  and  cells  are  thoroughly 
policed    twice    daily,    morning    and    evening. 

124.  At  first  sergeants'  call  he  will  proceed  to  the  adjutant's 
office  and  obtain  the  guard  report  book. 


204  CHAPTER  XIII. 

125.  When  the  national  or  regimental  colors  are  taken  from  the 
stacks  of  the  color  line,  the  color  bearer  and  guard,  or  the  sergeant 
of  the  guard,  unarmed,  and  two  armed  privates  as  a  guard,  will  escort 
the  colors  to  the  colonel's  quarters,  as  prescribed  for  the  color  guard 
in   Infantry   Drill   Regulations,   paragraph   248. 

126.  Upon  the  return  of  soldiers  having  passes,  the  passes  will  be 
given  to  the  sergeant  of  the  guard,  who  will  indorse  upon  them  the 
time  at  which  each  of  the  men  included  in  a  pass  returns;  at  guard 
mounting  he   will   turn    them   into   the   commander   of   the   guard. 

127.  He  will  report  to  the  commander  of  the  guard  any  suspicious 
or  unusual  occurrence  that  comes  under  his  notice,  will  warn  him  of 
the  approach  of  any  armed  body,  and  will  send  to  him  all  persons 
arrested  by  the  guard. 

128.  When  the  guard  is  turned  out,  its  formation  will  be  as  fol- 
lows :  The  senior  noncommissioned  officer,  if  commander  of  the  guard, 
is  on  the  right  of  the  right  guide;  if  not  commander  of  the  guard,  he 
is  in  the  line  of  file  closers,  in  rear  of  the  right  four  of  the  guard, 
the  next  in  rank  is  right  guide;  the  next,  left  guide;  the  others,  >  in 
the  line  of  file  closers,  usually,  each  in  rear  of  his  relief;  the  field 
music,  with  its  left  three  paces  to  the  right  of  the  right  guide.  The 
reliefs  form  in  the  same  order  as  when  the  guard  was  first  divided, 
except  that  if  the  guard  consists  of  dismounted  cavalry  and  infantr>, 
the  cavalry  forms  on  the  left. 

129.  The  sergeant  forms  the  guard,  calls  the  roll,  and,  if  not  in 
command  of  the  guard,  reports  to  the  commander  of  the  guard  as 
prescribed  in  drill  regulations  for  a  first  sergeant  forming  a  troop  or 
company;  the  guard  is  not  divided  into  platoons  or  sections,  and, 
except  when  the  whole  guard,  is  formed  prior  to  marching  off,  fours 
are  not  counted. 

130.  The  sergeant  reports  as  follows:  "Sir,  the  guard  is  present;" 
or,  "Sir,  the  guard  and  prisoners  are  present;"  or,  "Sir,  the  guard  is 
present,  and  the  prisoners  are  secure;"  or,  "Sir,  (so  and  so)  is  absent;" 
or,  if  the  roll  call  has  been  omitted,  "Sir,  the  guard  is  formed."  Only 
men  absent  without  proper  authority  are  reported  absent.  He  then 
takes  his  place,  without  command. 

131.  At  night,  the  roll  may  be  called  by  reliefs  and  numbers 
instead  of  names;  thus,  the  first  relief  being  on  post:  Second  relief, 
Corporal;  No.  1;  No.  2,  etc.    Third  relief,  Corporal;  No.  1,  etc. 


GUARD  DUTY.  205 

132.  Calling  the  roll  will  1)C  dispensed  with  in  forming  the 
guard  when  it  is  turned  out  as  a  compliment,  on  the  approach  of  an 
armed  body,  or  in  any  sudden  emergency;  but  in  such  cases  the  roll 
may  be  called  before  dismissing"  the  guard.  If  the  guard  be  turned 
out  for  an  officer  entitled  to  inspect  it,  the  roll  will,  unless  he  directs 
otherwise,  always  be  called  before  a  report  is  made. 

133.  When  directed  by  the  officer  of  the  guard  to  dismiss  the 
guard,  the  sergeant  salutes,  steps  in  front  of  the  guard,  and  commands: 

1.  Port,  2.  ARMS,  3.  OPEN  CHAMBER,  4,  CLOSE  CHAMBER, 

5.  DISMISSED,  or,  5.  Order,  6.  ARMS,  7.   Stack,  8.  ARMS,  9.   DIS- 
MISSED.     (Par.   111.) 

134.  The  sergeant  of  the  guard  has  direct  charge  of  the  prisoners 
and  is  responsible  to  the  commander  of  the  guard  for  their  security. 

135.  He  will  carry  the  keys  of  the  guardroom  and  cells,  and  will 
not  suffer  them  to  leave  his  personal  possession  while  he  is  at  the 
guardhouse,  except  as  hereinafter  provided,  (par.  137).  Should  he 
leave  the  guardhouse  for  any  purpose,  he  will  turn  the  keys  over  tc 
the    noncommissioned    officer    who    takes    his    place.      (Par.    120). 

136.  He  will  count  the  knives,  forks,  etc.,  given  to  the  prisoners 
with  their  food,  and  see  that  none  of  these  articles  remain  in  their 
possession.  He  will  see  that  no  forbidden  articles  of  any  kind  are 
conveyed  to  the  prisoners. 

137.  Prisoners,  when  paraded  with  the  guard,  are  placed  in  line, 
in  its  center.  The  sergeant,  immediately  before  forming  the  guard, 
will  turn  over  his  keys  to  the  noncommissioned  officer  at  the  guard- 
house. Having  formed  the  guard,  he  will  divide  it  into  two  nearly 
equal  parts.  Indicating  the  point  of  division  with  his  hand  he 
commands : 

1.  Right  (or  Left),  2.  FACE,  3.  Forward,  4.  MARCH,  5.  Guard, 

6.  HALT,  7.  Left  (or  Right),  8.  FACE. 

If  the  first  command  be  right  face,  the  right  half  of  the  guard 
only  will  execute  the  movements;  if  left  face,  the  left  half  only  will 
execute  them.  The  command  halt  is  given  when  sufficient  interval  is 
obtained  to  admit  the  prisoners.  The  doors  of  the  guardroom  and 
cells  are  then  opened  by  the  noncommissioned  officer  having  the 
keys.  The  prisoners  will  file  out  under  the  supervision  of  the  sergeant, 
the  noncommissioned  officer  and  sentinel  on  duty  at  the  guardhouse, 
and  such  other  sentinels  as  may  be  necessary;  they  will  form  in  line 
in  the  interval  between  the  two  parts   of  the   guard  . 


206  CHAPTER  XIII. 

138.  To  return  the  prisoners  to  the  guardroom  and  cells,  the 
sergeant  commands: 

1. Prisoners,  2.  Right  (or  Left),  3.  FACE,  4.  Forward,  5.  Columa 
right  (or  left),  6.  MARCH. 

The  prisoners,  under  the  same  supervision  as  before,  return  to 
their  proper  rooms  or  cells. 

139.  To   close    the   guard,    the    sergeant   commands: 

1.  Left  (or  Right),  2.  FACE,  3.  Forward,  4.  MARCH,  5.  Guard. 
6.  HALT,  7.  Right   (or  Left),  8.  FACE. 

The  left  or  right  half  only  of  the  guard,  as  indicated,  executes 
the  movement. 

140.  If  there  be  but  few  prisoners,  the  sergeant  may  indicate 
the  point  of  division  as  above,  and  form  the  necessary  interval'  by 
the   commands: 

1. Right    (or   Left)    step,   2.    MARCH,   3.    Guard,   4.    HALT,   and 

close  the  intervals  by  the  commands: 

l.Left  (or  Right)  step,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Guard,  4.  HALT. 

141.  If  sentinels  are  numerous,  reliefs  may,  at  the  discretion  of 
the  commanding  officer,  be  posted  in  detachments,  and  sergeants,  as 
well    as    corporals,    required    to    relieve    and    post    them. 

142.  Sergeants  assigned  to  reliefs  perform  the  duties  prescribed 
for  corporals  of  the  guard.  They  will  not  be  so  assigned  unless  the 
number  of  corporals  detailed  for  guard  be  less  than  the  number  of 
reliefs. 

CORPORAL  OF  THE  GUARD 

(The  numbers  of  the  paragraphs  correspond  to  tJiose  in  the  Manual 
of  Guard  Duty,  edition  1909). 

143.  Corporals  of  the  guard  are  assigned  to  reliefs  by  the  com- 
mander of  the  guard. 

144.  A  corporal  of  the  guard  receives  and  obeys  orders  from 
none  but  noncommissioned  officers  of  the  guard  senior  to  himself,  the 
officers  of  the  guard,  the  officer  of  the  day,  and  the  commanding 
officer. 

145.  It  is  the  duty  of  the  corporal  of  the  guard  to  post  and  relieve 
sentinels,  and  to  instruct  the  members  of  his  relief  in  their  orders 
and  duties. 


GUARD  DUTY.  207 

146.  Immediately  after  the  division  of  the  guard  into  reliefs  the 
corporals  will  assign  the  members  of  their  respective  reliefs  to  posts 
by  number,  and  a  soldier  so  assigned  to  his  post  will  not  be  changed 
to  another  during  the  same  tour  of  guard  duty,  unless  by  direction 
of  the  commander  of  the  guard  or  higher  authority.  Usually  exper- 
ienced soldiers  are  placed  over  the  arms  of  the  guard,  and  at  remote 
and  responsible  posts. 

147.  Each  corporal  will  then  make  a  list  of  the  members  of  his 
relief,  including  himself.  This  list  will  contain  the  number  of  the 
relief,  the  name,  the  company,  and  regiment  of  every  member  thereof, 
and  the  post  to  which  each  is  assigned.  The  list  will  be  made  in 
duplicate,  one  copy  to  be  given  to  the  sergeant  of  the  guard  as  sooi; 
as  completed,  the  other  to  be  retained  by  the   corporal. 

148.  As  soon  as  directed  by  the  officer  of  the  guard,  the  corporal 
of  the  first  relief  posts  his  relief. 

149.  The  corporal  forms  his  relief,  and  then  commands:  CALL 
OFF. 

Commencing  on  the  right,  the  men  call  ofT  alternately,  rear  and 
front  rank,  "one,"  "two,"  "three,"  "four,"  and  so  on;  if  in  single  rank, 
they  call  off  from  right  to  left.     The  corporal  then   commands: 

1.  Right,  2.  FACE,  3.  Forward,  4.  MARCH. 

If  formed  in  single  rank,  the  corporal  commands  1.  Twos  right, 
2.  MARCH. 

In  wet  weather  the  relief  may  be  marched  at  secure  arms. 

The  corporal  marches  on  the  left,  and  near  the  rear  file,  in  order 
to  observe  the  march.  The  corporal  of  the  old  guard  marches  on 
the  right  of  the  leading  file,  and  takes  command  when  the  last  one 
of  the  old  sentinels  is  relieved,  changing  places  with  the  corporal  of 
the   new  guard. 

150.  When  the  relief  arrives  at  six  paces  from  a  sentinel  the  cor- 
poral halts  it  and  commands,  according  to  the  number  of  the  post: 
No.  ( ). 

Both  sentinels  execute  port  arms  or  saber;  the  new  sentinel 
approaches  the  old,  halting  about  one  pace  from  him. 

151.  The  corporals  advance  and  place  themselves,  facing  each 
other,  a  little  in  advance  of  the  new  sentinel,  the  old  corporal  on  his 
right,  the  new  corporal  on  his  left,  both. at  right  shoulder,  and  observe 
that  the  old  sentinel  transimts  correctly  his  instructions : 


208  CHAPTER  Xill. 

The   following   diagram    will   illustrate    the   positions    taken: 

A 
R  — 

I    I    I    I    I  CI  II) 

I     I  I  I 

B 

R,  is  relief;  A,  the  new  corporal;  B,  the  old;  C,  the  new  sentinel, 
D,  the  old. 

152.  The  instructions  relative  to  the  post  liaving  been  communi- 
cated, the  new  corporal  commands:  Post;  both  sentinels  then  resume 
the  right  shoulder,  face  toward  the  new  corporal  and  step  back  so  as 
to  allow  the  relief  to  pass  in  front  of  them.  The  new  corporal  then 
commands,  1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH;  the  old  sentinel  takes  his  place 
in  rear  of  the  relief  as  it  passes  him,  his  piece  in  the  same  position  as 
those  of  the  relief.  The  new  sentinel  stands  fast  at  a  right  shoulder 
until  the  relief  has  passed  six  paces  beyond  him,  when  he  walks  his 
post.     The  corporals  take  their  places  as  the  relief  passes  them. 

153.  The  sentinels  at  the  guardhouse  are  the  first  relieved;  they 
are  left  at  the  guardhouse.     All  others  will  march  with  the  relief. 

154.  Mounted  sentinels  are  posted  and  relieved  in  accordance 
MHth  the  same  principles.   (See  par.   1072,  Cav.  D.  R.) 

155.  On  the  return  of  the  old  relief,  the  corporal  of  the  new  guard 
falls  out  when  the  relief  halts;  the  corporal  of  the  old  guard  forms 
his  relief  on  the  left  of  the  old  guard,  salutes,  and  reports  to  the 
commander  of  his  guard:  "Sir,  the  relief  is  present;"  or,  "Sir,  (so  and 
so)  is  absent,"  and  takes  his  place  in  the  guard. 

156.  To  post  a  relief  after  the  sentinels  of  the  old  guard  have 
been   relieved,   its   corporal   forms   it   by   the   commands: 

1.  (Such)  relief,  2.  FALL  IN;  and  if  arms  are  stacked,  3.  Take, 
4.  ARMS. 

The  relief  is  formed  in  double  or  single  rank  (according  as  the 
guard  is  formed)  facing  to  the  front,  with  arms  at  a4i  order  (see  par. 
109);  the  men  place  themselves  according  to  the  numbers  of  their 
respective  posts,  viz:  two,  four,  six,  and  so  on,  in  front  rank,  onC; 
three,  five,  and  so  on,  in  the  rear  rank,  or  in  the  order  of  their  respect- 
ive posts  from  right  to  left,  according  as  the  relief  is  in  double  or 
single  rank.  The  corporal,  standing  about  two  paces  in  front  of  the 
center   of  his   relief,   then    commands:    CALL   OFF. 


GUARD  DUTY.  209 

The  men  call  off  as  prescribed.  (Par.  149.).  The  corporal 
then    commands: 

1.  Port,  2.  ARMS,  3.  OPEN  CHAMBER,  4.  CLOSE  CHAMBER, 
5.  Order,  6.  ARMS;  faces  the  commander  of  the  guard,  executes  the 
rifle  salute,  reports,  "Sir,  the  relief  is  present";  or,  "Sir,  (so  and  so)  is 
absent,"  and  then  takes  his  place  on  the  right  at  order  arms. 

157.  Having  inspected  the  relief  (see  par.  86),  the  commander  of 
the  guard  directs  the  corporal,  Post  your  relief.  The  corporal  salutes 
and  posts  his  relief  as  prescribed  (pars.  149  to  153);  the  corporal  of  the 
relief  on  post  does  not  go  with  the  new  relief,  except  when  necessary 
to    show   the    way. 

158.  If  so  directed  by  the  commander  of  the  guard,  the  corporal, 
before  posting  his  relief,  will  command;  1.  With  ball  cartridges, 
2.   LOAD,  3.   Order,  4.  ARMS.    (G.   O.  30,  '09). 

159.  To  dismiss  the  old  relief,  it  is  halted  and  faced  to  the  front 
at  the  guardhouse  by  the  corporal  of  the  new  relief,  who  then  falls 
out;  the  corporal  of  the  old  relief  then  steps  in  front  of  the  relief, 
and  commands:  1.  Port,  2.  ARMS,  3.  OPEN  CHAMBER,  4.  CLOSE 
CHAMBER,  5.  DISMISSED,  or,  5.  Order,  6.  ARMS,  7.  Stack,  S. 
ARMS,  9.  DISMISSED. 

160.  Should  the  pieces  have  been  loaded  before  the  relief  was 
posted,  the  corporal  will,  before  dismissing  his  relief,  see  that  no 
cartridges  are  left  in  the  chambers  or  magazines.  The  same  rule  applies 
to  sentinels  over  prisoners. 

161.  Each  corporal  will  thoroughly  accjuaint  himself  with  all  the 
special  orders  of  eVery  sentinel  on  his  relief,  and  see  that  each 
sentinel  correctly  transmits  such  orders  in  detail  to  his  successor. 

162.  He  will  see  that  each  sentinel,  on  being  posted,  clearly  under- 
stands the  limits  and  extent  of  his  post. 

163.  There  should  be  at  least  one  noncommissioned  officer  con- 
stantly on  the  alert  at  the  guardhouse,  usually  the  corporal  whose 
relief  is  on  post.  This  noncommissioned  officer  takes  post  near  the 
entrance  of  the  guardhouse,  and  does  not  fall  in  with  the  guard  when 
it  is  formed.     He  will  have  his  rifle   constantly  with  him. 

164.  Whenever  it  becomes  necessary  for  the  corporal  to  leave 
his  post  near  the  entrance  of  the  guardhouse,  he  will  notify  the  ser- 
geant of  the  guard,  who  will  at  once  take  his  place,  or  designate 
another   noncommissioned   officer   to   do   so. 


210  CHAPTER  XIII. 

165.  He  will  see  that  no  person  enters  the  guardhouse,  or  guard 
tent,  or  crosses  the  posts  of  the  sentinels  there  posted,  without  proper 
authority. 

166.  Should  any  sentinel  call  for  the  corporal  of  the  guard,  the 
corporal  will,  in  every  case,  at  once  and  quickly  proceed  to  such 
sentinel.  He  will  notify  the  sergeant  of  the  guard  before  leaving 
the  guardhouse. 

167.  He  will  at  once  report  to  the  commander  of  the  guard  any 
violation  of  the  regulations  or  any  unusual  occurence  which  is  reported 
to  him  by  the  sentinel,  or  which  comes  to  his  notice  in  any  other  way. 

168.  Should  a  sentinel  call  "The  Guard,"  the  corporal  will 
promptly  notify  the  commander  of  the  guard. 

169.  Should  a  sentinel  call  "Relief,"  the  corporal  will  at  once 
proceed  to  the  post  of  such  sentinel,  taking  with  him  the  man  next 
for  duty  on  that  post.  If  the  sentinel  is  relieved  for  a  short  time  only, 
the  corporal  will  again  post  him  as  soon  as  the  necessity  for  his 
relief  ceases. 

170.  When  the  countersign  is  used,  the  corporal  at  the  posting  of 
the  relief  during  whose  tour  challenging  is  to  begin  gives  the  counter- 
sign to  the  members  of  the  relief,  excepting  those  posted  at  the 
guardhouse. 

171.  He  will,  at  the  proper  time,  notif}'-  No.  1  of  the  hour,  if 
sentinels  are  required  to  call  the  hours  or  half  hours  of  the  night. 

172.  He  will  wake  the  corporal  whose  relief  is  next  on  post  in 
time  for  the  latter  to  verify  the  prisoners,  form  his  relief,  and  post 
it  at  the  proper  hour. 

173.  Should  the  guard  be  turned  out,  each  corporal  will  call  his 
own   relief,   and   cause   its   members   to   fall   in   promptly. 

174.  Tents  or  bunks  in  the  same  vicinity  will  be  designated  for 
the  reliefs  so  that  all  the  members  of  each  relief  may,  if  necessary, 
be  found  and  turned  out  by  the  corporal  in  the  least  time  and  with  the 
least  confusion. 

175.  When  challenged  by  a  sentinel  while  posting  his  relief,  the 
corporal  commands:  1.  Relief,  2.  HALT;  to  the  sentinel's  challenge 
he  answers  "Relief,"  and  at  the  order  of  the  sentinel,  he  advances 
alone  to  give  the  countersign,  or  to  be  recognized.  When  the  sentinel 
says  "Advance  relief,"  the  corporal  commands:  1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH. 


GUARD  DUTY. 


_  i  1 


If  to  be  relieved,  the  sentinel  is  then  relieved  as  prescribed. 

176.  Between  retreat  and  reveille,  the  corporal  of  the  guard  will 
challenge  all  suspicious  looking  persons  or  parties  he  may  observe, 
first  halting  his  patrol  or  relief,  if  either  be  with  him.  He  will  advance 
them  in  the  same  manner  that  sentinels  on  post  advance  like  parties, 
l)nt  if  the  route  of  a  patrol  is  on  a  continuous  chain  of  sentinels,  he 
should  not  challenge  persons  coming  near  him  unless  he  has  reasons  to  be- 
lieve that  they  have  eluded  the  vigilance  of  sentinels. 

177.  Between    retreat    and    reveille,    whenever    so    ordered    by    an 
officer  entitled  to  inspect  the  guard,  the  corporal  will  call:  "Turn  out 
the  guard",  announcing  the  title  of  the  officer,  and  then,  if  not  other 
wise    ordered,    he    will    salute    and    return    to    his    post. 

178.  Between  retreat  and  reveille,  on  the  approach  of  an  armed 
party  other  than  a  returning  relief  or  detachment  of  the  guard,  he 
will  call:  "Turn  out  the  guard.  Armed  party,"  and  remain  where  he 
can  observe  the  movements  of  the  party  while  the  guard  is  forming 
and  then  return  to  his  post. 

179.  As  a  general  rule  he  will  advance  parties  approaching  the 
guard  at  night  in  the  same  manner  that  sentinels  on  post  advance  like 
parties.  Thus,  the  sentinel  at  the  guardhouse  challenges  and  repeats 
the  answer  to  the  corporal,  as  prescribed;  the  corporal,  advancing  at 
port  arms,  says:  "Advance  (so  and  so)  with  the  countersign,"  or  "to 
be  recognized,"  if  there  be  no  countersign  used;  the  countersign  being 
correctly  given,  or  the  party  being  duly  recognized,  the  corporal  says: 
"Advance  (so  and  so)";  repeating  the  answer  to  the  challenge  of  the 
sentinel. 

180.  When  officers  of  different  rank  approach  the  guardhouse 
from  different  directions  at  the  same  time,  the  senior  will  be  advanced 
first,  and  will  not  be  made  to  wait  for  his  junior. 

181.  Out  of  ranks  and  under  arms,  the  corporal  salutes  with 
the  rifle  salute.     He  will  salute  all  officers,  whether  by  day  or  night. 

182.  The  corporal  will  examine  parties  halted  and  detained  by 
sentinels,  and  if  he  have  reason  to  believe  the  parties  have  no  authority 
to  cross  sentinels'  posts,  will  conduct  them  to  the  commander  of  the 
guard. 

183.  The  corporal  of  the  guard  will  arrest  all  suspicious  looking 
characters    prowling    about    the    post    or    camp,    all    persons    of    a    dis- 


212  CHAPTER  XIIL 

orderly  character  disturbing  the  peace,  and  all  persons  taken  in  the 
act  of  committing  crime  against  the  Government  on  a  military 
reservation  or  post.  All  persons  arrested  by  corporals  of  the  guard, 
or  by  sentinels,  will  at  once  be  conducted  to  the  commander  of  the 
guard  by  the  corporal. 


APPLIED  PRINCIPLES  OF  INFORMATION      213 

AND  SECURITY. 


CHAPTER  XIV/'> 

APPLIED   PRINCIPLES   OF   INFORMATION   AND 

SECURITY 

(See  corresponding  chapter  in  Supplement  for  additional  matter  and  changes,  if  any.) 

Principles  of  Patrolling 

A  Patrols  are  small  bodies  of  infantry  or  cavalry,  from  three  men 
up  to  a  company  or  troop,  sent  out  from  a  command  on  the  march, 
or  at  a  halt,  to  gain  information  of  the  enemy  and  of  the  country,  to 
drive  off  small  hostile  bodies,  to  prevent  them  from  observing  the 
command,  or  for  other  specially  stated  objects. 

B  The  size  of  a  patrol  varies  with  its  object;  if  it  is  to  gain  informa 
tion  only,  it  should  be  as  small  as  possible,  allowing  two  men  for  each 
probable  message  to  be  sent;  if  it  is  to  fight,  it  should  be  strong 
enough  to  defeat  the  probable  enemy  against  it.  Patrols  are  named 
according  to  their  object,  reconnoitering,  visiting,  connecting,  exploring, 
flanking  patrols,  etc.  These  names  are  not  of  much  importance,  however, 
because  the  patrol's  orders  in  each  case  determine  its  duties. 

When    sent    out    for    information,    a    patrol    should    never    fight,    if 
possible  to  avoid  it. 

C  A  Noncommissioned  Officer,  selected  for  his  endurance,  good  judg- 
ment  and  bravery,  usually  commands  a  patrol,  though  an  officer  may 
be  so  assigned.  He  should  have  a  reliable  map,  an  accurate  watch, 
field  glasses,  compass,  whistle,  message  blanks  and  a  pencil. 

(l)This  chapter  was  prepared  with  the  assistance  of  Captain  C.  O.  Sherrill, 
Corps  of  Engineers,  Instructor  Army  Service  Schools,  Fort  Leavenworth,  Kansas,  and 
is  based  on  the  latest  revision  of  the  Field  Service  Regulations — not  yet,  July,  1909, 
issued  to  the  Army — the  text  of  which  has  been  used,  with  such  modifications  and 
additions  as  were  considered  necessary  to  meet  the  special  needs  of  noncommissioned 
officers. 


214 


CHAPTER  XIV. 


MESSAGE  BLANK: 


U-  S.  ARMY  FIELD  MESSAGE 


Coinmunicateci  by 

Buzzer,  Plione,  Telegrapli, 
Wireless,  lL,antern,  Helio, 
Flag,  Cyclist,  Fdot  Messen- 
ger,   Motintetl    Messenger. 

Underscore  means  used 


No. 


hent  by 
[These  spac 


Time 
as    for    Sig 


Ke(-d  by 
nal    Operato 


Time 
rs  only.] 


Check 


(Name    of   sending   detachment) 


From 


4t 


(Location  of  sending  detachment) 


Date Hour . 


.No. 


To. 


Recek'ed . 


The  heading  "From"  is  filled  in  with  the  name  of  the  detachment  sending  the 
information;  as  "Officer's  Patrol,  7th  Cav."  Messages  sent  on  the  same  day  from  the 
same  source  to  the  same  person  are  numbered  consecutively.  The  address  is  written 
briefly;  thus,  "Commanding  Officer,  Outpost,  1st  Brigade."  In  the  signature  the 
writer's  surname  only  and  rank  are  given.    . 

This  blank  is  four  and  a  half  by  eight  inches,  including  the  margin  on  the  Teft 
for  binding.  The  back  is  rviled  in  squares  and  provided  with  scales  for  use  in  marking 
simple  sketches  explanatory  of  the  message.  It  is  issued  by  the  Signal  Corps  in 
blocks  of  forty  with  duplicating  sheets.  The  regulation  envelope  is  three  by  five  and 
one-fourth  inches  and  is  printed  as  follows: 


To 


U.  S.  ARMY  FIELD  MESSAGE 

: A^ 


(For    Signal    operators    only) 


When  sent No. .  .  . 

Rate   of  speed    

Name  of  Messenger   

Wlrcn  and  by  7('hom.  rec'd    

•  THIS  ENVELOPE  WILL  BE  RETURNED  TO  BEARER 


APPLIED  PRINCIPLES  OE  INFORMATION 

AND  SECURITY. 


215 


A       Patrols  are  usually  sent  out  from  : 


They   may 
be  sent 
from 


Column, 
halted 


1.  Picket; 

2.  Support; 

3.  Reserve; 

4.  ]Main  body. 


Advancing 


Retreating 


1.  Advance  party; 

2.  Support; 

3.  Reserve; 

4.  Main   column. 


1.  Rear  party; 

2.  Rear  support; 

3.  Rear   reserve; 

4.  Main  column. 


B 


a. 
b. 

c. 
d. 


e. 
C 


Orders  given  to  a  Patrol  Commander  should  state  clearly: 

What  is  known  of  the  enemy. 

What  is  known  of  other  bodies  of  our  own  troops  liable  to  be 

met  by  the  patrol. 

The  plans  of  the  body  sending  out  the  patrol. 

What  are  the  exact  objects  to  be  sought  by  the  patrol;  whether 

to  gain  information,  or  fight;  what  general  direction  to  follow; 

how  long  to  stay  out  in  case  enemy  is  not  met. 

Where  are  the  reports  to  be  sent. 
As  soon  as  the  patrol  commander  gets  his  orders,  he  selects  the 
most  trustworthy  men  to  be  had,  tells  them  what  equipment,  ammuni- 
tion and  rations  to  take  with  them;  inspects  them,  their  arms,  and 
equipment  (and  horses,  if  mounted)  to  see  that  all  are  in  the  best  of 
condition,  and  that  nothing  to  attract  the  enemy's  attention  is  included, 
such  as  neighing  horses,  clanking  tins,  glistening  bayonets.  He  ex- 
plains to  them  carefully  the  patrol's  orders  and  how  he  intends  to 
carry  them  out.  He  tells  them  what  to  do  in  case  the  enemy  is  seen 
and  names  a  prominent  place  along  their  route  where  everyone  will 
hasten  if  the  patrol  should  become  split  up. 

D  The  patrol  is  now  ready  to  move  out  and  the  commander  tells 
each  man  what  his  position  is  to  be  at  the  start.  These  relative  posi- 
tions of  the  different  members  of  the  patrol  change  from  time  to  time 
as  the  ground  and  information  of  the  enemy  change,  but  it  is  to  be 
remembered  always  that  extra  men  should  nczer  he  sent  to  do  ivhat  a 
smaller  number  can  do  as  well.  If,  from  the  road,  the  country  for  ^  mile 
on  each  side  can  be  seen,  there  is  absolutely  no  use  in  sending  out 
flankers  a  few  hundred  yards  from  the  road.  They  would  only  delay 
the  advance  of  the  patrol,  attract  the  attention  of  the  enemy  and 
accomplish  nothing.     Patrolling,   like   everything  else,  is   a  matter   of 


216 


CHAPTER  XIV. 


common  sense,  so  it  should  always  be  kept  in  mind  what  the  orders 
are,  and  they  should  be  carried  out  as  rapidly,  quietly  and  secretly  as 
possible. 

A  Figure  2  gives  a  number  of  different  ways  of  placing  the  members 
of  different  sized  patrols.  These  are  merely  examples  and  the  arrange- 
ment must  vary  to  meet  every  condition  of  the  ground  and  enemy. 
The  patrol  should  not  march  bunched  up  in  one  body,  because  if 
ambushed  all  would  be  shot  or  captured. 

B        In   patrols   of  two   to   five   men   the   commander   generally   leads, 
n  this  formation  few  signals  are  necessary,  the  men  simply  regulating 
their  movement  by  those  of  the  patrol  leader. 


• 

•              • 

• 
• 

« 

• 

• 
• 

4 

^ 

« 

4 

k       • 

* 

• 

J  men. 

3-rnen 

#  -me/i 

itmtn. 

• 

STne/t 

• 

• 
• 

• 
• 

• 
• 

• 
• 

\ 

*         *        * 

•       k      • 

4 

• 

'    V 

*  \  • 

« 

• 

% 

•,             • 

sSmen. 

^Tnejx 

Ome/t 

7Tn€n. 

f  men       6  rnsn 

«  • 
• 

• 

•  • 
• 

V 

•  • 

1 

• 
• 

•• 

* 
• 
• 

ml*- 

iri^i-y 

/Zrnen 

ixmtn 

™» • 

iSmen. 

fSmtn  pa^inq 

Often 

c?oseS- 

(Fig.    2.) 

METHOD  OF  LEADING  A  PATROL 
C        The   patrol   must    advance    quickly   and    quietly,    be    vigilant    and 
make    all    possible    use    of    cover.      Whatever    the   formation    adopted,    it 
should  favor  the  escape  of  at  least  one  )iian  in  case  of  surprise. 

Villages  and  inclosures  involving  danger  of  surprise  are  entered 
with  precaution,  and  for  brief  periods  only.  Halts  are  made  at  points 
affording  good  view,  and  the  country  is  studied  in  all  directions,  land- 
marks to  the  rear  being  impressed  on  the  minds  of  the  men  so  that 
the  way  back  can  be  readily  found;  the  leader  consults  his  map  from 
time  to  time  and  keeps  himself  located  thereon. 


APPLIED  PRINCIPLES  OF  INFORMATION      217 

AND  SECURITY. 

When  a  patrol  is  scattered,  it  re-assembles  at  some  point 
previously  selected;  if  checked  in  one  direction  it  takes  another;  if 
cut  off,  it  returns  by  a  detour  or  forces  its  way  through.  As  a  last 
resort  it  scatters,  so  that  at  least  one  man  may  return  with  information. 

Occasionally  it  is  advisable  for  the  leader  to  conceal  his  patrol 
and  continue  the  reconnaissance  with  one  or  two  companions;  in  case 
of  cavalry  the  leader  and  men  thus  detached  should  be  well  mounted. 

Patrols  far  from  their  commands,  or  in  contact  with  the  enemy, 
often  remain  out  over  night.  In  such  cases  they  seek  a  place  of  con- 
cealment unknown  to  the  inhabitants,  proceeding  thereto  after  night 
fall,  or  under  cover. 

Opportunities  for  watering,  feeding  and  rest  must  not  be  neg- 
lected. When  necessar}^  the  leader  provides  for  subsistence  by  demand 
or  purchase. 

In  questioning  civilians  caution  is  observed  not  to  disclose 
information  that  may  be  of  value  to  the  enemy.  Strangers  are  not 
allowed  to  go  ahead  of  the  patrol.  Patrol  leaders  are  authorized  to 
seize  telegrams  and  mail  matter,  and  to  arrest  individuals,  reporting 
the  facts  as  soon  as  possible. 

Returning  patrols  near  their  own  lines  march  at  a  walk,  unless 
pressed  by  the  enemy. 

A  Signals — In  addition  to  the  usual  signals  prescribed  by  the 
drill  regulations,  the  following  should  be  clearly  understood  by  mem- 
bers of  a  patrol: 

Enemy  in  sight  in  small  numbers,  hold  the  rifle  above  the  head 
horizontally;  enemy  in  force,  same  as  preceding,  raising  and  lowering 
the  rifle  several  times;  take  cover,  a  downward  motion  of  the  hand. 

Other  signals  may  be  agreed  upon  before  starting,  but  they  must 
be  familiar  to  the  men  ;  complicated  signals  must  be  avoided.  Signals 
must  be  used  cautiously,  so  as  not  to  convey  information  to  the  enemy. 

SUGGESTIONS   FOR  THE   RECONNAISSANCE   OF  VARIOUS 

POSITIONS  AND   LOCALITIESi 

Cross  Roads — When  the  patrol  comes  to  a  cross-road,  two  men 
are  sent  along  it  on  each  flank  until  they  come  to  the  first  turn,  the 

1  By  permission  of  the  Commandant  of  Cadets,  West  Point,  these  s'.i.egestions, 
as  well  as  a  part  of  those  on  page  220,  and  "Facts  Which  Should  be  Obtained  by 
Patrols  in  Reference  to  Certain  Objects,"  page  222,  are  reproduced  from  "A  Manual 
of  the  Service  of  Security  and  Information,"  published  by  the  Department  of  Tactics, 
for  the  use  of  West  Point  Cadets. 


218  CHAPTER  XIV. 

patrol  halting".  If  the  men  see  nothing  suspicious,  they  return  and  the 
patrol  pushes  on.  If  anything  suspicious  is  seen,  one  man  rushes 
back  quickly  to  the  patrol,  while  the  other  remains  in  observation. 
If  the  patrol  is  very  small,  two  men  are  sent  first  to  one  flank  and 
then  to  the  other. 

A  Heights — In  reconnoitering  a  height,  if  the  patrol  is  large  enough 
to  admit  of  detaching  them,  one  or  two  men  climb  the  slope  on  either 
flank,  keeping  in  sight  of  the  patrol,  if  possible.  In  any  case,  one  man 
moves  cautiously  up  the  hill,  followed  by  the  others  in  single  file  at 
such  distance  that  each  keeps  his  predecessor  in  view. 
B  Defiles — On  approaching  a  defile,  if  the  time  permits,  the  heights 
on  either  side  are  reconnoitered  by  flankers  before  the  patrol  enters. 
If  the  heights  are  inaccessible  or  time  is.  urgent,  the  patrol  passes 
through,  in  single  file  at  double  time,  the  distance  being  the  same  as 
in  ascending  a  hill.  The  same  method  is  adopted  in  reconnoitering  a 
railroad  cut  or  sunken  road. 

C  Bridges  and  Fords — At  a  bridge  or  ford,  the  front  of  the  patrol 
is  contracted  so  as  to  bring  all  the  men  to  the  passage.  The  patrol 
then  crosses  rapidly,  and  takes  up  a  proper  formation.  A  bridge  is 
first  examined  to  see  that  it  is  safe  and  has  not  been  tampered  with 
by  the  enemy. 

D  Woods — The  patrol  enters  a  wood  in  skirmishing  order,  the 
intervals  being  as  great  as  may  be  consistent  with  mutual  observation 
and  support  on  the  part  of  the  members  of  the  patrol.  On  arriving 
at  the  farther  edge  of  the  wood,  the  patrol  remains  concealed  and 
carefully  looks  about  before  passing  out  to  the  open  ground.  When 
there  is  such  a  growth  of  underbrush  as  to  make  this  method  imprac- 
ticable, and  it  is  necessary  to  enter  a  wood  by  a  road,  the  road  is 
reconnoitered  as  in  case  of  defile,  though  not  usually  at  double  time. 
If  in  this  case  a  cross  road  is  found  in  the  wood,  the  patrol  is  assembled 
and  the  side  road  reconnoitered  before  passing  beyond  it. 

E  Enclosures — In  reconnoitering  an  enclosure,  such  as  a  garden, 
park  or  cemetery,  the  leading  patrollers  first  examine  the  exterior,  to 
make  sure  that  the  enemy  is  not  concealed  behind  one  of  the  faces 
of  the  enclosure.  They  then  proceed  to  examine  the  interior.  Great 
care  is  taken  in  reconnoitering  and  entering  an  enclosure. 

F  Positions — In  approaching  a  position,  but  one  man  advances,  and 
he  crawls  cautiously  toward  the  crest  of  the  hill,  or  edge  of  the  wood, 
or  opening  of  the  defile,  while  the  others  remain  concealed  in  the  rear 
until  he  signals  them  to  advance. 


APPLIED  PRINCIPLES  OF  INFORMATION      219 

AND  SECURITY. 

A  Houses — When  a  house  is  approached  by  a  patrol,  it  is  first  rccon- 
noitered  from  a  distance,  and  if  nothing  suspicious  is  seen,  it  is  then 
approached  by  two  men,  the  rest  of  the  party  remaining  concealed  in 
observation.  If  the  patrol  is  large  enough  to  admit  of  it,  four  men 
approach  the  house,  so  as  to  examine  the  front  and  back  entrances 
at  the  same  time.  Only  one  man  enters  the  door,  the  others  remaining 
outside  to  give  the  alarm,  should  a  party  of  the  enemy  be  concealed 
in  the  house.  The  patrol  does  not  remain  in  the  vicinity  of  the  house 
any  longer  than  necessary,  as  information  relative  to  its  numbers 
and  movements  might  be  given  to  the  enemy,  if  a  hostile  party 
should  subsequently  visit  the  place.  Farm  houses  are  searched 
for  newspapers,  and   the  inhabitants   questioned. 

B  Villages — In  approaching  a  village  one  or  two  men  are  sent  in 
to  reconnoiter  and  one  around  each  flank,  but  the  main  body  does  not 
enter  until  the  scouts  have  reported. 

If  the  presence  of  the  enemy  is  not  apparent,  the  patrol  enters 
the  village,  being  disposed  in  any  way  conforming  to  the  general  rule. 
A  suitable  formation  would  be  in  single  file  at  proper  distances,  each 
man  being  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  street  from  his  predecessor. 
The  patrol  pushes  rapidly  through  the  village  and  when  it  has  reached 
the  opposite  side,  two  of  the  party  are  detached,  if  expedient,  to  re 
enter  the  village  to  seek  further  information,  the  rest  of  the  patrol 
remaining  in  some  position  affording  observation  and  retreat. 

If  the  patrol  is  strong  enough,  it  seizes  the  postoffice,  telegraph 
office  and  railroad  stations,  and  secures  all  important  papers  that  may 
be  there.  If  the  patrol  is  part  of  the  advance  guard,  it  seizes  the  mayor 
and  postmaster  of  the  place  and  turns  them  over  to  the  commander  of 
the  van  guard  with  the  papers  seized. 

While  searching  a  village,  sentinels  are  placed  at  points  of  depart- 
ure to  prevent  any  of  the  inhabitants  from  leaving.  Tall  buildings 
and  steeples  are  ascended  and  an  extensive  view  of  the  surrounding 
country  obtained. 

C  Villages  at  Night — At  night  a  village  is  more  cautiously  ap- 
proached by  a  small  party  than  by  day.  The  patrol  glides  through 
back  alleys,  across  gardens,  etc.,  rather  than  moving  along  the  main 
street.     If  there  are  no  signs  of  the  enem}'-,  it  makes  inquiry.     If  no 


220  CHAPTER  XIV. 

light  is  seen,  and  it  seems  imprudent  to  rouse  any  of  the  people,  the 
patrol  watches  and  captures  one  of  the  inhabitants,  and  gets  from 
him  such  information  as  he  may  possess. 

The  best  time  for  a  patrol  to  approach  a  village  is  at  early  dawn, 
when  it  is  light  enough  to  see,  but  before  the  inhabitants  are  up. 

It  is  dangerous  in  the  extreme  for  a  small  patrol  to  enter  a 
village  unless  it  is  certain  that  it  is  not  occupied  by  the  enemy;  for 
the  men  could  be  shot  down  by  fire  from  the  windows,  cellarways,  etc., 
or   entrapped  and  captured. 

As  a  rule  large  towns  aud  cities  are  not  entered  by  small  patrols, 
but  are  watched  from  the  outside. 

SUGGESTIONS  AS  TO  THE  METHOD  OF  RECONNOITERING 
VARIOUS  FORMATIONS  OF  THE  ENEMY 

A  Enemy  in  Position — The  patrol  ascertains  the  direction  and 
extent  of  the  line  of  observation,  how  its  flanks  are  supported,  the 
position  of  the  sentinels,  their  number,  the  number  of  pickets,  the 
places  where  the  line  may  be  penetrated  with  the  least  risk  of  dis- 
covery, the  strength  of  the  hostile  patrols,  and  the  routes  taken  by 
them. 

It  is  of  importance  to  ascertain  whether  good  roads  extend 
laterally,  (that  is,  sidewise)  behind  the  enemy's  pickets,  as  such 
roads  could  be  used  by  a  force  sent  out  to  capture  them. 

The  patrol  may  approach  near  enough  to  the  sentinel  or  picket 
to  overhear  the  countersign  and  parole;  but  it  must  be  certain  that 
the  advantage  to  be  gained  is  worth  the  risk,  as  the  patrol  will  be 
in  danger  of  capture. 

If  a  point  can  be  found  on  the  flank  of  the  enemy's  position 
from  which  a  view  of  his  dispositions  in  rear  of  the  line  of  sentinels 
can  be  obtained,  the  commander  of  the  patrol  endeavors  to  gain  such 
a  point,  and,  concealing  his  patrol  near  at  hand,  makes  careful  obser- 
vation. 

The  best  time  for  observation  is  at  daybreak,  and  the  selected 
point  should  be  gained  before  dawn,  so  as  to  enable  the  patrol  to 
observe  the  relieving  of  the  outpost.  The  longer  the  patrol  remains 
the  more  it  will  see,  but  the  greater  will  be  its  danger  of  being  dis- 


APPLIED  PRINCIPLES  OF  INFORMATION      221 

AND  SECURITY. 

covered.  The  patrol  commander  remains  long  enough  to  gain  valuable 
information,  but  withdraws  in  time  to  escape  capture. 

Any  important  movements,  such  as  the  withdrawing  of  sentinels, 
the  changing  of  their  positions,  preparation  for  advance  or  retreat,  etc., 
are  at  once  reported. 

A  Enemy  on  the  March — If  the  enemy  is  on  the  march,  the  patrol 
conceals  itself  close  to  the  hostile  column,  but  far  enough  away  to 
escape  discovery  by  the  enemy's  flankers.  Conspicious  places  are 
avoided,  even  at  some  distance  from  the  column,  as  they  will  probably 
be  carefully  searched.  The  best  place  is  a  ditch  or  hollow,  which 
will  conceal  the  patrol  and  not  be  visible  even  at  a  short  distance. 

B  Method  of  Estimating  the  strength  of  a  column — The  strength 
of  a  body  of  troops  may  be  estimated  from  the  length  of  time  it  takes 
to  pass  a  given  point.  Assuming  that  infantry  in  column  of  fours 
occupies  half  a  yard  per  man,  cavalry  one  yard  per  trooper,  and 
artillery  in  single  column  twenty  yards  per  gun  or  caisson,  a  given 
point  would  be  passed  in  one  minute  by  about: 

175     infantry; 
110     cavalry,  at  walk; 
200     cavalry,  at  trot; 
5     guns  or  caissons. 
For     troops     in     columns     of     twos     take     one-half     of     the 
above  estimates. 

C  To  Capture  a  Sentinel — If  the  object  in  view  is  the  capture  of  a 
sentinel,  the  patrol  is  small.  A  sentinel  is  chosen  whose  post  can 
apparently  be  easily  approached,  who  appears  to  be  isolated  and  not 
in  plain  sight  of  his  picket.  The  patrol  steals  up  close  to  the  sentinel's 
post,  being  formed  as  circumstances  may  require,  and,  upon  a  signal, 
rushes  forward,  surrounds  the  sentinel  and  seizes  him  before  he 
can  fire.  If  he  fires,  the  patrol  can  probably  run  him  of¥  before  he 
can  receive  any  assistance,  provided  he  has  been  surprised. 

D  To  Capture  Prisoners — When  a  large  patrol  is  charged  with  the 
capture  of  prisoners,  its  commander  seeks  a  place  of  observation  for 
himself  and  a  place  of  concealment  for  his  men;  the  two  places  being 
either  the  same  or  near  each  other.  He  then  waits  until  one  or  a 
small  party  of  the  enemj'-  draw  far  enough  away  from  their  camp  or 


222  CHAPTER  XIV. 

column  to  be  beyond  the  reacli  of  proper  assistance,  and  waylays  or 
gives  chase  to  them.  In  these  expeditions  the  prime  objects  is  to 
bring  in  the  prisoners,  and  harsh  measures  to  hasten  their  march  are 
excusable. 

When  prisoners  have  been  captured  it  is  necessary  to  question 
them  carefully.  The  most  favorable  moment  for  questioning  prisoners 
is  when  they  have  just  been  captured.  They  are  then  agitated  and 
have  not  sufficient  self-control  to  deceive.  The  longer  the  questioning 
is  postponed,  the  more  evasive  and  studied  will  their  answers  become. 
Their  answers  at  the  place  of  capture  may,  to  a  certain  extent  be 
verified.  Such  is  not  the  case  after  the  lapse  of  some  time  and  in 
another  place. 

The  prisoners  are  questioned  at  once  and  their  replies  are 
written  down  without  their  knowledge,  and  sent  with  the  prisoner  to 
the  officer  sending  out  the  patrol,  where  they  arc  questioned  at 
greater   length. 

Enlisted  men  are  questioned  in  regard  to  the  regiment,  brigades 
and  divisions:  the  length  of  time  they  have  been  in  position;  whether 
their  rations  are  satisfactory;  whether  certain  commanders  are  popu- 
lar and  have  the  confidence  of  their  men  ;  whether  there  are 
many  men  on  sick  report;  what  news  has  lately  been  received  in 
camp;  and  what  the  rumors  are — in  brief,  all  questions  intended  to 
bring  out  information  in  regard  to  the  enemy's  position,  movements 
and  morale  (that  is,  the  condition  of  the  enemy  as  to  discipline,  his 
spirit,  esprit  de  corps,  etc.)  If  tact  is  exercised  in  questioning,  much 
information  may  be  gained;  for  the  prisoner  will  probably  consider 
the  questions  as  prompted  merely  by  natural  curiosity. 

FACTS   WHICH    SHOULD   BE   OBTAINED    BY   PATROLS   IN 
REFERENCE  TO  CERTAIN  OBJECTS 

A  Roads — Their  direction;  their  nature  (macadamized,  corduroy, 
plank,  dirt,  etc.);  their  condition  of  repair;  their  grade;  the  nature  of 
cross  roads,  and  the  points  where  they  leave  the  main  roads;  their 
borders  (woods,  hedges,  fences  or  ditches);  the  places  at  which  they 
pass  through  defiles,  cross  heights  or  rivers,  and  where  they  intersect 
railroads;  their  breadth  (whether  suitable  for  column  of  fours  or 
platoons,  etc.). 

B        Railroads — Their  direction;  guage;  the  number  of  tracks;  stations 


APPLIED  PRINCIPLES  OF  INFORMATION      223 

AND  SECURITY. 

and  junctions;  their  grade;  llic  nature  of  the  cuts,  embankments  and 
tunnels. 

A  Bridges — Their  position;  their  width  and  length;  their  construc- 
tion (wood,  brick,  stone  or  iron) ;  the  roads  and  approaches  on  each 
bank. 

B  Rivers  and  Other  Streams — Their  direction,  width  and  depth; 
the  rapidity  of  the  current;  liability  to  sudden  rises  and  the  highest 
and  lowest  points  reached  by  the  water,  as  indicated  by  drift  wood, 
etc.;  fords;  the  nature  of  the  banks;  kind,  position  and  number  of 
islands  at  suitable  points  of  passage;  heights  in  the  vicinity  and 
their  command  over  the  banks. 

C  Woods — Their  situation,  extent  and  shape;  whether  clear  or 
containing  underbrush;  the  number  and  extent  of  "clearings"  (open 
spaces);  whether  cut  up  by  ravines,  or  containing  marshes,  etc.; 
nature   of  roads   passing   through   them. 

D  Canals — Their  direction,  width  and  depth;  condition  of  towpaths; 
locks  and  means  of  protecting  or  destroying  them. 

E  Telegraphs — Whether  they  follow  railroads  or  common  roads; 
stations;  number  of  wires. 

F  Villages — Their  situation  (on  a  height,  in  a  valley  or* on  a  plain); 
nature  of  the  surrounding  country;  construction  of  the  houses,  nature 
and  width   of  streets;   means  of  defense. 

G  Defiles — Their  direction;  whether  straight  or  crooked;  whether 
heights  on  either  side  are  accessible  or  inaccessible;  nature  of  ground 
at  each  extremity;  width  (frontage  of  column  that  can  pass  through). 

H  Ponds  and  Marshes- — Means  of  crossing;  defensive  use  that  might 
be  made  of  them  as  obstacles  against  enemy;  whether  the  marshy 
grounds  are  practicable  for  any  or  all  arms. 

I       Springs  and   Rivulets — Nature   of  approaches;   whether   water   is 
drinkable  and  abundant. 

K  Valleys — Extent  and  nature;  towns,  villages,  hamlets,  streams, 
roads  and  paths  therein;  obstacles  offered  by,  or  in  the  valley,  to  the 
movement  of  troops. 

J  Heights — Whether  slopes  are  easy  or  steep;  whether  good  de- 
fensive positions  are  offered;  whether  plateau  is  wide  or  narrow; 
whether  passages  are  easy  or  difficult;  whether  the  ground  is  broken 
or  smooth,  wooded  or  clear. 


224  CHAPTER  XIV. 

A  Methods  Used  by  a  Patrol  in  Destroying  Roads,  Railroads  and 
Telegraph  Lines. 

When  the  obj^ect  is  the  destruction  of  roads,  railroads,  or  tele- 
graph lines,  the  patrol,  is  generally  a  large  one,  but  in  some  cases 
a  small  patrol  answers  the  purpose  better,  as  it  can  move  to  its  destina- 
tion more  secretly,  and  the  use  of  high  explosives  gives  it  a  great 
destructive  power.  The  patrol  endeavors  to  reach  its  objective  unseen, 
and  part  are  on  the  alert  watching  the  enemy  while  the  rest  of  the 
men  are  engaged  in  the  work  of  destruction. 

B  Tapping  Wires — A  patrol  may  be  sent  out  to  gain  information 
by  "tapping"  a  telegraph  line.  In  this  case  a  telegraph  operator,  using 
a  sinall  pocket  instrument,  taps  the  line  and  learns  the  messages 
passing  over  it.  The  rest  of  the  men,  carefully  concealed,  look  out 
for  the  enemy.  A  patrol  for  the  purpose  of  tapping  a  telegraph  line 
is  generally  a  cavalry  patrol  sent  out  from  the  cavalry  screen  or  from 
a  raiding  column. 

C  Messages — When  the  enemy  is  positivel}^  discovered  for  the  first 
time,  a  message  should  be  sent  to  the  body  sending  out  the  patrol, 
giving  accurate  details. 

A  message  should  also  be  sent  when  any  new  event  of  import- 
ance occurs,  such  as  a  change  in  disposition  of  the  enemy.  The  exact 
location  of  the  enemy — whether  deployed,  marching  or  in  camp — his 
strength  and  the  arms  of  service  are  next  ascertained  and  reported. 
It  is  often  difficult  to  decide  whether  the  troops  discovered  r.re  the 
main  body  or  merely  the  advance  guard  or  outposts.  The  ru)e  is  to 
observe  the  main  body. 

Care  should  be  taken  by  patrol  commanders  to  distinguish 
between  what  he  personally  knows  and  what  he  is  told  or  guesses  at. 
A  message  should  ahvays  state  zuhat  the  patrol  is  going  to  do  next.  The 
bearer  of  a  verbal  message  should  be  required  to  repeat  it  to  be  sure 
he   understands   it. 

REPORTS 

D  On  the  return  of  the  patrol,  the  patrol  commander  should  make 
a  formal  report  to  the  commander  of  the  body  sending  the  patrol  out, 
giving  an  account  of  every  detail  required  by  his  orders.  Many  of  these 
details  will  have  been  given  in  the  messages  sent  in  before  this,  but 
in  a  more  condensed  or  briefer  form.     These  will  cover  information  of 


APPLIED  PRINCIPLES  OF  INFORMATION      225 

AND  SECURITY. 

the  enemy,  of  our  troops  encountered,  and  description  of  the  ground 
passed  over,  etc. 

In  coming  to  conclusions  as  to  facts  to  be  stated  in  messages 
and  reports,  the  patrol  commander  will  be  assisted  by  the  following 
indications: 

A  The  Noise  Made  by  Bodies  of  Troops  on  The  March.  The 
noise  made  by  a  strong  column  on  the  march  is  distinct  and  con- 
tinuous; that  of  a  small  body,  feeble  and  interrupted.  Th'e  dis- 
tance at  which  the  noise  of  marching  can  be  heard  depends  upon 
the  nature  of  the  ground  marched  over,  the  direction  of  the  wind,  the 
presence  or  absence  of  other  sounds.  On  a  calm  night,  a  company  of 
infantry,  marching  at  route  step  on  a  hard  road,  can  be  heard  at  a 
distance  of  500  or  600  yards;  a  troop  of  cavalry  at  a  walk,  600  or  700 
yards;  a  troop  of  cavalry  at  trot  or  gallop,  artillery  and  heavy  wagons, 
900  or  1,000  yards. 

Rumors  of  the  withdrawal  of  heavy  materials  and  baggage  are 
signs  that  a  retreat  is  planned.  When  the  retreat  is  accompanied  by 
demolition  of  bridges,  destruction  of  stores  and  local  resources,  it 
may  be  assumed  that  importance  is  attached  to  retard  as  much  as 
possible  the  progress  of  the  enemy,  and  that  the  retreat  will  be  a 
long  one. 

B  Dust — The  dust  raised  by  the  march  of  a  column  furnishes  an 
indication  of  the  direction  of  the  march,  and  the  strength  and  compo- 
sition of  the  column.  When  infantry  is  marching  the  dust  is  low  and 
thick.  With  cavalry  the  dust  is  higher  and  as  this  arm  moves  rapidly, 
the  upper  part  of  the  cloud  is  thinner  and  disappears  more  quickly 
than  in  the  case  of  infantry.  The  clouds  of  dust  raised  by  i.rtillery 
and  wagons  are  unequal  in  height  and  disconnected.  Hence,  by  noting 
the  length  of  a  line  of  dust  and  the  intervals  in  it,  the  strength  and 
composition  of  the  column  may  be  estimated.  The  effect  of  the  wind 
in  scattering  the  dust  must  be  taken  into  consideration. 

C  Camp  Noises — The  rumble  of  vehicles,  cracking  of  whips,  neigh- 
ing of  horses,  braying  of  mules  and  barking  of  dogs  often  indicate  the 
arrival  or  departure  of  troops.  If  the  noise  remains  in  the  same  place 
and  new  fires  are  lighted,  it  is  probable  that  reinforcements  have 
arrived.  If  the  noise  grows  more  indistinct,  the  troops  are  probably 
withdrawing.     If,  added  to  this,  the  fires  appear  to  be  dying  out,  and 


226  CHAPTER  XIV. 

the  enemy  seems  to  redouble  the  vigilance  of  the  outposts,  the  indica 
tions  of  retreat  are  strong. 

A  Flames  and  smoke — If  at  night  the  flames  of  an  enemy's  camp 
fires  disappear  and  reappear,  something  is  moving  between  the 
observer  and  the  fires.  If  smoke  as  well  as  flame  is  visible,  the  fires 
are  very  near.  If  the  fires  are  very  numerous  and  lighted  successively, 
and  if  soon  after  being  lighted  they  go  out,  it  is  probable  that  the 
enemy  is  preparing  a  retreat  and  trying  to  deceive  us.  If  the  fires 
burn  brightly  and  clearly  at  a  late  hour,  the  enemy  has  probably 
gone,  and  has  left  a  detachment  to  keep  the  fires  burning.  If,  at  an 
unusual  time,  much  smoke  is  seen  ascending  from  an  enemy's  camo 
it  is  probable  that  he  is  engaged  in  cooking  preparatory  to  moving  oflf. 
If  lines  of  smoke  are  seen  rising  at  several  points  along  a  rail- 
way line  in  the  enemy's  rear,  it  may  be  surmised  that  the  railroad  is 
being  destroyed  by  burning  the  cross-ties,  and  that  a  retreat  is  planned. 

B  Reflection  from  Weapons — If  the  reflection  is  very  brilliant,  it 
is  probable  that  the  troops  are  marching  toward  the  observer;  other- 
wise it  is  probable  that  they  are  marching  in  the  other  direction. 

C  Limits  of  Visions — On  a  clear  day  a  man  with  good  vision  can 
see: 

At  a  distance  of  9  to  12  miles,  church  spires  and  towers; 

At  a  distance  of  5  to  7  miles,  windmills; 

At   a   distance   of  2   to   2Ja   miles,   chimneys   of   light   color; 

At  a  distance  of  2,000  yards,  trunks  of  large  trees; 

At  a  distance  of   1,000  yards,   single   posts; 

At  500  yards  the  panes  of  glass  may  be  distinguished  in  a  window. 

Troops  are  visible  at  2,000  yards,  at  which  distance  a  mounted 
man  looks  like  a  mere  speck;  at  1,200  yards  infantry  can  be  dis- 
tinguished from  cavalry;  at  1,000  yards  a  line  of  men  looks  like  'i 
broad  belt;  at  600  yards  the  files  of  a  squad  can  be  counted,  and  at 
400  yards  the  movements  of  the  arms  and  legs  can  be  plainly  seen. 

The  larger,  brighter  or  better  lighted  an  object  is,  the  nearer  it 
seems.  An  object  seems  nearer  when  it  has  a  dark  background 
thun  when  it  has  a  light  one,  and  closer  to  the  observer  when  tl^e  a'r 
is  clear  than  when  it  is  raining,  snowing,  fogg}^  or  the  atmosphere 
is  filled  with  smoke.  An  object  looks  farther  off  when  the  observer 
is  lacing  the  sun  than  when  he  has  his  back  to  it.  A  smooth  expauso 
of  snow,  grain  fields  or  water  makes  distances  seem  shorter  than 
they  really  are. 


APPLIED  PRINCIPLES  OF  INFORMATION      227 

AND  SECURITY. 

A  Trail  of  the  Enemy — If  the  ground  is  evenly  trodden,  the  column 
was  composed  of  infantry  alone.  If  there  are  many  prints  of  horse- 
shoes, the  column  also  contained  cavalry.  If  the  wheel  tracks  are 
deep  and  wide,  artillery  was  in  the  column.  If  the  trail  is  fresh,  the 
column  has  recently  passed.  If  the  trail  is  narrow,  the  troops  felt 
secure,  as  they  were  marching  in  column  of  route;  if  broad,  they 
expected  an  action,  as  they  were  marching  in  column  of  platoons  or 
companies,  ready  to  deploy.  If  the  fields  on  each  side  of  the  road 
are  cut  up  with  many  tracks,  the  cavalry  marched  on  the  flanks  of  the 
column,  and  the  enemy  was  pushing  on  with  his  troops  well  m  hand 
for  action.  A  retreating  army  makes  a  broad  trail  across  fields, 
especially  before  the  rear  guard  is  formed  and  the  retreat  is  regularly 
organized. 

B  Abandoned  Camps — Indications  are  found  in  the  remains  of 
camp  fires.  They  will  show,  by  their  degree  of  freshness,  whether 
much  or  little  time  elapsed  since  the  enemy  left  the  place,  and  the 
quantity  of  cinders  will  give  an  indication  of  the  length  of  time  he 
occupied  it.  They  will  also  furnish  a  means  of  estimating  his  force 
approximately,   ten   men  being  allowed  to   each   fire. 

Other  valuable  indications  in  regard  to  the  length  of  time  the 
position  was  occupied  and  the  time  when  it  was  abandoned  may  be 
found  in  the  evidence  of  care  or  haste  in  the  construction  of  huts  or 
shelters,  and  in  the  freshness  of  straw,  grain,  dung  or  the  entrails 
of  slaughtered  animals.  Abandoned  clothing,  equipments  or  harness 
will  give  a  clue  to  the  arms  and  regiments  composing  a  retreating 
force.  Dead  horses  lying  about,  broken  weapons,  discarded  knapsacks, 
abandoned  and  broken  down  wagons,  etc.,  are  indications  of  its 
fatigue  and  demoralization  Blood}^  bandages  lying  about,  and  many 
fresh  graves,  are  evidences  that  the  enemy  is  heavily  burdened  with 
wounded  or  sick. 

PROBLEMS 

(See  Fort  Leavenworth  map  in  pocket  at  back  of  book). 

Read  each  problem  carefully  and  solve  its  difTferent  requirements 
without  looking  at  the  solution.  Then  compare  your  answer  with  the 
answer  given  in  the  text.  In  all  solutions  study  carefully  the  para- 
graphs referred   to   in   the   text. 

(Note:  vn',  un',  um',  etc.,  means  that  the  points  named  are  located  at 
the  approximate  interesection  of  east  and  west  lines  running  through  v, 
u,  etc.,  and  north  and  south  lines  running  through  n',  m',  etc.,  on  margin 
of  map.) 


228  CHAPTER  XIV. 

PROBLEM  1 


Situation: 

A  Blue  force  of  one  regiment  of  infantry  has  outposts  facing 
south  on  the  line  Pope  Hill  (sm') — National  cemetery  (pk') — E  (qh'). 
A  red  force  is  reported  to  have  reached  Soldiers'  Home  (3  miles  south  of 
Leavenworth)  from  the  south  at  7  :oo  o'clock  this  morning.  Corporal  A 
is  directed  by  Sergeant  B,  in  command  of  the  left  support  at  Rabbit  Point 
(tn'),  to  take  out  a  patrol  toward  the  waterworks  and  south  along  the 
Esplanade  (xo')  to  the  Terminal  Bridge. 

Required,  1.     Give  Sergeant  B's  orders  to  Corporal  A. 

Answer.  "The  enemy,  strength  unknown,  was  at  Soldiers'  Home 
at  7:00  o'clock  this  morning.  Another  patrol  will  advance  along 
Grant  avenue  (tui'). 

"Our  outposts  will  remain  here  for  the  day. 

"Select  from  the  first  section  a  patrol  and  reconnoiter  this  road 
(Faragut  avenue)   as  far  as  the  waterworks    (vn'),  thence  by  Esplanade 
to  the  Terminal  Bridge,  and  report  on  the  ground  in  our  front.     When 
you  reach  the  Terminal  Bridge  return  if  no  enemy  is  seen. 
"Send  reports  here.'" 

Required,  2. 

How  many  men  does  Corporal  A  select,  and  why?  (Par.  B,  page 
213,  and  Par.  C,  page  256). 

Answer.  Five  men  are  taken  because  the  patrol  is  to  reconnoiter, 
not  to  fight,  and  on  account  of  the  distance  to  go  and  lack  of  informa- 
tion of  the  enemy,  2  or  3  messages  may  have  to  be  sent. 

Required,  j.  What  equipment  should  Corporal  A  have?  (Par.  C, 
page  213). 

Required,  4.  State  the  points  to  be  noted  by  Corporal  A  in  select- 
ing his  patrol  and  what  inspection  does  he  make?     (Par.  C,  page  215). 

Answer.  He  selects  privates  C,  D,  E,  F,  and  G,  on  account  of 
their  bravery,  attention  to  duty  and  discretion.  He  directs  them  lo  carry 
one  meal  in  their  haversacks,  full  canteen  and  fifty  rounds  of  ammuni- 
tion. He  then  inspects  them  as  to  their  physical  condition,  sees  that 
they  have  proper  equipment  and  that  nothing  to  rattle  or  glisten  is 
carried. 

Required,  5.     What  does  Corporal  A  next  do?     (Par.  D,  page  215). 

Answer.  He  gives  them  their  instructions  as  follows :  "The 
enemy,  strength  unknown,  was  at  Soldiers'  Home  (about  three  miles 
south    of    Leavenworth)    at    7    o'clock    this    morning.      There    will    be    n 


APPLIED  PRINCIPLES  OF  INFORMATION      229 

AND  SECURITY. 

friendly  patrol  along  that  road  (pointing  to  Grant  avenue).  We  are  to 
reconnoiter  along  this  road  and  down  toward  that  bridge  (pointing). 
Be  very  careful  not  to  be  seen,  take  advantage  of  all  cover,  and  keep 
touch  with  C  and  myself  on  this  road  at  the  point  of  the  patrol.  In  case 
we  get  separated  meet  at  the  watedworks  (vn')." 

He  then  explains  the  signals  to  be  used,  and  moves  the  patrol  in 
close  order  out  along  the  road  until  it  passes  the  sentinel  at  the  bridge  XV 
(un'),  to  whom  he  gives  the  direction  to  be  taken  by  the  patrol. 

Required,  6.  Upon  leaving  XV,  what  formation  would  the  patrol 
take,  and  reasons  for  same.     (Par.  D,  page  215,  and  Par.  A,  page  216). 

Answer.  Corporal  A  and  Private  C  form  the  point  on  the  road 
leading  southwest  of  the  waterworks ;  Private  D  moves  on  the  left  over- 
looking the  railroad;  Private  E  moves  promptly  up  Corral  creek  {um') 
to  the  top  of  Grant  Hill  {um')  to  observe  the  country  toward  the  south- 
west; Private  F  moves  about  50  yards  in  rear  of  the  point,  followed  at 
50  yards  by  Private  G. 

Corporal  A  forms  his  patrol  as  stated  because  of  the  necessity  of 
getting  a  view  from  the  hill  on  each  side.  Only  one  man  is  sent  out  on 
each  side  because  they  can  be  plainly  seen  by  the  patrol  on  the  road, 
and  no  connecting  file  is  necessary.  (Par.  D,  page  215).  The  distances 
taken  along  the  road  assure  at  least  one  man's  escape,  and  Corporal  A  is 
in  front  to  get  a  good  view  and  to  signal  the  flankers.     (Par.  A,  page  216). 

PROBLEM  2 

Situation  : 

The  head  of  the  patrol  is  now  at  the  bridge,  XVI  (un')  northwest 
of  the  waterworks. 

Private  E  has  reached  the  top  of  Grant  Hill  and  signals  the  enemy 
in  sight ;  the  patrol  halts  and  Corporal  A  moves  out  to  meet  Private  E 
who  is  coming  down  toward  the  patrol.  He  says  he  saw  three  mounted 
men  ride  up  to  Grant  and  Metropolitan  avenues  (zvm')  from  the  south 
and  after  looking  north  a  moment  move  west. 

Required,  i.     Corporal  A's  action.     (Par.  C,  page  224). 

Answer.  Corporal  A  at  once  writes  the  following  message  and 
sends  it  back  by  Private  E: 


230  CHAPTER  XIV. 

"No.    1.  Patrol,  Company  B, 

Farragut  Avenue, 
Northwest  of  Waterworks, 
To  Commander  Blue  Left  Support,  10   May   '09,   8.30   A.   M. 

Rabbitt   Point. 
3    mounted    Reds,    seen    by    Private    E,    just    now    reconnoitered    at    Grant    and 
Metropolitan  avenues;   they   are   moving   west   on   Metropolitan   avenue;    the   patrol   will 
continue   toward   the   Terminal    Bridge.  A, 

Corporal. 

Reasons.  The  message  is  sent  because  this  is  the  first  time  the 
enemy  has  been  seen,  and  they  have  not  been  reported  north  of  Sol- 
diers' Home  before.  The  message  should  state  who  saw  the  enemy,  and  * 
the  man  seeing  them  should  always  carry  the  message  telling  of  the 
facts.  The  patrol  would  not  allow  this  small  hostile  patrol  to  stop  its 
advance,  but  would  proceed  on  its  route  cautiously  to  avoid  being  seen, 
and  to  see  if  the  Red  cavalrymen  are  followed  by  others  of  the  enemy. 

Required,  2.  Give  the  method  of  reconnoitering  the  buildings  at 
the  waterworks  and  coal  mine.  (Par.  F,  page  218,  and  Pars.  A  and  B, 
page  219). 

Answer.  Private  D  carefully  examines  the  east  side  of  the  enclo- 
sures and  buildings,  while  Private  C  examines  the  west  side.  The  re- 
mainder of  the  patrol  halts  concealed  in  the  cut  west  of  the  north  en- 
closure, until  C  and  D  signal  no  enemy  in  sight,  whereupon  the  patrol 
moves  forward  along  the  road  (XV — 3rd  St.)  C  and  D  advancing 
rapidly  between  the  buildings  to  the  town  where  they  join  the  patrol. 

Required,  3.  Give  the  route  followed  by  E  from  Grant  hill  to  the 
edge  of  Leavenworth.     (Par.  B  and  C,  page  216). 

Answer.  He  moves  down  the  east  slope  of  Grant  Hill  to  the  ravine 
just  east  of  the  old  R.  R.  bed  (um')  being  careful  to  keep  concealed 
from  the  direction  of  Leavenworth.  Pie  moves  up  the  ravine,  keeping 
a  sharp  lookout  to  the  front,  and  moving  rapidly  until  abreast,  if  he  has 
fallen  behind.  He  takes  the  branch  ravine  lying  just  west  of  Circus 
Hill  (vm'),  and  moves  up  to  its  end.  Here  he  halts  and  makes  careful 
inspection  of  Metropolitan  avenue  and  the  street  south  into  the  city. 
Being  sure  the  coast  is  clear,  he  darts  across  the  narrow  ridge  south  of 
Circus  Hill  to  the  ravine  to  the  east  and  then  joins  the  patrol.  He  re- 
ports to  Corporal  A  any  indication  of  the  enemy  he  may  have  seen. 


APPLIED  PRINCIPLES  OF  INFORMATION      231 

AND  SECURITY. 

PROBLEM  3 

Situation. 

A  Blue  force  holds  Fort  Leavenworth  (om' )  in  hostile  country.  Outposts 
occupy  the  line  Salt  Creek  Hill  (gli')—U  (//)— Sheridan's  Drive, 
(mi')  against  the  Reds  advancing  from  the  northwest. 

At  4.30  p.  m.  June  25th,  Sergeant  A  is  given  the  following  orders 
by  Captain  B,  commanding  the  support : 

'The  enemy  will  probably  reach  Kickapoo  late  today.  Our  out- 
posts extend  as  far  north  as  Salt  Creek  Hill.  There  were  six  of  our 
men  prisoners  at  45  (dc')  this  afternoon  at  i  o'clock,  being  held  by  15 
home  guards  at  Kickapoo.  Take  .  .  .  men  from  the  company  and  move  to 
Kickapoo,  recapture  the  prisoners  and  -gain  all  the  information  you  can 
of  the  enemy  north  of  there." 

keqtiired,  i.  How  many  men  does  Captain  B  name,  and  why? 
(Par.  B,  page  213). 

Answer.     30  men  are  assigned. 

Reason.  This  is  twice  as  many  as  the  enemy  holding  the  prisoners, 
and  to  secure  secrecy  no  larger  force  than  absolutely  necessary  should 
be  taken.  This  force  will  allow  men  to  surround  the  enemy  while  the 
remainder  rush  them. 

Required,  2.  Give  the  order  of  Sergeant  A  to  his  patrol  (see  6th 
requirement  Problem  1,  and  Pars.  C  and  D,  page  215). 

Required,  3.     What  route  will  the  patrol  take. 

Anszver.  11  (//') — 13  (//') — Salt  Creek  Hill  (gh') — and  along  the 
edge  of  the  woods  east  of  the  M.  P.  R.  R.  (fg')  as  far  as  the  bridge  oppo- 
site Kickapoo  Hill — thence  up  Kickapoo  Hill  toward  45  (dc'). 

Reasons.  Since  the  patrol's  orders  do  not  require  any  reconnais- 
sance before  reaching  Kickapoo  the  shortest  and  most  practical  route  is 
chosen.  The  route  as  far  as  Salt  Creek  Hill  lies  behind  our  outpost  line 
and  is  thus  protected.  The  main  roads  are  avoided  because  they  will  be 
carefully  watched  by  the  enemy.  The  edge  of  the  woods  east  of  the  M. 
P.  Ry.  (beginning  about  ff')  gives  good  cover  and  by  moving  to  the 
bridge  the  patrol  can  probably  sneak  close  in  on  the  enemy  and  capture 
them  by  surprise. 

PROBLEM  4 

Situation. 

The  patrol  reaches  the  top  of  Kickapoo  Hill  (cd').  Sergeant  A  and 
private   C  move  cautiously  to   the  top  and   see  the   six   prisoners  in   the 


232  CHAPTER  XIV. 

cemetery  (cd')  just  west  of  Kickapoo  Hill,  and  a  Red  sentinel  at  each 
corner  .  Just  west  of  the  cemetery  are  about  lo  more  Reds.  No  others 
are  visible. 

Required,  i.  What  decision  does  Sergeant  A  make  and  what  does 
he  do? 

Answer.  He  decides  to  capture  the  enemy  by  surprise.  He  leaves 
Private  C  to  watch  and,  moving  cautiously  back  to  his  patrol,  makes  the 
following  dispositions :  Corporal  D  with  lo  men  to  move  up  to  Private 
C  and  cover  the  enemy,  remaining  concealed.  He  takes  the  remainder  of 
the  patrol  with  fixed  bayonets  around  the  northeast  slope  of  Kickapoo 
Hill  in  the  woods  and  moves  up  the  ravine  toward  29.  When  his  de- 
tachment arrives  within  about  100  yards  of  the  enemy,  they  charge  bayonet 
and  rush  them.  Corporal  D's  party  at  the  same  time  rush  in  from  the 
opposite  side.  (Note:  The  enemy  are  demoralized  by  the  surprise  and 
are  captured  without  a  shot  being  fired.) 

Required,  2.     What  action  does  Sergeant  A  now  take? 

Answer.  He  causes  the  enemy  to  be  kept  apart  while  he  and  his 
noncommissioned  officers  question  them  separately.  (Par.  D,  page  221). 
He  then  questions  the  Blue  prisoners,  and  furnishing  them  the  guns 
taken  from  the  Reds,  sends  them  and  the  captured  Reds  back  to  our 
line  under  Corporal  D,  with  a  written  message  giving  the  information 
secured  from  his  questions.     (Par.  C,  page  224). 

Required,  j.     What  does  he  then  do? 

Anszver.  Places  his  main  body  in  concealment  at  the  Cemetery 
(cd')  and  sends  a  patrol  under  Corporal  H  via  35 — 41 — 43,  and  one  under 
Corporal  F  via  29 — 27 — 23  west  to  learn  further  of  the  enemy  in  execu- 
tion of  the  second  part  of  his  orders. 

The  patrol  under  Corporal  H  sends  back  the  following  message : 

"No.   1.  Patrol  Comi^any  A,    1st  Infantry, 

21   June   '09;    5.30   P.   M. 
Commander  Expeditionary  Patrol, 
at  45. 
A   column   of   infantry    is   moving    east   about    1    mile    west    of    Schwei/.er    (aa')  ; 
about   800   yards   in    front   of   this   body   is   another   small   body   with    8   to    10    men    300 
yards    still    farther   east.      It   took    the   main    body    2    min.    45    sec.    to   pass   a   point    on 
the   road.      I    remain   in    observation.  H, 

Corporal." 

Required,  3.  The  size  of  the  command  reported  by  Corporal  H  and 
its  formation.     (Par.  B,  page  221). 

Answer,     i  battalion  infantry    (512  men),  preceded  by  i   section  as 


APPLIED  PRINCIPLES  OF  INFORMATION      233 

AND  SECURITY. 

advance  guard.  The  advance  guard  having  only  advance  party  and  point. 
2f  minutes  X  1/5  =  481  men  in  the  main  body,  leaving  about  32  men 
for  the  advance  guard. 

PROBLEM  5 

General  Situation. 

A  Blue  force  of  one  regiment  of  infantry  has  outposts  facing  south  on 
the    line    Pope    Hill    (sm')    National   Cemetery    (qk') — E   (qi').     A  Red 
force  moving  north  reached  Soldiers'  Home  at  7  o'clock  this  morning. 
Special  Situation : 

Corporal  B  is  chosen  by  Sergeant  A,  commander  of  the  right  sup- 
port at  the  National  Cemetery,  to  take  a  patrol  south  as  far  as  20th 
street  (yf),  and  Metropolitan  avenue  (wh'),  to  report  on  the  ground 
along  the  route,  and  to  reconnoiter  the  enemy.  A  friendly  patrol  moves 
along  Sheridan's  Drive  (/) — Atchison  Hill  (rg') — Southwest  Hill  (ue'), 
and  one  on  Prison  Lane  (rk'). 

Required,  i.     Sergeant  A's  orders,  verbatim  (that  is,  word  for  word), 

2.  Give  the  various  details  attended  to  by  Corporal  B  be- 

fore he  moves  out  with  his  patrol. 

3.  What  is  the  formation  of  the  patrol  when  its  point  is 

at  E  {qh'). 

4.  When   the  patrol   reaches   14    (ug'),  how  are  the  inter- 

secting roads  reconnoitered? 

5.  Four  mounted  men  are  seen  riding  west  at  a  walk  at 

64  (wh').    What  action  does  Corporal  A  take? 

6.  Describe  the  ground  passed  over  by  the  patrol. 

PROBLEM  6 

Situation. 

The  enemy  is  moving  east  toward  Frenchman  (oc')  and  is  expected  to 
reach  there  early  tomorrow.  A  company  at  72  («/')  forms  the  left  support 
of  an  outpost  in  hostile  country,  on  the  line  70  (vf) — National  Cemetery 
(<//').  At  4  p.  m.  Sergeant  A  is  ordered  to  take  a  patrol  of  12  men  and 
go  to  Frenchman  and  destroy  the  bridge  there,  and  remain  in  observation 
in  that  vicinity  all  night. 

Required,  i.     His  orders  to  the  patrol. 

2.     The    route    the    patrol    will    follow,    and    its    formation 
crossing  th'e  Atchison  Hill — Government  Hill  ridge. 


234  CHAPTER  XIV. 

J.     Give  the  conduct  of  the  patrol  from  Atchison  Hill  {rg') 
— Government  Hill   {tf)  to  its  position  at  the  bridge 
,  at  Frenchman. 

CAVALRY  PATROL  PROBLEMS 

General  Situation: 

A  Bine  squadron  is  camped  for  the  night  at  Waterworks  (vn'), 
Fort  Leavenworth,  and  has  outposts  on  the  line  XIV  (tin') — Grant  Hill 
(um') — Prison  Hill  (wk').  A  Red  force  is  reported  to  be  advancing 
from  the  north  on  Kickapoo   (cb'). 

PROBLEM  1 

Special  Situation  : 

Lieutenant  A,  commanding  the  left  support  on  Prison  Hill,  at  5 
p.  m.  directs  Sergeant  Jones  to  take  a  patrol  of  5  men  from  his  platoon 
and  move  via  Atchison  Cross  (ug')  to  the  vicinity  of  Kickapoo  and  se- 
cure information  of  any  enemy  that  may  be  in  that  locality.  Another 
patrol  is  to  go  via  Fort  Leavenworth  (oT). 

Required,  i.  The  order  given  by  Lieutenant  A,  verbatim.  (Par  B, 
page  215). 

Anszver.  "Sergeant  Jones,  the  enemy  is  north  of  Kickapoo.  moving 
on  that  place.  The  squadron  will  remain  here  tonight;  Sergean*  B  will 
take  a  patrol  through  Fort  Leavenworth. 

"Select  a  patrol  of  5  men  from  your  platoon  and  move  out  via 
Frenchman's   (or')  toward  Kickapoo. 

"wSecure  any  information  you  can  of  the  enemy  in  that  locality. 

"Report  on  the  condition  of  the  bridges  between  here  and  47   {fd'). 

"You  may  have  to  stay  out  over  night. 

"vSend  messages  here." 

Sergeant  Jones  selects  five  good  men,  directs  them  to  take  one 
cooked  ration  each  and  canteen  full  of  water.  He  inspects  the  men  and 
horses  carefully;  sees  that  no  horse  of  conspicuous  color  or  that  neighs 
is  taken.  Explains  the  orders  to  his  men,  etc.,  as  was  done  in  the  infantry 
patrol. 

Required,  2.     What  route  does  the  patrol  take,  and  why? 


APPLIED  PRINCIPLES  OF  LNFORMATION      Zr^ 

AND  SECURITY. 

Answer.  Metropolitan  avenue  (w) — 70  (vj') — 72  (vj') — 14  dig')  — 
Frenchman  (oc') — 17  Cjc') — 47  (ec').  Reasons:  The  enemy  is  distant 
and  Kickapoo,  the  objective  of  the  patrol,  is  seen  from  the  map,  which 
Sergeant  Jones  has,  to  be  over  an  hour's  ride  at  a  walk  and  trot.  It  is 
not  at  all  probable  that  the  enemy  will  be  met  until  the  patrol  reaches  the 
vicinit}^  of  Kickapoo  and  Sergeant  Jones  decides  to  take  the  shortest  and 
best  road  though  it  is  a  main  highway,  instead  of  Sheridan's  Drive 
(j)  or  the  F  (qg')— 15  (jg')  lane. 

It  is  always  well  for  a  patrol  to  avoid  main  highways  when  the 
enemy  is  near,  especially  in  hostile  country,  but  here  the  time  saved  more 
than  justifies  the  use  of  the  direct  route. 

PROBLEM  2 

Same  situation  as  Problem  i. 

Required,  i.  The  formation  and  conduct  of  the  patrol  as  far  as 
Frenchman's. 

Answer.  Sergeant  Jones  determines  to  move  at  a  walk  and  trot  (5 
miles  per  hour)  in  order  to  reach  the  vicinity  of  Kickapoo  and  take  up  a 
position  of  observation  before  night.  Sergeant  Jones  and  Private  B  are 
in  the  lead,  2  men  about  100  yards  to  the  rear,  the  remaining  2  men  about 
75  yards  in  the  rear  of  these.  They  move  out  at  a  trot  along  the  road 
until  Atchison  Cross  is  reached.  The  two  cross-roads  are  reconnoitered 
without  halting  the  patrol,  in  as  much  as  from  the  cross-roads  a  good  view 
is  had  north  and  south. 

From  Atchison  Cross  to  16  (sf)  the  patrol  moves  at  a  walk,  being 
up  a  slope  from  4  to  6  degrees.  Usually  such  a  place  would  be  rushed 
through,  but  the  distance  of  the  enemy  makes  this  unnecessary.  No  scout- 
ing is  done  off  the  road  through  the  woods,  because  of  the  distance  of 
the  enemy.  On  reaching  the  top  of  the  hill  the  patrol  is  halted  while  Ser- 
geant Jones  moves  up  to  the  high  ground  south  of  the  road  at  the  crest, 
and  in  concealment  searches  with  his  glasses  the  road  as  far  as  Freeh- 
man's,  especially  the  village  beyond  G  (qf)-  Seeing  no  signs  of 
the  enemy  he  moves  the  patrol  down  the  hill  at  a  walk  until  the  cut  is 
passed  and  there  takes  a  fast  trot,  so  as  to  avoid  being  long  in  a  posi- 
tion where  they  could  be  seen  from  the  direction  of  Kickapoo.  The  same 
formation  and  gait  are  maintained  as  far  as  Gauss'  (pd'),  where  a  walk 
is  taken  to  rest  the  horses  and  to  gain  opportunity  to  see  if  any  enemy 
arc  holding  tlic  liridge  at  Frenchman's. 


236  CHAPTER  XIV. 

Situation : 

Just  as  the  patrol  comes  to  a  walk  Sergeant  Jones  sees  what  appears 
to  be  a  dismounted  patrol  moving  south  over  the  ridge  about  650  yards 
north  of  Frenchman's.    He  can  see  three  men. 

Required,  2.     Action  taken  by  Sergeant  Jones. 

Anszver.  The  patrol  is  moved  into  the  orchard  just  off  the  road, 
while  Sergeant  Jones  moves  quickly  to  the  top  of  the  hill  and,  concealed 
by  the  trees,  examines  the  road  north  to  see  if  the  3  men  are  followed 
by  others  forming  part  of  a  larger  patrol  or  of  a  column.  He  finds  the 
three  men  are  not  followed. 

Required,  3.     What  does  he  do  next? 

Anszver.  He  determines  to  capture  the  patrol  by  surprise.  He  has 
the  horses  led  over  south  of  the  orchard  hill  so  as  not  to  be  visible  to  the 
enemy.  He  then  distributes  his  men  along  the  north  edge  of  the  orchard, 
himself  nearest  the  bridge,  2  men  75  yards  back  along  the  road  toward 
G  (qf),  then  2  men  75  yards  farther  along  toward  G.  As  the  third  man 
comes  opposite  him.  Sergeant  Jones  cries  "Halt"  which  is  the  signal  for 
the  other  parties  to  similarly  hold  up  their  men. 

Reasons.  Sergeant  Jones  might  either  capture  the  hostile  patrol  or 
let  it  pass,  and  then  proceed  on  his  road.  Since  they  are  the  first  enemy 
seen  and  there  is  such  a  good  chance  to  capture  them,  and  as  they  may 
furnish  definite  information  of  the  enemy's  main  force,  he  decides  as 
stated.  There  is  an  objection  in  capturing  them  that  he  will  have  to 
send  one  or  two  men  to  take  them  to  camp.  The  patrol  is  placed  as  de- 
scribed above  so  as  to  have  two  men  opposite  each  of  the  enemy,  except 
for  Sergeant  Jones,  who  is  alone.  By  thus  covering  each  man  of  the 
hostile  patrol  by  two  of  our  men,  they  will  at  once  see  the  folly  of  an 
effort  to  escape  and  no  shot  need  be  fired.    One  man  is  holding  the  horses. 

PROBLEM  3 

Required : 

1.  What  action  does  Sergeant  Jones  take  before  leaving  the  vicinity  of 

Frenchman's. 

2.  Give  the  formation  and  conduct  of  the  patrol  after  leaving  here, 

S    .Give  the  report  submitted  by   Sergeant  Jones  under  his   instructions 

in  regard  to  bridges.     (Par.  A,  page  223). 

At  6.30  p.  m.   (it  is  dark  at  7.30)   the  patrol  reaches  17   (jc'). 
4.     Give  the  route  followed   from  here  and  the  disposition  of  the  patrol 

made  for  the  night     . 


APPLIED  PRINCIPLES  OF  INFORMATION      237 

AND  SECURITY. 

PROBLEM  4 

The  Missouri  river  is  the  boundary  between  hostile  countries. 

A  Blue  separate  brigade  (3  regiments  infantry,  i  squadron  cavalry, 
I  battery  field  artillery)  is  moving  from  Winchester  (19  miles  west  of 
Leavenworth)  to  seize  the  Rock  Island  bridge  (q)  across  the  Missouri 
river  at  Fort  Leavenworth.  The  cavalry  squadron  is  camped  at  Lowe- 
mont,  8  miles  west  of  Leavenworth,  for  night  June  4-5.  At  3  p.  m.  Ser- 
geant Jones  is  directed  to  take  a  patrol  of  six  men  and  move  via  the 
Rock  Island  bridge  into  Missouri  and  gain  information  of  the  enemy  re- 
ported to  be  now  just  east  of  the  river. 

Required,  i.  Give  the  formation  of  the  patrol  when  it  first  comes 
on  the  map. 

Required,  2.  Give  the  conduct  of  the  patrol  from  Mottin's  (oa') 
to  G  (qf). 

At  Frenchman  Sergeant  Jones  met  a  farmer  coming  from  Fort 
Leavenworth,  who  said  about  200  hostile  cavalry  were  seen  just  east  of 
the  Missouri  about  2  p.  m.,  moving  towards  the  Terminal  Bridge  (z) 

Required,  3.  Action  of  Sergeant  Jones.  (Does  he  hold  the  man? 
Does  he  send  a  message?  Does  he  change  his  plans  or  direction  of 
margh?) 

The  patrol  reaches  the  top  of  the  hill,  Sheridan's  Drive — Govern- 
ment Hill   (tf). 

Required,  4.  What  action  does  Sergeant  Jones  take  before  going 
east. 

THE   SERVICE   OF   SECURITY 
General  Principles 

The  service  of  security  embraces  all  those  measures  taken  by  a 
command  to  protect  itself  from  observation,  annoyance,  or  surprise  by 
the  enemy. 

On  the  march  detachments  employed  in  the  service  of  security  are 
called  advance,  flank  or  rear  guards;  in  camp  or  bivouac  they  are  called 
outposts. 

As  the  principal  duty  of  these  bodies  is  the  same,  namely,  that  of 
protecting  the  main  body,  there  is  a  general  similarity  in  the  formations 
assumed  by  them.  There  is  (i)  the  cavalry  covering  the  front;  next  (2) 
a  group,  or  line  of  groups  in  observation;  then  (3)  the  support,  or  line  of 


238  CHAPTER  XIV. 

supports,  whose  duty  is  to  furnish  the  observation  groups,  and  check  the 
enemy  pending  the  arrival  of  reinforcements;  still  farther  in  the  rear  is 
(4)  the  reserve. 

Troops  on  the  service  of  security  pay  no  compliments ;  soldiers  sa- 
lute only  when  they  address,  or  are  addressed  by,  a  superior  officer. 

ADVANCE  GUARDS 

A       Dulles.      The  primary  duty  of  an   advance  guard  is   to   insure   the 
safe  and  uninterrupted  advance  of  the  main  body. 
In  detail  its  duties  are : 

J.     To  guard   against   surprise  and   furnish   information   by   recon- 

noitering  to  the  front  and  flanks. 
2.     To  push  back  small  parties  of  the  enemy  and  prevent  their  ob- 
serving, firing  upon  or  delaying  the  main  body. 
J.     To  check  the  enemy's  advance  in   force  long  enough  to  permit 
the  main  body  to  prepare  for  action. 

4.  When  the  enemy  is  met  on  the  defensive,  to  seize  a  good  posi 

tion  and  locate  his  lines,  care  being  taken  not  to  bring  on  a 
general  engagement  unless  the  advance  guard  commander  is 
authorised  to  do  so. 

5.  To   remove  obstacles,  repair  the  road,  and   favor  in  every  way 

possible  the  steady  march  of  the  column. 

B  Strength  and  Composition — Subject  to  variation  according  to 
the  situation,  one-ninth  to  one-third  of  a  command  may  be  assumed  as  a 
suitable  strength  for  an  advance  guard.  The  larger  the  force,  the  larger 
m  proportion  is  the  advance  guard,  for  a  large  command  takes  relatively 
longer  to  prepare  for  action  than  a     small  one. 

Machine  guns  materially  increase  the  effectiveness  of  an  advance 
guard.  They  are  used  in  holding  bridges,  defiles,  etc.,  until  reinforcements 
can  be  brought  up. 

Engineers  are  usually  attached  to  an  advance  guard  to  remove  ob- 
stacles, repair  roads,  etc. 
Examples: 

Command  Advance  Guard 


1   battalion   of   mfantry  ,         . 

..  .     .  /•    i  to  1  companv. 

(4  companies)  |    " 

1    regiment  of   infantry 

(12  companies) 


2  to  4  companies. 


APPLIED  PRINCIPLES  OF  INFORMATIOX      239 

AND  SECURITY. 

A  Distance  from  Main  Body — The  distance  at  which  the  advance 
guard  precedes  the  main  l)ody,  or  the  main  body  follows  the  advance 
guard,  is  stated  in  the  "march  order"  issued  by  the  commander  of  the  col- 
umn ;  for  a  company  as  advance  guard  this  is  from  300  to  500  yards. 

F-ORMING  THE  ADVANCE  GUARD 
B  Advance  Guard  Commander.  On  receipt  of  the  march  order  the 
advance  guard  commander  estimates  the  situation  (see  Par.  A,  page  245) 
and,  at  the  proper  time,  issues  the  advance  guard  order.  This  order  is 
written  or  verbal,  according  to  circumstances,  divides  the  advance  guard 
into  its  tactical  components  (advance  cavalry,  support,  etc.),  and  gives 
the  necessary  instructions  for  each.  He  conducts  the  advance  so  as  to 
interrupt  the  steady  march  of  the  main  body,  and  when  ordered  to  move 
at  a  certain  distance  in  front  of  the  latter,  keeps  the  necessary  connection 
therewith.  He  bears  constantly  in  mind  the  duties  of  an  advance  guard, 
and  studies  the  ground  with  a  view  to  tactical  dispositions  should  the 
enemy  be  encountered. 

C  Written  order  for  an  Advance  Guard  of  2  battalions  of  infantry, 
I  troop  cavalry,  i  battery  artillery,  detachment  of  engineers,  detacJinient 
hospital  corps : 

(See  Fort  Leavenworth  map  in  pocket  at  back  of  book.) 
Field   Orders  Advance  Guard,   Det.    1st  Div. 

No.    l.(x)  Leavenworth,  Kansas, 

10  Aug.  '08,  5.30  A.  M.      . 

Troops 
(a)     Advance    Cavalry 

Captain    B  1.     A  Red  force  of  all  arms  is  reported  to  have  camped  near 

Tr.   A,    1st  Cav.  ATCHISON    (1)    last    night.     Its    cavalry    patrols    were    seen 

(less   1    squad)  near  KICKAPOO  yesterday. 

(&)      Support:  Our    main    body    will    follow    the    advance    guard    at    one- 

Major  C  half  mile. 

1st  Bn.   1st  Inf. 
1  squad  Tr.   A,  2.     This   advance   guard   will   march   on    KICKAPOO. 

1st  Cav. 
Det.   Co.   A,  Engrs.  .1.      (a)      The    advance    cavalry   will    leave    camp    at    once    and 

march    via    ATCHISON    CROSS    to    KICKAPOO,     SHERI- 
(c)      Reserve — in  DAN'S    DRIVE   and   the   country   west   of   the   line   of   march 

order  of  march:  will   be   carefully   observed. 

Hq.  and  2nd  Bn.  (b)      The   point    of   the    support    will    start   at    5.45    A.    M. 

1st  Inf.  and    march    by    the    ATCHISON    CROSS— FRENCHMAN— 

Btry.   B.   5th  KICKAPOO   road. 

F.   A.  .  (c)     The  reserve  will  follow  the  support  at  800  yards. 

3d  Bn.   1st  Inf. 
Det.  Amb.  Co.  No.  1 

(x)  This  order  is  issued  pursuant  to  a  previous  "march  order,"  and  assumes 
that  the  troops  designated  for  the  advance  guard  have  been  notified  when  and  where 
to  assemble. 

(1)  About  14  miles  northwest  of  Fort  Leavenworth. 


240  CHAPTER  XlV. 

4.  The  field  train  will  asst-mhle  near  70  at  7  A.  M.  under  Captain  X,  Quar- 
termaster,   1st  Inf.,  and  join   the  field  train  of  the   main  body  as  that  train  passes. 

5.  I   shall  be  at  the  head  of  the   reserve.  Y, 

Colonel, 
Commanding. 

Delivered  verbally  to  assembled  troop,  battalion  and  battery  com- 
manders, and  staff ;  copy  to  det.  commander  by  Lt.  N. 

Note:  The  paragraphs  on  the  left  lettered  (a),  (b),  (c),  etc.,  are 
called  the  distribution,  and  those  on  the  right  numbered  1,  2  ,3,  etc.,  are 
called  the  body. 

In  issuing  his  order  to  an  advance  guard  a  noncommissioned  officer 
should  follow  the  form  above,  except  that  it  should  be  verbal,  and  the 
troops  in  each  part  of  the  advance  guard  should  be  named  in  the  body 
of  the  order.  For  example,  in  giving  an  advance  guard  order  for  one 
platoon,  the  noncommissioned  officer  would  say,  for  instance,  to  his 
platoon  : 

"A  Red  battalion  is  reported  to  have  camped  near  Atchison  last 
night.     Our  main  body  will  follow  us  at  500  yards. 

"This  platoon  will  form  the  advance  guard  and  will  march  toward 
Kickapoo. 

"The  point  will  start  at  5. .45  a.  m.  and  move  by  the  Atchison  Cross — 
Frenchman — Kickapoo  road.  The  remainder  of  the  advance  guard  will 
follow  at  300  yards. 

"I  will  march  with  the  point." 

At  the  moment  of  starting  he  commands  "Form  Advance  Guard, 
March,"  and  forms  the  advance  guard  as  prescribed  in  Drill  Regulations. 

A  Advance  Cavalry — The  advance  cavalry  is  that  part  of  the  ad- 
vance guard  going  in  front  of  the  support.  It  reconnoiters  far  enough  to 
the  front  ancl  flanks  to  guard  the  column  against  surprise  by  artillery  fire, 
and  to  enable  timely  information  to  be  sent  to  the  advance  guard  com- 
mander. 

The  infantry  of  the  advance  guard  is  divided  into  two  parts,  the 
support  and  the  reserve. 

B  Support — Following  the  advance  cavalry  is  the  support,  varying 
in  strength  from  one-fourth  to  one-half  of  the  advance  guard.  As  the 
support  moves  out  it  sends  forward  an  advance  party  several  hundred 
yards,  the  distance  varying  with  the  nature  of  the  country  and  the  size 


APPIJED  PRINCIPLES  OF  INFORMATION'      241 

AND  SECURITY. 

of  the  command.  For  a  company  advance  guard,  the  advance  party  might 
be  one  sectoin  200  yards  in  front  of  the  rest  of  the  support. 

The  advance  party  supplements  the  work  of  the  advance  cavalry, 
reconnoitering  to  the  front  and  flanks  to  guard  the  support  from  sur- 
prise by  effective  rifle  fire.  The  patrol  preceding  the  advance  party  about 
100  to  150  yards  on  the  line  of  march  is  called  the  point,  and  is  commanded 
by  an  officer  or  an  experienced  noncommissioned  officer.  As  far  as 
practicable,  reconnoitering  to  the  flanks  is  done  by  mounted  scouts,  thus 
lessening  the  work  of  foot  soldiers. 

The  support  comtnander  ordinarily  marches  with  the  advance  party, 
but  goes  wherever  needed.  He  is  provided  with  a  map,  and  with  native 
guides,  if  they  are  necessary.  He  sees  that  the  proper  road  is  followed ; 
that  guides  are  left  in  towns  and  at  cross  roads;  that  necessary  repairs 
are  made  to  roads,  bridges,  etc.,  and  that  information  of  the  enemy  or 
affecting  the  march  is  promptly  sent  to  the  advance  guard  commander. 
He  tries  promptly  to  verify  information  of  the  enemy. 

A  Reserve — The  reserve  follows  the  support  at  several  hundred 
yards  distance.  In  advance  guards  of  2  companies  or  less  this  distance  is 
300  to  400  yards. 

B  Reconnaissance.  O)  In  conducting  the  reconnaissance  the  pa- 
trols are,  as  a  rule,  small — from  two  to  six  men. 

The  flanking  patrols,  whether  of  the  advance  cavalry  or  of  the  ad- 
vance party,  are  sent  out  to  examine  the  country  wherever  the  enemy  might 
be  concealed.  If  the  nature  of  the  ground  permits,  these  patrols  march  across 
country  or  along  roads  and  trails  parallel  to  the  march  of  the  column.  For 
cavalry  patrols  this  is  often  possible;  but  with  infantry  patrols  and  even 
with  those  that  are  mounted,  reconnaissance  is  best  done  by  sending  the 
patrols  to  high  places  along  the  line  of  march  to  overlook  the  country  and 
examine  the  danger  points.  These  patrols  signal  the  results  of  their  ob 
servations  and,  unless  they  have  other  instructions,  join  their  commands 
by  the  nearest  routes,  other  patrols  being  sent  out  as  the  march  proceeds 
and  as  the  nature  of  the  country  requires. 

Deserters,  suspicious  characters  and  bearers  of  flags  of  truce,  the 
latter  blindfolded,  are  taken  to  the  advance  guard  commander. 


1  By   reconnaissance  is  meant   an   examination   of     the   country   for   the   purpose 
of  obtaining  information. 


242  CHAPTER  XIV. 

A       Civilians  are  not  permitted  to  precede  the  advance  guard. 

Communication — Communication  between  the  fractions  of  a 
small  advance  guard  and  between  the  advance  guard  and  the  main  body, 
is  maintained  by  mounted  messengers,  cyclists,  or  men  called  connecting 
files. 

B  Advance  Guard  of  a  Small  Command — Tn  forming  the  advance 
guard  of  a  small  command  the  foregoing  distribution  is  modified,  depend- 
ing upon  the  situation.  A  coiiipaiiy  or  troop  usually  sends  forzvard  only 
a  point:  a  battalion  or  a  squadron,  an  advance  party  with  its  point;  for  a 
sinnle  regiment,  a  reseri'c  in  the  adi'ance  </itard  is  seldom  necessary. 

C  Advance  Guard  cf  a  Cavalry  Command — Cavalry  marching  inde- 
pendently, adopts  formations  for  its  advance  guard  similar  to  those  de- 
scribed above,  though  the  distances  are  generally  greater.  An  advance 
party  with  a  few  patrols  is  usually  enough  for  a  squadron,  ar.d  precedes 
it  from  600  to   1,000  yards. 

FLANK  GUARDS 

The  flanks  of  a  column  are  protected  in  part  by  the  advance  guard, 
which  carefully  examines  the  ground  on  lioth  sides  of  the  line  of  march. 
It  may  be  necessary,  however,  to  provide  additional  security  for  a  flank- 
threatened  by  the  enemy.  This  is  done  by  sending  a  detachment,  called  a 
flank  guard,  to  cover  the  exposed  flank.  Their  duties  and  formation  arc 
similar  to  those  of  an  advance  guard.  They  keep  in  constant  touch  with 
the  column  by  means  of  mounted  or  dismounted  messengers. 

REAR  GUARDS 

The  rear  guard  is  charged  with  the  important  duty  of  covering  the 
retreat.  Its  strength  varies  from  one-third  to  one-sixth  of  the  entire 
command. 

When  a  commander  decides  to  retreat  he  issues  a  retreat  order  in 
which  he  names  the  different  parts  of  the  column  (main  body,  rear 
guard,  etc.),  and  the  commander,  and  gives  necessary  orders  to  each. 

D  Forming  the  Rear  Guard —  The  rear  guard  commander,  on  the  re- 
ceipt of  the  retreat  order,  issues  a  rear  guard  order,  according  to  the  fol- 
lowing general    form  : 

Field   Orders  (Title)  ] 

No (Place)  J-  See  Par.  A,  page  239. 

Troops  (Date  and  hour)  J 


APPLIED  PRINCIPLES  OF  INFORMATION      243 

AND  SECURITY. 

(a)  Reserve — in  ].      (Information   of  enemy   and   of   our   supporting   troops.) 
order  of  march 

(Troops)  2.      (Plan  of  commander — duty  of  rear  guard.) 

(b)  Support:  3.      (a)         (Instructions    for    reserve- — place    and    time    of    de- 
(Commander)  parture,     or    approximate    distance    from     main     body — recon- 

(Troops)  naissance.) 

(c)  Rear    Cavalry:  (b)      (Instructions    for    support — place    and    time    of    de- 
(Commander)                 parture     or     distance     from     reserve — any     special     reconnais- 

(Troops)  sance.) 

(d)  Right   (left)  (c)      (Instructions    for    rear    cavalry — place    and    time    of 

Flank  Guard:  departure,    road  or  country   to   be   covered— special   mission.) 

(Commander)  (d)      (Instructions    for    flank    guard — place    and    time    of 

(Troops)  departure,  route,  special  mission.) 

4.  (Instructions  for  field  train  when  necessary — usually  to  join  train  of 
main  body.) 

5.  (Place  of  commander  or  where  messages  may  be  sent.) 

(Signature.) 

(How  and  to  whom  issued). 

A  For  small  rear  guards,  2  companies  or  less,  the  troops  are  named  in 
the  Ijody  of  the  order  which  is  given  verbally. 

When  it  is  not  necessary  to  withdraw  fighting  in  skirmish  lines, 
the  greater  part  of  the  rear  guard  marches  on  the  road  in  column  of 
route,  taking  up  a  formation  resembling  that  of  an  advance  guard  faced 
to  the  rear.  The  distribution  of  troops  is  therefore  similar  to  that  of  an 
advance  guard,  namely : 

Reserve. 
Support 
Rear  Cavalry. 

The  rear  cavalry  is  that  portion  of  the  rear  guard  cavalry  following  the 
support.  The  support,  as  in  an  advance  guard,  is  divided  into  two  parts ; 
that  part  nearest  the  enemy  is  called  the  rear  party  and  marches  with  a 
rear  point. 

B  Distances — The  distances  of  the  rear  guard  from  the  main  body 
and  between  the  fractions  of  the  rear  guard  are  about  the  same  as  in 
the  case  of  an  advance  guard.  If  marching  at  night  the  rear  guard 
draws  nearer  the  main  body. 

D  Communication — Communication  with  the  main  bud\'  and  with 
the  parts  of  the  rear  guard,  is  maintained  by  messengers  and  connecting 
files. 


244  CHAPTER  XIV. 

A  Action  of  the  Rear  Guard — The  withdrawal  of  defeated  troops  is 
delayed,  if  possible,  until  night.  If  it  becomes  necessary  to  begin  a 
retreat  while  an  engagement  is  in  progress,  the  rear  guard  is  organized 
and  takes  up  a  defensive  position  generally  behind  the  fighting  line;  the 
latter  then  falls  back  and  assembles  under  cover  ot  the  rear  guard. 

The  rear  cavalry  gives  away  before  the  enemy's  pursuit  only  when 
absolutely  necessar}^  maintains  communication  with  and  sends  information 
to  the  rear  guard  commander,  and  pays  special  attention  to  the  weak 
points  in  the  retreat,  namely,  the  flanks.  It  makes  use  of  every  kind  of 
action  of  which  it  is  capable,  according  to  the  situation,  and  unless  greatly 
outnumbered  by  hostile  cavalry,  it  causes  considerable  delay  to  the  enemy. 

When  the  enemy  is  conducting  an  energetic  pursuit  the  rear  guard 
effects  its  withdrawal  by  taking  up  a  succession  of  defensive  positions 
(that  is,  where  the  nature  of  the  ground  enables  the  rear  guard  to  defend 
itself  well)  and  compelling  the  enemy  to  attack  or  turn  them.  When  the 
enemy's  dispositions  for  attack  are  nearly  completed,  the  rear  guard  begins 
to  fall  back,  the  cavalry  on  the  flanks  being  usually  the  last  to  leave. 
The  commander  designates  a  part  of  the  rear  guard  to  cover  the  with- 
drawal of  the  remainder;  the  latter  then  falls  back  to  a  new  position  in 
rear,  and  in  turn  covers  the  withdrawal  of  the  troops  in  front.  These 
operations  compel  the  enemy  continually  to  deploy  or  make  turning  move- 
ments, and  constantly  retard  his  advance. 

The  pursuit  may  be  further  delayed  by  obstacles  placed  in  the 
enemy's  path;  bridges  are  burned  or  blown  up;  boats  removed  or  de- 
stroyed; fords  and  roads  obstructed;  tracks  torn  up;  telegraph  lines  cut 
and  houses,  villages,  woods  and  fields  fired.  Demolitions  and  obstructions 
are  prepared  by  engineers,  assisted,  if  necessary,  by  other  troops  detailed 
from  the  reserve,  and  are  completed  by  the  mounted  engineers  of  the  rear 
party  at  the  last  moment. 

The  instructions  of  the  supreme  commander  govern  in  the  demoli- 
tion of  important  structures. 

ADVANCE  GUARD  PROBLEM 

(See  Fort  Leavenworth  map  in  pocket  at  back  of  book.) 

Situation. 

A  Blue  battalion,  in  hostile  country,  is  in  camp  for  the  night  August 


APPLIED  PRINCIPLES  OF  INFORMATION      245 

AND  SECURITY. 

5-6  at  Sprong  (ja').  At  9:00  p.  m.,  August  5th,  Lieutenant  A,  Adjutant 
gives  a  copy  of  the  following  order  to  Sergeant  B  : 

1st  Battalion,   1st  Infantry, 
Sprong,   Kansas, 
5  Aug.  '09. 
Field  Orders   No.    5. 

1.  The    enemy's    infantry    is    6    miles    east   of    FORT    LEAVENWORTH.      His 
cavalry  patrols  were  seen  at  F   (qg')    today. 

Our  regiment  will  reach  FRENCHMAN'S   (oc')   at  noon  tomorrow. 

2.  The  battalion  will  march  tomorrow  to  seize  the  ROCK  ISLAND  BRIDGE 
(q)  at  FORT  LEAVENWORTH. 

3.  (a)  The  advance  guard,  consisting  of  1st  platoon  Co.  A  and  mounted  or- 
derlies B,  C,  and  D,  under  Sergeant  B,  will  precede  the  main  body  at  400  yards. 

(b)  The  head  of  the  main  body  will  march  at  6.30  A.  M.  from  19,  via  the  17 
Oc')— 15    (jg')—S  (/m')— FORT  LEAVENWORTH   (ofn)   road. 

4.  The  baggage  will  follow  close  behind  the  main  body  under  escort  of  Cor- 
poral D  and  1  squad  Co.  B. 

5.  Send  reports  to  head  of  main  body. 

C, 
Major,  Comdg. 

Copies  to  the  company  commanders,  to  Sergeant   B   and  Corporal  D. 

A  Required,  i.  Give  Sergeant's  B's  estimate  of  the  situation.  (Par. 
B,  page  215).  (The  estimate  of  the  military  situation  includes  the  fol- 
lowing points : 

/.  His  orders  or  mission  and  how  much  discretion  he  is  allowed. 

2.  The  ground  as  it  influences  his  duty. 

J.  The  position,  strength  and  probable  intentions  of  the  enemy. 

4.  Sergeant  B's  decision. 

Answer,  i.  The  size  of  the  advance  guard,  its  route  and  the  dis- 
tance it  is  to  move  in  front  of  the  main  body  are  prescribed  by  Major  C. 
Sergeant  B  is  free  to  divide  up  the  advance  guard  as  he  sees  fit,  to  use  the 
various  parts  so  as  to  best  keep  open  the  way  of  the  main  body,  maintain 
the  distance  of  400  yards  in  front  of  it,  and  protect  it  from  surprise  by 
the  enemy. 

2.  The  ground  may  be  such  as  to  make  easy  or  to  hinder  recon- 
naissance, such  as  hills  or  woods ;  to  impede  or  hasten  the  march,  such 
as  roads,  streams,  defiles ;  to  offer  good  or  poor  defensive  positions ;  to 
offer  good  or  poor  opportunities  for  an  attack.  Sergeant  B  sees  from  his 
map  that  the  ground  is  rolling  and  open  as  far  as  Kern  (//')  with  good 
positions  for  reconnaissance  and  for  defense  or  attack.     There  is  a  bridge 


-246  CHAPTER  XIV. 

over  Salt  Creek  (ig')  which  has  steep  banks  and  will  be  a  considerable 
obstacle  if  the  bridge  has  been  destroyed.  From  this  creek  to  Kern  the 
advance  would  be  under  effective  fire  from  Hancock  Hill  (ki')  so  that 
these  heights  must  be  seized  before  the  main  body  reaches  15  (jg'). 

Bcj'ond  Kern  the  heavy  woods  make  reconnaissance  difficult  and 
must  be  treated  somewhat  like  a  defile  by  the  point.     (Par.  B,  page  218). 

J.  There  is  little  to  fear  from  the  main  body  of  the  enemy  which  is 
1}  miles  farther  from  the  Rock  Island  bridge  than  we  are,  but  we  know 
the  enemy  has  cavalry.  The  size  of  the  cavalry  force  is  not  known,  and 
may  l)e  sufficient  to  cause  us  considerable  delay,  especially  in  the  woods. 
The  enemy's  evident  intention  is  to  keep  us  from  seizing  the  bridge. 

/}.  Having  considered  all  these  points.  Sergeant  B  comes  to  the  fol- 
lowing decision:*  ******  (Before  reading  the  decision  as  con- 
tained in  the  following  paragraph,  make  one  of  your  own.) 

Anszvev.  To  have  only  an  advance  party  with  which  to  throw  for- 
ward a  point  of  5  men  200  yards  to  the  front  and  send  out  flankers 
as  needed  (Par.  B,  page  218)  ;  to  send  the  three  mounted  orderlies  well 
to  the  front  of  the  point  to  gain  early  information  of  the  enemy,  espe- 
cially on  Hancock  Hill  {ji')  and  the  ridge  to  the  north  of  11  (//'). 

Required,  2.     Sergeant  B's  order.     (Pars.  B  and  C,  page  215). 

Answer.  Given  verballj'  to  the  platoon  and  mounted  orderlies,  at 
9:30  p.  m. 

"The  enemy's  cavalry  patrols  were  seen  at  F  (qh')  today;  no 
hostile  infantry  is  on  this  side  of  the  Missouri  river.  The  battalion  will 
move  tomorrow  to  Fort  Leavenworth,  leaving  19  (ja')  at  6:30  a.  m. 

"This  platoon  and  orderlies  B,  C  and  D  will  form  the  advance 
guard,  and  will  start  from  the  hedge  400  yards  east  of  19  at  6.30  a.  m.  via 
the   17    (/c')— 15    (jg')—S  {Im')  road. 

"The  point.  Corporal  Smith  and  4  men  of  his  squad,  will  precede 
the  remainder  of  the  advance  guard  at  200  yards. 

"I  wall  be  with  the  advance  party.  Private  X  and  Y  will  act  as 
connecting  files  with  the  main  body." 

The  flankers  will  be  sent  out  from  time  to  time  by  Sergeant  B  as 
necessary. 

Required,  5.  The  flankers  sent  out  by  Sergeant  B  between  19  (ja') 
and  15  (jg'). 

Anszver.  A  patrol  of  3  men  is  sent  to  Hill  900  southeast  of  19  (ja'), 
thence  by  Moss  (kc')  and  Taylor  (Ic')  houses  to  Hill  840  east  of  Taylor, 
thence  to  join  at  is(jfj')- 


APPLIED  1?K1NC1PLES  OF  INFORMATION      247 

AND  SECURITY. 

■  Two  men  are  sent  from  the  advance  party  as  it  passes  Hill  875.5 
(ie')  to  the  top  of  this  hill  to  reconnoiter  to  the  front  and  northeast. 
These  men  return  to  the  road  and  join  after  the  advance  party  has  reached 
Salt  Creek.  Two  men  are  sent  ahead  of  the  advance  party  at  a  double 
time  to  take  position  on  Hill  875  northeast  of  J.  E.  Daniels  (//')  and 
reconnoiter  to  the  northeast  and  east. 

Reasons.  The  patrol  sent  out  on  the  south  moves  out  far  enough  to 
get  a  good  view  from  the  hills  from  which  an  enemy  could  observe  or 
fire  into  the  column.  There  is  no  necessity  of  sending  out  flankers  north 
of  the  road  at  f^rst,  because  from  the  road  itself  a  good  view  is  ob- 
tained. (See  Par.  D,  page  215).  Hills  875.5  and  875  give  splendid 
points  for  observing  all  the  ground  to  the  north  and  cast.  (Don't  send 
flankers  out  unless  they  are  necessary.) 

Required,  4.  When  the  advance  party  reaches  J.  E.  Daniels  house 
(j'e')  a  civilian  leaves  the  house  and  starts  toward  15.  What  action  does 
Sergeant  B  take?     (See  Par.  A,  page  217,  and  D,  page  221). 

Required,  5.  When  the  advance  party  reaches  Salt  Creek  bridge 
(jg')  the  point  signals  "enemy  in  sight,"  and  Private  H  reports  that  he 
saw  about  6  or  8  mounted  men  ride  up  to  the  edge  of  the  woods  at  Kern, 
halt  a  moment,  and  disappear.     What  action  does  Sergeant  B  take? 

Answer.  He  at  once  sends  a  message  back  by  Private  H  stating 
the  facts.  He  then  orders  the  advance  party  to  move  forward,  hastens 
up  to  the  point  and  directs  it  to  continue  the  march,  seeking  cover  of 
fences  and  ravines  and  hill  top. 

Required,  6.  When  the  point  reaches  Schroeder  (///')  it  receives 
lire  from  the  orchard  at  Kern.     What  action  is  taken? 

Anszver.  The  men  in  the  point  are  moved  rapidly  down  the  hill 
and  gain  shelter  in  the  ravines  leading  toward  Kern.  Two  squads  are 
rapidly  placed  in  line  along  the  ridge  west  of  Schroeder  and  under  cover 
of  their  tire  the  remainder  of  the  advance  party  run  down  the  hill  at  10 
yards  distance  to  join  the  point.  A  squad  of  this  force  is  then  hurried 
forward  to  the  Kern  house.  Here  the  squad  is  stopped  by  fire  and  Ser- 
geant B  deploys  two  more  squads  which  advance  by  rushes  and  drive  out 
the  enemy,  found  to  be  10  cavalrymen.  The  squads  left  at  Schroeder  now 
join  at  double  time  and  the  advance  party  moves  forward,  without  having 
delayed  the  march  of  the  main  body. 


248  CHAPTER  XIV. 

OUTPOSTS 

A  Duties — The  duties  of  an  outpost  may  be  summed  up  in  the 
words  reconnaissance,  observation  and  resistance — that  is  to  say,  recon- 
noitering  the  country,  observing  everything  that  takes  place,  especially  re- 
garding the  enemy,  and  resisting  the  enemy  in  case  of  an  attack. 

1.  Specifically  its  duties  are : 

(1)  To  protect  the  main  body  so  that  the  troops  may  rest 

undisturbed. 

(2)  In  case  of  attack,  to  check  the  enemy  long  enough  to 

enable  the  main  body  to  prepare  for  action. 

2.  The  vigilance  of  outpost  troops  must  be  unceasing,  but  they  must 
end  of  a  march  the  halt  is  for  the  night  only,  and  danger  is  not  likely, 
simple  measures  like  detached  posts  and  a  few  patrols  are  generally 
sufficient. 

1.  A  mixed  outpost  is  composed  principally  of  infantry. 

The   infantry   is   charged   with   the   duty  of   observation   in   the 
vicinity  of  the  outpost  line,  especially  at  night,   and  with   resisting 
the  enemy  long  enough   for  the  main  body  to  prepare  for  action, 
avoid    bringing    on    combats    or    unnecessarily    alarming    the 
command.     Firing   disturbs   the   rest   of   troops,   and   if    fre- 
quently indulged  in  ceases  to  be  a  warning. 

J.     No    trumpet    signals    except    "to    arms,"    or    "to    horse,"    arc 
sounded,  and  all  unnecessary  noises  are  avoided. 

B       Strength    and     Composition — Subject    to    variation     according    to 
the   situation,   an    outpost,   as   a   rule,    does   not   exceed   one-sixth   of   the 
entire  command,  and  should  be  less  if  the  conditions  permit.     If  at  the 
The  cavalry  is  charged  with  the  duty  of  reconnaissance  at  a  dis 
tance,  and  is  very  useful  in  the  open  countr}^  during  the  day. 

2.  If  the  infantry  has  been  severely  taxed  by  marching  or  fighting, 
a  large  part  of  the  outpost  may  be  temporarily  formed  of  cavalry. 

That  part  of  the  outpost  cavalry  in  front  of  the  line  of  sup- 
ports (including  the  line  of  sentinels),  is  called  the  advance  cavalry. 
When  an  outp~ost  is  detailed  from  the  advance  guard,  the  advance 
cavalry  of  the  advance  guard  becomes  the  advance  cavalry  of  the 
outpost,  and  continues  the  work  of  reconnaissance  until  recalled 
for  the  nisfht. 


APPLIED  PRINCIPLES  OF  INFORMATION      249 

AND  SECURITY. 

The  line  of  resistance  (that  is,  the  line  to  be  occupied  for  re- 
sisting the  enemy  in  case  of  an  attack),  should  have  a  good  view  and 
field  of  fire  to  the  front,  and  concealment  and  shelter  from  the  enemy's 
fire.  There  should  be  good  communications  to  the  rear  and  good  lateral 
communications,  (that  is,  communications  extending  in  the  same  direction 
as  the  line  of  resistance,  such  as  roads  and  trails,  or  at  least  no  impassable 
obstacles  from  front  to  rear  within  the  lines,  such  as  ravines,  etc.) 
Raised  positions  from  which  a  wide  extent  of  country  is  visible  greatly 
aid  observation.  Well  defined  natural  features,  such  as  streams,  ridges, 
roads,  farther  edges  of  woods,  etc.,  are  convenient  in  naming  the  limits 
of  an  outpost  position.  A  strong  defensive  line,  (that  is,  a  strong  line  on 
which  the  outpost  can  defend  itself  in  case  of  attack)  is  of  greater  value 
than  ease  of  observation :  difficulties  of  observation  can  be  offset  by 
diligent  patroling. 

The  outpost  covers  the  front  of  the  main  body  and  extends  around 
the  flanks,  unless  they  are  protected  by  natural  obstacles,  such  as  streams, 
etc.,  or  by  other  troops. 

Troops  occupying  the  advance  positions  of  outposts  as  a  rule  in- 
trench and  strengthen  their  positions,  clear  the  field  of  fire  when  prac- 
ticable, and  open  and  improve  communications  along  the  line  and  to 
the  rear. 

Obstacles  are  placed  so  as  to  delay  the  enemy  under  fire  without  giv- 
ing him  protection.     Barbed  wire  is  often  used  for  this  purpose. 

Distances  to  conspicuous  objects  in  front  of  the  line  and  within 
range  are  measured  or  estimated,  and  the  men  made  familiar  with  the 
ranges. 

ESTABLISHING  THE  OUTPOST 

On  receipt  of  the  "halt  order"  from  the  commander  of  the  main 
column,  naming  the  camp  ground,  the  outpost  commander  issues  the 
outpost  order.  This  order  gives  the  approximate  line  of  resistance  to 
be  held,  divides  the  outpost  into  its  tactical  components  (advance  cavalry, 
supports,  etc.)  and  gives  the  necessary  instructions  for  each. 

Outpost  orders  are  in  the  following  form : 


250 


CHAPTER  XIV. 


Field  Orders 
No 

Troops 
(a)      Advance  Cavalry 
(Commander) 
(Troops) 
(&)      Support: 


OUTPOST  ORDER 

(Title) 

(Place) 

(Date   and   hour) 
1.      (Information    of    the    enemy    and    of    our    supporting 
troops.) 


2.      (Plan    of    commander — to    establish    outpost,    approx- 
No.   1    (Commander)  imate  line  of  resistance.) 

(Troops) 
No.  2   (Commander)  3.        (a)        (Instructions      for      advance      cavalry — contact 

(Troops)  with  enemy,   roads  or  country  to  be  specially  watched,   special 

mission.) 
No.  3   (Commander)  (b)       (Instructions    for    support — positions    they    are    to 

(Troops)  occupy,   and  sections   of   line   of   resistance   which   they   are   to 

hold,  intrenching,  etc.) 

(c)      (Instructions    for    detached    posts — position    to    be 
occupied,    duties,    amount   of   resistance.) 


(c)  Detached  Post: 
(Commander) 

(Troops) 

(d)  Reserve: 
(Commander) 

(Troops) 

(How  and   to   whom 
issued.) 


(d)      (Instruction   for   reserve — location,   observation   of 
flanks,  conduct  in  case  of  attack,  duties  of  special  troops.) 

4.  (Instructions    for    field    train    if    it    has    accompanied 
the   outpost.) 

5.  (Place    of    commander    or    where    messages    may    be 
sent.) 

(Signature.) 

(Note:    In    the    case    of    a    small    outpost    the    order    is    usually    verbal    and    the 
troops  are  named  in  the  body  of  the  order). 

B        Distribution   of  Troops — The  outpost  order  usually  prescribes   the 
following  distribution  of  troops : 

Advance  cavalry ; 

Supports ; 

Detached  post  or  posts ; 

Reserve. 

The  reserve,  supports  and  detached  posts  proceed  to  their  respective 
positions  by  the  shortest  routes,  providing  for  their  own  security. 

As  soon  as  practicable  the  outpost  commander  makes  a  careful  in- 
spection of  the  outpost  position  and  orders  such  changes  in  the  arrange- 
ments as  he  deems  necessary.  As  the  movement  of  troops  across  coun- 
try, especially  at  night,  is  difficult,  he  places  the  supports  so  as  to  com- 
mand the  roads.  For  this  reason,  when  dividing  the  line  of  resistance 
into  sections,  he  is  careful  to  see  that  the  dividing  lines  are  not  on  roads 
or  where  the  enemy  can  readily  approach. 


APPLIED  PRINCIPLES  OF  INFORMATION      251 

AND  SECURITY. 

When  practicable,  outposts  should  be  in  position  before  dark,  so 
that  the  troops  can  become  acquainted  with  tJie  country  and  make  prep- 
aration for  defense. 

In  front,  reconnoitering  toward  the  enemy,  is  the  advance  cavalry; 
then  comes  the  line  of  observation  occupied  by  small  groups  of  men  sent 
out  from  the  supports  to  observe;  in  rear  of  the  line  of  observation  is  the 
line  of  resistance,  on  or  near  which  the  supports  are  posted,  and  which 
becomes  the  first  line  of  battle,  if  the  enemy  makes  a  determined  advance; 
in  rear  of  the  line  of  resistance,  centrally  located,  is  the  reserve;  still 
farther  in  rear  is  the  main  body.  In  small  commands  the  reserve  is  gen- 
erally emitted,  the  main  body  taking  its  place. 

The  nature  of  the  country  may  cause  the  line  of  observation  and 
the  line  of  resistance  to  be  practically  the  same. 

It  is  also  possible  for  the  line  of  resistance  to  be  in  advance  of  the 
line  of  observation ;  for  example,  a  low  range  of  h.ills  crossing  the 
enemy's  line  of  advance  might  be  occupied  by  placing  trenches  along  the 
foot  to  secure  a  grazing  tire,  sentinels  to  watch  for  the  enemy's  approach 
being  posted  along  the  crest  in  rear.  At  night  the  front  of  such  a  posi- 
tion is  covered  by  patrols. 

A  Changes  for  the  Night — In  civilized  warfare,  it  is  seldom  neces- 
sary to  draw  the  outpost  closer  to  the  main  body  at  night  in  order 
to  diminish  the  front;  nor  is  it  necessary  to  strengthen  the  line  of  observa- 
tion, as  the  enemy's  advance  in  force  must  be  confined  to  the  roads.  The 
latter  are  therefore  strongly  occupied,  the  intervening  ground  being  dili- 
gently patrolled. 

In  \-ery  open  country,  or  in  war  with  savage  or  semi-civilized  people 

familiar  with  the  terrain,  special  precautions  are  necessary. 

B  Advance  Cavalry — By  day,  the  advance  cavalry  reconnoiters  and 
forms  a  screen  in  advance  of  the  line  of  observation.  If  there  is  in- 
dependent cavalry  in  front  (bodies  far  in  front  under  orders  of  the 
highest  commander  only),  the  advance  cavalry  maintains  connection 
therewith  and  reconnoiters  only  where  necessary.  At  night,  however,  that 
the  horses  may  have  needed  rest  and  because  the  work  can  be  better  done 
by  infantry,  the  greater  part  of  the  cavalry  is  usually  withdrawn  in  rear 
of  the  supports,  generally  joining  the  reserve,  small  detachments  being 
assigned  to  the  supports  for  patrolling,  or  detached  posts  at  a  distance. 

With  efficient  cavalry  in  front,  the  work  of  the  infantry  on  the  line 
of  observation  is  much  reduced 


252  CHAPTER  XIV. 

A  Supports^The  supports  comprise  about  one-half  the  infantry  of 
the  outpost.  They  are  numbered  from  right  to  left.  The  section  of 
the  line  of  resistance  which  each  is  to  occupy  is  given  in  the  outpost  order. 

Support  Commander — As  each  support  arrives  upon  the  ground  it 
is  to  occupy,  its  commander  (who  should  precede  the  support  when 
practicable  and  make  a  rapid  examination  of  the  ground)  adopts  temporary 
measures  for  security,  and  sends  out  observation  groups,  varying  in  size 
from  four  men  to  a  platoon,  to  watch  the  country  in  the  direction  of  the 
enemy.  These  groups  are  called  oiitguards  and  are  sufficient  in  number 
to  cover  the  front  of  the  supports  and  to  connect  where  necessary  with 
the  outguards  of  the  adjoining  supports.  The  line  occupied  by  the  out- 
guards  is  the  line  of  observation. 

After  establishing  the  outguard  the  commander  selects  a  defensive 
position  on  the  general  line  of  resistance,  where  he  not  only  commands 
the  approaches  but  can  give  assistance  to  the  adjoining  supports,  and  he 
gives  instructions  in  regard  to  the  intrenchments  and  obstacles.  He  then 
makes  a  more  careful  reconnaissance  of  the  section  assigned  him,  corrects 
the  position  of  the  outguards  if  necessary,  gives  them  instructions  as  to 
their  duties  in  case  of  attack,  or  when  strangers  approach  their  posts, 
points  out  lines  of  retreat  in  case  they  are  compelled  to  fall  back  to  the 
supports,  selects  if  necessary,  places  for  additional  posts  to  be  occupied 
at  night  or  during  fog,  sees  that  suitable  connections  are  made  between 
his  and  the  adjoining  outguards,  and  between  his  and  adjoining  supports, 
and  questions  subordinate  commanders  to  test  their  grasp  of  the  situation 
and  knowledge  of  their  duties.  On  returning  to  the  support  he  sends  a 
report  with  a  sketch  to  the  outpost  commander,  showing  the  dispositions 
made. 

After  the  line  of  observation  has  been  established,  the  support- 
stacks  arms  and  the  men  are  permitted  to  remove  their  equipments, 
except  cartridge  belts. 

One  or  more  sentinels  are  posted  over  these  supports,  and  they  guard 
the  property  and  watch  for  signals  from  the  outguards. 

Fires  are  concealed  as  much  as  possible  and  the  messing  is  done 
by  reliefs. 

Mounted  messengers  ordinarily  do  not  unsaddle;  they  rest,  water 
and  feed  as  directed.' 

B  Outguards — Outguards  vary  in  sice  from  four  men  to  a  platoon, 
but  are  no  larger  than  necessary  to  watch  the  country,  drive  back  small 
hostile  patrols,  and  furnish  reliefs  for  the  sentinels.     They  are  numbered 


APPLIED  PRINCIPLES  OF  INFORMATION      253 

AND  SECURITY. 

from  right  to  left  for  each  support.  Their  duty  is  to  maintain  uninter 
nipted  observation  of  the  ground  in  front  and  on  the  flanks;  to  report 
promptly  hostile  movements  and  other  information  relating  to  the  enemy; 
to  prevent  unauthorised  persons  from  crossing  the  line  of  observation ;  to 
drive  off  small  parties  of  the  enemy,  and  to  make  temporary  resistance 
to  larger  bodies.  Outguards  of  eight  men  are  convenient,  as  they  furnish, 
besides  the  commander,  relief  for  double  sentinels  and  an  extra  man  for 
messenger  duty  and  to  assist  in   patrolling. 

When  an  outguard  reaches  the  line  of  observation,  it  takes  a  con- 
cealed position  where  the  men  are  allowed  to  rest,  and  posts  one  or  more 
sentinels  a  few  yards  in  advance  to  overlook  the  country.  Single  sentinels 
are  used  in  open  country  in  the  day  time ;  double  sentinels  in  close  country, 
in  thick  weather,  at  night  or  when  special  vigilance  is  necessary. 

The  intervals  between  outguards  and  their  distances  from  the  sup- 
ports depend  upon  the  situation  and  the  nature  of  the  ground.  In 
small  outposts  the  distance  from  support  to  outguard  is  from  400  to  800 
yards.  The  line  of  observation  is  not  necessarily  continuous,  but  ground 
over  which  the  enemy  could  approach  must  be  carefully  guarded.  At 
night  it  may  be  necessary  to  push  one  or  more  of  the  outguards  farther 
to  the  front. 

When    necessary,    outguards    patrol    along    the    line    of    observation 
between  the  posts;  patrolling  to  the  front  is  performed  from  the  support. 
Communication  with  adjoining  outguards  and  with  the  support  is  main 
tained  by  means  of  signals  or  messengers. 

When  resting,  members  of  the  outguard  keep  their  weapons  in 
position  for  immediate  use  and  do  not  remove  their  equipments.  Fires 
are  not  permitted,  unless  in  cold  weather  they  become  necessary,  and 
then  they  must  be  concealed. 

A  The  outpost  of  a  small  command  may  consist  of  outguards  only,  with- 
out supports  or  reserve,  part  of  the  main  body  remaining  on  the  alert. 

B  Sentinels — If  practicable,  troops  on  outpost  duty  are  concealed, 
and  all  movements  made  so  as  to  avoid  observation  by  the  enemy;  sen- 
tinels are  posted  so  as  to  have  a  clear  view  to  the  front,  and  if  practicable, 
to  be  able,  by  day,  to  see  the  sentinels  of  the  adjoining  outguards.  Double 
sentinels  are  posted  near  enough  to  each  other  to  be  able  to  communicate 
easily  in  ordinary  voice. 

Sentinels  are  generally  on  duty  two  hours  out  of  six.  For  every 
sentinel  and  for  every  patrol  there  should  be  at  least  three  reliefs;  there 


254  CHAPTER  XIV. 

fore,  one-third  the  strength  of  the  outgnards  gives  the  greatest  number 
of  men  that  should  be  on  duty  as  sentinels  and  patrols  at  one  time. 

Skillful  selectioti  of  the  posts  of  sentinels  increases  their  field  of 
observation.  High  points,  under  .cover,  are  advantageous  by  night  as 
zvell  as  by  day;  they  increase  the  range  of  vision  and  afford  greater 
facilities  for  seeing  lights  and  hearing  noises.  Observers  with  good  field 
glasses  may  be  placed  on  high  buildings,  on  church  steeples  or  in  high 
trees. 

Glittering  objects  on  uniform  or  equipment  should  be  concealed. 
It  is  seldom  necessary  to  fix  bayonets,  except  at  night,  in  dense  fog. 
or  in  very  close  country. 

Reliefs,  visiting  patrols,  and  inspecting  officers,  approach  sentinels 
from   the   rear,   remaining  under   cover   if   possible. 

A      The  instructions  given  a  sentinel  on  the  line  of  observation  embrace 
the  following: 

a.  liliere  the  enemy  is  or  is  supposed  to  be  and  the  direction  from 
zvhich  lie  may  be  expected  to  come:  the  names  of  villages,  streams  and 
prominent  features  in  sigJit  and  where  the  roads  lead. 

b.  The  number  {if  any)  of  his  post,  and  the  number  of  his  and  the 
adjoining  outguards;  the  position  of  the  support;  the  line  of  retreat  to 
be  followed  if  the  out  guard  is  compelled  to  fall  back;  the  position  of 
advance  detachments  and  whether  friendly  patrols  are  operating  in  front. 

c.  He  zvatches  to  the  front  and  flanks  zvithout  intermission,  and 
devotes  special  attention  to  unusual  or  suspicious  occurrences;  if  he  sees 
indications  of  the  enemy,  he  at  once  notifies  the  commmander  of  the  out- 
guard ;  in  case  of  imminent  danger,  or  when  an  attack  is  made,  he  gives 
the  alarm  by  firing  rapidly. 

d.  By  day,  officers,  noncommissioned  officers  and  detachments  recog- 
nised as  parts  of  the  outposts,  and  officers  known  to  have  authority  to  do 
so,  are  allnzved  to  pass  in  and  out;  all  others  are  detained  and  the  com 
mander  of  the  outguard  notified. 

e.  At  night,  zuhen  persons  approach  his  post,  the  sentinel  comes  to 
a  ready,  halts  them  and  notifies  the  outguard  commander ;  the  latter 
challenges,  learns  who  they  are,  and  acts  according  to  circumstances. 

f.  Individnals  zvho  fail  to  halt,  or  otherzvise  disobey  a  sentinel, 
are  fired  upon  after  a  second  zvarnitig,  or  sooner  if  they  attempt  to  attack 
or  escape. 

g.  Deserters  are  required  to  lay  dozvn  their  arms,  and  a  patrol  is 
sent  out  to  bring  them  in.  Deserters  pursued  by  the  enemy  are  ordered 
to  drop  their  arms  and  an  alarm  is  given;  if  they  fail  to  obey  they  or.: 
fired  upon. 


APPLIED  PRINCIPLES  OF  INFORMATION      255 

AND  SECURITY. 

h.  Bearers  of  flags  of  truce  and  their  escorts  are  halted  and  re- 
quired to  face  outwards;  they  are  then  blindfolded  and  disposed  of  in 
accordance  with  instructions  from   the  support  commander. 

i.  At  night  a  sentinel  stands  practically  in  tJie  same  spot,  moving 
about  for  purposes  of  observation  only;  he  does  not  sit  or  lie  down  unless 
authori::ed  to  do  so.  In  the  day  time  he  makes  use  of  natural  or  artificial 
cover  and  assumes  such  positions  as  give  him  the  best  field  of  view.  //^ 
informs  passing  patrols  of  what  he  lias  seen.  His  weapon  is  habitually 
loaded  and  locked  and  carried  at  will. 

(Note:  Troops  on  outpost  duty  pay  no  compliments,  and  soldiers  salute  only 
when  they  address,  or  are  addressed  by  a  superior). 

A  Detached  Posts — Detached  posts  are  practically  the  same  as  the 
supports  of  an  outpost,  but  occupy  positions  at  some  distance  from 
the  general  line  of  resistance.  They  may  be  sent  out  to  hold  points  which 
are  of  importance  to  the  outpost  cavalry,  such  as  a  ford  or  a  junction  of 
roads;  or  to  occupy  positions  especially  favorable  for  observation,  l)Ut 
too  far  to  the  front  to  be  included  in  the  line  of  observation ;  or  to 
protect  flanks  of  the  outpost  position.  Such  posts  are  generally  established 
by  the  outpost  commander,  but  a  support  commander  might  find  ii  neces- 
sary to  establish  a  post  practically  detached  from  the  rest  of  his  command. 

Special  orders  are  given  the  commander  of  a  detached  post  by  the 
officer  sending  him  out. 

B  Reserve — The  reserve  forms  a  general  support  for  the  line  of 
resistance.  It  is  therefore  centrally  located  near  the  junction  of  roads 
coming  from  the  direction  of  the  enemy,  and  in  concealment  if  practicable. 

Of  the  troops  detailed  for  outpost  duty  about  one-half  of  the  infantry, 
generally  all  of  the  artillery,  and  the  cavalry  not  otherwise  employed,  are 
assigned  to  the  reserve. 

The  arms  are  stacked  and  the  equipments  (except  cartridge  belts) 
may  be  removed.    Roads  communicating  with  the  supports  are  opened. 

When  necessary,  the  outpost  order  states  what  is  to  be  done  in  case 
of  attack,  designates  places  of  assembly  and  provides  for  interior  guards. 
Interior  guards  are  posted  in  the  camp  of  the  reserve  or  main  body  to 
maintain  order,  and  furnish  additional  security.  Additional  instructions 
may  be  given  for  messing,  feeding,  watering,  etc.  In  the  vicinity  of  the 
enemy  or  at  night  a  portion  of  the  infantry  may  be  required  to  remain 
under  arms,  the  cavalry  to  hold  their  horses,  cinchas  loosened,  the  artil- 
lery to  remain  in  harness,  or  take  up  a  combat  position. 


256  CHAPTER  XIV. 

In  case  of  alarm,  the  reserve  prepares  for  action  without  delay, 
and  word  is  sent  to  the  main  body.  In  combat,  the  reserve  reinforces  the 
line  of  resistance,  and  if  unable  to  check  the  enemy  until  the  arrival  of 
the  main  body,  delays  him  as  much  as  possible. 

The  distance  of  the  reserve  from  the  line  of  resistance  varies,  but 
is  generally  about  half  a  mile;  in  outposts  of  tzvo  companies  or  less  this 
distance  may  he  as  small  as  300  yards. 

The  distance  from  the  main  body  to  the  reserve  varies  with  the  size 
of  the  former,  the  nature  of  the  terrain,  situation,  etc. 

A  Communication — Communication  between  the  parts  of  an  out- 
post, and  between  the  reserve  and  the  main  body,  is  maintained  by  wire, 
signals  or  messenger  service. 

B  Outpost  Patrols — Outpost  patrols  are  divided  into  those  which 
operate  between  the  lines  and  those  whose  duty  lies  principally  with- 
in the  lines.  The  former,  called  reconnoitering  patrols,  scout  in  the 
direction  of  the  enemy;  the  latter,  called  visiting  patrols,  maintain  com- 
munication between  the  parts  of  the  outpost  and  supervise  the  performance 
of  duty  on  the  line  of  observation. 

Reconnaissance  should  be  continuous.  The  scouts  and  detachments 
of  cavalry  remain  in  contact  with  the  enemy,  or  at  least  push  forward  to 
a  considerable  distance;  more  detailed  reconnaissance  by  infantry  patrols 
in   the   foreground  must  not  be  neglected. 

C  Reconnoitering  patrols  are  composed  of  at  least  two  men  and  a 
skillful  leader  who,  in  important  cases,  should  be  an  officer.  They  obtain 
information,  ascertain  the  presence  of  the  enemy,  or  discover  his  approach. 

All  patrols,  when  they  cross  the  line  of  observation,  inform  the 
nearest  sentinel  of  the  direction  in  which  they  are  to  advance;  on  their 
return  they  similarly  report  what  they  have  seen  of  the  enemy;  signals 
are  agreed  upon  so  that  they  can  be  recognized  when  returning. 

Any  ground  near  the  line  of  observation  which  might  afford  cover 
for  troops,  or  for  scouts  or  spies,  and  the  approach  to  which  can  not  be 
observed  by  sentinels,  is  searched   frequently  by  patrols. 

Definite  information  concerning  the  enemy  is  reported  at  once. 
Patrols  fire  only  in   self  defense  or  to  give  the  alarm. 

Supports  on  the  flank  of  the  outpost  position  patrol  the  country  on 
the  exposed  flanks. 

D  Visiting  patrols  usually  consist  of  a  noncommissioned  officer  and  two 
or  three  privates.    They  are  sent  out  by  the  support  every  hour  or  two  fco 


APPLIED  PRINCIPLES  OF  INFORMATION      257 

AND  SECURITY. 

the  ontguards  and  adjoining  supports.  They  examine  suspicious  points 
too  distant  for  the  sentinels  to  inspect,  relieve  sick  or  wounded  sentinels, 
and  take  charge  of  detained  persons. 

Visiting  patrols  should  not  march  in  the  open  and  thereby  expose 
the  position  of  sentinels. 

A  Examining  Posts — An  examining  post  is  a  small  detachment  un- 
der the  command  of  an  officer  or  a  noncommissioned  officer,  stationed 
at  some  convenient  point  to  examine  strangers  brought  in  by  the  outguards 
or  patrols.  When  they  are  used,  strangers  approaching  the  line  of 
observation  are  passed  along  the  line  to  an  examining  post. 

No  one  except  the  commander  is  allowed  to  speak  to  persons  brought 
to  an  examining  post.  Prisoners  and  deserters  are  at  once  sent  under 
guard  to  the  rear. 

B  Relieving  the  Outpost — Ordinarily  outposts  are  not  kept  on  duty 
longer  than  twenty-four  hours.  In  temporary  camps  or  bivouac  they 
are  generally  relieved  every  morning.  After  a  day's  advance  the  out- 
post for  the  night  is  usually  relieved  the  following  morning  when  the 
support  of  the  new  advance  guard  passes  the  line  of  resistance.  In  retreat 
the  outpost  for  the  night  usually  forms  the  rear  guard  for  the  following 
day,  and  is  relieved  when  it  passes  the  line  of  observation  of  the  new 
outpost.  Evening  twilight  and  shortly  before  dawn  are  hours  of  special 
danger. 

Outguards  that  have  become  familiar  with  the  country  during 
the  day  time  should  remain  on  duty  that  night.  Sentinels  are  relieved 
once  in  tw^o  hours,  or  oftener,  depending  on  the  weather.  The  work  of 
patrols  is  regulated  by  the  support  commander. 

Commanders  of  the  various  fractions  of  an  outpost  turn  over  their 
instructions  and  special  orders,  written  and  verbal,  to  their  successors, 
together  with  the  latest  information  of  the  enemy,  and  a  description 
of  the  important  features  of  the  country.  When  practicable  the  first 
patrols  sent  out  by  the  new  outpost  are  accompanied  by  members  of 
the  old  outpost  who  are  familiar  with  the  terrain.  When  relieved  the 
old  outguards  return  to  their  supports,  the  supports  to  the  reserve 
and  the  latter  to  the  main  body;  or,  if  more  convenient,  the  supports 
and  reserves  return  to  the  main  body  independently,  each  by  the 
shortest  route. 

When  relieved  by  an  advance  guard,  the  outpost  troops  ordinarily 
join  their  units  as  the  column  passes. 


258  CHAPTER  XIV. 

Cavalry  Outpost — Independent  cavalry  covering  a  command  or 
on  special  missions,  and  occasionally  the  advance  cavalry  of  a  mixed 
command,  bivouac  when  night  overtakes  them,  and  in  such  cases  furnish 
their  own  outposts.  The  outposts  are  established,  in  the  main,  in 
accordance  with  the  foregoing  principles,  care  being  taken  to  con- 
fine outpost  work  to  the  lowest  limits  consistent  with  safety.  No  precau- 
tion, however,  should  be  omitted,  as  the  cavalry  is  generally  in  close 
proximity  to  the  enemy,  and  often  in  territory  where  the  inhabitants  are 
hostile. 

The  line  of  resistance  is  occupied  by  the  supports,  the  latter 
sending  out  the  necessary  outguards  and  patrols.  Each  outguard 
furnishes  its  own  vedettes  (mounted  sentinels),  or  sentinels.  Due  to 
the  mobility  of  cavalry,  the  distances  are  generally  greater  than  in 
an  outpost  for  a  mixed  command.  An  outguard  of  four  troopers  is 
convenient  for  the  day  time,  but  should  be  doubled  at  night,  and  at 
important  points  made  even  stronger.  The  sentinels  are  generally 
dismounted,  their  horses  being  left  with  those  of  the  outguards. 

Mounted  cavalry  at  night  can  offer  little  resistance;  the  supports 
and  outguards  are  therefore  generally  dismounted,  the  horses  under 
cover  in  rear,  and  the  positions  strengthened  by  intrenchments  and 
obstacles.  By  holding  villages,  bridges,  defiles,  etc.,  with  dismounted 
rifle  fire,  cavalry  can  greatly  delay  a  superior  force. 

There  should  always  be  easy  communication  along  the  line  of 
resistance  to  enable  the  cavalry  to  concentrate  at  a  threatened  point. 

A  support  of  one  squadron  covers  with  its  outposts  a  section 
rarely  longer  than  two  miles. 

As  such  a  line  is  of  necessity  weak,  the  principal  reliance  is 
placed  on  distant  patrolling.  If  threatened  by  infantry,  timely  informa- 
tion enables  the  threatened  point  to  be  reinforced,  or  the  cavalry  to 
withdraw  to  a  place  of  safety.  If  there  is  danger  from  hostile  cavalry, 
the  roads  in  front  are  blocked  at  suitable  points,  such  as  bridges, 
fords,  defiles,  etc.,  by  a  succession  of  obstacles  and  are  defended  by  a 
few  dismounted  men.  When  compelled  to  fall  back  these  men  mount 
and  ride  rapidly  to  the  next  obstacle  in  rear  and  there  take  up  a  new 
position.  As  the  march  of  cavalry  at  night  is,  as  a  rule,  confined  to 
roads,  such  tactics  seriously  delay  its  advance. 

In  accordance  with  the  situation  and  the  orders  they  have 
received,  the  support  commanders  arrange  for  feeding,  watering, 
cooking,  resting  and  patrolling.     During  the  night  the   horses  of  the 


APPLIED  PRINCIPLES  OF  INFORMATION      259 

AND  SECURITY. 

outguards  remain  saddled  and  bridled.  During  the  day  time  cinchas 
may  be  loosened,  one-third  at  a  time.  Feeding  and  watering  are 
done  by  reliefs.  Horses  being  fed  are  removed  a  short  distance  from 
the  others. 

Independent  cavalry  generally  remains  in  outpost  position  for 
the  night  only,  its  advance  being  resumed  on  the  following  day;  if 
stopped  by  the  enemy  it  is  drawn  off  to  the  flanks  upon  the  approach 
of  its  own  infantry. 

OUTPOST  PROBLEMS 

t 

(See  Fort  Leavenworth  map  in  pocket  at  bJck  of  book). 
Situation. 

A  Blue  force,  companies  A  and  B,  1st  Infantry,  under  Captain  A, 
in  hostile  country,  is  covering  the  Rock  Island  Bridge  and  camped  for  the 
night  April  20-21  on  the  south  slope  of  Devin  ridge  (rm').  The  enemy 
is  moving  northward  from  Kansas  City  (30  miles  south  of  Leavenworth). 
At  3  :30  p.  m.  Captain  A  receives  a  message  from  Colonel  X  at  Beverly 
(2  miles  east  of  Rock  Island  Bridge  (qo'),  stating  that  two  or  three  com- 
panies of  hostile  infantry  are  reported  five  miles  south  of  Leavenworth  at 
2.30  p.  m.  No  enemy  are  west  of  Leavenworth.  Captain  A  decides  to 
place  one  platoon  on  outpost. 

I^equired,  i.     Captain  A's  order. 

Anszver.  Verbally.  (See  Par.  A,  page  250:  "Two  or  three 
Red  companies  were  5  miles  south  of  Leavenworth  at  2.30  p.  m.  today. 
No  enemy  is  west  of  Leavenworth.  We  will  camp  here.  1st  Platoon, 
"A"  company,  under  Sergeant  A,  will  form  the  outpost,  relieving  the 
advance  guard  (2d  platoon  Co.  A).  The  line  Pope  Hill  (sni') — Rab- 
bit Point  (tn')  will  be  held.  Detached  posts  will  be  placed  on  Hill  88o. 
west  of  Alerritt  Hill  (W),  and  on  Engineer  Hill  (ql').  In  case  of  attack 
the  outpost  line  will  be  held. 

"The  baggage  will  be  at  the  main  camp. 

"Messages  will  reach  me  on  Devin  Ridge  (r;//')." 

Issued  verbally  to  officers  and  Sergeant  A. 

Required,  2.  Give  verbatim  (word  for  word)  the  order  issued  by 
Sergeant  A. 

Anszver.  "Two  companies  of  the  enemy  were  5  miles  south  of 
Leavenworth  at  2.30  p.  m.  today.  Our  camp  is  to  be  here.  This  platoon 
will  be  the  outpost  on  the  line  Rabbitt  Point  (iw') — Pope  Hill  {sm'). 

"The  right  support  1st  section,  less  1  squad,  under  Sergeant  B,  will 


260  CHAPTER  XIV. 

take  position  north  of  Pope  Hill  and  cover  the  following  front :  the 
ravine  (XIX — Merritt  Hill)  west  of.  Grant  avenue  to  the  ravine  about 
midway  between  Grant  Avenue  and  Rabbit  Point  (tn'). 

"The  left  support,  2d  section  less  1  squad  under  Sergeant  H,  will 
take  position  on  north  slope  of  Rabbit  Point  and  will  cover  the  fol- 
lowing front :  the  ravine  midway  between  Grant  Avenue  and  Rabbit 
Point  to  Missouri  River. 

"Corporal  D  you  will  take  the  8  men  of  your  squad  and  form  a 
detached  post  on  Engineer  Hill   (qk'). 

"Corporal  E,  take  your  squad  and  form  a  detached  post  on  Hill  880 
west  of  Merritt  Hill  (r/'). 

"H  attacked  hold  your  front.  Each  support  and  detached  post  will 
entrench  (Par.  A,  page  255). 

"Send  messages  to  me  at  right  support." 

The  outpost  moves  out,  each  support  and  detached  post  separately, 
without  throwing  out  covering  patrols,  because  the  advance  guard  is  now 
holding  the  front.    There  is  no  reserve.     (Par.  A,  page  253). 

Required,  3.     What  does  Sergeant  A  do  now? 

Required,  4.  What  does  Sergeant  B  do  as  soon  as  he  reaches  Pope 
Hill? 

(Note:  During  the  remainder  of  the  afternoon  one  man  up  in  a 
tree  on  Grant  Avenue  will  be  the  only  observing  post  necessary  for  this 
support.  At  night  an  outguard  would  be  placed  on  Grant  Avenue  with 
continuous  patrols  along  the  front,  because  the  open  ground  furnishes 
easy  approach  to  the  enemy.  A  post  of  4  men  might  also  be  placed  on 
the  bridge  over  Corral  Creek  (um'). 

Required  $.  The  location  of  supports  and  the  main  body  of  de- 
tached post  on  Engineer  Hill. 

Required,  6.     What  patrolling  would  be  done  from  the  left  support? 


FIELD  SERVICE. 


261 


CHAPTER  XV. 


FIELD  SERVICE 


The  Camp  Fire  Crane. 


While    loyalty    to    superiors    is    most 
important  in  garrison,  it  is  more  so  in  the 
field,    especially    in    the    presence    of    the 
enemy,   where   the   lack  of  ab- 
solute   loyalty    on    th#  part    of 
subordinates  may  defeat  the  plans   of  super 
iors    and    result    in    disaster    for    both    subor- 
dinate and  superior. 

In  the  field  less  attention  is  paid  to  the 
appearance  of  dress,  niceties  of  military 
courtesy,  etc.,  than  in  garrison.  Field  ser- 
vice offers  a  better  opportunity  for  individual- 
ity, and  every  man  should  be  a  "natural  born 
hustler,"  bearing  in  mind  the  injunction,  "The  cair.p Broom. 
Lord  helps  those  who  help  themselves." 

A  Good  Camp  Lamp  can  be  made  by  using  clear  tal- 
low fat,  (fat  of  animals),  melted  down  and  put  in  an  old 
tin  can.  Improvise  a  wick  from  unravelled  cot- 
ton or  tent  canvas,  put  one  end  in  can  and  the 
other  end  on  edge  of  can  and  wire. 

A  Good  Camp  Candlestick.  A  safe  one  can 
be  improvised  from  a  potato  with  a  hole  in  it — 
bottom  sliced  off  so  it  will  stand  firmly — or  an  old  can  part- 
ly filled  with  dirt. 

A  Good  Camp  Spoon,  Knife  and  Fork  can  be  made  from 
a    shell    and    split    stick.      A    fork    can    easily    be    whittled,    and    a    good 


Camp  Pot,  Hook 
4nd  Poker. 


-<^  y^ 


(Note:  The  illustrations  and  very  nearly  all  the  text  beginning  with,  "A  Good 
Camp  Lamp,"  on  this  page  to  "To  Make  a  Good  Camp  Lantern,"  page  266,  are  from 
"COMPLETE  CAAIPERS'  Manual,"  published  by  the  Gold  Medal  Furniture  Co.) 


262 


CHAPTER  XV. 


knife  made  from  a  piece  of  tin  cut  from  an  old  can  and  inserted  in  a 
split  stick;  lash  it  tight  with  wire. 

A   Good   Dinner  Plate   or   Cooking   Utensil, 

from    a    piece    of    green    thick    barky    tree,    using 
smooth  part  for  food. 

Any    Old    Tin    Can.      Top    care- 
fully  burnt   out   over   camp    fire,   then 
scoured    makes    a    good    cup    or    small    cooking    utensil. 
Make  handle  of  wire  as  shown  in  illustration. 

Frying  or  Broiling  without  Utensils.  Use  the  green,  thick  bark 
of  a  tree,  rough  side  down  on  fire.  Use  the  camp  fire  tongs  (as  illus- 
trated  on   page   264)    or   make  a   toaster   and   broiler  as   shown,    from   a 


The  Bark  Plate  aud  Broiler. 


stick  having  a   split   end   which   will   hold   the   meat   over   a   hot   coal 
fire.     Don't  pierce  the  meat. 

Always  carry  a  small  bag  of  salt  in  the  haversack, 

A  Reliable  Camp  Clock.  A  very  accurate 
one  can  be  improvised  by  making  a  sun  dial  of  a 
piece  of  stick  stuck  in  the  earth  where  the  sun's 
rays  can  cast  the  shadow  of  the  stick  on  the 
ground.  You  can  mark  the  ground  most  accur- 
ately if  one  of  your  party  has  a  watch.  Then  the 
^"vjil^^-*  ^  "^  clock  will  serve  you  well,  when  the  man  with 
the  watch  is  gone. 

Don't  Spoil  a  Good  Knife.  In  opening  tin  cans  in  camp,  take 
the  camp  axe.  Cut  a  cross  in  the  center  and  open  the  cuts  afterward, 
but  not  with  the  fingers. 

To  Heat  a  Tent  Without  a  Stove.  Build  a  camp  fire  near  tent 
opening,  surround  it  partly  with  a  radiator  of  logs,  bark  of  tree  or  brush, 
so  as  to  throw  the  heat  inside. 


FIELD  SERVICE. 


263 


Another  Way.  Throw  into  camp  fire  a  lot 
of  stones,  the  larger  the  better,  let  them  get  red 
hot,  put  into  bucket  and  carry  into  tent,  invert 
the  bucket  over  them,  and  it  will  surprise  you. 
With  a  change  of  stones  in  the  fire  you  can  renew 
and  keep  warm  all  night  long;^or  use  camp 
kettle. 
Still  Another  Way.  (Perfectly  safe  if  com- 
mon sense  is  used).  Dig  a  pit  half  a  bucket  in 
size  somewhere  in  the  tent.  Fill  it  heaping  full 
of  red  hot  clear  coals  (embers)  from  the  camp  fire, 
taking  care  no  unburnt  or  smoky  wood  is  therein. t 
Now  cover  this  with  the  kettle  or  pail.  With 
mud,  plaster  up  the  edges,  and  it  will  keep  your 
tent  and  you  warm  all  night  long.  Use  camp 
pails  (iron  of  course). 

And  Still  Another  Way.  Dig  a  trench  from 
interior  of  tent  to  a  fire  in  a  hole  outside  of  tent,  covering  the  trench 
with  old  pieces  of  tin,  sod,  etc.  To  heat  all  the  space  in  the  tent,  dig 
a  trench  all  the  way  through  the  tent,  having  the  fire  at  one  end  of 
trench  and  the  chimney  at  the  other,  both  fire  and  chimney  being,  of 
course,,  outside.  The  hot  air  passing  through  the  trench-flue  will 
keep  the  tent  warm. 

In  Case  of  Fire  in  Tent.  If  serious,  lay  hold  of  the  bottom  of 
the  bedding  and  pull  out,  and  with  a  blanket  smother  the  fire,  quickly. 
If  fire  is  caught  in  time  you  can  smother  it. 

Let  the  tent  go,  but  save  the  outfit  therein,  if  possible.  You  can 
improvise  shelter  but  not  the  outfit,  so  save  that  part  first. 

To  Find  Out  Correctly  How  the  Winds  Blow.  If  the  wind  is 
very  light,  place  your  finger  in  your  mouth  for  a  minute,  moisten  it, 
then  hold  it  in  the  air.  The  coolest  side  indicates  the  direction  from 
which  the  wind  blows. 

A   Good  Fire  Shovel. — Can  be  made 

"sg^s^-^--^^ ..:"{    of  a  piece  of  tin  and  a  split  stick;  it  is  also 

an  excellent  broiler. 
How   to    Sleep   Warm.     Sheets    of   paper,    or    an    old   newspaper 
sewed  between  two  blankets,  equals  three  blankets.     A  thin  vest  lined 
with  paper  equals  two. 

In    cold    weather,    it    is    most    important    both    for    comfort    and 


264  ^  CHAPTER  XV. 

health  that  the  extremities  be  kept  warm  at  night.  A  sweater  with 
high  rolling  collar,  a  pair  of  heavy  woolen  socks  and  a  woolen  knitted 
night-cap  are  excellent  for  this  purpose,  being  equivalent  to  two  or 
three  blankets. 

Chafing.  If  the  seams  of  underwear  chafe  or  gall  the  skin,  turn 
inside  out.  Common  corn  starch  is  a  most  excellent  talcum  or  chafing 
preventative  and  cure. 

If  Soaking  Wet.  If  soaking  wet  and  no  dry  clothes  handy 
take  off  wet  garments  and  wring  them  out  as  dry  as  possible — put 
on  again, — you  are  less  liable  to  take  cold,  and  will  be  much  warmer 
besides. 

Burn  Up  All  Kitchen  and  Table  Refuse.  Even  potato 
skins  and  wet  tea  or  coffee  grounds,  burn  out  even  tin  cans  in 
the  camp  fire,  if  thrown  out  they  are  fly  and  maggot  breeders, 
and  mean  lots  of  flies  in  camp.  Burnt  out  and  thrown  aside 
they  are  harmless. 

To   Test   the    Freshness    of   Meats,    Game,    Etc.     Thrust 
a   knife    blade   into   center   of   flesh — remove    the    blade;    your 
nose  to  the  knife  blade  will  do  the  rest.     Meat  is  often  fresh 
Camp     outside  when  the  inside  is  not.     Your  nose  can't  tell  inside- 
Tongs,    the  knife  blade  can. 

For  Washing  Flannels  and  Woolens.  Don't  wring  out,'  hang 
them  up  dripping  wet  and  they  won't  wrinkle  up  or  shrink. 

To  Keep  Fresh  Meats,  Game,  Etc.  By  hanging  in  old  sack, 
sack  opening  downward;  secure  with  cord,  tied  to  legs  of  game;  then 
take  a  few  branches  of  leaves  and  cover;  the  rustle  of  these  leaves 
will  help  keep  the  flies  away  and  the  meat  cool.  Fasten  the  bottom 
opening  with  splinters  of  wood,  so  you  can  get  at  meat  without  trouble. 
Biscuit  Cutter  and  Rolling  Pin.  The  tin  baking  powder  can 
cover  makes  an  excellent  biscuit  cutter  and  any  bottle  a  good  rolling 
pin — even  an  unopened  can. 

To  Cool  Water".  Any  old  well  soaked  cloths,  wrapped  around 
outside  of  bottle  or  bucket  will,  if  hung  in  the  shade,  help  cool  con- 
tents.   Remove  the  cork. 

Water  may  also  be  cooled  by  wetting  the  canteen  and  then  hanging 
in  a  cool  place. 

Clothes  Hanger.  A  wire  or  rope  stretched  across  upper  part  of  the 
vertical  tent  poles  makes  a  good  clothes  hanger. 


FIELD  SERVICE.  265 

Hot  Water  Bottle.  A  canteen  filled  with  boiling  water  is  a 
foot  warmer  (a  hot  water  bottle  for  yonr  camp  bed),  that  insures 
you  the  warmth  of  an  extra  blanket,  and  is  invaluable  in  emergencies 
of  camp   sickness. 

Life  Preservers.  Three  or  four  empty  canteens,  tightly  corked 
and  fastened  together,  make  a  very  good  life  preserver. 

A  Good  Camp  Bed  for  Tents,  or  Tent  Carpet.  Take  fine  ends 
of  any  branch  clippings,  and  plent^^  of  them.  Commence  at  the  head 
of  tent,  lay  rows  of  them  butts  to  the  rear,  in  successive  layers. 
If  this  is  done  right  and  carefully  and  ends  locked  with  a  log  rolled 
on  so  as  to  hold  end  in  place,  an  extremely  soft  bed  is  the  result. 
Over  this  spread  a  piece  of  canvas  or  blanket.        * 

If  Thirsty  and  Can't  Find  Water.  Place  a  pebble  or  button 
in  the  mouth  and  keep  it  there;  it  will  surprise  you  wnth  the  result, 
and  relieve  that  dryness  entirely — try  it. 

Lost  in  Camp.  When  you  find  you  have  lost  your  way,  don't 
lose  your  head — keep  cool;  try  and  not  let  your  brains  get  into  your 
feet.  By  this,  we  mean,  don't  run  around  and  make  things  worse, 
and  play  yourself  out.  First:  Sit  down  and  think;  cool  off,  then 
climb  a  tree,  or  hill,  and  endeavor  to  locate  some  familiar  object  you 
passed,  so  as  to  retrace  your  steps.  If  it  gets  dark,  build  a  rousing 
camp  fire.  Ten  to  one  you  will  be  missed  from  camp,  and  your 
comrades  will  soon  be  searching  for  you,  and  your  fire  will  be  seen 
by  them.  Give  distress  signals,  but' don't  waste  all  your  ammunition 
thus.  It's  ten  to  one  morning  and  a  clear  head,  after  a  comfortable 
night,  (if  you  make  it  so)  will  reveal  to  you  the  fact  that  your  camp 
is  much  closer  to  you  than  you  imagined. 

To  locate  position — note  the  limbs  and  bark  of  trees — the  north 
side  of  trees  can  be  noted  by  the  thickness  and  general  roughness. 
Moss  most  generall}'-  is  to  be  found  near  the  roots  on  the  north  side. 
Note  also,  limbs  or  longer  branches,  which  generally  are  to  be  found 
longer  on  south  side  of  trees,  while  the  branches  exposed  to  the 
north  most  generally  are  knotty,  twisted  and  drooped.  In  the  forest 
the  tops  of  the  pine  trees  dip  or  trend  to  the  north;  also:  If  you 
find  water,  follow  it;  it  generally  leads  somewhere — where  civilization 
exists.  The  tendency  of  people  lost,  is  to  travel  in  a  circle  uselessly: 
by  all  means,  keep  cool,  and  deliberate.  Blaze  your  way,  by  leaving 
marks  on  trees  to  indicate  the  direction  you  have  taken. 


266  CHAPTER  XV. 

To  Make  a  Fire  Without  Matches.  Take  a  dry  handkerchief 
or  cotton  Hning  of  your  coat,  scrape  out  a  very  fine  lint,  a  few  hand- 
fuls,  by  using  the  crystal  of  your  watch,  compass  or  spectacle,  a  sun 
glass  can  be  made  that  will  ignite  the  lint,  which  can  be  blown  to  fire. 

Another  Way.  Sprinkle  powder  of  cartridge  as  a  fuse  to  the 
cotton  lint,  and  with  the  cartridge  percussion  cap  you  can  easily 
ignite  the  lint,  dry  moss,  leaves,  etc. 

Still  Another  Way.     Take  scrapings   of  very  fine  pine  wood,  find, 
a  piece  of  quartz  or  hard  ragged  rock,  by  using  your  knife  or  bayonet 
as  a  steel  you  have  a  practical  flint  and  steel.     If  you  haven't  these 
things,  use   two  pieces   of  rough,  jagged   stone  and  by  striking  them 
together  sharply  in  slanting  blows  you  can  ignite  the  lint  or  scrapings. 

To  Dry  Inside  of  Wet  Boots,  Shoes,  Etc.  The  last  thing  at 
night  take  a  few  handfuls  of  clean  dry  pebbles,  heat  them  in  frying 
pan,  kettle  or  campfire  until  very  hot,  place  them  in  the  boots  or  shoes, 
they  will  dry  them  out  thoroughly  in  a  few  hours,  shake  once  in  a 
while.  Oats  or  corn  may  also  be  used,  but  they  are  not  available  always 
and  pebbles  are.     Now  is  an  excellent  time  to  grease  or  oil  them. 

To  make  a  Good  Camp  Lantern.  From  any  ordinary  clear 
glass  bottle,  if  the  bottle  is  long  necked.  Heat  a  piece  of  wire  red 
hot,  and  wrap  it  around  the  part  below  the  neck,  the  wide  part, 
submerge  the  neck  into  a  bucket  of  water  and  it  will  cut  the  part 
surrounded  by  the  hot  wire  as  smooth  and  clean  as  if  cut  to  order. 
Now  wire  a  handle  to  carry  it  by,  with  a  loop  over  the  bottom,  fill  % 
full  with  moist  dirt  or  sand,  forming  a  hole  therein  with  a  round  stick, 
insert  your  piece  of  candle  in  this  hole,  cover  with  a  piece  of  old  tin 
can  top  (perforated  with  holes)  and  you  have  a  good  outside  camp 
lantern. 

To  Keep  Matches  Dry.     Cork  a  few  in  a  small  bottle. 

To    Correctly    Ascertain    the    Points    of    the 

^ Compass.     Face    the    sun    in    the    morning;    spread 

out  your  arms  straight  from  the  body — before 
you  is  east,  behind  you  the  west,  to  your  right 
hand,  the  south,  left,  north,  (accuratel3^)  If  the 
sun  don't  shine,  note  the  tops  of  pine  trees,  they 
invariably  dip  to  the  north.  (See  also  lost  in 
camp). 


FIELD  SERVICE.  ■  267 

Bathing.  Be  careful  about  bathing  in  strange  places.  Don't  dive ; 
weeds  may  be  at  bottom  or  sharp  rocks.  Water  that  looks  inviting 
often  is  full  of  treacherous,  slimy  weeds  in  which  once  caught  it  is 
almost  impossible  to  get  free.  Look  out  for  deep  unseen  mud  holes. 
Better  splash  water  over  body  than  to  take  big  risks. 

Drying  Clothes  in  Cloudy  Weather.  lUiild  a  dome-shaped  work 
by  bending  twigs  into  a  half  circle,  with  ends  in  ground,  over  a 
smoldering  fire,  and  place  the  clothes  on  the  bent  twigs. 

Fording  Streams.  In  case  of  a  quick-sand  bottom,  send  in  a 
few  men  on  foot  to  find  a  solid  place.  Stakes  are  then  driven  to 
mark  the  way,  and  the  command  crosses  the  stream.  Wagons  should 
not  stop  while  crossing  a  stream,  for  in  case  of  soTt  bottoms,  ti:ey  will 
likely  get  bogged. 

■  Mules  should  always  be  watered  before  startiing  to  cross  a 
stream — otherwise  they  will  very  likely  stop  to  drink,  and  the  wagon 
may  get   stuck. 

It  is  well  to  remember  that  the  shallowest  water  is  generally 
found  from  one  salient — tliat  is,  one  projecting  point — of  the  bank 
to  another,  diagnally  across.  The  bends  and  hollows  or  re-entrants 
usually  have  the  deepest  water. 

To  Cross  an  Unfordable  Stream.  If  narrow,  try  to  construct 
a  bridge  of  some  kind,  or  make  a  temporary  crossing  by  felling  trees 
opposite  to  each  other  on  opposite  sides. 

Wagon  bodies  covered  with  canvas  or  wagon  sheets,  lashed 
at  the  ends  and  fastened,  make  good  boats. 

INDIVIDUAL   COOKING 

The  following  remarks  on  individual  cooking,  prepared  by 
Captain  Holbrook  and  published  by  the  Fort  Riley  Training  School 
for  Bakers  and  Cooks,  are  of  so  valuable  a  nature  that,  with  the 
permission  of  the  author,  they  are  here  reproduced: 

For  such  individual  cooking  as  may.  be  necessary  for  the  soldier 
when  thrown  upon  his  own  resources,  the  following  Bills  of  Fare 
have  been  prepared.  Where  the  tin  cup  and  spoon  are  mentioned, 
reference  is  made  to  those  issued  with  the  field  mess  kit. 

Remember  that  the  best  fire  for  cooking  is  a  small,  clear  one, 
or  better  yet,  a  few  brisk  coals. 


268  CHAPTER  XV. 

Almost  anything  that  can  be  cooked  at  all  can  be  prepared  in 
the  mess  kit,  though  the  variety  is  necessarily  small  and  quantities 
limited  on  account  of  few  utensils  of  small  capacity. 

TABLE  OF  WEIGHTS  AND  MEASURES 

The  Ordnance  tin  cup  holds  about  7/$  of  a  quart,  and  is  most 
convenient  in  determining  the  weights  of  the  several  components 
of  the  ration  used  in  the  field.  By  filhng  it  level  full  y')i  the  several 
articles  noted  below,  the  w^eights  there  given  w^ere  accurately  deter- 
mined. 

I  Ordnaiice  tin  cup  level  full  holds 

1  pound  of  flour. 
lYz  pounds  of  beans. 
1^  pounds  of  rice. 
1/^  pounds  of  pease. 
1/4  pounds  of  hominy. 
1/4  pounds  of  corn  meal. 

10  ounces  of  coffee,  roasted  and  ground. 

6  ounces  of  tea,  English  breakfast. 

7  ounces  of  tea,  Oolong. 

10  ounces  of  tea,  Young  Hyson. 
lYz  pounds  of  sugar,  granulated. 

2  pounds  of  salt,  issue. 

Company  Conunandcrs  in  estimating  the  amounts  that  will  be  re- 
quired for  each  meal  may  assume  that  one  man  will  consume  for  one 
meal  about 

1  ounce  of  sugar. 

^  ounce  of  coffee,    1   ounce  chocolate  or  cocoa  or   1-10  ounce 

of  tea. 
4  ounces  of  dried  vegetables. 
4  ounces  of  flour  or  4  hardtacks. 
8  ounces  of  fresh  vegetables. 

4  ounces  of  sliced  bacon  or  6  to  8  ounces  of  fresh  meat. 
1-5  ounce  of  salt. 
1-50  ounce  of  pepper. 


FIELD  SERVICE. 


269 


+.    Oj     to     ^     O    O     CO 


0\  c^  -pi- 


oj    to    « 


W  td  W 
FT  2.  -^ 


-:  o 
p. 

3  C/^ 


o 

en 


P 

O 

m 
en 


p 


P    »-,  i-^ 


p 

P 


rc 


C/5   3 
rt) 


W  ^  bd 

o    Z? 


^  n  ^ 

^ 

w 

^ 

td 

td 

1 — 1 

bd 

g 

td 

■-t     o 

•-t 

•-t 

<-h 

2_ 

p 

p 

P 

-t 

(^ 

p 

o 

CI. 

n 

o 

3 

o 

o 

o 

P 

o 
O 

3 

td 

Dd 

r-f- 

CL 

Beef 
ish  an 

p 

n 

q 

fa 
o 
o 

p 

C/5 

l-h 

d.     ^— N 

n> 

n 

r-h 

w  2. 

P 

P     CI. 

<; 

fC 

o 

< 
H 

1— 1 

% 

td 

td  H 

3 

'^ 

g 

w 

td 

td  O 

CO 

? 

td 

t-H 

r 
r 

CO 

o 

'oniato  S 
;aked  Po 

p* 

<— 1 

p 

n 

re" 
o 

1-^ 

^  o 

r-t 
O 

n 

o 

o 

t— t  • 

Ci. 

o 

1— »    - 

o 

p 
?r 

rt 
p. 

o 

p 
2 

P^ 

p 

p. 

p 

1— k  ■ 

rt) 
p. 

o 

o 

r+      rt- 

P 

r^ 

J 

l-h 

r+ 

o 

~J 

^ 

O 

ew 
atoes 

o 

o 

o 

3 

p 

O 

a> 

in 

P 

o 

C/3 

P 
O 

3 
o 

2* 

C/5 

O 
C/5 

fD 

> 

l-l 

W 

o 


■^jufuopp  p      Li 

"-t  "-t  o)  '-t  --t  i-t      O 

Cu  CI.  Ci.  CU  D- 

td  td  p  td  td  td 

>-!  -t  p;'  ■-:  '-1  '-t 

n)  rti  (-B  fi>  (T>  ft) 

p.  Ci-  p.  Ci.  CL 


O 


1— 1 

3 

n:^ 

s 

1 — 1  u.-f 

3 

P 

HT 

p 

o 

p    p 

p 

•-t 

XJ 

-s 

fD 

2  ^ 

•o 

CU 

Qu 

Cl- 

' 1 

n 

" — 1 

<— 1 

td 

p 

w 

p 

td  p 

p 

•-i 

o 

>-i 

?r 

-t    n 

o 

fD 

?r 

fD 

fD 

ft>       <N 

?r 

P 

p 

P 

O 


H  o  H  o  n  o  o 

fD    O  fT>    o  o  o  o 

p    o  p    3:5  ^  ^  3. 

^  fD  fD  fD  fD 

P  fT>  fD  fD  fD 


o 


n 

n  H  n 

n  n  o 

0 

3*  rD    0 

000 

3} 

0    P    ::^ 

0      ft      fT> 

fU 

Q                fD 

Q 

2.              fD 

P 

(T> 

P      fD      fD 

270  CHAPTER  XV. 

SUGGESTIONS  FOR  HANDLING  BILL  OF  FARE  NO.  1 

L  Take  two-thirds  of  a  cup  of  water  and  bring  to  a  boil.  Add 
four  spoonfuls  of  rice  and  boil  until  soft,  i.  e.,  until  it  can  be  mashed  by 
the  fingers  with  but  little  resistance.  This  Avill  require  about  15  minutes. 
Add  two  pinches  of  salt  and,  after  stirring,  pour  off  the  water  and  empty 
the  rice  out  on  the  lid  of  the  mess  pan. 

2.  Meanwhile,  fry  three  slices  of  bacon  until  slightly  browned  in 
the  mess  pan  over  a  brisk  fire  or  hot  coals,  and  lay  them  on  top  of  the 
rice,  leaving  sufficient  grease  in  the  pan  in  which  to  fry  the  flap  jack. 

3.  Take  six  spoonfuls  of  flour  and  one-third  spoonful  of  baking 
powder  and  mix  thoroughly.  Add  sufllcient  cold  water  to  make  a 
batter  that  will  drip  freely  from  the  spoon.  Add  a  pinch  of  salt  and  two 
pinches  of  sugar  and  pour  the  batter  into  the  mess  pan,  which  should 
contain  the  grease  from  the  fried  bacon.  Place  over  medium  hot  coals 
and  bake  from  five  to  seven  minutes ;  see  that  it  will  slip  easily  in  the 
pan  and  then,  by  a  quick  toss,  turn  it  over  and  continue  the  baking  from 
five  to  seven  minutes  longer  or  until,  by  examination,  it  is  found  to 
be  done. 

4.  While  the  batter  is  frying,  wash  out  the  tin  cup ;  fill  two-thirds 
with  water  and  let  come  to  a  boil.  Add  one  medium  heaping  spoonful 
of  coffee  and  stir  well  and,  if  desired,  one  spoonful  of  sugar  and  let 
boil  for  about  five  minutes.  Let  simmer  for  about  ten  mmutes  longer. 
Settle  by  a  dash  of  cold  water  or  let  stand  a  few  minutes. 

A  hot  meal   is  now   ready  to   serve.     Time  about  40  minutes. 

MEATS 

Bacon.  Cut  side  of  bacon  in  half  lengthwise.  Then  cut  slices 
about  five  to  the  inch,  three  of  which  should  generally  be  sufficient  for 
one  man  for  one  meal.  Place  in  a  mess  pan  with  about,  one-half  inch  of 
cold  water.  Let  come  to  a  boil  and  then  pour  the  water  off.  Fry  over 
a  brisk  fire,  turning  the  bacon  once  and  quickly  browning  it.  Remove 
the  bacon  to  lid  of  mess  pan,  leaving  the  grease  for  frying  potatoes, 
onions,  rice,  flap  jacks,  etc.,  according  to  recipe. 

Fresh  Meat — To  fry.  To  fry,  a  small  amount  oi  grease  (1  to  2 
spoonfuls)  is  necessary.  Put  grease  in  mess  pan  and  let  come  to  a 
smoking  temperature,  then  drop  in  the  steak  and,  if  about  one-half  inch 
thick,    let    fry    for    about    one    minute    before    turning — depending    upon 


FIELD  SERVICE.  2/1 


g^s-    3    'S  ^        "^':^    ^G   "P  "S 


2£j  3  is  ^'^ 


►1  3 


cou 

<i3 

0 

<o 

c 

P  c 

•0 

^  «■ 

a*  "o 


(T>  cn         D-(T)    :!  O 

O  O    P  3    •;  o  w 


^  — 0      "    ::r.  rt 

!"  £i  3       p"  §  =^ 

o  ^n> 
3 

»-^*3 
O   O   (T>  ti 


O   (T)  CD 


3    ^ 


n.  n 
W  rt  3 
en  ryq 


3  :i.=i 


o  o 


"O  rt 


--;-t  ^  a-  -           :          i                    c 

•-!  3      S'  CQ 

X)  ^ 

-52.^  ,j,?^^  'S^^t^     o'^     S^     3^3^ 

^._r  §s.  ?^s:ss    3  1    3  1   ^--^ 


3 

fll 

oq 

0 

Let 
alio 
get 
grai 

75     'I 

en  '^" 

0 

o-n,  S 

3^ 

1  ^ 

r^ 

"2  ^ 

r  en 

rtfxy 

<;  -- 

:S  s* 

3 

:::;!■      3 

m  0) 

fT  0 

0 
0 

^ 

=^S^ 

^  ^ 

?  = 

0 

2 

0 
=:  X  -^ 

^rj 
^     g- 

3 

3  ■-»■ 

3   P^ 

3  e. 

3 

?=3 

0  w 

£L 

5  n 

i-H 

2  ^ 

^t 

0 

S_c- 

0 

CO 

fi  — 

1.-' 

c,-- 

•3 

3 

•  re  --• 


r:-P         Q         ^  '°^Q-.3         .3  P 


O  p 


:n    -- 


2  ><  =- 

S              P^  r+  ="                                      O  B-^  3-f^  >3~3. 

33.  3-  3  n>3^  7),S  t^-;^  '<s:!?'" 

^-  5:  TO  3                 ^  353  3^3  jS-y  5- 

Col  ;  "  i'"-^  "^r  "^r  "jtsb; 

30,0  g_  o  ^«3  g-^  ^S^  Pq, 

3«=  ^  "  §S-  ""       - 

3  o  „.  ^  S^  3^2.^  a  c^  2-3 
TO  V  3  01  a  n  n^i-f.  ^  ^  <  a    . 


272 


CJIAPTER  XV. 


—  ^, « 


<u 


<; 

H 

w 

W 
> 

Q 
W 

Ci        <- 
Q        O 


o 


o 


(Ll 
5   ^    OJ   - 


>•-; 


OJ 


1-1  pq 


U5         "— ' 

°  &^  s 

2  c  <u  u 


Q,  <« 

-CI 

d 


-Si; 


<u 


:ii 

S  ^r  5 
o 

<-5  ^ 


'/)   o   OJ 

c      ^ 


„    o  re  cr 

C  V,    1^ 

'O   i   C   :« 


a, 
re 


> 

o 

< 


;-i 

05 

O 

Vh 

^ 

<M 

C 

u 

o 

(LI 

+-> 

■n 

rt 

3 

^ 

ft 

u  to 


E 


c 
o 

o 

re 


o  bo 


'V 

c 

<L) 


.X 

o 
o 
o 


o 


C  cr 


M 
C 
IC 
(LI 

;-! 

o 

c 
re 


3 
.a 


73 


<LI 

u  > 

re  3 

V 

-  '^ 

re  re 

u  *J 

+^  o 

re  ^ 


re 

(U 


(LI 


C 
re 

(U 


S   « 


(Ll 
^> 


c 

3 
u 


c 

t/; 


W 
^ 


O 

U       (72 


b6 


>^  i—*Z^  01,7-;  ijw^  bo 


Q 
CO 


en  CO 


^    o 

•^  e 

S     c8 
O 

C>      (U 

«o    +-■ 
(1>     <o 

re    o 
>^f 

w  ^ 


FIELD  SERVICE.  273 

whether  it  is  desired  it  shall  be  rare,  medium  or  well  done.     Then  turn 
and  fry  briskly  as  before.     Salt  and  pepper  to  taste. 
Applies  to  beef,  veal,  pork,  mutton,  venison,  etc. 

Fresh  Meat — To  broil.  Cut  in  slices  about  one  inch  thich,  from 
half  as  large  as  the  hand  to  four  times  that  size.  Sharpen  a  stick  or 
branch  of  convenient  length — saj'  from  two  to  four  feet  long  and  weave 
the  point  of  the  stick  through  the  steak  several  times  so  that  it  may  be 
readily  turned  over  a  few  brisk  coals  or  on  the  windward  side  of  a  small 
fire.  Allow  to  brown  nicely,  turning  frequently.  Salt  and  pepper  to 
taste.  Meat  wath  considerable  fat  is  preferred,  though  any  meat  may  be 
broiled  in  this  manner. 

Fresh  Meat — To  stew.  Cut  into  chunks  from  one-half  inch  to  one 
inch  cube.  Fill  cup  one-third  full  of  meat  and  cover  with  about  one  inch 
of  water.  Let  boil  or  simmer  about  one  hour  or  until  tender.  Add 
such  fibrous  vegetables  as  carrots,  turnips  or  cabbage,  cut  into 
small  chunks,  soon  after  the  meat  is  put  on  to  boil,  and  potatoes, 
onions,  or  other  tender  vegetables  when  the  meat  is  about  half  done. 
Amcjunt  of  vegetables  to  be  added,  about  the  same  as  meat,  depending 
upon  supply  and  taste.  Salt  and  pepper  to  taste.  Applies  to  all  fresh 
meats  and  fowls.  The  proportion  of  meat  and  vegetables  used  varies 
with  their  abundance  and  fixed  quantities  cannot  be  adhered  to.  Fresh 
fish  can  be  handled  as  above,  except  that  it  is  cooked  much  quicker, 
and  potatoes,  onions,  and  canned  corn  are  the  only  vegetables  generally 
used  with  it,  thus  making  a  chowder.  A  slice  of  bacon  would  greatly 
improve  the  flavor.     May  be  conveniently  cooked  in  mess  pan  or  tin  cup. 

FRESH  VEGETABLES 

Potatoes,  Fried.  Take  two  medium  sized  potatoes  or  one  large 
one  (about  one-half  pound),  peel  and  cut  into  slices  about  one-fourth 
inch  thick  and  scatter  well  in  the  mess  pan  in  which  the  grease  remains 
after  frying  bacon.  Add  sufficient  water  to  half  cover  the  potatoes, 
cover  with  the  lid  to  keep  the  moisture  in,  and  let  come  to  a  boil  from 
15  to  20  minutes.  Remove  the  cover  and  dry  as  desired.  Salt  and 
pepper  to  taste.  During  the  cooking  the  bacon  already  prepared  may  be 
kept  on  the  cover^  which  is  most  conveniently  placed  bottom  side  up 
over  the  cooking  vegetables. 

Onions,  Fried.     Same  as  potatoes. 

Potatoes,  Boiled.  Peel  two  medium,  sized  potatoes  or  one  large 
one  (about  one-half  pound),  and  cut  in  coarse  chunks  of  about  the  same 


274  CHAPTER  XV. 

size — say  one  and  one-half  inch  cubes.  Place  in  mess  pan  and  three- 
fourths  fill  with  water.  Cover  with  lid  and  let  boil  or  simmer  for  15  or 
20  minutes.  They  are  done  when  easily  penetrated  with  a  sharp  stick. 
Pour  off  the  water  and  let  dry  out  for  one  or  two  minutes  over  hot  ashes 
or  light  coals. 

Potatoes  Baked.  Take  two  medium  sized  potatoes  or  one  large 
one  cut  in  half  (about  one-half  pound).  Lay  in  a  bed  of  light  coals, 
cover  with  same  and  smother  with  ashes.  Do  not  disturb  for  30  or  40 
minutes,  when  they  should  be  done. 

Canned  Tomatoes.  One  two-pound  can  is  generally  sufficient  for 
five  men. 

Stew.  Pour  into  the  mess  pan  one  man's  allowance  of  tomatoes, 
add  about  two  large  hardtacks  broken  into  small  pieces  and  let  come  to 
a  boil.  Add  salt  and  pepper  to  taste,  or  add  a  pinch  of  salt  and  one- 
fourth  spoonful  of  sugar. 

Or,  having  fried  the  bacon,  pour  the  tomatoes  into  the  mess  pan, 
the  grease  remaining,  and  add  if  desired,  two  broken  hardtacks.  Set 
over  a  brisk  fire  and  let  come  to  a  boil. 

Or,  heat  the  tomatoes  just  as  they  come  from  the  can,  adding  two 
pinches  of  salt  and  one-half  spoonful  of  sugar  if  desired. 

Or,  especially  in  hot  weather,  eaten  cold  with  hard  bread  they  are 
very  palatable. 

HOT  BREADS 

Flap  Jack.  Take  six  spoonfuls  of  flour  and  one-third  spoonful 
of  baking  powder  and  mix  thoroughly  (or  dry  mix  in  a  large  pan  before 
issue,  at  the  rate  of  25  pounds  of  flour  and  three  half  pound  cans  of 
baking  powder  for  100  men).  Add  sufficient  cold  water  to  make  a  batter 
that  will  drip  freely  from  the  spoon,  adding  a  pinch  of  salt.  Pour  into 
the  mess  pan,  which  should  contain  the  grease  from  fried  bacon,  or  a 
spoonful  of  butter  or  fat,  and  place  over  medium  hot  coals,  sufficient  to 
bake  so  that  in  from  five  to  seven  minutes,  the  flap  jack  may  be  turned 
by  a  quick  toss  of  the  pan.  Fry  from  five  to  seven  minutes  longer  or 
until,  by  examination,  it  is  found  to  be  done. 

Hoe  Cake.  Hoe  cake  is  made  exactly  the  same  as  flap  jack  by 
substituting  corn  meal  for  flour. 


FIELD  SERVICE. 

EMERGENCY  RATION 

Emergency  Rations.  Detailed  instructions  as  to  the  manner  of 
preparing"  the  emergency  ration  are  found  on  the  ]al)el  with  each  can. 
Remember  that  even  a  \ery  limited  amount  of  bacon  or  hard  bread, 
or  both,  taken  with  the  emergency  ration  makes  it  far  more  palatable, 
and  greatly  extends  l;he  period  during  which  it  can  be  consumed  with 
relish.  For  this  reason  it  would  be  better  to  husband  the  supply  of 
hard  bread  and  bacon  to  use  with  the  emergency  ration  when  it  becomes 
evident  that  the  latter  must  be  consumed,  rather  than  to  retain  the  emerg- 
ency ration  to  the  last  extremity  to  be  used  exclusively  for  a  longer 
period  than  two  or  three  days. 

MARCHES 

In  time  of  war,  protection  for  troops  on  the  march  is  provided 
by   means   of   Advance    Guards,   Flanking   Parties   and   Rear   Guards. 

The  average  march  for  infantry  is  from  15  to  20  miles  a  day; 
for  cavalry,  from  20  to  25,  and  for  artillery  from  15  to  25. 

When  practicable,  marches  should  begin  in  the  morning*  after 
the  men  have  had  their  breakfast,  and  the  following  general  rules 
should  be  observed. 

/     The  canteens  should  be  filled  before  the  march  begins. 

2  Infantry  should  march  about  3  miles  an  hour;  cavalry  about 
5,  alternating  the  walk  and  trot  and  occasionally  dismounting  and 
leading  for  short  distances;  the  artillery  about  4,  the  walk  being  the 
habitual  gait. 

J  The  pace  at  the  head  of  the  column  must  be  steady  and  the 
column  must  be  kept  closed  up  throughout  its  length. 

4  After  the  first  half  or  three-quarters  of  an  hour's  march,  the 
command  should  be  halted  for  about  fifteen  minutes  to  allow  the  men 
to  relieve  themselves  and  to  adjust  their  clothing  and  accoutrements. 

5  After  the  first  rest,  there  should  be  a  halt  of  ten  minutes 
every  hour. 

Immediately  upon  halting,  the  company  shotdd  be  cautioned, 
"Any  man  wishing  to  relieve  himself,  do  so  at  once" — otherwise  some 
will  wait  until  the  halt  is  nearlv  over. 


*lf  considerable  distance  is  to  be  marched  without  water,  the  start  should  be 
made  late  in  the  afternoon  and  continued  until  night  and  then  again  early  the  next 
morning,    halting   before    the    sun    gets    hot. 


276  CHAPTER  XV. 

6  Indiscriminate  rushing  for  water  upon  halting  should  not  be 
allowed — one  or  more  men  from  every  squad  should  be  designated  to 
fill  the  canteens  of  the  squad. 

7  No  man  should  be  allowed  to  leave  the  ranks  without  per- 
mission of  his  company  commander. 

Men  allowed  to  fall  out  on  account  of  sickness  should  be  given 
notes  to  the  surgeon.  If  a  man  be  very  sick  a  non-commissioned 
officer  or  reliable  private  should  fall  out  with  him. 

(S  Whenever  a  stream  is  forded  or  any  obstacle  passed,  the 
head  of  the  column  should  be  halted  a  short  distance  beyond,  so  as  to 
enable  the  rest  of  the  column  to  close  up. 

p  In  crossing  shallow  streams,  the  men  should  be  kept  closed 
up  and  not  allowed  to  pick  their  way. 

10     All  men  should  be  made  to  keep  their  places  in  column. 
//     A   lieutenant   or   the   first   sergeant   should   march   in   rear   of 
the  company  to  look  after  stragglers. 

12  Nibbling  while  actually  marching  should  be  prohibited. 

13  When  the  troops  march  for  the  greater  part  of  the  day,  a  halt 
of  an  hour  should  be  made  about  noon,  near  wood  and  water,  if 
practicable. 

14.  The  halt  for  the  night  should  be  made  in  plenty  of  time  to 
allow  tents  to  be  pitched,  supper  cooked,  etc.,  before  dark. 

75  Since  marching  at  the  rear  of  the  column  is  more  disagree- 
able and  fatiguing  than  marching  at  the  front,  organizations  should 
take  daily  turns  in  leading.f 

ARTICLES    OF    WAR 

Art.  54.  Every  officer  commanding  in  quarters,  garrison  or  on 
the  march,  shall  keep  good  order,  and,  to  the  utmost  of  his  power,  re- 
dress all  abuses  or  disorders  which  may  be  committed  by  any  officer 
or  soldier  under  his  command;  and  if,  upon  complaint  made  to  him 
of  officers  or  soldiers  beating  or  otherwise  ill-treating  any  person, 
disturbing  fairs  or  markets,  or  committing  any  kind  of  riot,  to  the 
disquieting  of  the  citizens  of  the  United  States,  he  refuses  or  omits 
to  see  justice  done  to  the  offender,  and  reparation  made  to  the  party 
injured,   so   far   as   part   of  the    offender's    pay   shall   go   toward   such 


tSee  "Marches"  in  the  Infantry,  the  Cavah-y  and  the  Artillery  Drill  Regula- 
tions, in  Field  Service  Regulations  and  in  the  Army  Regulations.  See  also  "The 
March    in    Campaign,"    in    Munson's   Military    Hygiene. 


FIELD  SERVICE.  277 

reparation,  he  shall  be  dismissed  from  the  service,  or  otherwise  pun- 
ished as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

Art.  55.  All  officers  and  soldiers  are  to  behave  themselves  or- 
derly in  quarters  and  on  the  march;  and  whoever  commits  any  waste 
or  spoil,  either  in  walks  or  trees,  parks,  warrens,  fish  ponds,  houses, 
gardens,  grain  fields,  inclosures,  or  meadows,  or  maliciously  destroys 
any  property  whatsoever  belonging  to  inhabitants  of  the  United 
States  (unless  by  order  of  a  general  officer  commanding  a  separate 
army  in  the  field)  shall,  besides  such  penalties  as  he  may  be  liable  to 
by  law,  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

CAMPING 

In  time  of  war  protection  for  troops  in  camp  is  provided  by 
means  of  Outposts.  « 

The  art  of  laying  out  camps  is  called  castrametation. 

The  following  conditions  must  be  considered  in  the  selection  of 
camp  sites: 

1  Location. 

2  Water,  wood  and  grass. 

S     Sanitation,  and  in  time  of  war,  defense  and  safety. 

Camps  should  be  on  slightly  sloping  ground,  well  drained  and 
subject  to  sunny  exposures.  Sandy  or  deep,  gravelly  soil  is  desirable, 
but  muddy  rivers,  ponds,  swamps,  made  ground,  alluvial  soil  and  en- 
closed ravines  must  be  avoided. 

In  time  of  war  all  hills  and  eminences  nearby  should  be  occupied 
by  pickets.  When  camp  is  established  for  an  indefinite  period,  drain- 
age should  be  attended  to  at  once.  Each  tent  should  have  a  shallow 
trench  dug  around  it  and  the  company  and  other  streets  ditched  on 
both  sides,  all  the  trenches  and  ditches  connecting  with  a  ditch  that 
carries  the  water  from  the  camp.  All  surface  drainage  from  higher 
ground  should  be  intercepted  and  turned  aside. 

In  front  of  every  camp  of  a  permanent  nature,  there  should  be 
a  parade  ground  for  drills  and  ceremonies,  and  the  sanitary  condi- 
tions of  the  camp  should  be  carefully  considered. 

In  camping  for  the  night  on  a  fordable  stream  that  is  to  be 
crossed,  always  cross  before  going  into  camp;  for  a  sudden  rise  or 
the  appearance  of  the  enemy  might  prevent  the  crossing  the  next 
morning. 

Whenever  windstorms  are  expected,  the  tent  pegs  should  be 
secured  and  additional  guy  ropes  attached  to  the  tents.     If  the  soil  be 


278  CHAPTER  XV. 

loose  or  sandy,  stones  or  other  hard  material  should  be  placed  under 
the  tent  poles  to  prevent  their  working  into  the  soil,  thus  leaving  the 
tent  slack  and  unsteady.  When  "the  soil  is  so  loose  that  the  pegs  wiH 
not  hold  at  all,  fasten  the  guy  ropes  to  brush,  wood  or  rocks  buried 
in  the  ground. 

Tents  may  be  prevented  from  blowing  down  by  being  made  fast 
at  the  corners  to  posts  firmly  driven  into  the  ground,  or  by  passing 
ropes  over  the  ridge  poles  and  fastening  them  to  pegs  firmly  driven 
into  the  ground. 

While  trees  add  very  much  to  the  comfort  of  a  camp,  care 
should  be  exercised  not  to  pitch  tents  near  trees  whose  branches  or 
trunks  might   fall. 

In  a  hostile  country  the  capability  of  defense  of  a  camp  site 
should  always  be  considered. 

Making  Camp 

The  command  should  be  preceded  by  the  commanding  officer  or 
a  staff  officer,  who  selects  the  camp  site,  and  designates,  by  plantin^.? 
stakes,  the  lines  of  tents,  the  positions  of  the  sinks,  guard  tent, 
kitchens,  picket  line,  etc. 

After  the  companies  are  marched  to  their  proper  positions  and 
arms  are  stacked,  the  details  for  guard  and  to  bring  wood,  water,  dig 
sinks,  pitch  tents,  handle  rations,  etc.,  should  be  made  before  ranks 
are  broken. 

Immediatey  upon  reaching  camp  and  before  the  men  are  allowed 
to  go  around,  patrolling  sentinels  should  be  established  to  prevent 
men  from  polluting  the  camp  site  or  adjoining  ground  before  the 
sinks  are  constructed. 

Sentinels  should  be  posted  over  the  water  supply  without  delay. 

As  soon  as  the  tents  have  been  pitched  and  the  sinks  dug,  the 
camp  should  be  inspected  and  all  unnecessary  sentinels  relieved. 

The  tents  should  be  pitched  and  the  sinks  dug  simultaneously. 

If  the  weather  is  at  all  threatening  or  if  it  is  intended  to  camp 
more  than  one  night,  all  tents  should  be  ditched. 

Should  the  troops  reach  camp  before  the  wagons,  the  companies 
may  be  divided  into  squads  and  set  to  work  clearing  the  ground, 
gathering  fire  wood,  collecting  leaves,  grass,  etc.,  for  beds,  etc. 

The  moment  a  command  reaches  camp  its  officers  and  men 
usually  want  to  go  here  and  there  under  all  sorts  of  pretexts.     No  one 


FIELD  SERVICE.  279 

should  be  allowed  to  leave  camp  until  all  necessary  instructions  have 
been  given. 

Officers  should  not  be  allowed  to  leave  camp  without  permission 
from  the  commanding  officer,  and  enlisted  men  should  not  be  per- 
mitted to  leave  camp  without  permission  of  their  company  com- 
manders. 

Sick-call  should  be  held  as  soon  as  practicable  after  the  tents 
have  been  pitched. 

Retreat  roll  call  should  always  be  under  arms,  an  officer  being 
with  each  company  and  inspecting  its  arms. 

Construction  of  Sinks 

The  sinks  must  be  dug  immediately  upon  reaching  camp — their 
construction  must  not  be  delayed  until  the  cam^  have  been  pitched 
and  other  duties  performed.  The  number  of  sinks  should  be  reduced 
to  a  minimum — each  company  should  not  be  permitted  to  have  its 
own  sink — there  should  be  one  sink  to  each  battalion.  The  exact 
location  of  the  sinks  should  be  determined  by  the  commanding  officer, 
or  by  some  officer  designated  by  him,  the  following  considerations 
being  observed: 

/  They  should  be  so  located  as  not  to  contaminate  the  water 
supply,  and  should  be  on  the  leeward  side  of  the  camp. 

2  They  should  not  be  placed  where  they  can  be  flooded  by  rain 
water  from  higher  ground,  nor  should' they  be  so  placed  that  they 
can  pollute  the  camp  by  overflow  in  case  of  heavy  rains. 

2  They  should  be  as  far  from  the  tents  as  is  compatible  with 
convenience — if  too  near,  they  will  be  a  source  of  annoyance;  if  too 
far,  some  men,  especially  at  night,  and  particularly  if  affected  with 
diarrhoea,  will  defecate  before  reaching  the  sink.  Under  ordinary 
circumstances,  a  distance  of  about  75  yards  is  considered  sufficient. 

4  The  sinks  and  the  kitchens  should  always  be  widely  separated, 
and  when  practicable  should  be  on  opposite  sides  of  the  camp. 

The  size  of  the  sink  will  depend  on  the  length  of  time  the  camp 
is  to  be  occupied.  If  it  be  for  only  one  night,  a  trench  about  two  feet 
wide  and  two  feet  deep  will  be  sufficient,  its  length  depending  upon 
the  number  of  men  to  be  accommodated,  a  length  of  about  twenty 
feet  being  sufficient  for  a  company  of  one  hundred  men.  If  the  camp 
is  to  be  occupied  for  several  days,  the  sink  should  be  about  six  feet 
deep,  three  feet  wide  at  the  top  and  two  feet  at  the   bottom.     The 


280  CHAPTER  XV. 

soil  from  the  trench  should  be  piled  to  the  rear,  from  where  it  can 
be  scattered  as  needed  over  the  deposits.  The  seat  may  be  formed 
by  placing  a  good  stout  pole  on  the  edge,  about  18  inches  above  the 
ground,  and  supported  at  each  end  by  forked  posts. 

The  sink  should  be  hidden  from  view  by  brushwood  stuck  into 
the  ground  and  a  roof  of  boughs  should  be  constructed  to  keep  off 
the  sun.  At  least  twice  a  day,  in  the  morning  and  in  the  evening,  the 
police  party  should  cover  the  bottom  with  a  slight  layer  of  loose 
earth.  Better  still,  each  man  should  be  made  to  cover  his  own  defeca- 
tion with  earth,  ashes  or  lime.  As  a  general  rule,  one  soldier  for 
every  sink  should  be  especially  detailed  to  see  that  the  defecations 
are  properly  covered  and  that  all  other  rules  pertaining  to  the  sinks 
are  obeyed.  Lime  or  crude  petroleum,  if  available,  should  be  spread 
over  the  deposits,  petroleum  being  especially  good  to  keep  flies  away. 
When  the  sink  is  filled  to  within  two  or  three  feet  of  the  surface 
its  use  is  to  be  discontinued  and  earth  thrown  in  and  packed  until  a 
slight  mound  is  made  above  it. 

All  sinks  should  be  filled  in  before  marching. 

See  "The  Sanitary  Administration  of  the  Camp,"  in  "Munson's  Military 
Hygiene." 

Kitchens 

The  following  are  simple  methods  of  constructing  camp 
kitchens: 

/  Dig  a  hole  about  two  feet  deep,  in  which  build  a  fire  and 
keep  it  burning  until  the  hole  is  full  of  hot  ashes;  put  what  is  to  be 
cooked  in  covered  pans  which  are  placed  in  the  hole  and  covered  with 
ashes,  on  top  of  which  keep  a  fire  burning  briskly. 

2  Dig  a  trench  in  the  direction  of  the  wind,  of  a  width  a  little 
less  than  the  diameter  of  the  kettles  and  about  one  foot  deep  at  the 
end  from  which  the  wind  is  blowing,  continuing  this  depth  for  four 
or  five  feet  and  then  gradually  decreasing  it  until  the  surface  of  the 
ground  is  reached.  •  Build  a  fire  in  the  deep  part  of  the  trench;  be- 
ginning a  short  distance  fronj  the  deep  end  of  the  trench,  place  the 
kettles  over  the  fire  touching  one  another,  stopping  up  with  dry  sod 
the  chinks  made  by  the  roundness  of  the  kettles,  so  that  the  space 
underneath  will  form  a  flue. 

3  Dig  a  trench  about  two  feet  wide,  one  foot  deep  and  five  feet 
long;  at  each  end  drive  into  the  ground  a  forked  stick,  of  equal  heights, 
and  place  upon  them  a  stout  sapling,  from  which  suspend  the  kettles. 


FIELD  SERVICE.  '  281 

4  In  clay  soil,  preferably  on  the  slope  of  a  hill,  dig  a  hole  about 
three  feet  square  and  two  feet  deep;  from  one  side  of  the  hole,  and 
about  one  foot  below  the  surface  of  the  ground,  run  a  lateral  shaft 
about  one  foot  square  and  six  feet  long,  sinking  a  vertical  shaft  at 
the  end;  connect  the  lateral  shaft  with  the  surface  of  the  ground  by 
three  equidistant  holes,  over  which  the  kettles  are  placed. 

As  a  precautionary  measure  against  setting  the  camp  on  fire, 
all  dry  grass,  underbrush,  etc.,  in  the  immediate  vicinity  of  the  kitchen 
should  be  cut  down. 

In  case  of  a  fire  in  camp,  underbrush,  spades,  shovels,  blankets, 
etc.,  are  used  to  beat  it  out. 

Gunny  sacks  dipped  in  wa^^er  are  the  best  fire  fighters. 

Burning  away  dried  grass  and  underbrush  around  exterior  of 
camp  is  a  great  protection  against  fire  from  outside. 

Kitchen  Pits 

Pits  of  convenient  size  should  be  constructed  for  the  liquid  refuse 
from  the  kitchens.  Solid  refuse  should  be  burned  either  in  the  kitchen 
fire  or  at  some  designated  place,  depending  upon  whether  the  camp 
is  *of  a  temporary  or  permanent  nature.  Unless  the  camp  be  of  a 
very  temporary  nature,  the  pits  should  be  covered  with  boards  or 
other  material  in  order  to  exclude  the  flies. 

All  pits  should  be  filled  in  with  earth  before  breaking  camp. 

Ovens 

A  simple  camp  oven  may  be  constructed  as  follows: 
Place  horizontally  a  barrel  with  iron  hoops  in  a  hole  of  proper 
width  and  of  a  depth  equal  to  about  one-fourth  of  the  diameter  of 
the  barrel;  except  at  the  open  end,  which  is  to  be  the  mouth,  cover 
the  barrel  with  six  or  eight  inches  of  wet  earth,  preferably  clay;  fill 
the  bottom  of  the  barrel  with  mud  until  an  even  floor  is  formed; 
cover  all  the  mud  with  several  inches  of  sand,  earth,  etc.;  make  a  flue 
of  two  or  three  inches  in  diameter  at  the  further  top  end  of  the  barrel, 
then  light  a  fire  in  the  barrel  and  keep  it  burning  briskly  until  all  the 
staves  are  burned  out  and  the  earth  is  well  hardened.  See  "Bakery 
Facilities,"  page  174,  "Munson's  Military  Hygiene,"  and  "Field 
Ovens,"  page  225,  "Manual  for  Army  Cooks"   (1896). 

Bunks 

Place  a  number  of  small  poles  about  seven  feet  long  close  to- 
gether,  the  upper   ends   resting  on   a   cross   pole   about   six  inches   in 


282  CHAPTER  XV. 

diameter  and  the  lower  ends  resting  on  the  ground;  or,  the  poles  ma\' 
be  raised  entirely  off  the  ground  by  being  placed  on  cross  poles  sup- 
ported by  forked  stakes  at  the  corners;  on  the  poles  place  grass, 
leaves,  etc. 

Wood 

The  fire-wood  should  be  collected,  cut  and  piled  near  the  kitchen. 
Dry  wood  is  usually  found  under  logs  or  roots  of  trees. 

If  wagons  are  not  heavily  loaded  it  is  sometimes  a  good  plan 
to  bring  a  few  sticks  of  dry  wood  from  the  preceding  camp,  or  to 
pick  up  good  wood  en  route. 

Water 

Precautionary  measures  should  always  be  taken  to  prevent  the 
contamination  of  the  water,  and  a  guard  from  the  first  troops  reach- 
ing camp  should  be  placed  over  the  water  supply.  Water  used  for 
drinking  purposes  should  be  gotten  from  above  the  camp,  and  places 
below  this  point  should  be  designated  for  watering  the  animals, 
bathing  and  washing  clothes. 

In  the  field  it  is  sometimes  necessary  to  sterilize  or  filter  water. 
The  easiest  and  surest  way  of  sterilizing  water  is  by  boiling.  Boiled 
water  should  be  aerated  by  being  poured  from  one  receptacle  to  an- 
other or  by  being  filtered  through  charcoal  or  clean  gravel.  Unless 
boiled  water  be  thus  aerated  it  is  very  unpalatable  and  it  is  with 
difficulty  that  troops  can  be  made  to  drink  it. 

Filtration  merely  clarifies — it  does  not  purify.  The  following 
are  simple  methods  of  filtration: 

/  Dig  a  hole  near  the  source  of  supply  so  that  the  water  may 
percolate  through  the  soil  before  being  used. 

2  Sink  a  barrel  or  box  into  the  ground,  the  water  entering 
therein  through  a  wooden  trough  packed  with  clean  sand,  gravel  or 
charcoal. 

3  Place  a  box  or  barrel  in  another  box  or  barrel  of  larger  size, 
filling  the  space  between  with  clean  sand,  gravel,  moss  or  charcoal, 
and  piercing  holes  near  the  bottom  of  the  outer  barrel  and  near  the 
top  of  the  inner.  The  filter  thus  constructed  is  partly  submerged  in 
the  water  to  be  filtered. 

4  Bore  a  small  hole  in  the  bottom  of  a  barrel  or  other  suitable 
receptacle,  which  is  partly  filled  with  layers  of  sand,  gravel,  and,  if 
available,  charcoal  and  moss.  The  water  is  poured  in  at  the  top  and 
is  collected  as  it  emerges  from  the  aperture  below. 


FIELD  SERVICE.  283 

The  amount  of  water  used  by  troops  is  usually  computed  at  the 
rate  of  five  gallons  for  each  man  and  ten  gallons  for  each  animal  per 
day. 

For  a  full  discussion  of  the  purification  of  drinking  water,  see 
"Water,"  Munson's  Military  Hygiene. 

Police  of  Camp 

The  proper  and  efficient  police  of  a  camp  is  of  the  greatest  im- 
portance, and  the  following  regulations  should  be  enforced: 

/  Company  commanders  will  maintain  neatness  and  proper 
sanitary  conditions  within  their  respective  organizations. 

2  The  officer  of  the  day  is  charged  with  the  general  policing  of 
the  camp,  utilizing  prisoners  and  fatigue  parties  for  the  purpose. 

3  Company  commanders  will  make  daily  inspections  of  their 
company  quarters,  kitchens   and   sinks. 

4  The  company  streets  will  be  swept  daily,  and  the  intervening^ 
spaces  between  tents  carefully  policed. 

5  All  tents  will  be  swept  out  daily.* 

6  All  bedding  will  be  sunned  daily.f 

7  The  condition  of  the  outskirts  of  the  camp  will  be  given  close 
attention,  being  kept  free  from  all  refuse. 

5  In  fair  weather,  every  morning  after  breakfast  the  tent  walls 
will  be  looped  up.  In  cold  weather  the  tent  walls  will  be  raised  dur- 
ing the  absence  of  the  occupants  at  drill  or  other  duty. 

p  Every  night  at  tattoo  and  also  during  wet  weather  the  tent 
ropes  will  be  slackened.  They  will  be  tightened  again  at  reveille  or 
when  the  weather  clears. 

LOADING  WAGONS 

The  property  to  be  loaded  should  be  carefully  inspected  before 
any  is  loaded,  to  see  that  everything  is  in  good  order  and  properlv 
boxed,  crated  or  tied. 

Large  heavy  boxes  should  be  avoided. 
The  following  general  rules  must  be  observed: 


*Brooms  can  be  improvised  by  tying  together  a  number  of  small  twigs  of 
equal   length.     The  leafy   branches  of  trees  will   answer  the  same  purpose. 

tPoles  supported  by  forked  uprights  are  convenient  for  drying  and  sunning 
garments  and  bedding. 


284  CHAPTER  XV. 

1  Heavy  stuff  must  go  on  the  bottom  (and  forward  rather  than 
rear)  and  light  stuff  on  top — thus,  heavy  articles  will  not  crush  light 
ones  and  the  centre  of  gravity  will  be  nearer  the  axles,  making  the 
turning  over  of  the  load  more  difficult. 

2  Things  needed  first  upon  reaching  camp  must  be  placed  on 
top  or  in  rear. 

The  following  method  of  loading  a  wagon  is  in  accordance  with 
the  general  principles  cited  above: 

Ammunition.  Ordinarily  just  back  of  the  forward  axle.  In  case 
of  possible  need,  however,  the  ammunition  should  be  placed  where  it 
could  be  gotten  at  immediately. 

Axes,  Spades,  Shovels  and  (Unhandled)  Picks.  Should  be  out- 
side of  wagon-bed,  in  leather  pockets  or  strong  bags,  or  stood  on  end 
at  rear  of  wagon.  They  should  not  be  placed  between  the  sides  of 
the  wagon  and  the  load. 

Blanket  Rolls.  If  to  be  carried  on  wagon,  they  should  be  rolled 
tightly  and  left  straight — not  tied  in  a  circle — and  loaded  on  top, 
crosswise. 

Buzzacott  Oven.  On  back  of  wagon,  resting  on  end  on  feed  box 
and  secured  by  rope  or  chain. 

Camp  Kettles  and  Buckets.  Under  the  wagon,  suspended  from 
the  reach  pole. 

Field  Desk.     To  be  placed  on  or  near  bottom  and  well  forward, 
as  it  is  seldom  required  early. 

Field  Range.     On  bottom,  at  rear  end  of  wagon. 

Forage.     If  to  be  carried  on  wagon,  in  front  of  ammunition. 

Lashing.  Use  two  pieces  of  ^-inch  rope  about  75  feet  long, 
passing  over  load  first  from  front  to  rear  diagonally,  and  finally  se- 
cured by  being  tied  to  rings  on  the  rear  bolster  standards — never  to 
the  end  gate  rods.  The  rope  should  be  passed  through  strong  hooks 
securely  clinched  to  the  body  of  the  wagon,  and  not  passed  around 
the  ends  of  the  bows. 

Mess  Tables  (With  folding  legs).  To  be  stood  on  end  at  rear 
end  of  wagon. 

Officers'  Bedding-Rolls.     To  be  on  top  of  load. 
Rations.     Surplus  rations   (not  required  for  next  camp)   in  bot- 
tom of  wagon,  between  ammunition  and  ration  box. 


FIELD  SERVICE.  285 

Bacon  should  be  on  the  bottom  of  wagon,  where  the  grease  will 
do  no  harm. 

Ration  Box.  Next  to  field  range,  toward  front  of  wagon.  After 
the  field  range  has  been  unloaded,  the  ration  box  is  readily  accessible 
and  need  not  be  unloaded. 

At  every  camp  the  ration  box  should  be  restocked  for  the  next 
camp. 

Sibley  Stoves.  Slung  on  chain,  just  outside  of  feed  box  and 
below  the   Buzzacott   oven. 

Stove  Pipe.     Should  be  crated  and  lashed  on  in  rear  of  a  wagon. 

Tentage.  Should  be  rolled  and  not  folded,  except  in  places 
where  absolutely  necessary — and  placed  across  wagon,  on  top  of 
boxes,  etc.  ♦ 

(Attention  is  invited  to  the  fact  that  canvas  becomes  unser- 
viceable more  from  handling  and  transportation  than  from  wear  when 
in  actual  use  in  sheltering  troops). 

The  tents,  properly  dried  out,  should  be  laid  out  smoothly  on 
the  ground;  the  part  of  the  wall  appearing  uppermost  should  be 
folded  over  toward  the  peak  of  the  tent;  that  underneath  should  be 
(by  lifting  the  lower  part  of  the  tent)  in  like  manner  folded  under 
and  toward  the  peak;  then  by  commencing  at  the  peak,  at  the  final 
folding,  the  wall  of  the  tent  will  appear  on  the  outside  of  the  com- 
pleted roll. 

Ropes  not  required  for  securing  the  bundle  should  be  folded 
inside. 

Tent  Pins.     On  top,  in  sacks. 

Tent  Poles.  Should  be  tied  with  a  rope  and  placed  just  inside 
the  bows  so  as  to  extend  above  the  wagon-bed  side;  or  carried  in  two 
iron  hooks  suspended  from  side  of  wagon-bed,  about  four  feet  apart. 

NOTES 

/  Pots  and  Kettles.  Should  be  in  gunny  sacks  so  as  not  to 
dirty  everything. 

2  The  Quartermaster-Sergeant  should  ride  on  one  of  the 
wagons. 

3  A  Noncommissioned  Officer  should  personally  superintend 
the  loading  of  every  wagon,  the  same  noncommissioned  officer 
always  having  charge  of  the  same  wagon. 


286  CHAPTER  XV. 

4.  The  Jockey  Box  slionld  be  left  entirely  for  use  of  teamster, 
and  in  which  should  be  kept  wrench,  grease,  spare  bolts,  mule 
shoes,  etc. 

5  A  detail  of  men,  the  size  of  which  depends  upon  the  number 
of  wagons,  should  accompany  the  train.  Often  the  guard,  or  old 
guard  performs  this  duty,  but  it  is  preferable  to  detail  men  who  know 
how  to  meet  emergencies  such  as  a  wagon  tipping  over  on  a  hillside, 
wagons  requiring  repacking,  mule  down  and  hurt,  etc. 

LOADING  ANIMALS  ON  CARS  1 

Except  in  hot  weather,  pack  as  many  animals  in  the  car  as  you 
can,  as  they  will  ride  better  than  if  loosely  packed.  If  an  animal 
happens  to  fall  down  in  the  car  it  will  be  almost  impossible  for  it  to 
get  up,  and  the  probabilities  are  it  will  be  trampled  to  death.  For  this 
reason  load  sick  or  injured  animals  in  cars  by  themselves,  and  build 
separate  stalls  for  each  animal,  if  practicable.  Before  loading  examine 
each  car  carefully  to  see  that  the  floor  boards  are  not  rotten  or  broken, 
that  the  sides  are  secure,  and  tliat  there  are  no  projecting  nails  or 
splinters.  The  car  should  be  clean,  and  the  floor  covered  with  sand, 
sawdust  or  straw.  Where  cleats  on  the  floor  are  not  used  it  is  advis- 
able to  have  toe  calks  on  the  animals'  shoes.  The  man  in  charge 
should  be  provided  with  a  candle,  lantern,  l)ucket,  and  a  hatchet. 
Where  the  boards  on  sides  of  car  are  not  close  together,  an  animal 
is  liable  to  get  his  lioof  between  the  boards,  and  when  other  means 
fail  to  disengage  it,  a  hatchet  is  useful  in  cutting  away  a  part  of  the 
board.  In  loading  animals  use  the  railroad  ]:)latform,  or  the  loading 
ramp  found  at  railroad  stations,  or  make  a  ramp,  well  supported  and 
with  strong  sides.  Lead  the  animals  b}^  halters  and  straps  up  the 
ramp  and  into  the  car,  and  take  off  the  halter.  The  first  animal 
should  be  led  to  one  end  of  the  car  and  the  second  to  the  other  end, 
leaving  the  center  of  the  car  for  the  last  animals  loaded.  Arrange 
the  animals  so  that  the  nlternate  ones  shall  face  in  the  same  direction. 

Do  the  loading  quietly,  and  have  the  animals  follow  one  another 
promptly,  so  as  to  avoid  delay.  In  some  cases  it  may  be  necessary  to 
blindfold    an   animal    before   he   can   be   led    into    the   car.     An    obstinate 


(1)  The  articles  Loading  Aiiiiuals  on  Cars,  Loading  Ambulances  on  Cars,  Load- 
ing Wagons  on  Cars,  Parking  Trains,  Care  of  Animals,  Wagons  and  Harness  in  the 
Field  and  List  of  Articles  to  be  Carried  on  Each  Wagon,  are  reprinted  from  the 
Manual  of  Instructions  for  Quartermasters  Serving  in  the  Field. 


FIELD  SERVICE.  287 

animal  can  be  made  to  enter  by  Iiolding  its  head  up,  twisting  its  tail, 
and  pushing  it  by  main  force  into  the  car.  Before  loading  see  that 
the  door  on  farther  side  of  car  is  closed  and  fastened,  and  after  loading 
is  complete  fasten  the  second  door. 

Where  cars  contain  hayracks  and  water  troughs,  see  that  they 
are  in  good  condition,  and  fill  racks  before  loading.  Animals  should 
be  unloaded  and  exercised  at  least  once  in  twenty-four  hours. 

They  should  be  watered  and  fed  twice  a  day. 

LOADING  AMBULANCES  ON  CARS 

Except  for  short  journeys,  ambulances  should  be  knocked  down 
before  loading.  Secure  a  flat  car  36  feet  long  by  about  9  feet  wide. 
Take  the  beds  off  the  running  gears  by  unscrewing  nuts  from  the 
bolts  that  hold  the  sills  of  the  beds  to  the  runi^ing  gears.  Also  take 
off  the  rear  steps.  Six  beds  can  now  be  placed  on  the  car  by  taking  the 
first  bed  and  placing  it  in  one  corner  of  the  car  (its  length  parallel 
to  the  car),  the  side  of  the  bed  coming  out  to  the  stakes,  or  the 
places  for  stakes  on  the  side  of  car.  Place  the  second  bed  alongside 
of  the  first,  allowing  it  to  slip  back  two  inches  on  account  of  the 
sills.  Arrange  the  other  four  beds  behind  the  first  pair,  well  closed  up: 
then  put  in  stout  stakes  and  cover  ambulance  tops  with  paulins  or 
old  canvas,  as  a  protection  to  the  tops  from  sparks.  It  is  very  im- 
portant that  the  nuts  should  be  put  back  in  their  proper  places. 
Secure  the  water  tanks  on  ambulances,  and  place  the  running  gears  in 
a  box  car  and  number  them  corresponding  to  the  ambulances,  if  the 
ambulances  are  of  dilTerent  makes. 

For  short  journeys,  take  off  wheels  and  rear  steps  and  unyoke 
axles  from  springs.  For  the  axles  substitute  a  piece  of  hard  wood, 
which  should  not  be  longer  than  the  width  of  ambulance.  Crate 
wheels  and  put  inside  of  ambulance,  bracing  same,  so  there  will  be 
no  liability  of  injury  to  sides. 

LOADING  WAGONS   ON   CARS 

Remove  the  beds  from  the  running  gears  and  take  off  the  rear 
end  gates.  Get  a  36-foot  flat  car,  or  even  a  longer  one.  Place  the 
first  bed  in  one  corner  of  the  car  (its  length  parallel  to  the  car),  so 
that  its  side  will  come  out  to  the  stakes  or  places  for  stakes  on  side 

of  car.  Take  the  second  bed,  reverse  it  so  that  the  front  end  shall  be 
opposite  rear  end  of  first  wagon,  turn  it  bottom  up,  and  place  it  partly 


288  CHAPTER  XV. 

inside  and  partly  outside  of  the  first  bed,  the  inner  sides  being  close 
together.  This  arrangement  forms  a  box,  with  closed  ends,  which  can 
be  filled  with  parts  of  the  body  and  running  gear.  Place  the  third 
and  fourth  boxes,  similarly  arranged,  alongside  of  the  first  and  second, 
and  continue  the  same  arrangement  to  the  other  end  of  the  car.  In 
this  way,  12  beds  can  be  put  in  first  layer  on  car. 

Arrange  the  second,  third,  and  fourth  layers  similarly,  and  secure 
the  beds  by  stout  stakes  and  wire.  Forty-eight  beds,  with  parts,  can 
thus  be  shipped  on  one  liat  car,  the  running  gears  being  placed  in  a 
box  car.  Put  back  all  nuts  in  proper  place.  Wagons  that  have  been 
used  should  never  have  the  bodies  knocked  down  and  loaded  in  box 
cars,  because  in  endeavoring  to  take  off  the  nuts,  which  are  sure  to 
be  rusted,  the  outside  braces  and  inside  straps  are  twisted  and  the 
bolt  ends  broken  off,  rendering  the  wagons  unserviceable.  By  loading 
as  above  described,  no  damage  is  done  the  bed  or  running  gear,  and 
the  wagons  are  easily  set  up  when  destination  is  reached.  It  is  not 
necessary  to  number  the  beds,  running  gear,  etc.,  except  when  wagons 
of  different  paterns  are  shipped.  If  tunnels  are  on  the  line  of  road, 
load  only  three  layers,  or  36  wagon  beds  on  each  car. 

If  cars  containing  stock  and  wagons  accompany  the  regiment 
and  it  is  necessary  to  run  the  train  in  several  sections,  the  cars  of 
stock  and  wagons  should  be  the  first  section,  and  should  be  accom- 
panied by  a  sufficient  number  of  men,  say  one  company,  to  unload 
and  care  for  stock  and  wagons,  so  that  when  the  rest  of  the  regiment 
arrives  there  will  be  no  delay  in  moving  baggage  to  camp. 

LOADING  PROPERTY  IN  CARS 

The  general  rule  for  loading  property  is  to  put  in  first  such 
articles  <is  will  not  be  immediately  needed  on  arrival  at  destination. 
The  following  order  of  loading  should  be  followed,  unless  there  is  a 
special  reason  for  departing  from  it: 

Ofificers'  baggage. 

Enlisted  men's  baggage. 

Ammunition. 

Rations. 

Hospital  stores. 

Tentage. 

By  this  arrangement  the  articles  needed  first  will  be  unloaded 
first.      Keep    the   property   of   each    organization   by   itself,    and   mark 


FIELD  SERVICE.  289 

on  the  car  the  letter  and  regiment  of  the  organization  whose  property 
is  in  the  car.  The  cars  should  be  assigned  and  marked  by  the  quarter- 
master before  loading.  If  the  regiment  is  to  be  shipped  in  two  or 
more  sections,  see  that  the  proper  baggage  cars  accompany  each 
section,  so  that  when  an  organization  arrives  in  camp  its  baggage 
will  be  with  it.  A  couple  of  men  should  be  in  each  car  to  guard  its 
contents. 

PARKING  TRAINS 

When  the  wagons  of  a  regimental  train  have  been  unloaded, 
they  should  be  parked  in  one  line,  if  practicable,  dressed  to  the  right, 
with  an  interval  of  two  feet  between  hubs.  The  animals  should  then 
be  unharnessed,  watered,  tied  to  picket  line,  and  fed. 

When  the  animals  are  fed  from  feed  box  fastened  to  wagon 
pole,  increase  the  interval  between  hubs  to  20  feet. 

In  a  convoy,  at  the  first  sign  of  the  presence  of  an  enemy  close 
up  all  the  wagons  and  form  a  double  column  (columns  of  twos)  if 
the  ground  will  permit.  This  shortens  the  length  of  original  column 
one-half.  When  the  attack  begins,  or  just  before  it,  as  the  judgment 
of  the  commander  dictates,  form  a  park  in  the  form  of  a  square  or 
circle,  animals  inside  and  their  heads  close  together. 

Now  lock  and  fasten  the  wheels  together.  In  the  case  of  a 
large  train,  park  the  first  fifty,  bring  up  the  rest  of  the  train  and  make 
additional  parks,  so  as  to  contract  as  much  as  possible  the  space  to 
be  defended.  In  some  cases  it  may  be  necessary  to  move  the  train  to 
the  right  or  left  to  secure  proper  parking  grounds.  Where  proper 
grounds  for  forming  wagons  into  circles  and  squares  can  not  be  found, 
form  a  double  column  of  wagons,  and  turn  them  so  that  the  animals 
will  face  inward,  their  heads  close  together.  To  unpark,  back  the 
wagons  out  of  the  park  and  have  them  take  proper  place  in  column. 

To  form  a  circle  from  double  column,  the  two  leading  wagons 
halt  and  the  other  wagons  move  outward  to  the  right  and  left  and 
come  into  the  circle  in  their  proper  order.  Light  wagons,  like  ambu- 
lances and  spring  wagons,  can  be  used  to  fill  up  any  gaps  there  may 
be  in  the  circle. 

CARE   OF  ANIMALS,  WAGONS,  AND   HARNESS  IN 

THE  FIELD 

In  order  that  animals,  wagons  and  harness  should  be  always 
ready  for  service,  it  is  very  important  that  the  Quartermaster  should 


290  CHAPTER  XV. 

give  them  his  personal  attention.  He  can  not  delegate  this  responsi- 
bility to  any  one  else,  for  he  alone  will  be  held  responsible  for  their 
condition.  He  should  give  proper  orders  regarding  the  care  of  this 
property,  and  should  see  that  his  orders  are  executed. 

Animals 

Animals  suffer  from  neglect  on  the  part  of  those  in  immediate 
charge  of  them,  either  from  failure  to  water  and  feed  them,  or  by  not 
examining  their  feet  and  promptly  attending  to  slight  injuries. 

In  the  field  all  animals  should  be  fed  night  and  morning,  the 
bulk  of  the  feed  being  given  at  night,  as  the  animals  have  more  time 
to  eat  it  than  ihey  have  in  the  morning.  The  forage  allowance  is 
ample,  and  when  animals  are  hard-worked  this  allowance  should  not 
be  cut  down. 

Water  the  animals  before  feeding  and  at  least  once  during  the 
day  if  it  is  practicable  to  do  so.  Many  teamsters  after  a  hard  day's 
work  neglect  to  water  their  animals,  so  that  it  is  especially  important 
to  see  that  this  duty  is  done. 

Make  a  rule  that  the  animals  should  be  fed  and  watered  before' 
the  men  get  their  meals. 

Have  all  animals  thoroughly  groomed  at  least  once  a  day.  In 
camp  this  should  be  done  twice  a  da}''. 

Feed  the  allowance  of  salt  twice  a  week.  When  animals  eat  the 
wagon  beds  and  feed  boxes,  or  lick  one  another's  hide,  it  is  a  sure 
indication  that  they  are  not  getting  enough  salt. 

The  feet  should  be  examined  and  cleaned  every  night.  In  a 
hot,  dry  country,  if  there  is  time  to  do  so,  their  fore-feet  should  be 
poulticed  with  flaxseed  twice  a  month. 

Great  attention  should  be  paid  to  shoeing  the  animals.  The 
blacksmith  should  fit  the  shoe  to  the  foot,  not  the  foot  to  the  shoe. 
Have  the  animals  shod  as  soon  as  they  need  it.  The  time  for  shoeing 
will  be  governed  by  the  amount  of  work  performed  and  the  character 
of  the  roads.  Ordinarily  once  in  three  or  four  weeks  will  be  sufficient. 
Teamsters  should  report  to  the  Quartermaster  the  condition  of  the 
shoes,  and  when  camp  is  reached  the  blacksmith  should  attend  to  the 
animals  at  once.  When  it  is  necessary  to  have  an  animal  shod  on  the 
march,  turn  the  team  out  of  the  column,  and  instruct  the  teamster 
where  and  how  to  join  the  train. 

Park  the  train  at  night  and  tie  the  animals  to  the  wagons  so 
that  the  grain  may  be  fed  to  them  in  the  feed  box.     Where  a  picket 


FIELD  SERVICK.  291 

rope  is  used,  see  that  it  is  securely  fastened  so  as  to  liang  about  4  feet 
from  the  ground,  and  that  the  halter  is  sufficiently  long  to  allow  the 
animal  to  lie  down. 

Animals'  shoulders  often  become  sore  and  the  animals  rendered 
unserviceable  from  the  fact  that  the  teamsters,  when  they  take  ofif  the 
harness  at  night,  instead  of  hanging  it  on  a  tree  or  putting  it  in  the 
wagon,  will  throw  it  on  the  ground  and  make  no  attempt  to  clean  the 
harness  in  the  morning  before  using  it.  In  consequence,  dirt  and  mud 
get  on  the  collars  and  harness  and  chafe  the  skin,  resulting  in  sores 
that  often  take  weeks  to  heal. 

It  would  be  well  to  wash  the  shoulders  frequently  in  strong  salt 
water. 

Draft  animals  should  not  be  dri\en  out  of  a  walk  except  in  cases 
of  urgent  necessity.  Exception  is  made  in  case  of  animals  used  on 
ambulances  and  spiing  wagons. 

Impress  upon  teamsters  that  it  is  necessary  to  be  kind  to  all 
animals.  Discharge  any  man  who  kicks  an  animal  or  strikes  him  with 
a  club  or  otherwise  mistreats  him. 

fj'agois 

When  wagons  are  used  every  day,  especially  in  a  sandy  country, 
have  the  wheels  greased  once  a  day.  One  to  one  and  one-half  pounds 
of  axle  grease  per  wheel  per  montli  will  be  found  to  be  ample  in  all 
climates. 

It  is  of  the  utmost  importance  that  the  wheels  should  be  kept 
thoroughly  greased  at  all  times,  or  the  axle  will  be  injured  and  the 
axle  boxes  worn  out.  Alwaj^s  carry  with  the  wagon  train  a  few  extra 
wagon  parts,  so  that  minor  repairs  may  be  made  at  once. 

The  wagons  should  be  inspected  morning  and  evening  to  ascer- 
tain if  anything  is  broken  about  them,  that  the  tires  are  tight,  axle 
nuts  well  screwed  on,  etc. 

Scrape  off  all  old  grease  before  putting  on  fresh  grease. 

Ho  I'll  CSS 

Harness  should  be  examined  ever}'  day.  X'ote  particularly  if 
any  stitches  are  broken,  if  any  parts  of  the  leather  are  worn  thin, 
badly  cracked,  or  cut,  and  if  au}^  of  the  buckles,  toggles,  snaps,  hames, 
chains,  bits,  and  rings  are  cracked  or  broken. 


292  CHAPTER  XV. 

Should  any  defect  or  weakness  be  noticed,  have  the  same  rem- 
edied at  once. 

Do  not  allow  the  harness  to  be  thrown  on  the  ground  where  it 
will  get  muddy  and  dirty,  for  when  the  mud  hardens  and  rubs  against 
the  skin  sores  will  result  that  ma}'-  render  the  animal  unserviceable 
for  weeks. 

In  stitching  harness,  see  that  knots  are  not  left  on  any  part  of 
the  leather  which  may  come  in  contact  with  the  animal's  body. 

Avoid  these  knots  by  using  two  double  or  back  stitches  at  the 
beginning  and  end  of  each  row  of  stitching. 

Sew  the  harness  and  do  not  use  rivets,  especially  if  the  leather 
has  plenty  of  life  and  is  not  extra  solid.  Use  the  best  linen  shoe 
thread  with  wax  ends  in  sewing. 

The  wax  should  be  the  spring,  summer  or  winter  kind,  depending 
on  the  season.     Buckle  the  collars  when  removed  from  the  animals. 

CLEANING   HARNESS 

Harness  should  be  cleaned  at  least  twice  a  month,  and  whenever 
it  gets  muddy. 

For  this  purpose  use  a  bucket,  lukewarm  water,  sponge,  harness 
soap,  harness  dressing,  neat's-foot  oil,  and  lampblack. 

For  ordinary  cleaning  the  following  instructions  should  be  ob- 
served: 

Provide  a  rack  to  hang  the  harness  on.  Where  no  better  arrange- 
ment is  on  hand,  insert  one  end  of  the  wagon  pole  between  the  spokes 
of  one  of  the  hind  wheels,  above  the  hub,  and  strap  it  to  the  axle. 

Hang  a  set  of  harness  on  the  pole,  dampen  the  sponge  in  clean 
w^ater  and  pass  it  over  the  harness  until  the  dirt  has  become  soft. 

Rinse  out  the  sponge  as  often  as  necessary,  and  replace  the  dirty 
water  with  clean  water  frequently. 

Now  rub  the  sponge  on  the  harness  soap  until  you  obtain  a 
good  lather,  then  give  the  harness  a  good  heavy  coating  of  it,  and 
keep  rubbing  the  harness  until  all  dirt  is  removed.  In  some  instances 
it  may  be  necessarj'-  to  use  a  thin  piece  of  wood  to  remove  the  dirt. 
After  the  harness  is  thoroughly  clean,  work  up  a  very  thick  lather, 
coat  the  leather  parts  of  the  harness  with  it,  and  allow  it  to  dry 
without  further  rubbing. 

After  the  lather  has  been  absorbed  and  the  leather  is  dry,  put 
on  a  light  coat  of  harness  dressing.     To  do  this,  use  a  perfectly  clean 


FIELD  SERVICE.  293 

sponge,  touch  the  harness  lightly,  just  enough  to  spread  the  dressing, 
and  do  not  rub.  Keep  the  dressing  in  an  air-tight  package  when 
not  in  use. 

When  the  harness  has  not  been  cleaned  for  some  time,  and  is 
hard,  it  should  first  be  cleaned  as  described  above.  Afterwards  take 
a  pint  of  neat's-foot  oil  for  each  single  set  of  harness  to  be  cleauned, 
pour  it  into  a  pan  and  mix  with  it  lampblack  in  the  proportion  of  one 
teaspoonful  to  each  pint  of  oil,  and  stir  this  mixture  until  it  has  a 
glossy  black  appearance.  In  cold  weather  heat  the  oil  until  it  is  luke- 
warm, but  never  hot,  before  using  on  harness.  Apply  the  mixture 
with  a  small  sponge,  rubbing  it  well  in.  Allow  about  forty-eight  hours' 
to  elapse  before  using  harness  again.  In  cold  weather  allow  harness, 
after  being  thus  oiled,  to  hang  near  a  fire  for  an  hour. 

After    the    leather    is    thoroughly    dried,    apply    harness    dressing 
as  described  above. 


t'6^ 


CHAPTER  XVI 


RIFLE  TRENCHES 


Rifle  trenches  in  their  simpler  forms  are  intended  to  protect  by 
affording  concealment  rather  than  otherwise.  They  are  in  no  respect 
fortifications    intended    for   permanent    occupation.      The    men    should, 


^.m^ 


Almost  Invisible  in  a  Trench  Which   it  Takes   Fifteen   ^Minutes  to  Build. 


therefore,  be  taught  to  construct  them  as  rapidly  as  possible,  avoiding 
all  neatness  which  takes  time.  However,  it  sometimes  becomes 
necessary  to  occupy  rifle  trenches  for  a  lengthened  period  of  time,  in 
which  case  more  complete  defense  may  be  constructed.  Consequently 
shelter  trenches  should  begin  A\ith  the  siniplest  form,  which,  if  neces- 
sary, can-  be  easily  developed  into  trenches  affording  greater  protection. 

The  following  illustrations  and  explanations  thereof,  from  an 
article  by  Captain  Wm.  C.  Harllee,  U.  S.  Marine  Corps,  and  published 
in  ARMS  AND  THE  MAN,  are  reproduced  by  permission: 

A  trench  of  the  profile  shown  in  Figure  1,  for  troops  lying  down, 
can  be  constructed  in  clayey  and  fairly  difficult  soil,  in  fifteen  minutes, 
eacli    man    constructing    one    yard.      This    trench,    although    one    foot 


RIFLE  TRENCHES 


295 


Figure  T. 

(Note:     +  before  a  number  means  "raised";    —  means  "cut  down"  ;  and  tO  means,  neither 
raised  nor  cut  down  ^ 

narrower  than  the  ordinary  type,  answers  the  re(|nirements  of  keep- 
cox  creel  from  view  and   fire. 

The  trench  shown  in  Figure  1  can  be  converted  into  a  trench 
of  t!ie  profile  shown  in  Figure  2,  for  troops  kneeling  or  sitting,  in 
ten  minutes    each  man's  task  being  a  yard  in  length.     In  the  standard 


Figure  2. 

type  of  trench,  the  height  over  which  men  can  tire  kneeling,  is  taken 
to  be  three  feet.  This  is  correct  if  men  were  to  assume  the  kneeling 
position  prescribed  in  the  drill  regulations,  but  men  in  trenches  rarely 
take  that  uncomfortable  position.  They  will  either  sit  on  the  ground 
and  lean  up  to  the  parapet,  or  they  will,  if  the  parapet  is  too  high  for 
this,  kneel  on  both  knees  and  lean  against  the  parapet.  Both  of 
these  latter  positions  are  more  comfortable  and  natural.  Two  feet 
is  tJie  proper  height  for  fire,  sitting.  (See  Figure  2).  The  height 
should  not  exceed  two  and  one-half  feet,  which  is  the  limit  of  height 
for  men  kneeling  on  both  knees,  and  this  also  permits  fire  from  the 
sittii'.g  rr  kneeling  positions  of  the  drill  regulations. 

The  trench  shown  in  Figure  2  can  be  converted  in  thirty-five 
miiiutes,  each  man's  task  being  one  yard,  into  a  trench  of  the  profile 
shovel  in  Figure  3,  for  troops  standing,  sitting  or  kneeling.  In  this 
type  of  trench  men  may  fire  sitting  or  kneeling  from  A,  and  standing 
from  B.  During  cessation  of  fire  men  may  sit  on  B,  fully  covered,  the 
heiglit   of  B   above   C  being  convenient   for   sitting   (eighteen   inches). 


296 


CHAPTER  XVL 


■rrr:^^ 


V—  .'.P.T» 


-B' 


Figure  3. 


C  ts  the  communicating  trench;  (that  is,  the  passage  used  in  going 
from  point  to  point  in  the  trench.)  it  is  six  feet  below  the  top  of  the 
parapet,  and  men  standing  or  walking  are  covered  from  view  and  fire. 
This  type,  by  its  steps  A  and  B,  permits  the  men  readily  to  leave 
the  trench  for  movement  to  front  or  rear,  or  to  move  out  from  the 
trench  to  meet  collision  with  the  enemy  advanced  for  shock  action. 
Firing,  standing  from  B,  is  awkward  if  men  are  firing  sitting  or  kneel- 
ing from  A,  but  the  density  of  the  firing  line  can  be  made  the  max- 
imum by  all  men  firing  sitting  or  kneeling,  or  all  men  firing  standing. 
In  Figure  3  the  height  of  parapet  is  kept  at  one  foot;  in  Figure  4 
the  height  of  parapet  is  raised  to  two  feet.     This  trench  can  be  con- 


l;o' 


2'-"=4>™°E  ■    <f  |« 


<..;'r.>'f';'/ 


•.'•-•'-A-.»^- 


y:^y:^'::;>-;f^^/^ 


Figure  4 


T-.:.:--  '■■r\f  .:-'■■  •>■•■■'^ 
•'■..■•*•■,- !.•■'  ; •. ■  •  •  -n •* .' .' ■  ■-■.'■■'> 


structed  from  the  trench,  sitting  or  kneeling  (Figure  2),  in  twenty-five 
minutes.  It  permits  fire  sitting  from  A;  kneeling  or  sitting  from  B. 
C  is  the  communicating  trench,  and  men  standing  or  walking  on  C  are 
protected.  D  would  appear  only  in  the  converted  trench,  but  it  serves 
as  a  convenient  place  to  lay  haversacks,  canteens,  intrenching  tools, 
extra  ammunition,  etc. 


RIFLE  TRENCHES. 


297 


Figure  5  shows  the  trench  illustrated  in  Figure  4  converted  into 
an  improved  trench,  which  permits  fire  standing,  sitting  or  kneeHng; 
and,  inasmuch  as  men  may  fire  standing  at  the  same  time  that  others 
fire   kneeling,    the   intensity   of   the    fire    may   be    increased.      Men    fire 


+2. 


Figure   5 


^^^■^>';^r-j^ir;>> 


TH 


t.V  ^ 


sitting  or  kneeling  from  A,  and  at  the  same  time  others  may  fire 
standing  from  B.  C  is  the  communicating  trench,  and  men  standing 
or  walking  therein  are  protected.  Men  sitting  at  B  are  protected,  and 
B  is  the  convenient  height  (eighteen  inches)  above  C  for  that  purpose. 
The  methods  of  using  the  various  trenches,  as  heretofore  ex- 
plained, are  illustrated  in  cuts  F  and  G.    A  front  view  of  these  trenches. 


Cut  F — A  Prone  Trench   Partly   Converted  Into   A   Kneeling   One 


298 


CHAPTER  XVI. 


Cut  G- — The  Trench  From  The  Rear.     Men  In  Vartous  Positions 


.^ 


Cut  H — Front   View   Of  An    Occupied  Trench 


showing  men  in  act  of  firing,  is  exhibited  in  cut  H.  These  trenches 
when  covered  with  grass  are  invisible  at  a  distance  of  less  than  one 
hundred  yards. 

Location.  There  are  two  things  to  be  considei'ed  in  locating 
trenches:  {i)  The  tactical  situation,  and  (2)  the  nature  of  the 
ground.  The  first  consideration  re(|uires  that  the  trenches  be  so 
located  as  to  give  the  greatest  field  of  fire,  and  they  are,  therefore, 
usually  located  near  the  crest  of  hills — on  the  "military  crest",  which 


RIFLE  TRENCHES. 


299 


is  just  in  front  of  the  natural  crest.  The  construction  of  trenches 
along  the  "military  crest"  does  not  give  any  "dead  space" — that  is, 
any  space  to  the  front  that  can  not  he  reached  by  the  fire  of  the  men  in 
the  trenches. 

With  regard  to  their  location,  trenches  should,  if  practicable, 
he  so  located  as  to  avoid  stony  ground,  because  of  the  danger  of  fi3'ing 
fragments,  should  the  parapet  be  struck  b}^  an  artillery  projectile. 

Clearing  the  Ground.  Time  permitting,  it  is  very  important  that 
the  ground  in  front  of  the  trenches  should  be  cleared  of  brushwood, 
high  grass  and  ever3'thing  else  that  might  screen  the  enemy. 

Concealment  of  Trenches.  The  location  of  the  trenches  should 
he  di>gu-ised  by  covering  the  side  toward  the  enemy  with  grass, 
branches,  leaves,  etc. 

Obstacles.  It  is  sometimes  desirable  to  place  obstacles  in  front 
of  trenches,  so  as  to  obstruct  the  advance  of  the  enemy,  break  up 
his  formation  and  detain  him  under  the  hre  of  the  men  in  the  trenches. 
About  three  hundred  yards  from  the  trenches  is  generally  a  convenient 
location  for  obstacles.  Obstacles  should  be  concealed  from  the  view 
of  the  enemy,  so  that  they  may  come  upon  them  as  a  surprise.  Care 
must  be  taken  that  the  obstacles  can  not  be  easily  removed  and  that 
they  shall  not  afiford  an}^  shelter  to  the  enemy. 

A  number  of  articles  might  be  used  as  obstacles — for  instance 
harrows,  ploughs,  rough  wood  in  any  form,  such  as  roots  and  stumps. 
However,  owing  to  the  ease  with  which  it  can  be  constructed,  abatis 
is  the  obstacle  most  commonl}^  used.  Abatis  consists  of  the  branches 
of  felled  trees  about  15  feet  long,  placed  preferably  in  several  rows,  the 
branches  of  one  row  overlapping  the  butts  of  the  next  one  in  front, 
with  the  branches  sharpened  and  interlaced  and  directed  towards 
the  enemy,  with  their  butts  secured  to  the  ground  by  forks,  wire  or 
by  logs  laid  over  the  butts.  (An  abatis  should  be  at  least  5  feet 
high).     If  the  trees  are  too  large,  use  their  branches  instead. 


Ab..\tis. 


300  ■  CHAPTER   XVII. 


CHAPTER  XVII. 

CARE  OF  THE  HEALTH  AND  FIRST  AID  TO  THE 

SICK  AND  INJURED 

CARE  OF  THE  HEALTH  i 

1  A  soldier  should  endeavor  to  be  always  at  his  best..  He 
should  avoid  all  exposures,  not  in  line  of  duty,  which  he  knows  would 
be  likely  to  injure  his  health,  for  if  he  is  from  any  cause  below  par 
he  is  liable  to  break  down  under  influences  which  otherwise  might 
have  had  but  little  effect  on  him. 

2  Even  in  garrison,  in  time  of  peace,  soldiers  often  expose 
themselves  unnecessarily  by  going  out  without  overcoats  when  the 
weather  is  such  as  to  require  their  use,  or  by  failing  to  remove  damp 
socks  or  other  clothing  on  their  return  to  barracks. 

3  At  rests  on  the  march  he  should  sit  down  or  lie  down  if  the 
ground  is  suitable,  for  every  minute  so  spent  refreshes  more  than 
five  minutes  standing  or  loitering  about. 

4  At  the  midday  rest  lunch  should  be  eaten,  but  it  should  always 
be  a  light  meal. 

5  On  the  march  or  during  exercise  in  hot  weather  the  body  loses 
water  continuously  by  the  skin  and  lungs  and  this  loss  must  be  re- 
placed as  it  occurs  to  keep  the  blood  iii  proper  condition.  Only  a 
few  swallows  should  be  taken  at  a  time,  no  matter  how  plentiful  the 
water  supply  may  be.  When  exceedingly  thirsty  after  a  long  dr}' 
stretch,  water  should  not  be  taken  freely  at  once,  but  in  smaller  ! 
drinks  at  intervals,  until  the  desire  for  more  is  removed. 

6  Smoking  in  the  heat  of  the  day  or  on  the  march  is  depressing    | 
and  increases  thirst. 

7  On  hot  marches  water  should  be  taken  quite  frequently, 
but  as  already  stated,  in  small  quantities  at  a  time,  to  replace  the 
loss  by  perspiration.  This  will  often  prevent  attacks  of  heat  exhaus- 
tion and  sunstroke.  i 

5     On  a  hurried  or  forced  march,  particularly  in  sultry  weather, 


(l)From  The   Soldier's  Handbook,  by   N.   Ilerslilcr,   Chief  Clerk.    General   .Staff 
Corps,   U.   S.   Army. 


UNIVEkSITY 

OF 

CARE  OF  THE  HEALTH  AND  FIRST  AH3      301 
TO  THE  SICK  AND  INJURED. 

a  soldier  may  become  faint  and  giddy  from  the  heat  and  fatigue.  His 
face  becomes  pale,  his  lips  lead-colored,  his  skin  covered  with  clammy 
perspiration,  and  he  trembles  all  over.  His  arms  and  equipments 
should  be  removed  and  his  clothing  loosened  at  the  neck,  while  he 
is  helped  to  the  nearest  shade  to  lie  down,  with  his  head  low,  until 
the  ambulance  train  or  wagons  come  up.  ^Meanwhile,  fan  him, 
moisten  his  forehead  and  face  with  water  and,  if  conscious,  make 
him  swallow  a  few  sips  from  time  to  time. 

9  If  the  soldier  comes  into  camp  much  exhausted,  a  cup  of 
hot  coffee  is  the  best  restorative.  When  greatly  fatigued  it  is  dan- 
gerous to  eat  heartily. 

10  When  the  tents  have  been  arranged  for  the  night  and  the 
duties  of  the  day  are  practically  over,  the  soldier  should  clean  himself 
and  his  clothes  as  thoroughly  as  the  means  at  hand  will  permit.  No 
opportunity  of  taking  a  bath  nor  of  washing  socks  and  underclothing 
should  be  lost.  In  any  event  the  feet  should  be  bathed  or  mopped 
with  a  wet  towel  every  evening  to  invigorate  the  skin. 

11  In  the  continued  absence  of  opportunity  for  bathing  it  is 
well  to  take  an  air  bath  and  a  moist  or  dry  rub  before  getting  into 
fresh  underclothes  and,  in  this  case,  the  soiled  clothes  should  be 
freely  exposed  to  the  sun  and  air  when  the  blanket  roll  is  unpacked. 

12  By  attention  to  cleanliness  of  the  person  and  of  the  clothing, 
the  discomforts  of  prickly  heat,  chafing,  cracking,  blistering,  and  other 
irritations  of  the  skin  will  be  avoided.  If  chafings  do  occur  apply  to 
the  surgeon  for  a  healing  remedy,  for,  if  neglected,  they  may  fester 
and  cause  much   trouble. 

13  A  hearty  meal  should  be  eaten  when  the  day's  work  is  over, 
but  the  soldier  should  eat  slowly,  chewing  every  mouthful  into  a 
smooth  pulp  before  swallowing;  and  it  is  good  when  one  can  rest 
a  while  after  this  meal.  Hard  bread  and  beans  when  not  thoroughl}' 
chewed  give  rise  to  diarrhoea,  one  of  the  most  dangerous  of  camp 
diseases.  Fresh  meat  should  be  eaten  sparingly  when  used  for  the 
first  time  after  some  days  on  salt  rations. 

14  The  -soldier  would  do  well  to  restrict  himself  to  the  company 
dietary.  Particularly  should  he  avoid  the  articles  of  food  or  drink 
for  sale  by  hawkers  and  peddlers.  Green  fruit  and  overripe  fruit  are 
dangerous,  as  is   also  fruit  to  which   the  individual  is  unaccustomed. 


302  CHAPTER   XVII. 

Unpeeled  fruit  should  never  be     eaten,  for  it  ma}^  have  been  handled 
by  persons   suffering  from   dangerous   infectious   diseases. 

75  It  should  be  unnecessary  to  speak  of  the  danger  from  the 
use  of  intoxicating  liquors  for  every  soldier  knows  something  of  this. 
The  mind  of  a  man  under  the  influence  of  these  liquors  is  so  befogged 
that  he  is  unable  to  protect  himself  from  accidents  and  exposures. 
How  many  men  have  passed  from  this  world  because  of  exposures 
during  intoxication!  How  many  have  lost  their  health  and  strength 
and  become  wretched  sufferers  during  the  remainder  of  a  shortened 
existence!  Besides,  for  days  after  indulgence  in  liquor  the  system  is 
broken  down  and  the  individual  less  able  to  stand  the  fatigues,  ex- 
posures or  wounds  of  the  campaign. 

16  If  filtered  or  condensed  water  is  not  furnished  to  the  troops, 
and  spring  water  is  not  to  be  had,  each  soldier  should  fill  his  canteen 
over  night  with  weak  coffee  or  tea  for  the  next  day's  march.  This 
involves  boiling,  and  the  boiling  destroys  all  dangerous  substances 
in  water.  .  Typhoid  fever,  cholera,  and  dj^sentery  are  caused  by  impure 
water. 

ly  All  the  belongings  of  the  soldier  should  be  taken  under 
shelter  at  night  to  protect  them  from  rain  or  heavy  dews. 

18  When  not  prevented  by  the  military  conditions,  soldiers 
should  sleep  in  their  shirts  and  drawers,  removing  their  shoes,  socks, 
and  other  clothing. 

ig  In  the  morning  wash  the  head,  face  and  neck  with  cold 
water.  With  the  hair  kept  closely  cut,  this  can  be  done  even  when 
the  water  supply  is  limited. 

20  In  hot  climates,  where  marches  are  made  or  other  military 
work  performed  in  the  early  morning  or  late  in  the  evening,  a  sleep 
should  be  taken  after  the  midday  meal  to  make  \x\)  for  the  shortened 
rest  at  night.  Everyone,  to  keep  in  good  condition  should  have  a 
total  of  eight  hour's  sleep  in  the  twenty-four. 

21  If  the  march  is  not  to  be  resumed,  the  soldier  should  take  the 
first  opportunity  of  improving  his  sleeping  accommodations  by  build- 
ing a  bunk,  raised  a  foot  and  a  half,  or  more,  from  the  ground.  This 
is  of  the  first  importance  when  the  ground  is  damp.  The  poncho,  or 
slicker,  must  be  relied  upon  as  a  protection  in  marching  camps,  but 
when  the  camp  is  to  be  occupied  for  some  days,  bunks  should  be  built. 


CARE  OF  THE  HEALTH  AND  FIRST  AID       303 
TO  THE  SICK  AND  INJURED. 

22  In  hot  climates  this  raising  of  the  bunks  from  the  groimd 
lessens  the  danger  from  malarial  fevers. 

2S  When  malarial  fevers  are  prevalent,  hot  coffee  should  be 
taken  in  the  morning  immediately  after  roll  call,  and  men  going  on 
duty  at  night  should  have  a  lunch  and  coffee  before  starting. 

24  The  soldier  should  never  attempt  to  dose  himself  with 
medicine.  He  should  take  no  drugs  except  such  as  are  prescribed  by 
the  surgeon. 

25  No  matter  how  short  a  time  the  camp  is  to  be  occupied  its 
surface  should  not  be  defiled.  The  sinks  should  be  used  by  every 
man,  and  the  regulations  concerning  their  use  should  be  strictly  com- 
plied with.  Waste  water  and  refuse  of  food  should  be  deposited  in 
pits  or  other  receptacles  designed  to  receive  them.  Attention  to  these 
points  will  prevent  foul  odors  and  flies. 

26  When  there  are  foul  odors  and  flies  in  a  camp  the  spread  of 
typhoid  fever,  cholera,  dysentery,  and  yellow  fever  is  likel}^  to  occur. 

21  When  any  of  these  diseases  are  present  in  a  command  every 
care  should  be  taken  to  have  the  hands  freshly  washed  at  meal  times. 

2S  In  the  camps  of  held  service  the  interior  of  tents  should  be 
sunned  and  aired  daily,  and  efforts  should  be  made  by  every  soldier 
to  have  his  bunk,  arms,  equipments,  and  clothing  in  as  neat  and  clean 
condition  as  if  he  were  in  barracks  at  a  permanent  station. 

2()  Harmful  exposures  are  more  frequent  in  hot  than  in  cold 
weather.  Soldiers  seek  protection  against  cold,  but  in  seeking  shade, 
coolness,  and  fresh  breezes  in  hot  weather  they  often  expose  them- 
selves to  danger  from  diarrhoea,  dysentery,  pneumonia,  rheumatism, 
and  other  diseases.  A  chill  is  an  exciting  cause  of  these  affections;  it 
should  be  avoided  as  much  as  possible. 

JO  When  the  feet  become  wet  the  first  opportunity  should  be 
taken  of  putting  on  dry  socks. 

J/  When  the  clothing  becomes  wet  in  crossing  streams  or  in 
rain  storms  there  is  little  danger  so  long  as  active  exercise  is  kept  up, 
but  there  is  great  danger  if  one  rests  in  the  wet  clothing. 

$2  When  the  underclothes  are  wet  with  perspiration  the  danger 
is  from  chill  after  the  exercise  which  caused  the  perspiration  is 
ended.     If  the  soldier  can  not  give  himself  a  towel  rub  and"  a  change 


304  CHAPTER   XVTT. 

of  underclothing,   he   slidiild   put   on   his  blouse   and   move  about  until 
his  skin  and  clothes  become  dry. 

3S  To  rest  or  cool  off,  and  particularly  to  fall  asleep,  in  a  cool, 
shady  place  in  damp  clothes  is  to  invite  suffering,  perhaps  permanent 
disability  or  death. 

34  When  an  infectious  disease  is  known  to  be  present  among 
the  civil  population  in  the  neighborhood  of  a  military  camp  or  station, 
care  should  be  taken  by  every  member  of  the  command  to  avoid 
exposure  to  the  infection.  Scarlet  fever,  measles,  and  diphtheria,  are 
met  with  in  the  United  States,  but  in  some  localities  our  troops  may 
have  to  guard  against  smallpox,  yellow  fever,  cholera,  and  bubonic 
plague.  The  careless  or  reckless  individual  will  be  the  first  to  suffer, 
but  he  may  not  suffer  alone;  many  of  his  comrades  may  become 
affected  and  die  through  his  fault. 

S3  Such  infections  prevail  mostl}^  among  the  lower  classes  of 
a  community  who  have  no  knowledge  of  the  difference  between  health- 
ful and  unhealthful  conditions  of  life.  Communication  with  them 
should  therefore  be  avoided. 

S6  The  soldier  should  remember  that  association  with  lewd 
women   may  disable  him  for  life. 

3/  Every  soldier  should  become  familiar  with  the  instructions 
in  the  "Outlines  of  Eirst  Aid,"  so  as  to  be  able  to  help  himself  or 
others  in  the  event  of  wounds  or  accidents. 

THE  CARE  OF  THE  FEET 

The  feet  should  be  kept  clean  and  the  nails  cut  close  and  square. 
An  excellent  preventative  against  sore  feet  is  to  wash  them  every 
night  in  hot  (preferaably  salt)  water  and  then  dry  thoroughly. 

Rubbing  the  feet  with  hard  soap,  grease  or  oil  of  any  kind  be- 
fore starting  on  a  march  is  also  good. 

Sore  or  blistered  feet  should  be  rubbed  with  tallow  from  a  lighted 
candle  and  a  little  common  spirits  (whiskey  or  alcohol  in  some  other 
form)  and  the  socks  put  on  at  once. 

Blisters  should  be  perforated  and  the  water  let  out,  but  the  skin 
must  not  be  removed. 

A  little  alum  in  warm  water  is  excellent  for  tender  feet. 

Two  small  squares  of  zinc  oxide  plaster,  one  on  top  of  the  other, 
will    prevent    the    skin    of    an    opened    blister    from    being    pulled    off. 


CARE  OF  THE  HEALTH  AND  FIRST  Air:>       305 
TO  THE  SICK  AND, INJURED. 

Under  no  circumstances,   should  a   soldier  ever   start  off  on   a   march 
with  a  pair  of -new  shoes. 

FIRST  AID  TO  THE  SICK  AND  INJURED  (D 

In  operating  upon  a  comrade,  the  main  things  are  to  keep  cool, 
act  promptly,  and  make  him  feel  that  you  have  no  doubt  that  you  can 
pull  him  through  all  right.  Place  him  in  a  comfortable  position,  and 
expose  the  wound.  If  you  cannot  otherwise  remove  the  clothing 
quickly  and  without  hurting  him,  rip  it  up  the  seam.  First  stop  the 
bleeding,  if  there  is  an}';  then  cleanse  the  wound;  then  close  it,  if  a 
cut  or  torn  wound;  then  apply  a  sterilized  dressing;  then  bandage  it 
in  place. 

As  for  the  patient  himself,  let  him  never  say  die.  Pluck  has  car- 
ried many  a  man  triumphantly  through  what  seemed  the  forlornest 
hope. 

Kit  Carson  once  helped  to  amputate  a  comrade's  limb  when  the 
only  instruments  available  were  a  razor,  a  handsaw,  and  a  kingbolt  of 
a  wagon.  Not  a  man  in  the  party  knew  how  to  take  up  an  artery. 
Fine  teeth  were  filed  in  the  back  of  the  saw,  the  iron  was  made  white 
hot,  the  arm  removed,  the  stump  seared  so  as  to  close  the  blood 
vessels,  and — the  patient  recovered. 

Charles  F.  Lummis,  having  fractured  his  right  arm  so  badly  that 
the  bone  protruded,  and  being  alone  in  the  desert,  gave  his  canteen 
strap  two  flat  turns  about  the  wrist,  buckled  it  around  a  cedar  tree, 
mounted  a  near  by  rock,  set  his  heels  upon  the  edge,  and  threw  him- 
self backward.  He  fainted;  but  the  bone  was  set.  Then  having  rigged 
splints  to  the  injured  member  with  his  left  hand  and  teeth,  he  walked 
fifty  two  miles  without  resting,  before  he  could  get  food,  and  finished 
the  700-mile  tramp  to  Los  Angeles  with  the  broken  arm  slung  in  a 
bandanna. 

Richardson  tells  of  a  Montana  trapper  who,  having  his  leg  shat- 
tered in  an  Indian  fight,  and  finding  that  gangrene  was  setting  in., 
whetted    one    edge    of   his    big    hunting    knife,    filed    the    other    into    a 


(1)  Compiled  from  "The  Book  of  Camping  and  Woodcraft,"  by  Horace  Kep- 
hart  (The  Outing  Publishing  Company,  New  York),  from  "The  Complete  Camper's 
Manual,"  (Gold  Medal  Camp  Furniture  Mfg.  Co.,  Racine,  Wis.);  "Outlines  of  First 
Aid  For  the  Hospital  Corps,  U.  S.  A.,  and  "First  Aid  in  Illness  and  Injury,"  by 
James  E.  Pilcher,  Medical  Corps,  U.   S.  A.,    (Charles  Scribner's  Sons,  New  York.) 


306  CHAPTER  XVII. 

saw,  and  with  his  own  hands  cut  the  flesh,  sawed  the  bone,  and  seared 
the  arteries  with  a  hot  iron.     He  survived. 

Bite  of  Rabid  Animal.  The  bite  of  a  mad  dog,  wolf,  skunk,  or 
other  animal  subject  to  rabies,  requires  instant  and  heroic  treat- 
ment. Immediately  twist  a  tourniquet  very  tight  above  the  wound, 
and  then  cut  out  the  whole  wound  with  a  knife,  or  cauterize  it  to  the 
bottom  with  a  hot  iron;  then  drink  enough  whiskey  to  counteract 
the  shock. 

Bite  of  Snake.     See^'Snake  Bite." 

Bleeding,  how  checked.  To  stop  the  flow  of  blood  temporarily 
raise  the  injured  part  as  high  as  you  can  above  the  heart,  and 
press  very  firmly  with  thumb  or  linger  either  on  or  into  the 
wound.  The  patient  can  do  this  for  himself,  and  can  control  the 
bleeding  until  his  hand  gives  out.  There  is  record  of  an  Austrian 
soldier  who  stopped  bleeding  from  the  great  artery  of  the  thigh  for 
four  hours  by  plugging  the  wound  with  his  thumb;  if  he  had  let  go 
for  a  minute  he  would  have  bled  to  death. 

Observe  'whether  the  bleeding  is  arterial  or  venous.  If  it 
comes  from  a  vein,  the  blood  will  be  dark  red  or  purplish,  and  will 
flow  in  a  steady  stream.  Press  upon  the  vein  hcloiv  the  wound;  then 
prepare  a  clean  pad  (compress)  and  bind  it  upon  the  wound  firmly 
enough  to  stop  the  bleeding  permanently, 

If  an  artery  is  cut,  the  blood  will  be  bright  red,  and  it  will 
probably  spurt  in  jets.  Try  to  locate  the  artery  above  the  wound 
(between  it  and  the  heart)  by  pressing  very  hard  where  you  think 
the  artery  may  pass  close  to  a  bone,  and  watch  if  this  checks  the 
flow.  When  you  find  the  artery,  then,  if  the  wound  be  in  leg,  arm, 
head,  or  any  other  place  where  a  tourniquet  can  be  applied,  proceed 
as  follows: 

Tie  a  strong  bandage  (handkerchief,  belt,  suspender,  rope,  strip 
of  clothing)  around  the  wounded  member,  and  between  the  wound 
and  the  heart.  Under  it,  and  directly  over  the  artery,  place  a  smooth 
pebble,  a  cartridge,  piece  of  stick,  or  other  hard  lump.  Then  thrust 
a  stout  stick  under  the  bandage,  and  twist  until  the  wound  stops 
bleeding.  The  lump  serves  two  purposes:  it  brings  the  most  pres- 
sure where  it  will  do  the  most  good,  and  it  allows  passage  of  enough 
blood  on  either  side  to  keep  the  limb  from  being  strangled  to  death. 

If  the  position  of  the  artery  above  the  wound  cannot  be  deter- 
mined, then,  in  case  of  a  gaping  wound  that  would  be  hard  to  plug, 


CARE  OF  THE  HEALTH  AND  FIRST  AID       307 
TO  THE  SICK  AND  INJURED. 

apply  the  tourniquet  without  any  lump,  and  twist  it  very  tight  indeed. 
This  can  only  be  done  for  a  short  time,  while  you  are  preparing  to 
ligate  the  artery;  if  prolonged,  it  will  kill  the  liml).  and  gangrene  will 
ensue.  In  case  of  a  punctured  wound,  such  as  bullet  hole,  it  is  better 
to  push  a  plug  hard  down  in  the  wound  itself,  leaving  the  outer  end 
projecting  so  that  a  bandage  will  hold  the  plug  firmly  on  the  artery. 
This  must  be  done,  anyway,  wherever  a  tourniquet  cannot  be  used. 

The  above  expedients  are  only  temporary;  for  a  cut  artery,  if 
of  any  considerable  size,  must  be  ligated — that  is  to  say,  permanently 
closed  by  tying  one  or  both  of  the  severed  ends.  To  do  this  you  must 
have  at  least  a  pair  of  sharp-pointed  forceps  or  strong  tweezers. 
Perhaps  you  may  have  to  extemporize  them — if  you  have  no  iron, 
make  a  little  pair  of  tongs  by  heating  the  middle  of  a  green  hardwood 
stick,  bending  over,  and  then  shaping  and  lire-hardening  the  ends. 
Get  hold  of  the  end  of  the  artery  with  this,  draw  it  out,  and  have  some 
one  hold  it.  Then  take  a  piece  of  strong  thread  that  has  been  steri- 
lized in  boiling  salt  water,  make  a  loop  in  it  as  for  a  common  knot, 
but  pass  the  right  hand,  end  of  the  thread  twice  around  the  other,  in- 
stead of  once  (surgeon's  knot — it  will  never  slip). 

Slip  this  loop  down  over  the  forceps  and  around  the  end  of  the 
artery,  and  draw  tight.  If  the  vessel  bleeds  from  both  ends,  ligate 
both. 

Powdered  alum,  tamped  hard  into  a  wound  will  stop  bleeding 
from  all  but  a  large  artery.  So  will  substances  rich  in  tannin,  such 
as  powdered  sumac  leaves  (dried  over  the  fire,  if  green)  and  pul- 
verized oak  or  hemlock  bark.  Do  not  use  cobwebs,  nor  the  woolly 
inside  of  pufT  balls — these  old-fashioned  styptics  are  likely  to  infect  a 
wound  with  micro-organisms,  and  thus  do  more  harm  than  good. 

If  a  finger  or  toe  is  cut  ofif,  as  with  an  axe,  clap  it  quickly  into 
l)lace  and  bind  it  there;  it  may  grow  on  again. 

Bruises.  Ordinary  bruises  are  best  treated  with  cold,  wet 
cloths.  Raw,  lean  meat  applied  to  the  part  will  prevent  discoloration. 
Severe  bruises,  which  are  likel}'  to  form  absesses,  should  be  covered 
with  cloths  wrung  out  in  water  as  hot  as  can  be  borne,  to  be  re- 
heated as  it  cools;  afterwards  with  hot  poultices. 

Burns.  If  clothing  sticks  to  the  burn,  do  not  try  to  remove  it. 
hut  cut  around  it  and  Hood  it  with  oil.  Prick  blisters  at  both  ends 
with  a  perfectl}^  clean  needle,  and  remove  the  water  b}-  gentle  pres- 


308  CHAPTER   XVII. 

sure,  being  careful  not  to  break  the  skin.  A  good  application  for  a 
burn,  including  sun  burn,  is  carron  oil  (equal  parts  linseed  oil  and 
limewater).  Druggists  supply  an  ointment  known  as  "solidified  carron 
oil"  that  is  easier  to  carry.  A  three  per  cent,  solution  of  carbolic 
acid,  applied  with  absorbent  cotton  or  a  bandage,  is  an  excellent  ap- 
plication. Better  still  is  the  salve  known  as  ungentine.  Lacking  these 
the  next  best  thing  is  common  baking  soda.  (Baking  soda  is  the 
bicarbonate;  washing  soda,  or  plain  soda,  is  the  carbonate;  do  not 
confuse  them).  Dissolve  in  as  little  water  as  is  required  to  take  it 
up;  saturate  a  cloth  with  this  and  apply.  Another  good  application 
for  burns  is  the  scrapings  of  a  raw  potato,  renewed  when  it  feels 
hot.  If  you  have  none  of  these,  use  any  kind  of  clean  oil  or  unsalted 
grease,  or  dust  flour  over  the  burn,  or  use  moist  earth,  preferably 
clay;  then  cover  with  cotton  cloth.  Do  not  remove  the  dead  skin 
until  new  skin  has  formed  underneath. 

Burning  Clothing,  particularly  that  of  females,  has  been  the  un- 
necessary cause  of  many  horrible  deaths,  either  from  ignorance  of 
the  proper  means  of  extinguishing  the  flames,  or  from  lack  of  pres- 
ence of  mind  to  apply  them.  A  person  whose  clothing  is  blazing 
should  (1)  immediately  be  made  to  lie  down — be  thrown  if  neces- 
sary. The  tendency  of  flames  is  upward,  and  when  the  patient  is 
lying  down,  they  not  only  have  less  to  feed  upon,  but  the  danger  of 
their  reaching  the  face,  with  the  possibility  of  choking  and  of  ultimate 
deformity,  is  greatly  diminished.  (2)  The  person  should  then  be 
quickly  wrapped  up  in  a  coat,  shawl,  rug,  blanket  or  any  similar 
article,  preferably  woolen,  and  never  cotton,  and  the  fire  completely 
smothered  by  pressing  and  patting  upon  the  burning  points  from  the 
outside  of  the  envelope. 

The  flames  having  been  controlled  in  this  way,  when  the  wrap 
is  removed,  great  care  should  be  taken  to  have  the  slightest  sign 
of  a  blaze  immediately  and  completely  stifled.  This  is  best  done  by 
pinching  it,  but  water  may  be  used.  Any  burns  and  any  prostration 
or  shock  should  be  treated  in  the  manner  prescribed  for  them. 

It  is  always  dangerous  for  a  woman  to  attempt  to  smother  the 
burning  clothing  of  another,  on  account  of  the  danger  to  her  own 
clothing.  If  she  attempts  it,  she  should  always  carefully  hold  be- 
tween them  the  rug  in  which  she  is  about  to  wrap  the  sufferer. 

Chigers.  Apply  sodium  hyposulphate  ("Hypo")-  Bacon  is  also 
excellent. 

Choking.     Foreign  Body  in  the  Throat.     The   common  practice   of 


CARE  OF  THE  HEALTH  AND  FIRST  AID       309 
TO  THE  SICK  AND  INJURED. 

slapping  the  back  often  helps  the  act  of  coughing  to  dislodge  chok- 
ing bodies  in  the  pharynx  or  windpipe. 

When  this  does  not  succeed,  the  patient's  mouth  may  be  opened 
and  two  fingers  passed  back  into  the  throat  to  grasp  the  object.  If 
the  effort  to  grasp  the  foreign  body  is  not  successful,  the  act  will  pro- 
duce vomiting,  which  may  expel  it. 

A  wire,  such  as  a  hairpin,  may  be  bent  into  a  loop  and  passed 
into  the  pharynx  to  catch  the  foreign  body  and  draw  it  out.  The 
utmost  precautions  must  be  taken  neither  to  harm  the  throat  nor  to 
lose  the  loop. 

In  children,  and  even  in  adults,  the  expulsion  of  the  body  may 
be  facilitated  by  lifting  a  patient  up  by  the  heels  and  slapping  his 
back  in  this  position. 

Summon  a  physician,  taking  care  to  send  him  information  as  to 
the  character  of  the  accident,  so  that  he  may  bring  with  him  the  in- 
struments needed  for  removing  the  obstruction. 

Clothing,  burning  cf.     See  "Burning  Clothing." 

Colds.  Put  on  warm,  dry  clothing.  Drink  freely  of  hot  ginger 
tea;  cover  well  at  night;  give  dose  of  quinine  every  six  hours;  loosen 
the  bowels. 

Constipation.  Give  doses  compound  cathartic  pills,  eat  freely 
of  preser\cs:  drink  often. 

Convulsions.  Give  hot  baths  at  once;  rub  well  the  lower  parts 
of  the  body  to  stimulate;  keep  water  as  hot  as  possible  without  scald- 
ing, then  dry  and  wrap  up  very  warm. 

Cramps  and  Chills.  Mix  pepper  and  ginger  in  very  hot  water 
and  drink.     Give  dose  of  cramp  tablets. 

A  hot  stone  makes  a  good  foot  warmer. 

Diarrhoea.  Apply  warm  bandages  to  stomach;  fire  brown  a  little 
flour  to  which  two  teaspoonfuls  of  vinegar  and  one  teaspoonful  of 
salt  are  added;  mix  and  drink.  This  is  a  cure,  nine  cases  out  of  ten.  A 
tablespoonful  of  warm  vinegar  and  teaspoonful  of  salt  will  cure 
most  severe  cases.  Don't  eat  fruit.  A  hot  drink  of  ginger  tea  is 
good.     Repeat  every  few  hours  the  above. 

Dislocations.  A  dislocation  of  a  finger  can  generally  be  re- 
duced by  pulling  strongly  and  at  the  same  time  pushiilg  the  tip  of 
the  finger  backward. 


310  CHAPTER   XVII. 

If  a  shoulder  is  thrown  o'ut  of  joint,  have  the  man  lie  down, 
place  a  pad  in  his  arm  pit.  remove  your  shoe,  and  seat  yourself  by 
his  side,  facing  him;  then  put  your  foot  in  his  armpit,  grasp  the  dis- 
located arm  in  botli  hands,  and  simultaneously  push  with  your  foot, 
pull  on  his  arm,  and  swing  the  arm  toward  his  body  till  a  snap  is 
heard  or  felt. 

For  any  other  dislocation,  if  you  can  possibly  get  a  surgeon,  do 
not  meddle  with  the  joint,  but  surround  it  with  flannel  cloths,  wrung 
out  in  hot  water,  and  support  with  soft  pads. 

Fainting.  Lay  the  patient  on  his  back,  with  feet  higher  than 
his  head.  Loosen  tight  clothing,  and  let  him  have  plenty  of  fresh 
air.  Sprinkle  his  face  with  cold  water  jind  rub  his  arms  with  it. 
When  consciousness  returns,  give  him  a  stimulant.  For  an  attack 
of  dizziness  bend  the  head  down  firml}^  between  the  knees. 

Drowning.  The  instructions  issued  by  the  IJ.  S.  Volunteer  Life 
Saving  Corps,  are  as  follows: 

RESCUING.  Approach  the  drowning  man  from  behind,  seizing 
him  by  the  coat  collar,  or  a  woman  by  the  back  hair,  and  tow  him  at 
arms  length  to  boat  or  shore.  Do  not  let  him  cling  around  your  neck 
or  arms  to  endanger  you.  Duck  him  until  unconscious  if  necessary 
to  break  dangerous  hold  upon  you;  but  do  not  strike  to  stun  him. 

RESUSCITATION.  First:  Immediately  loosen  the  clothing 
about  the  neck  and  chest,  exposing  them  to  the  wind,  except  in  very 
severe  weather,  and  get  the  water  out  of  the  body.  First  try  tickling 
in  the  throat  by  a  straw  or  feather,  or  ammonia  to  the  nose;  tr}^  a 
severe  slap  with  the  open  hand  upon  the  chest  and  soles  of  feet;  if 
no  immediate  result  proceed  as  follows: 

Second:  Lay  the  body  with  its  weight  on  the  stomach,  across  any 
convenient  object,  a  keg,  box,  boat,  timber  or  your  knee,  in  the  open 
air,  with  the  head  hanging  down.  Open  the  mouth  (|uickly  drawing 
the  tongue  forward  with  handkerchief  or  cloth  so  as  to  let  the  water 
escape.  Keep  the  mouth  clear  of  liquid.  Then  roll  the  body  gently 
from  side  to  side  so  as  to  relieve  the  pressure  on  the  stomach,  then 
back  to  the  stomach.  Do  this  several  times  to  force  the  water  from 
the  stomach  and  throat. 

Third:  Laying  the  bod}^  on  the  back,  make  a  roll  of  coat  or  any 
garment,  place  it  under  the  shoulders  of  patient,  allowing  the  head 
to  fall  back.  Then  kneel  at  the  head  of  the  patient.  Grasp  the  arms 
at  the  middle  of  forearms,  folded  across   the   stomach,  raise  the  arms 


CARE  OF  THE  HEALTH  AND  FIRST  AID       311 
TO  THE  SICK  AND  INJURED. 

over  the  head  to  a  perpendicular  position,  drawing  them  backwards 
straight,  then  forward  overhead  to  the  sides  again,  pressing  the  arms 
on  the  lower  part  of  tlie  ribs  and  sides,  so  as  to  produce  a  bellows 
movement  upon  the  lungs.  Do  this  sixteen  or  eighteen  times  a  min- 
ute. Smelling  salts,  camphor  or  ammonia  may  be  applied  to  the 
nostrils  to  excite  breathing.  But  give  no  spirits  internally  until  after 
breathing  and  circulation  are  restored.  The  clothing  should  be  re- 
moved, the  body  dried,  and  the  legs  rubbed  briskly  upwards,  from 
foot  to  knee,  occasionally  slapping  the  soles  of  the  feet  with  the 
open  hand. 

Fourth:  On  signs  of  life,  or  when  breathing  is  restored,  wrap  in 
warm  blanket  or  hot  cloths.  To  encourage  circulation,  hot  tea. 
brandy  or  anj^  spirits  may  be  given  in  small  doses,  with  care  to  avoid 
strangulation,  and  brisk  rubbing  and  warmth  applied  to  the  entire 
body. 

Keep  at  work  until  recover}-,  or  death  is  pronounced  certain  by 
a  physician.  Persons  have  revived  after  two  hours'  steady  work,  but 
most  cases  revive  within  thirty  minutes. 

Drunkenness.  Cold  water  dashed  in  the  face  often  proves  a 
most  satisfactory  awakener. 

Cause  vomiting  by  tickling  the  pharynx  with  a  feather  or  some- 
thing of  the  kind;  by  administering  a  tablespoonful  of  salt  or  mustard 
in  a  cup  of  warm  water.  Aromatic  spirits  of  ammonia  is  very  effi- 
cient in  sobering  a  drunken  man — a  teaspoonful  in  half  a  cup  of  water. 

A  cup  of  hot  coffee  after  vomiting  will  aid  to  settle  the  stomach 
and  clear  the  mind. 

Lay  the  subject  in  a  comfortable  position,  applying  hot,  dry 
formentations,  if  there  is  marked  coldness. 

Ear,  Foreign  Body  in.  \\\  case  of  living  insect,  (a)  hold  a 
bright  light  to  the  ear.  The  fascination  which  a  light  has  for  insects 
will  often  cause  them  to  leave  the  ear  to  go  to  the  light.  If  this  fails, 
{h)  syringe  the  ear  with  warm  salt  and  water,  or  (c)  pour  in  warm  oil 
from  a  teaspoon,  and  the  intruder  will  generally  be  driven  out. 

If  the  body  be  vegetable,  or  any  substance  liable  to  swell,  do  not 
syringe  the  ear,  for  the  fluid  will  cause  it  to  swell,  and  soften  and 
render  it  much  more  difficult  to  extract.  In  a  case  of  this  kind, 
where  a  bean,  a  grain  of  corn,  etc.,  has  gotten  into  the  ear,  the  body 


312  CHAPTER  XVII. 

may  be  jerked  out  by  bending  the  head  to  the  affected  side  and  jump- 
ing repeatedly. 

If  the.  body  is  not  liable  to  swell,  syringing  with  tepid  water 
will  often  wash  it  out. 

If  these  methods  fail,  consult  a  medical  man.  The  presence  of 
a  foreign  body  in  the  ear  will  do  no  immediate  harm,  and  it  is  quite 
possible  to  wait  several  days,  if  a  surgeon  cannot  be  gotten  before. 

Earache.  A  piece  of  cotton  sprinkled  with  pepper  and  moistened 
with  oil  or  fat  will  give  almost  instant  relief.     Wash  with  hot  water. 

Eyes,  inflamed.  Bind  on  hot  tea  leaves  or  raw  fresh  meat. 
Leave  on  over  night.     Wash  well  in  morning  with  warm  water. 

Eye,  Foreign  Body  in.  Close  the  eye  for  a  few  moments  and  al- 
low the  tears  to  accumulate;  upon  opening  it,  the  body  may  be  washed 
out  by  them.     Never  rub  the  eye. 

If  the  body  lies  under  the  lower  lid,  make  the  patient  look  up, 
and  at  the  same  time  press  down  upon  the  lid;  the  inner  surface 
of  the  lid  will  be  exposed,  and  the  foreign  body  may  be  brushed  off 
with  the  corner  of  a  handkerchief. 

If  the  body  lies  under  the  upper  lid,  (i)  grasp  the  lashes  of  the 
upper  lid  and  pull  it  down  over  the  lower,  which  should  at  the  same 
time,  with  the  other  hand,  be  pushed  up  under  the  upper.  Upon 
repeating  this  two  or  three  times,  the  foreign  body  will  often  be 
brushed  out  on  the  lower  lid.  (2)  If  this  fails,  the  upper  lid  should 
be  turned  up;  make  the  patient  shut  his  eye  and  look  down;  then  with 
a  pencil  or  some  similar  article  press  gently  upon  the  lid  at  about  its 
middle,  and  grasping  the  lashes  with  the  other  hand,  turn  the  lid 
up  over  the  pencil,  when  its  inner  surface  will  be  seen,  and  the  for- 
eign body  may  readily  be  brushed  off. 

If  the  body  is  firmly  imbedded  in  the  surafce  of  the  eye,  a  care- 
ful attempt  may  be  made  to  lift  it  out  with  tlie  point  of  a  needle. 
If  not  at  once  successful,  this  should  not  be  persisted  in,  as  the  sight 
may  be  injured  by  injudicious  efforts. 

After  the  removal  of  a  foreign  body  from  the  eye,  a  sensation 
as  if  of  its  presence  often  remains.  People  not  infrequently  complain 
of  a  foreign  body  when  it  has  already  been  removed  by  natural  means. 
Sometimes  the  body  has  excited  a  little  irritation,  which  feels  like  a 
foreign  body.  If  this  sensation  remains  over  night,  the  eye  needs 
attention,  and  a  surgeon  should  be  consulted;  for  it  should  have 
]>assed  away  if  no  irritating  body  is  present. 


CARE  OF  THE  HEALTH  AND  FIRST  AID      313 
TO  THE  SICK  AND  INJURED. 

After  the  removal  of  an  irritating  foreign  body  from  the  eye, 
some  bland  fltiid  should  be  poured  into  it.  Alilk,  thin  mucilage  of 
gum  arabic,  sweet  oil,  or  salad  oil  are  excellent  for  this  purpose. 

Famishing.  Do  not  let  a  starved  person  eat  much  at  a  time. 
Prepare  some  broth,  or  a  gruel  of  corn  meal  or  oatmeal  thoroughly 
cooked,  and  feed  but  a  small  spoonful,  repeating  at  intervals  of  a  few 
minutes.  Give  very  little  the  first  day,  or  there  will  be  bloating  and 
nausea. 

Fatigue,  excessive.  Take  a  stimulant  or  hot  drink  when  you 
get  to  camp  (but  not  until  then),  and  immediately  eat  something. 
Then  rest  between  blankets  to  avoid  catching  cold. 

Feet,  sore  and  blistered.     See  "Care  of  Feet,"  page  304. 

Fevers.  Give  doses  of  quinine  tablets;  loosen  bowels  if  neces- 
sar^s  keep  dry  and  warm. 

Freezing.  Keep  away  from  heat.  To  toast  frost  bitten  fingers 
or  toes  before  the  fire  would  bring  chilblains,  and  thawing  out  a 
badly  frozen  part  would  probably  result  in  gangrene,  making  ampu- 
tation necessary.  Rub  the  frozen  part  with  snow,  or  with  ice  cold 
water,  until  the  natural  color  of  the  skin  is  restored.  Then  treat  as  a 
burn. 

Chilblains  should  be  rubbed  with  whiskey  or  alum  water. 

Freezing  to  Death.  At  all  hazards  keep  awake.  Take  a  stick 
and  beat  each  other  unmercifully;  to  restore  circulation  to  frozen 
limbs  rub  with  snow;  when  roused  again  don't  stop  or  fall  asleep — 
it  is  certain  death.     Remember  this  and  rouse  yourself. 

Head,  How  to  Keep  Cool.  By  placing  wet  green  leaves  inside 
of  hat. 

Insect  Stings.  Extract  the  sting,  if  left  in  the  wound,  and  apply 
a  solution  of  baking  soda,  or  a  slice  of  raw  onion,  or  a  paste  of  clay, 
mixed  with  saliva,  or  a  moist  quid  of  tobacco.  Ammonia  is  the  com- 
mon remedy,  but  oil  of  sassafras  is  better.  A  watch  key  or  other 
small  hollow  tube  pressed  with  force  over  the  puncture  and  held 
there  several  minutes  will  expel  a  good  deal  of  the  poison. 

Ivy  Poison.  Relieved  with  solution  of  baking  soda  and  water; 
use  freely  as  a  cooling  wash.     Keep  the  bowels  open. 


314  CHAPTER   XVII. 

Lightning,  Struck  by.  Dash  cold  water  on  body  continually;  if 
severe  case,  add  salt  to  water;  continue  for  hours  if  necessary.  If 
possible  submerge  body  in  running  water  up  to  neck. 

Nose,  Foreign  Body  in.  Close  the  clear  side  of  the  nose  by 
pressure  with  a  finger,  and  make  the  patient  blow  the  nose  hard. 
This  will  usually  dislodge  the  object. 

If  this  fails,  induce  sneezing  either  by  tickling  the  nose  with  a 
feather  or  something  of  the  kind,  or  by  administering  snuff. 

The  nasal  douche,  where  a  syringe  or  a  long  rubber  tube  suit- 
able for  a  siphon  is  available,  may  be  used  in  case  the  body  is  not 
liable  to  swell,  injecting  luke  warm  water  into  the  clear  nostril  with 
the  expectation  that  it  will  push  the  body  out  of  the  other. 

If  these  fail,  and  the  body  can  be  seen  clearly,  an  effort  may  be 
made  to  fish  it  out  by  passing  a  piece  of  wire,  bent  into  a  little  hook, 
back  into  the  nostril  close  to  the  wall,  and  catching  the  body  with 
it.  A  hairpin  may  be  bent  straight  and  the  hook  formed  at  one  end. 
Do  not  continue  these  manoeuvers  very  long  nor  let  them  be  rough  in 
the  slightest  degree. 

All  simple  eft'orts  having  failed,  send  for  a  physician.  There  is 
no  danger  in  leaving  the  foreign  body  in  place  for  some  days  if  it 
is  impossible  to  consult  a  physician  in  less  time. 

Nosebleed  is  sometimes  uncontrollable  by  ordinary  means.  Try 
lifting  the  arms  above  the  head  and  snuffing  up  alum  water  or  salt 
water.  If  this  fails,  make  a  plug  by  rolling  up  part  of  a  half  inch  strip 
of  cloth,  leaving  one  end  dangling.  Push  this  plug  as  far  up  the  nose 
as  it  will  go,  pack  the  rest  of  the  strip  tightly  into  the  nostril,  and 
let  the  end  protude.  If  there  is  leakage  backward  into  the  mouth,  pack 
the  lower  part  of  plug  more  tightly.  Leave  the  plug  in  place  several 
hours;  then  loosen  wnth  Avarm  water  or  oil,  and  remove  very  gently. 

Ointment  for  Bruises,  Etc.  Wash  with  hot  water;  then  anoint 
with  tallow  or  candle  grease. 

Piles.  Men  with  piles  should  take  special  pains  to  keep  their 
bowels  open  and  to  bathe  the  parts  with  cold  water. 

Poisons.  In  all  cases  of  poisoning  there  should  be  no  avoid- 
able delay  in  summoning  a  physician.  The  most  important  thing  is 
that  the  stomacli  should  be  emptied  at  once.  If  the  patient  is  able 
to  swallow  this  may  be  accomplished  by  emetics,  such  as  mustard 
and    water,    a    teaspoonful    of   mustard    to    a    glass    of   water,    salt    and 


CARE  OF  THE  HEALTH  ANT)  FIRST  AID       315 
TO  THE  SICK  AND  INJURED. 

water,  powdered  ipecac  and  copious  draughts  of  hike  warm  water. 
Vomiting  may  also  be  induced  by  tickling  the  back  of  the  throat 
with  a  feather.  When  the  patient  begins  to  vomit,  care  should  be  taken 
to  support  the  head  in  order  that  the  vomited  matter  may  be  ejected 
at  once,  and  not  swallowed  again  or  drawn  into  the  wind  pipe. 

Poultices.  Poultices  may  be  needed  not  only  for  bruises  but  for 
felons,  boils,  carbunkles,  etc.  They  are  easily  made  from  corn  meal 
or  oat  meal.  Mix  by  adding  a  little  at  a  time  to  boiling  water  and 
stirring  to  a  thick  paste;  then  spread  on  cloth.  Renew  from  time  to 
time  as  it  cools. 

To  prevent  a  poultice  from  sticking,  cover  the  under  surface  with 
clean  mosquito  netting,  or  smear  the  bruise  with  oil.  It  is  a  good 
idea  to  dust  some  charcoal  over  a  sore  before  putting  the  poultice  on. 
The  woods  themselves  afford  plenty  of  materials  for  good  poultices. 
Chief  of  these  is  slippery  elm,  the  mucilaginous  innerbark  of  which, 
boiled  in  water  and  kneaded  into  a  poultice,  is  soothing  to  inflamma- 
tion and  softens  the  tissues.  Good  poultices  can  also  be  made  from 
the  soft  rind  of  tamarack,  the  rootbark  of  basswood  or  cottonwood, 
and  many  other  trees  or  plants.  Our  frontiersmen,  like  the  Indians, 
often  treated  wounds  by  merely  applying  the  chewed  fresh  leaves  of 
alder,  striped  maple   (moosewood)   or  sassafras. 

Salves.  Balsam  obtained  by  pricking  the  little  blisters  on  the 
bark  of  balsam  firs  is  a  good  application  for  a  wound;  so  is  the 
honey  like  gum  of  the  liquidambar  or  sweet  gum  tree,  raw  turpen- 
tine from  any  pine  tree,  and  the  resin  procured  by  "boxing"  (gashing) 
a  cypress  or  hemlock  tree,  or  by  boiling  a  knot  of  the  wood  and 
skimming  off  the  surface.  All  of  these  resins  are  antiseptics  and 
soothing  to  a  wound. 

Scalds.  Relieve  instantly  with  common  baking  soda  and  soaking 
wet  rags — dredge  the  soda  on  thick  and  wrap  wet  clothes  thereon. 
To  dredge  with  flour  is  good  also. 

Shock.  In  case  of  collapse  following  an  accident,  operation, 
fright:  treat  first  as  for  fainting.  Then  rub  the  limbs  with  flannel, 
stroking  the  extremities  toward  the  heart.  Apply  hot  plates,  stones, 
or  bottles  of  hot  water,  wrapped  in  towels,  to  the  extremities  and 
over  the  stomach.  Then  give  hot  tea  or  coffee,  or  if  there  is  no 
bleeding,  a  tablespoonful  of  whiskey  and  hot  water,  repeating  three 
or  four  times  an  hour. 


316  CHAPTER   XVII. 

Skin,  protection  of,  in  cold  weather.  Smear  the  face,  ears  and 
hands  with  oil  or  grease.  The  e3^es  may  be  protected  from  the  re- 
flection of  the  sun  on  snow  by  blackening  the  nose  and  cheeks. 

Snake  Bite.  When  a  man  is  bitten  he  should  instantly  twist 
a  tourniquet  very  tightl}^  between  the  wound  and  the  heart,  to  keep 
the  poison,  as  far  as  possible,  from  entering  the  system.  Then  cut 
the  wound  wide  open,  so  it  may  bleed  freely,  and  suck  the  wound, 
if  practicable  (the  poison  is  harmless  if  swallowed,  but  not  if  it 
gets  into  the  circulation  through  an  abrasion  in  the  mouth  or  through 
a  hollow  tooth.)  Loosen  the  ligature  before  long  to  admit  fresh 
blood  to  the  injured  part,  but  tighten  it  again  very  soon,  and  repeat 
,  this  alternate  tightening  and  loosening  for  a  considerable  time.  The 
object  is  to  admit  only  a  little  of  the  poison  at  a  time  into  the  general 
circulation.  Meantime  drink  whiskey  in  moderate  doses,  but  at  fre- 
quent intervals.  If  a  great  quantity  is  guzzled  all  at  once  it  will  do 
more  harm  than  good.  Whiskey  is  not  an  antidote;  it  has  no  efifect 
at  all  on  the  venom;  its  service  is  simply  as  a  stimulant  for  the  heart 
and  lungs,  thus  helping  the  system  to  throw  off  the  poison,  and  as  a 
bracer  to  the  victim's  nerves,  helping  him  over  the  crisis. 

Snow  or  Sun  Blindness.  Smear  the  nose  and  face  about  the 
eyes  with  charcoal. 

Sore  Throat.  Fat  bacon  or  pork  tied  on  with  a  dry  stocking; 
keep  on  until  soreness  is  gone  then  remove  fat  and  keep  covering  on 
a  day  longer.  Tincture  of  Iron  diluted;  swab  the  throat.  Gargling 
with  salt  ar.d  hot  water  is  effective.  Listerine,  used  as  a  gargle,  is  also 
good. 

Sprains.  The  regular  medical  treatment  is  to  plunge  a  sprained 
ankle,  wrist  or  finger,  into  water  as  hot  as  can  be  borne  at  the  start, 
and  to  raise  the  heat  gradually  thereafter  to  the  limit  of  endurance. 
Continue  for  half  an  hour,  then  put  the  joint  in  a  hot,  wet  bandage,  re- 
heat from  time  to  time,  and  support  the  limb  in  an  elevated  position, 
the  leg  being  stretched  as  high  as  the  hip,  or  the  arm  carried  in  a  sling. 
In  a  day  or  two  begin  gently  moving  and  kneading  the  joint,  and  rub 
with  liniment,  oil,  or  vaselin. 

Spriiins  may  also  be  treated  by  the  application  of  cold  water  and 
cloths. 

As  a  soothing  application  for  sprains,  bruises,  etc.,  the  virtues 
of  witch  hazel  are  well  known.  A  decoction  (strong  tea)  of  the  bark 
is   easily   m.-ide,   or   a   ])r)ultice   can    ho   made    fr^m    it.      The   iimcr    i)ark 


CARE  OF  THE  HEALTH  AND  FIRST  AID      317 
TO  THE  SICK  AND  INJURED. 

of  kinnikinick,  otherwise  known  as  red  willow  or.  silky  cornel,  makes 
an  excellent  astringent  poultice  for  sprains.     The  pain  and  inflamma- 
tion of  a  sprained  ankle  are  much  relieved  by  dipping  tobacco  leaves 
in  water  and  binding  them  around  the  injured  part. 
Stings  cf  Insects.     See  "Insect  Stings." 

Stunning.  Concussion  of  the  brain:  lay  the  man  on  his  back, 
with  head  somewhat  raised.  Apply  heat  as  for  shock,  but  keep  the 
head  cool  with  wet  cloths.  Do  not  give  any  stimulant — that  would 
drive  blood  to  the  brain,  where  it  is  not  w^anted. 

Sunstroke.  Lay  the  patient  in  a  cool  ])lace,  position  same  as 
for  stunning.  If  the  skin  is  hot,  remove  clothing,  or  at  least  loosen  it. 
Hold  a  vessel  or  hat  full  of  cold  water  four  or  five  feet  above  him  and 
pour  a  stream  first  on  his  head,  then  on  his  body,  and  last  on  his 
extremities.  Continue  until  consciousness  returns.  Renew  if  symp- 
toms recur. 

If  the  skin  is  cool  (a  bad  sign)  apply  warmth,  and  give  stimu- 
lating drinks. 

Thirst.  Allow  the  sufferer  only  a  spoonful  of  water  at  a  time, 
but  at  frequent  intervals.     Bathe  him  if  possible. 

To  quench  thirst.  Don't  drink  too  often,  better  rinse  out  the 
mouth  often,  taking  a  swallow  or  two  only.  A  pebble  or  button  kept 
in  the  mouth  will  help  quench  that  dry  and  parched  tongue. 

Toothache.  Warm  vinegar  and  salt.  Hold  in  mouth  around 
tooth  until  pain  ceases,  or  plug  cavity  with  cotton  mixed  with  pepper 
and  ginger. 

Wounds.  When  a  ball  enters  or  goes  through  the  muscles  or 
soft  parts  of  the  body  alone,  generally  nothing  need  be  done  except 
to  protect  the  wound  or  wounds  with  the  contents  of  the  first  aid 
packet.  The  directions  for  the  use  of  this  packet  are  simple,  and 
each  packet  contains  them.  In  doing  this  always  be  careful  of  one 
thing — not  to  touch  the  wound  with  your  fingers  nor  handle  it  in 
any  w^ay,  for  the  dirt  on  your  hands  is  harmful,  and  you  must  dis- 
turb a  wound  as  little  as  possible.  Be  content  to  open  the  packet 
carefully,  and,  placing  the  small  pads  or  compresses  upon  the  wound 
or  wounds,  to  wrap  the  binder  or  narrow  bandage  firmly  about  the 
parts,  fastening  with  a  safety  pin.  This  will  hold  the  pads  in  place 
and  will  help  to  stop  the  ordinary  bleeding.     The  large  or  triangular 


318  CHAPTER  XVII. 

bandage  should  be  bound  over  this  or  used  as  a  sling  if  required. 
Generally  this  is  all  that  is  necessary  for  the  first  treatment,  and  some- 
times it  is  all  that  is  needed  for  several  daj^s.  The  importance  of  the; 
care  with  which  this  first  dressing  is  made  can  not  be  too  seriously 
insisted  upon.  It  is  better  to  leave  a  wound  undressed  than  to  dress 
it  carelessly  or  ignorantly,  so  that  the  dressing  must  soon  be  removed. 

The  follozciiig  should  alzvays  be  reincmhcrcd: 

I.  Never  touch  a  wound  with  anything  unclean — dirty  fingers, 
non-disinfected  bandages,  dirty  water,  etc.  It  may  cause  inflamma- 
tion, ulceration,  or  blood  poisoning. 

2  Expose  the  wound  by  removing  the  covering  article  of  dress, 
which  contains  many  impurities.  Unbutton  or  cut  clothes  and  examine 
extent  of  bleeding.  Open  all  articles  of  clothing  which  might  hin- 
der circulation  of  blood  or  breathing  (collar,  necktie,  belt).  To  avoid 
pain  and  bleeding,  rais^  legs  by  putting  under  them  a  valise,  saddle, 
truss  of  straw,  etc.;  slight  bleeding  will  often  cease  in  this  position  of 
its  own  accord,  without  any  bandaging.  A  bandage  is  advisable  to 
protect  the  wound  from  dirt,  flies  or  cold.  USE  THE  FIRST  AID 
PACKET. 

Cleansing.  After  stopping  the  flow  of  blood,  cleanse  the  wound 
of  and  foreign  substance  that  may  have  entered  it.  To  remove  a 
splinter,  slip  the  point  of  a  small  knife  blade  under  the  protruding 
end  and  catch  it  with  the  thumb  nail.  A  fish  hook  imbedded  in  the 
flesh  should  be  pushed  on  through;  then  nip  or  file  ofif  the  bdrb,  and 
withdraw.  If  a  bullet  is  deeply  imbedded,  let  it  alone;  the  chances  are 
that  it  will  do  no  harm. 

After  picking  out  dirt,  bits  of  cloth,  or  other  matter  that  would 
make  the  wound  sore  and  slow  to  heal,  wash  the  injured  part  with 
perfectly  clean  water.     If  there  be  any  doubt  about  the  w-ater,  boil  it. 

Do  not  mop  the  wound  with  a  rag.  Hold  the  water  a  few  inches 
above  it  and  let  a  small  stream  gently  trickle  down  upon  it.  A  clean 
cut  needs  no  washing;  simply  draw  the  edges  together  and  fasten 
them  in  place.  Whenever  it  can  be  done,  shave  the  skin  for  some 
distance  around  the  wound.  Hairs,  no  matter  how  small,  are  grease 
coated  and  favor  the  growth  of  germs.  Shaving  also  scrapes  off  the 
surface  dirt  and  dead  scales  of  skin. 

Closing.  Never  cover  a  wound  with  court  plaster.  It  prevents 
the  free  escape  of  supperation,  inflames  the  part,  and  makes  the  place 


CARE  OF  THE  HEALTH  AND  FIRST  AID       319 
TO  THE  SICK  AND  INJURED. 

difficult  to  cleanse  thereafter.  The  only  legitimate  uses  for  sticking 
plaster  are  to  hold  dressings  in  place  where  bandaging  is  difficult 
(as  on  the  buttock),  or,  in  case  of  a  cut  to  keep  the  edges  closed  witli- 
out  sewing  the  skin.  In  the  latter  case  the  cut  may  be  crossed  with 
narrow  strips  of  plaster,  leaving  spaces  between;  but  a  better  way, 
if  you  hav^e  regular  surgeon's  plaster,  is  as  follows:  Lay  a  broad  strip 
on  each  side  of  the  cut  half  an  inch  apart,  and  extending  beyond  the 
wound  at  each  end.  Stick  these  strips  firmly  in  place,  except  about 
a  quarter  of  an  inch  of  the  inner  margins,  which  are  left  loose  for  the 
present.  With  needle  and  thread  lace  the  strips  (deep  stitches,  so 
they'll  not  pull  out)  so  as  to  draw  the  edges  of  the  wound  together, 
and  then  stick  the  inner  margins  down,  noi;  covering  the  wound. 

Sewing  a  wound  should  be  avoided  by  inexperienced  persons, 
unless  it  is  really  necessary,  as  in  the  case  of  a  foot  almost  severed 
by  an  axe  cut.  If  an  ordinary  needle  and  thread  must  be  used, 
sterilize  them  by  soaking  in  a  boiling  solution  of  salt  and  water.  (It 
is  here  assumed  that  no  better  antiseptic  agents  are  available.  Sugar 
and  water,  or  vinegar  will  do  in  a  pinch.)  Do  not  sew  continuously 
over  and  over,  but  make  a  deep  stitch  and  snip  off  the  thread,  leaving 
enough  at  each  end  to  tie  with  by  and  by.  Repeat  this  at  proper 
intervals,  until  enough  stitches  have  been  taken;  then,  go  back  and 
tie  them,  one  after  another,  with  surgeon's  knot.  Such  sewing  is  easy 
to  remove  when  the  proper  time  comes,  sa}'   within  about  six  days. 

Dressing.  An  inflammation  of  wounds,  suf)puration,  and  blood 
poisoning,  are  due  to  living  germs,  and  to  nothing  else.  These  germs 
are  not  born  in  the  wound,  but  enter  from  the  outside.  We  may  as 
well  say  that  they  are  present  everywhere.  To  prevent  their  entrance 
is  much  easier  than  to  kill  them  once  they  have  gaind  foothold. 
The  only  guarantee  of  a  wound  healing  nicely  is  to  make  it  antiseptic 
— that  is  to  say,  surgically  clean.  That  means  sterilizing  everything 
used  about  the  wound  (by  heat,  if  you  have  no  antiseptics),  not  trust- 
ing that  anything  is  germ  free  because  it  looks  clean.  The  micro- 
organisms that  cause  inflammation  of  a  wound,  fever,  putrefaction, 
cannot  be  seen  with  the  eye,  and  they  may  lurk  anywhere. 

Do  not  use  a  mere  bandage  directly  on  an  open  wound.  First, 
cover  the  injury  with  a  compress  (soft  pad,  made  by  folding  a  strip 
of  cloth  in  several  layers);  then  bandage.  Unless  you  have  a  first 
aid    packet,    or    are    otherwise    provided    with    stirilized    dressings    or 


320  CHAPTER   XVII. 

*.  antiseptics,  hold  the  material  of  the  compress  over  a  clear  fire  until 
it  is  fairly  scorched;  then  let  it  cool.  A  little  charring  of  the  surface 
will  do  no  harm;  in  fact  charcoal  is  itself  a  good  application  to  the 
surface  of  a  wound.  Of  course  the  compress  is  to  be  renewed  every 
time  the  wound  is  dressed. 

NOTE. 

The  only  way  to  learn  how  to  use  bandages,  slings  and  splints; 
how  to  make  tourniquets,  and  how  to  handle  fractures,  is  to  have 
someone  who  thoroughly  understands  these  things  show  you  in  per- 
son how  to  do  them  and  then  for  you  to  do  them  yourself.  It  is, 
therefore,  suggested  that  such  instruction  be  received  from  some  non- 
commissioned officer  of  the  Hospital  Corps. 


USE,  DESCRIPTIOX  AND  MANAGEMENT  OF    321 

THE  RIFLE 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 

THE  USE,  DESCRIPTION  AND   MANAGEMENT   OF 

THE  RIFLE. 


The  soldier  should  know  his  rifle  as  he  knows  his  best  friend,  and 
should  thoroughly  understand  its  peculiarities,  if  it  has  any. 

The  man  who  can  not  shoot  reduces  materially  his  value  as  a  soldier. 

Every  soldier  should,  by  care,  practice  and  effort,  make  of  himself 
the  best  shot  he  is  capable  of  becoming. 

Every  noncommissioned  officer  should  study  carefully  the  principles 
laid  down  in  the  Small  Arms  Firing  Regulations.  To  those  who  would 
like  to  specialize  along  those  lines,  the  author  would  recommend  "Mod- 
ern Rifle  Shooting  in  Peace,  War  and  Sport,"  by  Tippins  (Published  by 
J.  S.  Phillips,  121  Fleet  St.,  E.  C.  London). 

"Our  Military  Rifle  and  How  To  Use  It,"  by  Bowman  (Pablished 
by  ARMS  &  THE  MAN,  Washington,  D.  C.)  and  "Suggestions  To 
Military  Riflemen"  (Published  by  the  Franklin  Hudson  Pub.  Co.,  Kansas 
City,  Mo.)  contain  information  of  value  to  any  man  wishing  to  improve 
his  shooting. 

DESCRIPTION  AND   NOMENCLATURE   OF  THE   RIFLE.d) 

The  Receiver,  Fig.  i,  top  view,  Fig.  2,  right  side  view,  and  Fig. 
3,  front  end  view,  has  the  hole.  A,  called  the  zvell,  which  receives  the  bolt ; 
the  magazine  opening,  B ;   the  channel,   C,   for  the  top  locking  lug;   the 


cut  off  seat,  D;   the  cut-off  tltunib  piece  recess,  E;   ejector  pin   hole,  F; 
clip    slots,   G;    cocking    piece    groove,    H;    sear    nose    slot,    I  :    extracting 

(1 )  The    text    and    illustrations    of    the    rest    of   this    chapter    are    from    the    Ord- 
nance Department  pamphlet  on  the  subject. 


322 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 


cam,  J;  sear  joint  pin  hole,  K;  gas  escape  hole,  L;  recoil  lug,  M,  in  which 
is  the  hole  for   the   front  guard  screw;   the  recesses  for  the  holt  locking 


lugs,   N   N;    the   locking   cams,   O    O;   the   locking  shoulders,   P   P;    the 
safety  shoulder,  Q ;  and  the  cartridge  ramp,  R. 


Fig.  3. 


The   BoLTj  Fig.   4,  top  view,   Fig.  5, 

rear    view,    and    Fig.    6,    front    view,    has 

M  ^^^^  the    handle,    A ;    the    locking    lugs,    B,    B. 

which  sustain  the  shock  of  the  discharge,   the  one  on  top  beini^  slotted 

to  allow  the  passage  of  the  point  of  the  ejector;  the  safety  lug,  C,  which 

comes   into   play   only   in   the   event   of    the   locking   lugs   yielding   under 

powder    pressure;    the    extractor   collar   groove,    D;    extracting   cam,    E; 

sleeve  clearance,  F;  safety  lock  spindle  notch,  G;  sleeve  lock  notch,  H; 

firing   pin   hole,   I;    cocking    cam,   J;    cock   notch,    K;    extractor    tongue 

groove,  L;  the  rim,  M. 

Fig.  6. 
Fig.  5. 


USE,  DESCRIPTION  AND  MANAGEMENT  OF    323 

THE  RIFLE 

The   Sleeve   Lock,    Fig.    7,    left   end    view,   and    Fig.   8,   under    side 
view,  has  the  spindle,  A,  which  is  bored  out  to   receive  the  sleeve  lock 


Fig.  8. 


Fig.  9. 


Fig.  7. 


spring;  the  latch,  B;  and  the  sleeve 
lock  pin  groove,  C.  It  is  designed  to 
prevent  accidental  turning  of  the  sleeve 
when  the  bolt  is  drawn  back. 

The  Sleeve  Lock  Spring  and  Pin 
are  shown  in  Fig.  9. 

The  Firing  Pin,  Fig.  10,  consists  of  the  firing  pin  rod,  A,  and  the 
cocking  piece,  B,  which  are  made  separately,   the   former  being  screwed 


mmM 


into  the  latter  and  riveted  in  assembling;  the  length  of  the  rod  is  so 
adjusted  that  when  the  front  end  of  the  cocking  piece  bears  against  the 
interior  shoulder  of  the  sleeve  the  striker  point  will  project  the  proper 
distance  beyond  the  face  of  the  bolt.  Other  parts  are  the  knob,  C;  lug, 
D;  cocking  cam,  E;  nose,  F;  sear  notch,  G;  locking  shoulder,  H;  locking 
groove,  I ;  neck,  J ;  and  head,  K. 

The  Firing  Pin  Sleeve,  Fig.  11,  sectional  view,  fits  over  the  front  end 
of  the  firing  pin  and  the  rear  end  of  the  striker,  covering  the  joint  hole. 


■    Fig.  11 


Fig.  12. 


and    preventing   accidental    separation   of   the   firing   pin    and    striker;    its 
rear  end  forms  the  front  bearing  for  the  mainspring.  u 

The  Striker,  Fig.  12,  has  the  point.  A;  the  body,  B;  the  shoulder, 
C;  and  the  joint  hole,  D,  by  which  it  is  secured  to  the  firing  pm.  The 
annular  grooves  on  the  striker  retain  the  lubricating  oil  and  prevent 
the  accumulation  of  rust  thereon. 


324 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 


The  Mainspring  is  shown  in  Fig.  13. 

Fig.  13. 


The  Extractor,  Fig.  14,  inside  view,  Fig.  15,  top  view,  and  Fig. 
16,  front  end  view,  has  the  hook,  A,  by  which  the  cartridge  case  is  ex- 
tracted from  the  chamber,  the  tongue,  B,  which  rides  in  its  groove  at  the 

Fig.  14. 


Fig.  18'. 


front  end  of  the  bolt ;  the  lug,  C  C,  which  is  undercut  to  receive  ihe  ears 

on  the  lugs  of  vhe  extractor  collar;  the  gas  escape  hole,  D;  and  the  hack 

rest,  E,  which  is  curved  to  fit  the  circle  of  the  bolt. 

The   Extractor  Collar,   Fig.   17,  end  view,  and   Fig.   18,   side  view, 

has  the  ears,  A  A,  which  fit  in  the  undercuts  on  the  inside  of  the  extractor. 

by   which   means   and   with    the   assistance   of    the   extractor   tongue   and 

groove  the  extractor  is  held  in  place.     The  col- 
lar  is   bent   into   position   on   the   bolt   in   manu- 
facture, and  should  not  be  removed  unless  proper 
tools  are  at  hand  to  replace  it. 
The    Ejector,    Fig.    19, 
has    the   point.    A;    the    lieel, 
B ;   and  the  ejector  pin  hole, 
C.    It  is  hinged  on  the  ejector 
pin    in   its    recess    in   the   left 

side   of    the    receiver,    ejection    being    accomplished    by 

the  slotted  lug  on  the  bolt  coming  in  contact  with  the 

heel  when  the  bolt  is  drawn  to  the  rear. 

The  head  of  the  Ejector  Pin,  Fig.  20,  is  slotted 

for  the  purpose  of  providing  sufficient  tension  to  hold 

the  pin  in  its  place  during  the  process  of  assembling. 


Fig.  19. 


Fig.  20. 


USE,  DESCRIPTION  AND  MANAGEMENT  OF    2>2S 

THE  RIFLE 


Fig.  22. 


The  Safety  Lock,  Fig.  21,  rear  and  side  views,  consists  of  the  thumb 
piece,  A,  the  spindle,   B,  spring,  C,  and  spring  spindle,  D,  assembled  in 

manitfacture.  It  has  the  cam,  E ;  the 
locking  groove,  F;  the  cocking 
hiece  groove,  G ;  the  spring  spindle 
hole,  H;  and  the  bolt  clearance,  I. 
The  spring  and  spring  spindle  are 
shown  in  Fig. 
22;  the  latter, 
projecting  in- 
to its  groove  in  the  sleeve,  under 
the  action  of  the  spring,  prevents 
any  movement  of  the  safety  lock 
to  the  rear,  and  when  in  the  recesses  in  the  groove,  retains  the  safety  lock 
turned  either  to  the  right  or  left  or  in  the  vertical  position  for  dismount- 
ing bolt  mechanism.  The  words  "Safe"  and  "Ready"  impressed  on  oppo- 
site sides  of  the  thumb  piece  indicate  that  the  firing  mechanism  is  locked 
or  ready  for  firing. 

The  Guard,   of   which   the  body   of   the  magazine   forms   a   part,   is 
shown  in  Fig.  23,  top  view,  and  Fig.  24,  right  side  view.     Its  parts  are : 

Fie.  23. 


guard  hozv.  A;  front  tang,  B;  rear  tang,  C; 
front  guard  scrczc  stud,  D;  magazine  zcalls, 
E;  rear  end  of  magazine,  F;  floor  plate  catch 
pin   hole,  G;  front  guard  screw  hole,  H;   rear 


326 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 


guard  screw  hole,  I;  trigger  slot,  J;  floor  plate  hig  slot,  K;  floor  catch 
spring  hole,  L;  floor  plate  catch  slot,  M;  ramp,  N;  and  the  lightening 
cuts,  O. 

The  Floor  Plate,  Fig.  25,  inside  view,  and  Fig.  26,  sectional  view, 
has  the  tenon,  A,  which  fits  into  a  groove  at  the  front  end  of  the  maga- 
zine  and   with   1he   assistance   of   the   floor   plate  catch    retains   the   floor 

Fig;.  25. 


Fig.  30. 


(T  F 

plate  securely  in  its  place  at  the  bottom  of  the  magazine ;  the  lug,  B,  which 
is  slotted  to  receive  the  floor  plate  catch  and  has  a  tenon  on  its  front  end 
which  fits  into  a  slot  in  the  magazine ;   the  cavity,  C,  through  which  the 
'floor  plate  catch  is  released  by  means  of  the  end 
of  a  bullet;   the  magazine  spring  recess,  D,  and 
the  magazine  spring  seat,  E. 

The  Floor  Plate  Catch,  Fig.  27,  hinges  on 
Fia-.  ^7.  the    Floor    Plate 

Catch    Pin,    Fig.   28, 

and  is  operated  by  the 

Floor    Plate    Catch 

Fig.  28.         Fig.  29.  Spring,   Fig.   29.     Its 

function    is    to    retain 

the   floor   plate   in   its 

scat. 

The  Magazine  Spring  is  shown  in  Fig.  30; 

the  smaller  end  slides  into  the  undercuts  on  the 

follower,  and  the  larger  end  fits  in  the  same  wav 

into  the  undercuts  in  the  floor  plate. 


USE,  DESCRIPTION  AND  MANAGEMENT  OF    327 

THE  RIFLE 

The  Follower,  Fig.  31,  top  view,  and  Fig.  32,  right  side  view,  has 
the  rib,  A,  which  serves  to  locate  the  cartridges  in  the  magazine  and  guides 
the  last  cartridge  into  the  chamber;  the  front  stop  for  the  magazine  spring. 

Fig.  31. 


Fig.  i2. 


X  D 

B;  the  rear  stop  for  magazine  spring,  C,  and  the  lugs,  D,  in  which  are  the 

undercuts  for  the  magazine  spring. 

The  Cut-off,  Fig.  ZZ,  side  view,  Fig.  34,  rear  view,  and  Fig.  35,  outer 
edge,  has  the  thumb  piece,  A;  body,  B;  magazine  fire  groove,  C;  dis- 
mounting groove,  D;  cut-off  spindle  hole,  E;  cut-off  spring  spindle  hole, 
F;   cut-off  spindle  screw  hole,  G,  and  the  serrature,  H.     The  words  on 

opposite  sides 
of  the  thumb 
piece  indicate  to 
the  firer  whether 
the  magazine  is 
When    the    cut-off 


Fig.  33. 


Fig.  34. 


Fig.  35. 


-on      or    -'off." 

thumb  piece  is  turned  down,  indicat- 
ing "off,"  and  the  bolt  is  drawn  to 
the  rear,  the  rear  end  of  the  slotted 
locking  lug  stops  against  the  project- 
ing front  end  of  the  cut-off  body.  The  piece  is  then  ready  for  single 
loading.  When  the  cut-off  thumb  piece  is  turned  up,  indicating  "on,"  and 
the  bolt  is  drawn  to  the  rear,  tke  rear  end  of  the  slotted  locking  lug  stops 
against  the  shoulder  at  the  rear  end  of  the  magazine  fire  groove.  The 
piece  is  then  ready  for  loading  from  the  magazine.  When  the  cut-off 
thumb  piece  is  in  the  intermediate  position,  the  dismounting  groove,  D, 
permits  the  bolt  to  be  drawn  entirely  out  of  the  receiver. 

The  CuT-OFF  Spindle,  Fig.  36,  has  the  cut-off  spindle  screw  groove, 
A,  and  the  dismounting  groove,  B. 


328 


CHAPTER  XVI 11. 


The  Cut-off  Spindle  Screw,  Fig.  37,  goes  through  the  cut-off  from 
the  outer  edge  of  the  thumb  piece,  its  end  fitting  into  the  groove  in  the 
cut-off  spindle. 

Fig.  36.  Fig.  i7.  Fig.  38.  Fig.  39. 


The  Cut-off  Spring,  Fig.  38,  and  its  Spindle,  Fig.  39,  retain  the 
cut-off  in  its  seat  in  the  receiver  with  the  thumb  piece  turned  up  for 
loading  from  the  magazine,  down  for  single  loading,  or  in  the  inter- 
mediate position  for  permitting  the  removal  of  the  bolt.  The  spindle 
head  works  in  a  groove  in  left  side  of  receiver,  having  three  small 
notches  corresponding  to  the  above  positions  of  the  cut-off. 

The  Trigger,  Fig.  40,   right   side  view,   is  hinged   in   its   slot  in  the 


sear  by  the  Trigger 
Pin,  Fig.  41.  It  has 
the  finger  piece,  A ;  the 
bearing,  B ;  trigger  pin 
hole,  C;  heel,  D ;  and  the 
stop,  E. 

The    Front    Sight, 
Fig.  42,  is  secured  in  its 

Fig.  44. 


Fig.  42. 


Fig.  43. 


Fig.  45. 


slot  in  the  front  sight  movable  stud  by  the  Front  Sight  Pin,  Fig.  43 ;  the 
pin  is  tapering,  and  its  small  end  is  driven  in  from  the  right  and  the  ends 
upset  to  prevent  accidental  removal. 

The  Front  Sight  Fixed  Stud  and  Front  "Sight  Movable  Stud,  with 
Front  Sight  in  place,  are  shown  assembled.  Fig.  44,  right  side  view,  and 
Fig.  45,   front   view.     Tbc   Front   Sight   Fixed   Stud,   A,   has   a   slot,   B, 


USE,  DESCRIPTION  AND  MANAGEMENT  OF 

THE  RIFLE 


329 


Fig.  46. 


which,  bearing  on  a  lug  on  the  upper  side  of  the  barrel,  prevents  lateral  dis- 
placement of  the  stud ;  and  hole,  C,  for  the  Front  Sight  Stud  Pin,  which 
prevents  longitudinal  displacement  of  the  stud.  The  Front  Sight  Mov- 
able Stud,  D,  has  the  front  sight  pin  hole,  E.  It  is  held  by  the  undercut 
slot  in  the  front  sight  stud  and  secured  from  lateral  displacement  by  the 
Front  Sight  Screw,  F.  The  recess  for  this  screw  is  not  drilled  in  the 
movable  stud  until  the  rifle  has  been  targeted  and  the  correct  position 
of  the  movable  stud  determined.  The  rear  face,  G,  of  both  the  front 
sight  fixed  stud  and  front  sight  movable  stud  is  serrated  to  prevent  any 
reflection  of  light  from  this  surface  interfering  with  the  aiming. 

The  Rear  Sight  Fixed  Base,  Fig.  46,  rear  end  view,  and  Fig.  47, 
right  side  view,  has  the  holes,  A  and  B,  for  the  base  pin  and  base  spline, 

respectively,        b  y  Fig.  47. 

which  it  is  firmly 
secured  to  the 
barrel  and  lateral 
and  longitudinal 
movement  pre- 
vented ;  the  under- 
cut, D,  for  the 
tenon  of  the  hand 
guard;  the  lighten- 
nig  cuts,  E;  the 
barrel  hole,  F;  the 
pivot  lug,  G,  for  the  movable  base;  the 
undercut,  H,  for  the  lip  on  the  rear  end  of 
the  movable  base ;  the  undercut,  I,  for  the 
windage  screw  and  the  lip  on  the  front  end 
of  the  movable  base;  the  lug,  J,  on  the  top 
of  which  are  two  zero  marks  for  the  wind 
guage  graduations ;  and  the  chamfer,  K, 
the  seat  for  the  windage  screw  collar.  This 
chamfer  is  carried  to  the  rear  to  permit  of 
the  assembling  of  the  fixed  base  and  the 
windage  screw.  On  the  left  side  of  the 
front  lug  the  chamfer  corresponding  to  K 
is  merely  a  conical  recess  for  the  head  of  the  windage  screw. 

The  Base  Spline  locates  and  prevents  the  base  from  turning  on  the 
barrel. 


330 


CHAPTER  XVIIL 


The  Base  Pin,  similar  to  the  base  spline,  prevents  longitudinal  move- 
ment of  the  base  on  the  barrel. 

The  Movable  Base,  Fig.  48,  top  view,  and  Fig.  4g,  right  side  view, 
has  the  ears,  A,  in  which  are  the  holes,  B,  for  the  joint  pin,  which  serves 


Fig.  48. 


Fig.  49. 


spring  seat,  F,  which  is  undercut  to  admit 
the  lip  on  the  front  end  of  the  base 
spring,  the  lip,  G,  in  which  is  a  worm  gear 
for  the  engagement  of  the  windage  screw; 
the  piz'ot  hole,  H,  for  the  pivot  lug  on  the 
fixed  base ;  and  the  shoulders,  I,  on  which 
the  front  end  of  the  leaf  rests  when  down. 
The  liole,  K,  is  made  for  convenience  in 
manufacture. 

The  Leaf,  Fig.  50,  top  view  (when 
down),  and  Fig.  51,  right  side  view,  has 
the  joint.  A,  in  which  is  the  joint  pin 
hole;  the  rib,  B;  the  undercut,  C,  for  the 
drift  slide  and  the  sighting  notch,  D.  The 
free  end  of  the  base  spring  bears  against 
the  lower  end  of  the  leaf  and 
Fig.  52.  maintains  it  in  either  its  lowered 
D  or  raised  position.     The  leaf   is 

graduated  from  100  to  2,850 
yards.  The  lines  extending 
across  one  or  both  branches  of 
the  leaf  are  100-yard  divisions, 
the  longer  of  the  short  lines  are 
50-yard  and  the  shorter  lines 
25-yard  divisions. 


Fig.  50. 


— 

1 

27 

?e 

-C 

25 

24 

~~ 

-^ 

23 

21 

— 

— 

[21 

20 

— 

19 

18 

:=- 

— 

17 

16 

=- 

-£ 

15 

14 

—  _ 

-^ 

13 

12 

^— 

~ 

II 

10 

9 

a 

7 
5 
3 

1 

i 

as  a  hinge  for  the 
leaf  ;  the  wind  guage 
graduations,  C,  each 
point  of  which  cor- 
responds to  a  lateral 
deviation  of  four  in- 
ches for  each  100 
yards;  the  lip,  D, 
which  fits  in  the  un- 
dercut in  the  rear 
end  of  the  fixed 
base ;  the  spring 
open  i  n  g,    E ;    the 

Fig.  51. 


>B 


Fig.  53. 


Fig.  54. 


The  Drift  Slide,  Fig.  52,  top  view  (leaf  down) 
has  the  peephole,  A ;  the  field  view,  B ;  the  drift  slide 
pin,  C,  riveted  to  the  slide  in  manufacture;  and  the 
peep  notches,  D.  The  lines  on  either  side  of  the 
peephole  and  lower  peep  notch  enable  the  drift  slide 
to  1)6  accurately  set  at  any  desired  graduation  on 
the  leaf. 

As  the  slide  is  moved  up  or  down  on  the  leaf 
the  drift  slide  moves  with  it  and  at  the  same  time 
has  a  lateral  movement  in  the  undercut  between  the 
branches  of  the  leaf,  thus  automatically  correcting 
for  drift.  This  mxovement  corrects  for  all  drift  up 
to  600  yards,  but  for  only  part  of  the  drift  beyond 
that  range. 

With  the  leaf  up,  ranges  from  100  to  2,350 
yards  can  be  obtained  through  the  peephole;  from 
100  to  2,450  yards  through  the  lower  peep  notch  at 
the  bottom  of  field  view;  and  from  1,400  to  2,750 
yards  through  the  upper  peep  notch  in  the  upper 
edge  of  the  drift  slide. 

The  2,850-yard  range  is  obtained  through  the 
sighting  notch  in  the  upper  end  of  the  leaf. 

With  the  leaf  down  and  using  the  open  notch  in 
slide  cap  the  sights  are  set  for  530  j'^ards  or  battle  line 
firing  for  the  down  position  of  the  slide. 

The  Stock  is  shown  in  Fig.  53,  top  view, 'and 
54,  right  side  view.     The  parts  are  the  hntt,  A ; 
small,  B;   magazine  well,   C;   barrel  bed,  D;   air 
chamber,  E,  which  reduces  the  charring  effect  of 
a   heated   barrel   on    the    stock;    small   butt  plate 
screw  hole  and  scat  for  the  butt  plate  tang,  F; 
butt   szvivel  plate   seat,   G;    mortise  for   receiver 
tang    lug    and    hole    for    rear   guard    screw,    H; 
mortise   for  scar   and   slot   for   trigger,   l;cut-off 
thumb-piece   recess,  J:    mortise  for  recoil  on   re- 
ceiver, K;  bed  for  fixed  base,  L;  grasp- 
ing   grooves,    N ;    shoulder    for    lower 
band,    O;     bed    for    band    spring,     P; 
shoulder  for   upper   band,   Q ;    channels 
for   decreasing   zveight,   R;    upper   band 


332 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 


screw  hole,  S ;  and  the  stock  screw  hole,  T.  The  large  hole  in  the  butt  is 
for  decreasing  weight,  and  the  smaller  one  is  a  pocket  for  the  combination 
oiler  and  thong  case. 

The  initials  of  the  inspector  and  the  year  of  fabrication  are  stamped 
on  the  left  side  in  the  rear  of  the  cut-off  thumb  piece  recess. 

The  Hand  Guard,  Fig.  55,  right  side,  and  Fig.  56,  bottom  or  inner 

Fig.  55. 


Fig.  56. 


Fig.  57. 


surface,  has  the  szvell,  A,  for  the  protection  of  the  rear  sight;  the  shoulder, 
B,  for  the  lower  band;  the  shoulder,  C,  for  the  upper  hand;  the  rear 
tenon,  D,  which  enters  the  undercut  in  the  fixed  base;  the  front 
tenon,  E,  which  enters  the  undercut  in  the  upper  band ;  the  clear- 
ance F,  for  the  zvindage  screzv  knob;  air  chamber,  H,  and 
recess,  I,  for  the  Hand  Guard  Clips  which  are  shown  in  Fig. 
57.  The  hole  shown  in  the  cut  near  the  rear  end  of  the  inner 
surface  is  made  for  convenience  in  manufacture. 

The  Butt  Plate  is  represented  in  Fig.  58.     The  parts  are  toe,  A; 
tang,  B;  cap  hole,  C;  cap  ears,  I),  through  which  are  the  cap  pin  holes; 


Fig.  58. 


Fig.  59. 


USE,  DESCRIPTION  AND  MANAGEMENT  OF    333 

THE  RIFLE 

spring  lug,  E;  large  butt  plate  screw  hole,  F;  and  small  butt  plate  screw 
hole,  G.  A  notch  is  cut  into  the  edge  of  the  cap  hole  to  facilitate  the 
opening  of  the  cap.  For  this  purpose  the  flange  of  the  head  of  a  car- 
tridge case  can  be  used. 

The  Butt  Plate  Cap, 
Fig.  60,  has  the  cap  pin  hole, 
A,  and  the  thumb  notch,  B. 
The  cap  is  hinged  between  the 
ears  of  the  butt  plate  on  the 
cap  pin  and  is  retained  either 
closed  or  open  by  the  free  end 
of  the  Cap  Spring,  Fig.  59, 
which  bears  on  the  heel,  C. 

The  Butt  Swivel  in- 
cludes the  plate,  swivel,  and 
pin  assembled. 

The  Butt  Swivel  Plate, 
Fig.6i,  has  the  holes.  A,  for  the  swivel  plate  screws;   B   for  the  swivel, 
and  C  for  the  swJvel  pin. 


Fig.  60. 


Fig,  61. 


Fig.  62 


The  Butt  Swivel,  Fig.  62,  is 
retained  in  the  plate  by  the  Butt 
Swivel  Pin,  Fig.  63a. 

The    Upper    Band,    Fig.    63, 
has  the  bayonet  lug,  A ;  the  ears, 
B,  in  which  are  the  holes  for  the 
stacking  swivel  screw;  the  upper  band  screw  hole,  C,  and  the  undercut.  D, 
for  the  front  tenon  on  the  hand  guard. 


334 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 


The   Stacking   Swivel,   Fig.   64,    is   hinged   by   the   lug,  A,   between 
the  ears,  B,  of  the  upper  band,  on  the  Stacking  Swivel  Screw, 


Fiff.  64. 


Fig.  65. 


The  L  0  w  ER  Band 
Swivel,  Fig.  65,  is  hinged 
by  its  lug.  A,  between  the 
ears  of  the  lower  band,  on 
the  Lower  Band  Swivel 
Screw. 

The  Lower  Band, 
Fig.  66,  has  the  ears,  A, 
and  the  swivel  screwholes, 
B ;  the  front  or  upper  end 
is  designated  by  the  letter 
U.  The  lower  band  and 
swivel  are  split  between  the 

ears  in  order  to  give  better  adjustment  to  the  stock  and  hand  guard  and 

permit  removal  ot  the  band  without  marring  the  stock. 


Fig.  66. 


The  Lower  Band  Spring,  Fig.  67, 
has  the  notch,  A,  which  holds  the  band 
in  place,  and  the  spindle,  B,  which  re- 
tains the  spring  in  the  stock. 

The  Bayonet,  Model  of  1905,  is 
shown  in  Fig.  68,  right  side  view,  with 
guard  and  tang,  cross-sectioned,  and 
right  grip  removed,  and  in  Fig.  69,  upper 
or  back  view,  with  blade  cut  off  a  short 
distance  from  the  guard. 

The  blade.  A,  the  tang,  B,  and  the 
pommel,  C,  are  forged  in  one  piece;  the 

Fig.  67. 


lllllllllllllliriM 


juau 


iftj 


A         A 
front  or  lower  edge  is  sharp  along  its  entire  length  and  the  back 
for  a  distance  of  5  inches  from  the  point. 

Immediately   in   the   rear   of   the  guard,   D,   the   tank   swells 
and  is  recessed  to  receive  the  scabbard  catch,  E,  and  the  bayonet 


B 


Fig.  68. 


Spring,  F.    The  swell  in  the  tang  also  serves  as  a  seat  for 
the  guard  which  is  riveted  to  the  blade  in  manufacture. 

The  opening  in  the  tang  and  pommel  for  the  bayonet 
catch,  H,  connects  with  the  recess  in  the  swell  of  the  tang 
and  allows  the  front  end  of  the  bayonet  catch  to  enter  its 
seat  in  the  scabbard  catch.  The  undercut  groove,  I,  receives 
the  stud  on  the  upper  band  when  the  bayonet  is  fixed,  the 
bayonet  being  held  in  place  by  the  bayonet  catch  pro- 
jecting through  the  hole,  K. 

The  Bayonet  Guard,  Fig.  70,  rear  view,  has  the 
barrel  hole,  A;  the  mortise,  B,  for  the  blade;  the  cut,  C, 
for  the  scabbard  catch  and  scabbard  hook ;  and  the  clear- 
ance cut,  D,  for  the  scabbard  hook.  There  are  also  two 
holes  for  the  bayonet  guard  rivets  not  shown  in  cut,  by 
means  of  which  the  guard  is  riveted  to  the  blade. 

The  Bayonet  Catch,  Fig.  71,  side  view,  has  the  point, 
A;  the  hole,  B,  which  is  a  clearance  for  the  bayonet  grip 
screw;  and  the  hook,  C,  which,  projecting  from  the  hole, 
K,  in  the  pommel,  engages  the  stud  on  the  upper  band  and 
retains  the  bayonet  in  its  place  on  the  rifle. 

The  Bayonet  Scabbard  Catch,  Fig.  72,  side  view, 
has  the  thumb  piece.  A;  the  hook,  B,  which  retains  the 
bayonet  in  the  scabbard  by  engaging  the  scabbard  hook ; 
and  the  hole,  C,  which  recei^  es  the  point  of  the  bayonet 
catch. 

Fig.  70. 


Fier.  73.  Fisr.  74. 


'The  Bayonet  Scabbard,  Fig.  '^■t^, 
side  view,  Fig.  74,  edge  view,  and  Fig. 
75,  cross  section  of  upper  end,  has  the 
wooden  body,  A,  made  in  two  pieces  and 
ghied  together;  the  rawhide  cover,  B, 
which  increases  the  strength  of  the  scab- 
bard ;  the  leather  cover,  C ;  the  mouth- 
piece, D,  riveted  to  the  body  by  the  rivets, 
E  E;  the  mouthpiece  hooks,  F  F,  either 
of  which  by  its  engagement  with  the  hook 
of  the  scabbard  catch  on  the  bayonet  re- 
tains the  bayonet  in  its  place  in  the  scab- 
bard ;  the  scabbard  hook,  G,  attached  to 
the  body  by  the  hook  rivet,  H,  which 
passes    through    the    inside    and    outside 


zvashers,  I  and  K,  and  the  stop  washer, 
L;  the  fastener,  M,  and  the  drain  eyelet, 
N.  An  offset  on  the  lower  end  of  the 
hook,  traveling  in  its  recess  in  the  stop 
washer,  limits  the  oscillation  of  the  hook 
to  50  degrees  on  each  side  of  the  vertical. 
Note. — The  cavalry  is  equipped  with 
the  U.  S.  Magazine  Rifle,  Model  of  1903,. 
but  without  the  bayonet  or  bayonet  scab- 
bard. 


USE,  DESCRIPTION  AND  MANAGEMENT  OF    337 

THE  RIFLE 


APPENDAGES  AND  ACCESSORIES. 
The  Oiler  and  Thong  Case,  Fig.  76,  is  carried  in  the  butt  of  the 
stock.     It  consists  of  a  nickel-plated  brass  tube,  about  6  inches  long  and 
^  inch  in  diameter,  divided  transversely,  near  the  center,  by  a  partition, 


Fig.  1^. 


B^  F  A' 

with  both  ends  fitted  with  screw  caps.  In  one  section  is  carried  a  small 
supply  of  sperm  oil,  and  in  the  other  the  thong  and  brush  used  for  cleaning 
the  bore  of  the  rifle.  The  cap  on  the  oil  section  is  fitted  with  a  wire, 
flattening  at  its  point,  which  reaches  to  the  bottom  of  the  section  and  is 
used  for  applying  oil,  a  drop  or  more  at  a  time.     The  oil  is  only  for  the 


Fig.  77. 


B 


|— T] 


G 


IfiBdUU 


D 


/ 

H 


lubrication  of  working  parts.  The  cap  is  also  provided  with  a  leather 
washer  to  prevent  leakage.  The  cap  on  the  thong  section  has  a  leather 
pad  on  its  outer  surface,  which  prevents  the  noise  that  would  result  from 


Fig.  78 


the  oiler  striking  the  butt  plate  cap.  The  oiler  should  always  be  inserted 
in  the  stock  so  that  the  leather-tipped  cap  will  be  next  to  the  butt  plate 
cap.     The  parts  as  shown  in  cut  are:  Oiler,  A;  thong  case,  B;  oiler  cap, 


338 


CHAPTER  XVIIL 


C;  collar,  D,  into  which  the  cap  is  screwed;  washer,  E;  dropper,  F,  and 
thong   case  cap,  G. 

The  Thong  and  Brush  are  shown  in  Fig.  yy.  The  thong  tip.  A, 
into  which  the  brush,  B,  is  screwed,  is  provided  with  a  rag  slot,  C;  the; 
thong  is  knotted  in  the  liole,  D,  in  the  tip,  and  also  in  the  hole,  E,  in  the 
weight.  In  cleaning  the  bore  by  means  of  the  thong,  the  brush  or  rag 
should  always  be  drawn  from  the  muzzle  toward  the  breech. 

The  Cleaning  Rod,  Fig.  78,  is  made  of  brass  rod,  0.25  inch  in 
diameter,  and  of  sufficient  length  to  extend  through  the  barrel.  It  has 
the  handle.  A;  the  knob,  B;  the  steel  collar,  C,  riveted  to  the  rod,  and  the 
brass  sleeve,  D,  pinned  to  the  rod.  The  handle  swivels  on  the  rod  be- 
tween the  collar  and  the  sleeve. 

The  Front  Sight  Cover,  Fig.  79,  right  side  view,  and  Fig.  80,  front 
view,  is  made  of  sheet  steel. 

Fig.  79.  Fig.  80. 


The  Screw-driver,  Fig.  81,  has  the 
large  blade,  A ;  the  small  blade,  B ;  the 
spur,  C,  and  the  pin,  D.  The  large  blade 
should    be    used    for    the    large    butt    plate 


USE,  DESCRIPTION  AND  MANAGEMENT  OF    339 

THE  RIFLE 

screw,  the  butt  plate  cap  screw,  and  the  guard  screws;  the  small  blade  for 
all  other  screws,  except  the  cut-ofif  spindle  screw,  for  which  the  spur 
should  be  used.  The  pin  serves  as  a  drift  in  removing  the  butt  plate  cap, 
ejector,  floor  plate  catch,  sear  joint  and  trigger  pins,  and  the  band  spring. 

THE  ASSEMBLED   PARTS   AND   THEIR   OPERATIONS 

Most  of  the  operating  parts  may  be  included  under  the  Bolt 
Mechanism  and  Magazine  Mechanism. 

The  Bolt  Mechanism  consists  of  the  bolt,  sleeve,  sleeve  lock, 
extractor,  extractor  collar,  cocking  piece,  safety  lock,  firing  pin,  firing 
pin  sleeve,  striker,  and  mainspring.  It  is  shown,  assembled,  in  Fig.  82. 
The  parts  shown  in  the  cut  are  handle,  A ;  sleeve,  B ;  safety  lock,  C ; 
cocking  piece,  D;  safety  hig,  E;  extractor,  F;  extractor  collar,  G;  locking 
lugs,  H ;  extractor  tongue  groove,  I,  and  gas  escape  hole,  J. 

The  bolt  moves  backward  and  forward  and  rotates  in  the  well  of  the 
receiver ;  it  carries  a  cartridge,  either  from  the  magazine,  or  one  placed 
by  hand  in  front  of  it,  into  the  chamber  and  supports  its  head  when  fired. 

The  sleeve  unites  the  parts  of  the  bolt  mechanism,  and  its  rotation 
with  the  bolt  is  prevented  b}^  the  lugs  on  its  sides  coming  in  contact  with 
the  receiver. 

The  hook  of  the  extractor  engages  in  the  groove  of  the  cartridge 
case  and  retains  the  head  of  the  latter  in  the  countersink  of  the  bolt  until 
the  case  is  ejected. 

The  safety  lock,  when  turned  to  the  left,  is  inoperative ;  when 
turned  to  the  right — zvhich  can  only  be  done  when  the  piece  is  cocked — 
the  point  of  the  spindle  enters  its  notch  in  the  bolt  and  locks  the  bolt; 
at  the  same  time  its  cam  forces  the  cocking  piece  slightly  to  the  rear, 
out  of  contact  with  the  sear,  and  locks  the  firing  pin. 

The  bolt  mechanism  operates  as  follows  :  To  open  the  bolt,  raise  the 
handle  until  it  comes  in  contact  with  the  left  side  of  the  receiver  and 
pull  directly  to  the  rear  until  the  top  locking  lug  strikes  the  cut-off. 

Raising  the  handle  rotates  the  bolt  and  separates  the  locking  lugs 
from  their  locking  shoulders  in  the  receiver,  with  which  they  have  been 
brought  into  close  contact  by  the  powder  pressure.  This  rotation  causes 
the  cocking  cam  of  the  bolt  to  force  the  firing  pin  to  the  rear,  drawing 
the  point  of  the  striker  into  the  bolt,  rotation  of  the  firing  pin  being 
prevented  by  the  lug  on  the  cocking  piece  projecting,  through  the  slot 
in  the  sleeve,  into  its  groove  in  the  receiver.  As  the  sleeve  remains 
longitudinally  stationary  with  reference  to  the  bolt,  this  rearward  motion 


340 


CHAPTER  XVIIL 


Fig.  82 


of  the  firing  pin,  and  consequently  of 
the  striker,  will  start  the  compression 
of  the  mainspring,  since  the  rear  end  of 
the  latter  bears  against  the  front 
of  the  latter  bears  against  the  front 
end  of  the  barrel  of  the  sleeve  and  its 
front  end  against  the  rear  end  of  the 
firing  pin  sleeve. 

When  the  bolt  handle  strikes  the 
receiver,  the  locking  lugs  have  been 
disengaged,  the  firing  pin  has  been 
forced  to  the  rear  until  the  sear  notch 
of  the  cocking  piece  has  passed  the 
sear  nose,  the  cocking  piece  nose  has 
entered  the  cock  notch  in  the  rear  end 
of  the  bolt,  the  sleeve  lock  has  engaged 
its  notch  in  the  bolt,  and  the  main- 
spring has  been  almost  entirely  com- 
pressed. 

During  the  rotation  of  the  bolt  a 
rear  motion  has  been  imparted  to  it 
b}'-  its  extracting  cam  coming  in  con- 
tact with  the  extracting  cam  of  the 
receiver,  so  that  the  cartridge  case  will 
be  started   from  the  chamber. 

The  bolt  is  then  drawn  directly 
to  the  rear,  the  parts  being  retained 
in  position  by  the  cocking  piece  nose 
remaining  in  the  cock  notch  and  locked 
by  the  sleeve  lock  engaging  its  notch 
in  the  bolt. 

To  close  the  bolt,  push  the  handle 
forward  until  the  extracting  cam  on 
the  bolt  bears  against  the  extracting 
cam  on  the  receiver,  thereby  unlocking 
the  sleeve  from  the  bolt,  and  turn  the 
handle  down.  As  the  handle  is  turned 
down  the  cams  of  the  locking  lugs 
bear  against  the  locking  shoulders  in 
the    receiver,    and    the    bolt    is    forced 


Fig.   83 


Fig.  84 


342 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 


slightly  forward  into  its  closed  position.  As  all  movement  of  the  firing 
pin  is  prevented  by  the  sear  nose  engaging  the  sear  notch  of  the  cocking 
piece,  this  forward  movement  of  the  bolt  completes  the  compression  of 
the  mainspring,  seats  the  cartridge  in  the  chamber,  and,  in  single  loading, 
forces  the  hook  of  the  extractor  into  the  groove  of  the  cartridge  case. 
In  loading  from  the  magazine  the  hook  of  the  extractor,  rounded  at  its 
lower  edge,  engages  in  the  groove  of  the  top  cartridge  as  it  rises  from  the 
magazine  under  the  action  of  the  follower  and  magazine  spring. 

The  position  then  occupied  by  the  parts  is  shown  in  Fig.  83  and  Fig. 
84,  and  the  piece  is  ready  to  fire. 

To  pull  the  trigger,  the  finger  piece  must  be  drawn  to  the  rear  until 
contact  with  the  receiver  is  transferred  -from  its  bearing  to  the  heel, 
which  gives  a  creep  to  the  trigger,  and  then  until  the  sear  nose  is  with- 
drawn from  in  front  of  the  cocking  piece. 

Just  before  the  bolt  is  drawn  fully  to  the  rear,  the  top  locking  lug 
strikes  the  heel  of  the  ejector,  throwing  its  point  suddenly  to  the  right 
in  the  lug  slot.  As  the  bolt  moves  fully  to  the  rear,  the  rear  face  of  the 
cartridge  case  strikes  against  the  ejector  point  and  the  case  is  ejected, 
slightly  upward  and  to  the  right,  from  the  receiver. 

Double  loading  from  the  magazine  is  prevented  by  the  extractor  en- 
gaging the  cartridge  case  as  soon  is  it  rises  from  the  magazine  and  hold- 
ing its  head  against  the  face  of  the  bolt  until  ejected. 

It  will  be  noted  that  in  this  system  of  bolt  mechanism  the  compres- 
sion of  the  mainspring,  the  seating  of  the  cartridge  m  and  the  starting  of 
the  empty  case  from  the  chamber  are  entirely  cone  by  the  action  of  cams. 

The  piece  may  be  cocked  either  by  raising 
the  bolt  handle  until  it  strikes  the  left  side  of 
the  receiver  and  then  immediately  turning  it 
down  or  by  pulling  the  cocking  piece  directly 
to  the  rear. 

In  firing,  unless  the  bolt  handle  is  turned 
fully  down  the  cam  on  the  cocking  piece  will 
strike  the  cocking  cam  on  the  bolt,  and  the 
en.ergy  of  the  mainspring  will  be  expended  in 
closing  the  bolt,  instead  of  on  the  primer; 
this  prevents  the  possibility  of  a  cartridge 
being  fired  until  the  bolt  is  fully  closed. 

The  opening  and  closing  of  the  bolt 
should  each  be  done  bv  one  continuous  motion. 


Fig.  85 


G— 


USE,  DESCRIPTION  AND  MANAGEMENT  OF    343 

THE  RIFLE 


---G 


The  Magazine  Mechanism  includes  the  floor  plate,  follower,  maga- 
zine spring,  and  cnt-off. 

Fig.  85  represents  a  cross  section  through  the  ejector  with  the 
magazine  loaded.  The  parts  shown  are  receiver,  A  ;  holt,  B  ;  firing  pin, 
C;  ejector,  D;  clip  slots,  E;  bolt  locking  lug  channels,  F;  magazine,  G; 
follower,  H;  magazine  spring,  I;  and  floor  plate,  ]. 

Fig.  86  shows  a  cross  section  through  the  magazine  with  the  maga- 
zine empty,  and  with   cut-off  "on,"   shown   in   projection.     The  parts   are 

receiver,  A  ;  bolt,  B  ;  firing  pin,  C  ;  cut-off,  D  ; 
rear  lug  slot,  E;  bolt  locking  lug  channels, 
F;  magazine,  G;  follower,  H ;  magazine 
spring,  I ;  and  floor  plate,  J. 

To  charge  the  magazine,  see  that  the 
cut-off  is  turned  up  showing  "on,"  draw  the 
bolt  fully  to  the  rear,  insert  the  cartridge 
from  a  clip,  or  from  the  hand,  and  close  the 
bolt.  To  charge  the  magazine  from  a  clip, 
place  either  end  of  a  loaded  clip  in  its  seat  in 
the  receiver  and,  with  the  thumb  of  the  right 
hand,  press  the  cartridges  down  into  the  maga- 
zine until  the  top  cartridge  is  caught  by  the 
right  edge  of  the  receiver.  The  manner  in 
which  the  cartridges  arrange  themselves  in 
the  magazine  and  the  position  of  the  follower  and  compressed  magazine 
spring  are  shown  in  Fig.  85.  The  cartridge  ramp  guides  the  bullet  and 
cartridge  case  into  the  chamber.  The  magazine  can  be  filled,  if  partly 
filled,  by  inserting  cartridges  one  by  one. 

Pushing  the  bolt  forward,  after  charging  the  magazine,  ejects 
the  clip. 

When  the  cut-off  is  turned  down,  the  magazine  is  "off."  The  bolt 
can  not  be  drawn  fully  back,  and  its  front  end  projecting  over  the  rear 
end  of  the  upper  cartridge  holds  it  dowui  in  the  magazine  below  the 
action  of  the  bolt.  The  magazine  mechanism  then  remains  inoperative, 
and  the  arm  can  be  used  as  a  single-loader,  the  cartridges  in  the  magazine 
being  held  in  reserve.  The  arm  can  readily  be  used  as  a  single-loader  with 
the  magazine  empty. 

When  the  cut-off  is  turned  up,  the  magazine  is  "on ;"  the  bolt  can  be 
drawn  fully  to  the  rear,  permitting  the  top  cartridge  to  rise  high  enough 
to  be  caught  by  the  bolt  in  its  forward  movement.  As  the  bolt  is  closed 
this  cartridge  is  pushed  forward  into  the  chamber,  being  held  up  during 


344 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 


its  passage  by  the  pressure  of  those  below.    The  last  one  in  the  magazine 
is  held  up  by  the  follower,  the  rib  on  which  directs  it  into  the  chamber. 

In  magazine  fire,  after  the  last  cartridge  has  been  fired  and  the  bolt 
drawn  fully  to  the  rear,  the  follower  rises  and  holds  the  bolt  open  to 
show  that  the  magazine  is  empty. 

PRECAUTIONS 

If  it  is  desired  to  carrj^  the  piece  cocked,  with  a  cartridge  in  the 
chamber,  the  bolt  mechanism  should  be  secured  by  turning  the  safety 
lock  to  the  right.  Under  no  circumstances  should  the  firing  pin  be  let 
down  by  hand  on  a  cartridge  in  the  chamber. 

To  obtain  positive  ejection,  and  to  insure  the  bolt  catching  the  top 
cartridge  in  magazine,  when  loading  from  the  magazine,  the  bolt  must 
be  drawn  fully  to  the  rear  in  opening  it. 

When  the  bolt  is  closed,  or  slightl}^  forward,  the  cut-off  may  be 
turned  up  or  down,  as  desired.  When  the  bolt  is  in  its  rearmost  posi- 
tion, to  pass  from  loading  from  the  magazine  to  single  loading  it  is 
necessary  to  force  the  top  cartridge  or  followed  below  the  reach  of  the 
bolt,  to  push  the  bolt  slightly  forward  and  to  turn  the  cut-off  down, 
showing  "off." 

In  case  of  a  misfire  it  is  unsafe  to  draw  back  the  bolt  immediately, 
as  it  may  be  a  case  of  hang-fire.  In  such  cases  the  piece  should  be  cocked 
by  drawing  back  the  cocking  piece. 

It  is  essential  for  tJie  proper  working  and  preservation  of  all  cams 
that  they  be  kept  lubricated. 

DISMOUNTING  AND  ASSEMBLING  BY  SOLDIER 
The  bolt  and  magazine  mechanism  can   be  disuKJunted   without   re- 
moving the  stock.     The  latter  should  never  be  done,  except  for  making 
repairs,  and  then  only  by  some  selected  and  instructed  man. 

Fig.  87. 


USE,  DESCRIPTION  AND  MANAGEMENT  OF    345 

THE  RIFLE 


To  Dismount  Bolt  Mechanism 

Place  the  cut-oft  at  the  center  notch ;  cock  the  arm  and  turn  the 
safety  lock  to  a  vertical  position,  raise  the  bolt  handle  and  draw  out  the 
bolt  (Fig.  87.) 

Hold  bolt  in  left  hand,  press  sleeve  lock  in  with  thumb  of  right 
hand  to- unlock  sleeve  from  bolt,  and  unscrew  sleeve  by  turning  to  the 
left  (Fig.  88.) 

Fis-.  88. 


Hold  sleeve  between  forefirger  and  thumb  of  the  left  hand,  draw 
cocking  piece  back  with  middle  finger  and  thumb  of  right  hand,  turn 
safety  lock  down  to  the  left  with  the  forefinger  of  the  right  hand,  in 
order  to  allow  the  cocking  piece  to  move  forward  in  sleeve,  thus  par- 
tially relieving  the  tension  of  mainspring;  with  the  cocking  piece  against 
the  breast,  draw  back  the  firing  pin  sleeve  with  the  forefinger  and  thumb 
of  right  hand  and  hold  it  in  this  position  (Fig.  89)  while  removing  the 
striker  with  the  left  hand;  remove  firing  pin  sleeve  and  mainspring;  pull 
firing  pin  out  of  sleeve;  turn  tlie  extractor  to  the  right,  forcing  its  tongue 
out  of  its,  groove  in  the  front  of  the  l)olt,  and  force  the  extractor  for- 
ward (Fig.  90)  and  ofi"  the  bolt. 


.Ur 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 


Fig.  89. 


COCKING  PIECE. 


STEIKER, 


To  Assemble  Bolt  Mechanism 

Grasp  with  the  left  hand  the  rear  of  the  boh,  handle  up,  and  turn 
the  extractor  collar  with  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  right  hand 
until    its    lug   is    on    a    line    with    the    safety   lug   on    the    bolt ;    take    the 

Fig.  90. 


TONGUE.-^ 


GROOVE.— 


BOLT 


extractor  in  the  right  hand  and  insert  the  lug  on  the  collar  in  the  under- 
cuts in  the  extractor  by  pushing  the  extractor  to  the  renr  until  its  tongue 
comes  in  contact  with  the  rim  on  the  face  of  he  bolt   (a  slight  pressure 


USE,  DESCRIPTION  AND  MANAGEMENT  OF    347 

THE  RIFLE 

with  the  left  thumb  on  the  top  of  the  rear  part  of  the  extractor  assists 
in  this  operation;)  turn  the  extractor  to  the  right  until  it  is  over  the  right 
lug;  take  the  bolt  in  the  right  hand  and  press  the  hook  of  the  extractor 
against  the  butt  plate  (Fig.  91)  or  some  rigid  object,  until  the  tongue  on 
the  extractor  enters  its  groove  in  the  bolt. 


Fig.  91. 


TONODE.— \— .^ 


GROOVE 


EXTEACTOE  COLLAR.    SAFETY  LUG 


With  the  safety  lock  turned  down  to  the  left  to  permit  the  firing 
pin  to  enter  the  sleeve  as  far  as  possible,  assemble  the  sleeve  and  firing 
pin;  place  the  cocking  piece  against  the  breast  and  put  on  mainspring 
firing  pin  sleeve,  and  striker  (see  Fig.  91.)  Hold  the  cocking  pin  be- 
tween the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  left  hand,  and  by  pressing  the 
striker  point  against  some  substance,  not  hard  enough  to  injure  it,  force 
the  cocking  piece  back  until  the  safety  lock  can  be  turned  to  the  ver- 
tical position  with  the  right  hand ;  insert  the  firing  pin  in  the  bolt  and 
screw  up  the  sleeve  (by  turning  it  to  the  right)  until  the  sleeve  lock 
enters  its  notch  on  the  bolt. 

See  that  the  cut-ofi-'  is  at  the  center  notch ;  hold  the  piece  under  floor 
plate  in  the  fingers  of  the  left  hand,  the  thumb  extending  over  the  left 
side  of  the  receiver;  take  bolt  in  right  hand  with  safety  lock  in  a  ver- 
tical position  and  safety  lug  up ;  press  rear  end  of  follower  down  with 
left  thumb  and  push  bolt  into  the  receiver ;  lower  bolt  handle ;  turn 
safety  lock  and  cut-off  down  to  the  left  with  right  hand. 

To  Dismount  ]\Iagazine  Mechanism 
With  the  bullet   end   of  a  cartridge  press   on   the   floor  plate   catch 


348  CHAPTER  XVIII. 

(through  the  hole  in  the  floor  plate),  at  the  same  time  drawing  the  bullet 
to  the  rear;  this  releases  the  floor  plate. 

Raise  the  rear  end  of  the  first  limb  of  the  magazine  spring  high 
enough  to  clear  the  lug  on  the  floor  plate  and  draw  it  out  of  its  mortise; 
proceed  in  the  same  manner  to  remove  the  follower. 

To  assemble  magazine  spring  and  follower  to  floor  plate,  reverse 
operation  of  dismounting. 

Insert  the  follower  and  magazine  spring  in  the  magazine,  place  the 
tenon  on  the  front  end  of  the  floor  plate  in  its  recess  in  the  magazine, 
then  place  the  lug  on  the  rear  end  of  the  floor  plate  in  its  slot  in  the 
guard,  and  press  the  rear  end  of  the  floor  plate  forward  and  inward  at 
the  same  time,  forcing  the  floor  plate  into  its  seat  in  the  guard. 


MILITARY  MAP  READING.  349 

CHAPTER  XIX. 
MILITARY  MAP  READING^i) 

A  Map  is  a  representation  on  paper  of  a  certain  portion  of  the 
earth's  surface. 

A  Military  Map  is  one  which  shows  the  relative  distances,  direc- 
tions and  elevations  of  all  features  of  military  importance  on  the  ground 
represented. 

Map  Reading. 

By  Map  Reading  is  meant  the  ability  to  get  a  clear  idea  of  the  ground 
represented  by  the  map,  with  the  same  ease  one  reads  a  book  or  news- 
paper. This  means  to  grasp  at  once  the  distance  on  the  ground  corres- 
ponding to  a  given  distance  on  the  map,  to  get  a  correct  idea  of  the  net- 
work of  streams  and  roads,  heights,  slopes,  depressions,  and  all  forms  of 
military  cover  and  obstacles.  The  first  thing  necessary  in  map  reading, 
therefore,  is  to  have  a  thorough  knowledge  of  the  scales  of  maps. 

Scales  of  Maps. 

A  map  is  drawn  to  scale,  that  is,  each  unit  of  distance  on  the  map 

must  bear  a  fixed  proportion  to  the  corresponding  distance  on  the  ground. 

If  one  inch  on  the  map,  for  instance,  equals  one  mile   (63360  inches)   on 

63360  ^^^^^    .     , 

the  ground,  then  I  inch  equals  i  of  a  mile,  or  — —   =    21120    mches    on 

o 

the  ground,  etc.  The  term  "distance"  in  this  book  is  taken  to  mean  hori- 
zontal distance;  vertical  distance  is  called  elevation  or  depression,  de- 
pending on  whether  the  point  spoken  of  is  higher  or  lower  than  another. 
For  example,  (see  map  in  back  of  book)  the  distance  from  French- 
man's {oc')  in  a  straight  line  to  McGuire  {qh')  is  2075  yards,  but  to  walk 
this  distance  would  require  the  ascent  and  descent  of  Sentinel  Hill,  so 
that  the  actual  length  of  travel  would  be  considerably  greater  than  the 
horizontal  distance  between  the  two  points.  In  speaking  of  distance  be- 
tween towns,  boundaries,  etc.,  horizontal  distance  is  always  meant.     The 


(1)  This  chapter  and  chapter  XX  are  based  on  the  corresponding  chapters 
in  Military  Map  Reading  and  Sketching/'  by  Capt.  C.  O.  Sherrill,  Corps  of  Engi- 
neers, Instructor,  Army  Service  Schools,  Fort  Leavenworth,  Kans.  The  text  and 
illustrations  have  been  modified  so  as  to  meet  the  special  requirements  of  noncom- 
missioned officers. 


350  .  CHAPTER  XIX. 

fixed  relation  between  map  distances  and  corresponding  ground  distances 
must  be  constantly  kept  in  mind. 

Methods  of  Representing  Scales. 

There  are  three  ways  in  which  the  scale  of  the  map  may  be  rep- 
resented : 

1st.  By  an  expression  in  words  and  figures;  as  3  inches  :=  1  mile; 
1  inch  =  200  feet. 

2d.     By  what  is  called  the  Representative  Fraction    (abbreviated  R. 

F.),  which  is  a  fraction  whose  numerator  represents  units  of  distance  on 

the   map   and   whose   denominator,    units   of    distance   on    the   ground,   as 

1  inch   (on  map)  .  .  1 

R.  F.  =    which  IS  equivalent  to  R.  F.  = .  since 

1  mile  (on  ground)  63360 

1 

1  mile  =  63360  inches.    So  the  expression,  "R.  F.    ,"  on  a  map  mere- 

63360 

ly  means  that  1  inch  on  the  map  represents  63360  inches   (or  1  mile)   on 

the   ground.      This    fraction    is    usually   written    with    a    numerator    i,    as 

above,   no   definite   unit  of   inches   or   miles   being   specified   in   either   the 

numerator  or  denominator.     In  this  case  the  expression  means  that  one 

unit  of   distance  on   the  map   equals  as  many  of   the  same  units  on   the 

ground  as  are  in  the  denominator. 

Thus,  means  that   1   inch  on  the  map  :=  63360  inches  on  tlK 

63360 

ground ;   1  foot  on  the  map  ==  63350  feet  on  the  ground ;   1  yard  on  the 

map  =  63360  yards  on  the  ground,  etc. 

3d.  By  what  is  called  a  Graphical  Scale,  that  is,  a  drawn  scale. 
A  graphical  scale  is  a  line  drawn  on  the  map,  divided  into  equal  parts, 
each  part  being  marked  not  with  its  actual  length,  but  zvitJi  the  distance 
which  it  represents  on  tJie  ground.  Thus,  in  Figure  2,  the  distance  from. 
O  to  50  represents  50  yards  on  the  ground ;  the  distance  from  O  to  100, 
100  yards  on  the  ground,  etc.  And  if  the  scale  were  applied  to  a  road 
running  from  A  to  B  (Figure  3),  it  would  show  that  the  length  of  the 
road  is  675  yards. 


100   !;0    0         100        200        300        400        500      600  yards 

Figure  2. 


MILITARY  MAP  READING.  331 

It  will  readily  be  seen  that  a  map  scale  must  be  known  by  the  stu- 
dent in  order  that  he  may  have  a  correct  idea  of  the  distances  between 
objects  represented  on  the  map.  This  is  necessary  in  determining 
lengths  of  march,  ranges  of  small  arms  and  artillery,  relative  lengths  of 
roads  to  a  given  point,  etc.  Therefore,  if  under  service  conditions  one 
should  have  only  a  map  without  a  scale,  or  one  with  only  an  R.  F.  on  it, 
he  would  first  of  all  ])e  compelled  to  construct  a  graphical  scale  to  read 
yards,  miles,  etc.,  or  one  showing  how  many  miles  one  inch  represents. 

^,L_ ML 


I  I  I  I  I 1 h- 1 1 1 1 

|Oo        50        O  100  200  3oO  ^WO  SOO  6ooya^Clft 

Figure   3. 

Construction  of  Scales. 
The  following  are  the  most  usual  problems  that  arise : 
/     Having  given  the  R.  F.  on  a  map,  to  find  how  many  miles  on  the 
ground    are    represented    by    1    inch    on    the    map.      Let    us    suppose    that 

L 
the  R.  F.  is 


21120 
Solution. 

Now,  as  previously  explained,    simplv  means  that  1  inch  on  the 

^  21120 

map  represents  21120  inches  on  the  ground.     There  are  63360  inches  in  1 

mile.     21120  goes  into  63360  three  times — that  is  to   say,  21120  is  i  of 

63360,  and  we,  therefore,  see  from  this  that  1  inch  on  the  map  represents 

^  of  a  mile  on  the  ground,  and  consequently  it  would  take  three  inches 

on  the  map  to  represent  1  whole  mile  on  the  ground.     So,  we  have  this 

general  rule:   To  find  out  how  many  miles  i  inch  on  the  map  represents 

on  the  ground,  divide  tJie  denominator  of  the  R.  F.  by  63360. 

2     Having  given  R.  F.  to  construct  a  graphical  scale  to  read  yards. 

1 

Assume  R.  F.  .     There  are  36  inches  in  1  3'ard,  and  since  1  inch  on 

21120 

the    map    represents    21120    inches    on    the    ground,    it    must    represent 

21120   , 

=  586.66  yards,  on  the  ground. 

36 

Now,  suppose  about  a  6-inch  scale  is  desired.     Since   1   inch  on  the 

map  :=  586.66  yards  on  the  ground,   6  inches    (map)    =  586.66  x  6  = 

3519.96  yards  (ground).     In  order  to  get  as  nearly  a  6-inch  scale  as  pos- 


352  CHAPTER  XIX. 

sible  to  represent  even  hundreds  of  yards,  let  us  assume  3500  yards  to  be 
the  total  number  to  be  represented  by  the  scale.  The  question  then  re- 
solves itself  into  this :  How  many  inches  on  the  map  are  necessary  to 
represent  3500  yards  on  the  ground.  Since,  as  we  have  seen,  1  inch 
(map)   =  586.66  yards   (ground),  as  many  inches  are  necessary  to  show 

3500        ,    ^  .     , 
3500  yards  as  586.66  is  contained  mto  3500;  or,   -— —  =  5.96  mches. 

586.66 


^  "  / 


"f        '       ,         f  *  T 


'--^JM Tbo T^coo ^ 7^ -^ ^ 

/ 
/ 
/ 

—  c  ^  _^ 


• 
/ 


^    ---^  /  /  /       ' 

\^i:.t^.^         ^ j^^^  ^^^^ jl 

Figure   4. 

Now,  lay  off  with  a  scale  of  equal  parts,  the  distance  A — I  (Figure 
4)  =  5.96  inches  (about  5  and  9\  tenths),  and  divide  it  into  7  equal 
parts  by  the  construction  shown  in  figure,  as  follows :  Draw  a  line  A — H, 
making  any  convenient  angle  with  A — I,  and  lay  off  7  equal  convenient 
lengths  (A — B,  B — C,  C — D,  etc.),  so  as  to  bring  H  about  opposite  to  I. 
Join  H  and  I  and  draw  the  intermediate  lines  through  B,  C,  etc.,  parallel 
to  H — I.  These  lines  divide  A — I  into  7  equal  parts,  each  500  yards  long. 
The  left  part,  called  the  Extension,  is  similarly  divided  into  5  equal  parts, 
each  representing  100  yards. 

S  The  next  problem  which  might  arise  is  where  the  map  has  no 
scale  at  all.  In  this  case,  measure  the  distance  between  any  two  definite 
points  on  the  ground  represented,  by  pacing  or  otherwise,  and  scale  oh 
the  corresponding  map  distance.  Then  see  how  the  distance  thus  meas- 
ured corresponds  with  the  distance  on  the  map  between  the  two  points. 
For  example,  let  us  suppose  that  the  distance  on  the  ground  between  two 
given  points  is  1  mile  and  that  the  distance  between  the  corresponding 
points  on  the  map,  is  f  inch.  We  would,  therefore,  see  that  f  inch  on  the 
map  =  1  mile  on  the  ground.  Hence  \  inch  would  represent  J  of  a  mile, 
and  4-4,  or  1  inch,  would  represent  4  x  J  =4-3  =  1]  miles. 

The  R.  F.  is  found  as  follows : 

_  1    inch=:  1  inch     =:  1 

'     ■  U  mile     63360  X  U  inches  84480 


MILITARY  MAP  READING.  353 

From  this  a  scale  of  yards  is  constructed  as  above  (2). 

4  There  remains  one  more  problem,  which  occurs  when  there  is  a 
scale  on  the  map  in  words  and  figures,  but  it  is  expressed  in  unfamiliar 
units,  such  as  the  meter  {-.=  39.37  inches),  strides  of  a  man  or  horse,  rate 
of  travel  of  column,  etc.  If  a  noncommissioned  officer  should  come  into 
possession  of  such  a  map,  it  would  be  impossible  for  him  to  have  a  cor- 
rect idea  of  the  distances  on  the  map.  If  the  scale  were  in  inches  to 
miles  or  yards,  he  could  estimate  the  distance  between  any  two  points  on 
the  map  to  be  so  many  inches  and  at  once  know  the  corresponding  dis- 
tance on  the  ground  in  miles  or  yards.  But  suppose  the  scale  found  on 
the  map  to  be  one  inch  =  100  strides  (ground),  then  estimates  could  not 
be  intelligently  made  by  one  unfamiliar  with  the  length  of  the  stride  used. 
How^ever,  suppose  the  stride  was  60  inches  long;  we  would  then  have 
this  :  Since  1  stride  =:  60  inches,  100  strides  =  6000  inches.  But  accord- 
ing to  our  supposition,  1  inch  on  the  map  =  100  strides  on  the  ground ; 
hence   1   inch   on  the  map  =  6000  inches   on   the  ground,   and   we  have 

1  inch   (map)  1 

as  our  R.  F.,    =  .     A  graphical  scale  can  now 

6000  inches  (ground)        6000 

be  constructed  as  in  (2). 

Problems  in  Scales 

The  following  problems  should  be  solved  to  become  familiar  with 
the  construction  of  scales. 

Problem  No.  1.     The  R.  F.  of  a  map  is  .     Required: 

1000 

I  The  distance  in  miles  shown  by  one  inch  on  the  map ;  2  Con- 
struct a  graphical  scale  of  yards  ;•  also  one  to  read  miles. 

Problem  No.  2.  A  map  has  a  graphical  scale  on  which  1.5  inches 
reads  500  strides,  i  What  is  the  R.  F.  of  the  map?  2  How  many  miles 
are  represented  by  1  inch? 

Problem  No.  3.  The  Leavenworth  map  furnished  herewith  has  a 
graphical  scale  on  a  measured  distance  of  1.25  inches  reads  1100  yards. 
Required  :  /  The  R.  F.  of  the  map ;  2  Number  of  miles  shown  by  1  inch  on 
the  map. 

Problem   No.  4.     i  Construct  a   scale  to   read  yards   for  a   map  of 

R.  F.  = .     2  How  many  inches  represent  one  mile? 

21120 

Scaling  Distances  from  a  Map. 
Having  determined  the  meaning  of  scales  and  the  method  of  con- 


354  CHAPTER  XIX. 

structing  scales,  it  is  well  to  mention  the  use  of  scales  in  taking  distances 
from  the  maps. 

1st.  Apply  a  piece  of  straight  edged  paper  to  the  distance  between 
any  two  points,  A  and  B,  for  instance,  and  mark  the  distance  on  the 
paper.  Now,  apply  the  paper  to  the  graphical  scale.  Figure  3,  and  read 
the  number  of  yards  on  the  main  scale  and  add  the  number  indicated  on 
the  extension;  for  example:  600  -|-  75  =:^  675  yards. 

2nd.  By  taking  the  distance  off  with  a  pair  of  dividers  and  applyiiTg 
the  dividers  thus  set  to  the  graphical  scale,  the  distance  is  read. 

3rd.  By  use  of  an  instrument  called  a  Map  Measurer,  Figure  5. 
Setting  the  hand  on  the  face  to  read  zero,  roll  the  small  wheel  over  the 
distance ;  now  roll  the  wheel  in  an  opposite  direction  along  the  graphical 
scale,  noting  the  number  of  yards  passed  over.  Or,  having  rolled  over 
the  distance,  note  the  number  of  inches  on  the  dial  and  multiply  this  by 
the  number  of  miles  or  other  units  per  inch.  A  map  measurer  is  val- 
uable for  use  in  solving  map  problems  in  patrolling,  advance  guard,  out- 
post, etc. 


Figure  5. 

4th.  Apply  a  scale  of  inches  to  the  line  to  be  measured,  and  multiply 
this  distance  by  the  number  of  miles  per  inch  shown  by  the  map. 

Having  learned  how  to  take  off  distances  on  the  map,  the  next 
step  in  Map  Reading  is  to  determine  difference  of  elevation. 

Method  of  Representing  Differences  of  Elevation 

Since  maps  are  representations  on  paper  of  ground  which  has  size 
not  only  in  a  horizontal  (level)  but  in  a  vertical  (up  and  down)  direction, 
it   is   necessary   to   have   some   means   of    rapidly   determining   elevations 
This  is  accomplished  in  one  of  three  ways : 


MILITARY  MAP  READING. 


355 


1st.  By  means  of  Contours.  A  contour-line  is  the  line  in  which  a 
horizontal  (level)  plane  cuts  the  surface  of  the  ground.  It  may  also  be 
said  that  a  contour-line  is  a  line  that  joins  points  on  the  surface  of  the 
Earth,  which  are  the  same  height — that  is  which  are  in  the  same  level 
plane.  The  projection  of  a  contour-line  on  a  horizontal  surface  (a  map)  is 
called  a  contour.  Elevations  and  depressions  may,  therefore,  be  rep- 
resented on  maps  by  imagining  the  surface  of  the  ground  being  cut  by 
a  number  of  horizontal  planes  that  are  the  same  distance  apart,  and  then 
projecting  (or  shooting)  on  a  horizontal  plane  the  lines  so  cut  on  the 
Earth's  surface. 


An  excellent  idea  ^>i    what  is   meant  by  contours  and  contour-lines 
caii  be  gotten  from  Figure-  6  and  6'.     Let  us  suppose  that  formerly  the 


356 


CHAPTER  XIX. 


island  represented  in  Figure  6  was  entirely  under  water  and  that  by  a 
sudden  disturbance  the  water  of  the  lake  fell  until  the  island  stood 
20  feet  above  the  water,  and  that  later  several  other  sudden  falls 
of  the  water,  20  feet  each  time,  occurred,  until  now  the  island  stands 
100  feet  out  of  the  lake,  and  at  each  of  the  20  feet  elevations  a  distinct 
v/ater  line  is  left.  .  These  water  lines  are  perfect  contour-lines  measured 
from  the  surface  of  the  lake  as  a  reference  (or  datum)  plane.  Figure  6' 
shows  the  contour-lines  in  Figure  6  projected,  or  shot  down,  on  a  hori- 
zontal surface.  It  will  be  observed  that  on  the  gentle  slopes,  such  as 
F-b  (Fig.  6)  the  contours  (20,  40),  are  far  apart.  But  on  the  steep  slopes, 
as  R-0,  the  contours  (20,  40,  60,  80,  100),  are  close  together.  Hence,  it 
is  seen  that  contours  far  q,part  on  a  map  indicate  gentle  slopes  and  con- 
tours close  together,  steep  slopes.  It  is  also  seen  that  the  shape  of  the 
contours  gives  an  accurate  idea  of  the  form  of  the  island.  The  contours 
in  Fig.  6'  give  an  exact  representation  not  only  of  the  general  form  of 
the  island,  the  two  peaks,  O  and  B,  the  stream,  M-N,  the  saddle,  M,  the 
water  shed  from  F  to  H,  and  steep  bluff  at  K,  but  they  also  give  the  slopes 
of  the  ground  at  all  points.  From  this  we  see  that  the  slopes  are  directly 
portional  to  the  nearness  of  the  contours — that  is,  the  nearer  the  contours 
on  a  map  are  to  one  another,  the  steeper  is  the  slope,  and  the  farther  the 
contours  on  a  map  are  from  one  another,  the  gentler  is  the  slope. 

A  wnde  space  without  contours,  therefore,  represents  a  level  plane. 


MILITARY  MAP  READING.  357 

The  contours  of  a  cone  (Figure  7)  are  circles  of  different  sizes,  one 
within  another,  and  the  same  distance  apart,  because  the  slope  of  a  cone  is 
at  all  points  the  same. 

The  contours  of  a  half  sphere  (Figure  8),  are  a  series  of  circles,  far 
apart  near  the  center  (top),  and  near  together  at  the  outside  (bottom), 
showing  that  the  slope  of  a  hemisphere  varies  at  all  points,  being  flat  on 
top  and  increasing  in  steepness  toward  the  bottom. 

The  contours  of  a  concave  (hollowed  out)  cone  (Figure  9)  are 
close  together  at  the  center  (top)  and  far  apart  at  the  outside  (bottom). 

The  following  additional  points  about  contours  should  be  remem- 
bered : 

(a)  A  Water  Shed  or  Spur,  along  which  rain  water  divides,  flow^ing 
away  from  it  on  both  sides,  is  indicated  by  the  higher  contours  bulging 
out  toward  the  lower  ones,  (F-H,  Fig.  6'). 

(b)  A  water  Course  or  Valley,  along  which  rain  falling  on  both 
sides  of  it  joins  in  one  stream,  is  indicated  by  the  lower  contours  curving 
in  toward  the  higher  ones,  (M-N,  Fig.  6'). 

(c)  The  contours  of  different  heights  which  unite  and  become  a 
single  lines,  represents  a  vertical  cliff.     (K,  Fig.  6'). 

(d)  Two  contours  which  cross  each  other  represent  an  overhanging 
cliff. 

(e)  A  closed  contour  without  another  contour  in  it,  represents 
either  a  hill  top  (figure  cone)  or  a  depression  (figure  volcano).  A  hill 
top  is  shown  when  the  closed  contour  is  higher  than  the  contour  next  to 
it;  a  depression  is  shown  when  the  closed  contour  is  lower  than  the  one 
next  to  it. 

Since  the  horizontal  distance  between  contours  on  a  map  (called 
IMap  Distance  or  M.  D.),  is  proportional  to  the  slope  of  the  ground  rep- 
resented, it  is  possible  to  calculate  what  the  M.  D.  of  contours  for  various 
degrees  of  slope  of  the  ground  is,  and  construct  a  scale  of  M.  D.  with 
which  slopes  can  at  once  be  read  off  from  the  distances,  apart  of  any 
particular  contours.  This  is  based  on  the  fact  that  688  inches  horizontally 
on  a  I  degree  slope  gives  a  rise  of  one  foot. 


S/ope  of  /Degree 


'^IMCH 


668  IN. 


Figure  10. 


358 


CHAPTER  XIX. 


Slope 
(degrees) 

Rise 

(feet) 

Horizontal 
Distance 
(inches) 

1   deg. 

688 

2  deg. 

688 

—  =  344 

2 

3  deg. 

688 

—  =  229 
3 

4   deg. 

688 

—  =  172 
4 

5   deg. 

688 

—  =  138 
5 

To  construct  a  s 
take  the  distance  con 

cale  of  M.  D. 
•esponding  to 

for  a  map  on  which  it  is  not  shown, 
each  degree  of  slope  in  inches,  mul- 

tiply  this  by  the  contour  interval  (V.  I.  vertical  interval),  -in  feet,  and  by 
the  R.  F.,  and  then  lay  off  these  distances  as  shown.  Figure  11. 


L 


Vz* 


1 


1       '•      I  »•  I  '>•  I  "  1*-P-P1 


M.D. 

Figure   11. 

Thus,  let  us  suppose  that  the  scale  of  M.  D.  for  the  map  in  pocket  at 
back  of  book  is  not  known,  and  that  it  is  desired  to  construct  one.  Then 
since  the  map  is  drawn  on  the  scale  of  4  inches  =  i   mile,  the  R.  F.  = 

4  1 

= .     The  V.  I.  of  the  map  is  10  feet.    So  we  have, 

63360     15840 

The  V.  I.  of  the  map  is  10  feet.     So,  we  would  have, 

R  F..  X  V.  I.  (ft.)   X  688  (inches) 


M.  D.  (inches)    = 


Hence,  M.  D.  = 


S  (degrees—  1°,  2°,  etc.) 
10  X  688       6880 


1 


X 


.44  inch. 


15840  '~        1  15840 

And  in  the  case  of  2°,  3°,  etc.,  we  would  have 

6880 


M.  D.  for  2°  = 
M.  D.  for  3°  = 


15840  X  2 
6880 

15840  X  3 


=  .22  inch ; 
^  .15  inch,  etc. 


MILITARY  MAP  READING. 


359 


Slopes  are  usually  given  in  one  of  three  ways:  1st,  in  degrees;  2nd, 
in  percentages;  3rd,  in  gradients  (grades). 

1st.  A  one  degree  slope  means  that  the  angle  between  the  hori- 
zontal and  the  given  line  is  i  degree  (i°).     See  Figure  lo,  page  357. 

2d.  A  slope  is  said  to  be  i,  2,  3,  etc.  per  cent,  when  100  units  hori- 
zontally correspond    to  a  rise  of  1,  2,  3,  etc.  units  vertically. 


/Per  Ceni  S/ope 


foofi. 


\fft. 


2  Per  Ceni  Slope 


iOOft. 


-^ifi. 


PerCentH^^ 


/00/t 


Figure  12. 
3d.    A  slope  is  said  to  be  one  on  one     i—\  ,  two  on  three,    [-^\     etc., 

when  one  unit  horizontal  corresponds  to  1  vertical ;  three  horizontal  cor- 
respond to  two  vertical,  etc.  The  numerator  usually  refers  to  the  ver- 
tical distance,  and  the  denomination  to  the  horizontal  distance. 


Figure   13. 

Degrees  of  slope  are  usually  used  in  military  matters ;  percentages 
are  often  used  for  roads,  almost  always  of  railroads ;  gradients  are  used 
of  steep  slopes,  and  usually  of  dimensions  of  trenches. 


360  CHAPTER  XIX. 

EFFECT  OF  SLOPE  ON  MOVEMENTS. 

60  degrees  or    |    inaccessible  for  InianUy; 
45  degrees  or   j    difficult  for  Infantry; 
30  degrees  or    |-    inaccessible  for  Cavalry; 
15  degrees  or   ^    inaccessible  for  Artillery; 
5  degrees  or  /g  accessible  for  wagons. 

The  Normal  System  of  scales  prescribed  for  U.  S.  Army  field 
sketches  is  as  follows :  For  road  sketches,  3  inches  =  1  mile,  Vertical 
Interval  between  contours  (V.  I.)  =  20  ft.;  for  position  sketches,  6  inches 
=  1  mile,  V.  I.  :=  10  ft. ;  for  fortification  sketches,  12  inches  =:  1  mile, 
V.  I.  =  5  ft.  On  this  system  any  given  length  of  M.  D.  corresponds  to 
the  same  slope  on  each  of  the  scales.  For  instance,  .15  inch  between  con- 
tours represents  a  5°  slope  on  the  3-inch,  6-inch  and  12-inch  maps  of  the 
Normal  System'.  Figure  ii,  page  358,  gives  the  normal  scale  of  M.  D's 
for  slopes  up  to  F  degrees.  A  scale  of  M.  D's  is  usually  printed  on  the 
margin  of  maps,  near  the  geographical  scale. 

Directions  on  Maps. 

Having  given  the  means  used  for  determining  horizontal  distances 
and  relative  elevations  represented  on  a  map,  the  next  step  is  the  determin- 
ation of  horizontal  directions.  When  these  three  facts  (distance,  height 
and  direction)  are  known  of  any  point  with  respect  to  any  other  point, 
its  position  is  then  fully  determined.  For  instance  (see  map  in  pocket  at 
back  of  book,  Pope  Hill  {sm')  is  800  yards  from  Grant  Hill  {urn'),  (using 
grahpical  scale),  and  it  is  30  feet  higher  than  Grant  Hill,  since  it  is  on 
contour  870  and  Grant  Hill  is  on  contour  840;  Pope  Hill  is  also  due 
north  of  Grant  Hill,  that  is,  the  north  and  south  line  through  Grant  Hill 
passes  through  Pope  Hill.  Therefore,  the  position  of  Pope  Hill  is  fully 
determined  with  respect  to  Grant  Hill. 

The  direction  line  from  which  other  directions  are  measured  is 
usually  the  true  north  and  south  line  (known  as  the  True  Meridian)  or 
the  plane  of  the  magnetic  needle,  called  the  Magnetic  Meridian.  These 
two  lines  do  not  usually  have  the  same  positions,  because  at  all  points  of 
the  Earth's  surface  the  true  meridian  is  the  straight  line  joining  the  ob- 
server's position  and  the  North  Pole  of  the  Earth,  whereas  the  direction 
of  the  magnetic  needle  varies  at  different  points  of  the  Earth,  at  some 
places  pointing  east  of  and  at  others  west  of,  the  True  Pole.    At  the  pres- 


MILITARY  MAP  READING. 


361 


ent  time  the  angle  which  the  magnetic  needle  (called  Magnetic  Declination) 
makes  with  the  True  Meridian,  is  at  Fort  Leavenworth,  8°  23'  east  of 
north. 


Figure   14. 

It  is  important  to  know  this  relation  because  maps  usually  show  the 
True  Meridian  and  an  observer  is  generally  supplied  with  a  magnetic 
compass.  Figure  14  shows  the  usual  type  of  Box  Compass.  It  has  4 
cardinal  points,  N,  E,  S  and  W  marked,  as  well  as  a  circle  graduated  in 
degrees  from  zero  to  360°,  clockwise  around  the  circle.  To  read  the 
magnetic  angle  (called  magnetic  azimuth)  of  any  point,  from  the  ob- 
servers position,  the  north  point  of  the  compass  circle  is  pointed  toward 
the  object  and  the  angle  indicated  by  the  north  end  of  the  needle  is  read. 


Orientation. 

In  order  that  directions  on  the  map  and  on  the  ground  shall  cor- 
respond, it  is  necessary  for  the  map  to  be  oriented,  that  is,  the  true 
meridian  of  the  map  must  lie  in  the  same  direction  as  the  true  meridian 
through  the  observer's  position  on  the  ground,  which  is  only  another 
way  of  saying  that  the  lines  that  run  north  and  south  on  the  map  must 
run  in  the  same  direction  as  the  lines  north  and  south  on  the  ground. 
Every  road,  stream  or  other  feature  on  the  map  will  then  run  in  the 
same  direction  as  the  road,  stream  or  other  feature  itself  on  the  ground, 
and  all  the  objects  shown  on  the  map  can  be  quickly  identified  and  picked 
out  on  the  ground. 


362 


CHAPTER  XIX. 


Methods  of  Orientating  a  Map. 

isf.  By  magnetic  needle :  If  the  map  has  a  magnetic  meridian 
marked  on  it  as  is  on  the  Leavenworth  map  (in  pocket  at  back  of  book), 
place  the  sighting  line,  a-b,  of  the  compass  (Fig.  14)  on  the  magnetic 
meridian  of  the  map  and  move  the  map  around  horizontally  until  the 
north  end  of  the  needle  points  toward  the  north  of  its  circle,  whereupon 
the  map  is  oriented.  If  there  is  a  true  meridian  on  the  map  but  not  a 
magnetic  meridian  one  may  be  constructed  as  follows,  if  the  mabnetic 
declination  is  known. 

/*fcip     ^rue   jVorih 


^^ 


tru6      South 

Figure   15. 


(Fig.  15)  :  Place  the  true  meridian  of  the  map  directly  under  the  magnetic 
needle  of  the  compass  and  then  move  the  compass  box  until  the  needls 
reads  an  angle  equal  to  the  magnetic  declination.  A  line  in  extension  of 
the  sighting  line  a'-b'  will  be  the  magnetic  meridian.  If  the  magnetic 
declination  of  the  observer's  position  is  not  more  than  4°  or  5°,  the 
orientation  will  be  given  closely  enough  for  ordinary  purposes  by  taking 
the  true  and  magnetic  meridians  to  be  identical. 

2d.     If  neither  the  magnetic  nor  the  true  meridian   is  on  the  map, 


MILITARY  MAP  READING. 


363 


but  the  observer's  position  on  the  ground  is  known  :  Move  the  map  hori- 
zontally until  the  direction  of  some  definite  point  on  the  ground  is  the 
same  as  its  direction  on  the  map ;  the  map  is  then  oriented.  For  exam- 
ple, suppose  you  are  standing  on  the  ground  at  8  (Fort  Leavenworth 
Map),  and  can  see  the  U.  S.  Penitentiary  off  to  the  South.  Hold  the  map 
in  front  of  you  and  face  toward  the  U.  S.  Penitentiar}',  bringing  the 
line  joining  8  and  the  U.  S.  Penitentiary  (on  the  ground).  The  map  is 
now  oriented. 

FTaving  learned  to  orient  a  map  and  to  locate  his  position  on  the 
map,  the  noncommissioned  officer  should  then  practice  moving  over  the 
ground  and  at  the  same  time  keeping  his  map  oriented  and  noting  each 
ground  feature  on  the  map  as  it  is  passed.  This  practice  is  of  the  greatest 
value  in  learning  to  read  a  may  accurately  and  to  estimate  distances, 
directions  and  slopes  correctly. 

True   Meridian. 

The  position  of  the  true  meridian  may  be  found  as  follows  (Fig. 
16)  :  point  the  hour  hand  of  a  watch  toward  the  sun  ;  the  line  joining  the 
pivot  and  the  point  midway  between  the  hour  hand  and  XII  on  the  dial, 
will  point  toward  the  south,  that  is  to  say,  if  the  observer  stands  so  as 
to  face  the  sun  and  the  XII  on  the  dial,  he  will  be  looking  south.  To 
point  the  hour  hand  exactly  at  the  sun,  stick  a  pin  as  at  (a)  Fig.  i6  and 
bring  the  hour  hand  into  the  shadow.  At  night,  a  line  drawn  toward  the 
north  star  from  the  observer's  position  is  approximately  a  true  meridian. 


SOUTH 


Figure    16. 


364  CHAPTER  XIX. 

The  line  joining  the  pointers  of  the  Great  Bear  or  Dipper,  prolonged 
about  six  times  its  length  passes  nearly  through  the  North  Star,  which 
can  he  recognized  by  its  brilliancy. 

North  vStar 


* 


^ 

* 


Bipper 


Figure   17 


* 


Conventional  Signs. 

Rivers,  lakes,  mountains,  forests,  roads,  houses,  telegraph  lines,  etc., 
are  represented  on  maps  by  symbols  called  Conventional  Signs,  in  which 
an  effort  is  made  to  imitate  the  general  appearance  of  the  objects  as 
seen  from  a  high  point  directly  overhead.  On  account  of  this  similarity 
of  the  object  to  its  sign  or  symbol  on  the  map,  the  noncommissioned  offi- 
cer will  usually  have  no  trouble  in  deciding  at  once  the  meaning  of  a  new 
symbol.  Plate  No.  i8  on  the  following  page  gives  Conventional  Signs  used 
on  military  maps,  and  they  should  be  thoroughly  learned  so  that  their 
meaning  will  be  known  at  a  glance. 

There  is  a  constant  tendency  to  simplify  the  Conventional  Signs, 
and  very  often  simply  the  outline  of  an  object,  such  as  a  forest,  culti- 
vated ground,  etc.,  is  indicated  with  the  name  of  the  object  printed  within 
the  outline.     Thus : 


[llj^Uy-ttA^\ 


Fir.uRE  19. 


Trees 


Streams 


Isolated 


o  o 
o  O  o 
o   o 


Palms 


*'  '     Banana 


oo    ooooooo    ooo    o  o 

ocooooooooocO  o 

0    0    0   0     OTChctTCl  ->    ^  c 

ooooooocooooo  o 

oooooooeooooo  o 

ooooooooooooo  o 


;^  *  ,^  ^'  • 

Pine 


Bo^f^hoo 


Cultivated 


Grass 


Corn 


f I 


♦  »     «      •  «       »       r 
«       »      «        »         »       » 

*  *   Vineyard'    ' 

I  t-  t     * 

»       /      f     t       «     « 


av/mm.f- 


WW 


T 


Fuller  y.T  'Hide. 

ForeJfi/iJe 

[TnfordaMe 

Tnfarifi'V 

Cavcjiry 

Artillery 

Se  n  try 

Vidette 

IJospifal 

Trench 

Camp 


n  1  I  r  I  I  ;  rr-T-t  I  I  I  IX 


,  I  ^ 

III  i|i 
6 


A.  A  A  A 


^ice 


(I 


i:Mi       ^<«ic    a«-; 


B,      ©   O  Q  ■   ■     -   O   G .  .     \,"  0     ■ 

O  O   Oo  «>  o    ^  °    t>   o    ■       o  s 
"  o  a 


0  8- 


;  o  o.  o  o  " 


Coif  on  Z  to.o. 


la.o 


o.    O 
6.  o  . 


o-  o 


■^°-c.v    Q.'^>"-^.o.e^"0 


flailj'oads 


Single  Track 
Double  TracA- 
THeclric 

Improved 

Uni/nprov^d 

Trail 


Church 
Pos  I  office 
H^alerworAs 


■I  I  I  I  I  I  I — »— I — *— < 
I   I  I  I   I  I   I   I   I 


Roads 


'  Cemetarv 

*■    +  +  +  "+ 


¥ 


Fences 


He  doe. 


Stone. 
tVorui 

IVire  huried 
Pl^ir-e  smooth 


ObstacJes 

Ahattis  '^  'S"^ 

fVi're  e/j  /a  //o/e  me/jl 
Palisades  tttlttH 

DemoJifi  o  us 


Depression 


rS> 


Cliffs 


Ravine 


*?!^?^ 


.<y 


-m^m^ 


5ii?-S^ 


a.^S'M*-- 


S^ 


— ^-  ■  o         o  e 


Fill 


Cut 


«i  I  _"■■*^"^»|B^^;fl^^j||^|^|||^|'[7)1^|^ - 


Figure  18. 


366  CHAPTER  XIX. 

Such  means  are  used  very  frequently  in  rapid  sketching,  on  account 
of  the  time  that  they  save. 

By  reference  to  the  map  of  Fort  Leavenv^^orth,  the  meaning  of  all 
its  symbols  is  at  once  evident  from  the  names  printed  thereon ;  for 
example,  that  of  a  cit}--,  woods,  roads,  streams,  railroads,  etc.;  where  no 
Conventional  Sign  is  used  on  any  area,  it  is  to  be  understood  that  any 
growths  thereon  are  not  high  enough  to  furnish  any  cover.  As  an  exer- 
cise, pick  out  from  the  map  the  following  conventional  signs :  Unimproved 
road,  cemetery,  railroad  track,  hedge,  wire  fence,  orchard,  streams,  lake. 
The  numbers  on  the  various  road  crossings  have  no  equivalent  on  the 
ground,  but  are  placed  on  the  maps  to  facilitate  description  of  routes, 
etc.  Often  the  numbers  at  road  crossings  on  other  maps  denote  the  eleva- 
tion of  these  points. 

Visibility. 

The  problem  of  visibility  is  based  on  the  relations  of  contours  and 
map  distances  previously  discussed,  and  includes  such  matters  as  the 
determination  of  whether  a  point  can  or  can  not  be  seen  from  another; 
whether  a  certain  line  of  march  is  concealed  from  the  enemy;  whether 
a  particular  area  is  seen  from  a  given  point.  For  illustration,  see  Visi- 
bility, Problem,  page  368. 

On  account  of  the  necessary  inaccuracy  of  all  maps  it  is  impossible 
to  determine  exactly  how  much  ground  is  visible  from  any  given  point — 
that  is,  if  a  correct  reading  of  the  map  shows  a  certain  point  to  be  just 
barely  visible,  then  it  would  be  unsafe  to  say  positively  that  on  the 
ground  this  point  could  be  seen  or  could  not  be  seen.  It  is,  however,  of 
great  importance  for  the  noncommissioned  officer  to  be  able  to  determine 
at  a  glance,  within  about  one  contour  interval,  whether  or  not  such  and 
such  a  point  is  visible;  or  whether  a  given  road  is  generally  visible  to  a 
certain  scout,  etc.  For  this  reason  no  effort  is  made  to  give  an  exact 
mathematical  solution  of  problems  in  visibility  further  than  would  be  use- 
ful in  practical  work  with  a  map  in  the  solution  of  map  problems  in 
patrolling. 

In  the  solution  of  visibility  problems,  it  is  necessary  that  the  non- 
commissioned officer  should  thoroughly  understand  the  meaning  of 
profiles  and  their  construction.  A  profile  is  the  line  supposed  to  be  cut 
from  the  surface  of  the  Earth  by  an  imaginary  vertical  (up  and  down) 
plane.  (See  Fig.  20  B.)  The  representation  of  this  line  to  scale  on  a 
sheet  of  paper  is  also  called  a  profile.     Figure  20  B  shows  a  profile  on 


MILITARY  MAP  READING. 


367 


Fig. 20  A 


imSL. 


the  line  D-y  (Figure  20  A)  in  which  the  horizontal  scale  is  the  same  as 
that  of  the  map  (Figure  20  A)  and  the  vertical  scale  is  1  inch  =z  40 
feet.  It  is  customary  to  draw  a  profile  with  a  greater  vertical  than  hori- 
zontal scale  in  order  to  make  the  slopes  on  the  profile  appear  to  the  eye 
as  they  exist  on  the  ground.  Consequently,  always  note  especially  the 
vertical  scale  in  examining  any  profile;  the  horizontal  scale  is  usually 
that  of  the  map  from  which  the  profile  is  taken. 


368  CHAPTER  XIX. 

A  profile  is  constructed  as  follows  (Fig  20  B)  :  Draw  a  line  D' — y' 
equal  in  length  to  D — y  on  the  map.  Lay  off  on  this  line  from  D'  distances 
equal  to  he  distances  of  the  successive  contours  from  D  on  the  map.  At  each 
of  these  contour  points  erect  a  perpendicular  equal  to  the  elevation  of  this 
particular  contour,  as  shown  by  the  vertical  scale  (960,  940,  920,  etc.)  on 
the  left.  Join  successively  these  verticals  by  a  smooth  curve,  which  is 
the  required  profile.  Cross  section  paper  with  lines  printed  1-10  inch 
apart  horizontally  and  vertically  simplifies  the  work  of  construction,  by 
avoiding  the  necessity  of  laying  off  each  individual  distance. 

Visibility  Problem.  To  determine  whether  an  observer  with  his  eye 
at  D  can  see  the  bridge  at  XX  (Figue  20  A).  By  examining  the  profile 
it  is  seen  that  an  observer,  with  his  eye  at  D,  looking  along  the  line  D-XX, 
can  see  the  ground  as  far  as  (a)  ;  from  (a)  to  (b)  is  hidden  from  view 
by  the  ridge  at  (a);  (b)  to  (c)  is  visible;  (c)  to  (d)  is  hidden  by  the 
ridge  at  (c).  By  thus  drawing  the  profiles,  the  visibility  of  .'iuy  point  from 
a  given  point  may  be  determined.  The  work  may  be  much  shortened  by 
drawing  the  profile  of  only  the  observer's  position  (D)  of  the  point  in 
question,  and  of  the  probable  obstructing  points  (a)  and  (c).  It  is 
evidentl}^  unnecessary  to  construct  the  profile  from  D  to  x,  because  the 
slope  being  concave  shows  that  it  does  not  form  an  obstruction. 

The  above  method  of  determining  visibility  by  means  of  a  profile  is 
valuable  practice  for  learning  slopes  of  ground,  and  the  forms  of  the 
ground  corresponding  to  different  contour  spacings. 

Visibility  of  Areas. 

To  determine  the  area  visible  from  a  given  point  the  same  method 
is  used.  First  mark  off  as  invisible  all  areas  hidden  by  woods,  buildings, 
high  hills,  and  then  test  the  doubtful  points  along  lines  such  as  D — XX, 
Figure  20  A.  With  practice  the  noncommissioned  officer  can  soon  decide 
by  inspection  all  except  the  very  close  cases. 

This. method  is  a  rapid  approximation  of  the  solution  shown  in  the 
profile.  In  general  it  will  not  be  practicable  to  determine  the  visibility 
of  a  point  by  this  method  closer  than  to  say  the  line  of  sight  pierces  the 
ground  between  two  adjoining  contours. 


MILITARY  SKETCHING.  3-^^^ 


CHAPTER  XX. 
MILITARY  SKETCHING 

(See  corresponding  chapter  in  Supplement  for  additional  matter  and  changes,  if  any.) 

(While  this  chapter  presents  the  principal  features  of  military  sketching  in  a 
simple,  clear  manner,  attention  is  invited  to  the  fact  that  the  only  way  a  noncom- 
missioned officer  who  has  never  done  any  sketching  can  follow  properly  the  statements 
made,  is  to  do  so  with  the  instruments  and  the  sketching  material  mentioned  at  hand. 
In  fact,  the  only  way  to  learn  how  to  sketch,  is  to  sketch.) 

A  Military  Sketch  is  a  rough  map  showing  the  features  of  the 
ground  that  are  of  military  value. 

Military  Sketching  is  the  art  of  making  such  a  military  sketch. 
Military  Sketches  are  of  three  kinds: 

Position  Sketches,  Fig.  1; 

Outpost  Sketches; 

Road  Sketches. 
All   kinds   of   military   sketches   are   intended   to   give   a   military 
commander  detailed  information  of  the  ground  to  be  operated  over, 
when  this  is  not  given  by  the  existing  maps,  or  when  there  are  no 
maps  of  the  area. 

The  general  methods  of  sketching  are: 

(i)     The  location  of  points  by  intersection. 

{2)     The  location  of  points  by  traversing. 

(j)  The  determination  of  the  heights  of  hills,  shapes  of  the  ground, 
etc.,  by  contours  (See  Contours,  page  355). 

(i)  To  locate  a  point  by  interesection  proceed  as  follows:  Set  up, 
level  and  orient  the  board,  Fig.  4  (or  Sketching  Case,  Fig.  3),  at  A,  Fig. 
1.  The  board  is  said  to  be  oriented  when  the  needle  is  parallel  to  the 
lines  across  the  face  of  the  compass,  Fig.  3,  of  the  cavalry  case,  or 
parallel  to  the  sides  of  the  compass  trough  of  the  drawing  board,  Fig.  4. 
(At  every  station  the  needle  must  have  this  position,  so  that  every  line 
on  the  sketch  will  be  parallel  to  the  corresponding  line  or  discretion 
on  the  ground.)  Assume  a  point  (A)  on  the  paper.  Fig.  i  Y,  in  such  a 
position  that  the  ground  to  be  sketched  will  fall  on  the  sheet.     Lay  the 


370 


CHAPTER 


Qroit^tJ 


B 


'           /^ 

N 

.          ,     "^ 

\ 

'          /        ^^ 

\ 

:  / 

"la 

,  / 

/ 

'                   MAP 

/>- 

^ 

^ 

^ 

X 

■V 

\ 

\ 

^ 

-^ 

^^^ic 

.9osi   '^ 


fi  /e.^- 


Qrtyi 


■lUfd 


hiZ^O) 


ground 


(Note:  This  diagram  represents 
the  sketching  board). 


^''^■ 


ruler  on  the  board  and  point  it  to  the  desired  point  (C),  all  the  while 
keeping  the  edge  of  the  ruler  on  the  point  (A),  Fig.  i  Y.  Draw  an 
indefinite  line  along  the  edge.  Now  move  to  (B),  Fig.  1  X,  plotted  on 
the  map  in  (b),  Fig  1  X,  and  having  set  up,  levelled  and  oriented  as  at 
(A),  Fig.  I  Y,  sight  toward  (C)  as  before.  The  intersection  (crossing)  of 
the  two  lines  locates  (C)  on  the  sketch  at  (c),  Fig.  1  X. 

(■?) )     To  locate  a  point  by  traversing  is  done  as  follows :  With  the ' 
board  set  up,  levelled  and  oriented  at  A,  Fig.  1  Y,  as  above,  draw  a  line 
in  the  direction  of  the  desired  point  B,  Fig.  1  X,  and  then  move  to  B, 
counting  strides,  keeping  record  of  them  with  a  tally  register.  Fig.  5,  if 
one  is  available.     Set  up  the  board  at  B,  Fig.  1  X,  and  orient  it  by  laying 


MILITARY  SKETCHING. 


371 


(Sketching    Case)— Figure    3. 


the  ruler  along  the  line  (a) -(b),  Fig.  1  X,  and  moving  the  board  until 
the  ruler  is  directed  toward  A,  Fig.  1  Y,  on  the  ground;  or  else  orient 
by  the  needle  as  at  A.  With  the  scale  of  the  sketcher's  strides  on  the 
ruler,  Fig.  3,  lay  off  the  number  of  strides  found  from  A,  Fig.  1  Y,  to  B, 


7;j2 


CHAPTER  XX. 


Fig.  1  X,  and  mark  the  point  (b),  Fig.  1  X.     Other  points,  such  as  C,  D, 
etc.,  would  be  located  in  the  same  way. 

J     To  drazv  in  contours  on  a  sketch,  the  following  steps  are  neces- 
sary : 


(Drawing    Board) — Figure    4. 


(a)  From  the  known  or  assumed  elevation  of  a  located  station 
as  A,  Fig.  lY,  (elevation  890),  the  elevations  of  all  hill  tops, 
stream  junctures,  stream  sources,  etc.,  are  determined. 


MILITARY  SKETCHING.  373 

(b)  Having  found  the  elevations  of  these  critical  points  the  con- 
tours are  put  in  by  spacing  them  so  as  to  show  the  slope  of 
the  ground  along  each  line  such  (a)-(b),  (a)-(c),  etc., 
Fig.  1  Y,  as  these  slopes  actually  are  on  the  ground  (  see 
principles  of  contour  spacing,  page  356.) 

To  find  the  elevation  of  any  point,  say  C   (shown  on  sketch  as  c), 
proceed  as  follows  : 


(Tally    Register) — Figure    5.  I'  (Clinometer) — Figure    6. 

Read  the  vertical  angle  with  slope  board,  Fig.  4,  or  with  a  clino- 
meter, Fig.  6.  Suppose  this  is  found  to  be  2  degrees ;  lay  the  scale  of 
M.  D.  (ruler.  Fig.  4)  along  (a) -(c),  Fig.  lY,  and  note  the  number  of 
divisions  of  -2  degrees  (minus  2°)  between  (a)  and  (c).  Suppose  there 
are  found  to  be  5|-  divisions;  then,  since  each  division  is  10  feet,  the 
total  height  of  A  above  C  is  55  feet  (5^x  10).  C  is  th.erefore  835  ft.  elev. 
which  is  written  at  (c),  Fig.  lY.  Now  looking  at  the  ground  along  A-C, 
suppose  you  find  it  to  be  a  yery  decided  concave  (hollowed  out)  slope, 
nearly  flat  at  the  bottom  and  steep  at  the  top.  There  are  to  be  placed  in 
this  space  (a) -(c).  Fig.  lY,  contours  890,  880,  870,  860  and  850,  and  they 
would  be  spaced  close  at  the  top  and  far  apart  near  (c),  Fig.  1  Y,  to  give 
a  true  idea  of  the  slope. 

The  above  is  the  entire  principle  of  contouring  in  making  sketches 
and  if  thoroughly  learned  by  careful  repetition  under  different  condi- 
tions, will  enable  the  student  to  soon  be  able  to  carry  the  contours  with 
the  horizontal  locations. 


374  CHAPTER  XX. 

Position   Sketching 

Instruments  used  in  Position  and  Outpost  sketching  : 

1  Drawing  board  with  attached  compass..  Fig.  4. 

2  Loose  ruler  (on  board,  Fig.  3  and  4). 
S     Rough   tripod   or  camera   tripod. 

4  Scale  of  M.D.s   (shown  on  ruler,  Fig.  4). 

5  Scale  of  the  sketcher's  strides  (at  6"  to  1  mile),  shown  on  ruler, 

Fig.  3. 

6  Clinometer    (not  absolutely  necessary  if  board  has  slope  board), 

Fig.  6. 

7  Scale  of  hundreds  of  yards  (shown  on  ruler,  Fig.  3).  ^ 

Methods  to  be  used  : 

1  Select  a  Base  Line,  that  is,  a  central  line  \  to  |  niile  long  in  the 
area  to  be  sketched.  The  base  should  have  at  iis  end  some  plainly  marked 
objects,  such  as  telegraph  poles,  trees,  corners  of  buildings,  etc.,  and  from 
its  ends  a  good  view  of  the  area  should  be  possible. 

2  Set  up,  level  and  orient  the  drawing  board  at  one  end  of  the  base 
(A),  Fig.  lY.  Draw  a  meridian  on  the  sheet  parallel  to  the  position  of 
the  magnetic  needle. 

Assume  a  point  (A),  Fig.  i  Y,  corresponding  to  the  ground  point 
(A),  890.  on  the  sheet  in  such  a  position  that  the  area  to  be  sketched  will 
lie  on  the  sheet. 

S  Sight  at  hill  tops,  stream  junctures,  stream  heads,  etc.,  to  begin 
the  location  of  these  points  by  intersection.  (See  "To  locate  a  point  by 
interesection,"  page  369). 

4  Traverse  to  B  and  complete  the  locations  by  intersection  as 
previously  explained.     {See  "To  locate  a  point  by  traversing,"  page  370). 

5  Draw  the  details  of  country  between  A  and  B  and  in  the 
vicinity  of  this  line,  using  the  conventional  signs  for  roads,  houses,  etc. 
(See  page  365). 

6  The  lines  from  station  (b).  Fig.  i  X.  to  any  of  the  other  located 
points  may  now  be  used  as  a  new  base  line  to  carry  the  work  over  addi- 
tional area. 

7  In  case  parts  of  the  area  are  not  visible  from  a  base  line,  these 
parts  are  located  by  traversing  as  before  explained. 

8  Having  learned  by  several  repetitions  the  above  steps,  the  sketcher 
will  then  combine  contouring  (see  contouring  above)  with  his  horizontal 
locations. 


MILITARY  SKETCHING. 


375 


Outpost   sketching 

The  methods  of  Outpost  Sketching  are  the  same  as  for  position 
sketching,  except  that  the  sketcher  can  not  advance  toward  the  supposed 
position  of  the  enemy  beyond  the  outpost  line.  Therefore  a  base  line 
must  be  selected  on  or  in  rear  of  the  line  of  observation.  From  this  base 
line  all  points  visible  toward  the  enemy  are  located  by  intersection  or  by 
traverse  along  the  base  line,  details  being  shown  by  conventional  signs 
and  contours  as  for  the  position  sketch. 

Road   Sketching 
Instruments  used : 

1  Drawing  Board  or  Sketching  Case. 

2  Loose  ruler. 

S     Scales  of  strides,  if  made  dismounted;   scale  of  time,  trotting  or 
walking,  if  mounted. 

4  Scale  of  hundreds  of  yards,  at  3"  to  1  mile. 

5  Scale  of  M.  D. 

6  Clinometer  (if  slope  board  not  available). 


Figure    7. 


Methods : 


At  station  i,  Fig.  7,  orient  the  board  as  described  under  "To  lo- 
cate a  point  by  intersection,"  page  369,  holding  the  board  in 


376  CHAPTER   XXL 

the  hands   in   front  of   the  body  of   the  sketcher  who   faces 

toward  station  2. 
2     Important  points  in  the  vicinity,  such  as  the  railroad  bridge,  the 

stream  juncture,  hill  tops,  are  sighted  for  intersections,  lines 

drawn  as  shown  and  the  sketcher  traverses  (as  under  traverse 

above)  to  station  2. 
J     At  station  2,  he  locates  and  draws  in  all  details  between  station 

1  and  2  to  include  about  300  yards  on  each  side  of  the  road 

(described  under  "Position  Sketching,"  page  374). 

4  The  traverse  is  then  continued  forward  as  described  for  1  and  2. 

5  After   some   practice   in   horizontal   sketching,   as   just   described, 

the  sketcher  will  be  able  to  take  up  contouring  in  combina- 
tion. The  methods  are  as  described  in  paragraph  on  con- 
touring. 

6  Method  to  follow  when  the  travers  runs  off  the  paper  as  at  A, 

Fig.  7 ;  Re-orient  the  board  so  that  the  road  forward  will 
lie  across  the  long  dimensions  of  the  paper;  draw  a  meridian 
parallel  to  the  compass  needle  and  assume  a  point  on  the  new 
sheet  corresponding  to  the  last  point  (A)  plotted  on  the 
first  sheet. 

7  On  completion  of  the  sketch  the  various  sections  will  be  pasted 

together,  so  that  all  the  meridians  are  parallel. 


CUSTOMS  OF  THE  SERVICE.  Z77 


CHAPTER  XXI. 
"CUSTOMS  OF  THE  SERVICE" 

The  following  "Customs  of  the  Service"  are  of  general  interest 
to  enlisted  men: 

A  Post  Noncommissioned  Staff.  It  is  customary  to  show  the  post 
noncommissioned  staff  considerable  consideration  regarding  quarters 
and  privileges.  They  are  not  required  to  attend  roll  calls,  and  are 
generally  allowed  to  leave  the  post  for  less  than  twenty-four  hnnrs 
without  passes,  merely  reporting  their  departure  to  the  officers  under 
whose  immediate  direction  they  are,  and  whose  duty  it  is  to  see  that 
such  absences  shall  not  interfere  with,  any  duty.  They  arc  also  given 
the  privilege  of  purchasing  commissary  stores  on  pass  books  and 
keeping  civilian  clothing  in  their  quarters. 

B  Titles.  I  When  not  on  duty  a  lieutenant  is  addressed  as  "2.1is- 
ter,"  but  when  on  duty,  especially  with  troops,  the  title  "Lieutenant"  is 
usually  used.  Enlisted  men  always  address  lieutenants  as  "Lieu- 
tenant." Some  officers  follow  the  custom  of  using  the  military  title 
when  introducing  lieutenants.  Thus,  for  example,  "I  should  like  to 
present  to  3'ou  Lieutenant  Smith,  of  the  Army,"  thereby  fixing  the  offi- 
cial identity  and  status  of  the  officer. 

2  When  off  duty  older  officers  sometimes  address  juniors  as 
"Smith,"  "Jones,"  etc.,  but  this  does  not  give  the  junior  the  privi- 
lege of  addressing  his  senior  in  any  other  way  than  by  his  proper 
title. 

.?  Officers  with  the  grade  of  captain  and  above,  are  addressed 
as  "Captain,"  "Major,"  etc.,  although  one  sometimes  hears  the  wives  of 
such  officers  who  married  them  when  they  w^ere  lieutenants,  refer  to 
them,  especially  in  conversation  with  friends,  as  "Mister  Jones,"  etc. 
It  is  said  that  with  intimate  friends  Mrs.  Grant  usualh'  referred  to  the 
General  as  "Mr.  Grant." 

4  In  conversation  and  in  non-official  correspondence,  brigadier 
generals,  major-generals  and  lieutenant-generals,  are  referred  to  and 
addressed  as  "General."  Lieutenant-colonels,  under  the  same  condi- 
tions, are  referred  to  and  addressed  as  "Colonel." 


378  CHAPTER    XXL 

5  Whenever  there  is  a  difference  in  title,  except  in  the  case  of 
officers  that  are  intimate  and  of  about  the  same  age  or  length  of  ser- 
vice, the  junior  addresses  the  senior  by  his  title.  Thus,  lieutenants  ad- 
dress captains  as  "Captain;"'  captains  address  majors  as  "Major,"  etc. 
Some  captains,  irrespective  of  intimacy  or  former  associations,  al- 
ways address  majors  as  "Major,"  taking  the  ground  that  propriety 
demands  this,  because  of  the  decided  line  of  demarcation  between  the 
grade  of  major  (field  officer)  and  that  of  captain. 

Officers  of  tlie  same  grade,  except  where  there  is  considerable 
difference  in  age  or  in  date  of  commission,  generally  address  one 
another  by  their  surnames. 

The  prevailing  custom  now  is  to  address  socially  as  "Major" 
or  "Colonel"  surgeons  with  the  rank  of  major,  lieutenant-colonel  and 
colonel.  Captains  of  the  Medical  Corps  are  sometimes  addressed  as 
"Captain"  and  sometimes  as  "Doctor."  Lieutenants  are  addressed  as 
"Doctor."  Officiall}^  they  are  all,  of  course,  addressed  by  their  mili- 
tary titles,  Avhich  have  been  conferred  upon  them  by  law. 

Officers  who  have  held  volunteer  commissions  of  grades  higher 
than  those  they  have  in  the  regular  army,  are  sometimes  addressed 
socially  by  the  titles  of  their  volunteer  rank.  For  instance,  a  captain 
who  held  the  volunteer  commission  of  colonel  or  lieutenant-colonel 
during  the  Spanish-American  War  is  sometimes  addressed  socially  as 
"Colonel."  Likewise,  officers  who  have  been  breveted,  or  who  have 
held  temporaril}^  rank  higher  than  that  which  they  actually  have,  are 
someiimcs  addressed  by  the  title  of  their  brevet  or  former  higher 
rank.  How^ever,  the  custom  of  thus  addressing  officers  is  not  as  gen- 
eral as  it  was  before  the  Spanish-American  war. 

By  law  all  Civil  War  veterans  are  entitled  to  bear  the  official  title,  and  upon 
occasions  of  ceremony  to  wear  the  uniform,  of  the  highest  grade  they  may  have  held 
by  brevet  or  commission,  in   either  the   regular  or  the  volunteer  army. 


A  Noncommissioned  officers  are  addressed  as  "Sergeant"  and 
"Corporal,"  while  privates  are  addressed  as  "Smith,"  "Jones,"  etc. 

In  speaking  to  an  officer  of  an  enlisted  man,  a  soldier  uses  the 
proper  title.  Thus,  "Sergeant  Smith,"  "Corporal  Jones,"  "Private 
Wilson." 

Although  chief  musicians  are  enlisted  men,  having  the  same 
rank  as  regimental  quartermaster  and  regimental  commissary  ser- 
geants, it  is  customary  to  address  them  as  "Mister." 

The   title   of  "Steward"   no   longer  exists   officially,   the   gra.K-   of 


CUSTOMS  OF  THE  SERVICE.  379 

Hospital  Steward  having  been  superceded  by  that  of  Sergeant  (ist 
class.)  However,  through  power  of  custom,  the  sergeants  are  still 
sometimes  addressed  as  "Steward,"  which,  of  course,  is  incorrect. 

Noncommissioned  staff  officers  of  the  Coast  Artillery  are  ad- 
dressed as  follows :  Master  electrician,  as  "Electrician,"  Engineers 
as  "Engineer;"  electrician  sergeants  (1st  and  2nd  class),  as  "Ser- 
geant;" master  gunner,  as  "Gunner;"  fireman,  as  "Fireman."  (G.O. 
21,  'OS.) 

The  word  "soldier,"  in  conversation  and  in  writing,  is  generally 
used  in  contradistinction  to  the  term  "officer."  Soldiers  are  usually 
spoken  of  as  "enlisted  men." 

Funerals.  The  Cavalry  Drill  Regulations  require  that  at  the 
funeral  of  a  mounted  officer  or  enlisted  man,  his  horse,  in  mourning 
caparison,  shall  follow  the  hearse.  It  is  sometimes  customary  for  the 
boots  of  the  deceased  officer  to  be  slung  across  the  saddle,  heels  to  the 
front,  thus  signifying  that  his  march  is  ended.  When  enlisted  men 
wore  boots,  the  same  custom  obtained  in  their  case.  The  spurs  are 
put  on  the  boots,  which  are  placed  in  the  stirrups,  hoods  to  the  rear. 
The  saber  of  the  deceased  soldier  is  sometimes  fastened  t©  the  saddle, 
on  the  same  side  as  w^orn  in  life,  but  slanting  to  the  front — that  is, 
with  the  upper  saber  strap  attached  to  the  cantle  ring  and  the  lower 
saber  strap  to  the  spider  ring.  The  saddle  is  placed  over  the  caparison. 
In  the  case  of  an  officer,  the  saber  of  the  deceased  is  sometimes  placed 
on  the  coffin  and  sometimes  attached  to  the  saddle.  Sometimes  the 
caparisoned  horse  of  the  deceased  is  the  only  horse  allowed  to  enter 
the  cemetery. 

It  is  customary  for  the  senior  noncommissioned  officer  present 
to  command  the  troops  at  the  funeral  of  an  enlisted  man. 

Umbrellas.  It  is  considered  unmilitary  for  an  officer  or  a  sol- 
dier in  uniform  to  use  an  umbrella.  Several  years  ago  the  colonel  and 
some  of  the  officers  of  a  certain  infantry  regiment  used  to  use  um- 
brellas while  in  uniform.  The  regiment  was  soon  jocularly  dubbed 
throughout  the  service  "The  — th  Umbrella" — and  even  to  this  day 
it  is  sometimes  referred  to  in  this  manner. 

Saluting  Ladies.  It  is  customary  for  officers  and  soldiers  wherher 
with   or  without  side  arms,  to  greet  ladies  by  removing  the  cap. 

Muster.  It  is  customary  for  the  mustering  officer  to  muster 
when  he  inspects  their  posts  of  duty,  such  cooks,  janitors  and  others 
as  may  not  have  been  able  to  attend  muster.    Sentinels  on  post  usually 


380 


CHAPTER   XXL 


report  to  the  mustering  officer  as  soon  as  they  are  relieved.  Others 
whom  it  is  not  practicable  to  muster  at  their  posts  of  duty,  report  to 
the  mustering  officer  as  soon  as  practicable,  or  at  some  specified  time 
and  place. 

At  muster  it  is  customary  in  some  regiments  for  recruits  not 
yet  instructed  in  the  use  of  the  rifle,  and  also  for  others  whose  duties 
may  require  their  presence  elsewhere  as  soon  as  practicable,  to  form 
in  the  line  of  file-closers  without  arms.  When  their  names  are  called 
they  answer  "Here,"  and  then,  by  way  of  the  right  flank  of  the  com- 
pany, pass  between  the  company  and  the  mustering  officer,  saluting 
him  as  they  pass,  after  which,  by  way  of  the  left  flank,  the  recruits 
resume  their  places  in  the  line  of  file-closers,  while  those  who  may 
have  any  special  work  to  do  are  usually  permitted  to  leave  the  com- 
pany and  repair  to  their  places  of  duty  after' saluting  the  mustering 
officer.  (Sometimes  these  soldiers  form  in  line,  on  the  left  of  the 
ranks,  and  when  their  names  are  called  they  pass  between  the  com- 
pany and  the  mustering  officer,  after  which  they  take  their  places  in 
the  line  of  file-closers). 

Folding  the  Flag.  When  the  flag  is  lowered  at  the  sounding 
of  the  last  note  of  retreat  every  day,  great  care  should  be  taken  that 
it  shall  not  touch  the  ground.  It  should  be  carefully  folded  into  the 
shape  of  a  cocked  hat.  The  usual  method  of  folding,  which  is  done 
by  two  members  of  the  guard  under  the  direction  of  a  noncommis- 
sioned officer,  is  shown  in  these  illustrations: 


•    •  •    •   •  •   # 
•   •   •   •  •  #   • 


^^^^^^^^^^^^^^H!^B 

(1 
1^  •  •  •  •  •  • 

•  •  •  •  •  •  • 

*■= 

■I^IHiHiBHBlBKH 

•  •  it  ir  ir  *  • 

•    it' if'  ir  i(  ir  if 

'     ^  <^  « 


TOLOED   fLAa 


CUSTOMS  OF  THE  SERVICE.  ^81 

(Note:  The  post  flag  may  be  folded  into  either  three  or  four  folds,  ea;h  fold 
thus  being  either  about  2J  ft.  or  3^  ft.) 

.Army  Bands  and  members  thereof  are  not  permitted  to  receive 
remuneration  for  furnishing  music  outside  the  limits  of  military  posts 
when  the  furnishing  of  such  music  places  them  in  competition  with 
local  civilian  bands.  (G.  O.  80,  '08,  page  8.)  However,  under  other 
conditions  they  may,  with  the  consent  of  the  commanding  officer,  ac- 
cept outside  engagements. 

As  a  rule,  10  per  cent,  of  the  gross  receipts  from  such  engage- 
ments goes  to  the  Regiment  Fund,  but  in  some  regiments  it  is  10 
per  cent  of  the  net  receipts,  i.  e.,  10  per  cent  of  what  is  left  after 
street  car  fare,  railway  fare,  hotel  expenses  and  other  reasonable 
expenditures  have  been  deducted. 

The  author,  however,  knows  of  one  regiment  in  which  25  per 
cent,  goes  to  the  Regimental  Fund,  and  in  another  regiment,  50  per 
cent. 

After  the  share  of  the  Regimental  Fund  has  been  deducted 
from  the  proceeds,  the  balance  is  divided  amongst  the  mernbers  of 
the  band  in  various  ways  in  different  regiments.  For  example,  (a)  pro 
rata  amongst  the  members  of  the  band,  except  that  the  Chief  Musician 
gets  twice  as  much  as  the  others;  (b)  the  Chief  Musician  receives 
four  times  as  much  as  a  private,  and  the  other  noncommissioned  offi- 
cers receive  amounts  in  proportion  to  their  rates  of  pay  proper; 
(c)  all  are  paid  in  proportion  to  their  rates  of  pay  proper;  (d)  the 
amount  is  divided  equally  amongst  those  who  participate  in  the  en- 
gagement; (e)  the  amount  is  distributed  by  the  Chief  Musician,  each 
man  being  paid,  as  is  customary  in  civilian  bands  and  orchestras,  i.  e., 
according  to  the  instrument  played  and  the  work  done. 

It  is  also  customary  to  show  the  band  as  much  consideration 
as  possible.  In  one  or  more  regiments,  for  instance,  the  band  is  not 
required  to  attend  reveille — in  other  regiments,  members  of  the  band 
who  have  filled  an  engagement  the  night  before  are  excused  from 
reveille  roll  call. 

In  some  regiments  the  band  turns  out  and  plays  for  companies 
arriving  at  or  leaving  the  post,  and  at  reveille  on  July  Fourth  and 
February  twenty-second,  making  a  circuit  of  the  garrison. 

Chief  Musicians.  In  the  majority  of  regiments  the  Chief  Musi- 
cians are  paid  from  $10  to  $20  a  month  extra,  depending  upon  their 
merits,  the  condition  of  the  Regimental  Fund  and  the  amount  of  money 


382  CHAPTER    XXI. 

they  make  on  the  outside.  However,  in  at  least  six  regiments  the 
author  knows  of,  the  Chief  Musicians  receive  no  extra  compensation. 

Chief  Musicians,  being  as  a  rule,  above  the  average  enlisted 
man  in  education,  refinement  and  artistic  temperament,  they  are  gen- 
erally shovvn  a  certain  amount  of  cordiality  by  officers.  Naturally 
enough,  the  treatment  of  a  Chief  Musician  depends  in  a  great  measure 
upon  his  personality;  if  he  is  a  worthy,  self-respecting,  modest  man, 
there  is  no  reason  why  he  should  not  receive  the  greatest  respect  and 
consideration,  without  of  course,  being  accorded  familiar  social  re- 
cognition by  officers. 

Chief  Musicians,  like  all  other  enlisted  men,  are  required  to 
salute  officers.  Many  officers,  however,  in  acknowledging  the  salute, 
make  some  such  remark  as  "Good  morning,  Mr.  Smith." 

It  is  customary  to  accord  Chief  Musicians  as  many  privileges 
and  grant  them  as  many  reasonable  requests  as  is  consistent  with 
discipline  and  the  best  interests  of  the  service.  For  example,  they 
are  generally  given  separate  quarters;  permitted  to  leave  the  post 
without  written  passes,  but  merely  by  verbal  permission  of  the  Adju- 
tant; not  required  to  attend  roll  calls,  etc. 

A  The  Colors  Kept  at  the  Colonel's  Quarters.     In  some  regim'^nts 

it  is  customary  for  the  National  and  the  Regimental  Colors  to  be  kept 
at  the  Colonel's  quarters,  and  not  at  his  office. 

(By  colors  is  meant  the  national  and  the  regimental  flags  that  are  carried  by 
foot  troops;  by  "standards"  is  meant  the  national  and  the  regimental  flags  that  are 
carried  by  mounted  troops,  and  which  are  smaller  than  "colors."  Colors  and  stand- 
ards may  be  of  either  silk  or  bunting. 

By  "flag"  is  meant  the  national  emblem  that  waves  from  the  flagstaff  and  other 
stationary  poles.     "Flags"  are  always  of  bunting.) 

B  A  junior   walks,    rides,   or   drives    on   the   left   of  a   senior   and 

in  the  first  case  always  keeps  step  with  him. 

C  "I    desire,"   "I    wish,"   and    similar   expressions,    when    used   by 

the  commanding  officer,  or,  "The  commanding  officer  desires,"  etc., 
when  used  by  the  adjutant,  are  tantamount  to  orders. 

D  In  delivering  verbal  messages  from  a  senior  to  a  junior,  or  one 

officer  to  another  of  the  same  or  nearly  the  same  rank,  soldiers  use 
the  form,  "Captain  Jones  presents  his  compliments  to  Lieutenant 
Smith,  and  says,"  etc.  Formerly  a  junior  officer  never  "presented  his 
compliments"  to  a  senior,  but  the  prevailing  custom  at  present  is  as 
stated. 


CUSTOMS   OF  THE   SERVICE.  383 

A  One   knock  before   entering  a  room   is   considered   "the   official 

knock"  and  is  a  signal  for  everyone  within  to  come  to  attention. 

B  Formal  dances  given  by  soldiers  are  sometimes  opened  by  offi- 

cers and  ladies  dancing  the  first  dance. 

C        Officers   and   enlisted   men    wear   side   arms   and   white   gloves    when 
appearing   as    witnesses    before    a    general   court-martial.      The    right 
hand  glove  is  always  removed  before  being  sworn. 

D  In  some  commands,  the  riding  of  public  horses  about  the  t)Ost 

by  either  officers  or  enlisted  men,  at  gaits  faster  than  the  trot,  is  for- 
bidden. 

E  At    militar}^    weddings    the    bridegroom,    best    man    and    ushers 

wear  side  arms,  and  the  bride  cuts  the  wedding  cake  with  her  hus- 
band's sword. 

F  "The  Army  Toast  to  the  Bride,"  usually  preceded  by  some  ap- 

propriate remarks  welcoming  her  into  the  Army,  is  drunk  by  hav- 
ing the  best  man  and  groomsmen  draw  their  sabers  together,  at 
the  command,  "1.  Draw,  2.  Saber,"  and  then  crossing  them  above  the 
bride's  head,  after  which  the  glasses,  passed  by  a  waiter,  are  taken  in 
the  left  hand.     The  toast  may  be  concluded  with,  "How!" 

G  A  very  pretty  old  Army  custom  that  one  sometimes  sees,  is  the 

baptizing  and  christening  of  a  baby  under  the  regimental  color  of  its 
father,  the  function  taking  place  at  home,  with  something  to  drink  to 
the  "recruit's"  health. 

WORDS   TO    THE   ARMY   TRUMPET   CALLS 
Reveille: 

1  can't  get  'em  up,  I  can't  get  'em  up,  I  can't  get  'em  up  in  the  morning; 
I  can't  get  'em  up,  I  can't  get  'em  up,  I  can't  get  *em  up  at  all; 

Corp'rals  worse  than  the  privates  ; 

Sergeants  worse  than  the  corporals; 

Lieutenants  worse  than  the  sergeants. 

And  the  capt'ns  the  worst  of  all. 

Cli  or  us — 
I  can't  get  'em  up,  T  can't  get  'em  up,  etc. 


Mess  Call: 


Soup-y,    soup-y,   soup, 

Without    a    single    bean; 
Pork-y,    pork-y,    pork, 

Without    a    streak    of    lean; 
Coffee,  coffee,   coffee, 

Without   any   cream  I 

(Or,  the  weakest  ever  seen!) 


384 


CHAPTER    XXI. 


Sick  Call: 


Stable  Call; 


Come  and  get  your  quinine,  come  and  get  your  pills, 
Oh!   come  and  get  your  quinine,   come  and  get  your  pills. 

Come   all    who   are   ahle   and    go    to    the   stable, 

And   water   your   horses   and    give   'em    some   corn: 

For   if  you   don't  do  it,   the   Col'nel   will  know   it. 
And  then   you  will  rue  it,   sure  as  you're  born. 


Taps: 


Fades  the  light; 
And  afar 
Goeth  day, 
Cometh  night;  ' 
And  a  star 
Leadeth  all, 
Speedeth  all 
To  their  rest. 


T  ove,  good  night. 
When  the  day 
Afust  thou  go 
And  the  night 
Day  is  done. 
Leave  me  so  ? 
Fare  thee  well ; 
Night  is  on. 

ARMY  SLANG 


Another    Version. 
When   your  last 
Day    is    past, 
From    afar 
Son^e    bright    star 
O'er    your    grave 
Watch    will   keep. 
While  you  sleep 
With   the  brave. 


R-ACHE — to  complain. 

Beans — the    commissary    sergeant. 

Bean-shooter — a  commissary  officer. 

Belly-ache — to   complain. 

Black   strap — liquid   coffee. 

Blind — sentenced   by  court-martial   to   forfeiture   of  pay  without   confinement. 

Bob-Tail — a  dishonorable  discharge,  or  a  discharge  without  honor;  to  be 
"bobtailed" — to  be  dishonorably  discharged  or  to  be  given  a  discharge  without  honor. 

Bone — to  study;    to  try;    to  cultivate. 

Bone  bootlick  on — to  cultivate  the  favor  of. 

BooTLiCK — to  flatter. 

Bow-legs — cavalrymen. 

Buck-private — a  term  sometimes  used  in  referring  to  a  private. 

Bucking  for  Orderly — giving  clothing  and  accoutrements  extra  cleaning  so 
as   to   compete    for   orderly. 

Bunkie — a  soldier  who  shares  the  shelter   of  a   comrade. 

Bust — to'  reduce   a   non-commissioned    officer   to   the   grade   of  private. 

Butcher — the   company    barber. 

Canned  Horse — canned  beef. 

Chief — name  by  which  the  chief  musician  of  the  band  is  usually  called  by 
enlisted   men. 

Cit — a  civilian. 

Cits — civilian  clothes. 

C.  O. — commanding  officer. 

Coffee  Cooler — one  who  seeks  easy  details  away  from  troops;  one  who  is 
always  looking  for  an  easy  job. 

Cold-feet — fear,  lack  of  courage  (to  have  cold  feet  is  to  be  afraid,  to  lack 
courage). 


th 


CUSTOMS  OF  THE  SERVICE.  385 

Commissaries — groceries. 
Crawl — to  admonish. 

Dog-robber — name  by   which   the  enlisted  men   call   a  soldier  who   works  for   an 
officer.      (An  offensive  term,  the  use  of  which  generally  results   in  trouble.) 
DouGH-BOY — infantryman. 
DouGH-puNCHER — the  baker. 
Duff — Any    sweet   edible. 
File — a   number  on   the   lineal   list. 
FoGV — ten  per  cent  increase  of  officers'   pay  for  each  five  years'  service. 

Found — to  be  found  deficient  or  wanting  in  anything,  especially  an  examination. 

French  Leave — unauthorized  absence.  Absent  on  French  leave — absent  with- 
out   authority. 

Goat — junior   officer   in   post,    regiment,   etc. 

Goaty — awkward,    ignorant. 

Guard  House  Lawyer — a  soldier  with  a  smattering  knowledge  of  regulations 
and  military  law;  quite  loquacious  and  liberal  with  advice  and  counsel  to  men  in  the 
Guard  House  or  other  trouble 

Hardtack — hardbread,    biscuits. 

Hike — a  march;    to  hike,  to  march. 

Hive — to  discover,  to  catch. 

HoBO — the   provost   sergeant. 

Holy  Joe — the  chaplain. 

Hop — a  dance. 

How — form  of  salutation'  in  drinking,  meaning  "Here's  to  your  health."  "My 
regards,"  etc. 

L  C. — condemned  by  an  inspector. 

Jaw-bone — credit    (to   get  things  on   "jaw-bone,"   to   buy   on  credit). 

Jump — to  admonish. 

K.  O. — the  commanding  officer. 

Major — name  by  which  the  sergeant-major  is  usually  called  by  the  enlisted 
men. 

Mule-skinner — a  teamster. 

NoN-CoM — non-commissioned  officer. 

O.  D. — the  officer   of  the  day. 

Officers    Line     /  ^.^^  ^^^^  ^^  houses  where  the  officers  and  their  famiiies  live. 

Officers    Row      \ 

Old  Issue — an  old  soldier. 

Old  File — an  old  officer. 

On  Official  Terms — not  to  be  on   speaking  terms   except  officially. 

On  the  Carpet — called  before   the  commanding  officer  for  admonition. 

Openers — cathartic  pills. 

Orderly  Eucker — a  soldier,  who,  when  going  on  guard,  strives  by  extra  neat- 
ness of  appearance  to  be  designated  as  orderly  for  the   commanding  officer. 

Orderly  Room — company  office. 

Pills — the  hospital  steward. 

Punk— light  bread. 

Q.  M. — the  quartermaster. 

Q.  M.  D. — quartermaster's  department. 

Ranked-out — to  be  compelled  to  vacate  by  a  senior,  as  "to  be  ranked-out  of 
quarters." 


386  CHAPTER   XXL 

Red-tape — official  formality;  that  is,  the  close  or  excessive  observance  of 
forms  and  routine   in  the  transaction   of  business. 

Regimental  Monkey — the  drum  major. 

Re-up — to   re-enlist   at  once. 

Rookie — a  new  recruit. 

Sand-rat — an  officer  or  soldier  on  duty  in  the  rifle  pit  at  target  practice. 

Saw-bone — the  doctor. 
•     Shave-tail — a    new    second    lieutenant.      So    called    after    the   voung.    unbroken 
mules  in  the  Quartermaster's   Department    ("Shave-tails"). 

Shutters — camphor   or  opium   pills. 

Sinkers — dumplings. 

Sky-scout — the  chaplain. 

Sky-pilot — the  chaplain. 

Slap-jacks — pan  cakes. 

Slum — a  stew  of  meat,   potatoes  and  onions,   mostly  potatoes  and  onions 

Soap  Suds  Row — the  laundresses'  quarters. 

Soldier,  to — To  soldier,  to  serve;  also  to  shirk. 

Soldiers'  One  Per  Cent — one  hundred  per  cent. 
Sow-BELLY — bacon. 

Stars  and  Stripes — beans. 

Striker — a  soldier  who  works  for  an  officer. 

Take-on — to  re-enlist  before  the  expiration  of  three  months  after  discharge 

The  Old  Man — term  sometimes  used  by  officers  and  soldiers  in  referring  to 
the  commanding  officer;  sometimes  used  by  soldiers  in  referring  to  their  company  com- 
mander. 

To  Take  Another   Blanket — same  as   "Take-on." 

Top  Sergeant — first  sergeant. 

Yellow-leg — cavalryman. 

Youngster — a  young  officer  (a  first  or  second  lieutenant.) 

Wagon-soldier — light  or  field  artilleryman. 

Wind-jammer — a    trumpeter     or    bandsman. 

WoOD-BUTCHER — company  artificer, 

THE  ORIGIN  OF  CERTAIN  PRACTICES  IN  THE  SERVICE 

Firing  Three  Volleys  at  Military  Funerals.  In  the  funeral  rites 
of  the  Romans  the  casting  of  the  earth  THREE  times  upon  the  coffin 
constituted  "the  burial."  It  was  customary  among  the  Romans  to 
call  the  dead  THREE  times  by  name,  which  ended  the  funeral  cere- 
mony, after  which  the  friends  and  relatives  of  the  deceased  pronounced 
the  word  "Vale"  (farewell)  THREE  times  as  they  departed  from  the 
tomb.  So  that  today,  when  a  squad  of  soldiers  fires  THREE  volleys 
over  a  grave,  they  are,  in  accordance  with  this  old  Roman  custom, 
bidding  their  dead  comrade  "Farewell,"  THREE  times. 

The  number  THREE  was  doubtless  selected  by  the  Romans 
because  of  its  symbolical  and  mystical  significance,  3,  5,  and  7  being 
so    considered   in    all   recorded    history.      We    have,    for    instance,    the 


CUSTOMS  OF  THE  SERVICE.  387 

Holy  Trinity,  the  Three  Graces,  the  frequent  recurrence  of  THREE 
in  the  Masonic  ritual,  etc.  In  the  old  Army  it  was  customary  in  some 
regiments  when  a  soldier  was  absent  from  roll  call  for  the  First 
Sergeant  to  call  the  absentee's  name  again  THREE  times  at  the  end 
of  the  roll.  It  is  really  interesting  to  note  to  what  extent  the  number 
THREE  enters  our  daily  lives:  Boys  start  their  races  by  "One,  two, 
THREE— Go!,"  the  baseball  fan  says  "THREE  strikes— and  out!," 
a  ship  before  leaving  her  berth  blows  her  whistle  THREE  times  and 
gives  the  same  number  of  whistles  as  a  salute  when  passing  another 
ship  at  sea;  the  enthusiast  gives  his  "THREE  cheers!"  etc. 

Sounding  Taps  at  Military  Funerals.  This  practice  involves  a 
deeply  felt  sentiment — "rest  in  peace."  In  the  daily  life  of  the  soldier 
the  sounding  of  taps  at  11  o'clock  p.  m.,  signifying  "Lights  out,"  an- 
nounces the  end  of  the  day,  implying  that  the  cares  and  labors  of  the 
soldier  are  ended  for  that  day.  So  does  the  sounding  of  taps  at  his 
funeral  signify  the  end  of  his  day — the  "Lights  out"  of  his  life — his 
"rest  in  peace." 

There  is  no  other  call  so  beautiful,  so  significant,  so  replete 
with  associations  of  comrades  dead  and  gone — there  is  no  other  call 
that  arouses  so  much  sentiment,  so  many  emotions  in  the  soul  of  the 
soldier  as  the  sounding  of  "Taps."     Indeed, 

"Fades  the  light; 
And  afar 
Goeth  day, 
Cometh  night; 
And  a  star 
Leadeth  all 
To  their  rest." 

It  is  known  that  the  custom  of  sounding  taps  at  military  fun- 
erals obtained  in  some  regiments  during  the  Mexican  War,  and  there 
is  an  impression  in  some  quarters  that  the  practice  existed  prior  to 
that  time,  it  having  been  formally  inaugurated  at  West  Point  about 
1840.  However,  be  that  as  it  may,  it  is  evident  that  the  custom  in 
its  present  form  did  not  become  general  until  after  the  Civil  War,  as 
the  following  from  the  regimental  history  of  the  old  2d  Artillery 
shows: 

During  the  Peninsular  Campaign  in  1862  a  soldier  of  Tidball's 
battery — "A"  of  the  2d  Artillery — was  buried  at  a  time  when  the 
battery  occupied  an  advanced  position,  concealed  in  the  woods.  It 
was  unsafe  to  fire  the  customary  three  rounds  over  the  grave,  on  ac- 


388 


CHAPTER   XXL 


count  of  the  proximity  of  the  enemy,  and  it  occured  to  Captain  Tid- 
ball  that  the  sounding  of  Taps  would  be  the  most  appropriate  cere- 
mony that  could  be  substituted.  The  custom  thus  originated  was 
taken  up  throughout  the  Army  of  the  Potomac,  and  finally  confirmed 
by  orders. 

The  Practice  of  Saluting. 

1  With  the  hand. 

(a)  The  custom  is  supposed  by  some  to  have  come  from  a 
Roman  practice  dating  back  to  the  Borgias,  or  even  earlier.  In  those 
days  assassination  was  so  common  by  dagger  that  inferiors  com- 
ing into  the  presence  of  superiors  were  required  to  raise  the  hand, 
palm  to  the  front,  thus  showing  there  was  no  dagger  concealed  in  it. 
Time  and  custom  have  modified  the  requirement  to  the  present 
method  of  saluting. 

(b)  There  are  others  who  are  inclined  to  this  view:  From  the 
beginning  of  time  inferiors  have  been  required  to  uncover  before 
their  superiors,  and  equals  to  acknowledge  each  other's  presence  by 
some  courtesy.  It  was  not  so  very  long  ago  when  a  sentinel  saluted 
not  only  with  his  gun  but  by  taking  off  his  hat  also  (viz.,  in  the 
British  army  during  the  Revolution).  Complicated  headgear  like  the 
bearskin  and  the  helmet  could  not  be  readily  removed,  and  the  act 
of  removing  the  hat  degenerated  into  the  movement  of  the  hand  to 
the  visor  as  if  the  hat  were  going  to  be  removed,  and  finally  became 
conventionalized  as  at  present. 

(c)  And  there  are  those  of  a  romantic  turn  of  mind  who  favor 
this  version:  In  the  days  of  the  jousts  and  tournaments,  after  the 
crowning  of  the  Queen  of  Love  and  Beauty  the  knights  passed  in  re- 
view before  her  throne.  Each  as  he  drew  near  raised  his  mailed  right 
hand  to  shade  his  eyes — a  chivalric  way  of  intimating  that  he  would 
be  dazzled  by  her  beauty.  This  knightly  homage  passed  on  down  the 
ages  to  become  the  soldier's  salute. 

2  With  the  saber. 

The  practice  come's  from  the  custom  during  the  Crusades,  of 
knights,  when  receiving  orders,  always  to  call  upon  God  to  witness 
their  assumption  of  the  duty  imposed,  by  raising  the  sword  to  the 
lips  and  kissing  the  cross  formed  by  the  guard  and  body  of  the 
weapon. 

The  dipping  of  the  saber  point  in  saluting  signifies  submission. 


CUSTOMS  OF  THE   SERVICE.         •  389 

(Note:  In  the  personal  salutes  is  also  seen  the  survival  of  the  custom  of  the 
saluter  placing  himself  unarmed  in  the  power  of  the  saluted.  The  touching  or 
removal  of  the  cap,  dropping  the  point  of  the  sword,  presenting  arms,  firing  cannon 
and  small  arms,  manning  yards,  etc.,  symbolize  the  removal  of  the  helmet',  giving 
up  the  weapon,  exposing  the  crews,  abandoning  the  guns,  etc.) 

Removing  the  Right  Hand  Glove  When  Sworn  as  a  Witness 
Before  a  Court-Martial.  The  raising  of  the  hands  and  eyes  to  heaven 
in  taking  an  oath  is  of  great  antiquity,  being  a  sort  of  prayer.  The 
head  was  bared  because  of  respect  for  Deity,  to  whom  appeal  was 
made.  After  Christianity  developed  and  the  Bible  was  printed,  oaths 
were  taken  by  placing  the  bare  hand  on  the  book,  head  uncovered, 
during  the  administration  of  the  oath,  and  at  its  completion  the  persons 
swearing  kissed  the  Bible ;  all  this  reverently  in  an  appeal  to  Deity 
to  witness  the  obligation  taken.  This  ceremony  was  introduced  in 
this  country  and  continued  until  twenty  or  thirty  years  ago.  But  the 
Bible  was  not  always  at  hand  and  the  general  custom  has  reverted  to 
the  raising  of  the  bared  right  hand  with  the  head  uncovered. 

The  practice  of  removing  the  right  hand  glove  comes  from  the 
fact  that  in  olden  times  all  criminals  were  branded  in  the  palm  of  the 
right  hand,  and  consequently,  in  order  to  ascertain  whether  a  witness 
was  a  criminal,  all  witnesses  wearing  gloves  were  required  to  bare  the 
right    hand    before    being    sworn. 

Medals  and  Other  Insignia  are  worn  on  the  left  breast  because 
it  was  the  shield  side  of  the  Crusaders,  and  furthermore,  because  it 
was  near  the  loyal  heart  that  the  knight  placed  his  badge  of  honor 
and  fealt}'  to  his  king. 

Twenty-one  Guns  the  International  Salute..  This  practice,  like 
many  of  our  others,  we  got  from  the  British. 

A  proposition  originating  with  .the  British  Government  and 
adopted  by  the  United  States  August  18,  1875,  provides  for  "Salutes 
to  be  returned  gun  for  gun,"  the  British  salute  at  that  time  consisting 
of  21  guns. 

So,  that  is  the  reason  why  our  international  salute  consists  of 
twenty-one  guns.  The  question  now  arises,  "Why  did  the  British  select 
the  particular  number  tzventy-onef" 

Originally  zvar-ships  fired  salutes  of  seven  guns,  the  number 
seven,  "The  Sacred  Number,"  having  probably  been  selected  because  of 
the  mystical  and  symbolical  significance  given  it  in  the  Bible  as  well  as 
among   the   principal    nations    of    antiquity.     The   origin    of   the    mystical 


390  CHAPTER    XXL 

and  symbolical  significance  is  doubtless  astronomical  or  rather  astrolo- 
gical, viz.,  the  observation  of  the  seven  planets  and  the  phases  of  the 
moon  changing  every  seventh  day.  In  the  Bible  we  find  the  Creation 
was  completed  in  seven  days;  every  seventh  year  was  sabbatical  and  the 
seven  times  seventh  year  ushered  in  the  jubilee  year,  etc.,  etc. 

Although  by  regulation  the  salute  at  sea  was  seven  guns,  shore 
batteries  were  allowed  to  fire  three  guns  to  the  ships  one.  The  dif- 
ference was  due  to  the  fact  that  in  those  days  sodium  nitrate,  which 
easily  deliquesces,  was  largely  used  in  the  manufacture  of  powder  and 
consequently  the  powder  easily  spoiled  at  sea,  whereas  it  could  be 
better  kept  on  land,  where  three  times  as  many  guns  were,  therefore, 
prescribed.  The  multiplier,  three,  was  probably  selected  because,  like 
seven,  it  has  been  from  remote  antiquity,  a  number  of  mystical  and 
symbolical  significance. 

After  potassium  nitrate,  which  is  not  as  perishable  as  sodium 
nitrate,  came  into  general  use  in  the  manufacture  of  powder,  and  it 
was  not,  therefore,  so  difficult  to  keep  powder  at  sea,  the  number  of 
guns  for  the  naval  international  salute  was  raised  to  equal  the  number 
of  guns  given  by  land  forces — that  is  twenty-one. 

By  common  agreement,  the  international  salutes  of  all  nations 
are  now  21  guns.  International  salutes  grew  out  of  custom  and  usage, 
and  therefore  have  a  basis  similar  to  that  of  the  common  law  of 
England.  The  custom  began  with  the  requirement  of  strong  nations 
to  exact  from  foreign  vessels  acts  of  submission,  even  by  force,  but 
in  the  17th  century  the  question  of  ceremonial  became  a  matter  of 
negotiation  and  frequently  of  hostility  between  the  states  of  Europe. 
Although  saluting  was  originally  forced  upon  the  vessels  of  smaller 
nations  to  compel  them  to  recognize  the  superiority  of  the.  greater, 
in  the  final  recognition  of  the  principle  of  equality  between  nations 
it  became  customary  to  render  salutes  "gun  for  gun." 

Twenty-one  Guns  the  Presidential  Salute.  The  Presidential 
salute  has  not  always  been  21  guns.  For  instance,  in  1812  and  1821  it 
was  the  same  as  the  number  of  states — i.  e.,  18  and  24,  respectively, 
which   was   also   our   international   salute. 

In  1821  the  President  and  the  Vice-President  received  the  same 
number  of  guns.  Before  this  time  the  Vice-President  had  received 
only  15  guns. 

Since  1841  the  President  has  received  a  salute  of  21  guns  and 
the  Vice-President   17. 


CUSTOMS  OF  THE   SERVICE.  391 

The"Salute  to  the  Union,"  commemorative  of  the  Declaration 
of  Independence  and  consisting  of  one  gun  for  each  State,  is  fired 
at  noon  on  July  4  at  every  post  provided  with  suitable  artillery.  The 
salute  at  present  consists  of  46  guns. 

Dough  Boy.  The  following  versions  are  given  of  the  derivation 
of  the   expression   "Dough   Boy"  as   meaning  "Infantryman": 

1  In  olden  times,  when  Infantrymen  used  to  clean  their  white 
trimmings  with  pipe-clay,  if  caught  in  the  rain  the  whiting  would 
run,  forming  a  kind  of  dough — hence  the  sobriquet  "dough  boy." 

2  The  tramp  of  Infantry  marching  in  mud  sounds  as  if  their 
shoes  were  being  w^orked  and  pressed  in  "dough." 

3  From  "Adobe"  (mud)  then  "Dobie" — the  idea  being  in- 
fantrymen are  the  soldiers  who  have  to  march  in  the  mud;  hence  the 
expressions  used  in  the  sixties  and  early  seventies  in  referring  to  In- 
fantrymen as  "Dobie  crushers,"  "Dobie  makers"  and  IMud  crushers." 

4  However,  Infantrymen  think  they  are  called  "Dough  boys" 
because  they  are  always  "kneaded"    (needed)! 

(Probably  loyal  Infantrymen  think  this  for  the  same  reason  that  good  Artillery- 
men say  Artillerymen  are  called  "Wagon  soldiers"  because  they  are  the  ones  who  al- 
ways "deliver  the  goods.") 

How.  The  expression  "How,"  used  by  Army  men  in  drinking, 
is  equivalent  to  the  expressions  "Here's  to  your  health,"  "My  best 
regards,"  etc. 

Some  think  it  is  merely  the  Indian  corruption  of  "How  d'ye 
do?" — the  usual  salutation  of  the  white  man,  abbreviated  by  the 
Indian  into  "How,"  and  taken  up  and  used  by  officers  and  soldiers 
who  in  the  early  daj's  of  frontier  service  were  thrown  in  constant 
contact  with  the  Indians. 

However,   on   the   other   hand,   there   are   others   who  believe   the 
expression   is   derived   from    the    Indian    language   direct.      Colonel    H. 
L.  Scott,  Superintendent  of  the  U.  S.  iMilitary  Academy,  and  a  recog 
nized  authority  on  the  Indian  language,  says: 

"The  word  has  been  widely  used  by  the  Indians  of  many  tribes 
having  different  spoken  languages.  The  earliest  reference  is  from 
Alexander  McKenzie  (discoverer  of  the  McKenzie  River),  1789. 
speaking  of  the  Cree  Indians,  p.  71:  He  then  sits  down  and  the  whole 
company  declare  their  approbation  and  thanks  by  uttering  the  word 
*ho.'  The  next  reference  is  found  in  Bradbury's  Travels  in  the  In 
terior   of   North   America,    1809-1811.      This   book   has   been    reprinted 


392  CHAPTER   XXI. 

in  Early  Western  Travels,  edited  by  Reuben  Goldthwaite,  vol.  V.,  116: 
Whenever  their  performance  (Ricarees,  Mandans,  Gros  Ventres  ot 
the  Missouri  singing)  ceased  the  termination  was  extremely  abrupt 
by  pronouncing  the  word  'how'  in  a  quick  elevated  tone.  Consult 
also  Alice  Fletcher's  Indian  Songs.  Century  Magazine,  vol.  XXV,  p. 
421,  and  Archaeological  and  Ethnological  papers,  Peabody  Museum, 
No.  5. 

"Governor  I.  I.  Stevens  in  Pac.  R.  R.  Report,  vol.  12,  part  1,  p. 
75,  1853,  Among  the  Assinniboines — 'My  remarks  seemed  to  make  a 
very  favorable  impression  and  were  received  with  every  mark  of 
respect.  Their  approbation  was  shown  as  each  paragraph  was  inter- 
preted by  the  ejaculation  'how' — a  common  word  answering  every 
purpose  of  salutation,  approval,  concurrence. 

"Dr.  Washington  Matthews  in  his  able  monograph  on  the  Hi- 
datsa  Indians,  written  probably  about  1868,  has,  p.  147,  'H-a-o,'  a 
word  used  to  denote  approbation,  gratification,  agreement,  assent — a 
greeting.  It  is  common  to  many  Indian  languages.  It  is  usually 
written  'how'  by  travelers,  the  same  as  the  English  word  'how.'  It 
is  difficult  to  determine  the  best  mode  of  spelling.  Mr.  Riggs  in  his 
Dakota  dictionary  writes  it  'hao'  and  'ho,'  both  of  which  forms  are 
used  here  also,  although  the  Tidatsas  rarely  say  'ho.'  I  have  heard 
it  myself  with  the  above  signification  used  among  the  Indians  of  the 
Southern  Plains — sometimes  with  the  form  '  'ehow,  ehow' — 'thanks,' 
among  the  Kiowas,  Comanches,  Kiowa,  Apaches,  Caddos,  Wichltas 
and  Delawares,  Southern  Cheyennes  and  Arapahoes  in  Oklahoma. 

"The  above  references  show  the  use  of  the  word  on  the  plains 
from  the  Saskatchewan  River  to  the  Rio  Grande,  from  1789  at  least 
until  the  present  day.  The  following  from  Colonel  Rodenbough's 
book  From  Everglade  to  Canon  with  the  2nd  Dragoons,  p.  55,  is  an 
account  of  the  origin  of  the  use  of  the  word  how  in  the  Army: 

"Coacoochee,  a  chief  of  the  Seminoles  in  Florida,  was  invited  to 
meet  Col.  Worth  at  Fort  Cummings  near  Big  Cypress  Swamp  in 
Florida,  March  5,  1841.  Coacoochee  came  to  the  meeting  and  for  cer- 
tain reasons  was  treated  with  great  consideration.  .  .  .  On  this 
occasion  originated  the  expression  'Hough,'  which  as  an  army  senti 
ment,  has  been  uttered  by  countless  lips  from  the  Gulf  of  Mexico 
to  the  St.  Lawrence,  from  the  Atlantic  to  the  Pacific;  and  even  the 
banqueting  halls  of  foreign  lands  have  not  been  strangers  to  the 
little  word,  so  full  of  joyous  memories  to  the  American  soldiers, 
although  few  know  when,  how,  or  where  it  was  coined. 


CUSTOMS   OF  THE  SERVICE.  393 

"Coacoochee,  observing  that  the  officers  of  the  garrison  used 
certain  expressions,  such  as  'Here's  luck!'  'The  Old  Grudge!'  etc., 
before  drinking,  asked  Gopher  John,  a  negro  interpreter,  what  thej^ 
said.  John  was  puzzled  but  finally  explained  by  saying,  'It  means, 
How  D'ye  do!'  Whereupon  the  chief  with  great  dignity  lifted  his 
cup,  and,  elevating  it  above  his  head,  exclaimed  in  a  deep  guttural 
and  triumphant  voice,  'Hough!' 

"The  word  was  at  once  adopted  by  the  officers  of  the  Infantry 
and  Second  Dragoons,  and  its  use  has  spread  rapidly  through  the 
whole  Army. 

"Sounding  Off"  at  Parade  and  Guard  Mount.  At  parade  and 
at  guard  mount  when  the  adjutant  gives  the  command,  "Sound  off," 
it  is  customary  for  the  band  to  play  three  chords  or  flourishes,  called 
"THE  THREE  CHEERS,"  before  beginning  to  play  the  march  and 
marching  up  and  down  in  front  of  the  command.  After  the  band  has 
returned  to  its  place  and  finished  playing  the  march,  the  "THREE 
CHEERS"  are  again  sounded. 

,  This   practice   comes   from   the    following   custom   that   obtained 
during  the   Crusades: 

Soldiers  that  had  been  selected  to  go  on  the  Crusades  were 
often  formed  in  line  with  troops  not  so  selected.  The  band  would 
march  past  and  countermarch  only  in  front  of  soldiers  designated 
for  Crusade  service,  thus  signaling  out  and  dedicating  to  the  cause 
these  particular  men.  It  is  very  probable  that  the  assembled  populace 
did  considerable  cheering  during  this  part  of  the  ceremony  and  it  is 
quite  likely  that  "THE  THREE  CHEERS"  are  symbolical  of  that 
cheering. 

Parades  and  Reviews  originated  in  the  days  of  feudalism  when 
rulers,  as  a  suggestive  display  of  their  strength,  were  wont  to  parade 
their  soldiers  in  the  presence  of  other  rulers. 

The  Practice  of  Hoisting  The  Flag  to  the  Peak  of  the  Flag- 
Staff  before  Lowering  it  to  and  from  Half-Staff  comes  from  the  Navy, 
where  the  flag  is  invariably  saluted  when  hoisted  and  also  before  being 
lowered.  The  saluting  position  of  the  flag  is  at  the  peak  of  the  flag- 
staff— hence  the  flag  must  be  raised  to  that  position  before  it  can  be 
saluted  upon  being  placed  at  half-staff  or  lowered  therefrom. 

Significance  of  Our  Insignia  of  Rank.  The  second  lieutenant 
stands  on  the  level  ground,  looking  up  to  his  superiors  at  varying  al- 
titudes above  him.     Ele  begins  to  climb  toward  the  top,  his  first  step 


394  CHAPTER   XXL 

being  the  lower  bar  of  the  fence,  which  position  is  typified  by  the  one 
bar  of  the  first  lieutenant.  Upon  reaching  the  top  of  the  fence,  the 
officer  wears  two  bars,  which  represent  the  bottom  and  the  top  bars 
of  the  fence,  from  which  point  of  vantage  he  can  now  survey  the  field. 
From  the  fence,  the  officer  must  climb  to  the  branches  of  the  oak. 
the  tree  of  might  and  strength.  It  is  a  long  climb  and  symbolizes 
the  marked  difference  that  exists  between  the  company  and  the  field 
officer.  The  gold  oak  leaf  on  the  major's  shoulder  strap  symbolizes 
this  position.  The  next  step  is  to  the  tallest  tree  of  the  forest,  the 
straight,  towering  silver  poplar,  with  no  branches  for  many  feet  from 
the  ground.  Although  this  point  of  vantage  is  somewhat  higher  than 
that  of  the  oak,  it  is  not  materially  so,  and  the  duties  and  responsibili- 
ties of  the  position  are  about  the  same.  The  officer  is  now  among 
the  silver  leaves  of  the  poplar,  which  fact  is  typified  by  the  silver  leaf 
of  the  lieutenant-colonel.  The  silver  eagle  of  the  colonel  symbolizes 
the  bird  that  soars  above  the  top  of  the  towering  poplar.  The  next 
step  is  the  greatest  of  all:  To  the  stars  up  in  the  firmament,  far,  far 
above  the  eagle's  flight,  which  position  is  typified  by  the  star  on  the 
general  officer's   shoulder  strap. 


A  SYNOPSIS  OF  THE  ARTICLES  OF  WAR      395 
AFFECTING  ENLISTED  MEN. 


CHAPTER  XXII 

A  SYNOPSIS  OF  THE  ARTICLES  OF  WAR  AFFECT- 
ING ENLISTED  MENi 

(See  corresponding  chapter  i)i   Supplement  for  additional  matter  and  changes,  if  any.) 

Reading  of  the  Articles  and  Oath  of  Enlistment.  The  Articles  of 
war  to  be  read  to  every  enlisted  man  at  the  time  of  or  within  six  days 
after  his  enlistment,  and  he  shall  thereupon  take  oath  or  affirmation  in 
the  following  form:  "I,  A.B.,  do  solemnly  swear  (or  affirm)  that  I  zcill 
bear  true  faith  and  allegiance  to  the  United  States  of  America;  that  I  will 
serve  them  honestly  and  faithfully  against  all  their  enemies  whomsoever; 
and  that  I  will  obey  the  orders  of  the  President  of  the  United  States  and 
the  orders  of  the  officers  appointed  over  iiic,  according  to  the  rules  and 
articles  of  zvar^'.  This  oath  may  be  taken  before  any  commissioned 
officer  of  the  Army.     (Art.  2). 

Discharge.  No  enlisted  man,  duly  sworn,  shall  be  discharged 
from  the  service  without  a  discharge  in  writing,  signed  by  a  field 
officer  of  the  regiment  to  which  he  belongs  or  by  the  commanding 
officer  when  no  field  officer  is  present;  and  no  discharge  shall  be  given 
to  any  enlisted  man  before  his  term  of  service  has  expired  except  by 
order  of  the  President,  the  Secretary  of  War,  the  commanding  officer 
of  a  department,  or  by  sentence  of  a  general  court  martial  (Art.  4). 

All  Public  Stores  Taken  from  the  Enemy  shall  be  secured  for  the 
service  of  the  United  States  (Art.  9). 

Furloughs.  Every  officer  commanding  a  regiment  or  independ- 
ent troop,  battery  or  company,  not  in  the  field,  may,  when  actually 
quartered  with  such  command,  grant  furloughs  to  the  enlisted  men, 
in  such  numbers  and  for  such  time  as  he  shall  deem  consistent  with 
the  good  of  the  service.  Every  officer  commanding  a  regiment,  or  an 
independent  troop,  battery,  or  company,  in  the  field,  may  grant  fur- 
loughs not  exceeding  thirty  days  at  one  time,  to  five  per  centum^  of 


1  The  word  "soldier"  as  used  in  the  Articles  of  War  includes  all  enlisted  men 
and  the  convictions  mentioned  are  by  courts-martial. 


396  CHAPTER  XXII. 

the  enlisted  men,  for  good  conduct  in  the  line  of  duty,  but  subject  to 
the  approval  of  the  commander  of  the  forces  of  which  said  enlisted 
men  form  a  part.  Everj^  company  officer  of  a  regiment,  commanding 
any  troop,  battery,  or  company  not  in  the  held,  or  commanding  in 
any  garrison,  fort,  post  or  barracks,  may,  in  the  absence  of  his  field 
officer,  grant  furloughs  to  the  enlisted  men,  for  a  time  not  exceeding 
twenty  days  in  six  months,  and  not  to  more  than  two  persons  to  be 
absent  at  the  same  time  (Art.  11). 

Selling  or  Wasting  Ammunition.  Any  enlisted  man  who  sells, 
or  willfully  or  through  neglect,  wastes  the  ammunition  delivered 
out  to  him,  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct  (Art.  16). 

Selling  or  Losing  Horse,  Arms,  etc.  Any  soldier  who  sells  or, 
through  neglect,  loses  or  spoils  his  horse,  arms,  clothing  or  accoutre- 
ments, shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  adjudge   (Art.   17). 

Disrespect  Towards  the  President  and  Others.  Any  soldier  who 
uses  contemptuous  or  disrespectful  words  against  the  President,  the 
Vice-President,  the  Congress  of  the  United  States  or  the  chief  magis- 
trate or  legislature  of  any  of  the  United  States  in  which  he  is  quar- 
tered, shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct  (Art.  19). 

Disrespect  Towards  Commanding  Officers.  Any  soldier  who  be- 
haves himself  with  disrespect  towards  his  commanding  officer  shall 
be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct  (Art.  20). 

Striking    Superior    Officers    and    Disobedience    of    Orders.     Any 

soldier  who,  on  any  pretense  whatsoever,  strikes  his  superior  officer, 
or  draws  or  lifts  up  any  weapon,  or  offers  any  violence  against  him. 
being  in  the  execution  of  his  office,  or  disobeys  any  lawful  command 
of  his  superior  officer,  shall  suffer  death,  or  such  other  punishment  as 
a  court-martial  may  direct  (Art.  21). 

Beginning  Mutiny  or  Sedition,  or  Joining  Therein.  Any  soldier 
who  begins,  excites,  causes  or  joins  in  any  mutiny  or  sedition,  in  any 
troop,  battery,  compan}^,  part}^  post,  detachment  or  guard,  shall  suffer 
death,  or  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct  (Art. 
22). 

Suppression  of  Mutiny  or  Sedition  and  Informing  Commanding 
Officer  Thereof.  Any  soldier  who,  being  present  at  any  mutiny  or 
sedition,  does  not  use  his  utmost  endeavor  to  suppress  the  same,  or 
having  knowledge  of  any  intended  mutiny  or  sedition,  does  not,  with- 
out delay,  give  information  thereof  to   his  commanding  officer,   shaU 


A  SYNOPSOS  OF  THE  ARTICLES  OF  WAR      397 
AFFECTING  ENLISTED  MEN. 

suffer  death,  or  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct 
(Art.  23). 

Quelling  Quarrels,  Frays  and  Disorders.  All  noncommissioned 
officers  have  power  to  part  and  quell  all  quarrels,  frays  and  disorders, 
whether  among  persons  belonging  to  his  own  or  to  another  corps, 
regiment,  troop,  battery  or  company,  and  to  order  officers  into  arrest, 
and  noncommissioned  officers  and  soldiers'  into  confinement,  who 
take  part  in  the  same,  until  their  proper  superior  officer  is  acquainted 
therewith.  And  whosoever,  being  so  ordered,  refuses  to  obey  such 
noncommissioned  officer,  or  draws  a  weapon  upon  him,  shall  be  pun- 
ished as  a  court-martial  may  direct  (Art.  24). 

Reproachful  or  Provoking  Speeches.  No  soldier  shall  use  any 
reproachful  or  provoking  speeches  or  gestures  to  another.  Any 
soldier  who  so  offends  shall  be  confined  and  required  to  ask  pardon 
of  the  party  offended  in  the  presence  of  his  commanding  officer  (Art. 
25). 

Challenge  to  Duel.  No  soldier  shall  send  a  challenge  to  another 
soldier  to  fight  a  duel,  or  accept  a  challenge  so  sent.  Any  soldier  who 
so  offends  shall  suft'er  such  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct 
(Art.  26). 

Fighting  Duels.  Any  noncommissioned  officer,  commanding  a 
guard  who  knowingly  and  willingly  suffers  any  person  to  go  forth 
to  fight  a  duel  shall  be  punished  as  a  challenger;  and  all  seconds  or 
promoters  of  duels,  and  carriers  of  challenges  to  fight  duels,  shall  be 
deemed  principals,  and  punished  accordingly.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of 
any  officer  commanding  an  army,  regiment,  troop,  battery,  company, 
post  or  detachment,  who  knows  or  has  reason  to  believe  that  a  chal- 
lenge has  been  given  or  accepted  by  any  enlisted  man  und«r  his  com- 
mand, immediately  to  arrest  the  offender  and  bring  him  to  trial.  (Art. 
27). 

Upbraiding  Others  for  Refusing  a  Challenge.  Any  soldier  who 
upbraids  another  soldier  for  refusing  a  challenge  shall  himself  be 
punished  as  a  challenger;  and  all  soldiers  are  hereby  discharged  from 
any  disgrace  or  opinion  of  disadvantage  which  might  arise  from  their 
having  refused  to  accept  challenges  as  they  will  only  have  acted  in 
obedience  to  the  law  and  have  done  their  duty  as  good  soldiers,  who 
subject  themselves  to  discipline  (Art.  28) 


398  CHAPTER  XXTI. 

Redress  When  Wronged  by  an  Officer.  Any  soldier  who  thinks 
himself,  wronged  by  any  officer  may  complain  to  the  commanding 
officer  of  his  regiment,  who  shall  summon  a  regimental  court-martial 
for  the  doing  of  justice  to  the  complainant.  Either  party  may  appeal 
from  such  regimental  court-martial  to  a  general  court-martial;  but  if, 
upon  such  second  hearing,  the  appeal  appears  to  be  groundless  and 
vexatious,  the  party  appealing  shall  be  punished  at  the  discretion  of 
said  general  court-martial  (Art.  30). 

Lying  Out  of  Quarters.  Any  soldier  who  lies  out  of  his  quarters, 
garrison  or  camp  without  leave  from  his  superior  officer,  shall  be 
punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct  (Art.  31). 

Absence  Without  Leave.  Any  soldier  who  absents  himself  from 
his  troop,  battery,  company  or  detachment,  without  leave  from  his 
commanding  officer,  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct 
(Art.  32). 

Absence  from  Formation.  Any  officer  or  soldier  who  fails, 
except  when  prevented  by  sickness  or  other  necessity,  to  repair,  at  the 
fixed  time,  to  the  place  of  parade,  exercise,  or  other  rendezvous  ap- 
pointed by  his  commanding  officer,  or  goes  from  the  same,  without 
leave  from  his  commanding  officer,  before  he  is  dismissed  or  relieved, 
shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct  (Art.  33). 

One  Mile  From  Camp  Without  Leave.  Any  soldier  who  is 
found  one  mile  from  camp,  without  leave  in  writing  from  his  com- 
manding officer,  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct 
(Art.  34). 

Absent  From  Retreat.  Any  soldier  who  fails  to  retire  to  his  ( 
quarters  or  tent  at  the  beating  of  retreat,  shall  be  punished  according  | 
to  the  nature  of  his  offense  (Art.  35). 

Hiring  Another  to  do  Your  Duty.  No  soldier  shall  hire  another 
to  do  his  duty  for  him,  or  be  excused  from  duty,  except  in  cases  of 
sickness,  disability  or  leave  of  absence.  Every  such  soldier  found 
guilty  of  hiring  his  duty,  and  the  person  so  hired  to  do  another's  duty, 
shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct  (Art.  36). 

Every  Noncommissioned  Officer  who  connives  at  such  hiring  of 
duty  shall  be  reduced  (Art.  37). 

Drunkenness  on  Guard  or  Other  Duty.  Any  soldier  who  is  found 
drunk  on  guard,  party,  or  other  duty,  shall  suffer  such  {corporal)  pun- 


A  SYNOPSIS  OF  THE  ARTICLES  OF  WAR      399 
AFFECTING  ENLISTED  MEN. 

ishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct.     (No  court-martial  shall   sen- 
tence any  soldier  to  be  branded,  marked  or  tattooed.)  (Art.  38). 

Sleeping  on  or  Quitting  Post.  Any  sentinel  who  is  found  sleep- 
ing upon  his  post,  or  who  leaves  it  before  he  is  regularly  relieved, 
shall  suffer  death,  or  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may 
direct  (Art.  39). 

Quitting  Guard,  etc.  Any  soldier  who  quits  his  guard,  platoon 
or  division,  without  leave  from  his  superior  officer,  except  in  a  case  of 
urgent  necessit}'-,  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct 
(Art.  40). 

Cowardice  and  Looting.  Any  soldier  who  misbehaves  himself 
before  the  enemy,  runs  away,  or  shamefully  abandons  any  fort,  post 
or  guard,  which  he  is  commanded  to  defend,  or  speaks  words  inducing 
others  to  do  the  like,  or  casts  away  his  arms  or  ammunition,  or  quits 
his  post  or  colors  to  plunder  or  pillage,  shall  suffer  death,  or  such 
other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct  (Art.  42). 

Compelling  Surrender  to  the  Enemy.  If  any  commander  of  any 
garrison,  fortress  or  post  is  compelled  by  the  officers  and  soldiers 
under  his  command  to  give  up  to  the  enemy  or  to  abandon  it,  the 
officers  or  soldiers  so  offending  shall  suffer  death,  or  such  other  pun- 
ishment as  a  court-martial  may  direct  (Art.  43). 

Betrayal  of  Watchword.  Any  person  belonging  to  the  armies  of 
the  United  States  who  makes  known  the  watchword  to  any  person  not 
entitled  to  receive  it,  according  to  the  rules  and  discipline  of  war,  or 
presumes  to  give  a  parole  or  watchword  different  from  that  which 
he  received,  shall  suffer  death,  or  such  other  punishment  as  a  court- 
martial  may  direct  (Art.  44). 

Relieving  or  Protecting  the  Enemy.  Whosoever  relieves  the 
enemy  with  money,  victuals  or  ammunition,  or  knowingly  harbors  or 
protects  an  enemy,  shall  suffer  death,  or  such  other  punishment  as  a 
court-martial  may  direct  (Art.  45). 

Holding  Correspondence  With  or  Giving  Intelligence  to  the 
Enemy.  Whosoever  holds  correspondence  with,  or  gives  intelligence 
to,  the  enemy,  either  directly  or  indirectly,  shall  suft'er  death,  or  such 
other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct  (Art.  46). 

Desertion.  Any  soldier  who,  having  received  pay  or  having  been 
duly  enlisted  in   the   service   of  the   United   States,   deserts   the   same. 


400  CHAPTER  XXII. 

shall,  in  time  of  war,  suffer  death,  or  such  other  punishment  as  a 
court-martial  may  direct;  and  in  time  of  peace,  any  punishment,  ex- 
cepting death,  which  a  court-martial  may  direct  (Art.  47). 

Making  Good  Time  Lost  by  Desertion.  Every  soldier  who  de- 
serts the  service  of  the  United  States  shall  be  liable  to  serve  for  such 
period  as  shall,  with  the  time  he  may  have  served  previous  to  his 
desertion,  amount  to  the  full  time  of  his  enlistment;  and  such  soldier 
shall  be  tried  by  a  court-martial  and  punished,  although  the  term  of 
his  enlistment  may  have  elapsed  previous  to  his  being  apprehended 
and  tried  (Art.  48). 

Prohibition    of   Enlistment   Without   a    Regular    Discharge.     No 

noncommissioned  officer  or  soldier  shall  enlist  himself  in  any  other 
regiment,  troop  or  company,  without  a  regular  discharge  from  the 
regiment,  troop,  or  company  in  which  he  last  served,  on  a  penalty  of 
being  reputed  a  deserter,  and  suffering  accordingly.  And  in  case  any 
officer  shall  knowingly  receive  and  entertain  such  noncommissioned 
officer  or  soldier,  or  shall  not,  after  his  being  discovered  to  be  a  de- 
serter, immediately  confine  him  and  give  notice  thereof  to  the  corps 
in  which  he  last  served,  the  said  officer  shall,  by  court-martial,  be 
cashiered  (Art.  50). 

Advising  Another  to  Desert.  Any  soldier  who  advises  or  per- 
suades any  other  soldier  to  desert  the  service  of  the  United  States 
shall,  in  time  of  war,  suffer  death,  or  such  other  punshment  as  a  court- 
martial  may  direct;  and  in  time  of  peace,  any  punishment,  excepting 
death,  which  a  court-martial  may  direct  (Art.  51). 

Attending  Divine  Service  and  Behavior  Thereat.  It  is  earnestly 
recommended  to  all  soldiers  diligently  to  attend  divine  service.  Any 
soldier  who  behaves  himself  indecently  or  irreverently  at  any  place  of 
divine  worship  shall  for  his  first  offense,  forfeit  one-sixth  of  a  dollar; 
for  each  further  offense  he  shall  forfeit  a  like  sum  and  shall  be  con- 
fined twenty-four  hours.  The  money  so  forfeited  shall  be  deducted 
from  his  next  pay  and  shall  be  applied,  by  the  captain  or  senior  officer 
of  his  troop,  battery  or  company,  to  the  use  of  the  sick  soldiers  of  the 
same  (Art.  52). 

Profanity  Prohibited.  Any  soldier  who  uses  any  profane  oath 
or  curse  shall  incur  the  penalties  provided  in  the  preceding  article, 
and  all  moneys  forfeited  for  such  offenses  shall  be  applied  as  therein 
provided  (Art.  53). 


A  SYNOPSIS  OF  THE  ARTICLES  OF  WAR      401 
AFFECTING  ENLISTED  MEN. 

Redress  in  Garrison  or  on  the  March.  Any  soldier  who,  in  gar- 
rison or  on  the  march,  commits  any  abuses  or  disorders,  shall  be 
made  to  make  redress;  and  any  soldier  who  beats  or  otherwise  ill- 
treats  any  person,  disturbs  fairs  or  markets,  or  commits  any  kind  of 
riot,  may  be  made  to  make  reparation  to  the  party  injured  so  far  as 
his  pay  shall  go  toward  such  reparation  (Art.  54). 

Behavior  in  Quarters  and  on  the  March.  All  soldiers  are  to  be- 
have themselves  orderly  in  quarters  and  on  the  march,  and  whoever 
commits  any  waste  or  spoil,  either  in  walks  or  trees,  parks,  warrens, 
fish  ponds,  houses,  gardens,  grain  fields,  inclosures  or  meadows,  or 
maliciously  destroys  any  property  whatsoever  belonging  to  inhab- 
itants of  the  United  States  (unless  by  order  of  a  general  officer  com- 
manding a  separate  army  in  the  field),  shall,  besides  such  penalties  as 
he  may  be  liable  to  by  law,  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  di- 
rect (Art.  55). 

Violence  to  Persons  Bringing  Necessaries  to  U.  S.  Forces.     Any 

officer  or  soldier  who  does  violence  to  any  person  bringing  provisions 
or  other  necessaries  to  the  camp,  garrison  or  quarters  of  the  forces 
of  the  United  States  in  foreign  parts,  shall  suffer  death,  or  such  other 
punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct  (Art.  56). 

Forcing  Safe-guards.  Whosoever,  belonging  to  the  armies  of 
the  United  States  in  foreign  parts  or  at  any  place  within  the  United 
States  or  their  territories  during  rebellion  against  the  supreme  author- 
ity of  the  United  States  forces  a  safe-guard,  shall  suffer  death  (Art.  57). 

Punishment  of  Larceny,  Robbery,  Murder,  etc.,  in  Time  of  War. 
In  time  of  war,  insurrection  or  rebellion,  larceny,  robbery,  burglary, 
arson,  mayhem,  manslaughter,  murder,  assault  and  battery  with  an 
intent  to  kill,  wounding,  by  shooting  or  stabbing,  with  an  intent  to 
commit  murder,  rape  or  assault  and  battery  with  an  attempt  to  com- 
mit rape,  shall  be  punished  by  the  sentence  of  a  general  court-martial, 
when  committed  by  persons  in  the  military  service  of  the  United 
States,  and  the  punishment  in  any  such  case  shall  not  be  less  than  the 
punishment  provided,  for  the  like  offense,  by  the  laws  of  the  State,  Terri- 
tory or  district  in  which  such  an  offense  may  have  been  committed. 
(Art.  58). 

Turning  Over  to  the  Civil  Authorities  Soldiers  Accused  of  Crimes 
Against  Civil  Laws.     When  an  officer  or  soldier  is  accused  of  a  capital 


402  CHAPTER  XXIL 

crime,  or  of  any  offense  against  the  person  or  property  of  any  citizen 
of  any  of  the  United  States,  which  is  punishable  by  the  laws  of  the  land: 
the  commanding  officer  and  the  officers  of  the  regiment,  troop,  battery, 
or  detachment  to  which  the  person  so  accused  belongs,  are  required, 
except  in  time  of  war,  upon  application  duly  made  by  or  in  behalf 
of  the  party  injured,  to  use  their  utmost  endeavors  to  deliver  him 
over  to  the  civil  magistrate,  and  to  aid  the  officers  of  justice  in 
apprehending  and  securing  him  in  order  to  bring  him  to  trial.  If, 
upon  such  application,  any  officer  refuses  or  wilfully  neglects,  except 
in  time  of  war,  to  deliver  over  such  accused  person  to  the  civil 
magistrate,  or  to  aid  the  officers  of  justice  in  apprehending  him,  he 
shall  be  dismissed  from  the  service  (Art.  59). 

Fraudulent  Claims  Against  the  Government.  Any  person  in  the 
military  service  of  the  United  States  who  makes  or  causes  to  be  made 
any  claim  against  the  United  States,  or  any  officer  thereof,  knowing 
such  claims  to  be  false  or  fraudulent;  or 

Who  presents  or  causes  to  be  presented  to  any  person  in  the 
civil  or  military  service  thereof,  for  approval  or  payment,  any  claim 
against  the  United  States  or  any  officer  thereof,  knowing  such  claim 
to  be  false  or  fraudulent;  or 

Who  enters  into  any  agreement  or  conspiracy  to  defraud  the 
United  States  by  obtaining,  or  aiding  others  to  obtain  the  allowance 
or  payment  of  any  false  or  fraudulent  claim;  or 

Who,  for  the  purpose  of  obtaining,  or  aiding  others  to  obtain,  the 
approval,  allowance  or  payment  of  any  claim  against  the  United 
States  or  against  any  officer  thereof,  makes  or  uses,  or  procures,  or 
advises  the  making  or  use  of  any  writing  or  other  paper,  knowing  the 
same  to  contain  any  false  or  fraudulent  statement;  or 

Who  for  the  purpose  of  obtaining,  or  aiding  others  to  obtain,  the 
approval,  allowance  or  payment  of  any  claim  against  the  United 
States  or  any  officer  thereof,  makes  or  procures  or  advises  the  making 
of,  any  oath  to  any  fact,  or  to  any  writing  or  other  paper,  knowing 
such  oath  to  be  false :  or 

Who  for  the  purpose  of  obtaining,  or  aiding  others  to  obtain, 
the  approval,  allowance,  or  payment  of  any  claim  against  the  United 
States  or  any  officer  thereof,  forges  or  counterfeits,  or  procures  or 
advises  the  forging  or  counterfeiting  of,  any  signature  upon  any  writ- 
ing or  other  paper,  or  uses,  or  procures  or  advises  the  use  of,  any 
such  signature,  knowing  the  same  to  be  forged  or  counterfeited;  or 


A  SYNOPSIS  OF  THE  ARTICLES  OF  WAR      403 
AFFECTING  ENLISTED  MEN. 

Who,  having  charge,  possession,  custody,  or  control  of  any  money 
or  other  porperty  of  the  United  States,  furnished  or  intended  for  the 
mihtary  service  thereof,  knowingly  delivers,  or  causes  to  be  delivered, 
to  any  person  having  authority  to  receive  the  same,  any  amount  thereof 
less  than  that  for  which  he  receive  a  certificate  or  receipt;  or 

Who,  being  authorized  to  make  or  deliver  any  paper  certifying 
the  receipt  of  any  property  of  the  United  States,  furnished  or  intended 
for  the  military  service  thereof,  makes  or  delivers  to  any  person,  such 
writing,  without  having  full  knowledge  of  the  truth  of  the  statements 
therein  contained,  and  with  intent  to  defraud  the  United  States;  or 

Who  steals,  embezzles,  knowingly  and  wilfully  misappropriates, 
applies  to  his  own  use  or  benifit,  or  wrongfully  or  knowingly  sells  or 
disposes  of  any  ordnance,  arms,  equipments,  ammunition,  clothing, 
subsistence  stores,  money,  or  other  property  of  the  United  States, 
furnished  or  intended  for  the  military  service  thereof;  or 

Who  knowingly  purchases,  or  receives  in  pledge  for  any  obliga- 
tion or  indebtedness  from  any  soldier,  officer  or  other  person  who  is 
a  part  of  or  employed  in  said  forces  or  service,  any  ordnance,  arms, 
equipments,  ammunition,  clothing,  subsistence  stores,  or  other  prop- 
erty of  the  United  States,  such  soldier,  officer,  or  other  person  not 
having  lawful  right  to  sell  or  pledge  the  same. 

Shall  on  conviction  thereof,  be  punished  by  fine  or  imprison- 
ment or  by  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  adjudge, 
or  by  any  or  all  of  said  penalties.  And  if  any  person,  being  guilty  of 
any  of  the  offences  aforesaid,  while  in  the  military  service  of  the 
United  States,  receives  his  discharge,  or  is  dismissed  from  the  service, 
he  shall  continue  to  be  liable  to  be  arrested  and  held  for  trial  and 
sentence  by  court-martial,  in  the  same  manner  and  to  the  same  extent 
as  if  he  had  not  received  such  discharge  nor  been  dismissed.  (Act  of 
March  2,  1901).     (Art.  60). 

Conduct  to  the  Prejudice  of  Good  Order  and  Military  Discipline. 

All  crimes  not  capital,  and  all  disorders  and  neglects,  which  officers 
and  soldiers  may  be  guilty  of,  to  the  prejudice  of  good  order  and 
military  discipline,  though  not  mentioned  in  the  foregoing  Articles 
of  War,  are  taken  cognizance  of  by  a  general,  or  a  regimental,  gar- 
rison, or  field  officer's  court-martial,  according  to  the  nature  and  degree 
of  the  offense,  and  punished  at  the  discretion  of  such  court.     (Art.  62). 


404  CHAPTER  XXII. 

(Fraudulent  enlistment,  and  the  receipt  of  any  pay  or  allowances 
thereunder,  is  declared  a  military  offense,  and  made  punishable  by 
court-martial,  under  the  sixty-second  article  of  war. — Act  approved 
July  27,  1892). 

Camp  Followers  Amenable  to  Military  Law.  All  retainers  to  the 
camp,  and  all  persons  serving  with  the  armies  of  the  United  States  in 
the  field,  though  not  enlisted  soldiers,  are  subject  to  orders,  according 
to  the  rules  and  discipline  of  War.     (Art.  63). 

Confinement.  Soldiers  charged  with  crimes  shall  be  confined 
until  tried  by  court-martial,  or  released  by  proper  authority.     (Art.  66). 

No  ofiicer  or  soldier  put  in  arrest  shall  be  continued  in  confine- 
ment more  than  eight  days,  or  until  such  time  as  a  court-martial  can 
be  assembled.     (Art.  70). 

Trial  by  Summary  Court.  Cases  referred  to  this  court,  shall  be 
tried  within  tv/enty  four  hours  of  the  time  of  arrest,  or  as  soon  there- 
after as  practicable. 

No  one  while  holding  a  certificate  of  eligibility  to  promotion 
shall  be  brought  before  a  summary  court.  (Act  of  June  18,  1898,  which 
replaces  Article  80). 

Regimental  and  Garrison   Courts-Martial  and   Summary   Courts. 

Regimental  and  garrison  courts-martial  and  summary  courts  detailed 
under  existing  laws  to  try  enlisted  men  shall  not  have  power  to  try 
capital  cases,  but  shall  have  power  to  award  punishment  not  to  exceed 
confinement  at  hard  labor  for  three  months,  or  forfeiture  of  three 
month's  pay,  or  both;  and  in  addition  thereto,  in  the  case  of  noncom- 
missioned officers,  reduction  to  the  ranks,  and  in  the  case  of  first 
class  privates,  reduction  to  second  class  privates:  Provided,  That  a 
summary  court  shall  not  adjudge  confinement  ■and  forfeiture  in  excess 
of  a  period  of  one  month,  unless  the  accused  shall  before  trial  consent 
in  writing  to  trial  before  said  court;  but  in  any  case  of  refusal  to  so 
consent  the  trial  may  be  had  either  by  general,  regimental,  or  garrison 
court-martial,  or  by  said  summary  court;  but  in  case  of  trial  by  said  sum- 
mary court  without  consent  as  aforesaid  the  court  shall  not  adjudge  con- 
finement or  forfeiture  of  pay  for  more  than  one  month.  (Act  of  March 
2,  1901.)     (Art.  83). 

Use  of  Menacing  Words,  etc.,  Before  Courts-Martial.  The  court- 
martial  may  punish,  at  discretion,  any  person  who  uses  any  menacing 
words,  signs  or  gestures  in  its  presence,  or  who  disturbs  its  proceed- 
ings by  any  riot  or  disc^der.     (Art.  86). 


A  SYNOPSIS  OF  THE  ARTICLES  OE  WAR      405 
AFFECTING  ENLISTED  MEN. 

Challenging  Members  of  a  Court-Martial. .  Members  of  a  court- 
martial  may  be  challenged  by  a  prisoner,  but  only  for  cause  stated 
to  the  court.  The  court  shall  determine  the  relevancy  and  validity 
thereof.     (Art.  88). 

Standing  Mute  Before  a  General  Court-Martial.  When  a  prisoner, 
arraigned  before  a  general  court-martial,  from  obstinacy  and  delib- 
erate design,  stands  mute,  or  answers  foreign  to  the  purpose,  the 
court  may  proceed  to  trial  and  judgement  as  if  the  prisoner  had 
pleaded  not  guilty.     (Art.  89). 

Judge  Advocate  Considered  as  Council  for  the  Prisoner..  After 
the  prisoner  has  made  his  plea,  the  judge  advocate  of  a  court-martial 
shall  so  far  consider  himself  council  for  the  prisoner  as  to  object  to 
any  leading  question  to  any  of  the  witnesses,  and  to  any  question  to 
the  prisoner  the  answer  to  which  might  tend  to  criminate  himself. 
(Art.  90). 

Oath  before  a  Court-Martial.  All  persons  who  give  evidence 
before  a  court-martial  shall  be  examined  on  oath,  or  affirmation,  in 
the  following  form:  "You  swear  (or  affirm)  that  the  evidence  you  shall 
give,  in  the  case  now  in  hearing,  shall  he  the  truth,  the  whole  truth,  and 
nothing  hut  the  truth.    So  help  you  God."     (Art  92). 

Continuance  of  case  before  a  Court-Martial.  A  court-martial 
shall,  for  reasonable  cause,  grant  a  continuance  to  either  party,  for 
such  time  and  as  often  as  may  appear  to  be  just:  Provided,  That  if 
the  prisoner  be  in  close  confinement  the  trial  shall  not  be  delayed  for 
a  period  longer  than  sixty  days.     (Art.  93). 

Death  Penalty.  No  person  shall  be  sentenced  to  suffer  death, 
except  by  the  concurrence  of  two  thirds  of  the  members  of  a  general 
court-martial,  and  the  cases  herein  expressly  mentioned.     (Art.  96). 

No  sentence  of  a  court-martial,  inflicting  the  punishment  of 
death,  shall  be  carried  into  execution  until  it  shall  have  been  confirmed 
by  the  President;  except  in  the  cases  of  persons  convicted,  in  time 
of  war,  as  spies,  mutineers,  deserters,  or  murderers,  and  in  the  cases 
of  guerilla  marauders,  convicted  in  time  of  war  of  robbery,  burglary, 
arson,  rape,  assault  with  intent  to  commit  rape,  or  of  violation  of  the 
laws  and  customs  of  war;  and  in  such  excepted  cases  the  sentence  of 
death  may  be  carried  into  execution  upon  confirmation  by  the   com- 


406  CHAPTER  XXII. 

manding  general  in  the   field,   or  the   commander  of  the   department, 
as  the  case  may  be.     (Art.   105). 

Flogging,  Branding,  Marking,  or  Tattooing  on  the  Body,  is  for- 
bidden.    (Art.  98). 

Twice  in  Jeopardy.  No  person  shall  be  tried  a  second  time  for 
the   same   offense.      (Art.    102). 

Statute  of  Limitation.  No  person  shall  be  liable  to  be  tried  and 
punished  by  a  general  court-martial  for  any  offense  which  appears  to 
have  been  committed  more  than  two  years  before  the  issuing  of  the 
order  for  such  trial,  unless,  by  reason  of  having  absented  himself  or 
of  some  other  manifest  impediment,  he  shall  not  have  been  amenable 
to  justice  within  that  period. 

No  person  shall  be  tried  or  punished  by  a  court-martial  for 
desertion  in  time  of  peace  and  not  in  the  face  of  an  enemy  committed 
more  than  two  years  before  the  arraignment  of  such  person  for  such 
offense,  unless  he  shall  meanwhile  have  absented  himself  from  the 
United  States,  in  which  case  the  time  of  his  absence  shall  be  excluded 
in  computing  the  period  of  the  limitation :  Provided,  That  said  limi- 
tation shall  not  begin  until  the  end  of  the  term  for  which  said  person 
was  mustered  into  the  service.  (Act  of  April  11,  1890.  26  Stat,  at 
large,  54).     (Art.   103). 

Copies  of  Proceedings  of  General  Courts-Martial  and  Sentence  of 
Such  Court,  shall  be  furnished  every  party  tried,  upon  demand  thereof, 
made  by  himself  or  by  any  person  in  his  behalf.     (Art.  114). 

Courts  of  Inquiry.  A  court  of  inquiry,  to  examine  into  the 
nature  of  any  transaction  of,  or  accusation  or  imputation  against,  any 
solidier  may  be  ordered  by  the  President  or  by  any  commanding 
officer;  but  they  shall  never  be  ordered  by  any  commanding  officer, 
except  upon  a  demand  by  the  soldier  whose  conduct  is  to  be  inquired 
of.     (Art.  115). 

Witnesses  Before  Courts  of  Inquiry,  shall  take  the  same  oath 
which  is  taken  by  witnesses  before  courts-martial,  and  the  party 
accused  shall  be  permitted  to  examine  and  cross-examine  them,  so 
as  fully  to  investigate  the  circumstances  in  question.     (Art.  118). 

Inventory  of  Personal  Effects  of  Deceased  Soldiers..  In  case  oi* 
the  death  of  any  soldier,  the  commanding  officer  of  his  troop,  battery, 
or  company  shall  immediately  secure  all  his  effects  then  in  camp  or 
quarters,    and    shall,    in    the    presence    of    two    other    officers,    make    an 


A  SYNOPSIS  OF  THE  ARTICLES  OF  WAR      407 
AFFECTING  ENLISTED  MEN. 

inventory  thereof,  which  he  shall  transmit  to  the  office  of   the  Depart- 
ment of  War.     (Art.  126). 

Care  of  the  Effects  of  Deceased  Soldiers.  Officers  charged  with 
the  care  of  the  effects  of  deceased  soldiers  shall  account  for  and 
deliver  the  same,  or  the  proceeds  thereof,  to  the  legal  representatives 
of  such  deceased  officers  or  soldiers.  And  no  officer  so  charged  shall 
be  permitted  to  quit  the  regiment  or  post  until  he  has  deposited  in 
the  hands  of  the  commanding  officer  all  the  effects  of  such  deceased 
officers  or  soldiers  not  so  accounted  for  and  delivered.     (Art.  127). 

Articles  of  War  to  be  Read  to  all  Soldiers  once  in  Every  Six 
Months.     (Art.  128). 

Spies.  All  persons  who,  in  time  of  war  or  of  rebellion  against 
the  supreme  authority  of  the  United  States,  shall  be  found  lurking 
or  acting  as  spies,  in  or  about  any  of  the  fortifications,  posts,  quarters, 
or  encampments  of  any  of  the  armies  of  the  United  States,  or  else- 
where, shall  be  triable  by  a  general  court-martial,  or  by  a  military 
commission,  and  shall,  on  conviction  thereof,  suffer  death.  (Section 
1343,  R.  S.) 


408 


CHAPTER  XXIII. 


CHAPTER  XXV. 


MISCELLANEOUS 


WEIGHTS  OF  ARTICLES  USUALLY  TAKEN  INTO  THE  FIELD. 

(In  such  cases  as  overcoats,  shoes,  packed  boxes,  etc.,  the  weights  are  only  approxi- 
mate, the  average  of  several  being  taken.) 


Ammunition      -fie,   1   box   (1200  rounds) 

Cartridges.       

BanJcliers    

Box    

Bandolier    (12   clips,   60   rounds) 

Belt,   (9  clips,  90  rounds) 

Blank  Cartridges,  1  box  (1000) 

Cartridges     

Box    

Cartridges,   (ball,  in  clips),  10 

Clip,    1    

Revolver,   Cal.  38,   10  rounds 


Axe 


Axe  helve 

Belt,   field,   complete. 

Cartridge  belt    

Cartridge  belt  fastener. 

Suspenders   

Bayonet   

Bayonet    scabbard    . . . . 

First  Aid  pouch   

Blanket   


Box  Locker 


i  Empty. 


Full , 


D         c        J  \  Empty.  •  .  . 

Box,   Squad    -j  p^jf_ 

22x18x14  in.,  containing  8  kits) 
T5      1    4.     r-     T  )  Light   Wt.. 

^"C^^^t'   G.    I ]  Heavy   Wt. 

\  Small , 

Camp   Kettle    ■\  Medium . . . 

/  Large 


Weight 


lbs. 


88 

1 

20 


38 
11 


ozs. 


8 

9 

15 


3 
13 


14 

3 

9 

16 

11 

2 


Total   Weight 


lbs. 


Ill 

4 
7 


50 


3i 

to 

6 

1 


5 
40 
to 

48 
about 
120 

13 
49 

3 
5 
3 
3 
4 


oz 


6 
1 


12 
5 


2 
6 

11 
4 


MISCELLANEOUS. 


409 


Camp   Hatchet,    (with  helve)  ]  g^3^^"_ 

Canteen     

Cot,    G.    M 

Field  Desk    


I  Empty. 
\  Full .  . . 


f  Empty. 
I  Full .  .  . 


Field  range,  complete,  (includes  the  1 
following:  1  pipe  guard,  2  pipe 
joints,  2  elbows,  2  bake  pans,  4 
boilers,  1  cleaver,  1  butcher  kinfe, 
3  meat  hooks,  1  burnisher,  1  but- 
cher's steel,  2  salt  shakers,  1  pep-  r 
per  shaker,  1  meat  saw,  1  large 
dipper,  1  flour  sieve,  1  ladle,  1 
strainer  (dipper),  1  basting  spoon, 
1  flat  strainer,  1  meat  fork,  2  cake 
turners,    1    hash   machine 

Haversack,   complete. 

Haversack,  ration  bags  and  scabbard. 

Meat   can    

Knife    

Fork     

Spoon 

Hospital    Corps  knife    

Hospital  Corps  knife  scabbard   

Intrenching  Tools: 

Hand  axe  with  carrier 

Pick   mattock   with    carrier    

Shovel   with   carrier    

Pliers,    wire    

Rule,  2  foot,  4  fold   

Mess   Pan    

Overcoat     

;  Without  helve.  . 
/  With  helve ..... 


Weight 


Pick 


Poncho     

Revolver    

Holster     

Belt,   woven    

Belt   fastener    

Rifle    

Bayonet      

Gun  sling    

Sabre  (For  enlisted  men)    

Tin  cup   

Spade    

Shoes,   Marching,    1   pair.  No.   9   F. 
Garrison,   1   pair.   No.   9   F   , 

Shovel    S.   H. 

Shovel    L.    H. 

Stove,  "Sibley"    , 

Stove   pipe,    7  joints    , 


lbs. 


2 
2 

1 


8 
1 


18 
14 


07S. 


8 

2 
2 
2 

13 
12 


14 
6 
1 
3 


10 
8 
2 

7 
8 


Total   Weight 


lbs. 

ozs. 

2 

2 

1 

1.0 

n 

3 

6 

20 

70 

120 

to 

170 

400 


8 

2 

8 

6 
9 

about 
4 


3 
9 

4 

5 

3 
2 

5 

5 

32 


14 


8 
8 


4 
15 

7 

7 

6 

2 
11 

7 

12 


Shelter  Tent  Roll.  (Consisting  of  1 
blanket,  1  suit  underwear,  1  pr. 
stockinks,  1  rubber  poncho,  1  hand 
towel,  1  cake  soap,  1  comb,  1  hair 
brush,  1  tooth  brush,  5  shelter 
tent  pins,  1  shelter  tent  pole,  1 
shelter    tent    half    , 

Surplus  Kit  (1  pr,  drawers,  1  pr. 
shoes,  2  prs.  stockings,  1  under- 
shirt)       

Telescope   Case    i  Full      


\ 


Weight 


lbs. 


ozs. 


Total   Weight 


lbs. 


about 
16 


about 
4 

8 
about 
30 


02  i. 


WEIGHTS.    DIMENSIONS    AND    CAPACITIES    OF    TENTS. 
(Specifications,   Office   Q,   M.   G.,   Dscember,   1907.) 


Kind 


Hospital 


Concial   Wall 
(Sibley)      . 


Wall 


Common 


lihelter 

(2    halves) 


Weight    (lbs.) 
(Complete) 


Dimensions 
(Feet) 


230    1-3..  Length    of    ridge     14 

(1    tent,    105;    1   fly,[     1-6;  height  or  ridge, 
36;    tent   poles,    60  ;|     11;    width,    14    1-2 
18      large      and      281     height    of  wall  4  1-2 
small    pins,    29  1-3.) 


142   13-16. 

(1  tent,  76;  tent 
pole  and  tripod,  33  ; 
48  small  pins,  27- 
3-16;  chains,  plates, 
rings,  straps,  6- 
10-16). 


Height  10; 
16  5-12; 
wall,   3. 


Capacity. 


Will  accommodate  6 
patients  com- 
fortably. 


103    4-16. 

(1    tent,    44;    1    fly, 

16  lbs.,  10  2-3  oz. ; 
poles,  25;  10  large 
and    18    small    pins, 

17  lbs.  9  1-3  oz.) 


54   11-16. 

(1  tent,  24;  poles 
17;  24  small  pins, 
13   11-16.) 


diameter,  Will   accommodate   10 
height    of      ihfantry    men    com- 
I     fortably,     but     may 
be  made  to  hold  20 
foot  or  17  mounted 
men. 
The  authorized  allow- 
ance  for  permanent 
or  maneuver  camps, 
is  1   for  each  8  foot 
or  mounted  man. 

Length  of  ridge,  9  ft.,  \uthorized  allowance, 
2  1-2  in.  ;  height,  1  to  Captain,  1  to 
8  1-2;  width,  8-  2  subalterns.  Will 
11-12;  height  of  accommodate  four 
wall,    3    3-4.  men — preferably    3. 

The  authorized  allow- 
ance for  permanent 
or  maneuver  camps, 
is  1  for  each  2  men. 

Will  accommodate  3 
men  comfortably. 
No  allowance  for 
enlisted  men  pre- 
scribed by  existing 
orders. 


lbs.   15  4-5  oz. 
(2    poles,    1    14-16; 
10    pins,    13    oz. ;    2 
halves,    6   lbs.,   4 
4-5  oz. 


Length  of  ridge,  6- 
11-12;  height  6  10- 
12;  width,  8  4-12; 
of  wall,  2. 


Length  of  ridge,  65 
ins.  ;  width  61  ins. 
When  pitched  oc- 
cupies a  space  5  ft. 
5  ins.  deep,  and  6 
ft.  4  ins.  wide. 
When  the  two  tri- 
angular parts  are 
p  i  n  n  e  i  to  the 
ground,  they  in- 
close an  additional 
triangular  space  20 
ins.  deep. 


Merely    affords 
for  2  men. 


cover 


MISCELLANEOUS. 


411 


HEATING  TENTS.  Conical  wall  and  wall  tents  are  heated  by  means  of  the 
Sibley  stove,  issued  by  the  Q.  M.  Dept.  A  tent  can  also  be  very  comfortably  heated 
by  means  of  a  small  oil-stove  (sometimes,  but  not  generally,  obtainable  from  the 
Q.  M.  Dept.) 


RATIONS. 


Kind 


Components  and  Kind  of  Packages 


Net  Wt. 


Gross  Wt. 
Lbs.   i    Ozs.    I   Lbs,   i  Ozs. 


Field  Ration 


Haversack   Ration 


Travel   Ration 


Emergency 


Bacon — in  boxes. 

Soft  Bread — or  Flour — in  sacks. 

Baking  Powder — in  tins  packed  in  boxes. 

Yeast,  dried — in  tins  packed  in  boxes. 

Beans — in    double    sacks. 

Fresh  Vegetables — in  crates. 

Jam,  in  tins  packed  in  boxes. 

Coffee,  R.  &  G. — in  tins  packed  in  boxes. 

Sugar — in  double  sacks. 

Milk — in  cans  packed  in  boxes. 

Vinegar — in   barrels. 

Salt — in  double  sacks. 

Pepper — in  tins  packed  in  boxes. 

Bacon — in  boxes. 

Hard    Bread — in  tins   packed   in  boxes. 

Coffee,  R.  &  G. — in  tins  packed  in  boxes. 

Sugar — in  double  sacks. 

Salt — in  double  sacks. 

Pepper — in  tins  packed  in  boxes. 

Canned  Meats — in  tins  packed  in  boxes. 
Hard  Bread — in  tins  packed  in  boxes. 

or 
Soft   Bread — in  sacks. 
Beans — in  double  sacks. 
Tomatoes — in  cans  packed  in  boxes. 
Jam — in  cans  packed  in  boxes. 
Coffee,  R.  &  G. — in  tins  packed  in  boxes. 
Sugar  in  double  sacks. 
Milk — in  cans  packed  in  boxes. 


3 

8.79 

4 

1 

15.7 

2 

2 

15.42 

3 

12. 

1 

4.81 


9.3 


11.22 


In  finding  the  weight  of  the  Field  Ration,  bacon  has  been  considered  as  the 
meat   component. 

In  finding  the  gross  weight,  the  gross  weights  of  original  packages,  as  pur- 
chased by  the  Purchasing  Commissaries,  have  been  taken. 


CAPACITIES  OF  WAGONS 

Six-Mule    Army    Wagon,    on    good    roads,    load    should    not    exceed    4,000    pounds ; 

(Length,   10  1-6  ft.;  for    average    conditions,    3,500    pounds    is    considered    a    fair 

width,  3  1-2  ft.;  ,      ,       ,,..„   ,    ,,    _.. 

depth,   1   3-4  ft.)  load.      Will   hold    750    rations. 

Four-Mule    Escort    Wagon  (the    standard    wagon),    on    good    roads,    loads    should    not 

(Length,  9  1-2  it.,  exceed   3,000  pounds;   for  average  conditions,   2,500  pounds, 

width,  3  1-3  It. ; 
depth,  1  3-4  ft. 


Will  hold  650  rations. 


412  CHAPTER  XXIII. 

PACK  ANIMALS 

Under  favorable  conditions  a  pack  animal  can  carry  a  load  of  about  250 
pounds.  However,  when  long  or  hard  marches  are  to  be  made  the  load  should  not 
be  much  in  excess  of  200  pounds. 

DIMENSIONS  AND   CAPACITIES   OF  STANDARD  RAILROAD   CARS 

Pullman   palace  car — 12   sections   and   a  drawing-room. 

Tourist   sleeping  car— 10   sections   and   a   drawing-room. 

Freight  car  (box) — length,  34  to  36  feet;   capacity,  40,000  to  60,000  pounds. 

Flat  car — length,  34  to  36  feet;   width,  8  feet  6  inches. 

Gondola  or  coal  car — length,  34  to  36  feet ;  width,  8  feet  5  inches. 

Palace  stock  car — length,  36  to  40  feet;   capacity,  16  to  20  head. 

Improved  stock  car — length,  26  feet ;   capacity,  20  to  24  head. 

Ordinary  stock  car — length,  30  to  34  feet;   capacity,   16  to  20  head. 

ALLOWANCE  OF  WATER 

The  daily  allowance  of  water  for  a  horse  at  rest  is  about  six  gallons ;  when 
at  work,  from  eight  to  twelve  gallons ;  for  a  man,  one  gallon  for  all  purposes.  One 
gallon  of  fresh  water  weighs  8  1-2  pounds,  approximately  1  pint  to  1  pound. 

RATION  OF  FORAGE 

Horse — 14  lbs.   hay  and   12  lbs.   oats,   corn   or  barley. 
Mule — 14  lbs.  hay  and  9  lbs.  oats,  corn  or  barley. 

To  each  animal  3  lbs.  of  bran  may  be  issued  in  lieu  of  that  quantity  of  grain. 

POWER  OF  ATTORNEY 

(General  form.) 

Know  all  men  by  these  presents,  that  I,  John  A.  Smith,  of  Fort  Leaven- 
worth, Kansas,  do  hereby  make,  constitute  and  appoint  John  Doe,  of  New  Orleans, 
Louisiana,  my  true,  sufficient  and  lawful  attorney  for  me  and  in  my  name  to  (here 
state  in  plain  terms  the  subject-matter  of  power),  and  to  do  and  perform  all  neces- 
sary acts  in  the  execution  and  prosecution  of  the  aforesaid  business  in  as  full  and 
ample  a  manner  as  I  might  do  if  I  were  personally  present. 

In  witness  whereof,  I  have  hereunto  set  my  hand  and  seal,  this  1st  day 
of  January,   1908. 

Witnesses '  ) 

Robt.  a'.  Harris.  \  JOHN   A.    SMITH    (Seal).(l) 

Jas.   B.   Robinson.  ) 

(1)  A  circle  or  a  rectangle  made  with  a  pen,  and  with  the  word  "Seal' 
written  in  it,  is  a  "Seal." 

FORM  OF  CONTRACT 

Agreement  entered  into  between  the  Robert  Smith  Publishing  Co.  of  Wash- 
ington, D.  C.,  and  John  A.  Smith  of  Fort  Leavenworth,  Kansas. 

Article  I.  The  Robert  Smith  Publishing  Co.,  in  consideration  of  the  agree- 
ments hereinafter  stated,  agrees  to  {insert  in  full  the  subject  matter  of  the  agreement). 

Article   II.     The   Robert   Smith   Publishing   Co.   further   agrees   to,   etc. 

Article  III.  John  A.  Smith,  in  consideration  of  the  above  agreements, 
agrees  to  {insert  in  full  the  subject  matter  of  the  agreement). 

Article  IV.  It  is  mutually  agreed  that  either  party  may  put  an  end  to  this 
agreement  by  one  month's  notice  thereof. 


MISCELLANEOUS.  413 

In  witness  whereof,  the  said  parties  have  hereunto  set  their  hands   and  seals, 
this   1st  day  of  January,   1908. 
Attest:  i  THE    ROBERT    SMITH    PUBLISHING    CO., 

John  Doe  -  Per   Robert    Smith,    President. 

Henry   Smith.  I  JOHN    A.    SMITH. 

FORMS  OF  A  WILL 

(o)  I,  John  A.  Smith,  of  Fort  Leavenworth,  State  of  Kansas,  being  of  sound 
and  disposing  mind  and  memory,  do  make  and  publish  this  my  last  will  and  testament, 
that  is  to  say: 

First.  I  will  and  direct  that  all  just  debts  that  my  exist  against  me  at  my 
decease  shall  be  settled. 

Second.  I  give  and  bequeth  to  my  beloved  wife,  Mary  Smith,  the  sum  of 
five  thousand  dollars,  same  being  in  lieu  of  all  her  dowery  rights  in  my  personal 
estate ;  also  all  my  household  furniture. 

Third.  To  my  son,  Andrew  J.  Smith,  I  give  and  bequeath  the  sum  of  one 
thousand   dollars. 

And  lastly,  all  the  rest,  residue  and  remainder  of  my  personal  estate  I  give 
and  bequeath  to  my  esteemed  friend.  Captain  Henry  R.  Jones,  his  heirs  and  assigns 
forever. 

I  hereby  appoint  Samuel  Sherman,  of  New  Orleans,  La.,  the  sole  executor 
of  this,  my  last  will  and  testament 

I  hereby  revoke  all  former  wills  by  me  made. 

In  witness  whereof,  I  have  hereunto  set  my  hand  and  oeal,  at  Fort  Leaven- 
worth, aforesaid,  this  first  day  of  January,  nineteen  hundred  and   flight. 

JOHN  A.   SMITH    (Seal). 

Signed  and  sealed  by  said  John  A.  ~ 
Smith,  who  at  the  same  time  pub- 
lished and  declared  the  same  as  and 
for  his  last  will  and  testament  in  the 
presence  of  us,  who,  in  his  presence, 
and  in  the  presence  of  each  other, 
and  at  his  request,  have  hereunto 
subscribed    our    names    as    witnesses. 

Robert   A.   Harris,   of   Fort   Leavenworth,    Kas. 
Jas.   B.  Robinson,  of  Kansas   City,  Mo. 
Arthur   Coles,   of  Leavenworth,   Kas. 

(&)  The  following  form,  to  be  zvritten  in  the  testator's  ozvn  handwriting,  is  the 
simplest  there  is  : — - 

Fort  Leavenworth,  Kans., 

December  25,    1908. 
This  is  my  last  will  and  testament,  revoking  all  previous  wills  made  by  me: 
First — I  give  and  bequeath  to,  etc. 
Second — I    hereby   direct,    etc. 

Third — I  hereby  appoint  my  brother,  John  R.  Smith,  executor  of  this,  my  last 
will  and  testament.  HENRY  J.    SMITH. 


414  CHAPTER  XXIII. 

FORMS  OF  DEPOSITIONS  AND  CERTIFICATES 
1      Damaged   Subsistence   Stores. 

Fort  Missoula,  1 

County  of  Missoula,  > 
State  of  Montana.      J 

Personally  appeared  before  me  the  undersigned  authority  for  administering 
oaths,  one  Robert  Clay,  Regimental  Commissary-Sergeant,  1st  Infantry,  who,  being 
duly  sworn,  deposes  and  says:  He  is  on  duty  as  commissary-sergeant  at  Fort  Mis- 
soula, Montana,  under  the  immediate  orders  of  Captain  Henry  Jones,  Commissary, 
1st  Infantry;  that  during  the  months  of  January  and  February,  1904,  certain  sub 
sistence  stores  were  received  in  original  packages  from  Captain  H.  J.  Evans.  C.  S4 
U.  S.  Army,  and  that  upon  opening  said  packages  from  Captain  H.  J.  Evans,  C.  S. 
to  be  in  a  damaged  condition  and  unfit  for  use  or  issue: 

Bacon,    issue,     100    lbs.,     @   18c $18.00 

Apricots,    7    cans,    @    24c  .  .  .  .  .  .  .         1.68 

Apples,    10    cans,    @  8c  .......  80 

$20.48 

Deponent  further  deposes  and  says  while  said  stores  were  in  possession  oi 
Captain  Henry  Jones,  Commissary,  1st  Infantry,  due  care  was  exercised  in  the  hand 
ling,  storing  and  preservation  of  them,  and  that  any  deterioration  they  may  have  un- 
dergone during  that  period  was  in  no  way  due  to  fault  or  neglect  on  the  part  of 
Captain  Jones. 

Further  deponent  saith  not. 

ROBERT    CLAY, 
Commissary    Sergeant,    1st    Infantry. 

Subscribed  and  sworn  to  before  me  this  First  day  of  February,   1906. 

JOHN    SMITH, 
Major,  1st  Infanrry, 
Summary   Court. 
2.      Deteriorated  Potatoes  and  Onions. 

Fort   Columbus,   N.   Y., 
April     1,     1904. 
I  certify  that  I  received  in  good  condition  from  Captain  H.  J.   Evans,  C.   S., 
U.    S.    A.,   the    following   named    stores: 
(a)     Potatoes: 

January     1,   1904  6,000  pounds 

January  25,   1904  5,000  pounds 

11,000  pounds 
(6)     Onions: 

January     1,  1904  1,000  pounds 

January  25,   1904  1,200  pounds 

2,200  pounds 

During  January  and  February,  1904,  these  potatoes  and  onions  were  sorte.l 
from  time  to  time  in  order  to  save  the  good  ones.  In  these  assortments  the  following 
quantities    were    found    unfit    for    sale    or    issue: 


/ 


MISCELLANEOUS.  415 

1,000    pounds    potatoes,     @     3c         .  .  .  .  .  .     $30.00 

200    pounds    onions,    @    3c        .  .  .  .  .  .  .         6. 00 


$36  00 

I  would  furthermore  certify  that  I  have  taken  proper  care  of  these  stores  and 
any  deterioration  they  may  have  undergone  while  in  my  possession  was  due  to  no 
fault  or   neglect  on   my   part. 

HENRY  JONES. 
Captain   and   Commissary,    1st   Infantry, 

Commissary 

3       Shortage  Upon  Receipt  of  Stores. 

Fort  Missoula,  1 

County  of  Missoula,  Y 
State  of  Montana.      J 

Personally  appeared  before  me  the  undersigned  authority  for  administering 
oaths,  one  Robert  Clay,  Regimental  Commissary-Sergeant,  1st  Infantry,  who,  being 
duly  sworn,  deposes  and  says:  He  is  on  duty  as  commissary-sergeant  at  Fort  Mis- 
soula, Montana,  under  the  immediate  orders  of  Captain  Henry  Jones,  Commissary, 
1st  Infantry;  that  on  January  1,  1906,  he  assisted  in  receiving,  examining  and  check- 
ing, amongst  other  stores  'received  from  Captain  H.  J.  Evans,  C.  S.,  U.  S.  Army, 
twenty  cases  of  Lemoine  sardines;  that  of  these  cases,  three  were  broken  and  thirty 
boxes  of  sardines  were  missing.      (30  boxes    @    20c    r=    $6.00.) 

Deponent  further  says  on  January  20,  1906,  he  assisted  in  receiving,  examining 
and  checking,  the  following  named  stores  invoiced  by  Captain  H.  J.  Evans,  C.  S.,  U. 
S.   Army: 

Flour,  109  sacks,  10,900  lbs.,   @  2%c       .          .          .          .          .     $272.50 
Sugar,    28    sacks,    2,800    lbs.,    @    4c 112  00 


$384.50 


and   that   the    following    discrepancies    exist   between    the    invoices    and    the    quantities 
actually  received: 

Flour,    1    sack,    100    lbs.,    @   2i^c $2.50 

Sugar,    1    sack,    100    lbs.,    @   4c  .  ,  .  .  .  .       4  00 


$6.50 


Further  deponent   saith   not. 


ROBERT   CLAY, 

Commissary    Sergeant,    1st    Infantry, 


Subscribed  and  sworn  to  before  me  this  First  day  of  February,   1906 

JOHN    SMITH, 

Major,    1st  Infantry, 
Summary    Court. 
4      Damaged  Typewriter. 

(See  Cir.  34,  W.   D.,   1899,  and  No.   13,    1897.) 

Fort    H.\rrison,    Mont., 
January   1,    1906. 


416  CHAPTER  XXIII. 

Regarding  Underwood  Typewriter,  No.  15461-1,  for  which  I  am  responsible 
and  for  which  Captain  R.  E.  Smith,  Quartermaster,  1st  Infantry,  is  accountable,  I 
hereby  certify  that  the  machine  was  received  at  Manila,  P,  I.,  about  February  ISth, 
1905,  since  which  date  it  has  been  in  use  at  regimental  headquarters  and  during  which 
time  all  care  possible  has  been  taken  of  it.  I  would  further  certify  that  it  has  not 
been  previously  repaired  at  the  expense  of  the  government;  that  the  letters  are  now 
badly  in  need  of  alignment  and  that  the  repairs  required  were  not  caused  through 
lack  of  proper  care  on  the  part  of  the  operator,  but  as  a  result  of  fair  wear  and  tear 
in   service. 

J.    B.  JONES, 
Captain    and    Adjutant,    1st    Infantry. 

ENLISTED  MEN. 

Per 

Month 

1.  Private — Infty.,  Cavy.,  Arty.,  Signal  Corps  (2nd  Class),  Musician,  Trumpeter     $15 

2.  Private,    Hospital    Corps    16 

3.  Ist-Class  Private — Engineers,    Ordnance,    Signal   Corps,    Hospital   Corps    ....        18 

4.  Corporal — Infty.,  Cavy.,  Arty.,  Wagoner,  Artificer,  Farrier,  Blacksmith,  Sad- 

dler,  Mechanic    (Field  Arty.)    21 

5.  Corporal — Engineers,   Ordnance,    Signal  Corps,   Hospital   Corps;     Chief   Me- 

chanic   (Coast  Arty.) ;    Private    (Band)    24 

6.  Sergeant — Infty.,   Cavy.,  Arty.,  Hospital  Corps;     Stable  Sergt. ;     Co.   Q.   M. 

Sergt.,  Infty.,  Cavy.,  Arty.,  Cook;    Corporal   (Band),  Fireman 30 

7.  2nd-Class    Electrician    Sergt.;    Sergt.,    Engineers,    Ordnance,    Signal    Corps, 

Band;  Co.  Q.  M.   Sergt.,  Engineers;  Color  Sergt.;  Drum  Major 36 

8.  Junior  Sergt. — Major;   Squadron  and  Battalion  Sergt.-Major;   Battalion  Q. 

M.  Sergt.,  Field  Arty.;  Master  Gunner;  Chief  Trumpeter;  Principal  Musi- 
cian             40 

9.  Senior   Sergt. — Major;    1st   Class   Electrician   Sergt.;    1st   Class   Sergt.,    Sig. 

Corps;  Post  Ordnance  Sergt.;  Post  Q.  M.  Sergt.;  Post  Commissary  Sergt.; 
Regtl.    Q.    M.    and   Commsy.    Sergts.    and    Regtl.    Sergt.-Major;    Battalion 

Sergt.-Major  and  Battalion  Q.  M.  Sergt.,  Engineers;  Firt  Sergt 45 

10.  1st  Class  Sergt.,  Hospital  Corps    SO 

1 1.  Engineer     65 

12.  Master  Electrician ;   Chief  Musician    75 

The  following  receive  additional  monthly  pay: 

1.  Horseshoer,  Casemate  Electrician,  Observer  (1st  Class),  Plotter,  $9;  Chief  Planter, 

Chief  Loader,  Observer  (2nd  Class),  Gun  Commander,  Gun  Pointer,  $7;  Mess 
Sergt.,  $6;  Expert  Rifleman,  $5;  Sharpshooter,  1st  Class  Gunner,  $3;  Marks- 
man, 2nd  Class  Gunner,  Certificate  of  Merit,  $2. 

2.  Privates,  musicians   and   trumpeters  who   re-enlist   within  three  months   after  expi- 

ration of  their  first  enlistment  are  given  a  bonus  of  three  months'  pay. 

3.  Enlisted  men  serving  outside  of  the  United  States,   except  in  Porto  Rico  and  the 

Hawiian  Islands,  receive  an  increase  of  20  per  cent  on  their  pay  proper. 

4.  Retired  enlisted  men  receive  three-fourths  of  their  pay  at  date  of   retirement  and 

also  $6.25  per  month  as  commutation  of  fuel  and  light  and  $9.50  as  commuta- 
tion of  clothing  and  rations. 


MISCELLANEOUS. 


417 


Pay 
Kst  Enlistment 


Additional  Pay  by  Enlistments 


2nd  and  3rd 


4th.  5th.  6th.  7th 


$75 

$4 

$4 

65 

4 

4 

50 

4 

4 

45 

4 

4 

40 

4 

4 

36 

4 

4 

30 

3 

3 

24 

3 

3 

21 

3 

3 

18 

3 

3 

16 

3 

1 

15 

3 

1 

Pensions.  An  enlisted  man  disabled  by  a  wound,  injury  or  disease  incurred  in 
the  line  of  duty,  is  entitled  to  a  pension  of  from  $6  to  $100  per  month,  depending  upon 
the  degree  of  disability.  (An  officer  of  the  Regular  Army  thus  disabled  is  retired  on 
three-fourths'  pay). 

The  widow  of  an  officer  or  an  enlisted  man  whose  death  resulted  from  a  cause 
incurred  in  line  of  duty,  is  entitled  to  a  pension  without  regard  to  her  financial 
status.  The  rate  of  pension  depends  upon  the  rank  of  the  deceased  at  the  time  the 
death  cause  was  incurred,  without  regard  to  subsequent  promotion,  and  ranges  from 
$12  per  month  in  the  case  of  the  widow  of  a  private  or  noncommissioned  officer,  to 
$30  per  month  in  the  case  of  the  widow  of  a  lieutenant-colonel  or  any  officer  of 
higher  rank,  with  $2  additional  for  each  legitimate  child  under  the  age  of  sixteen. 
A  widow  who   remarries  is  deprived  of  a  pensionable  status. 

The  legitimate  children  under  the  age  of  sixteen  of  an  officer  or  enlisted  man 
who  died  of  a  disability  incurred  in  line  of  duty,  and  who  left  no  widow,  or  whose 
widow  remarried  or  was  otherwise  deprived  of  a  pensionable  status,  are  entitled  to  a 
pension,  the  rate  of  pension  depending  upon   rank  when  death  cause  originated. 

The  mother  of  an  officer  or  enlisted  man  who  died  from  a  wound,  injury  or 
disease  incurred  in  line  of  duty,  and  who  left  no  widow  or  minor  child,  under  the 
age  of  sixteen  surviving,  is  entitled  to  a  pension  of  from  $12  to  $30  a  month,  provided 
such  mother  is  without  other  means  of  support  than  her  own  manual  labor  or  the  con- 
tributions of  others  not  legally  bound  to  support  Jier.  When  the  mother  of  such  an 
officer  or  enlisted  man  is  dead,  the  father  may  be  entitled  to  a  pension  under  the 
same  conditions. 

There  is  no  limitation  as  to  the  date  of  filingr  of  pension  claims  in  the  cases 
cited  above,  and  it  is  entirely  optional  as  to  whether  or  not  an  attorney  shall  be  em- 
ployed in.  connection  with  a  claim  for  a  pension.  A  person  wishing  to  file  a  pension 
claim  himself,  should  address.  "The  Commissioner  of  Pensions,  Washington.  D.  C." 


OF    THE 

UNIVERSITY 

OF 

LiFORNihc 


^ 


u- 


•I 


r/ 


.lill 


M 


;ia 


Ijil: 


vu-._r— ;-«* 


